Anima'dversions of vvarre; or, A militarie magazine of the truest rules, and ablest instructions, for the managing of warre Composed, of the most refined discipline, and choice experiments that these late Netherlandish, and Swedish warres have produced. With divers new inventions, both of fortifications and stratagems. As also sundry collections taken out of the most approved authors, ancient and moderne, either in Greeke. Latine. Italian. French. Spanish. Dutch, or English. In two bookes. By Robert Ward, Gentleman and commander.

THE MVTABILITY OF FLOVRISHING KINGDOMES. (Book 1)

CHAP I.

There is no Nation ever did, or ever shall possesse a perpetuall peace: It is good there∣fore in time of Peace, to provide for Warre.

THe Hieroglyphicke of happie Peace in this transitory World, may very well be exprest by the splendent pro∣gresse of the Sunne, which hath both his Summer and his Winter Solstice: The one ushering in the most plea∣sant Spring, The other pushing forwards the Crest falne Autumne. The one of them spreads the fayre greene Carpet on the Table of the Earth; the other (as if the Banquet were ended) with-draws, and takes away again: Thus fareth it betweene these two opposites, Peace, and Warre. Peace, like the Summer Solstice (where shee goes) makes all things looke bucksome, for shee her selfe (if you please to have her described) is a pure and unspotted Virgin, in whose forehead never appeared any one frowning wrinckle; shee is the Mother of learning, and the Nurse of Arts: A Daughter of as royall a discent as any;* 1.1 for she hath God for her Father, and she hath a Royall Mother also, even true and unfeigned Love; a vertue beyond comparison. Alacke, that this Royall Virgin, (whose presence makes all things prosper) is of no longer durance amongst men: but it is decreed, all things below are subject to mutability. The Winter Solstice must succeed the Summer, and Warre must follow Peace; the Table must not alwaies bee covered, a time of with-drawing will come at last. For proofe of which, lets take a survey of some of those Kingdomes which in former ages have most flourished in this World; and by their mutability, judge whe∣ther it bee possible for any Kingdome, how strong and setled so ever, to perpetuate Peace unto it selfe: And it will not bee amisse to begin at the golden head of that Image which Nebuchadnezzar saw in his dreame, Dan. 2. Prefiguring himselfe and the Kingdome hee ruled over, even the Kingdome of Assyria.

CHAP. II.

Of the Monarchie of the Assyrians, and the Warres thereof.

THis Kingdome of the Ayssrians, was without question the strongest and best setled Kingdome that ever was before, or ever followed after it, in succeeding Ages: And therefore prefigured by a head of Gold. It is marvellous what Historians reporte of this King∣dome; but because some in these times, doe doubt of the truth of their reports, I will point you onely to that which the sacred O∣racles of God avouch, which no man can doubt of. For the King himselfe, he was every way renowned, Rex Regum, a King of Kings, and that of the Lords owne establishing. For God had given him a Kingdome, power, strength, and glory. Dan. 2. 37. For the amplitude of the Kingdome, it was not bounded within lesser limits then the Confines of the then inhabited World, Dan. 2. 38. and wheresoever the Children of men dwell, the Beasts of the Field, and the Foules of the Heaven hath hee given into thy hands. If you please to compare it with that famous Monarchie of the Medes and Persians which succeeded it: You shall finde, that as the Persians were after it in time, so also in Power, and No∣blenesse, Dan. 2. 39. And after you shall arise another Kingdome inferiour to you. Here now is a Monarchie, one would thinke so strongly seated, as that a face of Warre should not dare to looke upon it: yet did it runne many hazzards, and endure many changes by dint of the sword, and that at severall times also. And first in the dayes of that lusty Virago, Semiramis. She not content to defend the limits of her Kingdome left her by the conquest of her deceased Husband, was the first that ever with sword in hand ventured into the Indies, quo praeter illam & Alexandrum mag∣num nemo itravit. And this happened in the dayes of Staurobates, who met her in the confines of his Kingdome: and though hee suffered losse in the first shocke, yet renuing his Forces, renewed also the Battell, fought with her hand to hand, woun∣ded her sore; and at last, forced her over the River Indus: where multitude of her Souldiers (the Bridge being broken) came to their ends.

But this wound was afterwards well healed up, and the Kingdome well setled again in a long lasting Peace, which endured the Reignes of above Thirty Kings; untill at last came Sardanapalus, who was Vir muliere corruptior. Into whose presence, when as Arbactus his Lieutenant in Media with much adoe was admitted; he found him spinning (more like a good houswife, then a Royall King) amongst a company of tender Ladies, himselfe in softnesse excelling them all: At which sight, the great Captaine disdaining, and stomacking that so many valiant men should bee subject to such an estiminate King; and that those who were used to handle swords and speares should obey him, whose hands were inured to nothing but a distaffe; hee comes a∣way with shame, and makes report to his fellowes of that ignominious sight. Ne∣gans se ei parere posse; qui sic faeminam malit esse quam virum: Forthwith a conspiracy is made, and Warre denounced against Sardanapalus: which when hee had notice of, hee does not like a man prepare to defend himselfe: but as Women which are afraid of death, Primo latebras 〈◊〉〈◊〉, first lookes about where hee may hide himselfe; but finding no remedy there, at last, with a few, and those disordered Troopes, and untrayned, hee comes to battell, and being with much ease overthrowne, hee with∣drawes himselfe into his Pallace, and there ••ires himselfe and all his Riches, Hoc solo imitatus virum, as some Historians sayes of him: And so the Kingdome was trans∣lated to Arbactus, or rather divided betweene him and the Lieutenant of Babylon Be∣lochus, who is as some thinke called Pull King of Assyria, in the sacred Scriptures, 2. Kings 15. 19. In whose Posteritie the Scepter continued for some few generations following, untill Senacherib his great Grand-child, who was betrayed and slaine by two of his owne Sonnes,* 1.2 to wit by Adramalech, and Sharezer: But Esarhaddon his Sonne, who governed the Kingdome in his Fathers absence, stept into the Chayre of Estate, yet could hee not possesse it without much trouble. For first these two Brethren that had slaine their Father, put themselves also in Armes against their Bro∣ther,

hoping by this meanes to share equally with him. This trouble amongst the brethren, occasioned Merodath, which the Scripture calls Merodach Baladan, Isa. 39. 1. Liuetenant of Babylon to rebell against Esarhaddon: and first drawing (partly by fayre means, partly by threats) the people about Babylon to side with him: forthwith hee defieth his Master; and finally, in the Twelfe yeare of his Reigne, ut∣terly overthrew him: and so joyned the Empire of the Assirians, unto the City of Babylon. In the Posteritie of this Merodach, did the Monarchie continue for three descents: To wit Nebuchadnezzar, Evill-merodach, and Belshazzar; in whose daies, Darius the Mede, called by Historians Chaxares sonne of Astyages, and Cyrus the Persian, Grandchilde to the aforesayd Astyages, subdued the Assirians, and translated the Monarchie to the Medes and Persians.

CHAP. III.

Of the Monarchie of the Medes and Persians, and the Warres thereof.

THis of the Medes and Persians, was a very strong Kingdome also, though inferiour to the former: Vnder whose Dominion, there were no lesse then 127. Provinces, whose confines reached from India, to Ethiopia. Yet was not this Kingdome for all the great∣nesse, without Warre and trouble. Cyrus himselfe raysing an Ar∣mie in Persia,* 1.3 assailed his Grandfather in Media, and overthrew his Army, under the conduct of his Generall Harpagus: but the King would not bee discouraged for the losse of one Battell, but Armes the second time, and leades them himselfe into the Field, where hee divides them into two Battells; Commanding the hindmost, that if they did perceive any of the formost Bands to recoyle, they should slay them like enemies: and declaring to the formost, that unlesse they did carry the victory, Non minus fortes etiam post terga inventuros, quam a frontibus viros: a stratagem that put such hardy courage into his formost Souldiers, as that with great resolution, they beate backe the Persians formost troops, which being perceived of the Women, their Mothers and Wives met them flying homewards, and earnestly intreated them to returne to battell: but they delaying, Sub∣lata veste (as Iustin sayes) obscana corporis ostendunt, rogantes in uteros matrem ve∣lint refugere: With which correction they were so ashamed, as that they returned into the Battell more furious then before: Et facta impessione, quos fugiebant fugere cumpellunt, and so Astyages was taken Prisoner, and his Crowne set upon his Grand∣childes head.

But for all this, Cyrus could not perpetuate his owne, and Kingdomes peace: for the Cities of the Medes rebelled against him: the Babylonians made Warre upon him, and to strengthen their party, drue into their League Crassus the Potent King of Lydia, Cujus opes et divitiae, insignes ea tempestate erant: so that if he had not beene a Souldier, his Kingdome had beene dissolved before it had beene very well setled. But through his prudence and valour, hee brake through all these difficulties, quieted the Rebellion, subdued the Babylonians, and overcame the Lydian their Auxiliarie, who hee used with such Lenity, as that thereby hee politickly avoided a most dan∣gerous Warre with the Greekes, the most entire friends of Crassus. For as Iustin sayes, Tantus Crassi amor apud omnes urbes erat: re passurus Cyrus grave bellum Gre∣ciae fuerit, si quid in Crassum Crudelius consuluisset: This Cyrus afterwards was slaine, and his whole Army roughted by Tomaris Queene of the Massagetes: So fickle a thing is Peace and Prosperity in this World, seeme it never so firmely to bee setled and grounded. After the decease of Cyrus (or rather before) for when Cyrus was gone against the Messagetes, Cambyces in his Fathers absence was declared King: But for his cruelty, Almighty God, cut him short by a grievous wound in his thigh, made by the falling of his owne sword out of the scabbard, as hee was mounting on Horsebacke: Hee was no sooner dead, but one of the Magi, by name Comaris, or as others say, Praxaspis, thinking to transferre the Scepter into his owne Line, sets up his owne Brother Oropastes, under the name of Smerdis, the deceased Kings Bro∣ther:

which hee himselfe by the Kings Commandement had formerly slaine: Erat enim oris et corporis liniamentis persimilis. But this cozenage was quickly found out by the policie of Othanes one of the Nobilitie; for this mocking wanted eares: which Smerdis the Kings Brother, and Heire apparent to the Crowne did not, had he beene alive upon this discovery. A conspiracy is made by Seven of the Nobilitie, and the Kingdome delivered from the slavery of the Imposture; hee and his Abettors being slaine. In whose stead, Darius Sonne of Histaspis surnamed Artaxerxes, was salu∣ted King, upon occasion of the neighing of his Horse: For so it was determined that those of the Nobility who had freed their Country from servitude: meeting in the Suburbs next morning on Horsebacke, hee whose Horse first neighed, should bee saluted King:* 1.4 and this they did to avoyd contention amongst them, which other∣wise were equall. This Darius as some thinke, was that great King Aha••uerus, who put away his Wife Vasti, by Herodotus called Attasha, Daughter to King Cyrus, and married Ester (or Aristona as Herodotus calleth her) kinswoman of Mordecai the 〈◊〉〈◊〉. This mighty Prince, whose strength and power is described largely in the booke of Hester, could not live without Warre and trouble: The Babylonians rebel∣led against him, and had hee not had a Zophirus to gaine his Master Babylon, lost his owne Nose and Fares:* 1.5 which occasioned the King on a time (having a Pomgranet in his hand) to say, Se non optare majorem Thesaurum, ullum quam ut tot haberet Zopy∣rus, quot grava sint illius pomi. This Darius sought to incorporate Macedonia, the next bordering Kingdome, with his owne Territories, and the rather, because hee heard that there were most rich veines of mettall: And for this purpose sent Messen∣gers to Amintus of Macedon, who required, Vt terram et aquam traderet Dario. A∣mintus fearing the Persian power, answered mildely, and invited the Ambassadours to a Banquet, during which, they behaved themselves laciviously towards the noble Ladies that were placed betweene them at the Table for their greater honour. Which thing moved both Amintus the old King, and Alexander his young Sonne to anger: Whereupon Amintus at his Sonnes intreaty, departeth as it were to take some rest: But young Alexander first for a while fained mirth, and afterwards craves leave for the Ladies absence, for some little time, promising their speedy returne. But being dismissed, hee commanded so many Noble young Men to put on the Ladies gar∣ments, and secretly to carry poynards underneath them, with this charge: that when the Persians began to toy, they with their weapons should stabbe them: which charge afterwards was performed to purpose, Et lasciviae ac potulantiae poenas legati justus dederunt.

After this the Iones by the perswasion of one Istiaeus fell from him, and with the helpe of the Athenians they burnt the City Sardis: But they being overcome in a Sea Battell, and the Sedition pacified with some difficulty; hee turneth about, and turns all his fury against the Athenians their assistants:* 1.6 being further urged hereunto by Hippias Sonne of Pisistratus the Tyrant, whom the Athenians had banished. Where∣upon, Darius sent against the Athenians a very great Army, under the leading of the sayd Hippias:* 1.7 Against them marcheth Miltiades the Athenian Generall, by whose prudent Conduct, and the Souldiers valour, they were routed in the Field of Ma∣rathon, and leaving behind them Two hundred thousand of there men, with great astonishment they fled to their Ships, where the proper valour of one Cynaegirus an Athenian Souldier appeared; for hee not wearied with innumerable slaughter in the Battell, layes hold with his right hand on one of the flying Ships, and would not let her goe, till both were dismembred from his valiant armes: and then also Veluti ra∣bida fera dentibus demicaverit. To withstand this great Army, Miltiades had onely 10000 well trained Athenians, and 1000 Plataecuses Auxiliaries: The difference be∣ing so great, it was needfull that one should exceed in skill and valour, as much as the other did in number: and truely it is marvellous what a skilfull leader may doe, with so many valerous and well trayned Souldiers, such as these were; for they were all like Cynaegirus. Iustin sayes of them, In eo praelio tanta virtus singularium fuit, ut cujus laus prima esset difficile judicium videretur. Such valour as this, must needs astonish the Cravant Persians. But some reporte that in the Athenian Front, there were also terrible noyses heard, and terrible sights seene, which the Athenians called Species paves, which affrighted the Persians so mightily, as that presently they fled:

and hence it is, that wee say when one is suddenly affrighted, that hee is strucke with a Panick terrour.

After this Darius died, and at such time as hee was preparing more forces to re∣new the Warres in Greece: After him succeeded his Sonne Xerxes, who was scarce warme in his Royall estate, ere hee was sollicited by Mardonius his great Captaine and Counsellour, to follow the Grecian Warre, for which his Father had made so great preparation: and the young King desirous of glory, yeelds to the motion, pre∣pares his Army, which consisted 1000000 men; whereof 700000 were Persians, the rest Auxiliaries, an Army great enough to have overcome the World, had they but had a Captaine but Hui•• tanto agmins dux defuit, sayes Iustin: and hee gives a good reason for it in my conceipt: Ipse enim primus in••uga, postremus in praelio semper visus est, in periculis ti••••dus fit ubi metus abesset instatus, a very good discription of a Coward; he flies in the Front, and ••ights in the Reare, in danger, fearefull, but out of it, too insolent and proud: such was this great Commander, and his successe also was there after; for within lesse then two yeares, hee had no lesse then foure shame∣full overthrowes, two by Water, and two by Land. The first fight by Water, was neere Armissium in Thessal••. And about the same time was the second Battell fought also at Land, in the narrow place which for the hot Springs there are called Ther mo∣p••lae: Here had Leonides King of Sparta setled himselfe with 300 Spartans, 400 Thebans, and about 3000 other Grecian Souldiers, to checke the proceedings of this great Army. Xerxes scorning their number; commands those onely whose kindred were slaine at the Battell of Marrahon in his Fathers dayes, to assault the straight passage which Leonides kept upon the hill, qui dum ulcissi suos quaerūt, principium ••ladis fu••re. But other troopes being appointed to second these; a great slaughter is made for three dayes space. Vpon the fourth day, when it was discovered to Leo∣••••d••s that 20000 of the enemies had gotten the top of the hill, then hee exhorted his associates to reserve themselves for the further service of their Countrey: and hee with his Lacedemons, would try the fortune of that place: Whereupon all departed save his owne 300 Spartans, 400 Thebans, and a few of the Thespiences, a maniple in respect of so great a multitude as did oppose them. Yet were they resolved to dye with their King upon the place, or to eternise their names with an incomparable victory. To these the King adresseth his speech on this wise: Noble Countrey-men, our numbers are so unequall, that however wee fight, yet must wee fall, this I sup∣pose is the resolution of you all: otherwise you would not have stayed the hazzard of a Battell, where is such disparrity; see therefore that you shew not more valour in your staying for the Battell, then in your fighting in it: for the ordering of which, I am resolved not to expect, till wee bee inclosed by our enemies: but so soone as the night approacheth, wee will fall resolutely within the bowels of their Campe▪ which rests without feare of our small numbers; for never can undaunted Souldiers dye more bravely, then in the Tents of their daring Foes.

Which speech they tooke with great alacrity and cheerfulnesse, and in signe there∣of, immediately addressed themselves to their Armes, and then did Sixe or Seven Hundred men at most, breake into the Campe of 500000 of their enemies: and having once got entrance, forthwith beate towards the Pavillion of King Xerxes: Aut cum illo, aut si oppressi essent in ipsius potissimum sede morituri. A tumult is raised in the Campe upon their entrance: and the Spartans missing of the King at his Tent, ranne like lightning through every corner, beating and throwing downe every thing that stood in their way, as if they knew they fought not for the victory, but to revenge their owne deaths: The Battell lasted from the begining of the night, un∣till the great part of the next day were spent, and at last, Non victi, sed vincendo fati∣gati inter ingentes stratorum hostium catervas occiderunt.

After their fall who were to keepe the Straights, a faire passage was opened for the Army into Greece: but Themistocles with 378 Sayle of the Grecian Navie being at Sea; Xerxes thought it was meet, first to try of what force they were, before hee went any farther: wherefore hee addressed himselfe to his Sea forces. How great they were I cannot certainely say, but take the number as Iustin gives them, Naves quoque decies centum millia numero habuisse dicitur:* 1.8 Here are now as great oddes at Sea, as before at Land: wherefore it behoved Themistocles the Athenian Admirall,

to bee both politicke and valourous, and truely hee was wanting to his Countrey-men in neither: For so soone as hee perceived the Persians bent for a Sea-fight; he does within him lay to worke their defeat: which hee does first, by getting advan∣tage of the place where they were to fight, which was in the Straites neere the I∣land Salamis, least they should bee encompassed with the multitude of their enemies. Having gained the advantage of the place, next hee sought to weaken them, in that thing wherein they had most advantage of him, which was in number. To this pur∣pose hee solicited the Ionians, who were now in ayde of Xerxes, to come over to his party, and those men were fit indeed to bee wrought upon. For when as the Per∣sian came against them in a former Warre, the Athenians had sided with them against this Kings Father; which thing alone wrought this displeasure against the Atheni∣ans, and the rest of the Grecians: wherefore Themistocles wrote to them in these words. What fury possesseth you (oh ye Ionians) and what an odious crime doe ye commit, in waging Battell against them, that have in times past, beene both your friends and founders, and of late also the revenger of your wrongs? and was it in∣deed for this purpose that wee built your Walls that they might preserve you, who strive to ruine and destroy ours? what cause I pray you had there been, for Darius first, and now for Xerxes, to make Warre on us, but onely this; wee would not forsake you Rebells, when hee desired to chastise you? but tis no matter, doe you but onely this, come from them to us; or if that be too full of danger, then when the Battell is be∣gun, doe but recoyle, doe but slacken your Oares, and ye may safely depart away.

But while these things were a working at Sea, his Forces at Land sacked Plateae, and Thespiae, two famous Cities of Boeotia, and Athens on the Sea-coast, but all of them forsaken by their Inhabitants: and behold his spleene, quoniam ferro non pote∣rat in homines, in aedificia igne grassatur: yea, which was more (as if hee had Warred not onely with the Greekes, but their gods also) Hee destroyed the Temple of Apol∣lo at Delphos so famous through the World. These things startled the Princes of those Cities which were joyned with the Athenians, they knew not how soone their Cities might runne the same hazzard: wherefore they began to consult of their departure, for the defence of their owne Territories. Which thing so soone as The∣mistocles perceived, least their forces should bee diminished by the departure of their Associates: he gives Xerxes to understand, by a faithfull servant of his owne; that now at this instant hee might easily intercept all the force and flower of Greece, con∣tracted into one place, who if they were severed (as presently they were like to do) it would bee to his greater labour and cost to hunt after them in severall places: and by this deceit, hee necessitated the King to give the signall of Battell: and the Gre∣cians busied with the approaches of the King, with their joynt forces entertayned the Skirmish. While the Battell remained somewhat doubtfull, the Ionians accor∣ding to the advice of Themistocles, withdrew themselves; and their flight dashed the leaden courages of the Persians, so that presently they turned their backs and fled. Xerxes being at his wits end at this overthrow, Mardonius his great Captaine and Counsellour, adviseth him in his owne Person to hasten home, least the fame of this unlucky battell move sedition there: and tells him, that if he will leave but 300000 of his choyce men, with them hee will either tame Greece to his Masters glory, or yeeld to the Adversary without his ignominie. This advice did Xerxes like well enough, wherefore hee delivered 300000 of his Souldiers to Mardonius, and with the rest, hee prepared to goe backe into his Kingdome: Which the Grecians percei∣ving, resolved to breake the bridge that hee had built at Abydo••; that so his passage being cut off, hee might perish with his Army: or at least being driven to despaire, might sue for peace.

But here againe did the wisedome of Themistocles appeare, for fearing that the e∣nemy when hee was cooped up, and so necessitated to fight, would turne his cow∣ardize into valour: adviseth the Greekes, that they had enemies too many in the Countrey, and it was not convenient to increase their number by stopping those that would bee gone: but seeing hee could not prevaile with his advise, hee sent his ser∣vant a second time to Xerxes to acquaint him with the resolution of the Greekes; which when Xerxes knew, in a shamefull afright, with a few of his servants onely, hee fled in all haste to Abydos; commanding his Captaine speedily to March after

him with their Troopes: but comming to Hellesponte, and finding the Bridge bro∣ken with the Tempests of the fore-passed Winter. Hee ferried over alone in a poore Fi••herboate, an admirable spectacle to behold: he whose followers the earth groa∣ned to beare but a yeare agoe, is glad to flye now without one to attend him. Cujus introitus in Greciam quam terribilis, tam turpis ac foedus discessus fuit.

After that dishonourable flight of Xerxes, Mardonius his Generall followed the warfare at land: Olinthus was the first Towne hee sate downe before, and it hee tooke by Assault. After this hee laboured to reconcile the Athenians to the King his Master, promising them restitution for the losse of their City which was burned: but after hee perceived they would not part with their Liberty and freedome at any rate, hee set fire to those buildings they had begun to reedifie, and so Marched into Boeotia, where the maine Army of the Greeks was inquartered, consisting of a 100000 men; there they came to blowes neere the City Plataeae, which was not farre from Thebes: Sed fortuna Regis cum duce mutata non est, For Mardonius was there utterly overthrowne, himselfe slaine by a common Souldier, his Tents, stuffed with the Kings Treasure, seized on; and finally Greece freed from the Persian Warre. The Athenians would not loose the benefit of this victory, but with their Sea forces sayled up the Hellesponte, and by Assault tooke the Towne of Sestos from the Persians, and sacked it. After this they turned home, built and fortified their City; and joyning them with other Cities of Greece, under the conduct of Pausanius and Aristides they tooke Cypria and Bizantium frym the Persian.

Thus you see this great Monarch, who had so many Millions of men under his do∣minions, could not live in Peace; yea, and for want of good order in his Army suf∣fered many shamefull overthrows: which together with some other iniquities of his owne, brought him in contempt with his owne Subjects: who before was a terror to other Nations, and by and by after, hee was slaine by his Lieutenant Artabanus. His Successor was Artaxerxes,* 1.9 who was also called Longimanus: quia dextra longior fuit quam sinistra. There is not any mention in History, of any great trouble that happened in this Kings Reigne, after that hee had put to death Artabanus and his sonnes, who were the murtherers of his Predecessor Xerxes: and had layd their plots also against him, had it not beene in a fit time discovered by one Baccabassus, a man well content with the present government. This Prince having Reigned peaceably 37. yeares, expired: and left his Scepter to Darius Nothus his Sisters Hus∣band: who in like manner governed the Kingdome peaceably 19. yeares, and then yeelded it up to his eldest Sonne Artaxerxes Mnemon, whose Reigne was somwhat troublesome, with the great Spirit of his younger Brother Cyrus, to whom his Fa∣ther had by will assigned the government of Lidia and Ionia, (where hee was in his Fathers dayes Lieutenant) but without the title of King. But this gave no content to the high spirit of Cyrus, who aymed at farre greater matters: wherefore he be∣gan first privately to make preparation against the King his Brother, which being disclosed to the King;* 1.10 hee sent for Cyrus, who dissembled the matter, and pleaded not guilty: yet for all that, the King bound him in golden fetters, deprived him of liberty: and had done so by his life also in matter prohibuisset: But afterwards ob∣taining liberty, hee was so much inraged against his Brother by this disgrace, as that hee began openly to threaten him with Warre. And for that purpose hee gathered a great Army out of Asia the lesse, and 10000 Auxiliaries also out of Greece, with which hee marched against his Royall Brother, beyond the River Euphrates. Ar∣taxerxes was not unmindfull of these affaires, but like a wise and a valiant man, prepared forces to bid his Brother battell: When they came to blowes, Cyrus woun∣ded his Brother, and forced part of his Army to give ground: but being of a hot and haughty spirit, and with weake Attendants, beating to farre within his Brothers Troopes; at last hee was slaine by his Brothers Guard. Vpon the newes of his death, the whole Army tooke the Route, save onely the 10000 Greekes, who in de∣spight of Artaxerxes, departed whole away, and came safe into their owne Countrey. After the death of Cyrus, the faire Lady Alpasia was taken in his Tents: on whom Artaxerxes (when hee beheld her) set his affections: and this Lady was the cause of a new insurrection; for being equally beloved of the Father and the Sonne: the Sonne petitioned to his Father for her, and had her granted: But the Father after∣wards

condoling his owne losse, tooke her away againe: Whereupon the Sonne conspired with one Terebathus, that they two with some armed Troopes, should on a certaine day, breake into the Kings Closet and slay him; but this plot being dis∣covered, the King escaped the Treason: Terebathus and his Troopes, were slaine by the Kings Guard; and Darius the Kings Sonne apprehended as a Traitour, and ad∣judged to death by the Councell of Princes, before whom his Father would have him stand for his tryall: after his death, also the King himself languished and died, and appointed for his successor, Othus the youngest of those three Sonnes that hee had by his lawfull Queene. Othus Reigned about Twenty Sixe yeares, more like a Tyrant then a King: for hee filled his Royall Pallace with the bloud of Princes, his owne kindred: Nulla non sanguinis, non sexus, non aetatis misericordia perm tus: and for his cruelty was slaine afterwards by the Prince Bagoas, who thought to have seated himselfe in the Royall Chayre: but having not power enough to effect that, he Pro∣claimes Arsames Sonne of Othus King, who hee also slew afterwards: Metuens fili∣um propter necem paternam: And here was an end of all the Stocke of Cyrus, and the end of this Monarchy followed about Sixe yeares after. For when Arsames was slaine, Bagoas the murtherer repaired to Codomamius, who for his vertue and va∣lour against the enemy, was first made Ruler of Armenia, and now King of Persia: After the obtaining of which, he changed his Name; and is commonly knowne by the name of Darius Vltimus,* 1.11 a Prince nothing inferiour to any of his Predecessors: And yet in this King happened, the subversion of this mighty Kingdome. Against him first of all Philip King of Macedon (being elected Generall of the Grecians) tooke Arms,* 1.12 and sent his Forces into Asia, under the conduct of Farmenio, Amynters, and Attalus: against them Darius tooke Armes, and sent his Army; over which hee placed Memnon of Rhodes an expert Souldier as Generall. But while these Wars were managed abroad by their substitutes, Philip himselfe was slaine at home by one Pausanias a Noble Macedonian, upon this occasion: Pausanias was abused in his ten∣der age through the lust of Attalus; which the young Man taking in ill part, com∣plained to Philip, and craved justice against the offender, but was put off in derision; and the Malefactor honoured with a Generalls place in the Warres. Whereupon Pausanius turnes his anger against Philip, and as Iustin sayes, Vltionem quam adver∣sario non poterat, ab iniquo judice exegit.

But the Persian Warre was not given over upon the Kings death; for Alexander the great,* 1.13 his Sonne and Heire, after that hee had quieted the Cities of Greece, which the Persians politickly had stirred up to rebell against him, by that meanes hoping to divert the Warre out of Asia: Having collected and shipped his Army, goes in his owne Person into Asia, and divides his Patrimony in Europe amongst his friends, saying Sibi Asiam sufficere.

His Army consisting of 32000 foot, and 4500 Horse: hee wafted over in 182 Ships: An admirable thing that hee durst attempt the conquest of the greatest Monarchy of the World with so small a number;* 1.14 but marke who they were, not yong striplings, prim•• flore aetatis: but veterares pleros{que}, old beaten Souldiers for the most part, such as had borne Armes under his Father and Vncles: they were through their long experience, Non solum millites, sed magistri militiae: not onely Warriours, but masters of the Warre: there was never a Captaine which was lesse then Sixty yeares of age: Vt si principia castrorum cerneres, Senatum se alicujus priscae reipublicae vider diceres: and they all resembled the King for courage, for they minded nothing but victory, and after that, the enjoying the riches of the Orient. Against these Darius led his Army into the field, consisting of 600000 men; in whose valour and fortitude, hee had such confidence, as that hee neglected to take any advantage which was by policy to bee acquired: Affirmans suis occulta consilia victoriae furtivae non convenire; and upon this conceipt hee refused to prevent his enemies landing, but received them into the very heart of his Kingdome: Gloriosius ratus repellere Bellum quam non admittere: which thing, though it shewed a magnanimous and great spirit, yet it argues weakenesse of understanding: for truely so victory may bee gained, it stickes not whether it bee obtained by valour,* 1.15 or policie: the safest therfore for him, had beene to have prevented their landing if possibly hee could; for enemies are more easily repelled from the Coasts, then expelled after they have got footing. But

this out of a Millitary bravery hee neglected, and it cost him no lesse then the losse of the battell, and afterwards of his life and Kingdome.

The first battell betweene the two Kings was in the field of Adrastia,* 1.16 where the Persians were vanquished: Non minus arte Alexandri, quam virtute Macedonium: After this, Alexander fought another Battell with Rhaesaces and Spithradates, two of Darius his Captaines at the River Granicus: quos jam non tam armis quam terrore nominis sui vicit: and in this encounter, both the Persian Chiefetaynes were slaine: Rhaesaces by Alexanders owne hand, and Spithradates by the hand of Clytus. After their overthrow, (having yet no more to doe in the Field) hee fell to taking in of Cities, Sardis, Miletus, Helicarnassus, and all such places as bordered upon them, were taken in: and so comming through Pamphilia, hee tamed the Inhabitants of of Pisidia and Phrigia. At last hee tooke the City of Gordis, which above all other hee desired to take, not for the spoyle, but because hee had heard, that there in the Tem∣ple of Iupiter was kept the consecrated yoke of Gordians Waine, whose bindings and knots whosoever could unloose, Eum tota Asia Regnaturum, antiqua oracula ceci∣visse: these knots when hee could not unloose them with his fingers, hee cut them in peeces with his sword: and truely there was no knot so hard, but with his sword hee could undoe it to make way for his conquest of Asia. While hee was in this City, hee received tydings of Darius his approach: wherefore with great speed hee passed over the mount Taurus, and came to Tarsus; with which extraordinary March, his bodie being over heat, hee cast himselfe into the River Cydnus, whose vertues being extremly cold, cast him into a suddaine and almost irrecoverable dis∣ease: but having with much adoe recovered health, hee marched forwards to meete his enemy, who was comming against him with a very great Army. When they were met,* 1.17 Alexander riding about his Troopes, encouraged the Illirians and Thraci∣ans with the shew of riches, the Grecians hee inflamed with the memory of former Battells, and the antient hatred betweene them and the Persians: Hee likewise tells his Macedonians of there conquest of Europe and Asia now so much desired; boasting that they had not their matches in the World, and if now only they would shew them selves men, this Battell should bee the end of their toyle and labour, and the very pride of their glory and honour. Neither was Darius all this while idle, but like a good Captaine, rid about his Troopes ordering and exhorting them to bee mindfull of the antient glory of the Persians, and of the honour of their Empire which they had received of the immortall gods: Then joyning Battell with great courage on both sides, for a while what the successe would bee was doubtfull: but both the Kings were wounded, and Darius after his hurt fled; and then were the Persians slaughtered on all sides untill they fled as their King did before. After this Battell, there were found in the Persian Tents, much gold and other riches; and together with many other noble prisoners there were taken, the Mother, Wife, and two Daughters of Darius. This victory did well-neere settle the Crowne upon Alexanders head; for after this hee tooke Babylon, and the royall City of Susa, where hee got inestima∣ble riches: and being at a feast one day under the guilded roofe of the Royall Pallace, hee sayd; Then have I obtained the fruite of my labour, when I can feast so magni∣ficently within the Pallace of proud King Xerxes. After this he besiedged the City of Tyre, and within the Moneth tooke it: And from thence passed forwards a∣gainst the Iewes,* 1.18 with whom hee was displeased, for that they refused to assist him in the siedge of Tyre:* 1.19 but the Iewes now fearing the Kings displeasure; Iaddus the High Priest that hee might pacifie the Kings minde, met him upon the way clad in his Priests vestures, and accompanied with a great number of Priests and Elders, de∣siring the Kings favour: There did Alexander alight from his Horse, and in a reve∣rent manner salutes the High Priest, promising Peace: at which sight his Captaines wondring, asked why hee received the Priests so honourably: To whom he answe∣red, that in Macedonia before the beginning of the Warres, hee had seene one habited in the like vestures, calling him into Asia, and commanding him to make Warre with the Persians, reaching forth his right hand towards him, as if hee would be his guide: and seeing the Priest in that similitude, hee thought God had some speciall regard of this People, and that hee himselfe was assisted by that God whom they served: and therefore hee resolved to bee mercifull unto them and to shew them favour,

From hence did Alexander March into Aegypt, which hee tooke without resistance: here hee visited the Temple of Iupiter Hammon,* 1.20 whereby the Priest (whom before for that purpose hee had corrupted) hee was styled Hamonius filius: from hence hee returned into Syria, where he received letters from Darius concerning the re∣demption of his Captives; for whom hee promised to pay a great summe of money: Sed Alexander in pretium captivarum regnum, omne non pecuniam petit: Afterward Darius sends a second Embassage, proffering him his Daughter in marriage, and with her a portion of his Kingdome for a Dowry: To this Alexander answered, that as yet hee had proffered him nothing but that which was his owne by right of conquest; but if hee were desirous of Peace, hee must come and render himselfe and Kingdome to the mercy of the Conquerour. Darius now perceiving that all hope of Peace was taken away; begins to leavie his third Army; resolving to try if with his sword in hand hee might obtaine that, which by Embassadours and treaties hee could not: With this new Army, consisting of 500000 Horse and Foot: hee hunts after his Adversary, but in his March hee heareth of the death of his Wife in Childe-bed, and how Alexander in whose custody she was, had exceedingly bemoaned her losse, and given her honourable buriall, agreeable to her estate and condition: Id{que} eum non a∣moris, sed humanitatis is causa fecisse: which when Darius understood, hee ingeniously confessed that now hee was truely conquered,* 1.21 when after so many bloudy Battells, his enemy now at last would overcome him with courtesie, but herein hee sayd was his comfort, St vincers nequeat quod a tali potissimum vinceretur. After this Darius writes the third letter to Alexander, rendring him many thankes for his courtesie to those that were his Captives, offering him also his other Daughter in marriage, and the greater part of his Kingdome, even to the banckes of Euphrates for her Dowrie, and 30000 Tallents, for the redemption of the Captives. To this Alexander answe∣red, that it was a thing too too vaine to receive thankes from an enemy; neither had hee himselfe done any thing to flatter his Adversary; that which hee had done, was out of the greatnesse of his minde: which, as it had taught him to contend against the force of his foes, so not to triumph over their calamities: neither would he have Darius to thinke him so simple, as to suffer the victory to bee taken from him, with hope of a marriage; No, no, hee would have Darius know, that there was no way so safe as to come yield to his mercy: which if hee did, hee would promise in the word of a Prince, freely to bestow upon Darius all those things that now hee proffe∣red unto him, upon this condition, Si secundus fili, non par habere velit: For as the World could not bee governed by two Sunnes, so neither by two Kings with any safety: therefore either that day Darius must prepare himselfe to yeild, or the next day bring his Army into the Plaines, where hee should finde the like entertainment that hee had before.

The next day both of them tooke the Field neere unto Arbela, and were ranged in view one of the other: The Kings on both sides rid about their Troopes, exhor∣ting them to demeane themselves like Souldiers in the Battell. Darius assured his Per∣sians, that if a strict accompt of his own and Adversaries number were taken, he was ten for one: On the contrary Alexander admonished the Macedonians, that they should not be moved neither with the enemies multitude, nor with their Gyantlike bodies, no, nor with the glittering of their Armour; onely they should doe well to remem∣ber that twice before they had encountered them, and doubtlesse in this third Battell they should not finde in them greater courages then at first: for having already twice put them to flight, and that with a great slaughter, the sorrowfull remembrance thereof hee knew would much daunt them, who had no overplus of courage before: Furthermore, hee assured them, that though Darius had the most men, yet had hee the greater forces: wherefore there was nothing remained, but that they should scorne those Bands that glittered in gold and silver, among whom they should finde plus praedae quam periculi, more treasure then danger, since that victory was usually carried rather by the sharpnesse of the sword, then the garnishing of the Armour.

After these encouraged on both sides, the onset was given, the Macedonians rush∣••p in upon the enemies weapons with much contempt, because so often before they had beene conquered: On the other side, the Persians because they had been so often soyled, wished rather to die, then to lose the day: In fine, seldome was there more

bloud spilt in any Battell, both sides resolving to doe their utmost for gaining the vi∣ctory: * 1.22 But at last the Persians were overcome with the slaughter of Ninety thousand of their men. Darius, when he saw the Battell lost, would needs dye upon the place; but yet was compelled by those that were about him, by flight to provide for his owne safety: and some there were that advised him to breake the Bridge over the River Cydnus, that so his flight might be secured from the enemies chase: but Darius refused that counsell, resolving not to provide for his owne safety; by objecting so many thousands of his men as were yet ungotten over the River, to the fury of his Adversary: Debere & aliis fugae vtam patere, quae patuerit sibi. This Battell fini∣shed the conquest of Persia, and set the Diadem on Alexanders head: for now the Cities yeilded on all sides, the Persians patiently submitted their neckes under the yoake of the Macedonian servitude; themselves having ruled the space of 200 yeares and upwards.

Darius in his flight was slaine by Bessus and Nabaczanes, two of his neare kind∣red, whose body was found by Polystratus, one of Alexanders Souldiers, lying in a Chariot after a squailed manner, goared with many wounds, and weltring in that Royall bloud that had issued out thereof: Which woefull spectacle after that Alex∣ander beheld, he tooke it heavily; first mourning and weeping for the Royall Corps, then covering it with his owne cloake; and lastly, causing it to be buried in a most solemne and Princely manner: neither did he ever cease, till he had attached Bessus the murtherer, and put him to a shamefull and ignominious death. This was the end of this mighty Prince, and also of this mighty Empire, which was now brought out of Asia into Europe, from Persia into Macedonia; where the third Monarchie was setled on Alexander and his Successors.

CHAP. IIII.

Of the Macedonian Monarchie, and the Warres thereof.

AS the Persian Monarchie was infested with Warre, so was the Ma∣cedonian: for no sooner was Alexander estated in the government, but presently hee received intelligence of the overthrow of Alex∣ander King of Epirus his kinseman, and Ally, in Italy; as also the destruction of Zopirion his Perfect in Pontus, together with 30000 men in Scythia: and lastly, of the dangerous Warre that was mo∣ved against him in Greece: For after hee had over-intangled him∣selfe in the Asiatique Warre; almost all the Grecian Cities betooke themselves to Armes, for the recovery of their liberty, moved hereunto by the authority of Spar∣tanes, who neither regarded Philip, nor Alexander his Sonne. The Captaine of this Warre, was Agis King of Lacedamonia. But Antipater calling his forces together in good time, quieted this commotion, yet not without slaughter on both sides: King Agis when hee saw his owne troopes turne their backes, forthwith dismissed his Guard;* 1.23 yet hee himselfe by his proper valour (Vt Alexandro si non faelicitate par; virtute non inferior videretur) made great havocke amongst his enemies: and at last though hee were overcome by their multitudes, yet in glory hee overcame them all. After this, some time was spent in the Indian expidition, and being arived in the confines,* 1.24 Taxiles was the first that hee assaulted; but hee like a wise Prince giving way to Alexanders good fortunes, of his owne accord came into his presence, telling him there needed bee no Warre betweene them two: for as for himself he had rather contend with benefits, then weapons. Et si sit potentior se daturum esse munera Alex∣andro, si inferior se gratum fore; si beneficia ab ipso acceperit. Alexander thought it not to stand with reason, to exercise hostility against him, who thus fairely yeilded himselfe: wherefore hee dismissed him in peace, after the exchange of some Prince∣ly gifts.

Next hee marched against Porus,* 1.25 a Prince very famous both for courage and strength, who resolved to make resistance: before the battell Porus charged his men to assaile the Macedonians, and hee himselfe would graple with their King: neither

did Alexander refuse the combate:* 1.26 but in the first encounter (his Horse being woun∣ded) hee fell head-long on the ground, but was rescued by his Guard; who both wounded, and tooke King Porus prisoner: of whom Alexander demanded what hee would have done with him,* 1.27 if hee himselfe had got the victory: to which Porus answered, Pro utrius{que} regalis fastigij dignitate se fuisse facturum. With the vertue and personall valour of this man, Alexander was so well pleased; as that hee sent him safely into his owne Territories. Tantum pro Rege nominari jussit Satrapam. After these victories, Alexander grew very luxurious, insolent, and cruell: hee slew old Parmenio,* 1.28 and his Sonne Philatas, and that incomparable Clytus, three of his prime Commanders: yea, and Colisthenes that Philospher (kinsman of his Master Aristotle) whom hee had of purpose trained along with him for the writing of his Acts. All these and many more hee slew; either for defending of the reputation of his Royall Father King Philip: or else for refusing to adore and worship him as a god, at his drunken banquers; so that now it is hard to say, Num armatus in acie vel in convi∣vio sedens teribilior. These things made many mutinies in the Campe, and provoked the old Souldiers so much, as that they reproached him to his very head. Jubentes eum solum cum patre suo Hammone finere bella: Yet this sedition was afterwards well quieted.

Yet Natheles Antipater,* 1.29 who was now sent for out of Macedonia with a supply of fresh Souldiers, seeing so many of his deare friends put to death; began to con∣jecture, that hee was called for rather to partake with his friends in their punishment, then with Alexander in the Warfare. Wherefore hee most wickedly plotted with his Sonnes Cassander, Philip, and Iolas (attendants on the Kings Person) about his poysoning: which was afterwards performed at the house of one Thessalus, who had invited the King to a Banquet, they all giving it out, that hee died of a feaver, caused through excessive drinking. His sicknesse lasted the space of eleven dayes: du∣ring which time, their happened a tumult amongst the Souldiers, who suspected the King was poysoned: this hee himselfe pacified, by shewing himselfe unto them; and permitting such as hee saw weeping, graciously to kisse his hand; yea when all about him fell a weeping, yet was hee without any signe of griefe. Adeo sicut in ho∣stem; ita & in mortem invictus animus fuit. When as those about him perceived no hope of his recovery,* 1.30 they desired to know whom hee would assigne for his Heire, and successor in the Empire, hee answered the most worthy. Such was the great∣nesse of his minde, that passing by his owne Sonne Hercules, his brother Arideus, and his Wife Roxana great with childe, hee declares the most worthie Person to bee his Heire; quasi nefas esset viro forti alium, quam virum fortem succedere. And this had like to have set all together by the eares, every one of the great Captaines esteeming himselfe most worthie; begun privately to procure to themselves the Souldiers favour. But this growing dissention, also was pacified by Alexander him∣selfe: for upon the sixth day of his sicknesse when his speech failed him, hee tooke his Ring from his finger,* 1.31 and delivered it to Perdiccas: by which signe it appeared that hee appointed him for his Successor. After the death of Alexander, some time was spent in setling the affaires of Estate; for this purpose they met in the Royall Pallace at Babylon, and being set in Councell they were divided into three severall opinions: First, Perdiccas was of opinion, that they should expect till Roxana (the late Wife of Alexander) who was great with childe. should bee delivered; and if shee brought forth a Man-childe, hee should bee declared Successour to his Father.

But Meliager was of another minde; for he thought it not safe to suffer their cer∣taine consultations, to depend upon an uncertaine childe-birth: neither is it fit (saith hee) that wee should expect till a King bee borne, when as wee may have one that is borne already: and if a Child will please you, there is Hercules the Sonne of A∣lexander begotten of Arsine: if a young man will like you better, there is Arideus Brother and companion of Alexander in the Campe, and one that is beloved of all; not onely for his owne sake, but for his Father King Philips. And furthermore for Roxana; hee sayd shee was descended of the Persian bloud: and was it right, that they should appoint a King to rule over the Macedonians: which should spring from them, whose Kingdome they had now conquered? Ptolemy differed in opinion

from both the former; and first hee utterly rejected Arideus, and that not onely for the basenesse of his Mother; for hee was begotten by Philip ex Larisco Scorto: but also for a greater infirmity, want of wit; for as Ptolemy sayd, if hee were admitted to the Crowne; Ille nomen Regis, alius Imperium teneret: for his part hee thought it better, that out of those who for their vertue and prowesse were neere unto Alex∣ander, some should bee elected to governe the Provinces, and manage the Warres.

Of these three opinions the first was best approved generally: wherefore it was a∣greed upon, that they should expect till Roxana were delivered: and if shee brought forth a Sonne, Leonatus, Perdiccas, Craterus, and Antipater should be his Guardians. Confestrim{que} in tutorum obsequia jurant. The same oath of Allegeance was also given to the Horse-troopes. But the footmen perceiving that there advice was not requi∣red in those great affaires, tooke it in ill part, wherefore they proceeded to a new e∣lection, and saluted Arideus King, and appointed him a Guard out of their own Troops: which thing so soone as the Horse-men heard of, they sent two of the Nobility, to wit Attalus, and Meleager to pacifie their mindes: But these two desiring to in∣crease their owne power by the flattery of the common Souldiers omitted their Am∣bassage, and conspired with them; And now that they had gotten a head, they pre∣sently armed themselves with purpose to breake into the Pallace for the discom••ture of the Horsemen: which being once knowne, the Horsemen in feare departed the City; and having fortified their Campe, the footmen themselves also began to doubt of the successe. Perdiccas who commanded in chiefe amongst the Horsemen, per∣ceiving the danger likely to ensue upon this division: resolutely went unto the foot∣men, and having called an assembly, he spake unto them as followeth.

Souldiers and fellowes in Armes, I desire you would consider what an horrible crime you now commit in arming your selves, and raising a sedition: Remember I pray you a∣gainst whom you attempt these things; they are not Persians but Macedonians, not ene∣mies, but Citizens, and for the most part of your owne bloud and kindred, Fellow-souldiers of the same Campe, and Companions of the same dangers together with you. Consider betimes I advise you, what an egregious spectacle you are about to set forth to the view of your Ad∣versaries the Persians; looke how much they grieve to see themselves vanquished by your con∣quering armes, so much will they rejoyce to see you embruing your swords in the bloud one of another: by which meanes it will come to passe that they shall offer sacrifice with your owne bloud, to the soules of those enemies which you have slaine.

With this Oration the footmen were so moved, as that presently they approved his councell; chose him their Captaine, and by his meanes also were accorded with the Horsemen: but yet so, as that Arideus should have the Empire; and onely a portion thereof should be reserved for Alexanders Child, if it happened to be a Sonne.

These matters being thus composed, the Empire is divided into many Lieutenant∣ships: but there were foure chiefe ones, who were more remarkable then the rest: Qui Reges ex perfectis facti magnes opes non sibi tantum paranerunt; Verum & posteris reliquerunt. And these were first, Ptolemy, Sonne of Logus who possessed Aegypt: Secondly, Seleucus, who possessed Babylon (as Iosephus saith) Cum vicinis gentibus. Thirdly, Antigonus, who possessed Asia the lesse: And fourth∣ly Antipater, and after him Cassander, who possessed Macedonia, and Greece.

By this wee see the Prophecie of Daniel fulfilled, for hee had long before Pro∣phecied that the great horne of the Goate being broken: For it, should come up foure notable ones: Dan. 8. 8. Which prophecie is expounded in the 21. and 22. verses of the same Chapter, in this manner. The Rough Goate is the King of Grecia; and the great horne that is betwixt his eyes, is the first King (which was Alexander the Great.) Now that being broken, whereas foure stood up for it: Foure Kingdomes shall stand up out of the Nation, but not in his power. Now these Kingdomes are the foure I have last spoken of: for however by the first composition, they were to bee but Provinces; and these Princes forenamed, to rule in them onely as Lieutenants to Arideus; yet afterward that agreement was rejected, and every of these made them∣selves absolute Kings, 1. Mac. 1. 9. And this was the first occasion.

Perdiccas (to whom nothing fell in this division, but the tuition of the weake King, and the conduct of the best Army) cast about how hee might make himselfe equall with the rest: for this purpose hee set upon Ariarathes King of Capadocia, in which

Warre hee proved victorious; yet gained little more then the bare and naked King∣dome; for his enemies being overthrowne, they fly to their chiefe City, where they burnt themselves, their houses, and all that ever they had. Vt nihil hostis victor suarum rearum preter incendii Spectacula frueretur: This Kingdome hee left to the custody of his best betrusted friend Eumenes, to bee a place of sure retreate upon any occasion, but as for himselfe hee aspired after greater matters. Power enough hee had in the Army hee conducted, but hee wanted Royall authority to countenance his Power; and Capadocia was to little to limit his high thoughts: Now that hee had proved his strength to make himselfe equall with the other, hee would try one cast more too for the superiority: to this end hee secretly treated a match with Cleopatra the sister of great Alexander, by whom hee hoped to attaine the Soverainty of all the rest: but belike hee was jealous that Antipater (in whose power the Lady was) would crosse this marriage. Wherefore to cover his intents, hee fained love to Nicaea one of Antipaters Daughters, hoping under that pretext to gaine the Lady before any were aware of it, but the old Foxe quickly espied his drift: Et dum duas eodem tempore uxores quaerit neutram obtinuit.

This plot of his being overthrowne by the cunning of Antipater, hee sets his wits abroach againe upon another designe for the winning of the Lady;* 1.32 and that was to transferre the Army into Europe under the pretence of bringing the King into Mace∣donia the seate of his Ancestors, and head of the Empire; whose presence hee knew would actually make voyd for the time, the office of the Viceroyes: and so Antipater with Craterus being once in case of private men, and himselfe onely in authority, the match with Cleopatra then might easily bee effected; and so should his greatnesse meet with a good title, and what obstacle then could there bee, to debarre him from the Empire?

There are two men taken into consideration, which hee thought might bee some hinderance to him in that accomplishment of this project: And they were Antigonus Lieutenant of Phrigia, and Ptolomie of Aegypt. For the first, hee caused to bee ac∣cused of certaine crimes, which might very well have served to take away his life; which Antigonus would not seeme to take notice of, but prepared himselfe in shew to come to his Answer: but in the meane while hee made an escape, and came into Aetolia, where Antipater and Craterus were with their Armies, about the conquest of the Countrey. These tydings which Antipater brought, quickly finished the Ae∣tolian Warre, and caused both Antipater and Craterus to foresee their owne danger. Ptolomy also being advertised of these passages; apprehended them deepely; and ther∣fore was easily drawn to side with Antipater his Coleagues, Craterus and Antigonus.

Being thus joyned in League, they begin to prepare for defence; And Perdiccas (understanding by the flight of Antigonus, and the League that now was betweene him, and the aforesayd parties, that all his drifts were discovered) resolved to car∣ry all before him by fine force, having both the strongest Army, and the Kings name to countenance all his actions. But the thing that troubled him was, against which of the Coleagues hee should first attempt. This being propounded in Councell, some advised hee should transferre the Warre into Macedonia, where Olimpias the Mother of great Alexander then was;* 1.33 whose presence and the peoples favour, would much promote all their enterprises. Others advised that they should first attempt on Pto∣lomy in Aegypt; least while they were in Macedonia, hee should invade Asia; and this advice prevailed; whereupon Eumenes is charged to have regard of Asia, and to him were joyned Alcetus Brother of Perdiccas, and Neoptolemus as assistants, in case Antipater or Craterus should invade those parts. Sic Macedonia, in duas partes discurrentibus ducibus; in sua viscera armatur ferrum{que} ab hostili bello in civilem sangui∣ne vertit. When as Perdiccas had wafted his Army into Aegypt, like a wilfull man hee tyred his Souldiers in hard enterprizes without successe, which brought their hatred upon him; which Pithom perceiving, called an hundred of the Captaines, and some of the Horse unto him, and so entred his Tent and slue him: Thus, qui primus inter duces bellum movit,* 1.34 primus interfectus est, sayes Caryon.

Eumenes who was left by Perdiccas for the defence of Asia; when hee understood of the great preparation that was made by Antipater and Craterus for the invasion of those Provinces committed to his charge; presently sent for Alcetus and Neoptole∣mus

to come to his ayd; letting them know, that the Adversary had already passed his forces and the Hellesponte. Alcetus flatly denied his assistance, alledging the backwardnesse of his men to Beare Armes against so great a person as Antipater, and a man so honoured as Craterus. Neoptolemus, was content to make a fayre show of ayding him, but had secretly covenanted with Antipater, to open for him a way to the conquest of Asia: which thing Eumenes carefully espied, and prepared in time to prevent his evill designes. And this hee did in a fierce battell, wherein hee put him to flight; and received his Foot-forces (from whom hee was fled for his owne safegard) into his service:* 1.35 Neoptolemus after his overthrow, fled to Antipater, and Craterus; perswading them, that if by great journyes they would hasten their march, they might certainely take Eumenes napping, being now joyfull of his late victory, secure by reason of his flight. This councell was put in execution, but not with such successe as was hoped for: because Eumenes was watchfull over their proceedings, perceived all their intents;* 1.36 wherefore they that thought to intrap him on the suddain, were unexpectedly in the trap themselves; being set upon while they were secure in their march, and much wearied with night-watches. In this battell both Crate∣rus, and Neoptolemus were slaine, and their Army routed and overthrowne.

After the death of Craterus whom the Souldiers exceedingly loved;* 1.37 they chose Antigonus their Generall, against Eumenes; whom earnestly they desired to punish for the death of their beloved Captaine. Eumenes perceiving how that by the Ma∣cedonians hee was adjudged an enemy, and that their new Captaine Antigonus had decreed to make Warre upon him, of his owne accord discovered these things to his Souldiers; promising, that if any were terrified with these newes, hee would give him free leave to depart: with which words they were so animated, as that they promised him faithfully, Rescissurus se ferro decreta Macedonum.

Antigonus understanding what a Souldier Eumenes was; thought it a farre safer way to cut him off by policie, then by force: wherefore taking the advantage of Eu∣menes absence from his Army (for hee was now visiting Cleopatra, the sister of great Alexander, at Sardis) hee caused letters to bee spread through his Army, wherein was promised great rewards to those who could bring Eumenes his head unto him. Eumenes at his returne finding out the project, called an assembly, giving his Soul∣diers great thankes, that amongst them all, none was found that preferred the hope of a bloudy reward, before the faith they had given to their Generall: but withall, poli∣tickly telling them, Confictas a se has epistolas ad experiendos suorum animos esse. And by this policie hee did not onely afright those that were wavering; but also did pro∣vide against future times: that if any such thing should afterwards happen, the soldiers might suppose; Se non ab hoste corrumpi, sed a duce tentari. Antigonus when he saw that hee could not entrap his Adversary by cunning, then prepared to set upon him by force. And Eumenes accordingly prepared to entertaine him; but through the treachery of Apollonides, generall of his Horse (who in the heate of the battell fled to the Adverse part) hee was overthrowne.* 1.38 After which, hee betooke himselfe to Nora, a very strong Fort; which hee manfully defended, untill such time as Antigo∣nus heard of the troubles in Macedonia (which were raised by the seditions of Cas∣sander, and Polyperchon,* 1.39 after the death of Antipater,) which comming to Antigonus his knowledge, caused him labour to conclude a Peace with Eumenes, knowing him to bee a man fit for his purposes (if hee could winne him to his side) both for his knowne faithfulnesse, and excellent skill in Martiall affaires; for of all Alexanders Captaines, hee skarce had his fellow.

A Peace forthwith was concluded betweene them, but long it continued not; because not governed by the like mindes: for Eumenes was most faithfull, but the other treacherous to Alexanders kindred: wherefore they fell againe to the Warres, wherein (after Eumenes had beene victorious in many battells,) at last by the muti∣nous Argyraspides, he was betrayed to Antigonus, who put him to death.

And now let us leave Antigonus a while,* 1.40 and see how the affaires of the Empire were managed in other parts. Euridice the Queene, Wife of King Aridens, so soone as shee knew of Polyperchons returne into Macedonia, and that hee had sent for Olim∣pias the Mother of great Alexander, grew full of envie and emulation: wherefore shee writ letters in the King her husbands name to Polyperchon, commanding him

to deliver up the Army to Cassander, whom shee knew to bee an enemy to Alexan∣ders posterity. For which courtesie Cassander was bound unto her, and did many things according to her minde: and afterwarde hee marcheth with his Forces into Greece, making Warre upon divers of the Cities. With whose destructions, the Spar∣tans terrified, walled their City, which in times past they had defended with Armes, and not with Walls;* 1.41 so much now did they degenerate from their Ancestors: for in times past the vertue of the Citizens, was the Wall of the City, but now the Citi∣zens thought not themselves safe, unlesse they were enclosed with Walles.

But the troubles of Macedonia, quickly called Cassander out of Greece; for Olim∣pias comming towards Macedon; Aeacides King of the Mollosians also following her: they were forbidden to enter upon the borders by Arideus, and Euridice. Yet by meanes of the Macedonians, who flocked to her apace, shee got entrance; and be∣ing entred, by her Commandement, both Euridice and the King were quickly slaine, and shee her selfe ruled not long after: For the Macedonians seeing what cruell mas∣sacres shee made amongst their Princes, turned their love into hatred: So when Cassander approached, shee having no confidence in them; retyred her selfe to Py∣dua a strong Citie, where Cassander straightly besieged her, and forced her by ex∣treame famine to yeeld to his mercy: yet hee shewed her but a little, when shee came into his power; for by the counsell of the Macedonians, whose Children shee had slaine: shee was (without any respect to her former estate) condemned to dye. When the Executioners came to doe their office; shee never shrunke for their swords, neither shriked like a Woman for the smart of her wounds: Vt Alexan∣drum posses etiam moriente matre conspicere: and when shee was breathing her last gaspes, shee covered her bodie decently with her haire and garments; Ne quid posset in corpore ejus indecorum videri. This was the end of this Royall Queene so famous through the World, for being Wife to such a Husband, and Mother to such a Sonne.

Perdiccas,* 1.42 Alcetus, Eumenes, Commanders of the other faction being all slaine; one would have thought the Warre should have ceased amongst Alexanders Succes∣sors: but it fell out otherwise; for the Victors fell at ods amongst themselves, and this was the occasion of it. Ptolomy, Cassander, and Lysimachus required that the Treasure and Provinces taken by Antigonus, should be equally divided amongst them; but this Antigonus denied: Affirmans, se non in ejus belli praedam socios admissurum, in cujus periculum solus descenderat: Hereupon Warre was decreed on both sides. An∣tigonus feared them not, onely hee wanted a faire pretext and colour for his Warre: wherefore hee cavsed it to bee divulged, that hee would revenge the death of Olim∣pias, upon Cassander the murtherer, and deliver Roxana and her Sonne out of the Tower of Amphipolis, wherein the sayd Cassander had imprisoned them.

These things being once knowne abroad, Ptolomy, Cassander, Lysimachus, and S••leucus, all joyne in League against him; and so on all sides make their preparations both by Sea and Land. The first battell was fought at Callamos, betweene Demetrius Sonne of Antigonus, and Ptolomy, wherein Ptolomy got the day. Afterwards these two Generalls fought at Sea, and Demetrius got the victory, and that a very great one; which filled the heart of Antigonus so with pride: as that hee commanded both himselfe, and Sonne to bee styled Kings: Ptolomy, that hee might not seeme to have lesse authority amongst his men, is graced also with the same Title: and after their examples, Cassander, and Lysimachus did stile themselves also Kings, Sic nona Regna ex Alexandri Monarchia orta sunt, sicut Daniel predixerat.

After these private encounters with Ptolomy, followes the generall Warre be∣tweene Antigonus, and his Sonne on the one side, and Ptolomy, Lysimachus, Scleucus, and Cassander on the other:* 1.43 but when they came to joyne battell Antigonus was slaine, and the battell on his part lost. And as Plutarch saith, through the too violent chase that Demetrius gave to young Antiochus Sonne of Seleucus; For Demetrius having overthrowne that part of the Army which Antiochus led, and put him to flight: hee pursued so farre, and with such heate, that before hee came backe againe; the Macedonian Phalanx, and bodie of his Fathers Army was overthrowne: where∣fore finding the affaires in such ill case at his returne, hee was glad to flye hastily to∣wards Athens, with 5000 Foote, and 4000 Horse: where, for all his former

kindesse unto them, hee was forbid to enter the City, quoniam regum neminem tu•••• recipere statuissent.

This victory was the occasion of new trouble among the Victors;* 1.44 for Seleucus (who was present at the battell) in parting the prey, pleased himselfe, but displeased his adherents (who were absent.) Wherefore Ptolomy, and Lysimachus joyne a∣gainst him, supposing him now as dangerous an enemy, as Antigonus was before. Seleucus to strengthen himselfe, joyned with Demetrius; and to make this League the firmer, takes Stratonice, Daughter of Demetrius, to Wife. And about the begin∣ing of these troubles, Cassander died in Macedonia, and so did Philip his eldest Sonne.

After whose deaths,* 1.45 another Warre also happened betweene Antipater, and A∣lexander, the two surviving Sonnes of Cassander: Thessalonica Mother to them both, seemed to take part with the younger Brother; wherefore Antipater the elder, slue her. The younger Brother to ••ee revenged for his Mothers death, called in Deme∣trius for his ayde: wherefore Lysimachus, who was Father in Law to Antipater, perswaded him to reconcile himselfe to his Brother, rather then to admit his Fa∣thers enemy into the Kingdome. But Demetrius would not now bee kept out, with their reconciliation; but by treachery murthered Alexander, and possessed that part of his Kingdome that was falne to his share: and Lysimachus (being at that time in∣tangled in a dangerous Warre against Doricetus King of Thrace) that Demetrius might not be his enemy, delivered also up to him the other part of Macedonia, which was Antipaters, his Sonne in Law. Thus Demetrius being wholy possest of that King∣dome, begins a fresh to prepare for the recovery of that which hee had lost in Asia, which occasioned a new League betweene Ptolomy, Seleuchus, and Lysimachus; in∣to which society Pirrhus King of Epirus was drawne: and so to prevent the inva∣sion of Asia, they send against Demetrius their Armies into Europe; with which, hee being circumvented, Cum posset honeste mori, turpiter se debere Seleuco maluit

After the end of this Warre, died Ptolomy Sonne of Lagus King of Egypt: lea∣ving for his Successor,* 1.46 Ptolomy Philodelphus his youngest Sonne: After whose death, there were left alive no more but two of Alexanders great Captaines, to wit, Seleu∣chus, * 1.47 and Lysimachus; and these two being equalls, quickly fell at difference, both striving for superiority. And this was the last Battell that ever was fought betweene those great Captaines that accompanied Alexander in the Persian expedi∣tion: and truely the sudaine fall of the City of Lysimachia by an Earthquake, did foreshew the event of the battell, which immediately followed, for therein Lysi∣machus fell; and Seleuchus was not more joyfull of the victory, then that hee was the last of Alexanders traine; and that he was victor over those that had beene Con∣querors over others: but this his great joy did not long continue with him; for about seven moneths after hee was circumvented by Ptolomy Cerannus, whose Sister Ly∣simachus had married: Regnum{que} Macedoniae, quod Lysimacho eripuerat, cum vita pari∣ter amittit: and within a while after, this Cerannus was slaine by the Gaules, under the leading of their Captaine Brennus.

Thus have you seen the horrible Warres, and bloudy Massacres that happened du∣ring the time of this third Monarchie, among the Successors of great Alexander: neither did these Wars end, when they had brought these great men to their graves; but continued still, as fierce as before amongst their posterity, untill they had greatly spoyled all those Countreys, and prepared a way for the Romans entrance. Of which it is high time that I now speake; for I suppose I have already sayd enough, to satis∣fie any man, concerning the troubles of the third Monarchie▪ although a great deale more might bee sayd of those Warres, which happened betweene the Kings of Sy∣ria and Egypt;* 1.48 which tooke beginning at the murther of Brenice widdow of Anti∣ochus Theos, and Sister of Ptolomy Enargetes, of which the Prophet Daniel hath so plainely spoken; as that those that are acquainted with the Story, will I am sure testifie with mee, that hee seemes rather to write a History, then a Prophesie. But these and many more troubles I must of necessity passe by, to come to the fourth Monarchie of the Romans, which was not in strength inferior to any of the other. Dan. 7. 7. Yet could it not perpetuate Peace to it selfe, no more then any of the former Monarchies, as the next Chapter will make it evidently appeare▪

CHAP. V.

Of the Roman Monarchie, and the Warres thereof.

THe Roman Empire, whose foundation was first layd by Romulus their first King, was at the beginning of all other Empires the smallest: but in processe of time, it did become the most ample and large, that any History mentioneth; containing within the limits and bounds thereof, all that ever any of the other three Monarchies had in Asia, and Africa, besides all Europe into the bargaine. Lucius Florus considereth in the Common-wealth of the Romans foure degrees or Ages: the first under Kings which continued about 250 yeares. During which time Rome strove for mastery with her mother, the Citie Alba,* 1.49 under the leading of their third King Tullus Hostilius, who was the first that taught them martiall Discipline, and the Art of Warre: in which Warre happened that famous Combate between the Horatii,* 1.50 three brethren of the Roman party, and the Curatii, three brethren of the City Alba; upon whose victory depended the well or woe of both Cities,* 1.51 auceps & pulchra contentio; a brave but a doubtfull fight: where∣in three of the one side being wounded, and two of the other slaine, that Horatius which survived, helping out his valour with his wit, feigned himselfe to flye, so to single forth the enemy, and then turning upon each as they were to follow, overcame them all. Sic (rarum) unius manu parta victoria est. Besides this Warre betweene Rome, and the City Alba; there were other betweene her and the City Fid••na. To be breife, under the rule of Kings, they conquered all the Townes round about for some fifteene myles space, as Suessa, Pometia, Otriculum, and divers other Townes in Latium: but because Rome was now but in her infancy, and had not obtained the Monarchie, I let these passe in silence.

The next Age of Rome (sayes Florus) was from the time of Brutus,* 1.52 and Collari∣nus, their two first Consuls; untill such time as Apius Claudius, and Quintus Iulius obtained the Consulship, which was about 200 yeares after. During which time they had many sharpe Warres: as first with Tarquinius, their expulsed King, who was ayded by the Vrientines, and Tarquiniences, for the recovery of his Kingdom. In the very first onset of this battell, was Brutus the Consull, and Aruus Tarquinius the Kings Sonne,* 1.53 both Generalls of the Horse, slaine one by the other: for as Livy saith, Adeo{que} infestis animis concurrerunt neutrum dum hostem vulneraret sui protegendi corporis memor; ut contra••io ictu par parmam uter{que} transfixus. The victory was very doubt∣full, for the right Winges of both the Armies overcame; so that both sides feared the worst,* 1.54 till the doubt were removed by a miracle, a strange voice out of the Arsian wood, which affirmed, that the Romans had lost one lesse then their enemies▪

The next Warre was against King Porsenuae, who would have re-established Tar∣quinius, and hee wanted but little of taking the Citie; for hee had already surprized Mountaine Ianiculus, on the other side of Tiber; from whence hee had a faire way to the City over the Bridge called Sublicius: where by good hap, Horatius C••cles a va∣liant Roman was present, who placed himselfe upon the Bridge; and with his sole bodie defended the passage against all the Kings Army; untill such time as the bridge behinde him was broken downe: neither could they bee freed from the danger of this King, untill Mutius Scaevola had made an attempt to slay him in his Campe; of which neverthelesse hee fayled through his ignorance of the Kings person, killing his Scribe, instead of him: for which fact being had in examination, hee cried out sayes Livy: Romanus sum Ci••is Quintus Mutium vocant; hostis hostem occidere volui: When they threatned him with punishment:* 1.55 hee answered, hee was as resolved to die, as to have killed the King: for sayes hee, Facere & pati fortiae, Romanum est, and forthwith hee thrust his hand into the fire, untill it were past sense. Vt sciat Rex (sayes Florus) quem virum effugerit. Telling the King that there were 300 valiant young men of Rome had conspired his death: with which the King was so terrified, that he presently dissolved the siege, and made peace with the Romans.

To bee breife, besides this Warre, they had also within the 200 yeares afore named;

warres with the Lattins, Thuscans, Ga••••es, Sabines, Sa••••ites; and lastly, with the Tarrentines, and King Pyrrhus, but all these within the confines of Italy, which by this time they had mastered and made their owne: yet were they so farre from the Monarchie, as that they had never led their forces out of Italy, and therefore I passe by these also.

The next Age of Rome (Lucius Florus) was from that time Apius Claudius,* 1.56 and Quintus Fulvius were Con••ulls, untill the time of Caesar Augustus, which was 250 yeares, about which time they obtained the Monarchie of the World. Which before they could effect, they endured many sharpe Warres: as with Carthage three severall times:* 1.57 In the second of which Punicke Warres, Rome was in as much feare as ever since her walls were builded. Livy saith, adeo varia belli fortuna; ut proprius periculo fuerint, qui vicere. Three overthrowes Haniball gave the Romans one after another, the first at Tic••num, now called Pavia, where the Consull Publius Cornelius Scipio had beene slaine, but that hee was rescued by his owne Sonne young Scipio, after∣wards called Affricanus. The next was at the floud Trebia, where hee overthrew the other Consull Titus Sempronius, who was very eager to fight with Haniball, be∣fore his fellows were healed of their hurts received in the former battel. The third was at the Lake of Th••asimene, Caius Flaminius being Consull, who very rashly lost both Army and life. The ill successe of which battell was foreshowen before it began: for Titus Livius saith,* 1.58 the Ensigne could not with all his strength remove his Co∣lours, which with some other ill signes put all the Army in afright: which thing when it was told to the unadvised Consull,* 1.59 hee sayd to the messenger, Abi nuntia, signum effodiant; si ad conv••llendum manus prae metu obcorpuerint. The newes of this overthrow made the Romans speedily nominate a Dictator, and in good time they chose Quintus Fabius Maximus, one that followed Haniball wheresoever hee went: but with this purpose,* 1.60 Vt cunctando non bellando inimicorum vires attereret, sayth Plu∣tarch: Thus for a while hee wearied Haniball, but his owne people also were wea∣ried with this lingring Warre. Minutius who was Magister equitum hee cried out in the Army,* 1.61 Doe we come hither to behold the slaughter and destruction of our Confederates and Companions? are wee not ashamed that those Citizens which our Fathers sent as Co∣lonyes into S••ssa, that this coast might be safe from our enemies the Samnits, which now not our Neighbour Samnite, but a Carthagenian stranger doth waste and spoyle, having marched from the further parts of the World, to this place by meanes of our delayes? So farre (ah the griefe) doe wee degenerate from the vertues of our Ancestors, that neere our Coast they thought it a dishonour to their Empire, but to suffer the Carthagenians Navie to sayle: the same wee now see repleate with the Numidians, and Mores our enemies. It is great fol∣ly to believe that wee are able to subdue our enemies with sitting still:* 1.62 it behoves us to arme our troopes, and bring them downe into the plaines, and encounter them man to man. Audendo, agendo{que} res Romana crevit, non his sensibus, Consiliis neque timidi cauta vocant.

This trouble happening in the Campe, and the like in the City, causeth the Se∣nate to joyne Minutius in equall authority with the Dictator: but still the Warre is prolonged by Fabius his cunning: Then does Bebius Herennius Tribune of the people, declaime both against the Senate and Nobility for trayning Haniball into Ita∣ly and prolonging the Warre, which might sooner have beene put to an end if a Ple∣bean Consull had beene chosen. Hereupon Quintus Terentius a Plebean is created Consull; and Lucius Aemilius Paulus is his Colleague: They follow the battell of Cannae by the rashnesse of Terentius Varro the Plebean Consull, wherein the Romans were overthrowne,* 1.63 and one of their Consulls slaine; and with him twenty more of the order of Consulls and Praetors: of Senators there were taken and slaine thirty, of Noblemen to the number of 300, of Souldiers, to the number of 40000, and 3500 gentlemen besides. Haec est pugna Cannensi clade nobilitata (saith Livy.) There had beene no doubt,* 1.64 but that Rome then might easily have beene taken: if Haniball (as Maherbal sayd) had but knowne how to use a victory as to get one: But Hanibal quum victoria posset uti,* 1.65 frui maluit. And so leaving Rome, hee hastens to Capua, the pleasures of which towne, utterly effeminated his whole Army, and as (Florus sayes) Capuam Hanibali Cannas fuisse, for him that neither the snowy Alpes, nor the Ro∣man Armies could overcome (who would believe it) Campaniae soles & tepentes fontibus Baiae subegerunt. After this divers of the Roman Generalls durst meet Hani∣ball

in the field; and first Cloudius Marcellus the Roman Praetor, in the first yeare of this Warre, raysed his siege from before Nola, and slue of his men as some affirme, 2300, himselfe losing onely one: but Livy dares not affirme so much of his owne credit; yet acknowledgeth a victory gotten of Haniball, which hee accounts a very famous exploit, if not the most famous that happened in all that Warre: Non vinti enim ab Hanibale, vincentibus difficilius fuit, quam postca vincere.

At last it happened that Publius Cornelius Scipio was created Consull, who chose Africa for his Province, and had it granted, contrary to the opinion of Fabius. When hee was entred Africa, hee overthrew the forces of Asdruball, and King Si∣phax: and forthwith besieged Carthage it selfe close up to the gates, which so afrigh∣ted the Citizens, that presently they sent for Haniball to come to the defence of his owne City: but Haniballs Army which was effeminated before with the immoderate pleasures of Capua, was now overthrowne before his owne Carthage. Premium{que} victoriae Africa fuit, & seguntus Africam statim terrarum orbis (saith Florus.) Be∣sides these Punicke Warres, they had many other; as in Macedonia with King Philip, in Syria with Antiochus, in Greece with the Aetolians, Histrians, Gallo-Greekes, Illi∣r••••ns, and Achaians: in Asia, with Aristonicus, and Mithridates: in Africa, with Iugurth: and in Europe, with divers, which would bee to long for mee to nomi∣nate.

We will come therefore to those times wherein Rome had setled the fourth Mo∣narchie, by making her selfe the Lady and Mistris almost of the whole World: which was about the time of Pompey the Great, and Julias Caesar, two the most famous Cap∣taines that ever Rome had.

In their times sayes Lucius Florus,* 1.66 Majus erat imperium Romanum, quam ut ullis exterius viribus extingui posset. Fortune therefore envying that people, which was soveraigne of all other, armed their owne selves to their owne destruction: and this grew through the discord that was betweene Pompey and Caesar afore named. But the ground of this controversie tooke first root from the civill Warres betweene Ma∣rius and Silla: Pompey following Sillas faction, and Caesar, Marius, whose kinseman hee was,* 1.67 which could not but breed a mislike each of other: and the rather, because Silla had given his friend a caveat to beware of Caesar: this dislike of each other was increased by both their ambitions: Pompey would endure no equall, nor Caesar superiour; but hitherto their intents were smothered, two obstacles being in the way: first Pompey had married the Lady Julia, Caesars Daughter, and during her life, friendship was preserved,* 1.68 at least in shew. Secondly, Crassus through his inestima∣ble riches, Linage, and eloquence, was almost in as great reputation as either of the other; and so long as hee lived, the scales were equally ballanced through mutuall feare:* 1.69 but Crassus being once slaughtered by the Parthians, and Julia dead; the spark of emulation that long had layd smothered as it were in ashes, now quickly burst forth, both of them being ambitious of honour, and each of them jealous of the others authority; but their emulation brake forth into open Warre, upon this oc∣casion.

Caesar having finished his Warres in Gaul, sent his friends to Rome in his name to demand the Consulship, himselfe staying behinde within his owne Province; the reason why hee desired (though absent) to bee declared Consull, was for feare of some enemies that had threatned to accuse him: this honour was decreed him at the first, by ten of the Tribunes with Pompeys good liking. But some of Caesars enemies withstanding this decree; Pompey quickly altered his opinion, and then was Caesar againe denied that honour,* 1.70 unlesse hee would lay downe his Armes, and come in person to Rome, to crave it after the accustomed manner: this Caesar yeilded unto upon condition that Pompey also should give over his Army which he had in Spaine; but Pompyes friends would not agree to that: hereupon Caesar refuseth to dismisse his Army, unlesse the Senate would make good their first decree. Forthwith at Rome are Lentulus and Marcellus made Consulls, and have charge to looke Ne quid respub∣lica detrimenti caperet. By and by, a peremptory decreee is passed, that Caesar must dismisse his Army by such a day, and that hee should not therewith passe the River Rubicon, that utmost bounds of his Province; declaring him an enemy, if hee dared to doe the contrary: this decree being resisted by two of the Tribunes, Lucius Anto∣nius

and Quintus Curio, they were both abused and thrust out of the Senate, after which they fled to Caesar: Hereby Caesar perceived the intent of the Senate, and therefore sent speedily for all his Legions, marching with them to the River Rubi∣con; hee stayed there a while, considering with himselfe the danger that might en∣sue, if hee should passe the River with his Troopes. After consultation, hee cried out, The Lot is cast; and giving his Horse the reine, began to march and passe the River, all his people following him, and so was the civill Warre begunne.

The very next morning after hee had passed the River,* 1.71 he seized on Arimanto, and so upon all Townes and Castles that lay in his way: which tydings troubled not onely Pompey, but the whole Senate and people of Rome; whereupon, they all resolve to forsake the City. Pompey went to Brundusium, whither hee sent for the Consulls to passe thence to Dyrrachium, a City by the Sea coast of Macedonia, there to raise as great power as they were able; being now out of all hope to resist him in Italy: hee having now taken Corsin••o with Thirty of Pompeys Cohorts, and brought them to his owne denomination. Having once intelligence that Pompey made head against him in Brundusium, thither he hasted: and though Pompey had fortified the City against him, yet was hee glad to flye for his safegard by night, in a torne and almost naked Vessell over the Sea (oh the shame) which not long before hee had triumphantly passed.

Nor was Pompey sooner driven out of Italy, then the Senate out of the City; into which hee entred, made himselfe Consull, seized on the common treasury, and then began to consult about his proceedings: To follow Pompey into Greece, he could not for want of Shipping; neither would hee though hee could, because of some ene∣mies behinde, who were needfull first to bee dealt with all. Into Sicilia the Roman Granery, hee sent Deputies to make all sure there, and himselfe resolved for Spaine, against Petreius and Affranius the Commanders of Pompeys choisest Legions. Ha∣ving therefore dispersed part of his forces throughout Italy, to stop Pompeys returne; and having charged Dolabella to provide shipping against his comming backe: away hee goes and findes no resistance till hee comes at Massilla, where hee left Brutus to subdue them, which he did.

Caesar after a few incounters, drives Petreius and Affranius to a composition; and having tamed Spaine, hee returnes for Italy: where leaving all to the charge of Ser∣villius Isauricus his fellow Consull;* 1.72 hee prepares to goe into Macedonia against Pompey himselfe: When hee came to Brundusium, though hee wanted sufficiency of shipping, with those hee had, hee embarqued seven Legions; and though it were in winter, yet hee put out to Sea, and landed the next day about the hills of Epirus, and other dangerous places, and forthwith sent his Navie backe to Brundusium, for the residue which were left with Antonius; which staying somewhat to long, (im∣patient of delay in such important affaires:) he embarqued himselfe at midnight in a Frigot;* 1.73 and though the Seas went high, yet would hee needes venter over: The Master of the vessell perceiving how boysterous the Seas were, grew fearefull and would have returned: which Caesar perceiving, presently starts up saying; quid ti∣mes? Caesarem vebis. When all his forces were come together, hee hasted to Dirra∣chium with purpose to surprize it; thither also come Pompey to defend it: their Camps now being somewhat neere, many skirmishes happened; in one of which, the valour of Scena was wondrous,* 1.74 in whose shield was found sticking 140 darts. Neverthe∣lesse in the meane space, some overtures of Peace were made by Caesar, but none would bee granted by the Pompeyans: For Labyenus cried out; Definite ergo de com∣positione loqui: nam nobis nisi Caesaris capite relato, pax esse nulla potest. Whereupon Caesar provoked his Adversaries to the battell,* 1.75 but Pompey knowing Caesars wants, and himselfe having the benefit of the Sea to relieve his Army, chose rather to draw the Warre out in length; and to waste his Adversary, without putting his owne estate in hazard. But this liked not his Associats, the Souldiers, blame lying idle, the con∣federates, crie out upon delay; the great Lords taxe him with ambition: so that con∣trary to his owne opinion, hee is in a manner forced to give battell in the Champion field of Philippi.

After that both the Generalls had put their Armies in Aray, Pompey gives these admonitions to his Souldiers,* 1.76 that when the right Wing of Caesars battell drew neere, they should assaile it on the Flancke, so might they chase the disordered Army being

oppressed in the reare, before themselves came to cast a dart in the face of the enemie, neither is this thing very hard to bee done (saith hee) cum tantum equitatu va∣leamus.

Caesar observing the order of his enemies Battels, doubted that his right Wing might be oppressed with the multitude of the enemies horse; wherefore from his 3. Battell, he drew certaine choise companies, which he opposed to the enemies horse, shewing them what he had appointed them to doe, affirming that the victory that day, depended upon the valour of these Cohorts. The signall of Battell being given, in Caesars Armie, Crastinus (a man of tryed valour one that the yeare before had the leading of the Primipili in the tenth Legion) was called forth to begin the fight. He forthwith encourageth the appointed bands, saying; Follow me you that have beene my Maniples, performe that duty to your Emperour that you have promised, there onely re∣maines this one Battell, which finished, both he shall recover his dignity, and we our liberty. They looking upon Caesar, he sayd; Fac••am hodie Imperator, ut aut vivo mihi, aut mortuo, gracias agas; after which he marched against his enemies. The charge being given, all Pompey's horse, according to his direction, passed from his left wing, and and forced Caesars Cavallery to quit the field, and then begun the troopes to set upon his battels in the Flancke: Which Caesar perceiving, he made a signe to those selected Cohorts (which for that purpose, he had set apart from the other squadrons) to charge upon the enemies Cavallery, which they performed with such force and fury, striking them (according to Caesars directions) no where but in the face,* 1.77 which Pompey's horse∣men unable to endure, turned head and fled to the Mountaines. Which service finish∣ed, with the like force and fury, these Cohorts invaded the reare of Pompey's left Wing; also at the same time Caesar commanded his three Battalia's to charge, which as yet had not moved, so that Pompey's men, being now with fresh Companies char∣ged, both in the front and reare, were not able any longer to sustaine the Battell, but all of them turned their backes and fled. The victory being gotten in the Field, Caesar followed Pompey to the Campe, which he easily tooke; and then Pompey fled for his life, first to Larissa, from thence to the shore of the Aegean Sea, where finding a Mer∣chants ship, he sayled to Mitylene in the I••le of Lesbos, where remained his Wife and family; from thence he sayled into Egypt, where he was murthered by the sword of Septimius his fugitive, before the eyes of his Wife and Children.

This victorie being gotten and Pompey slaine, the warre was not presently end∣ed, new troubles did arise in Africa: thither many principall Romans, which had escaped from the battell of Pharsalia resorted: to wit, Publius Cornelius Scipio, Marcus Petreius Afranius, Quintus Varus, Marcus Portius Cato, Labienus, and Lu∣cius Cornelius Faustus, sonne to Silla the Dictator: these had associated to them Juba King of Mauritania, and altogether had raised a great Army: whereof Scipio was made Generall, Cato having refused that honour.

Caesar hearing of their preparations, hastens into Italy, and from thence waftes over into Africa, lands about Adrumentum, and from thence marcheth to the Citie Leptis where he is received: and while he lyes thereabout, Labienus comes a∣gainst him with his multitude, thinking to distresse Caesars small numbers: Caesar perceiving his intents,* 1.78 resolves to deale with him rather by cunning than force. And first, he chargeth his men not to stirre above foure foot from their standards, which the horsemen of Labienus perceiving, presently compassed them about, so that Cae∣sars people were compelled to fight as it were in a circle: There, Labienus shewes himselfe unto them, having uncovered his face, saying withall to one whom he saw most forward:* 1.79 Why are you so arrogant O you fresh-water souldier? I much pity your hard fortune, for sure I am, Caesar hath brought you into eminent danger. To whom the souldier replyed:* 1.80 I would thou shouldest know Labienus, that I am no freshman, but an old souldier of the tenth Legion: and forthwith he threw at him his dart, saying, De∣cumanum militem, qui te petit, scito esse. Caesar in the meane while, seeing himselfe incompassed, drawes out his Armie in length, and divides the circle in the middle, excluding the one part from the other on both sides, charging with his horsemen on the inner part of the circle, and with his footmen, their darts being throwne, he puts them to flight.

Caesar after this Battell, perceiving the multitude of his enemies, sends for more

ayde of men and victuals into Sicily, which were sent him: but divers of his Ships miscarried, and fell into the enemies hands, in one of which was a Centurion with some old soldiers, and some newly taken up, all of them were brought before the Ge∣nerall Scipio, and to them thus he addressed his speech. I know and am assured (Soldiers) that it is not of your owne accord, that thus wickedly you pursue and prosecute good men your fellow-Citizens, but rather that you are forced thereunto by the command of that wicked Emperour of yours: since therefore fortune hath brought you within our power, if you will (as your duty bindes you) with other good men labour to defend the Common-weale, you know that we will not onely spare your lives, but also take you into our protection and pay, wherefore answer us what you are minded to doe: To this the Centurion of the 14. Le∣gion (having liberty to speake) answers: For thy great good will, noble Scipio, I give thee hearty thanks, and happily I should make use of thy proffered curtesie, if too great a wickednesse were not coupled therewith, wherefore know you that I will never beare armes against Caesar my Emperour, from whom I have received my order, and for whose dignity and honour I have fought more than 36. yeares: moreover, I would counsell you, noble Scipio, to desist from thy enterprise, for if hitherto thou hast had no experience of him against whom thou dost contend, yet now at last take him into consideration: chuse among all thy souldiers one whole Cohort, which thou thinkest to be most strong and valiantest, and I will take but ten of these my fellow-souldiers, which now are within thy power, and by our valour you shall understand, what trust and confidence thou canst have in thine owne Troopes. Scipio was so inraged with this answer, that he slew the Centurion and all the old souldiers immediately.

After this Caesar at Thapsus fought with Scipio and King Juba, and overthrew them both in one day:* 1.81 at which Battell one strange thing happened, the Trumpets sounded a charge, through the souldiers forwardnesse, without the command of the Generall. The overthrow began at Juba, whose Elephants not throughly manned to fight, being but lately drawne out of the woods, at the suddain shrilnesse, disranked their friends Army,* 1.82 and presently all fled. After this overthrow, Scipio and Cato slew themselves, and Juba and Petreius after they had feasted themselves at a banquet, slew one the other, this was the direfull end of those brave Romans, and of this African warre.

But out of the embers of this warre,* 1.83 sprang another in Spaine more dangerous than the former, wherein Cneius and Sextus the two sonnes of great Pompey were the Generals. They, having gathered great forces amongst their friends in Spaine, reduced the greatest part of that Country under their obeysance: against them Caesar goes with his choisest Legions, Sed nusquam atrocïus nec tam ancipiti marte concursum est: Their last and chiefest Battell was at Munda, wherein Cneius Pompeius fought with such resolution, as that Caesars squadrons began to give ground, and were ready to forsake the field: what danger Caesar was then in, any man may know by his de∣mand: * 1.84 Lucius Florus saith, he was seene before the Army sadder than he used to be, yea it is reported, that in that perturbation he consulted what he should doe with himselfe if the worst befell, and that his countenance was as one that meant to make his owne hands his owne executioner. He was heard (say some) to have uttered these words to his old souldiers: If ye be not ashamed, leave me, and deliver me into the hands of these boyes. In good time did Labienus (Pompey's Lieutenant) send Caesar five Co∣horts of horse crosse the Battell, to guard that which was in some danger: Caesar takes hold of this advantage, and makes his souldiers beleeve they fled, and chargeth upon them as open flyers, and did thereby both put fresh courage into his owne souldiers, and also daunt his enemies: for Caesars men followed on boldly, think∣ing themselves to have the upper hand, and the Pompeyans (supposing their fellowes to run away) fell themselves to running, what slaughter then was made amongst them,* 1.85 may be conjectured by this: Caesar made a Rampire about Munda, by pyling up bodies dragged together from all about, and fastened together with speares and javelins. Caesar himselfe esteemed so much of this Battell, as that he used to say ma∣ny times: In other Battels he fought for victory and honour, but at Munda he fought for his life. Cncius Pompeius after his defeat fled, but was overtaken and slaine: but Sextus, the younger brother, was reserved for another warre.

Caesar now being victor returned to Rome, where he makes himselfe perpetuus

Dictator, and had titles of honour given him by the State, as, Imperator, and Pater patriae: now his accepting of these titles, and some other signes of ambition, drew upon him both the envie of the people, and of some great Lords.

Hereupon, his death was conspired, by 70. of the principle men of Rome: his friends misdoubting somewhat, advised that he should ever have a guard about him, but he rejected their counsell, saying: Mori satius est semel, quam timore semper tor∣queri: Neglecting this counsell, he was slaine by the Conspirators in the Senate-house, and fell at the foot of the Base where Pompey's Image stood. Sic ille qui tero∣rem orbem civili sanguine implenerat, tandem ipse sanguine suo curiam implevit.

Caesar being slaine,* 1.86 new troubles arise about his death: the people which desired it before it was effected, yet after hated the doers. Anthony and Lepidus instigated them against the melefactors, so that for their safeguard they were glad to flye out of the Citie, their houses being first burnt with brands which the people raked out of Caesars funerall fire. Caesars old souldiers also had a minde to be revenged of these Conspirators,* 1.87 had they but had one to lead them on to take it. Wherefore, after that Octavianus Caesar, Anthony, and Lepidus, were agreed upon the Triumvirate, they cal∣led these old blades of Caesars together, and with them Anthony and Octavianus mar∣ched into the East against Brutus and Cassius, the chiefe of the Conspirators, and fought with them twice in the field of Philippos, a Citie in Macedonia: In the first Battell, the right wing which was led by Anthony, overthrew the left wing of the other Armie led by Cassius, but the right wing of the other Armie led by Brutus did as much for the left wing of his Armie led by Octavianus.* 1.88 Augustus being over∣throwne, secured himselfe in Anthonies Campe, but Cassius contrariwise, not know∣ing how it fared with his companion, caused one Pindarus, a slave that he had main∣tained and manumitted, to cut off his head. Brutus the next day gathered up the scattered troopes, but was loth to hazard battell any more, for two reasons: first, because he knew his enemies were pinched with want of victuals, and some other necessaries: secondly, because he saw the left wing of his Armie which had beene overthrowne under Cassius his conduct, to be somewhat fearefull. For these rea∣sons, he desired to shun the second Battell, but his people were too violent, and forced him in a manner to fight, and were overthrowne for their labour. After which overthrow, Brutus slew himselfe.

Now that the murtherers of Caesar were overthrowne,* 1.89 and their faction extin∣guished, one should have thought there should now have succeeded a generall peace, being there were but three men, Augustus, Anthony, and Lepidus, to divide (in a manner) the third part of the world betweene them: But, Nulla fides regni sociis, omnis{que} potestas impatibus consortis erat: Lucan. lib. 1. Augustus and Lepidus, fell first at variance, about the Isle of Sicily, after they had there overthrowne Sextus Pom∣peius: In which debate, Lepidus was not onely stripped of Sicily, but also of Africa, and his Triumvirate: yet because he submitted himselfe, Caesar spared his life, and gave him the dignity of highest Priest.

Now were there but two to divide the worlds Empire betweene them, Anthony in the East, and Augustus in the West, and these two sought each others ruines, that himselfe might rule over all, so hatefull is a companion in authority. Both of them had their pretences for their quarrell:* 1.90 Augustus objected against Anthony, that for the love of Cleopatra Queene of Egypt, a light woman, he had left his owne wife Octavia, a vertuous Lady, and Augustus sister. Anthony objected against Augustus, that he had deprived Sextus Pompeius of Sicily, and Lepidus of Africa, and held them both unjustly, without imparting to him any share at all of them, and that he had al∣so divided the lands of Italy amongst his owne souldiers, and never had any conside∣ration of those that were his.* 1.91 Besides, Lucius Florus saith, that Cleopatra desired of Anthony the Empire of Rome, and he as rashly promised it to her, as if the Romans had beene more easie to be conquered than the Parthians. Both of them in this quar∣rell, resolved to try their fortunes in a Sea-battell, leaving their land-forces which they had prepared, the one with Taurus, the other with Canidius, and this was effect∣ed by the power Cleopatra had with Anthony,* 1.92 contrary to the advice of Canidius his Lieutenant Generall, and other of his Councell of Warre. Both of them taking the Seas, they came to grapple one with the other, within the sight of their Land-Ar∣mies

at Actium, a Promontory in Epyre. Anthony's ships, by reason of their greatnesse, were very slow and unweldie, but Caesars were yaire and nimble for all kindes of service, whether to charge, recharge, or levere about: so that three or foure of Cae∣sars, could at once set upon one of Anthony's, and ply them with Darts, Prowes, and castings of fire on all sides,* 1.93 with which they scattered them at pleasure. The first that fied was the Queene, and herein she was to be pardoned, doing ••ut her kinde: But (oh the mischiefe) with her she carried Anthony's heart and courage away, who all his life-time had beene a valiant Captaine, but now is mollified by a woman: She being fled, he forgets his Armies both by Sea and Land, and makes a maine after her, and Caesar as fast after them both, but with a conquering minde; in Alexandria he besieged them: During the siege, he corrupted Anthonies Sea-forces, so that they came over to his part, which Anthony understanding, supposed himselfe betrayed by the Queene▪ this suspicion of his, puts her into a feare of his furie; this feare of hers, se∣parateth her from his company, and being separate, she causeth to bee given out that she had slaine her selfe;* 1.94 which Anthony no sooner heard but beleeved (oh wicked beliefe!) in which he slew himselfe: and being dead, Cleopatra would not live with∣out him, but clapping Serpents to her breasts, she dyed in a slumber.

This Warre being thus finished, Augustus had none to oppose him. wherefore he commanded the Temple of Janus to be shut up, which had happened so to be, but twice onely, since the building of Rome, till that very time. But this peace lasted not long, it was first disturbed by the Celtiberian Warre; and next by the Germane: where the Romans, through the security and neglect of Quintillius Varrus, lost three Legions, and two Standards with the Imperiall Eagles. But oh the cruelty that these Barbarians shewed after their victory, especially against men of Law; plucking out the eyes of some, and lopping off the hands of others: one had his mouth stitched up, after his tongue was cut out;* 1.95 which the Savage grasping in his hand, said to it: Tan∣dem vipera sibilare desiste.

These, and many more warres since these, hath this fourth Monarch of the Ro∣mans endured, with which it is now so wasted, as that the Empire is at this day confined within the limits of Germany as we see; which once spread it selfe over the face of the earth. But I will say no more: I hope, by this that is past, any one may see that none of the foure great Monarchies of the world, how strong and setled soever, could perpetuate peace to themselves; and therefore much lesse can it be hoped, that this little Island of ours, or any other Kingdome, can preserve it selfe for ever from the dan∣ger of Warre. Wherefore, I will now proceed to the second part of the Proposition. It is good in time of Peace, to pro∣vide for Warre.

HOW TO PROVIDE IN PEACE FOR WARRE. SECT. II.

CHAP. VI.

It is good in time of Peace, to provide for Warre.

HE that will goe to Sea, must before-hand provide him∣selfe of Bisket; and that Kingdome that cannot avoyd Warre,* 1.96 must before hand be provided of meanes to with∣stand it: for nothing can be more unseasonable, than to be about provision, at such time as we should be in acti∣on. A wise State (like Haniball) will in prosperitie provide for adversitie,* 1.97 as well as in adversitie, hope for prosperitie; if they doe otherwise, peradventure they may have their heads broken, before they betake them∣selves to their bucklers: As may appeare, by the ex∣ample of Katherine Queene of Navarre, and John of Albert her Husband; whose want of timely preparatio, gave occasion to Ferdinand the Catholike King, not only to invade their Kingdome, but also after invasion, easily to subdue it. Had this Queene and her husband, beene in time provided, Ferdinand would eyther have desisted from enterprising any thing against them, or else he would have capitulated with them concerning a peace, in which they might have had the better conditions, being pro∣vided for warre:* 1.98 for the best treating for peace, is with the sword in hand. Or if he would have beene so hardy, as to have given them battell, they being provided, sure might have expected farre better successe than they found: but they were found un∣furnished, and that was the losse of their Kingdome. And the same, may be the losse of any other. For how hard and difficult will it be, for any Nation, to resist an Ene∣mie invading,* 1.99 if they prevent not his arrivall by their provisions. People are discou∣raged, by the suddainnesse of danger, and rather studie how by flight to shift for their particular safetie, than by making head, to preserve their Countrie from the Enemie.

But, if any be so vertuously minded as to make resistance, how difficult will it be for them to draw together, in such a Kingdome as ours, where we have no fortified Townes, to hold the enemy play? The enemie shall no sooner heare of any assem∣bly, but presently he will be upon them with his horse, to sever them before they can be able to make head against him: unlesse they willl flye to the utmost limits of

the Kingdome, there to make up an Army in haste; suffering in the meane time, the Enemie to enrich himselfe with the spoyle of the Country; and when such an Armie is composed, what good can be expected from it, seeing it must needs consist of raw, and untrained people, hastily gathered together, and altogether unskilfull in the use of Armes? When Caesar came against Pompey the Great into Italy, Pompey and the Senate, being unable to make resistance for want of timely provision; they were glad to forsake, not onely the other parts of Italy, but Rome it selfe, and flye into Greece, before they could draw any competent numbers together, to give the Enemie Battell. Let Pompeys carelesnesse be condemned, and let wi••e Estates imitate Augustus Caesar; who at the first brute of Anthonies stirring,* 1.100 provided himselfe, and crossed over from brundu••um, to give Warre the meeting; thinking it more safe so to doe, than to receive it within the limits and borders of his owne Italy: By these precedent re∣lations, I hope any man may see; That it is good in time of Peace, to provide for Warre.

CHAP. VII.

Of the Things necessarily to be provided; And first of Victuals.

THe things especially to be provided; are Victnals, Weapons, Money, Ships,* 1.101 and Men: all of them needfull for the maintenance of Warre,* 1.102 and such as if they be not provided in time of Peace, can hardly be procured, the warre being begun. And first for Victu∣als; so needfull they are, as that without them no Army can bee maintained, neither by Sea nor Land, nor any Towne (how strong soever) without them can be defended. This want of vi∣ctuals was the ••os••e of Ierusalem, of San••erra, of Paris, and lately Rochel, to the French King.* 1.103 The like want of victuals and other necessaries, hindered our Navie in 88. so that it could follow the Spaniards no further; whereby we lost a faire advan∣tage that God had given us, of destroying that whole Fleet. If in the Field an Armie be pinched with want, it must starve or fight, bee the disadvantage never so great; whereas that Army that is well provided, can fight when it sees advantage, and can forbeare till it have got it. And by this meanes alone, would Pompey have beaten Caesar out of Greece in despight of him,* 1.104 had not the Senate (in a manner against his will) for∣ced him to fight in the field of Philippi. It is requisite therefore for a Prince when he is to use his forces eyther by Sea or Land, to appoint, not onely experienced, but also faithfull mento be his Stewards, to make his provisions for his Armies; such as will faithfully lay out his Treasure, according as the affaires in hand require, and not imbea∣zell them in riotous courses, nor hoord them up for their owne private gaine.

CHAP. VIII.

Of the preparation of Armour and Weapons,

LOoke how necessarie Victuals be for the maintenance of a Souldiers life;* 1.105 so needfull is Armour for the defence of it: Nature hath furnish∣ed us ••ut with a thin and weake defence, against eyther shot of Musket,* 1.106 or push of Pike. Herein must be a supply of Natures de∣fect; good Armour and Weapons must be provided, else we can nei∣ther defend our selves,* 1.107 nor offend our foes; as may appeare by the ancient Brittaines, whose naked valour (though as great as might be) could not gainestand, much lesse offend, the Roman Armes. Wherefore, it were to bee wished that all men, especially those who have the name of Souldiers, would transferre the care of apparell, which so much troubles this age of ours, unto the studie of Armes, and provision of Armour; and that their former negligence of Armour, might be trans∣ferred to apparell; for so should they both provide for their owne particular safetie,

and for the generall safety of the Kingdome. But because some private men will be negligent this way, whatsoever be sayd to the contrary; it were requisite therefore, that those that have the over-sight of the Musters, should be carefull to see all Compa∣nies full; and be more diligent, to certifie the defects in Armes, to them that have power to punish; and that they would have regard, that all Muskets be of one bore, and not of severall, as now they are; from whence a great confusion would arise in time of need, if it be not amended: (which must bee by some strict order taken with the Gun-makers, that the Kingdome be not so abused.) Also they must have regard that when a Trayning is done in one place, Armour be not borrowed to shew in an∣other; for such errors as these, may be very prejudiciall to a Kingdome in time of danger: There must be care had also that the enemy have no oddes or advantage of us in weapons, whether Musket or Pike, if we looke for good successe in the Warre; for oddes in this kinde, will carry a victory both against valour and number; as ap∣peared in the Warres betweene Pope Alexander the sixt,* 1.108 and the Orsini, where Vitel∣lozze having provided his souldiers of Pikes two foot longer than ordinary, carried away the victory from the Ecclesiasticke souldiers, who had the oddes of him, both in courage and number.

CHAP. IX.

Of the Provision of Money.

IT sufficeth not to the strength of the Armes,* 1.109 to have flesh, bloud, and bones, unlesse they have also sinewes, to stretch out and pull in, for defence of the body; so it sufficeth not in an Army to have Victuals, for the maintenance of it; Armour and Weapons for the defence of it; unlesse it have Money also, the sinewes of Warre; which above all things beareth sway with the common souldier, and causeth him to venture upon any danger, which oftentimes for want of pay he will refuse.* 1.110 Wherefore Vegetius gives this advice; Antequam inchoe∣tur bellum, de copus expensis{que} solicitus debet esse tractatus: I doe marvell not that she is called Regina pecunia; seeing that all men yeeld obeysance to her, she it is that train∣eth the souldiers to the Warres, who otherwise would sleepe quietly at home. The Bayliffe of Diion sent by the French King into Swisserland to hire souldiers, could traine none along with him,* 1.111 because his Masters coffers were known to be emp∣tie: but so soone as the Kings Exchequer was well filled with the mony which he had of the Florentines, for the restitution of Pisa and other cautionary Townes, the Swis∣sers came downe to his ayde, in greater numbers than he required. So when Rezin and Pekah Kings of Syria and Israel,* 1.112 made warre upon Ahaz King of Iudah; he with a present of Silver and Gold, easily drew Tiglath-Pileser King of Assyria, to his ayde and succour.* 1.113

It is likewise Money and pay, that keepes the Army in good order, and makes it strictly to observe discipline, the preserver of all; Pay is the poore souldiers Aqua vitae,* 1.114 which makes him comfortably undergoe the hardest command; but want of it is such an Aqua fortis, as eates through the iron doores of Discipline, and causeth whole Armies to rush into disorders: and ever when they are commanded upon any Servi••e, their usuall fashion, is to demand their Pay, and refuse the imploy∣ment.

Furthermore, Money is of such force, as that it will not onely prevent an Ene∣mies invasion,* 1.115 but also beat him backe, and cause him speedily to retyre; when as Armes are no way able to doe it: As may appeare by the example of Jugurth; who having sorely incensed the Romans by the slaughter of Hiempsall, yet neverthe∣lesse prevailed so farre upon them with his money,* 1.116 as that he drew, even the Senate, to take his part against Adherball his accuser. Afterwards, this same Jugurth was so hardy, as to cashiere Adherball out of that part of Numidia, which the Romans

had estated him in; then was Warre decreed in the Senate, and Calpurnius Bestia the Consull,* 1.117 sent into Numidia against him; but the craftie King, knowing that Gold could doe more against the Romans than steele, bought his peace. Now being assu∣red, that all things for money, were to be bought and sold at Rome; hee slew even within the walles of the Citie, Massina grandchild to Massinissa his Competitor in the Kingdome. Now had the Romans a third cause of warre against him, which was likewise decreed; and the managing of it was committed to Albinus: but (oh the shame) Jugurth so bribed this Armie also, that it voluntarily gave away, and suffered him to take from them,* 1.118 both the Victory and their Campe withall. Neyther could the Romans ever have any hope to withstand the force of Jugurths money, un∣till M••tellus came to deale with him, of whom they expected very much; especi∣ally, Quod adversus divitias invictum animum gerebat.

The like example,* 1.119 Philip de Comines reporteth of our Edward the fourth; who by the solicitation of the Duke of Burgundy, passed into France, with greater forces than any of his Predecessors had ever done; and yet this valourous Prince, who had beene Conquerour in nine severall Battels before, suffered the victory at this time to be taken from him, with the payment of 72000. Crownes: as Lewis of Brettailles, one of King Edwards servants, affirmed to Philip Commines; for which wee were derided by the French, as we well deserved. To conclude, money is of such match∣lesse force, as nothing almost but a free and liberall minde (which few men have) can withstand it; there is no baite to the golden hooke, nor weapon to the silver speare, nor Fort, be it never so strong, that can hold out against the Mulet charged with Treasure;* 1.120 It was the opinion of Jugurth (as Salust reporteth) that Rome it selfe, even then when she was at her highest pitch, was vendible; and would quick∣ly come to ruine, had she but had a Chapman, that would bid faire for her: Where∣fore seeing that money is such a reall advantage in the Warres, we may conclude; that whosoever prepareth for Warre, must first be provided of Money, the Si∣newes thereof.

CHAP. X.

Of the provision of Shipping.

SHipping is so necessarie in Maritine Countries, especially in Island▪ (as this Kingdome is) who on all sides, coast it upon the Sea; as that no Warre, neyther offensive nor defensive, can be well mana∣ged without it. If we be on the offensive part, our forces cannot be transported without Shipping; and if we bee on the defensive part, we cannot well keepe out an enemy without the same. For though the Enemy may make his approaches in one place, and en∣deavour to land there, yet then will the strength of the Island be drawne thither to impeach his landing; which the Enemy perceiving, can easily put out to Sea againe, and by next day be in another part of the Country, where he may gaine landing per∣adventure, with lesse hazard: But suppose resistance be made there also, yet can hee by putting to Sea againe, finde out a third, fourth, or fifth place, as convenient for his landing as eyther of the former; and I am sure we cannot have an Armie in every Harbour to impeach him, much lesse can wee with one Armie so speedily follow him, as to prevent his gaining the shore; because he can sayle farther in one night, than we can march in divers dayes, and if he hath gained our shore, hee can eyther sufficiently intrench himselfe, before we can possible come to impeach him; or hee can pillage and waste the Country, and be gone againe to another part of the Island, when he perceives the approach of our Land forces; and there also doe according to his owne discretion.

An example hereof we have in our owne Chronicles;* 1.121 Canutus the Dane, en∣tring the Thames with a mighty Navie, besieged the Citie of London; but being un∣able to prevaile there, he re-imbarkes his men, and sailes into the West of England; where at his pleasure, he landed them againe in Dorcetshire; there Edmond, sirnamed

Iron-side, after a long and tedious march met with him; which Canutus perceive∣ing, shippes his men againe, and enters the Severne; causing Edmund to beate upon the hoofe, to relieve Worcestershire; which the Dane had much pillaged. No soon∣er was Edmund arrived there, but Canutus re-imbarked againe, and came for Lon∣don; after him speeds Edmund: and then the Danes repaire to their shippes, and so returned for the Westerne parts. Thus they tyred Edmund and his whole Armie, with continuall marches; ever wasting the Country, before resistance could be made.

The like example, we have in Maurice Earle of Nassaw, who in the yeare 1590. shipped his forces, with forty Canons, pretending for Gertrudenberg; and to make the Enemie beleeve so, he sailed up the River so farre as Breda; the Enemie presently thrust into Gertrudenberg, such men and provision as was fit for resistance; which the Grave understanding, changed his course and sayled up the Rhine, and thence into the River Yssell; and so fell downe the streame before Zutphen, which he surpri∣zed, before the Arch-duke (who was 80. miles from thence) could come with his succours; when the Arch-duke approached, the Count retyres to his ships; and changing his course, arrives before Hulst in Brabant, which he surprized, ere the Spaniards well understood where he was; when the Arch-duke approached neare Hulst, Prince Maurice returnes to his Navie, and presents it before Nimmegem, in the Confines of Guilders, which he also surprized before the tired Spaniard could come with his forces.

By this I hope,* 1.122 you may see; how difficult it is for Islanders, and Maritine Countries, without Shipping, to make resistance against an invading Enemie; where∣fore Marriners and Shipping, must be maintained by us that are Islanders; else can we not long abide in safetie; and so I will conclude with Saint Pauls speech, Acts 27. 31. Vnlesse the Marriners abide in the Ship, ye cannot be safe.

CHAP. XI.

Of the provision of Souldiers, and Land-forces.

AS it is needfull for Islanders and Maritine Countries, to maintaine Shipping and Marriners; So is it as needfull for them to main∣taine Souldiers and Land-forces; which though they bee the last refuge, yet are they the safest and strongest defence, and must wholly be relyed on: For it is possible that the enemy may over-power us at Sea, or he may by helpe of Windes and Mistes, or other advantages that may bee gotten, gaine footing on our shore, though we have a more potent Navie than he on the Seas; and how shall we deale with them on land if we maintaine not our Land-forces and Martiall discipline? for which this Island hath beene very famous in times past; Should wee suffer our souldiery and the Art of Warre to decay amongst us, ten thousand of the Enemies well trained, would foile forty thousand of ours, that are not flesht, nor know the use of their armes, were they never so valiant; For Valour in the warres without skill, availeth but little: As may appeare by the example of Alexander the Great; who with no more than 40. thousand well-trained souldiers (Macedonians) in the fields of Adrastia, overthrew sixe hundred thousand Persians, that were unskilfull in the use of their Armes.

I would to God that notice might be taken hereof, and that greater care might be had of our Trainings than is; that they might no longer be used as matters of di∣sport, and things of no moment; but as needfull for the training up of souldiers, and enabling of men for the Warres, against times of danger and hostilitie; so should our Prince and his Kingdomes, receive both honour and securitie: But as Trainings are now used, we shall I am sure, never be able to make one good souldier; for our cu∣stome and use is now adayes, to cause our Companies to meet on a certaine day, and by that time the Armes be all viewed, the Muster-master hath had his pay (which is the chiefest thing many times he looks after) it drawes towards dinner time; and indeed

Officers love their bellies so well, as that they are loath to take too much paines about disciplining of their souldiers. Wherefore, after a little carelesse hurrying over of the Postures, with which the Companies are nothing bettered, they make them charge their Muskets, and so prepare to give the Captaine a brave volley of shot at his entrance into his Inne; where having solaced themselves a while after this brave ser∣vice, every man repaires home; and that which is not well taught them (oh the shame) is easily forgotten before the next Training. Whereas, if we trained but twice in the yeare, and at each time kept the Companies together, but three or foure dayes at the most; they would be better acquainted with their Armes and the use of them: so of∣ten practising of them at one time, would make them remember what is shewed, bet∣ter than seven yeeres practice as now we goe to worke.

But, peradventure some will thinke, that to keepe souldiers so long together at once, would damnifie the Country, by reason of neglect of husbandry: But as farre as I conceive, it would rather be beneficiall to the Country; for now every Moneth in the Summer, they lose a day by reason of the Training, and the greater part of the Souldiers use to fall a drinking after the Training, and happily lose the next day also; and so in the Moneths of Iune, Iuly, and August, which are busie times for Hay, and Harvest, they lose three dayes or more; which is more damage to them, than eight dayes in May and September, for these are the two times in the yeare, wherein husbandmen have more leisure, than in any other of the Summer-Moneths; in May, because all their seed is then in the ground, and no Hay nor Corne ready; in the latter end of September, because Harvest and Hop-time, for the most part is over, and wheat-seed not fully come; wherefore I thinke, with lesse damage, they might spare foure dayes together in May, and so many also in September, than to spare in every of the Summer moneths but one.

We have other inconveniences also which attend our Trainings, and hindreth our breeding of Souldiers; for we appoint our meetings, commonly neare some great Towne, as indeed it is meet for the reliefe of the Companies, but this inconvenience followeth thereon: when we are in the Field, many of our souldiers (so regardlesse are they of the Service) slip away, and are in the Innes and Tavernes tipling, when they should be exercising in the field. And this is another cause, why divers of them are so ignorant in the use of their Armes; hereby also they get an ill habit of drinking, which is the disgrace of our Nation and the losse of many of our souldiers, at such times as they are imployed in forraigne service: As appeared in the taking of the Groyn,* 1.123 where by immoderate drinking, many of the soldiers became senselesse and un∣serviceable, being altogether carelesse both of their proper healthes, present danger, and imployment. By this inordinate drinking, the Plague was bred among them; and (which is worse) the sword of the Enemie might have cut them off;* 1.124 had not the Generall, for redresse hereof, caused the head of all Wine-vessels, to be strucken out: according to a former president (upon the like occasion) in the conquest of S. Dominigo Jago▪ &c. For prevention of which abuse, the Captaines must either have more power to punish, or if they have power enough already, they must better put it in practice upon such malefactors, or we shall never be able to make them Soul∣diers.

Secondly, we admit into our trained Bands, without judgement or discretion, any that are offered, how unlikely, or uncapable soever they be of the Art militarie; yea, which is worse, we suffer them almost every Training to alter their men, and put in new ones, and how is it possible, with our best skill and paines, to make such men souldiers? Mercuries Image is not to bee made of every wood, nor eve∣ry dull heavie fellow, to be made a Mars or man of Warre; care must be had to cor∣rect this abuse also, if we will have able souldiers to oppose against an enemie. We must therefore herein imitate the worthy Citizens of London,* 1.125 who in the Reigne of Queene Elizabeth, chose out of their severall Companies, three thousand of the most likely and active persons, whom they appointed to be Pikemen and shot: These that we admit into our trained Bands, must be likely and active; for every one that will be a souldier, must have these two qualities in him; Likelinesse, and Ingenuitie to conceive the use of his Armes, and then Activitie and Abilitie of body, to put it in practice.

Thirdly, some be admitted for their wealthes sake, into Captaineships, which neither have courage, skill, nor delight in Armes themselves, nor discretion to com∣mand others; but I hope of these not many, yet if any, it is too many; for how can we hope to make our people souldiers, when they bee under blinde and ignorant guides;* 1.126 If the Blinde leade the Blinde, the issue (as our Saviour saith) will be; Ambo in foveam cadunt: We will not commit the teaching of our children to a Dunse, and what reason is there we should commit the leading of our souldiers to such a one? wherefore this must be remedied also, and I suppose it may easily be done by the ho∣nourable care of the Lord Lieutenant in every County: Had wee but all these abuses well corrected, me thinkes we might make our English trained Bands, paralell the best souldiers in Europe.

Now because in times of danger, it is requisite that the trained souldiers should be drawne to the Coasts to resist the Enemies landing; it were fit that men should pro∣vide themselves of double Armour, that we might also have an Army of the best men of the Kingdome, to guard the heart of the Land; and to keepe under dis-affected persons, if any such be; which Army as occasion served, might give succour to the Trained Souldiers,* 1.127 in case they should be in any danger; for it is not safe to hazard all upon the fortune and successe of one Battell; as King Harold did (contrary to the ad∣vice of his brother Girthe) by meanes of which he was defeated, his people disheart∣ned, his Enemy Duke William animated; and finally, thereupon followed his owne and all his subjects confusion: For upon his enemies marching forward after the Battell, every man for his owne particular safetie, reconciled himselfe to the Con∣querour; whereas, if there had beene an Army in the heart of the Land, to have se∣conded the other, it would both have bridled the Enemie, succoured the distressed Army, and have kept the Natives from revolting.

For the better composing of such an Army, in the heart of the Land; it were well also if all our great Cities and Townes, would imitate the famous Cities of London, and Westminster: which have instituted the two Artillery yards, for the training up of their ablest Citizens, in the use of their Armes; from whence not onely good soul∣diers, but also many good Leaders and Officers might be drawne, for the conduction of our forces in the heart of the Kingdome.

Furthermore, whereas divers Noblemen and Gentlemen keepe proper men to attend them; if they would but take care to have such Servants well instructed in the use of their Armes, both on Horse-backe and Foot, what exceeding profit and ho∣nour might redound to his Majesty, and his Kingdomes, if he should have any sud∣daine imployments? And those Servants thus souldier-like qualified, were as easily maintained and kept, and as fit for any other service, as those brave swaggering fel∣lowes; who had rather be like Sardanapalus among light women, than among Troopes of armed souldiers: And truly such Noblemen and Gentlemen their bee in divers places, who to doe their Prince Service, are at great charges to keepe di∣vers good and well ridden Horses, and divers Gentlemen with good furniture, to serve both on Foot and Horse-back.

Besides if every private man, whether in the City or in the Country, which keepes Coaches for their owne ease and reputation, would but have furniture for the riding and managing of such Horses, what an increase of strength would this bee in suddaine danger?

Lastly, whereas divers Gentlemen of the lower ranke, and rich Yeomen, keepe very good Teames of Horses for their private use; if such would but have furniture for one of their principle Horses, which when they had leisure, they might ride and manage for their recreation; this would make his Majesty, if occasion served, equall if not superiour in Horse, to any Prince in Europe; neither would it bee any great charge to any man, onely the purchase of the furniture, and armes, which once gotten, would last to Generations.

We would easily be perswaded to these things,* 1.128 had we but as great a care for the generall safety of the Kingdome, as we have for our owne particular security: which of us in there, that is not at great cost and charges, for provision of strong Gates, doores, and lockes, without; and of strong Closets and Chests within, for the preseruation of our owne private wealth and substance; but what will this private

care availe us, if we be negligent of the generall safety of the Kingdome? Should we by our senselesse security suffer an Enemy to picke the lockes that are to keepe him out of the Realme; What good would all our private Gates, Doores, Lockes, Clo∣sets, and Chests doe us, for the preservation either of our Estates or Lives? Where∣fore, let us be perswaded rather to respect the common good in keeping out an Ene∣my, by provision of Armes, and able souldiers, than in looking to our owne private honour and security, by building our houses strong and stately.

But some peradventure will thinke, this provision of land-forces, is altogether needlesse; because no Enemy can make warre upon us, we living in an Island; but upon very difficult termes: First, in regard of our dangerous Seas and Harbours. Secondly, in regard of our Navie and shipping; which upon intelligence, will bee fitted to entertaine them. Thirdly, in regard of our strong Castles, and Blockhouses; which will be able to impeach their landing. As for our Seas and Harbours, true it is they are dangerous,* 1.129 in regard of their high Tides; which flow (as Plinie sayth) 80. Cubits in height: yet for all this, our owne, and Neighbours shipping, (having good Pilots) dayly frequent them without damage or danger: and doubtlesse, what Enemy soever assaulteth us, will store himselfe with Pilots, which knowes our Seas and Harbours as well as our selves; as may appeare by the practice of the King of Spaine, in the yeare 1588. Wherefore, we may not be too secure, upon conceit of our dangerous Seas and Harbours.

Secondly, for our shipping; true it is, if we have sure intelligence, we should bee provided: and doubtlesse, would quell an enemy that should dare to approach them: But the Enemy to blinde our intelligence, may carry his designes in the Clouds, by making his preparation in divers parts and Ports of his Kingdome; as if they were to be sent to sundry places, and about sundry imployments; and yet all these severall Heets, after some time beating on the Seas, may meet and joyne; cutting a speedie passage through the waters to accomplish their designes. By such courses as these, our intelligence may be deceived, and so our Ships unfurnished. Yet suppose wee have sure knowledge of the enemies purpose, and have our Navie in readinesse, yet are there 32. points in the Compasse to sayle by, and our Island the Center; in one of these 32. points, must our Navie await the approaches of the Enemy; and he to eschew their opposition, and gaine our shore, may sayle by 20. other. Yea, though he sayle upon the same point whereon our Ships doe lye, yet may he without discovery escape them, by the helpe of a Mist or night. Or suppose our shippes discover and fight with them, yet we know victory in every fight is doubtfull; because no understand∣ing Enemy will put out to Sea, but with such a Fleet, as he thinkes is proportionable to his adversaries, whom he assayleth. Therefore, you see we must not relye upon our shipping.

Neyther may we relye too much upon our Block-houses and Forts, for the sure keeping out of an Enemy; for they are not very many: I am sure we have them not upon every Harbour where the Enemy may land; and those we have, are not very strong, not answerable to those Forts beyond the Seas. But though they were, yet experience teacheth us that upon swift currents they are of little use; for in such streames, if a Navie have but a merry Winde and Tide, a hundred sayle may passe by one of them, without having much damage; as was seene in the three yeares siege of Ostend,* 1.130 where the Arch-duke had planted two Batteries, one on the West, and the other on the East side of the Haven▪ yet the shippes every day passed too and fro from the Towne, and scarse one vessell touched, when 70. shot had beene made at a Fleet; and in the whole three yeares siege, scant 50. Vessels were sunke, when thou∣sands passed too and againe, every yeare.

Likewise, in Queene Elizabeths time, the King of Denmarke threatned to stop our Eastland Fleet at the Sound;* 1.131 yet they passed by his Castles, having one of the Queenes ships called the Minion, to lead them, and received no hurt; this so provo∣ked the King, that he made the best provision he possible could, to sinke them at their returne; but the Queenes ship led the way backe againe, and did not onely passe in safety, but beate downe part of the Fort of Elsenore.

So in the siedge of Antwerp the Duke of Alva so planted his Ordnance, that it was thought to be impossible for a Boate to passe them; yet the Zealanders having

faire Winde and Tide, passed by daily without damage. Wherefore, you see not∣withstanding all these colourable objections, Land-forces must be provided, if we will be in safety.

Now Land-forces being (as is afore-sayd) provided: Mr. Edmunds in his obser∣vations upon Caesars Commentaries, would have them thus ordered; Those that are appointed for the guard of the Coasts, he would ha••e divided into three divisions; viz, a Body, and two Wings; the Body to double the strength of the Wings, and to be quartered in this manner: the Body to attend the principle place supposed for the Enemies landing, the two Wings to lye upon some other Haven, where also is dan∣ger of landing, being about ten miles distant on either hand of the Body. If the Enemy shall assaile eyther of the Wings, the Body being quartered betweene them both, easily moves to eyther of their aydes. Or if he assault the Body, they from ey∣ther side being alike distant; as easily moves to its succour; and so doing, they may hold an Enemy play, till the forces of the Country comes downe. But in regard the Land is spacious and wide, it were well that souldiers should learne to ride on Horse-backe with their compleat Armes, for so might they move further (if a sud∣daine Alarum should ••e given) in one day, than on foot they can march in two. These are of great use in Germany, where they want Vessels for the speedy conveying of their men, which they call Dragons, which both on horse-backe and on foot do ve∣ry good service; and here might they be brought in use as well as there, wee being as well furnished with swift high-way Nagges, as any Nation in Europe.

And for further indangering of an Enemy, if there were good notice taken throughout all the Coasts of the Land, of those Markes which serves for the directi∣on of Shippes to recover their wished Harbour; these in time of danger being remo∣ved (unknowne to the Enemy) might bring him in very great hazard of our dange∣rous Rockes and Sands; and in regard our Sea-coasts are so large, and our Harbours so many, as that in every one of them we cannot have an Army to defend it, it were well that in places of advantage (such as winding waters be, which are commonly slow, and where at every turne they cannot have the helpe of the Winde) some more Forts were built; in such places they would indanger an Enemy, if he should dare to approach them; how ever they would secure the Coasts from rifling and robbing by Pyrates, as often they be in times of Hostility.

THE MANNER OF FORTI∣FICATION. SECT. III.

CHAP. XII.

The Abridgement of Geometrie, so farre as belongs to the Art of Fortification.

BEfore we can enter into this discourse of Fortification, we must first take a Survey of the Abridgement of Geometrie; so farre as is necessarie to bee used in this Art: Wherefore to begin with the first Propo∣sition.

Proposition, 1.

To divide a Line equally in the middest as A B, you must make two Arches C D, placing your com∣passes at the extreames A and B, closing them more than halfe of the Line; your Arches being made, draw your line of Intersection from C to D, and this line shall equally divide in two parts the line A B.

[illustration]

Proposition, 2.

To draw a perpendiculer upon a line (viz.) a line that falles in such sort upon another, that it makes two equall Angles; neither inclining to one side nor the other, so that it falles plumb as the line A B, upon the which you must raise a perpendicu∣ler; you must demeane your Compasses as in the first Proposition: and the line C D shall be the perpendiculer; so that it falles right upon the line A B, making two equall Angles.

[illustration]

Proposition, 3.

A point given upon a line, let fall a perpendicu∣ler; as the point given is C, upon the line A B, you must place your Compasse in the point C, and draw the Arch D E, then place your Compasse a∣gaine in F, and make the Arch H, and likewise in G, making the Arch I: lastly, draw from the point C, which shall answer to the point K.

[illustration]

Proposition, 4.

To draw a perpendiculer at the end of a line, viz. at the point A place your Compasses; making the Arch C and D: then place your Compasses in C, making the Arch E; and at the point E, draw the Arch F G: Lastly, from the point G, make the Arch H, then draw the line I A, and that shall be the per∣pendiculer upon the end of the line B A, at the point A.

[illustration]

Proposition, 5.

To make a line paralell by another (viz.) of equi∣distance; so that if they be drawne never so long, they shall never touch nor crosse one the other; let there be a line drawne as A B, above the which, there must be a Paralell made: to performe this, place your Compasses in A, making your Arch: E D, place them likewis•• in B, making the Arch F G: Lastly, you must draw the line I K, which must touch the ends of the two Arches; and those lines shall be paralell or equidistant.

[illustration]

Proposition, 6.

To make one Angle equall to another, as the An∣gle A B C, of the which we desire to make one e∣quall: First, draw the line D E, then place the point of your Compasses is B, making the Arch F G. Likewise, draw another Arch in the point D. Lastly, take the distance F G, and put it from H to I, drawing the line D K, which shall passe by the point I, and you shall finde the angle K D E, equall to A B C.

[illustration]

Proposition, 7.

To make a square of a line given; as the line A B, we must draw the perpendiculers at each end of the same length, the square will have then foure right Angles, and the sides equall.

[illustration]

Proposition, 8.

To make a Paralellagram (viz.) a long square having both the sides equally opposite; and foure right Angles: this is effected by the same rule the Square is made.

[illustration]

There are three sorts of Angles (viz.) a right Angle, as when a Line falles perpendicularly upon another; as,

[illustration]

The pointed Angle is more sharpe than the right, and is called Acute; as,

[illustration]

The Angle Obtuse, is more open than the right Angle; as,

[illustration]

Likewise the Triangles, are discerned by their Angles, when they have one Angle right; they are named as this Figure demonstrates.

[illustration]

When they have their three Angles pointed, they are named Origons.

[illustration]

When they have an Obtuse angle, they are tearmed Ambligon.

[illustration]

The Figure Rhombe hath foure equall corners, onely it hath two Obtuse Angles, and two Acute or pointed; this makes them differ from the Square.

[illustration]

The Circle, is a Figure made of a bending Line, the which is called a Circumference; and the line which pas∣seth by the middest or Center thereof, is termed a Diame∣ter; and the point in the middest is tearmed the Center: The Circle is divided into 360. Degrees, the halfe of it be∣ing 180. the quarter 90. degrees, being the contents of one right Angle, in regard the Circumference which closeth the said Angle, containes 90. parts of the said Circle.

[illustration]

Likewise, if we would know the contents of an Angle viz. how many degrees an Angle may be divided into; the Circumference will demonstrate by the parts that are con∣tained in it: As you may perceive the Angle to be of 45. de∣grees, because that from B, to C, there are 45. parts in the Circle, and from B, to D, is 90. being the fourth part of the Circle.

[illustration]

For the raising of Fortifications, we must observe what Figures are capable of Regular Fortification, and what are uncapable; which are termed Irregular.

Regular Fortifications are such formes or figures, which containe in them Angles sufficiently equall, and capable for the direct answering one to another; sixe points being the least that may be admitted, and so upwards: all figures under, are termed Irregular; as the figure Pentagon consisting of Five points, the Foure-square, the Triangle, &c.

We will first begin with Irregular-figures used in Fortification; of which the Pentagon is the best, in regard it hath more capacity in it, than the Foure∣square, or Triangle, or Halfe-Moones, &c. The forme of this Figure hath five points, by reason of five Lines that divide the Circumference in five e∣quall parts, as by this Figure appeares.

[illustration]

The next Irregular Figure, is the Foure square; and is capable of foure Bulworkes, upon each point one; and is tearmed a Skonse, as the Figure demon∣strates.

[illustration]

The next Irregular Figure is the Triangle, being farre inferiour in strength to the former, in regard it is capable but of three Bulworks, upon each point one; as the Figure demonstrates.

[illustration]

The next Irregular Figure, is the Horne-worke; and is most proper for the lodging of men in it, and for the securing of the principall walles and Bul∣works of a Fort, from the ruining of the shot.

[illustration]

All Forts framed without Bulworks, are eyther Redoubts, or halfe Moones; of which are divers fa∣shions: as first, a quadrangle Redoubt.

[illustration]

The next is a Triangle Redoubt.

[illustration]

A Redoubt flanquer'd.

[illustration]

Of halfe Moones, there be two sorts; the first,

[illustration]

The second kinde of halfe Moones whose strength consists in being flanquered from other Workes, as after shall more fully be demonstrated, and deciphered; after we have demonstrated the first Regular figure, which is the figure Sexagon.

[illustration]

The first Regular Figure is called Sexagon, be∣cause it hath sixe equall sides, dividing the Cord in sixe points (upon which points are sixe Bulworkes to be raised) The same proportion of distance your Compasses take, in making the Circumference, with∣out stirring them, being plac'd sixe times upon the Circumference, makes the said Figure in the Mar∣gent.

[illustration]

The second Regular Figure is termed Septagon, because it containes 7. points of equall distances in the Circumference, and this is of greater defence than the former; for the more points the Circum∣ference is capable of, the greater is the resistance; as the Figure in the Margent shewes.

[illustration]

The third Regular Figure is termed Octagon, because it containes eight sides, the Circumference being divided by eight points of equall distance; the rest, for brevity sake, we will onely name: by these already described, any Figure, of what diversity of sides soever; most easily may be framed.

[illustration]

Nonagon,* 1.132 is a Figure of nine sides.

Decagon,* 1.133 a Figure of Tenne sides.

Vndecagon,* 1.134 a Figure of Eleven sides.

Duodecagon,* 1.135 a Figure of Twelve sides; & sic us{que}

ad infinitum: These are sufficient to serve for the use of Fortification; because it is ve∣ry rare, that any Towne hath more than twelve Bulworks; and as I have said before, these Figures are called Regular, because they have their sides, and their Angles equall: all other formes are called irregular.

CHAP. XIII.

How to Line and Stake out any Bulworke upon a Regular Fi∣gure.

THere can be no perfect Fortification made, without the use of these precedent Figures: as for our example, the Figure Sexagon is to have sixe Bulworks (viz.) one upon every Angle; and so ac∣cordingly of the rest of the Figures, so many Angles as many Bulworkes. But first, before we begin to fortifie any place, wee are to consider the scituation, and the forme and fashion of it; to the end we may the better know how many Bulworkes will be requisite: wherefore we will begin to fortifie the Figure Sexagon, because it is the first Regular forme; as for the Triangle it selfe, it is altogether unproper to bee fortified, because the Angles of it are too sharpe, and pointing out: and likewise for the uncapablenesse of the place: for such Bulworkes as are made upon three Angles, doe so farre point out and extend themselves, that they are of no strength to releeve each the other: Likewise the square Figure is very rarely fortified with Bulworkes, unlesse in case of necessity, where it may bee help'd and assisted by some naturall strength, as Skinkens-Skonse by Cleve, is naturally fortified and strengthened with two great Rivers surrounding it. Likewise the Figure Pentagon, although the points of it are more apter to be fortified, yet it is not capable of all those essentiall parts, that a perfect fortification ought to have. Therefore we will begin to comment upon the Figure Sexagon; and as we have shewed before, this Figure is to have sixe Bul∣workes (viz.) one upon every Angle: Wee are further to suppose, that the Figure aforesaid containes in circuit 180. Geometricall paces, and five feet to every such pace; so that every side betweene Angle and Angle, will containe 30. paces; and being thus divided into sixe equall distances, of 30. paces in each, the whole amounts to 180. paces; for sixe times 30. makes as before, 180. Now it remaines to make a Scale, as you may perceive in this Figure following, marked with A B, with the which Scale we will give all the proportions of this Fortesse, which we now intend to set forth for an example to the ingenuous Practitioner.

The manner how to Line out a Fort, with the Bulworks belonging to it.

[illustration]

The Figure being drawne, and the Scale made after the forme in the precedent Figure described; then place the point of your Compasse to the Scale, and take 30. paces: and setting the point upon each Angle make therewith a Circumference, as you perceive upon the angle marked with the letter C, which Circumferences will justly proportion the signes of each Bulworke, as you may perceive it to be 30. paces on each side,* 1.136 which makes 60. Then for the making of the Flanckes to the Bulworke, you must take 30. paces also: Then you must draw a perpendicular line from P to Q, of 30. paces, as the figure next following doth teach you: next we are to draw the line of defence, by which the Bulworke is defended, drawne by the Curtaine (viz.) from S, and passeth by the point Q, and runneth into the Bulworke R: View the following Figure.

Lastly, the Ditch ought to be drawn with a paralell line by the face of the Bulworks, (viz,) from the lines R q, the length of 30. paces, for to proportion out the length of the foresayd Ditch; as appeares by the line drawn from M to N, the Bastions of this Fortresse are almost flanquered, with the third pa•• of the whole Curtaine: And this Fortresse hath the Flanckes Fichans, as some Enginieres terme it, because the line of defence which proceeds from the Casmats, is not paralell; and besides, the Flancke Fichant produceth a longer Pand,* 1.137 than the other kinde of shouldred Flanckes doe; as appeares in the figure, by P and S. for the line P q, is a Flancke Fichant, and very serviceable in two respects; as appeares by Mounsieur Bellayes discourse, Pag. 11. Touching the Enemies securing himselfe from the Canon, in the point of a Bulworke, after a breach made, that the Flancke Fichant will be most offensive to him in that place; as will appeare if a line be drawne from the Angle of the flanck, to the flancked Angle, for from thence a peece of Artillery will fetch him out of the point, or cause him to goe farre in, or you may fetch him out from any place of the flancke neere to

it, also by taking the defence from that part of the Curtaine, you may place shot be∣twixt it and the flancke to defend the flancked Angle: Indeed Errard hath made mention of a cheaper way of fortifying, by deciphering a Bulworke with a more ob∣tuse Angle, a shorter Pand, and a Bulworke with a shorter Diameter than this I have set forth: and as it is of lesse charge, so it is of small defence, in regard it is deficient of parts to defend it selfe: Now I will further shew, both by discourse and figure, another kinde of fllancking, of this Exagon forme in the next Chapter following:

The figure of this precedent discourse followes.

[illustration]

CHAP. XIIII.

How to fortifie the Exagon Figure, with the second kinde of Flankes.

IN the precedent Figure, you are directed how to line out the Bul∣workes upon an Exagon Figure; and although the Flankes thereof are so much discovered, that the enemy may ruine them in a short time: I shall now endeavour to shew you another kinde of Flancke with a shoulder, as the next following Figure hath, marked with, a a to the end that the Flancke B should be covered from the force of the shot; So that if the enemy should plant his Ordinance upon the battery C. to shoot against the Flancke B. it cannot possibly make a breach, because it must first ••atter downe the shoulder A. which will nothing advantage them to doe; or if the enemy thinkes to passe by the shoulder with his shot, hee cannot possibly hit the Flancke, but must grase against the Curtin: And for this onely purpose the shoulder was first invented to joyne to the Flancke. Now for the forming the Shoulder, you must part with your compasses, the length of this Flancke into three equall parts, and take two of these parts to frame the Shoulder A. the third part is the length of the Flancke B. which shall bee tenne paces long, and fifty foot deepe into the Bulworke: Likewise the sayd Shoulder ought to bee drawne right opposite to the point of the Bulwork D. view the Figure, and you shall perceive this allowance of depth into the Bulworke, maketh a short line betwixt the extreames of the Curtin B. B. especially if the Wing bee allowed but 120 feete: whereby some may judge it the lesse defensive, yet it will not prove so, in regard the Defendants (in case the enemy hath once gotten the Bul∣worke) may place more men upon the reintrenchment, then the enemy can place upon that line: But indeed the Flancke lieth more open, whereby the Artillery there∣in may bee dismounted more easily, then if the defence did proceed from the Angle of the Flancke, as you may perceive by the peeces of Ordnance planted upon the Catte E. how they directly beate into the middest of the Flancke of the Bulworke, passing downe by the Line of defence: View the Figure following. I shall take an occasion to frame a Table of the dementions used in Fortifying of Bulworks: with the Pera∣pets, Footsteps, Counter-skarps, False-brayes, and Sally-ports described.

[illustration]

CHAP. XV.

How to Fortifie a place that is not capable of a Regular Fortification.

SVch Figures and places may be termed Irregular, which have not their Angles and sides equall; and being constrained to fortifie such places as for example, For the guarding of some ••oords of Rivers, or For∣tifying upon some Rocke, or upon some point of the Sea, for the pre∣servation of some Port. In these necessities, wee are to accomodate our selves according to the nature of the place, and save the expence of money and time, which a royall Fort would cost: for indeed there is nothing so strong as such places that are strong by nature, as you may perceive by the subsequent Figure, which hath two broad Rivers compassing two sides, which makes it very strong; so that the simplest Bulworkes there, are as defensible as the artificiallist: observe the Figure, and you shall perceive the two halfe Bulworkes in the farthest sides of the River marked with E. and F. are but halfe Flanckes, because it is not to bee feared that the enemy can gaine the worke by any of those sides, but rather on that side where there is firme Land, wherefore the Bulworke C. is as a perfect forme. Likewise you may take notice of the halfe Moones, M. and N. which are places of retreate, for those that shall defend without, beyond the Mote. The Port of the Towne is at P. the Bridge is O. upon that side of the great River B. because there the enemy cannot so easily approach to raise a battery, being scanted in ground, the sayd River not allow∣ing them space: The place you see marked with H. and L. are the Platformes, and so called, because they are a plaine forme without Flanckers, and are very commodi∣ous to plant along by the Rivers. Further, observe that the Enginiere is to consider in all such irregular places, how many Bulworkes it can well containe: for to raise more Workes then needs must; or to place fewer, whereby the distances from one Worke to the other will bee too farre, will prove a great fault; wherefore by the scale, you may take all the true distances; as for those sides the Rivers surrounds, few Workes will serve: provided alwaies, they bee well guarded and Man'd; for often∣times the enemy will put in practise some strattagem against that side you thinke your selfe securest of: For hee may make Bridges of Cords, and scale the Walls, which will be a most difficult thing for him to doe, if you bee provided for him afore hand, for such an encounter: Neverthelesse it will bee very good to make a halfe Moone, where the Guard may have certaine Boats secure, to take a view up and downe the River; especially the head of the River, towards X. least any Boates should come downe the streames; and likewise to stay all Boates that shall passe by day and night, and search them, least they taste the same sharpe sauce that Skinkens-Skons, and Breda once tasted of: the one having Souldiers embarqued under Hay, the other under Turffe; who tooke their opportunities and surprized the Fortes, view the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. XVI.

Another Irregular Figure fortified.

IN the next Figure following you may perceive fortified (be∣ing surrounded with water) only one open space, betwixt A and B. which must bee very strongly Fortified, because it is the likeliest place for the enemy to make his approaches: For prevention whereof, the two halfe Bulworkes C. and D. are raised, with two Flanckes towards one side, to the end it should bee double defended (viz) from the Flancks A. and B. Likewise upon each side by the Sea, there be sim∣ple Bulworkes for to lodge the Cannons there, for the de∣fence of the Port, the which is to bee shut with a Chaine-bridge or Draw-bridge: Next you may behold a Worke called a* 1.138 Horne-worke, which is framed of two halfe Bulworkes E. F. the which Horne-worke is defended from the bulworkes C. and D. and in the middest thereof is a halfe Moone, which serves for a retreate and defence of the Port: H These out-workes are excellent good, to cause the enemy to lose a great deale of time in winning them; and when they bee gained, they shall immediately bee constrained to forsake them; for they lying open to the inward Workes, will soone force them out with the shot that shall be made from the Bul∣workes C. D. Lastly, these halfe Moones are of excellent use to hinder the enemy from mining under the Bulworks, as the Hollanders and others have found by experi∣ence. The Figure followes in the next page: Viewing the same, and examining the particulars of it with your Compasses, and comparing it with this demonstrative discourse, will make you familiar and better able to understand it.

[illustration]

CHAP. XVII.

A third Irregular Figure fortified.

THis third Figure is fortified with five Bulworks, insomuch that it may be called Pentagon irregular; wherein we must consider, the diversity of sides, some being long, the rest short; and raising Bulworks upon these points, which falles accidentally irregular: some being too short, the rest too long, as you may perceive by the side NO, to be more by the Scale than 180. paces, which ought to be the ordinary distance betweene Bulworks, * 1.139 or 200. for the longest: Likewise you perceive QQ, is lesse than 180. and 160. shorter than the rest; here you may observe these faults, which a Regular Fort hath not, every Bul∣worke being of an even distance, eyther of 180. or 200. paces at the most, or 180. and 160. at the least, is the true distance, to raise your Bulworks in an equality of di∣stance; that which you see in the figure to be advanced beyond the shoulder, and likewise above the Curtaine, as you may see from N to R, and from O to S, and from P to T, and from Q to V, and so of the rest; not taking the like distance for the o∣ther flancke, as you see by PX, and QY▪ the ordering of these differences ought to lye in the judgement of the judicious Enginiere: Let us observe the Bulworke N, which ought to be sharpe pointed, because it is upon an Angle very sharpe, long, and crooked, and out of distance to be flancked as you may see by N. To prevent the ad∣vantage an enemy might take if the point should be made out its full length, * 1.140 accord∣ing as the ground would require, it is thought the safest way to cut off the said point M, and to fashion it with a double point, so as it may defend it selfe, and strengthen the Bulworke the better, and a great deale lesse paines and travell in raising of it; for indeed the very point of the Bulworke must have beene raised a great way in the water, as you may observe by the prickes. Take notice likewise of the two halfe Moones before each port, which have their defences from the two Bulworks on each side of them; and as I have sayd before, they serve for a retreat to those that guard without, and likewise defend the Ports from suddaine surprises: Further, observe that the Flanckes are but 20. paces, because of the small distance, for indeed their needs no such large flanckes; for if they were bigger, then the Bulworke should extend it selfe further into the River, which would be a mighty charge, and unprofit∣able; as you may perceive by the Bulworke q, the pricked lines that are marked in the water. Lastly, observe for a generall Rule, that in all workes of this nature, if the line totall of any side, be 170. paces, or thereabouts, that then the Curtaine flanckes is made about 200. paces; if shorter, then the Curtaine shorter proportio∣nably; alwayes provided, that the flanckes looking each upon other, upon each Cur∣taine, be neare of of equall length: for the shoulders, it maketh not much if they dif∣fer in the line, so they be of a sufficient thicknesse. View the subsequent Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. XVIII.

A fourth Irregular Figure fortified.

IN this fourth Figure, you may perceive two severall For∣tifications; the Angles being accordingly divided by the waters branching out, the one being marked with A, the other with B; you may suppose it to be an Arme of the Sea, branching it selfe into three Rivers, in the forme of a Triangle; and is fortified onely upon the sides, to∣wards the Land D, for on the waters side they are suffi∣ciently fortified with the wall made defensive with plat∣formes E. Likewise you may observe the forked Bul∣workes. FF. This trianguler worke, is of no strength to be used upon Plaines, (as before I have shewed) but onely where great waters are; wherein consisteth their chiefest strength. And they were invented, to keepe and secure the mouth of Havens; where the Governour of the ••ort is to command the Ships that ride by, from the Rampart G, and cause them to pay Toule; the Water-Port is to be below the Rampart G. The Figure followes in the next page, being the 52,

[illustration]

CHAP. XIX.

A fifth Irregular Figure fortified.

YOu may suppose the one side of this Figure marked with H, to be some Rocke or Moorish ground unaccessible; the other side, at the letter L, is firme land: wherefore it behoveth that the side L, should be very well fortified, according to the rules of a Regular figure, that the Ene∣my may finde it very difficult to gaine the place; upon the other side, the Walles are to be made very high, for feare of surprizall, without any workes of great conse∣quence, will suffice. There ought to be also, upon the Moorie or Rockie side, H, a good Ditch, yea though the Rocke be so high, that no water can come into the Ditch; and if it should likewise happen that the other ditch L, on the Land-side should be dry, and without water, yet there is a little Wall that runnes along the Ditch at BB, which is very profita∣ble, to defend the said ditch: as you may perceive by those souldiers there defending, for they cannot be annoyed by the Enemie, because they are below and under the shot of the Canon: Note this kinde of Fortification is to be used but upon necessitie; for no Fort whatsoever can be accounted strong, unlesse the ditches of it will stand full of water: Those ditches that are dry, serves onely to defend the Counterscharpe, that which is full of water hinders the Enemy from making his surprises; as wee shall more at large discourse of afterwards. View the Figure following in the 54. Page.

[illustration]

CHAP. XX.

A discourse how the Ancients fortified their Townes.

HAving sufficiently discourst about Irregular Figures of Fortification, it now remaines, that we should take notice of such Fortifications, as in former ages have beene used for the safeguard of Townes; and so take an occasion to discourse of the imperfections of our walled Townes here in England, that we may not bee deceived in putting our confidence in the strength of them; and afterwards wee shall observe the strength and perfection that our moderne Enginieres have brought this Art unto: Wherefore note, the first Fortifications that the Ancients made use of, was naturall; as strengthened by Waters, by Rockes, by Mountaines, inaccessible and Moorish quag-mires. We may see this by the King Atilla, entering into Italy with great force and strength, in such sort, that hee vanquisht all; except, such as escaped and fied for their defence, into an Island in the Mediterranean Sea, where they releeved themselves; The place is now called Venice, being partly scituated in the Sea, and partly upon Moores and Quagmires; so that the Enemy could not come at them, neither with Horse nor foot: but finding these places naturally strong, not to be sufficient to defend them, they began to joyne Art to helpe fortifie Nature; laying a foundation round the Towne, of Bricke, Stone, and Lime; building thereon very high Walles, with square Towers, some 60. paces a sunder; from whence they did defend themselves and their Walles. Rome is the most antientest Fortification; which by the aforesayd Walles, the River Tyber, and the great Hilles, they made shift to increase their Dominions. Likewise, in England we have divers old Townes, as Colchester, &c. But in short time, Art grew more perfect; and finding those foure square Towers to be weake and unprofitable, by reason of the Corners, being bro∣ken, the rest of the Wall soone gave way to their Engines; wherefore they inven∣ted Towers of a rounder forme, as being farre stronger, like to the Fortification a∣bout Ipswich, and Norwich, as in the next Chapter we shall discourse of: View the Figure belonging to this discourse, following.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXI.

A Second way which the Ancients used to fortifie their Townes.

THe former ages finding a disability in this former Forti∣fication; they invented round Towers, being far strong∣er by reason of their equalnesse in strength on all sides; so that the Enemy with their Rams and battering En∣gines, could not demolish those round Towers, untill they had learned a way to get the foot of them, and to inmine themselves under, so that the Defendants could not spie them; as you may perceive by the Letter A. at the foot of the Tower: So that in short time, by helpe of their Engines, they would overturne their Towers; and they within could not offend them from the next Tower, as you may see by the Line drawne from A. to B. Wherefore they were constrained to finde out a remedy to strengthen themselves better. By this you may see what poore strength our An∣cient Walled Townes are of, if an Enemy should oppose: I could wish better Forti∣fications about some eminent Townes neere the Sea. View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXII.

The Third way the Ancients used to Fortifie their Townes.

THey having found the defects by woefull experience that ac∣companied this simple kinde of Fortifications, they inven∣ted a third way, which was to Fortifie with a kinde of Angled Figure; which Angles extended equally out, and the former Ages termed them Bastions: And these kinde of Fortifications were so equally framed, that the Enemy could finde no place to secure themselves under the Walls of it; but that the Defendants could easily annoy them: then they thought themselves their Crafts-masters, and that they had attained the perfection of the Art of Fortifying: But experience soone taught them, that their Bastions were some longer then the other, and being altogether too little; and so consequently of small defence: wherefore they were constrained to make another Worke in the middest of the Curtin, within the Ditch, as you may per∣ceive at A. the which they called a Platforme; which they thought could streng∣then the defence of the Curtin: but they found it did them more hurt than profit; be∣cause it hindred the Passage of the Shot, from the Flancke of the Bulworke C. that it could not Scower to the point of the other Bulworke B. because of the hinde∣rance of the Platforme A. So that they were new to begin, as by the subsequent Figure you may perceive.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXIII.

The Fourth way the Ancients used to Fortifie their Townes.

THe Platforme in the Precedent Figure, which was devised to de∣fend the Bulworkes, were soone found to bee of small resistance: Whereupon they did not much change the fashion of the Figure, but the place of the Platforme, whereas before it was set below: Now they plac'd it above upon the Rampiere, in the middest of the Curtin, in the forme of a Quadrangle; the other being in forme of a Circle, being in a place the enemy could not approach to: they counted the matter not great, of what forme it was, so it could lodge foure or sixe Peeces of Ordance to defend on both sides of it, as you may perceive by this Peral∣lellagram B. So that this hath changed its name from a Platforme to a Cavallier.

[illustration]

But as before I have sayd the perfection of Fortification being not fully found out; they found this kinde of Caviliere to bee a very feeble defenc, because it stood in such an eminent place: For wee must take this for a Maxime; that all such high places, if they bee not naturall, are subject to bee Battered and Ruin'd by the enemy: where∣fore in short time they invented another way; yet indeed, not very proper to de∣fend the Bulworkes, yet very good to discover into the Plaines, about the Fort; and to hinde the approaches of the enemy, and to beate downe their Gabions and Tren∣ches at their first comming.

CHAP. XXIIII.

The Fift way the Ancients used to Fortifie their Townes.

THe Ancients having found out the precedent defects to have proceeded from the smalnesse of their Bul∣workes; they thought the best way was to make their Workes bigger: So they began to frame them according to our moderne fashions, of which wee shall afterwards discourse; onely wee will content our selves to observe the Figure following, being the first invention of Fortresses: and this kinde of Fortifying was in those daies thought to bee the most perfect, untill our moderne Warres found out the way to frame their Bulworks, with round thick Shoulders to cover and secure the ••••anckes from the violence of the Shot, as in the beginning of this Booke I have shewed: Now it remaines in the next Chapter, to shew the reasons of our moderne Fortifications, with all their dependancies; And first wee will dis∣course of the true measures and proportions of them, which at this day are in use, and accounted the most perfectest that ever were invented; which wee account now to bee infallible Maximes of this Art: View the Figure following.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXV.

Of the Measures and Proportions of our moderne Fortresses.

WE have formerly discourst of ancient Fortresses, of their de∣fects and remedies; Now it remaines wee should in∣treate of our moderne workes, which are now brought to bee most perfect, in regard of those Ancient Fortifica∣tions before mentioned: And first wee will speake of their measures and proportions; the which must serve us for Maximes, because they are grounded upon very good and infalible reasons, as experience hath shewed, and doth teach us dayly.

I. That Fortresses are composed of many Bul∣workes, and that the sayd Bulworkes should bee of equall distances, and of equall An∣gles; the ground being so large, that a Regular worke may bee raysed thereon, as neere as may bee equally: As for Irregular workes, necessity must drive us to make them; wanting the commodiousnesse of ground, that the Regular Figure should have.

II. The Bulworkes ought to bee large and spacious, to the end they may Re-intrench themselves, and the point or Angels as blunt as possible may bee made.

III. That the entery or mouth of the Bulworke, ought to bee from Sixty to Seventy paces (viz.) Thirty or Thirty five from each end of the Curtin, to the midest or point of the entrance into the mouth of the Bulworke.

IIII. That the defence of the Bulwarkes, ought to bee taken from the third part of the Curtin; at the least, as in all Formes or Figures of 6. 7. and 8. and of those of 9. 10. 11. 12. of the halfe of the Curtin. As for the Pentagon, it will permit the taking of the fift part of the Curtin, because the Angels are not so much pointed. As for the square Figure, it ought not to bee put amongst the number of Fortresses, and much lesse the Tryangle; for they onely are to bee raised in places of advantage, which are strong by nature, or in a Campe or siege of a Towne.

V. The Line of defence (viz.) the distance that is taken from the Flanke, to the point of the Bulworke opposite to it; ought to bee 180 paces (viz.) five foot to each pace at the least, and 200 at the most: Although Erard alloweth not above 122•• Toyses, sixe foot to the Toyse Amounts to 735 feete: But his errour I shall after∣wards shew; and likewise the reason why I allow 265 foot more then he doth.

VI, The Line of the Flancke ought to bee Thirty paces, and if the Shoulders of the Bulworke bee comprised in it; then the Flancke ought to bee larger by the third part, (viz.) tenne paces, and twenty paces for the formi••g of the Shoul∣ders.

VII. The Ditch or Moate, ought to bee thirty paces broad, and running e∣ven by the sides of the Bulworkes.

VIII. In the middest of the Ditch, there ought to bee a Cave digged deeper then the rest, some foure paces broad.

IX. The Counter-scarpe there, ought to bee framed, with Stones without Lyme.

X. Vpon the Counterscarpe, there ought to bee an Alley three paces broad, with a breast-worke ready to defend them; so that they may kneele and lay their Pee∣ces over it to discharge: and the Ground is to bee made all even beyond it, that the enemy may have no Bancke to defend himselfe.

XI. All the good earth which is beyond the Counterscarpe, ought to bee thrown away, a Musquet shot from it; and all kinde of Stones to bee plac't there in the roome of it, which will infinitely offend the enemy, being battered about with the shot from the Walles of the Fort.

XII The halfe Moones which are plac't in every Angle betweene two Bulworks, ought to bee forty paces (viz.) twenty on either side; and the defence thereof,

ought to bee alwaies taken as neere as possibly may bee towards the Curtin; the Ditch therof being foure Paces at least in breadth.

XIII. The Ditch or Moat, ought to bee Thirty foot deepe; being well stored with all kinde of Fish, which may bee a great helpe to sustaine them in the time of a Siege.

XIIII. The Wall or foundation of the Fort, ought to bee thirty foot high.

XV. The Rampier above the foundation of the Wall, ought to bee likewise 30. foot in height, and 20. foot broad; both Curtins and Bulworks, are to have a Parrapet answerable, and a foot-step for the Muskatiers to step upon, to make them of sufficient height to discharge their Musquets over.

XVI. Vpon the entery or mouth of every Bulworke, there ought to bee a Cava∣liere eight foot high, and twenty paces large: So that three or foure Peeces of Ca∣non may bee planted there for the making of Counter-batteries.

XVII. The place of the Hankes ought to bee fifty foot broad, and 75. or 80. foot long.

XVIII. The rightnesse of the Shoulders ought to bee 50. foot long, in such sort that it may shoot right to the point of the opposite Bulworke.

XIX. That such Sally-Ports as are necessary, ought to bee 15. foot broad, made under the Wall in the Hancke, betweene the Shoulder of the Bulworke and the end of the Curtin, to bee Brick't over like a Vaute; and at each end of it, a very strong foulded Gate. These Sallyes are for the Souldiers to passe into the False-Bray to de∣fend the Moat, and the foot of the Bulworkes and Curtins.

XX. The False-••ray, ought to bee 15. or 16. foot broad from the foot of the Bul∣work, to the Moat: At the very foot of the Rampiers, is planted a bed of quick-set, two foot broad, which will not onely hinder the enemy from sudden running through it; but also stayes up such earth as shall bee battered downe, from falling into the Moat: Next the Moat, the False-bray hath a breast-worke, three or foure foot high for the Musquetiers to shoot over to defend the Moate.

XXI. That above the end of the Shoulder called the Orillion, there ought to bee an Imbracer, for to place a Peece of Ordnance, to batter against the Ruines that the Enemy should make, in the face of the Bulworke.

XXII. That the Rampiers ought to bee made as much sloping, as they are high; which is their naturall sloping: pinching inwards, that the Water may shoot off: View the Table following, and reason will not only allow it, But will also reprehend Mounsier Bellay, page 21. who allowes onely one foot slope, in 8. or 10. foot height: So that a Wall being 60. foot high, by his Rule shall have but 6. foot slope; which would make it so steepe, that without the battering of the Canon, every shower of Raine will wash it and moulder it downe: Observe your best Fortifications, as Zut∣phen, and Densburge, in Gilderland are by this rule framed.

XXIII. That such foundations of Stone or Bricke-workes as are made against Waters, or otherwise to beare up the Fortifications of Earth; ought to bee 5. foote broad below, and 3. foot above, and to slope halfe their height: Mounsier Bellay would have them Perpendicular, but hee is wide from the true marke.

XXIIII. There must bee a Parrapet or brest-worke, upon the outside of the Ram∣pier, 8. foot high, and 30. foot broad, onely upon the Bulworkes: the Curtins needs not bee so thicke by •• parts: at the foot of the Parrapet is a banck a foot and halfe high or more to stand upon, for their easie shooting over: The Parrapet is to slope upon the top of it, that they may levell downe to the Motes side by the False-bray.

Now because these proportions, of Heights; Depths, Lengths, and Bredths, with the true slopings, cannot so well be demonstrated by Figure, in the deliniating out the parts of a Fort. I have devised a way by making a Table which shall give you satis∣faction: wherefore suppose every of the little squares to bee five foot, every way square: So that by the number of them, you may easily perceive the Dimensions of every part of the Fortresse: The Table followes in the next Page.

CHAP. XXV.

Of Fortresses in generall, and of their Perfections and Imperfections.

A Fortresse may well bee compared to a man: The Bulworkes are the Head; the Hanckes, the Eyes; the Curtins, the Armes; and so of the other parts: Now if the Head bee not wel-disposed, then all the other Members will bee found ill: even so those Bulworkes which are not formed according to the disposition which is requisite, all the Fortresse is imperfect; and is subject to five kinde of maladies, or imperfections.

The first is the Battery,* 1.141 when the Enemy raises his Cavaliers, and with his Canon, batters downe the Walls, ruining them to nothing which the Art of man artificially had built: shewing that nothing can bee made so perfect, but it may bee defaced.

The second is the Mine,* 1.142 which is made under the Earth, and passeth under the Counter-scarpe and Moate, untill it comes under the Bulworke, and so blowes it up with Powder.

The third is Treason;* 1.143 enticing the chiefe Officers with guifts and monies, and gaining the affections of inferiour Souldiers, by faire promises and gifts; whereby they are allured to yeeld up the Fort into the hands of the Enemy.

The fourth maladie,* 1.144 is sudden surprizes: as when an Enemy betakes him to a course, contrary to the opinion of many, faining some other designe, Marching all night, Arives at point of Day, without making any noice: Plants his Petards against the Ports, and his Scaling-ladders upon the Walls, making himselfe Master both of Bulworkes, Rampars, and Ports, before those of the Guardes are sensible of it; espe∣cially before they can bee capable of resistance.

The fift and last is a long Siege,* 1.145 which ruines the Workes of the Fortresse, wastes their Men, Money, Provision, and Amunition; whereby the Fort and Souldiers should bee sustained, being thereby brought to such an exigent of distresse; that they are constrained to render up the Fort,* 1.146 rather then perish by famine, sicknesse, and the like. For the remedying and preventing of these grievous maladies and imperfecti∣ons; wee ought like the wise Physitian, alwaies to have some soveraigne Salve or Antidote to apply according to the cause thereof: wherefore it is great wisedome for us to examine from point to point, the defects, that wee may attaine the perfect knowledge of them; whereby wee may gaine honour by making the perfecter cure: Wherefore first let us examine the Battery, and the defects thereof; that wee may apply the remedy that is proper to it. Batteries are made after divers fashions, as first, the Enemy making divers Gabions or great Baskets, placing them accordingly, and filling them full of good earth, which serves them for a shelter, in making their first approaches: Afterwards approaching neerer, they raise their Cavaliers, and plant their double Canons thereon, to batter downe the defences, and ruine their Bul∣workes; then by their approaches in Trenches under the earth, just to the side of the Counter-scarpe,* 1.147 they may come to ruine their Flanckes, which the defendants cannot see to prevent; when at the first approaches they make use of Gabions: Those with∣in the Fort must helpe themselves by making Counter-batteries of their Cavaliers, and batter downe their Gabions; which may easily bee done, if the Cannoneers bee skilfull, whereby the Enemy will bee kept in continuall action; for there is no doubt but that the Enemy makes approaches, to the end (as being Master of the Field) hee shall gaine his desires in a short time: But the Defendants within the Fort, may make him loose his time, which is the principall thing a good Fortresse can doe, for they must expect reliefe to assist them, to cause his departure sooner; or that the deadnes of Winter will make the Enemy retreat against his will. The principall thing to bee required from the strength of a Fort, is to keepe off the Enemy, and delay him; ma∣king him loose his time,* 1.148 nothing being more precious then the same: As to bee al∣wayes blockt up to perpetuity in a Fort, is not the thing requirable: To answer the objection that the Enemy may batter downe our walles, and ruine our Bulwarkes,

A Table of the Heights and Proportions of every particular Limbe of a Fort, belonging to a Fort.

[illustration]

L The Counter scarpe and the Brestworke.	F The Walles.	A The Monnt of the Rampart within.
M The Curider.	G The Ditch or Mote.	B The Rampart.
N The Fote-banke to step on, to discharge over.	H The Defence in the Mote called C••••e.	C The Parrapets.
O The plaine Field lying shelving.	I The little Ditch in the middest of the Mote.	D The sloping of the Parrapets.
		E The way for the Rounds.

Place this Figure betwixt folio 62. and 63.

from their Cavaliers or Batteries; For the effecting of this they have but small time; and it will prove very troublesome and dangerous to scale the same Breaches; because our walles shall be raised in such sort, that the Counterscarpe shall be almost of equall height with them; so that the Enemy shall not come at them with their Ordnance, to make any deepe breach; for from their Platformes they shall no more then see the top of the Workes, as you may perceive by this subsequent Figure at A. B. And as for the Workes of the Fort, they are made so sloping, that the Cannon Bullet cannot possihly batter it downe: and they are so thicke, that the Bullets rest in the middest of the thicknes; they being 36 foot thick, and above; so that a Cannon cannot possibly pierce halfe thorough, especially if the earth bee good, and well rammed downe together.

[illustration]

You may perceive by this precedent Figure, that the enemies Ordnance being plan∣ted upon the levell ground; or if the ground be somewhat rising towards the Fort, as the line C. D. demonstrates; that then he is constrained to raise a mighty high Battery, as E. before hee can see the top of the Walls of the Fort: as you may perceive from the top of the Cavaliere at the point F. Whereupon hee is new to beginne his Battery neere the Counter-scarpe, so that he may make his Breach the deeper in the Bulwork; for the farther hee is from the Counter-scarpe, the lesse hee can descrie of the Wall; As the subsequent Figure demonstrates,

[illustration]

by the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 G. H. from the battery A. Wherefore this Battery cannot ann••y the Fort; if the Counter-scarpe L. bee raised so high that it may defend the Wall. Now for such Batteries as the Enemy shall make upon the Counterscarpe; having made their approaches, by the helpe of their Roling-Trenches close to the Mote; or if they cannot come so neare but they must raise their battery at the foot of it, so that they are in possibility to batter downe the Flanckes, and the Defences to the ground, to make their Assault easie:* 1.149 These inconveniencies are to bee remedied, by making good Shoulders to the Bulworkes, which will defend the Flanckes a longer time then an Enemy can possi••ly stay: wherefore they must againe bee constrained to make a small Battery at the point of the Counter-scarpe of the next Bulworke; the distance being so small, that they cannot possibly Plant above sixe Ordnance, that will shoot even downe the Line of Levell into the Flancke, which can doe no great hurt, unlesse the Shoulders be ••attered downe first, which is impossible, inregard of the thickenesse, and the sloping of it; whereby the earth will not tumble downe, but keepe its place: But suppose they should ruine the Flanckes, the Wall called the Cunet that runnes a∣long in the middest of the Mote,* 1.150 as you may perceive at the Figure F. will defend the breach in despight of them: beside•• let them batter as deepe as they can, yet the Flanckes will bee left high enough to make resistance. And moreover the Cavaliers, and one part of the Curtin, will helpe defend the Bulworke: These remedies you see will supply the defects; onely view the Figure following carefully, and it will give you better satisfaction.

[illustration]

The Cannons A. is the Enemies Battery, which cannot hold possibly but sixe Peeces, because it cannot bee broader then the Mote: and these are Planted there to batter downe the Flanckes; which will bee difficult to doe, in regard the Defendants in the Fort have sixe other Peeces to oppose them, and a good thick Parapet for their defence, as those of the Flanckes ought to be. B. is the other Battery of the Enemy which they Plant to batter downe the Shoulders of the Bulworkes; which they will finde hard to doe, in regard of their thicknesse and roundnesse.

Now let us discourse of the defects which may come by springing of Mines, which is the most dangeroust disease incident to the ruining of Bulworkes: Wherefore ob∣serve, when the Enemy first maks his approaches with Trenches and Vaults under the ground, being conveyed under the Counter-scarpe and Mote, and so under the Bul∣worke; having there plac't a sufficient quantity of Powder, Fire being given to the Trayne, will blow up the Worke and all within it. To redresse this inconvenience, and to hinder the Enemies Mining: There must instead of good Earth, bee Gravell and Stones, which would hinder their Mining: and besides these Stones would fall

downe upon their heads, unlesse they framed supporters to stay it, which would bee an infinite charge and trouble: those Stones would bee very offensive to the Enemy being battered about amongst them by the Ordnance from the Walls; it would more hurt and annoy them, then the Ordnance themselves: Further if the Mote bee full of Water, and the Graft in the middest of it made so deepe as before is declared; it will bee a meanes to drowne them in their Trenches and Mine: if the Mote ••ee drie, they may easily Mine under it:* 1.151 But for prevention of this their Mining, there are divers wayes to discover it; As first, by making a Vaut downe deepe into the Earth in the most suspected place; and there placing a Drum brac'd, laying Di••e or small Stones upon the top of it; if the Enemy bee working in the ground, the Reverbe••ation of their stroakes, will make the Dice or Stones skippe up and downe: or a Bason of Water upon a Wooll-sacke, workes the same effect; this being discovered, you may suffer the Enemy to dispose his Powder in the Mine, and when they are gone to give fire to the Traine, in the interim to Mine to it and take it away: The like hath beene done many times in the Netherlands: But the surest way to prevent the force of the Powder in the Mine (if all other devices faile) is by making a Vaute downe deepe into the Earth in the most suspected place•• ••nd from it make divers vents for the Powder to breath out of, and cover the ho••es slightly over with Bushes and Earth to darken the place. Now when the Enemy shall come to undermine the Bulworke, he shall come to worke into that Vaute; where divers Souldiers being within it ready provided for their comming, shall repulse the Enemy, they having great advantage over them because the Vaute is large, and formed proper and fit for defence: The Trenches of the Enemy being so small, they cannot stirre in them; and suppose the Enemy should worke into the Mine, and finding no resistance, places his Powder, and makes his Traines; yet it cannot take any effect because of thoses hole, which let out the force of the Powder.

Thirdly,* 1.152 for the prevention of Treason, by the seducing the Captaine, and gaining the Souldiers loves by gifts and promises: In this case wee must make choise of a trusty faithfull Captaine for Governour, which must bee allowed sufficient maintenance, and having a good estate of his owne: Likwise the Souldiers must bee well payed, and suffer no discontents to bee given them; there is nothing in the World discontents a Souldier more, then debarring or misreckoning him in his Pay: Further you may by the demeanoure of Souldiers perceive if they be bribed; First they cannot containe themselves when they have money, but they will play or drink more then ordinarily before, or shew their moneys, or buy themselves Apparell. Notice being taken of these things, the judicious Captaine must have them in examination, and search them, and upon the least suspicion commit them.

For the prevention of Surprises that the Enemy may suddenly make,* 1.153 by placing his Petards against the Ports; and hanging up his Scaling-ladders in the Night, or at point of Day; this may easily bee remedied, if the Garrison bee well ordered and dis∣ciplined, if they keepe their Guards and Centinels, as they ought to place them in e∣very apt and convenient place, (viz.) every Bulworke to have a Corpes due Guard in it; and the Centuries placed some tenne paces one from the other: Likewise at the foot of the Bridge, ought to bee a halfe Moone with a continuall Guard in it; and the sayd Bridge being made winding, ought to have two or three Draw-bridges, and be∣tween each Draw-bridge a Standing gate; all the Ports or Gates ought to have a Grate before it, after the fashion of a Gridiron, which must beare out from the sub∣stance of the Gate halfe a foote: this will prevent the Enemy from blowing open the Gates, because the force of the Petard will bee spent before it can touch the massie sub∣stance of the Gate, the Grate giving way to the force of it: Besides in the middest of the Bridge ought to bee a Guard built, where continually a Century must stand to o∣pen and shut the Gates upon all occasions: Further, the Captaine of the Watch must send out his Rounds, and Counter-rounds one after the other; whose duty is, to see every Guard and Centinell doe his duty, and likewise to bee vigilant to discover the Enemies approaches. Further, upon the highest Steeple or Towre within the Fort or Towne, ought to bee a Centinell day and night, to overview the wayes and pas∣sages, and to take notice of all noyse and deanes, or the sparkling of Matches; and by the sound of a Trumpet to give an Alarum: if in the day-time any Troopes are disco∣vered,

he is to give so many sounds as there be severall persons; if the Troopes bee Foot-men, then the Sentinell is to hang out a white-Flag, on that side the Tower which the Port is of they come; if Horse-men, then he is after the same manner to hang out a red Flag: by this the Guardes are warned to be in a readinesse, and the Ports (if it be day-time) immediately to be shut up, and Spies sent out to discover what they are, and their intents. Further, if intelligence should be gained that the Enemy is a Foot, then to be more warie and set a double watch; these things may seeme sufficient, for prevention of the premises.

The last maladie or imperfection, is a long Siedge; which spends both Men and Munition,* 1.154 their Food and Provision to maintaine them. To this we must reply. that a Fortified Towne, ought alwayes to be provided with Men and Ammunition, and all kinde of other Provisions; as Corne of all kindes, Beere, Wine, Salt-fish, Bacon, Vineger, or any thing else that is sit to sustaine the life of man; sufficient of Salt-peter, Brimstone, &c. for making of Powder, and Wild-fire; store of Lead for Bullets, and the like. Further, such a Fort ought alwayes to have a Troope of Horse in it, and store of Provision for them; whose Office are to make incursions upon the Enemy, and to discover his marches and designes. Moreover, there must be good store of Ordnance;* 1.155 especially some peeces, for they will be able to doe better Serviue than the great Canons, in two respects; as first, the expence of Powder will be lesse; Secondly, they are easier to be removed from place to place, as occasion shall bee offered: The well managing and orderings in such a Fort, is of great consequence; for we must conceive, an Enemy is at three times the Expences, let him be as provi∣dent as he can; Further, the Enemy being constrained to lose his time and spend his meanes and Treasure, by bringing an Army against them; which shall eyther cause them to raise their Siedge (as Grave Maurice Van Nassaw did at the Siedge of Bergen-up-zone, he marching his Army to Rosand••ll, caused Marquesse Spinola to raise his Siedge) Otherwise a greater advantage may be taken, as the same No∣ble Prince once did: Ost-end being beleaguered, he thinking to have raised the Siedge of Duke John de Austria, finding him so strongly intrencht, retreated with his Armie, and pitcht before Sluce, and suddainly tooke it. Thus you may see the properties of a strong Garrison, how necessary they are in all respects; such imper∣fections as cannot be eschewed, must be borne withall, seeking to prevent them in the best and safest manner we may. I hope this discourse will give a reasonable satis∣faction to any man that is an ingenuous Souldier; as for others, I leave them to censure like themselves. In the following Chapter, we will discourse of the diver∣sitie of Moderne Fortifications.

CHAP. XXVI.

Of foure kindes of Fortifying now in use; French, Spanish, Italian, and Holland; and first of the manner of Fortifying in France.

HAving formerly spoken of the first inventions of Fortifi∣cations, and how they have beene reduc'd from imper∣fect, to better formes; but because all mens opinions and judgements are various, and not a like assenting, one esteeming one fashion to be best, and others of a quite contrary conceit, maintaine that another forme is better. Therefore principally I have made choice to discourse of, and decipher these foure kindes of Forti∣fyings; and the rather, because these Countries lying open to their Enemies, have beene very ingenuous to fortifie their Townes for their better security, very strongly; for in such places, there is nothing of greater consequence belonging to State affaires, than an absolute forme in fortifying, and in discoursing of their severall inventions: wee will compare the properties and improperties of them together, and so follow the best forme, and es∣chew the worst.* 1.156 The French are opinionated, the face of the Bulworke should bee defended by Musketiers, therefore they will not have the defence of the flanke to the point of the Bulworke, to be of greater distance than musket-shot: which is not above 120. paces.* 1.157 Likewise they will have the defence of the Bulworke to be taken onely from the Flanke, the reason is, because the Angle of the point of the Bulworke is more obtuse, then if they should take the defence from the Curtin, and so consequent∣ly more firme and strong, for to resist the Battery: They will likewise have a good Mote with a kinde of Parapet running in the middest of it, which betweene the two Bulworkes hath a kinde of worke for souldiers to defend the breach of the flankes, which they terme Cune, this Mote is to be full of water; at Deusbrough in Gelderland they raised in the Mote, in the equall distance betweene the Bulworks onely, a kinde of halfe Moon, extending it selfe like to this Figure. These kinde of workes, they hold very necessary to prevent an Enemy from any suddaine surprizes, by laying over Bridges, or comming over in leather Boates; a continuall watch being kept there, prevents their designes; the Figure followes.

[illustration]

[illustration]

CHAP. XXVII.

How the French fortifie their Irregular Figures.

VPon a Line of 100. Toises, they will have formed a single Tenaille.

Vpon a Line of 100. or 150. Toises,* 1.158 they will have raised two Bastions.

Vpon a Line of a 150. or 200. Toises, they raise a double Te∣naille, or two halfe Bulworks.

Vpon a Line of 250. Toises, they raise one Bastion and two halfe Bastions.

For better demonstration of this, we will suppose an Irregular peece of ground, to be fortified; as Q, R, S, T, V, and in regard no ground is to be lost, we must first consider all the severall measures at the out-most sides of it; and first, drawing a right Line, as A, B, of 250. Toises, and upon the same Line followes these precedent Rules, they raise there one Bastion, and two halfes taken from the Octagon, looke at the point A. Likewise, from the point A, draw a Line from A. P, of 150. Toises or thereabouts, upon the which they raise two halfe Bastions, then drawing the Line P, O, upon the which they raise one Bastion, and two halfes, according as the first is; and also as the Line O, X, hath: and also of all the rest, according as they shall finde the length or distances. Many times they desire the wall of the Towne should be secured from the Curtin. Next after this following Figure, I shall draw another Figure, that shall demonstrate that kinde of flanking from the Curtin.

[illustration]

Moreover, when your French Engineeres fortifie an Irregulrr Figure, and that the line of defence is to be taken from the Curtins; then suppose the place to be forti∣fied, to be B, A, P, L, N, M. O, and that the Wall being set in the outmost verge of the ground, must serve for the Curtines wholly: The figure being proportioned as you see the next following is, they draw a Line from C, D, E, F, of 400. Toises, where they finde there must be raised upon the same Line, one Bastion, and two halfes, and one simple Tenaille (viz.) the Bastion E, the two halfe ones D, and F, and the single Tenaille D, C, and having drawne the Lines round the Towne, lea∣ving sufficient distance betweene the Walles, for to raise the Bastions; then they take the space of 100. or 110. Toises, from the flanke of one Bulworke, to the point of the other. Thus every Bastion will stand right within musket-shot to be defended as the Regular Figures are. This they use onely for the fortifying of some old Wall in haste, and without much charge; otherwise a Rampart may be raised of earth, and these Workes made to it. The Figure followes.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXVIII.

The manner of the Spaniards fortifying.

THe manner of the Spaniards fortifying, differs nothing from the French; for they hold the same Rules; (viz.) They take their defence from the Flankes, and they ob∣serve the same distance from the flanke, to the Pointe of the Bulworke: onely they use greater compast shoulders to cover their flankes, as you may perceive by the Figure fol∣lowing marked A. Note that he that intends to forti∣fie, must have a speciall regard to the matter he intends to put in execution, and to the potencie of his Enemie, to the end he may apply a convenient remedie, to every thing that shall require it: for if we have to doe with a puissant po∣litike Enemy, we must spare no cost and charge; not onely to fortifie, but also to make the workes large, and spacious, and of able strength to resist the battering Ca∣non; to the end likewise, they may make divers re-intrenchments; lest it should happen as once it did to the Spaniards, at the Fort called the Golette, which was made to keepe the Haven for the King of Spaine; but having by experience found the de∣fects of it; (they having observed the true rules of forming it) their errour was in making the Bulworkes too little; so that when the Turke came with his great Army, there could not men be plac'd to defend it. As we shal afterwards discourse of the Line of defence, of the perfection of it, as I may terme it, because in the just proportion thereof, depends the conservation of the Fortresse. Wherefere now we use to make our Bulworkes larger, when we first raise them; for should they be too small, there were no helpe; but if our Enemy be but weake in his forces, in such a case wee shall

not need to be at that cost and labour to make our Workes so large, onely the Walles, raised with earth, and Palizadoed about with Bulworkes, without shoulders: Like∣wise the out-workes, as Halfe-Moones, and Horne-workes, and the like, may bee spared, so that the Workes be made according to Rule, and the Mote full of water will be sufficient to keepe the Enemy from surprizing it. View the Figure fol∣lowing.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXIX.

Of the Venetians manner of Fortification.

THe Venetians have found by experience the Rules and Max∣imes of the Spaniards, touching the manner of their de∣fences, they having small differences as is to bee seene by that admirable fortified Towne in the Isle of Crete na∣med Nicolia; with his Bulworkes well ordered, onely they were too little, not having space sufficient in them for retrenchment; the Turke besieged it, and wonne it with the Fort of Fumogasta, and all the Isle of Crete; which the Turkes possesse to this day; they finding the inconveniences insident to these small Workes, they began to make their Workes more spacious in the Towne of Palma la nova, upon the flankes thereof they might place more men for defence; and likewise they might re-intrench the oftner: For their Enemy the Turke was most potent, and likewise the Emperor, wherefore they made spacious Bulworkes, which they termed Bul∣workes Royall (viz.) large spacious workes, with large bouted shoulders, as the Figure following will better instruct you.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

[illustration]

CHAP. XXX.

A Comparison betweene the Rules of Fortification handled in this Treatise with the Rules of others; with certaine Answers to divers Objections in Fortification.

IN the beginning of this discourse of Fortification, we have fully de∣scribed the Rules; how to fortifie after the Low-Country manner, being the most absolutest manner that can be invented; we will not lose the time to repeat it againe, they being drawne with the same proportions, that at this day is, or ought to bee used in all places in Europe, that is famous for Fortification: And in our progression we will indeavour to make some comparisons, betwixt our moderne way of fortify∣ing, and the ancient manner formerly used: From thence we shall draw the know∣ledge of the perfection of this Art, how farre it exceeds the writings and practises of former Ages. First, we will begin with the Spanish and French; and by the way, let us observe the oppositions that the French will have about the Line of Defence, in their Fortifications, The principall Enginieres in France, as also Errard de Barledce, which hath writ of Fortification; and he would have the defence of the Bulworke to to be 100. Toises, which is 120. Venetian paces, that is 60. feet English by the Rule,* 1.159 12. inches to each foot; to the end (sayes he) that it may be defended with Muskets; ••lledging further, that the Canon can doe no great hurt or damage, in re∣gard of the uncertaintie of the shot; and because they cannot be discharged so often as the Muskets, but there will be a great deale of intermission betwixt shot and shot. He further opposes, that the defence ought to be taken from the Flanke: because sayes he, it makes the Bulworke more obtuse in his Angle-Flanke. To these oppo∣sitions we must make answer altogether, because the remedies of one of these faults,

depends upon that of the other: And first; we must know and hold for a Maxime infallible, that no Fortresse but ought to be made with all advantages: so that it may be able to defend against a great number; as if I should say; the advantage must be so great, that one man may resist ten, this being taken for a ground and Rule, we come now to confute this French opinion. (viz)

The Line of Defence they hold ought not to bee above 100. Toises, or sixtie feet English, or 120 to be the most; because (saith he) 120 or 144. Toises is the furthest a Musket can shoot, to defend with them; further, the Canon they alledge is of small validitie, in regard of its uncertaintie in shooting, so that it doth small damage to the Enemy. If the French Enginieres will maintaine this Argument, they must of necessity destroy the Flankes; making them so small for the lodging of Mus∣ketiers in them; but I say that cannot be done, because they must be larger to lodge farre more Souldiers, for the defence of the Fortresse; for they ought to be 17. Toi∣ses large with the Shoulders, as Mr. Errard intends to give to each Flanke; which amounts to some 20. paces, 5. foot to each pace, and this is but capable to lodge 34. Souldiers on the sayd Flanke, allowing 3. foot distance for each Souldier to use his Armes in: Now doe but observe, how the Enemy will have a wonderfull advan∣tage, by making his approaches in his roling Trenches, and Mines under the earth, which shall bring them to the Counter-scarpe, where being arrived, they can raise their Batteries, and cause their Ordnance to beate continually upon the heads of the Musketiers that defend the Flankes, or the place that is to be assaulted; so that they cannot be able to make resistance, or to doe them any hurt from the Walles; besides, the Mote being large, the Enemy may lodge in his Workes, three times as many Souldiers, which shall continually shoot against the Hankes of the Fort, and keepe them under; so that their defence will be to no purpose: Moreover, the Enemy having raised his Batteries within distance,* 1.160 hee will soone beate those Musketiers from off the Shoulders of the Bulworke, causing them to retreat; they having then but the space, which is rescued by the Flanke, being but 6. or 7. Toises, which is but distance enough for 12. or 14. Souldiers; how doe you thinke then, they shall bee able to resist 300. which shall be upon the Counter-scarp, and under it? Further∣more I demand, if he will not have the Flankes defended with Ordnance, how will he be able to impeach and hinder the Enemie from making their Traverses or Galle∣ries over the Mote,* 1.161 for to march over and assault the breach the Canons have made in the Bulworkes. Now if you will please to observe the excellencie of the Canon for the defending and offending which in a most absolute way is performed; namely, if the Enemy makes his approaches close to the Mote as before is sayd, yet he durst not enter the Mote, because of the shot that shall come continually from the Flankes; wherefore to prevent the danger of the shot, they are constrained to take the earth that is taken out of the Trenches, to make a sufficient Barricado against such places as they shall shoot from; so that the force of a Canon shall doe small hurt, and shall not be able,* 1.162 without great trouble, to hinder their approaches, they being secured by their Workes. Much lesse then can the Musket-shot prevaile to hinder them, so that they will soone gaine the Bulworke, after the Gallery is put over the Mote; because they may have a recourse securely from Gun-shot, and by this meanes undermine the Bulworke or scale it, as the Figure before named will demonstrate.

Moreover, the Enemy may make Galleries over of Timber, covering it over with earth, to prevent the firing of it with Wild-fire, which they within the Fort may cast upon it for that purpose. Likewise, the Mote being full of water, they may prepare Bridges of Boates, covered over with earth or raw Hides, to preserve them from fire:* 1.163 I would gladly know, how these proceedings of an Enemy might bee prevented without the Canon, onely by Muskets, as the French Engineere would have it?

Moreover they doe reply, that although they would have the Musketiers to de∣fend from the Flankes, yet not at all times would they bee destitute of the Canon: which may serve for such purposes as to hinder the Enemies designes. I say all good Orders and Rule so ought to be necessarily observed; contrarily, Disorder and Confu∣sion ought to be echewed, as the greatest discommodity. The French replyes, yes, he intends good order should be kept and observed, that every one may know what

he ought to doe: and that they should put all their strength and industrie to to acquit themselves from the Enemy. To which we may truly object, that the Flankes being the eyes of the Fortresse, they ought not to bee imployed about any other thing, but to spend the time in hindering and offending the Enemy, from make∣ing his Galleries or Traverses: Now the Musketiers are not able to performe that duty, but altogether hinders the operation of the Canons; for if the Canons comes to be discharged, they must hinder the Muskets from defending the face of the Bul∣worke, for they being two different things that cannot stand together, one of the two must be slighted as insufficient; wherefore we must conclude, that Muskets are not proper to be plac'd in the Flankes, because they are not of force to beate downe the Traverses, and hinder the Enemies approaches unto the Bulworke. The Engi∣neeres in France,* 1.164 can hardly be brought to beleeve this; but that the Canon is altoge∣ther unprofitable, and and that the Musketiers are all in all; to this we may answer without contradiction, that in all things due order is to be observed, as Errard him∣selfe confesses: Wherefore take notice, the Office of the Flankes is onely to pierce and batter the Traverses, and Crosle-workes, which the Enemy shall raise upon the Counter-skarpe, and that the Muskets ought to bee plac'd in another place, more apt for them to doe the same Office, which he would have them performe in the Flankes. Now I dare say their eares glowes to heare what place is aptest to place the Musketiers in, to performe the same Office they would have them doe in the Flankes, (which is onely to defend the face of the Bulworke) they being ignorant of any other place from whence they may defend.* 1.165 Now you shall both see and judge their imbecility, whether it be more apter and convenient to take the defence with Musketiers from the Flanke, or from the Curtin, which is farre better, and also from the Cavalliaris; whereby the defence is made threefold: Let us but weigh the discommodity we have, with the commodity we ought to receive, and then make choise of one of the two, which seemes probablest for our best service. Wherefore it is not to be doubted, but that a Bulworke well guarded with Souldiers, is farre stronger than one that is onely defended with a stone or earthen Wall without men. The strength that is to be expected in a stone or earthen Wall, is the forming of the Workes more obtuse, and so consequently the stone Wall is strongest: and yet there is no comparison or proportion in it, to a Worke that is defended with men. Fur∣ther, as before we have related, that a spacious obtuse Bulworke is compared to a strong man without Armes, for his Armes are his defence, that is, the Souldiers which continually shoote from either side of the Bulworke. Wherefore wee may safely conclude, with that Maxim which the Hollanders and Venetians hold to be most proper & profitable; to take the defence from the third part of the Curtin: If you please to observe in the first figure of Fortification the commodiousnesse of it,* 1.166 that then I make no question, you will consent with my opinion, and conclude I have made those former Propositions cleere. Now it follows I should answer another Objection of Errards, and withall, give some good instructions about the length of the Line of Defence. (Viz.) The distance from the corner of the Flanke, to the point of the next Bulworke opposite. He maintaines, it ought not be above 100. or 120. paces, for if it be longer, he sayes it is out of Musket-shot; All good Rules are to be grounded upon firme reasons and sound grounds, wherefore we will discourse and illustrate this proposition, that thereby we may gaine experience and profit. Because a Mus∣ket cannot possible convey a Bullet so farre as a Canon, therefore the Line of Defence should be answerable to their shooting, or conveying their shot; by this we intend that the Musketiers which are ordained for the defence of the Bulworke, should have their distances 100. or 120. paces, being plac'd upon the third part of the Cur∣tin; and those that are plac'd below upon the Worke in the Mote before the Cunette, which is to be esteemed one of the principall defences; and likewise the Canon may have for his Line of Defence from the Flanke and Cavalliares to the point of the Bul∣worke, 180. or 200. paces at the most; whereby the Enemies Galleries and Tra∣verses may be hindered and broken downe. Suppose this to be the advantage and commodity we gaine by this large distance in hindring the Enemy from having a distance, which otherwise he will take by reason of the breadth of the Mote, from battering downe the Flankes, for he is able to batter 182. or 200. paces; yet in

regard the Mote is so large, and the Workes hee is constrayned to make before his Battery for to preserve it, causeth the Battery to stand at the least 260 paces from the Flanke: Now I would gladly know what hurt a Battery can effect, shooting such a distance against a strong Bulworke well Shouldered, and if hee bring his Batte∣ry neerer; into what eminent danger hee brings himselfe you may plainely perceive by this Figure following, which being viewed, wee will proceed and answere o∣ther of his objections.

[illustration]

You see wee have fairely gotten the day of the French Enginiere, both by grounds of solid reasons, and by our demonstrative Figure, which cleare all his objections: Now it remaines to have another Veny with him about the Mote or Ditch, which they would have full of Water to the brimme; because saith hee, it is very difficult for the Enemy to get over to scale the Workes: Wherefore hee demands, whether a dry Ditch or Mote bee better then that: To which I make answere, that betwixt two extreames wee ought alwaies search out the middle proportion (viz.) not to decline too much to the one, nor the other; but to keepe the Golden meane, and part them in the middest equally: Therefore wee will not condemne a full Mote of Water altogether, neither will wee condemne a quite drie Mote; but wee will par∣ticipate of both, (viz.) that one halfe of the Mote or Ditch should have Water, the other halfe should bee without; so by consequence, it should be halfe full, one should serve to prevent Surprises, the other should bee the defence thereof: Experience teacheth, that such a Mote is the best and perfectest of all; for the Mote which is brimme full, is a hinderance to them in the Fort, and keepes them as if they were in a Prison, and disables them from defending the Ditch but onely from above the Wals, which is but a poore defence,* 1.167 in regard the first thing an Enemy practiseth at his ap∣proaches, is to batter against the toppe of the Walles, and beate the Defendants un∣der; so that there remaines no defence for the Ditch,* 1.168 but from the Flankes: Now on the contrary, those that have their Motes halfe dry, they can Intrench themselves therein, and keepe off the Enemy without any danger to themselves; without the which the Enemy would soone finde great advantage by annoying the toppes of the Walles from their Batteries; so as you should not bee able to shoot over without

great losse of men:* 1.169 and if the Enemy should give an Assault, he must first be constrained to winne this Worke made within the Mote by great difficultie: The Defendants are secured from the Flanckes, and from the Workes above them; they having a good Parapet before them for their Cover, and halfe the breadth of the Mote for their securitie;* 1.170 and likewise upon all occasions to retreate into the Bulworkes by the Sally-Ports that are plac't in the Flanckes: And in regard this kinde of defence lyes so low that the Enemy cannot see it, whereby it the harder to bee gained by him; by these circumstances wee conclude, that a Mote or Ditch made in this kinde, is the most safest and most defensive against the Enemy. I hope this discourse will sa∣tisfie any Souldier of reasonable capacity: In the next Chapter wee will frame our discourse about the manner and proceedings that ought to bee observed in Assaulting and defending these Fortresses.

CHAP. XXXI.

The manner how to gaine and defend these Fortresses.

THe Enemy having viewed a Fort, and found out the fittest places to gaine it, (which are to bee supposed these following,) First, the ground being proper and easie to make the Trenches in; or if the defence bee not strong and good upon that fide, whereby any advantage may bee gained; then you must begin to raise your Trenches as you may perceive in the Figure following by N. N. drawing them right to the point of the Bulworke, be∣cause those that defend within may not annoy the Pioners; and they are to cast the earth alwaies towards the Enemies Workes, the better to secure their owne bodies: as you may perceive by the Trench O. and G. they being drawne crooked like a Serpent; and so directing them until they come close to the Counterscarp of the Mote at the point of the Enemies Bulworkes,* 1.171 where being arrived, the Enemy will bee glad to quit the two halfe Moones that are without the Mote, whereby the Worke is halfe wonne: for now you may safely mount your Canons, and make your Battery K. K. which shall shoot against the Flankes at the bottome of the Ditch: The rest of the Canons at the point of the Bulworke E. (at the same instant the Enemy that is under the Counter-scarpe) shall pierce the sayd Counter-scarpe, and enter the Mote, and there make a Gallery over at F. F. not forgetting to cast up the earth for your safeguard alwaies towards the Enemies Workes,* 1.172 that Flankers you, from which you must continually shoot to beat them from their Flankes: But how ever the Ordnance planted upon the Battery K. will hinder the Enemy;* 1.173 so that they shall doe you small hurt, from their Flankes to your Galleries: The Motes having water in them, you must frame your Galleries over them of strong Timber, and so make your assault over them by the point of the Bulworke C. and by the Breach E. Now for to pre∣vent this assault,* 1.174 the Enemy within the Fort prepares to Reintrench himselfe, as you may see by the Reintrenchment D. by the which they are able to defend the Breach: they must have alwaies in readinesse earth Wood and Timber, and all such things as are necessary for Coverture, and are proper to resist the Enemies Batteries: but the Reintrenchment is not to bee feared, because they within the Fort will bee easily constrained to quit it; as they were first made to leave the point of the Bulworke. Their next refuge is immediately to begin a new Intrenchment within the other, as you may perceive at S. S. to the end the other being lost, they may Retreate into this; and there they ought to plant their Canons to defend the Breach.

And now it is high time to intreate of Conditions for the rendering up the Fort, this being the last intrenchment they can possibly make; and it shall bee honour suf∣ficient unto them that they have held it out to the last: But if the Defendants expect any Troopes that are suddenly to come to their ayd; or that the Workes bee so great that they may raise the third Reintrenchment, then let them hold it out still: But if the place bee so small that they cannot Reintrench, they must give place to Fortune. Thus by these demonstrations, you see it is possible to enter any Fort that is accessi∣ble:

wherefore to delay time,* 1.175 and to waste Men and Treasure of the Enemies, wee must use meanes to prevent an Enemy from making his approaches neere the Ditch and Workes: Therefore Out-works are devised, as Horne-works, Skonses, Halfe-Moones, Redouts, Lines, Crosse-Lines and the like, which are to bee raised in the convenienst places beyond the Mote, for defence of the Portes, Mote, and Wall; whereby the Enemies appreaches shall bee hindered: not forgetting if their bee any way by Water to relieve the Towne, that then you raise such able Skonses, that may beate off the Enemy from hindering the passage;* 1.176 as was at the famous Siege of Ber∣gin-up-Zone: there were two Skonses which secured the Haven, so that upon all occasions reliefe did enter: For had Marquesse Spinolla gained those Skonses, the Towne had beene famisht: There are onely three wayes whereby Fortified Townes may bee gained; The first is by Stratagem, as Breda, Skinkins Skense were unawares assaulted and taken: The second is by Intrenchments and Batteries to prepare a Breach, and so to make the assault, as in this following Figure I have demonstrated: The third is onely by Intrenching an Army about a Fort, whereby all passages are Baricadoed up; so that reliefe cannot possibly come to enter the Towne, so that by meere hunger they are constrained to yeeld upon such conditions as they may: Last∣ly for the defending of Workes or Breaches, there must bee a speciall care had, that all Warlike instruments bee in a readinesse for to beate off the Enemy,* 1.177 as Granad••s; to throw amongst them Wilde-fire, Pitcht-Ropes, Hoopes, Frames of Muskets, Flayles, Stones, Peeces of Timber to role downe, and the like: The Fire-balls will doe much good when the Enemy is wrought under the Walls, so as the Shot cannot command them:* 1.178 The most principall thing is to Fire the Galleries; Likewise if you see you shall bee forcd to leave the point of the Bulworke, or any Worke else whatsoever: Then privily to make some Mine well planted with Powder, the Traine being drawne into your Reintrenchment or Retreating place; that so soone as the Enemy is entered: Fire may bee given and blow them up: Further, observe when a Breach is made,* 1.179 you may know when it is high time to make resistance, by the Enemies leaving giving Fire to the Canons; for when hee assaults, hee cannot shoot towards the Breach for destroying his owne Men, but bends his Ordnance against the Flankes and Bulworkes on either side of the Breaches to hinder them from shoo∣ting, whereby their assault may bee safer and easier. View the Figure following in the 78 Page, where you shall see how it is defended and assaulted.

[illustration]

Note what is not here exprest in this Figure answerable to the discourse, you shall finde by the Letters in the Precedent Figures plainely demonstrated.

CHAP. XXXII.

Divers observations, Rules, and Orders, which all Generalls ought to observe in the Be∣sieging, and defending of Fortes.

HEe that will Be-Leager a Towne or Fortresse, ought to have three things in his consideration:* 1.180 First, whe∣ther he can derive any right or true Title to it; Secondly, whether hee be of Power sufficient to manage the Siege (viz) all kinde of Provision, as Meate, Drinke, Money, Souldiers; all kinde of Amunition, Ordnance, Peeces, Armes, Powder, Bullets, Match; all Warlike Instru∣ments, Granadoes, Morter-Peeces; all kinde of Wilde-Fire, and the like: Thirdly, hee must consider whether the profit hee shall gaine by it, will countervaile the charge that must bee spent in the Siege: Having thus well considered of all these precedent things; then hee must get a true discription of the frame and fashion of the Fortresse, with the Wayes and Paths; the condition of the grounds about it, and the number of Defendants in it: Then sharpening his valour upon the Grindstone of Resolution, let him leade his Army in good order against this Fortresse, where hee must bee carefull to quarter his Men in the best and aptest places of security; then having Invironed the Fort on all sides with Skonses and Redoubts, so that there can bee no Recourse too nor from the Fort; then hee must Fortifie against the face of the Canon, to the end it may serve for an advantage as you may see by the Bulworke marked G. The other part of his Army are to bee plac't to keepe the passages, least the Enemy should come in the Reare of them and beat them out of their Trenches▪ Therefore strong Workes must bee raised well Pallizadoed to prevent them; Next he must looke that his quarters bee well Intrencht with Crosse-Workes, and defen∣ded by the Forts and Redouts raised for that purpose, as you may see the Trenches C. are defended from the places R. and from the Redouts P. Hee ought likewise to make choice of a fit place for the Army to make it his Field for Battell, as you may see by R. S. T. Next you must raise good and sufficient Batteries as neere to the E∣nemy as possible may be; which must bee secured and faithfully Guarded by a suffi∣cient number of Souldiers, as the Battery A. is well Retrencht with the Bastions R. and beset with good Gabions filled with good earth, having a great care their bee no Stones in it; least the Canon shot from the Fort should beate them about, and do more harme to the Souldiers, then the Bullets themselves: They ought also to doe the same on all sides, as wee see by the Cavaliers A. D. E. Q. the which must bee raised at the same instant, begining to make the Canons Play, to batter the tops of the Works in the Fort, with all fury without intermission; to the end the Pioners may have time to make their Trenches and approaches in greater safety and more strongly: for the Canons beating against the top of the Workes of the Fort with such fury that the Defendants have no leisure to discover the designe of the Assaylants, and much lesse shall they know how to use meanes to prevent those blowes and batterings; besides the great feares and terrours that the poore Souldiers will bee in all the while▪ Wherefore there must bee great diligence used, for feare they should lose that good and favourable time, wherein they may make their Intrenchments without danger: Those within the Fort in this case,* 1.181 ought to have very experienst Souldiers and good Canoniers; and likewise all the Platformes for the Artillery or Cavaliaries should use their best endeavours by continuall shooting to prevent the raising of the Enemies Batteries and Trenches, and not to feare any colours, being they are protected with a good Parapet from the dinte of the Shot: Likewise oftentimes they ought to change the places of the Musquetiers,* 1.182 those which were upon the Curtins, shall bee plac't upon the face of the Bulworke, and so to the Shoulders of it; continually thus changing the Musquetiers from place to place, as occasion shall bee offered: this will much annoy the Enemy, and the rather, because they know not how to bend their

Peeces against them; because of the uncertainty of their places. Moreover the Enemy having battered those places that hindered him most, cannot helpe it, but he must suffer your Souldiers to set every man his Basket, being set close together that they may put their Musquets betweene them, and shoot continually for all the blowes of the Canons; whose shottes are made very uncertaine: above all things we must have an eye, that the Musquetier discharges not by Vollyes, but by de∣grees; so that some may be alwayes giving fire, whilest their fellow-Souldiers charge. And likewise, to take good ayme from betweene the Baskets; which ought to be plac'd upon every Worke neere the Enemy; after the manner deci∣phered in this Figure following.

[illustration]

* 1.183

A, B, are the Baskets filled with good Earth or Dung to cover the Musquetiers upon the Breach, made in the Parapet C; they are to put their Muskets betweene each Basket, taking their levell to shoot; wherefore there ought to be great store of these Baskets, and Wheele-barrowes in the Fort, to be used upon all occasions.

If these should be wanting, they must have Sackes filled with good earth, place∣ing them accordingly to shoot through. The Enemy seeing such prepared resistance within the Fort, will begin his Trenches the profoundlier, to the end his Souldiers may be preserved; for it is the duty of a good Captaine, to have a speciall regard to the safety of his Souldiers: For that is a practicall policy used alwayes by the Prince of Nassaw, whereby they conceived he would not cause his men to run head-long to destruction, which made them the more forward in Service, and the valianter to execute what they were commanded by him; this ought to be a thing remarkable, for otherwise a world of Souldiers are lost, and the Captaines are discomfited, for not gaining an impossible victory.

The Enemy is to conduct his Trenches to the Counter-skarpe,* 1.184 and make them so deepe, that the Defendants within the Fort cannot possibly hurt them; they being brought alwayes towards the point of the Bulworke, as you may perceive by the Trench C, C, because they should not be so much molested by the Ordnance and the Musquets from the Workes of the Fort: and when the Enemy hath gained the Counter-skarpe, they shall make their Crosse-workes as you may see by the distance X, X, where they shall lodge a good number of Canons; raising their Batteries or Cavalliaries more spacious, although they serve for little or no purpose, onely to batter against the Flankes, and make them unprofitable; during which time you ought to follow the speedy making of your Trenches, and bring them to their halfe Moones, and then by the assistance of your Pioners, they raising a sufficient able high Traverse, to shelter them from the force of the Cavalliaries and Bulworkes within the Fort, which otherwise would command them, and is most easie to be effected, especially if the More or Ditch be not spacious; and at the same instant your Souldiers are to make their assault, be it by Scaling-ladder or otherwise.

The Generall must cause divers Peeces to be brought, which shall be to discharge upon all parts of the Wall, to hinder their annoying of the Assaylants; who must enter the Breach with a brave resolution. The roring of the Canons having so asto∣nish those within the Halfe-Moone, and battered their Parapets, that they have no time to see if the Battery be finisht or not, and they being not provided for the As∣sault, it will wonderfully puzzle them, the assault being followed with good order

and resolution; this being the time and place, where men ought to purchase honour: and these Assaults will discover, which are the valiantest spirits. The Officers at the Siedge of Rhineberg, shewing their resolutions to their Souldiers, threw their Co∣lours into a Halfe-Moone, from which they had beene repulsed three or foure times, by the Musketiers and Pikes within the said Worke, whereupon they ranne furiously to redeeme their honours upon the Pikes and Muskets, rather chusing to dye with honour, than to lose their Colours with disgrace: this On-set did so revive the Soul∣diers, they seeing the Noble resolution of their Leaders, at one instant assaulted the Worke, and discomfited the Enemy, so as they gave way to their magnanimous re∣solutions.

Having gained this Halfe-moone Y Y, the Defendants for their safety retreate into the Ditch,* 1.185 behinde the Parapet of the Worke called the Cunette, with short Cudgels and Flayles prepared for that purpose, to defend the entring of the Enemy into the Ditch; which will be a hard worke for them to enter and obtaine it, be∣fore they can be in any hopes to winne the Fort, by reason they cannot come to bat∣ter this worke, it being so low in the Ditch, with force of Canon.

Now for to hinder the defence of the Worke within the Ditch called the Cu∣nette, * 1.186 the best way is to stop their passages from comming upon it; which may be effected, if there be two peeces of Ordnance planted within the Ditch by the Halfe-moone M, where they must batter downe the Earth right against the Sally-port, or place they are to enter unto the Worke, to defend it, whereby their wayes may be discovered; Their sallying out upon this worke being hindered, there must be a Gal∣lery ready prepared, made upon Barrels or Hogsheads; these must flote upon the water, and from hence the Flanke that defends that side, must be battered with all fury, without giving space to the Defendants to get upon their Trenches, which they will doe if there be any intermission; wherefore immediately they must fa••l to intrenching, and cast the Earth towards the side of the Flankes, making the Traverse M; during which time, the Battery must shoot furiously on all sides, then those which are upon the Counter-skarpe, must be provided with good store of Granadoes, which they must cast over into the workes called the Cunette, to the end they may cause them to quit the Worke; then the Traverse being made M, M, they shall have the better freedome, to transport a great number of Souldiers over the Mote to make their Assaults: and being arrived at the foot of the Bulworke, they may presently undermine it, if it happens that the Breach bee not sufficient for them to get over.

Now the Defendants within the Port, have for their refuge the Bulworke, to re-intrench in, as you may perceive at V; causing a sufficient Parapet to be made for the coverture of those that defend the re-intrenchment: Having alwayes a sufficient company of Souldiers, with all kinde of warlike instruments, ready and in good order for to releeve them, the Enemy being so neere them wrought, that they are like to be surprized and beaten backe; the best defence they can then have, will bee the Granadoes and Artificiall Fire-workes, which they must cast over into the Ditch or False-Bray, for to annoy them that are undermining the Bulworkes.

But the Enemy standing upon his honour,* 1.187 seeks all wayes to prevent the breake∣ing of the Granadoes, and burning of the Fire-workes, by choking them with wa∣ter or raw Hides, so as they fall to the ground, so that they worke small effect.

Likewise, the Defendants place great peeces of Timber upon the Walles, to role downe upon the Assailants as they are climbing the Bulworkes: But when the Defendants have used all their indeavours to no purpose, and the Enemy being got into the Worke, then it is time to intreat and provide for a Composition: yet for all they are reduc'd to these extremities, they ought to make choise of such incon∣veniences as are least hurtfull to them.* 1.188 The Composition is to be made, according to the Forces they have, and the hopes they have to releeve it, and according as they are able to sustaine themselves, if they should put it to the last brunt. It is no disho∣nour for a Captaine to intreat with his Enemy, in two respects; the first is, the con∣servation of their Armes, and Baggage: the second is, the Pillage which may bee made within the Fort; the which may possibly be regained againe by some strata∣gem, from this Enemy, in a short time after.

Now having the Fortresse surrendred upon composition, the Generall must consi∣der, whether he be able to maintaine it, and whether the profit of it will be answe∣rable to the charge; which if it be, he must rase downe all the out-Trenches which the Enemy made, and repaire the Breaches of it: and then to draw his Army into convenient Garrisons, that they may be fit for the next imployment of the Prince. Thus taking Reason and Experience for his guide, in all his enterprises, which must be just and equitable; will cause the Honour and glory of a Generall to shine.

Thus have we finisht the discourse of Fortification, and in regard the use of great Artillery is the chiefest thing to be used in a Fort, I have thought it fit to frame a dis∣course of the use of Artillery, having taken the opinions and rules of the best Authors, eyther ancient or moderne, to steere my course by: onely I shall shew you a Figure of a Fort beleaguered, and of a Fort assaulted upon the Curtin. View the Figures fol∣lowing.

[illustration]

ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss ssss ppppppp ssss

Here you perceive the breach made in the middest of the Curtin. At the letter B, is a Catte with Ordnance on it, to batter against the Re-intrenchments, and to 〈◊〉〈◊〉

it: There is a Worke raised at C, to prevent them. I would wish you to peruse Je∣rome Cataneo, by him you shall receive further instructions. If the Breach may pos∣sible be made in the Point of the Bulworke, it is farre better than the Curtin; because the Defendants have farre the oddes, in defending the Breach from either Flanke, and from the Re-intrenchment; besides the Gallery that shall be laid over the Mote, will sooner be battered downe from the Flankes. The next is, the Paralellagram of a Fort beleaguered; And then the use of Redouts: And then after that, the duties of Souldiers in Garrisons; shall be plainly shewed.

CHAP. XXXIII.

A Triangular Skonse, with directions for the best scituating of it.

THis kinde of Triangular Skonse, must bee scituated in a place strong by Nature, otherwise it is of poore resi∣stance, and little better than a Redout: they were invented to be plac'd in some spot of ground, naturally invironed with strength, being a place that could not be capable of any other Figure, in regard of the smalnesse of it: Likewise, it is a small charge to raise it, and speedily done; the place must not be of any great conse∣quence, where this Figure is scituated, for it cannot withstand any great resistance: it is formed with earth, after the same manner the other be: onely high and thicke to resist Ordnance.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXXIV.

The manner of framing a Triangle Redout.

ARedout is a kinde of sleight Fortification, used for the defence of some few men; And of these principally there are three kindes, which are to be made use of, according to the quantity of men you place in them, and the consequence of the passage they are to bee raised in, for they are not to be used but for Out-guardes, to prevent the Enemy from making any suddaine surprises: the greatest defence they can make is against the Horse, to hinder them from passing by any Foord of Water, or other Passage, if the Passage bee thought convenient for the

The Paralellagram of the discourse desiphering the manner and order observed in the Siege and defence of a Fort.

[illustration]

Pla••e this Figure betwixt ••olio 84. and 85.

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

Enemies approaches, then place two of these Redouts a square, on one side the way, and this Triangle a little wide of the other, on the other side of the way; the Brest-worke of them is to be some foure or five foot thicke, and eight foot high, with a good broad foot-step, and convenient height to stand on; so as they may discharge over the Worke.

The Pallizadoes are to be wrought in two foot from the top of the Worke, the grea••ends to be laid downewards into the Worke, so that the sharpe ends may rise upwards, they are to lye three foot into the earth, and as much out: the out∣side of this worke ought to be good sollid earth, being digged taperwise (viz.) sixe inches thicke at the end that should lye outmost, and some two inches the end that lyes inward; by this meanes they will not slip out, and make the worke decay; in the middest is your rubbish earth to be rammed downe: the Ditch ought to bee sixe or eight foot wide, with a Draw-bridge to enter into the Worke.

[illustration]

* 1.189

CHAP. XXXV.

The manner of framing a Quadrangle Redout.

THis foure Square Redout, is to hold a hundred or 150. Souldiers, and these are to be raised, where you conceive the Enemy hath most advan∣tage to gaine a passage to come to annoy your Campe; it serves also in the beleaguering of a Fort, to place one or two of these Redouts betwixt two Forts, that they may flanker it, and so to Trench in the Fort round, that no accesse may bee, eyther to or from the Towne; it must bee well Pallizadoed, as you see by the Figure; especially, if it stands upon any passage of consequence. The Prince of Orange, made use of these Redouts to surround his Campe, one to stand Musket-shot from the other, so that the Enemy could not possibly passe, but to the losse of his Men; but however the Enemy could not possibly doe any designe upon his quarters, but there would be a convenient alarum; so as the whole Army would be at the Brest-worke of their Trenches to entertaine them: In the discourse of Incamping, we have taken occa∣sion to speake of these kinde of Forts more fully

[illustration]

CHAP. XXXVI.

The manner of framing a Quadrangle Skonse.

THis Foure-square Skonse, is of greater strength than your Triangle, and if it be favoured with a strong Scituation, as great Rivers, or upon a Rocke, or where it may be flankered from the Bulworks of a Fort, it will stand in great stead; otherwise it is not to be taken for a strength of any moment: The Bulworkes and Curtines are to be made very high, thicke, and strong, that it may endure the battering of the Enemies Ordnance.

[illustration]

CHAP. XXXVII.

The manner of framing a Skonse with sixe Points or Angles.

THis Figure following, is a kinde of Fort, and is used in the Intrench∣ing or Belaguring a Towne round; it is spacious to hold 200 Soul∣diers or more, as occasion shall bee offered; You may perceive by the Lines drawne how every Angle is Flanked one from the other: It is made of good Earth very substantially after the same manner the former are; you shall see how they are scituated in the Page in the Figure of the Fort Beleagured.

[illustration]

[illustration]

CHAP. XXXVIII.

The manner of framing a halfe Moone.

This precedent Figure, is a kinde of a halfe Moone and is thus formed, because it lies open to some Curtin or Bulworke behind it, so that if the enemy fortunes to gain it, hee shall be beaten out from the Bulworke that Flankes it: the Brest-worke of it ought to be of the same thicknesse and height that the former Redouts were.

CHAP. XXXIX.

The manner of framing a Horne-Worke.

THere are two kinde of Horne-Workes which are to be made without the Fort of great height and strength, being the onely place of safety for all the out-workes to Retreate into when occasion is offered: it likewise safeguards the Counterscarpe, keeping the Enemy from approaching; it defends the Workes of the Fort from being battered by the Enemies Ordnance; it lies open to the Fort, so that if the Enemy should gaine it, they should bee Repulst from the Bulworkes; It is to bee scituated betwixt two Bulworkes, and it hath its defence from them, they Flan∣kering each side: The other fashion'd Horne-worke is made out with two Points, and is of greater strength then this, as in the next Page wee shall discourse of; It is called a Horne-worke from the fashion, being like a Beaugle-horne; some halfe-Moones are of this forme, but not of halfe the greatnesse this is to bee of, in regard this is alwaies well Man'd; For those that have the Workes against the Enemy one night, are relieved the next, and here they repose themselves; the third night they take their ease in the Towne.

[illustration]

The manner of framing of a Horn-worke described; with divers Ou•• workes belonging to it, whereby it may be defended from all Assaults, most proper to be placed before some weake Bulworke of a Towne beleaguered, or any other part of the Walls thereof, that may seeme easie for the Enemie to batter downe. By the Letters you shall find each Circumstance described, belonging to this worke.

A. The Front of the Horne-worke.	H. The Ditch of the Towne-walls.
B. The Ditch 30. foote broad.	I. A Fortification before the Out-workes 140. spaces distant from the Horne-worke.
C. The halfe Moone.
D. The Parrapet.	K. A three-pointed Fortification before the Front and corners of the Horne-worke.
E. The Ditch without the halfe Moone.	L. The Ditch.
F. The Counterscarpe.	M. The Pallizadoet upon the Counter-scarpe a∣bout the Ditch.
G. The Towne-walls.

Place this Horne-worke betweene Folio 90. and 91.

[illustration]

CHAP. XL.

A second kinde of Horne-worke, with its proper place.

THis second kinde of Horne-worke, is of greatest strength to resist the E∣nemie next the Bulworke, they are to open toward the Workes of the Fort, and to be scituated betwixt two Bulworkes that it may bee Flan∣quered by them: These are made without the Mote and Counterscarpe, a Musquets shot, or not all so much, according as the scituation shall permit: These ought to be alwaies in readines, if the Towne be a Frontier, and according as the field∣ding may be favourable for the Enemies Intrenchments their to raise one of these Workes, or if any place of the Wall of the Fort should be weaker then the rest; Wee had three of these ready raised at Zutphen in Gelderland to prevent the Enemies ap∣proches in those great Marshes about the Towne; there is no watch kept in them ex∣cept the Enemy be at hand: They are to be framed as your Bulworkes, Canonproofe, and of height sufficient to secure the Walls of the Fort; Likewise they must bee well Pallizadoed and strongly Man'd, View the Figure.

[illustration]

[illustration]

[illustration]

The Figures of the three famous Batteries, which were raised by Spinola at the Seige of Breda.

[illustration]

CHAP. XLI.

The description of the Redonts, Forts, and Batteries, which were raysed by Spinola at the Siege of Breda.

YOu must observe in these Precedent Figures (both of the Forts and Batteries which were raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda) Those sides of them which looked to∣wards the Towne, were made Canon-proofe (viz.) 25 foot thicke.

The first of the three Batteries was 160 foot long, and 125 foot broad; in the Reare and Flankes of it, it had a Wall 15 foot thicke, saving that one side of this Wall was thicker then the rest, rising with a walke and a Parrapet on the inside: in the Front it was lined with two exteriour Angles, the face of it rising with Nine o∣pen Windowes, for so many Peeces of Ordnance to play out at; each Window was 2 foot 1/2 wide, opening wider outwards by degrees: On the inside a Groundselling was raised like a bed of Turffe and Faggots, 8 foot in heigth, and 35 foot broad, co∣vered over with Plankes, for the speedy removing and recoyling of the Artillery: Behinde this Groundsell, was a place of Armes 130 foot long, and 50 foot broad. The outside of the Wall under the Canon Windowes, was Pallizadoed with sharpe long Stakes.

Before the Battery there is a halfe-Moone raised, wherein was a Guard of Mus∣quettiers, and compassed with a Counterscarpe and Pallizado, these were for the safety of the Battery: Round about the Battery a Ditch was suncke seven foot deepe, and 48 foot broad; the sides of the Ditch were cut sloping from the top to the bot∣tome, so that in the bottome it was but 38 foot broad; Vpon the outmost shore of the Ditch, was plac't a long Pallizado to hinder all sudden assaults, View the Figure.

The second and third Battery had their dementions much after the former, onely the least being the second Batery had a Fort about it for its defence, by the Figures you may perceive the difference both in their length, bredth, and corners: The foregoing Forts which Spinola raised against Breda, I have drawne the Figures of them, which if you please to view, you may observe that the Walls of them were 28 foot thicke at the bottome, and so were raised 15 foot high with a Parrapet upon the toppe of the Wall for the safegard of the shot, 6 foot high the Parrapet; the Wall was made sloping and Pallizadoed round; the Ditch about these Forts were 22 foot broad, 10 foot deepe, and 12 foot wide in the bottome, View the Figures.

[illustration]

* 1.190

[illustration]

* 1.191

A Battery raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda, upon the Heath neere Osterhout.

[illustration]

A Battery joyning to a Fort, raised by Spinola at the Siege of Breda, upon the Heath towards Osterhout.

[illustration]

CHAP. XLII.

Divers choise Observations worthie to be taken notice of, concerning the Beleaguering of a Fort; Collected from the famous Siege of Breda, Anno 1624. With the Description of the chiefest Trenches, Forts, Redouts, and Batteries, which were raised by Marquesse Spinola, against it.

YOu having taken a view of the precedent Figure of a Fort beleaguered, being surrounded with Trenches, Redouts, Forts, and Batteries; for your better understanding the manner and way how an Army should be brought and pitcht in convenient Quarters, and how the Trenches and Redouts, Forts, and Batteries, are to be plac'd in places convenient: I have taken some paines to bring to your view the orderly way which that famous Generall Mar∣quesse Spinola observed, at the remarkeable Seige of Bre∣da: It being the Queene of Garrisons in the Netherlands, beautified and strengthened with the absolutest Fortifications that eyther Art or Na∣ture could afford: So that it was conceived to be impregnable.

Wherefore in the first place, take notice how Spinola divided his Army (which consisted of 198. Foot Companies, and 32. Troopes of Horse) into three parts; purposely to distract the Hollander: to which end they tooke their marches seve∣rally to other places, then that which was intended; but at last they met, and joyned together at a Dorpe neere Breda.

The Towne of Breda fearing their designe, did immediately strengthen their Garrison, with 45. foot-Companies, and onely two Troopes of Horse: these For∣ces of the Towne were quartered in the Out-workes, and Walles, where they cau∣sed immediately to be raised divers Horne-workes and other Fortifications beyond them, as the precedent Figure of the Horne-worke will demonstrate: the Souldi∣ers of the Towne past into these Out-workes through Sally-Ports, made under the Wall of the Towne.

Spinola having encamped his Army two Leagues from Breda, he rested certaine dayes not doing any thing; which made the Hollander thinke they had some other designe: But having weighed all difficulties in his Ballance of reason, upon the 26. of August about twi-light, he sent Medina with 10. Troopes of Horse, and 4000. Foot, to pitch downe upon one side of the Towne of Breda.

Ballion had order the same time, to march with his owne Regiment, and 14. other Companies of Foot, and a certaine number of Horse, with divers Canons; and these were to pitch downe in another Quarter, neere the Towne, just oppo∣site to the former Troopes, and there they raised divers Workes, and intrench'd themselves.

The next Morning, by breake of day, Spinola arrived with the rest of the Forces, and intrencht them upon the other two sides of the Towne: Then from these foure severall quarters, they began to draw a Trench of earth, from quarter to quarter, in which they raised divers Redouts and Forts, about 400. paces one from the other, which served for a prevention of all suddaine Sallyes out of the Towne; each Co∣lonell from his owne quarter wrought towards the next; and mann'd the Workes with parties of Souldiers: The first, Trench was but 5 foot high, and 7. foot thicke at the bottome, and three foot broad at the top; the Ditch was 6. foot deepe and 7. foot broad at the top, and two foot at the bottome. This Trench was 3600. paces in circuit, but in regard of the overflowing of the grounds in Winter, they quitted these first Works, and were constrained to raise more solid Works further off from the Towne.

Wherefore they raised a second Trench neere ten foot high, and fifteene foot thick at the bottome, and made somewhat sloping; there was two foot bankes for the Musque∣tiets to step upon, to give fire over the Brest-work, this Brest-work was raised above

Foot-bankes, five foot high; ten foot thicke at bottome, and sixe at the top: This second Trench contained in Circuit 16000. paces.

Likewise, beyond this second Trench from the Towne-wards, distance about 200. paces, they were constrained to raise a third Trench, with divers Forrs, Re∣douts, and Batteries, as the precedent Figures will shew you; this Trench was of the same demention that the former was; being made very solid and strong to de∣fend their quarters from the Prince of Oranges his Forces, who did seeke to raise their Siege, or to releeve the Towne; This last Trench fetcht a Circuit round about the former Trench, it being 52000. paces in compasse.

Vpon the out-side of both these Trenches, a Ditch was sunke seven foot deepe, 15. foot broad at the top, and 8. foot at the bottome. The Souldiers of Breda sallyed out upon Spinola's men, as they were raising the first Trench next the Towne; and if they had falne upon them in severall places at once, they would by all probability have beaten them from their quarters, they being very weary, and but few in num∣ber at the first: So that they were constrained both to fight and fortifie themselves, the space of three houres: afterwards a greater resistance was made to beate them backe.

The Redouts of Earth were made of a quadrant Figure, * 1.192 and were so plac'd in the Trench, that no Angle or corner appeared outwards, they were 50, foot wide in the inside, and on the out-side 80. and strongly fortified with a Pallizado of sharpe sparres, placed in the outward edge of the Parrapet, they had a ditch about them, and a Counter-skarpe beyond the Ditch, and upon the verges of the Counter∣skarpe another Pallizado of Spiles was plac'd, to hinder the Enemies approaches.

The Forts were raised with greene Turfe, * 1.193 with foure irregular Bulworkes 35. foot thicke, and 13. foot high; their Curtins 100. foot long, as the Figures of them will shew you: These were of the strongest sort which were plac'd neere the Town, their Ditches were 12. foot wide, * 1.194 and 8. foot deepe, these were to indure the batter∣ing of the Canon from the Towne. The other Forts and Redouts, were raised 13. foot high from the ground, and 15. foot thicke, the Ditches 12. foot broad, and 8. foot deepe, the inside of these Forts and Redouts were but 8. foot high, and raised perpendicular; at which height, a walke was made five foot high and broad: and upon this was a Parrapet round the Workes five foot high, and ten foot thicke, this was to shelter the Musquetiers from the shot of the Towne.

These Workes had a kinde of Planke to lay over the Ditch, for the Souldiers to goe over into the Workes; and being these Bridges were drawne up with Pullies and fastned with iron haspes to the Posts of the Gate they both served for Bridge and Gate; And before these Workes, upon the out-side of the Ditch was a halfe-Moone raised well pallizadoed, to defend the entrance into the Forts.

These mighty vast Trenches, with the Forts, and Redoubts, were (by the dili∣gence of the Souldiers which wrought both night and day, they being continually releeved with fresh-men) finisht in 17. dayes. You shall finde amongst the precedent Figures divers great Forts, one of them was formed in a forme quadrant, with foure halfe Bulworkes, made very sollid for Artillery to be planted upon; it was Ca∣non proofe. The Curtins were 120. foot long, 28. foot thicke, and 15. foot high, pallizadoed round, to hinder the Enemies assaults. Likewise, you shall finde the Fi∣gures of 4. Forts more proportionable in strength to the first; these had a Trench raised, which ranne from one to another, very strong and solid, as before is shewed: these Workes differed in forme, but were of one and the same demention; these were plac'd upon an eminent passage, upon a little heath; by which the Prince of Orange might possibly have conveyed provision to the waters side, by which meanes the Towne might have beene releeved.

There were two Batteries raised at the entrance of each quarter, with halfe Moones before the entrance upon the out side, and divers Forts besides, according to the different scituation and danger of the place: the Figures of these Batteries I have likewise drawne for your better information.

There were three great Batteries raised, in three severall places neare the Towne, which battered against the Flankes of the Bulworkes of the Towne, and those sides both of the Batteries, Forts, and Redouts, which beheld the Towne, were made Ca∣non proofe, 25. foot thicke.

The greatest of these Batteries was 160. foot long, and 125. foot broad, in the Reare and Flanke of it, it had a Wall fifteene foot thicke, it was made rising with a Walke, and a Parrapet on the inside; in the Front it was lined with two exteriour Angles, the face of it rising with nine open Windowes, for so many Peeces of Ar∣tillery to shoot out at, each Window being a foot and a halfe wide, opening more and more out wards by little and little. On the inside, a Groundfell was raised, like a bed of Turfe and Fagots, eight foot high, and 35. foot broad, covered over with Plankes, for the speedy removing and recoyling of the Artillery.

Behinde this Groundfell, was a place of Armes 130. foot long, and 50. foot broad, the out-side of the Wall under the Canon-windowes, were pallizadoed; and before the Battery was two halfe Moones, guarded with Musquetiers, and compas∣sed with a Ditch and Counterskarpe, and a Pallizado of Spiles upon the Counterskarp, for the safety of the Battery, the Ditch was 7. foot deepe, and 48. foot broad, at the bottome but 38.

The two other Batteries were raised indifferent large, the manner of framing them, was much after the former; saving that the least of the two became the largest, by the Addition of a Fort: the Figures will better informe you, in the difference both of length, breadth, and Angles.

Spinola raised upon all Passages, very strong Forts; and upon the Causies (where there was no passage on neither side of it) he caused very strong Pallizadoes of yong Stadles droven into the earth, and framed together 15. foot high. Likewise, crosse the waters that drowned the Medowes, he made a double Pallizado, to prevent the Boates from going to the Towne.

Also, he blockt up the Rivers with a strong Bridge, and a guard of Musquetiers upon it, with sharpe peeces of timber lying pointing out of split their Boates. Also, he had Boates lay at Anchor in the River, to hinder the passage; besides, divers Boates bored through at the bottome, which were to be sunke upon the sudden; and divers other Boates of Combustible stuffe, to burne the Enemies Fleet. Also, within the River, at foure severall places a good distance one from another, there were strong Spiles of timber droven downe, and coupled together with Crosse-beames, in manner of Pallizadoes, which made the River unpassable.

The Townes-men raised five great Horne-workes, to secure their owne Coun∣terscarpe and Mote, before every Port of the Towne one, and the rest in other con∣venient places; the Levell-side of these Horne-workes, were 210. foot long, and 150. foot broad. I have presented to your view, the Figure of the largest Horne∣worke, which was raised before the Castle, it is 240. paces long, and 200. paces broad, it was pallizadoed thicke round about, to hinder the Enemies assault; beyond this Horne-worke is a Halfe-moone, fortified with a Counterscarpe a cubit high, and invironed with another Ditch, as the Figure thereof will better informe you: these Out-workes, were flanquered from the Towne walles; there was a Trench drawne from one Worke to another, to beate off the Enemy from the Counterscarpe.

The ordinary Carrison of this Towne, which consisted but of 15. Bulworkes, were 1600. Foot, and five troopes of Horse; but the brute of this Siege caused them to be re-inforced with 28. Companies more; besides there were 1800. able Townes-men, which were to manage the Walles.

The Governour sent away 3. troopes of his Horse, because they could affoord them no service in the Siege.

The Provision layd in against winter for these Souldiers, was 8200. measures of Wheate, of Oates 2800. 3600. weight of Cheese, and as much dryed Haberdine; and every Townes-man was (besides) to furnish himselfe for a yeare.

And in regard Spinola could not have his Provision for his Army come by Water, he was constrained to convey it by Land, it being 12. houres march; for the same purpose, he had all his Provision brought to one of his owne Townes that lay neerest to the Campe, named Lyre. But the Prince of Orange his Campe lying at Ros••ndall, they were constrained to march about, and to fortifie divers Dorpes in the way for the resting and securing of the Convoyes and Provisions.

Count Henry Van den Bergh, had the greatest part of the Horse, and as I take it, 4000. foot with him; besides, there was 1000. Horse more newly raised; with these forces he was to conduct the Provision.

His manner of proceeding was this; In the morning before day, hee gave Com∣mandement to put in order the disordered multitude of Carriages and Waggons; then hee sent some Troopes of Horse before to discover: Hee commanded them to March, he placed Artillery both in the Van, and in the Reare to give warning by their discharging, of the Enemies approaches; so that his men might gather toge∣ther as he had given them order, for to repaire to the place which stood most in need.

Hee guarded both sides of the Way neere where the Prince of Oranges Army lay with loose Wings of Horse; and hee lined these Horse with Guards of Musquetiers, and with the rest of the Horse he brought up the Reare.

Vpon occasion of feare hee made use of his Wagons instead of a Trench, drawing his Foot-forces within them: Hee had daily and hourely Spies to know the Hollan∣ders intentions and proceedings; He cut downe all Bridges that might afford the Hol∣lander a Passage to come at him in his March: By this meanes they sustained their Campe in despight of the Hollander: And as Vanden Bergh was to make his Retreat, hee fearing the Prince of Orange would have set upon his Troopes, hee ordered his Forces accordingly, by dividing them into three grand Squadrons; and so Marched ready to receive any charge.

The Prince of Orange then having Incampt his Army at Mede a Dorpe 2 houres distant from Breda, thinking to have relieved the Towne; So soone as Spinola understood it, he left all the Workes about the Towne well Manned, unto the charge of Medina, and Marched himselfe with 7000 foot, and 30 Troopes of Horse to a convenient place neere Osterhout, where hee Incamped within three miles of the Enemy, where he confronted the enemy, and anticipated the place of great advantage for the Prince of Orange to have relieved the Towne by it.

After that the Prince of Orange did perceive their was no hopes of relieving the Towne; hee provided for his safe Retreate, to which end hee raised divers Workes to hinder Spinola from pursuing him: As first upon a convenient passage hee raised a Fort to Retire his men into, and to defend them from the sudden pursuite of the Enemy; and upon the side next Spinolas Campe by which hee was to make his Re∣treate, hee raised a Brest-worke along the Causie, with a deepe Ditch to cover his men from the Enemies shot, and also to obscure them in their Retreate: Spinola fearing the Prince of Orange should have assaulted some of their Garrisons with his Army, Hee commanded Grave Hendrick Vanden-Bergh to dog him with his Army to prevent his designes.

This Siege having lasted part of Summer, all Winter, and part of the Summer follow∣ing; which was a thing thought impossible to have bin done being eleven Months: The Governour of Breda founded a Parley, and was content to surrender the Towne (they being almost famished) if Spinola would agree to such Articles as hee should propound: For the performance of which Articles there were sufficient Hostages from either side to confirme the Agreement.

I have set downe the Articles, they being a most fit patterne for all Governours to shape their Agreements by, The Articles follow.

First a Captaine of the Garrison of Breda, brought Spinola two Copies of the Ar∣ticles betwixt them, that hee might first signe them both; which done hee carried them backe to the Governour for him to signe, one part of them was brought backe to Spinola: Vpon the signing of these Covenants, the Governour demanded 1200 Waggons, and 60 Boats, to carry away sicke and ma••med persons, and others with their Carriages and Housholdstuffe, which was by Spinola granted.

Imprimis, It shall bee lawfull for the Governour of the Towne; with the rest of the Officers and Souldies, both of Horse and foot, to March out of the Towne armed Souldier like, (viz.) The Foot with flying Colours, Drums beating, com∣pleatly Armed, Bullet in mouth, Match lighted at both ends, their charges full of Powder and Shot: The Horse, with their Trumpets founding, Standards displayed; Armed in such sort as when they March towards the Enemy: And that no Souldier shall bee (of what Nation soever) questioned or detained for any cause or pretext whatsoever; not though he had formerly bin in the Enemies service; All without ex∣ception, having free liberty to march the best and most commodious way to their next Garrison, without injurie, hinderance or wrong done to their owne persons,

their Armes, Horses, or Baggage, and this with all safety and assurance possible: And further, it shall bee lawfull for them to take their Wives, Children, Houshold, Hous∣holdstuffe, Horses and Carts, with the Armes of all Souldiers dead or hurt, sicke or runne away without any search or inquiry made after them.

Item All Ministers or Preachers of the Word, Commissaries of Musters, Offi∣cers of Contribution, with their Clerkes, Ingineers, Gentlemen of the Artillery, the Auditor of the Souldiers, Masters of Fire-workes, Captaines of Pioners, Cano∣ners, Surgions of Regiments, and private Companies; with all such as belong to the Traine of Artillery, Marriners, Notaries, Overseers of Workes, Provosts, Pi∣oners, Carpenters, Smithes, Commissaries of the Victualls, and all persons whatso∣ever, any way belonging to the Artillery or Engines, with their Wives, Children, and Servants, Horse, and Armes; shall bee comprehended in the former Article, and enjoy the same priviledges.

Item All Boats found about or in the Towne at this present, as well those which arrived last with the Colonells, as with any others; shall be permitted with all their necessaries and tackling, to returne to their next place of refuge, guided by their own Pilots and Marriners; in which it shall bee lawfull for them to Imbarke their Fami∣lies, and Housholdstuffe, with the Armes and Baggage of the Colonells, Captaines, and other Officers of the Armie, sicke persons, with such as attend them; and all others whosoever desire to passe by Water into their next safe Garrison: And to this purpose the River shall bee open for them, during the terme of twelve dayes, and then within that space they may safely repaire to—and joyne themselves with their other men of Warre; and from thence take their journey to what place they please, the Boats remaining still to their owne Masters and owners: And during the sayd terme of twelve dayes, no man shall dare to molest or hinder those Boats, but shall permit them to passe freely with their Passengers, without searching them, for any cause or pretext whatsoever: And if it chance that the passage of the River bee not yet freed and made Navigable againe, (by which their journey may bee any way hindered) the time in which by that meanes the journey hath beene stayed, shall not bee reckoned amongst those twelve dayes; which terme they enjoy freely and withall assurance, as well in the River it selfe, as upon either shore of it, where Marriner or any other Passengers shall have occasion to land, for their commodity or affaires: And if any of the Boats belong to any man, who shall desire to reside still in the Towne of—they shall bee tyed notwithstanding to helpe to transport Pas∣sengers, and Baggage out of Breda, and afterwards returne home to their Masters.

Item Spinola shall allow the Governour any reasonable and sufficient number of Waggons as hee shall demand, to transport his owne, the Colonell, Captaines, Offi∣cers, and other mens Baggage of the Garrison, to their next Garrison, from whence they shall returne them safe and faithfully againe.

Item It shall bee lawfull for the Governour to carry out with his Garrison any foure Peeces of Artillery, and two Morters hee shall make choice of, with all their appurtinances, and as much Powder and Ball as they will beare at sixe charges; and it shall bee at his choice to transport them with their Carriages either by Water or by Lane: And for this purpose the Marquesse Spin••la shall allow the Governour if hee shall demand it, all Canon-Horses and others, with their Waggons, and Waggon∣men, as shall bee requisite for the transporting of these Peeces of Artillery and Mor∣ters, with all their appurtenances.

Item What goods or Housholdstuffe belongs to the Prince of Orange, it shall be lawfull for him or his Deputie to transport them to what place hee pleaseth, within the time of sixe Moneths; at which time a free passage shall bee given without any molestation or hinderance, in the meane time the goods to bee safely preserved.

Item If it chance that any man comprehended in the two first Articles, shall bee unable for his sicknesse to goe out of the Towne with the Garrison: it shall be law∣full for such to remaine in the Towne, with their Wives, Families, and Servants, without any wrong offered them, untill they have recovered their health and strength againe, and then a free passe shall bee given them to depart to what place they please.

Item No Officer of the Armie, Souldier or Captaine, or any other whatsoever

comprehended in the aforesayd Articles, who shall now goe out with the Gar∣rison, or shall remaine in the Towne till hee have recovered his health, shall after∣wards bee troubled, as not being comprehended in the sayd Articles; for by vertue of these Articles, it shall bee lawfull for him to goe freely at any time, and hee shall have credit for Money upon his Bond, or any other assurance hee shall bee able to give.

Item The Governour, Captaines, Officers, and Souldiers comprehended in these Articles, or any other whatsoever being in Pay, and subjection of the united States; shall have in Breda any houses or possessions, moveables, or immoveables (comprehending as well the Captaine, Officers, and Souldiers of the Companies of—as the Widowes and Children belonging to those Troopes &c. or any other Companies, which for two yeares before have beene in Garrison in Breda) shall have a yeare and a halfe (beginning within a Moneth after the signing of these Covenants) to transport their goods to what place they please; or to Sell, Morgage, Alienate, or exchange them, according to the Lawes and Customes in that particular: And in the meane season they shall enjoy all Rents, Profits, and Commodities of their In∣heritance, accrewing to them for the present, or to accrew; and in conclusion they shall enjoy any thing belonging to them in the Towne.

Item The Souldiers either of the Garrison, or our Campe, being now Prisoners either in the Towne or in the Campe, at the signing of these Covenants, shall bee set at liberty without Ransome, paying onely their charges, according to the taxation of the place.

Item No man shall take any thing from any of the Garrison of any price hee hath made; all such things being to passe under the title of the Souldiers owne goods.

Item After the signing of these Articles, it shall be lawfull for the Governour of Breda, to send any Officer or whom so ever else, to the Prince of Orange, who shall bee permitted safely to goe and come.

Item After the signing of these Covenants, there shall bee a suspension of Armes on both sides: Howbeit, on each side the Souldiers shall maintaine their Workes, permitting no man to come neere them either by day or night.

Item Before the Garrison march out of Towne, two sufficient Hostages shall be given, who shall accompany the Garrison to the next Fort or Towne of strength; and shall remaine there the twelve dayes in which the River is to remaine open, and the Covenants to bee fulfilled; and this terme being expired, if the Covenants in any point have not beene broken, they shall returne backe againe.

Item These Covenants being signed, Hostages on both sides shall bee given of equall number and quallitie; and ours shall returne home againe upon the delivering of the Towne.

Item It shall bee lawfull for the Hostages of the Garrison of Breda, to returne as soone as the sayd Garrison hath quit the Towne, that they may depart away with the Garrison.

Item The Governour and Garrison of Breda, promise to march away upon Thursday next ensuing, early in the morning, being the fift day of June.

Vnder the place of the Seale the Governour wrote as followeth;

Wee, Justin of Nassaw, doe promise to see the contents of the former Articles fulfilled as much as lieth in us: In Witnesse of which, with the consent of the Co∣lonells, and Councell of Warre here, Wee have signed these this second day of Iune, 1625.

In the next place you shall see what Articles the Magistrates and Burgers of Bre∣da, did demand of Spinola, as followeth.

Imprimis, Pardon is granted to all Burgers, and Towne dwellers of Breda, of what quallitie or condition soever, for any offence committed before or since the surprising of the Towne, which was in the yeare—no inquiry or information shall bee taken against any man, not so much as under the pretext of Treason, or of other offence whatsoever.

Item All the sayd Burgers or Towne dwellers either absent or present, of what condition soever, whether they bee actually in service of the States, or the Prince of

Orange, or the Towne, or whether they bee not in service, may safely remaine in Breda the two first yeares, no inquiry being made after them for matters of Religion; nor having no obligation to change their Religion (provided they carry themselves modestly, and without scandall) that in the space of these two yeares, they may re∣solve either to continue their residence here, or to goe to any other place, and when∣soever they shall desire to depart, they shall bee permitted to goe freely; and in like manner they shall bee permitted to enjoy their goods, carrying them with them, Selling, Morgaging, or Alienating them at their owne liberty, or at the liberty of such as shall have the administration of them: The goods of such as dye within or without the Towne; shall accrew to them to whom they shall leave them by their last Wiils, or if they die Intestate, to the next Heires.

Item It shall bee lawfully for any of the sayd Burgers or Towne dwellers, whe∣ther he be now in service or no; (if after these Covenants hee have a desire to depart out of the Town, either to change his habitation, or for any other respect) to depart at any time either by Water or by Land; with his Wife, Children, Family, Houshold∣stuffe, Marchandize, or any moveables whatsoever, without any impeachment for any respect whatsoever, onely by vertue of this Covenant, without any other Pas∣port: And such as desire to make choice of their residence in the Kingdomes, Estates, or Provinces, either neuterall, or such as pay contribution; may at any time passe, or repasse into the Townes and Countries subject to the King of Spaine, and traffique or dispose of their goods, moveables, or others whensoever they thinke good: And the Catholiks shall not stand in need of any other deed more then these Covenants, by vertue of which, to returne and make their residence here, and possesse such Hou∣ses as they have in Breda.

Item It shall bee lawfull for all such as desire to goe about their occasions into any of the united Provinces, to take their journey thither foure times in the yeare; giving first the Governour notice of it, of whom they must of necessity demaund licence, who shall not refuse them without just cause; and they shall returne with∣in the two yeares agreed upon in these Covenants, to continue their residence in the Towne, or make choice of any other place under contribution, in all which places, they shall enjoy the aforesayd liberty of passing freely to any place about their busi∣nesses, and make use of any other benefit of these Covenants.

Item, All Ministers may depart freely with their Wives, Children, Families, goods and moveables, without any wrong or offence offered them; for which pur∣pose they shall have Boats or Waggons allowed them, and the aforesaid terme to dispose of all their goods.

Item, All such, as since the taking of the Towne have executed the Office of Elders, Deacons, or any other Ecclesiasticall charge, shall bee comprehended in these Covenants.

Item, All Officers, Commissaries, Receivers, and other Burgers or Towne dwellers, who have had any Office about the Money, Rents, or Payes of the Soul∣diers; or any Office whatsoever, shall enjoy the same conditions and priviledge, to depart with their papers and other moveables; and all other benefits (joyntly with other Townsemen) of this agreement.

Item, The same is uuderstood of all Mariners, and others who have Boats here; with which in like manner they may lawfully depart.

Item, If it chance that in the Towne there bee no Waggons, or Boats sufficient to accomodate the Burgers, or Towne dwellers who shall desire to depart with their Moveables and other goods; it shall be lawfull for them, within the aforesayd terme of two yeares, to cause Waggons or Boats to come out of Holland or any other place for this purpose, which may returne freely by vertue of these Covenants, without any other Pasport.

Item, No other impost or taxes shall bee imposed upon the Burgers or Towne dwellers of this Towne, then such as generally all other Townes of Brabant great and small, Pay.

Item, The Garrison of the Towne both Horse and Foot, shall be orderly lodged, with the least hurt or dammage that may bee of the Townsemen.

Item, All such as are now absent about the Towne businesse, or their owne;

shall participate of these Covenants, and may freely returne to the Towne: And the Peasants who had retyred themselves to Breda, may as freely returne againe to their owne Villages.

Item, All such of other Religion as shall chance to die in Breda, within the a∣foresayd terme of two yeares, may bee honourably buried in any Garden, or their bodies if it please their friends carried out of Towne.

Item, All sentences pronounced by the Magistrates or other criminall Iudges called &c. shall hold and bee in force; if no appeale have beene made from them in time.

Item, It shall bee lawfull for all such as have lent any Money to the Towne, to demaund their Principall, and their Interest; and all Rights and Rents which fall; shall in like manner bee yearly payed.

All these Covenants, Points, and Articles have beene concluded, agreed on, and granted, by the Marquesse Spinola, and the Commissioners of the Towne; who have signed them severally: The Marquesse undertaking to procure to have them rattified and approved by the Infanta within 15 dayes, with her Letters Patents and broad Seale; Dated the 2. of Iune 1625.

Thus much concerning the siege of Breda I thought good to insert; and I ra∣ther made choice of this, then of the taking of it againe by the Hollander, because they trod the same steps to regaine it againe, that Spinol a had before made use of: Nei∣ther had Grolle, Mastrike, or Skinkin Skonse in their Besiegements such choice cir∣cumstances belonging unto them, as this famous siege ••ad▪ Neither had any Towne in Germany beleaguered by the Swedes, the like passages that were made use of at this Towne. And this Compendious discourse, may serve to giue a better light into our former discourse of Fortification; whereby the Ingenious Souldier that hath not seene the manner of a Siege, may hereby informe his judgement, and better his un∣derstanding.

Let mee request you to take a view of the precedent Figures, which will repre∣sent to you all manner of Redouts, Horneworkes, Forts, and Batteries that are to be raised against a besieged Towne; and the foregoing discourse will direct you in the circumstances belonging to the framing and ordering of them.

CHAP. XLIII.

How to frame a Flankered Redout.

THis kinde of Redout is the strongest, and can best defend it selfe, in regard every side hath an Angle to Flanke it, this is to bee plac't for the safegard of some Siege, or to prevent the Enemy from making there excursi∣ons over Rivers; this may be built of Bricke, and Rooft over with a Soller and a falling doore for the Souldiers safety if the Enemy should breake in: Like∣wise on every Flanke, loope-holes to shoot out at; from the toppe of the Roofe is a kinde of Pully set out which drawes up a Pitch-pan, which they must fire in manner of a Beacon to warne the Countrey, and the next adjoyning Redout, of the Enemies being there. The Hollanders made divers of these alongst the River Isell in Gelderland to prevent the Enemies getting over into the Vello.

[illustration]

If it bee pallizadoed it is the stronger, the principall defence is the Flankes and the third part of the Brest-worke, as by the two Lines, one drawne from A to A. the other from B to B. View the Figure.

The next discourse is the use of Artillery, and then after that the duties of Soul∣diers in Garrisons, shall bee plainely shewed.

THE VSE OF ARTILLERY IN FORTS. SECT. IV.

CHAP. XLIV.

The Office of the Master of the Ordnance, and other inferiour Officers; and Mu∣nition, with divers other Circumstances thereto belonging.

HAving finished the former discourse of Fortification; we are now to proceed, and take a Survey, how both in Ancient and Moderne times, Artillery hath been used; and so collect from the best Writers, such observations as shall be most pertinent for our discourse; and adde such things to this Worke, which others have beene de∣fective in, and so wee will indeavour to make it per∣fect. And as there is great variation in Authours opi∣nions, so the Reader may make as various constructions in his contemplating on them. Therefore, I shall inde∣vour to reconcile their opinions, and reduce all things materiall to a perfect me∣thod.

Wherefore, first we must begin with such instructions, as ought to be inherent to the Master of the Ordnance; and in this discourse, for brevitie sake, wee shall give a touch of all other inferiour Officers duties, and of what things particularly are to be committed to their charges: And in regard it is an Office of great impor∣tance, and diversity of things runne through his hands, and are by his wisedome, to be rightly ordered: Therefore it behoves him to be a man of excellent performance, both in Valour and Learning, and not daring to thrust himselfe into this great Office, not being well qualified and fitted for it.* 1.195 He must be a geod Arethmetician, Ma∣thematician, Geometrician, and besides an expert old Souldier: for in this, if the Practicke be not joyned with the Theoricke, and so both inseparable in this Officer, there will be a deficiencie in the execution of this Office. The care and charge of this place being so weighty, and impossible to be performed by one man, therefore divers Substitutes and inferiour Officers, are allowed for his assistance, and the chie∣fest under him, is his Lieutenant; who must be a man most able, in his judgement and carriage, to take a great part of this heavie weight off the Masters shoulders. Wherefore, in what place of consequence the Master of the Ordnance is absent, there the Lieutenant is to be present: if the Master bee in the Campe, then must the Lieutenant be at the Battery, Breach, or Curtin; if the Master bee present in the afore-named places, then ought the Lieutenant to be at the Store-house, the Mines, or some other place of most necessary importance and imployments.

The residue of the Sub-Officers are these, Master Gunner, under Canonires, Wa∣gon-Master, the Furrier, and divers Clerkes, besides Gun-makers, and Carriage-makers, and others of meaner dependency. Great care is to be taken, that the Gun∣ners performe their duties, in managing their places, both in mounting, dismount∣ing, charging, levelling: and where he sees a defect, these superiour Officers being expert and skilfull in this Art, may be able to instruct, correct, and controule the ignorant, and see those escapes amended, in what sort soever committed; hee is to make an Inventorie of every small and particular parcell that accompanies the Pee∣ces of Ordnance, and of them the service being performed, to give his accompt.

Against the Army march, it is requisite he make provision, that every Peece hath his sufficient number of draught-Horses, and Oxen, apt to draw the same according to the nature of the wayes,* 1.196 with sufficient Attendants to assist upon all occasions. Likewise every Peece hath his Gunner, with his Co-adjutor or Mate, and a man to serve them both, and helpe them charge, discharge, mount, wadde, cleanse, scoure, and coole the Peeces being over-heated. Further, there must bee a Master of the Timber or Wood, and a Smith; their duties must be to see the Garriages fit, or to amend them.

Over the aforesaid Gunners, there is a Corporall or Constable chosen, to view or take charge of all the inferiour Gunners,* 1.197 and of their actions. The Master of the Ordnance must be very carefull, to see his Store-house be continually furnished with all manner of Provision; both for Artillery, Munition, and manner of Armes, and Engines; both offensive and defensive; all kinde of Ordnance ready mounted upon the Carriages; Quintals of Canon-powder, and other powder, Oxe-hides to co∣ver and defend the same, shot of Iron, Leade, and Stone, in great quantity, fitted for all manner of Peeces;* 1.198 Match, Iron-shovels, Mattockes, Pick-axes, Axes, Hatchets, Hookes, Plants, Boordes, H••rdles, Mandes, Baskets, Wheele-barrows, small Tumbrels for one Horses draught, Nayles for the Tyres, and all other purpo∣ses; Sawes, Sledges, Iron Barres, Crowes, A••gers, Skrewes, Chargers, Ladles, Rammers, Spunges, Chaines, Cart-clouts, Weights, all sorts of Smiths-tooles, Horshooes, and Nayles, Cordage, Coffers, Candles, Lanthornes, Scarclothes, Sope, Grease, Tarre, Scaling-ladders; all sorts of Small-shot, Weapons and Armes be∣longing both to Foot and Horse; he is likewise to have those that are skilfull in ma∣king Trunkes, Balles, Arrowes, and all other sorts of Wild-fire, and Fire-workes; and for the continuall supply of them, there ought to be had in a readinesse; great store of Sulphur, Salt-peter, Rosin, Caly-vine, Quick-peall, Lint-Seed oyle, common Lampe oyle; Pitch, Tarre, Campher, Waxe, Tutia, Arsnick, Quick-Silver, and Aqua∣vitee; hereof are to be framed Balls of fire; Cressets, and Torches; that stormes of Raine and wind, cannot extinguish, Murthering Bullets; to be shot out of peeces and the like; as shall particularly be showne hereafter in this discourse: Further the Ma∣ster of the Ordnance upon the receit of a Ticket from any of the Captaines of the Ar∣my, is to give speedy order to his Clerke to deliver both Powder, Match, and Bul∣lets; He must have under his Command a Band of Pioners, the Captaine over them ought to be very discreet and carefull; he must likewise see these Pioners be suffici∣ently guarded, whilest they are at worke, lest the Enemy surprize them, he is to see every man carefully payed his meanes, he is to be a very expert Engineere, with a most approved judgement in all kinde of Fortifications, and able to direct all kinde of Officers under him, as the Lieutenant of the Ordnance, Engine-Master, Captaine of the Pioners, and the Trench-master; he is to have all kinde of Boates and Bridg∣es, he is also to appoint under his hand-writing, the number and proportion of all manner Provision of Munition, which shall attend the Army: and the Lieutenant must see it performed and distributed, to the inferiour Officers. Lastly, he is wisely and discreetly to order all his affaires, and whatsoever he is put in trust with, for his owne honour, and the welfare of the Army. In the next Page, followes a Table of all kinde of Ordnance, with their names, and proportions of Weight, Length, and Bignesse, &c.

CHAP. XLV.

The Names of all kinde of Ordnances whatsoever, both for Field and Garrison, now in use for offensive or defensive Service, with the height of their Diameters, their weight, and length; The thicknesse of the Mettall at the Breech, Trunnions, or Necke; The number of Men, Horses, or Oxen, requisite for the draught of each Peece; the height, weight, and compasse of the Bullet, belonging to each Peece; how much Corne or Serpentine Powder, is requisite to charge every severall Peece; and also the length and breadth of the La∣dles fit for every Peece; the distance every Peece shoots at Point-blanke and utmost Randon, &c. First invented by Mr. Smith, but in some kinde rectified, with Additions thereunto, Fit for all kinde of Officers to understand and observe; ut sequitur.

The Names of the Peeces of great Ord∣nance now in most use.	The height of the Diameter of each Peece.	The height of the Bullet.	The weight of the shot in pounds.	Compasse of the shot in Inches and parts.	Weight of Serpentine Powder.	Weight of Corne Powder.	Weight of the Peece in Pounds.	Length of the Peece in Feet.	Thicknesse of Mettall at the Touch-hole, inches.	Thicknesse of the Mettall at the Trunnions.	Thicknesse of the Mettall at the Neck.	Ladles length.	Ladles breadth.	Length of the Planzes of the Carriage of the Peece.	Depth of each Planke in Inches at 〈◊〉〈◊〉.	Depth of the Planke at the lower end in feet.	Thicknesse of the Planke in inches and parts.	The number of men to draw each Peece in service.	The number of Horse to draw each Peece.	The number of yoke Oxen.	Distance of pace the Peece carries at point-blanke.	Distance of paces each Peece carries at utmost randon.	Length of the Coyler Repes.
Canon of	8	7 ⅙	64	25 1/7	40	32	8000	12	8	6 1/4	4	23 1/2	15	16 ••/4	32	20	8	90	16	9	300	1500	70
Canon Serpentine.	7 1/2	6 3/4	52	23 4/7	25 1/4	26	7000	11 1/2	7 1/2	5 1/3	3 3/4	22	14 1/2	16 1/4	20	18 1/4	7 1/2	80	14	8	340	1600	66
French Canon.	7 1/4	7	46 1/4	22 11/14	25	23 1/4	6500	12	7 1/4	5 2/••	3 5/••	21	13 3/5	16 1/4	29	18	7 1/4	70	12	7	360	1740	64
Demi-Canon eldest.	6 3/4	6 1/2	36 5/8	21 3/14	20 1/4	20	6000	11 1/4	6 3/4	5 1/••	3 ••/••	22	12	15 1/2	27	16 ••/4	6 3/4	65	11	6	370	1800	60
Demi-Canon Ord.	6 1/2	6 1/4	32	20 3/7	20	18	5600	10 1/2	6 1/2	5	3 ••/8	20	11 1/2	15 1/••	26	16 1/4	6 1/2	60	10	5	350	1700	54
Demi-Canon.	6	5 3/4	24 1/2	18 6/7	18	16	5000	11	6	4 3/••	3 ••/••	21	11	16	24	15	6	56	9	5	340	1600	46
Culverin.	5 1/2	5 1/4	19	17 ••/7	16	15	4500	13 1/4	•• 1/2	4 1/••	3	22	9 ••	18 1/4	22	13 1/8	5 1/2	50	8	4	420	2100	40
Ordinary Culverin.	5 1/4	5	16 1/4	16 1/2	15	12 1/2	4300	12	5 1/4	4 1/••	2 3/4	21	9	17 ••	21	13 ••/4	5 1/4	46	8	4	400	2000	36
Semi-Culverin.	4 1/2	4 1/4	11 3/4	14 1/7	9	9	3000	11	4 1/2	4	2 1/••	20	8 ••/••	16 3/••	18	••1 1/4	4 1/2	36	7	4	380	1800	34
Dem-Culverin lesse.	4 1/4	4	9	13 5/14	8	7 1/2	2300	10	4 1/••	3 ••/4	2 2/3	19 1/27	7 1/4	14 ••/••	17	10 ••/4	4 1/4	28	6	3	320	1600	30
••••ker ordinary.	3 1/4	3 1/2	5 1/4	11 11/14	5 1/2	5	1900	9 1/2	3 3/4	3 1/4	2 1/2	16	6 3/4	14	15	9 ••	3 3/••	24	5	3	300	1500	28
••••keret or Minion.	3 1/4	3	3 1/4	10 3/14	5	3 1/2	1100	8	3 1/4	2 1/4	2 1/4	14	5	11 1/2	1••	8 1/••	3 1/••	20	4	2	280	1400	24
••••wcon.	2 1/4	2 1/2	2 1/3	8 9/14	2 1/2	2 1/4	750	7	2 3/4	2 1/3	2	12	4 1/2	10 1/4	11	7	2 ••	16	3	2	260	120	20
••••••conet.	2 ••/4	2	1 1/7	7 1/14	1 1/2	1 1/2	400	6	2 ••/4	2	1 3/4	10	3 3/4	8 2/3	9	6 ••	2 1/4	10	2	2	220	100	20
••abinet.	1 ••/2	1 1/4	3/4	3 2/4	3/4	2/4	300	5 2/••	1 1/2	1	1/2	9 1/2	2 1/2	7 1/2	8	5 1/2	2	8	2	2	150	700	18
••••se.	1 1/4	1	••/••	3	2/3	1/4	200	4 ••/4	1	1/2	1/4	8	2	6 1/4	7	5	2	6	2	2	100	560	18

In the precedent Table of Mr. Smith, he hath onely named such Ordnance as are most usuall in England. Wherefore, before we proceed to our intended discourse, we will observe the conditions of divers Canons of a larger extent,* 1.199 as the Canon of 9. inches Diameter, the shot weighes 110. pound, and hath in Corn-powder 76. pound for her Charge.

The Canon of 10. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 174. pound, and requires for her charge in C. powder, 136. pound.

The Canon of 11. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 205. pound, and requires 146. pounds of C. powder for its charge.

The Canon of 12. inches, hath for its Bullet in weight 245. pound, and requires 162. pounds of C. powder for her charge.

The Canon of 13. inches, the weight of the Bullet is 285. pound, and requires 190. pounds of C. powder for its due charge.

Canon of 14. inches. hath for the weight of its Bullet 348. pound, and requires 232. pounds of C. powder for its charge.

There are likewise divers of those Ordnance specified in the precedent Table, that are re-inforced,* 1.200 as the

Dragon, or double Culvering, whose mettall weighes 14000. pounds, and shoots 357. paces Levell, and 4252. paces at its best randon.

The whole Culvering weighes 8500. pounds,* 1.201 carries Levell 315. paces, and at its best randon 3703. paces.

The Demi-Culvering weighes 4600. pounds, shoots levell 235. paces, and at its best randon 2796. paces.

The Saker or halfe-Culverin weighes, 2650. pounds, and shoots levell 183. pa∣ces, and at its best randon 2181. paces.

The Fawlcon weighes 1500. pounds, shoots levell 889. paces, and convayes his shot at its best randon 1659. paces.

The Fawlconet weighes 850. pounds, shoots point-blanke 107. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at best randon 1280. paces.

The Rabinet weighes 425. pounds, shoots point-blanke 82. paces, and convayes its shot at best randon 669. paces.

The Base weighes 300. pounds,* 1.202 shoots point-blanke 63. paces, and conveyes its shot at best randon 725. paces.

We are further to observe, that there are of these kinde of Ordnance, of a lesse weight and force in mettall, and yet of the same Diameter or Bore; as first,

The Dragon or double Culverin weighes but 11000. pounds, shoots levell but 325. paces, and at the best randon 3164. paces.

The whole Culverin weighes 6300. pounds, shoots levell 285. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at its best randon 3391.

The demi-Culverin 3150. pounds, shoots point-blanke 217. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at the best randon 2588. paces.

The Saker weighes 2000. pounds, and shoots point-blanke 167. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at best randon 1838. paces.

The Fawlcon weighes 1100. pounds, shoots point-blanke 127. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at best randon 1514. paces.

The Fawlconet weighes 600. pounds, shoots point-blanke 98. paces, and con∣vayes its shot at best randon 1163. paces.

The Rabinet weighes 350. pounds, shoots point-blanke 75. paces, and convayes its shot at best randon 482. paces.

We are further to observe,* 1.203 that there are divers Ordnance that beares the same denominations, the former legitimate Ordnance did, which the Gunners terme bastard Peeces, in regard the length of their Chase, and height of their Bore differs: and of these, there are some re-inforced by Mettall, and others of the same Nature are lessened; those that are re-inforced, I will first describe; as the Ordinary Basiliske, or Bastard double-Culverin,* 1.204 is about 26. Diameters in length, shooteth an Iron cast∣shot of 48. pounds, and requires in powder for her charge 30. pounds of fine powder, or 39. pounds of common; the weight of her Mettall is 14660. pounds, shoots by Mettall 659. paces, by levell 329. paces, and at best randon 3511. paces.

The Serpentine or Bastard-Culverin,* 1.205 is in length 27. Diameters of her Bore, and shoots 24. pounds shot, with as much Common powder, or 19. l. 1/••. of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 pow∣der for her charge; her weight in mettall is 8100. l. shoots by mettall 590. paces, by levell 295. paces, at best randon 3511. paces.

The Aspike or Bastard-demi-Culverin shooteth 12. l. shot,* 1.206 with 12. pound of fine powder, and is 28, Diameters long; weight is 7600. l. shoots by mettall 440. paces, by levell 220. paces, and by its best randon 2618. paces.

The Pellican or Bastard quarter-Culverin is 29. Diameters of her Bore in length,* 1.207 the weight of her shot is 6. l. with as much fine powder for her charge, the weight of the Peece is 2550. l. shee conveyes her shot by mettall 344. paces, by levell 172. paces, by best randon 244. paces.

The Bastard Fawlcon shooteth 3. l. shot,* 1.208 with t••ree pounds fine powder, and is 30. Diameters long, and weigheth 1500. l. conveyes her shot by mettall 261. paces▪ by levell 131. paces, and by her best randon 1553. paces.

The Bastard Rabinet dischargeth an iron shot of one pound and a halfe,* 1.209 with so much fine powder, and is 31. Diameters of ••er Bore in length, weighing 800. l. and shoots by mettall 200. paces, by levell 101. paces, at her best randon 1198.

The Base weighes 450. l. and shoots by mettall 120. paces,* 1.210 by levell 72. paces, and at her best randon, 916. paces.

As for the lessened Bastard Peeces,* 1.211 I shall now describe the weight of mettall and the distance in conveying their shot.

The Basiliske weighes 10500. pound▪ shoots by mettall 595. paces, by levell 298. paces, at best randon 3540. paces.

The Serpentine weighes 6300. l. shoots by mettall 530. paces, by levell 275. paces, at best randon 3153. paces.

The Aspike weighes 3700. pound, shoots by mettall 400. paces, by levell 200. paces, at best randon 2028. paces.

The Pellican weighes 2100. l. shoots by mettall 310. paces, by levell 155. at best randon 1844. paces.

The Fawlcon weighes 1200. l. shoots by mettall 212. paces, by levell 118. paces, at her best randon 1407. paces.

The Rabinet weighes 650. l. shoots by mettall 182. paces, by levell 92. paces, at her best randon 1086. paces.

The Base weighes 155. l. shoots by mettall 136. paces, by levell 70. paces, at her best randon 825. paces.

Thus much shall suffice in describing the Names and natures of these kinde of Ordnance; We shall afterwards take occasion to speake of all kinde of Morter-Pee∣ces, and the like; and draw out some particular discourses of the conditions and qualities of all sorts of Ordnance whatsoever, and the right uses of them. Thus ta∣king it for granted, you are perfect in the Names and conditions of these Ordnance, I will proceed in the next Chapter to speake more fully of the Canon; how they are divided according to their conditions, for severall services eyther offensive or defensive.

CHAP. XLVI.

How the Gunners of our Times doe divide these Ordnance, according to their quallities for severall services.

IN this Chapter wee are to take notice how our moderne Gunners divide these Ordnance,* 1.212 according to the condition of the Peece for each proper service; and we are to take them in Foure kindes; as namely, First of the Canons, which are divided likewise into 3. sorts:* 1.213 The Canon Royall or double Canon; Secondly, the whole Canon, or as it is called the Canon of 7. Thirdly, the Demy-Ca∣non, whose diameter of the Bore is 6 Inches 1/2 parts; these three kindes are onely used in Batteries against strong Walls and defences of the Enemy,* 1.214 because their shot being so weighty, doth shake and ruine more then the inferiour Ordnance: Note by the way, that all Forreigne Ordnance are called or named ac∣cording to the weight of the Shott: and for the most part 18 times the diameter of their Bore is the true length of their Chases, yet many times they are more and sometimes lesse. The second kind of Ordnance used in service are the Culverins▪ which wee will reduce to five sorts,* 1.215 (although the table mentions more) Culverins and demy-Culverins serve to pierce and Slice out in Batteryes, what the Canons have loosened and shaken;* 1.216 The Saker and Faulcon serves to Flanker any Bulworke or halfe Moone; the other smaller sort of this kinde serves for Field-Peeces, for assaults, or to shoot at Troopes of Men or Horse:* 1.217 The third kinde of great Ordnance are Ca∣non-Periors, and Perieraes; and of these there are foure kindes which are used for severall purposes; these kinde of Peeces never shoot any Iron or Leaden Bullets, but Stones, Grandoes, and other murthering Shot and Fire-balls: The Canon-Pe∣rior is most serviceable to defend a Breach, keepe a Passage, and to murther and spoile the Enemy being within its reach; All Forreigne Peeces of this kind are either Ta∣per, or Belbored in their Chambers; the mouth of the Chamber is either 2/•• or 1/2 in Calibre of the height or Calibre of the mouth of the chase of the Peece;* 1.218 their Cham∣bers are to bee in length 4 Diameters of the mouth of the sayd Chamber: Our Eng∣lish Peeces are equally bored the length of their whole Chases, but the other Taper∣bored, are better and stronger, so that the mouth of the Chamber be equally in height with the rest of the Bore forwards towards the mouth.

The next sort of these kindes are termed Perieraes, and they are farre inferiour Fortified with mettall to the former: For the Canon-Perior is usually allowed 80. Pound of mettall,* 1.219 for every Pound weight of their Stone-shot; and these Perieraes are allowed but 60 pound, the Chamber thereof is 1/2 parts in bore of Calibre at the mouth; her charge is 1/4 parts of the weight of her Stone-shot in corne-Powder.

The third kinde of these sort of Ordnance are the Port Peeces, and Stock-Fow∣lers, these are likewise cast in Brasse, but are open at both ends, and are to bee loaded with Chambers at the breech fitted close thereinto, with Shoulders as your wooden Pipes which conveyes water, are tapewise fitted in.

The fourth sort of this third kinde of Ordnance, are Sling-Peeces, and Portingall Bases,* 1.220 which have Chambers fitted likewise into their breeches as the former had: both in these kinde of Peeces and the former, the Shot and Wadde is first put into the Chase, and then is the Chamber to bee firmely wedged into the taile of the Chase and Carriage: These last mentioned Peeces have no Carriages, but stand upon a strong forked Prop,* 1.221 upon the ends of which the Trunnions rest, and unto the end of the Chase is a long steale of Iron with a Cord tied unto it, which raiseth it higher or low∣er, according to the assigned marke these Shoot: Base, Burre, Musquet, or any kinde of murthering Shot, being put up in Bagges or Lanthornes fitted to the Bore; these are usually loaded with 1/4 or 1/•• of the weight of their Shot in corne-Powder, and most usually made of wrought Iron.

The fourth and last kinde of Ordnance, are likewise subdivided into foure severall kindes, and not onely differ from the former Peeces of Ordnance, but divers in them∣selves, and are various in their uses one from the other: The names are these, the

Morter-Peece, Square-Murtherers, Toctles and Petards; the Morter-Peeces are very necessary and usefull, as well for the Assaylants, as Defendants; for being duely used, they annoy the Enemy much in his Forts or Trenches: First, by s••ooting Gra∣nadoes either single or double, Iron Bullets, Stone or Leaden Shot.

The nature of other Ordnance is, to convey the shot in a right line, to performe such service as they are assigned to, and there must bee no hinderance neither of Hils, Houses,* 1.222 or Walls betwixt the Peeces levelled, and the marke intended to bee hit: but these kinde of Peeces are ordained and fitted to shoot in an oblique or crooked line, to convey their Fire-balls or other Shot, over Walls, Hills, or any obstacle that may hinder other Peeces at 90 degrees of the quadrant they shoot right upwards; but most commonly they are mounted from 80 degrees, to 70. 60. 50. or 45 accor∣ding as the distance is in farnesse from the Peece, or the height of the Hills, Walls, or Houses shall hinder: Some of these Peeces have their Trunnions in the middest, some a little lower, and many even with their Breeches; they are Fortified with mettall 1/2 of the height of the mouth of the Chamber at the touch-hole, and •• of the Calibre or Bore of the mouth of the Peece; the length of their Chases are divers, some are two, others 3 Diameters of their mouthes Bores, in length; the Charge in corne-Powder is 1/1•• part of the weight of the Shot; if it Shootes at Mounture above 40. Degrees, but if it Shoots Levell or downewards •• parts of Powder of the weight of the Shot; not forgetting to put a good Wad alwaies betweene the Powder and the Shot, unlesse it bee charged with Fire-balls; then nothing is to bee put to hinder the Powder from firing the Balls.

Moreover, great care is to bee had least crackes or holes be in the Granadoes, least they Fire in the Peece; and endanger the breaking of it, wherefore it is safest to coat it over: If these kinde of Peeces bee loaded with Granadoes of Potters-earth, or Glasse; then 1/2 parts of their weight in Powder will bee sufficient, otherwise they will breake; But if Stone, or Iron Bullets 1/•• or 1/4 of Powder; for the lesse you mount your Peece, the more Powder is required to charge her.

For the charging of these latter sorts of Morter-Peeces,* 1.223 is sufficiently discourst of; onely much care is to bee taken in spunging and cleansing the Peece before the Pow∣der bee put in, the mouth of it ever standing upright: The due charge of Powder being put in the Chamber, there must bee a Wadde rammed downe either of Hay, or Ockham,* 1.224 and after it a Tamkin of some soft Wood, of such bredth and thicknesse as will fill up the Chamber, that no vacuity may bee betweene the Powder and W••dde, or Wadde and Shot; after the which the Shot being put in, with another Wadde after it, to keepe the Shot from too speedy flying out: Note that in mentioning the Mor∣ter-Peeces, I intend the other two, namely the Square-Morters, and Tortles.

The fourth and last which remaines to bee discourst of is the Petard, which are onely used to blow open Ports, and Portcullis; they are divers in their magnitudes; according to the strength of the opposition they are to Ruine: Their proportions are some to hold one pound of Powder and lesse; others to hold 50 or 60 pounds or more: They are fashioned like to a Morter or Saints-Bell▪ somewhat tapered, they are 1/4 parts Diameter of their mouthes Calibre at the bottome of their Chase; and in thicknesse of mettall 1/8 parts Diameter at their Breech, and up towards their mouth, lessening in thicknesse; there is usually allowed five pounds of Mettall, bee it Brasse or Iron to every pound of Powder, according to the proportion of the great∣nesse of it; so that for 50 pound of Powder, your Petard must weigh 250. pound, or 300 pound weight of mettall: a strong hooke is to bee scrued into the substance you intend to ruine; and upon this hooke hangs the wringle of the Petard, and like∣wise to bee shored up with a strong forked Rest to stay the Reverse of it; the charge∣ing them is after this manner.

First, the true quantity of Corne-powder being rammed downe hard to the bot∣tome of the Chase, little by little, untill it bee fil••ed within a fingers bredth of the mouth, then bore a hole downe to the bottome of the Powder, through the middest of it with some square peece of Iron, into which concavity, divers quilles of quicke-silver are to bee put; then a planke made fit of 3 or 4 Inches thicknesse to lay on the mouth of it, which is to bee strongly plated with Iron; betweene the planke and the toppe of the Powder, you are to place a waxed cloth just the widenesse of the

mouth of the Petard, then fill up the residue of the Chase betweene the cloth and the toppe of the mouth with molten Waxe, mingled with Flaxe, Hurds, or Towe, there is a Pipe to come from the touch-hole,* 1.225 which is to bee filled with slow and sure re∣ceipt of Fire-workes, which by a priming of quick-powder fire may bee given safe∣ly.

For to prove the strength and sufficiencie of these short Ordnance whether they will hold and endure; you must charge them with once and ⅓ parts of powder of the weight of the Shot:* 1.226 Note that when any Peece of Ordnance of what kinde so∣ever growes hot, there is a discretion to bee used in lessening the Charge of Pow∣der, otherwise the Peece will breake; the Figure of this Petard shall afterwards in this discourse bee described.

CHAP. XLVII.

How a Gunner is to Tertiate and measure a Peece of Ordnance that hee bee not deceived in Charging it; And also how to despart any kinde of Ordnance.

ALthough wee have formerly spoken in a particular way of all kinde of Ordnance which our moderne Gunners make use of; yet wee must bee farther instructed before we can attaine the perfection of this Art, how each sort of Ord∣nance differs in their Fortifications, bee they of the kindes either of Canons, or Culverins; for there is a great diffe∣rence in these, as formerly wee have discourst of, in regard they are either more Fortified in mettall, or lessened and abated: So that those ordinary Peeces exprest in the prece∣dent Table, are as it were a meane betwixt these extra∣ordinary Peeces discourst of in the foregoing Chapter.

Wherefore if a Gunner doe not rightly conceive of the constitution of each Peece, hee will fayle either in overcharging the lesse fortified or weaker, or under-charge the more fortified or stronger Peeces:* 1.227 For prevention whereof, Gunners have di∣stinguisht them into three sorts; As namely, first either ordinarily fortified, or lesse∣ned, or double fortified; that is to say, common or Legittimate Peeces, Bastard-pee∣ces, or extraordinary Peeces: Common or Legittimate Peeces, are those that have a due length of their Chases proportioned according to the height of their proper Bores,* 1.228 as the Table aforegoing hath demonstrated: Bastard-peeces have shorter Chases then the proportion of their Bores do require; and extraordinary Peeces are such Ordnance as have longer Chases then the proportion of the Bore allowes: Ther∣fore to bee certaine of what constitution the Peece is of, the readiest way is (if your Calibre compasses bee wanting to measure or tertiate her with) to take a cord or packthred, and girding the Peece at the Touch-hole, at the Trunnions, and at the Necke, taking ⅓. parts thereof, for the Diameter of the body of her mettall, in each place after this manner following.

The Canon or ordinary Culverins have about 11. Diameters of their Bore at the touch-hole, at the Trunnions 8. and at the necke 6. Diameters in their circumfe∣rences; * 1.229 But the Canon commonly employed in Batteries, have but 9. Diameters at their touch-hole, at their Trunnions 7 ½. parts, and at their neckes 5 2/••. in the circumference of their mettalls there: Lastly, the Demy-Canons are but 1/8 of their Bores, in thicknesse of mettall at the touch-hole; If any Peece bee more or lesse, then they are either re-inforced,* 1.230 or lessened, and according to the force or feeble∣nesse of the Peece, to allow her a convenient charge of Powder: The double For∣tified or re-inforced Canons of Batterie, have one whole Diameter of their Bore, in thicknesse of mettall at the touch-hole, and 11/16. at her trunnions, and 7/16. at her necke, and can endure to burne 34. pounds 1/2. parts of fine powder, or 43. 1/2. parts of common powder: Contrarily, the lessened Canons of Battery is ••/4. at the Chamber, at the trunnions, 9/16. and at the necke ••/16. of the Diameter, of their Bores

in thicknesse of mettall,* 1.231 the poorenesse and debillity of her constitution in mettall will not endure 25 ½. of fine powder; or 31 pound of common powder notwith∣standing her Iron Bullet weighes 60. pound.

Moreover, if a Peece of Ordnance bee not truely cast, so that one side is thicker in mettall then the other; Shee ought to have but such a proportion of powder, as the thinnest part will beare, otherwise it is in danger of breaking, besides it will ne∣ver shoot right: Therefore to examine the Peece, you must mount the mouth of it upon a Skidde or peece of Timber; then you must divide the circumference of the Base-ring at the Breech into foure equall parts; and in the same manner likewise di∣vide the circumference of the Mossell-ring at the mouth into foure parts,* 1.232 every par∣ticular point of the Base-ring answering unto each point of the Mossell-ring, in a right superficiall Line; then stretching a chaulke Line from the uppermost marke of the Mossell-ring alongst the Cillender of the Peece, unto the uppermost marke of the Base-ring; then striking the Line that it leaves a perfect marke behinde it, then in the same manner strike the rest of the points; so that there will bee foure equall Lines dividing the body of the Peece into foure equall divisions: then take a straight rod, and put it into the mouth of the Peece holding it close to the side of the concave, directly in it as the Lines directeth; one Line whereof lying directly upwards, the opposite will lye directly to it underneath, and the other two Lines will bee on both the sides of the Peece: Then take the quadrant, and place one side thereof even with the Rod; and looke what degree the Perpendicular plumblyne entteth there∣on, * 1.233 and so turning the Peece that one of the Side-lines may lye upwards as the for∣mer Line did; and if the plumblyne falls not upon the same degree at each of the 4. Lines, the quadrant being applied in manner aforesayd, then the Peece is truely Bo∣red: Likewise if the Bore of the Peece lye awry in the mettall, either to the right or left hand under or over; it must bee truely disparted before a true shot can bee made:* 1.234 To performe the which, take with a paire of Callibres the greatest height of the mettall at the mouth of the Peece, and likewise at the Breech, abating the lesse out of the greater ½. parts, the remainer is the just disparture of the Peece, as for example, A Culverin that is 19. Inches high at the Base-ring, will bee 13. Inches high at the Mossell-ring; which 13. Inches abated from 19. rests 6. which being divided into two equall parts, the quotient being three Inches, shewes the true dis∣parture of the Peece: It may also be done by taking a Line and measuring the greatest circumference of mettall in the Base-ring; multiplying that measure by 7. dividing the product by 22. the quotient is the Diameter or height of the circumference; likewise measure the circumference of the Mossel-ring; and multiply that measure by 7. divide by 22. as before, the quotient will shew the Diameter of the mettall at the mouth; then substract the diameter last found, from the diameter of the breech ½. that remains is the true disparture: Or for want of Callibres, take a cord and measure the greatest circumference of mettall at the Breech, then multiply that measure by 7. dividing the product by 22. the quotient is the Diameter or height of the circumference: Likewise measure the greatest circumference of mettall at the mouth, multiply that measure by 7. divide by 22. as before, the quotient will shew the Diameter at the mouth of the mettall; substract the Diameter last found, from the Diameter at the Breech ••. the remainder is the true disparture, Exempli gratia. Suppose a Peece of Ord∣nance 132. Inches circumference of mettall at the Base-ring or Breech, and at the Mossel-Ring or mouth, 88. Inches: To know the Diameter of mettall at Breech and mouth, and the true disparture; you must multiply 132. by 7. the product is 924. this being divided by 22. the quotient is 42, the height of the mettall at the Breech; likwise multiply 88 by 7 you have 616, divide this by 22, the quotient is 28, the height of the mettall at the mouth; which 28. abated from 42. rests 14. the which 14. being divided into two equall parts,* 1.235 yeelds 7. Inches for a part, the true disparture of the Peece.

Moreover, if you finde your Peece thicker of mettall in one part then another, shee will convey her Bullet towards the thickest side; wherefore after with your instruments, and such Rules as before is described for the finding it out, you under∣stand where the fault lies, and which side is the thickest; you must to remedy it, di∣vide the overplus of mettall in two parts, setting the disparture of your Peece, one

of those parts towards the thickest side of the Peeces mouth, and bring the middle part of mettall at the Breech of your Peece, that disparture, and the middest of the marke, taking a direct levell with your eye, and laying it in a straight Line, Fire being given the shot will hit right; but if the thickest part of the mettall bee a∣bove, then you ought to make your disparture one Inch more, if under towards the Carriage, then one Inch lesse.

Now to know how farre such a Peece will shoote wide,* 1.236 there is a generall rule set downe by Gunners; that so oftentime the length of the Cillender or Concave of the Peece is to the marke, and then knowing how much the Peece is thicker on th' one side then the other; the one halfe of that overplus being multiplied by the quotient first found, the product will shew how much the Peece shooteth wide of the marke; (as for example) If a Governour findes a Canon to be thicker of met∣tall by two Inches on the right side then on the left; she being 9. foot in length, and the marke assigned to be shot unto is supposed to be 500. paces from the Peece: To worke this, you must bring the 500. paces into feet, which makes 2500, feet, the which being divided by 9. feete, being the length of the Concave: Cillinder of the Canon, yeildeth in the quotient 277. feet 7/9. the which multiplied by 1/2. the superfluity of the mettall being one Inch, makes 272. feet 7/9 still, and so much wide the marke should the sayd Peece have shot at such a distance, although she had beene layed full against the middest of the marke.

These observations I thought fit to gather and present to the view of the Studi∣ous Souldier, which I question not, but will be taken well by any Souldier that un∣derstands himselfe: As for Imbellicke fooles, I leave them to Travell for more wit, Valour, and experience.

So let this suffice for the Tertiating and measuring a Peece of Ordnance, which otherwise the Gunner may be deceived in Charging it; and also it shall bee sufficient for the disparting any Peece of Ordnance, otherwise their will be great errours in making a true Shot: In the following Chapter wee will discourse of divers circum∣stances and causes, which a Gunner must take into his consideration otherwise great errours will ensue every shoote he makes.

CHAP. XLVIII.

Divers circumstances and causes to bee considered and avoyded, which causeth errour in Shooting.

THere are such diversitie of Implements, Materialls, and circumstances, belonging to great Artillery, which be∣ing not truely planted, formed, and framed, causeth sundry accidents to proceed from them; so that if a wonderfull care and vigilancie bee not had to prevent and amend the same, it will bee impossible to make a true shot in all kinde of Peeces, and upon all kinde of Platformes: Therefore it will bee most convenient to discourse of every particular thing that may let and hin∣der the true performance of a Shot, and likewise shew the best remedies to redresse them:* 1.237 And for the performance thereof, we will take the Rules and advises of the best and ablest Gunners that have wrote upon this discourse: Wherefore first observe if a Peece of Ordnance be not truely layed upon her Carriage, or her Carriage not truely framed, will produce an errour; the remedy for this, is helpt by this Rule:* 1.238 First measure the just length of the Cillender or Bore of your Peece, then note, the Plankes of the Carriage ought to bee once and a halfe that length; also measure the Diameter of that Peece, and the sayd plankes at the fore∣end shall bee in depth 4 times that Diameter, and in the middest three times ½. the Diameter, and at the end next the ground, two times and a halfe the Diameter, and in thicknesse once the Diameter.

Next observe whether the wheeles have their due proportion in heigth, or whe∣ther

one wheele bee higher then the other,* 1.239 or one wheele reverse faster then the o∣ther: Observe the due proportion for the wheeles should bee ½. parts the length of the Peece: The Saker and Minion, the height of their wheeles must exceed this former proportion by ••. parts: For the Faulcon and Faulconet 1/6. and for the Base one quarter; The Vellowes must bee in length 4 Diameters and 11/1••. of the Bore. and sixe of these makes the whole circumference, and each of them one Diameter in breadth, and one in thicknesse; The Nave ought to bee three Diameters thicke, and three Diameters and a halfe long; The Spokes are to bee two Diameters in length, and let into the Nave one halfe Diameter, and into the Vellowes one halfe Diameter more; each Wheele is to have twelve Spokes, and each Spoke, a quarter of a Diameter square; The Axle-tree must bee one Diameter ••. in thicknesse; The Armes thereof must bee in the thickest place one Diameter,* 1.240 and at the ends thereof ••. parts of a Diameter in thicknesse, and where the Limbes or sides of the Carriage rests on, it must bee one and a quarter in bredth, and one and 2/••. parts in heigth.

Thirdly, if the Trunnions bee not duely plac't directly in a diagonall Line with the axis of the Peece, it will shoot wide: Therefore observe, first to measure the length of the Concave, Cillinder, or Bore of the Peece from the mouth to the Breech; divide that measure by 7. then multiply that summe that commeth in the quotient by 3. the product will shew you how many Inches or other measure the Trunnions ought to stand from the end of the lowest part of the concavity of the sayd Peece at the Breech;* 1.241 or otherwise you may multiply the length of the concave of the Peece by 3. and divide the product by 7. the quotient will shew the true place how farre the Trunnions ought to stand from the lowest part of the Bore: For Chamber bored Peeces, this Rule fayles, for they must be placed more backwards, because the thick∣nesse of mettall towards the Breech, exceeds in comparative proportion to equall bored Peeces, which would become Breech-heavie and very troublesome in mana∣ging; * 1.242 and if the Trunnions should bee plac't according to the former Rule, the met∣tall of such Chamber bored Peeces would be thinne and weake at the proportioned place, so that a due place must bee found to place them more neere the Breech, the better to support the great weight of the mettall, and the better to keepe her steadie in her discharge, and not to be too unwildie, but neere equi-ballancing for the moun∣ting and managing thereof.

Fourthly, if the Platforme be not layed with planks very levell and smooth, so that neither of the Wheeles, nor neither side of the tayle of the Carriage takes a rubbe in the reverse,* 1.243 or rest harder on the Platforme upon one side more then upon the other.

Fiftly, when the shot is too low for the Bore of the Peece, and at the delivery toucheth upon one side,* 1.244 causeth the Shot to erre, and if the Shot be not equally round, or the bore of the Peece not lying straight, but more on the one side then the other; or if the Shot be rammed too farre home, or too short.

Sixthly,* 1.245 if the Winde be too vehement either with you or against you, the thicknes, or thinnes of the Ayre will cause errour.

Seventhly,* 1.246 the heating or cooling the Peece, and Note that a Brasse Peece being made hot with often shooting, is more apt to breake then when it is cold; and any kinde of Artillery of what mettall soever, is more apt to breake in a great Frost (be∣ing cold) at the first or second shot, then afterwards being hot with often shoot∣ing: Moreover a Peece of Ordnance over hot with shooting, will not raunge so farre not pierce so deep, as being temperately cold, and the slower the Powder is in firing within the Peece, the greater her reverse will bee, and the shot of lesse execution: In the next Chapter we will observe some Rules in charging great Ordnance, with their due proportion of Powder and Shot to every particular Peece, with sundry other circumstances thereto belonging.

CHAP. XLIX.

Observations in charging great Ordnance, with their due proportion of Pow∣der and Shot to every particular Peece belonging: with their Ladles, Tampions, and Spunges, and all kinde of Circumstances; Fit to be learned of every Commander, both concerning Peeces, Powder, and Bullets.

WEE having travailed thus farre in observing what our famous Gunners of this latter Age, have through their industry and experience found out, to perfect and beautifie this noble Art, which is now brought to a most excellent perfection; I hold it most fit to dis∣course of every particular branch in an orderly way; and to performe this, I shall indeavour to picke and cull out of the ablest Authors their best practicall ex∣periments, and so briefly and distinctly handle them, that the ingenuous Commander may profit thereby. And first, not forgetting how wee have formerly shewed the nature and quality of all kinde of Ordnance,* 1.247 their due due strength and Fortitudes, with divers accidents that may hinder their true shooting; Now re∣maines, divers further Observations and Curiosities, which may not bee omitted in lading or charging them Gunner-like: Wherefore having Powder, Bullets and Match, with other implements in readinesse for Service, and before you charge your Peece, you must cleere the Touch-hole, and spunge the Peece well.

A Peece of Ordnance is eyther to be laded with Cartrages or with the Ladle, Cartreges is the readiest way,* 1.248 they are framed eyther of Canvas or paper royall: For the making of these in a due proportion; that they may neyther hold more nor lesse, but a due charge. You are to take the height of the Bore of the Peece with∣out the vent of the shot, then cut the cloth or paper of the breadth of three such heights, and if it be for a Canon, the length must be three Diameters of the Bore, for a Culverin 4 and for a Saker, Fawlcon, and other inferiour Peeces 4 ½. parts of the height of their proper Bores: Note, you are to leave in the middest, top, and bottome, one other such height, at each of these places to lye over, and make a Cover and a bottome for the Cartreges;* 1.249 moreover, you are to augment or di∣minish these Cartrages, according as your Powder is in strength or weaknesse, or according as your Peece is hot.

If your Peece bee an ancient cast Peece Taper bored, the former of Wood must be made accordingly, that the Cartreges may goe to the bottome; if Chamber-bored, * 1.250 the Cartrage must be layd in a thin instrument called a Chassela, which will convey it into the Chamber, but if right bored your Rammers head put it close home, and with a three-square sharpe priming iron make a vent through the Cartrage at the Touch-hole; so that the priming powder that is to take fire may come to the powder in the Cartrage.

The next thing considerable,* 1.251 is to know how to give a true charge with a Ladle; First, we are to consider (as formerly I have sayd) whether the Peece be double for∣tified or not,* 1.252 or whether inferiour in mettall; a double fortified Canon, is to bee charged with two Ladles full of powder,* 1.253 the Ladle is to bee two Diameters and a halfe of the shot in length, the socket of the Ladle-plate that is fastened on to the Staffe, is to be one Diameter more of plate, the breadth of the plate of this Ladle must be two Diameters.* 1.254

Or rather observe this Rule, take a Cord and measure the Circumference of the Bullet in the middest, laying the same measure to an inch Rule, then divide the same

measure 5. into equall parts; Note, that three of these parts, is the just breadth the plate of the Ladle ought to be of: which being orderly placed on the Staffe as before, and bent circularly, serves to hold the powder in; the other 2/••. parts being cut off, and so left open, serves to turne the powder into the Peece: the Length of this Ladle, is to be made according to the fortifying of the Peece with mettall. For a Canon, the length is to be 23. inches 1/••. parts. For a Canon Serpentine 22. inches, a French Ca∣non 21. Demi-Canon eldest 22. Demi-Canon ordinary 20. Demi-Canon 21. inches, and so for all inferiour peeces, according as the Table in the beginning of this dis∣course, doth plainly demonstrate.

To charge with this Gunner-like;* 1.255 so soone as this Ladle is filled so full that it may be strucke off with a Rule, the same being put into the mouth of a Peece, and your thumbe being fixed upon the upper part of the Staffe, so thrusting it home to the bot∣tome of the concavitie of the Cillender, turne the Staffe so, as your thumbe falles di∣rectly under the Staffe, so the Ladle will disburthen it selfe orderly.

Now to know the ••/5. parts of the Bullets Circumference, that the Ladle may fitly hold her true charge;* 1.256 Lay the measure of the Bullets whole Circumference to an inch Rule, then multiply the same by 3. and divide the Product by the Denominator 5. the quotient will justly tell the breadth the plate ought to be of; As for ex∣ample; You shall finde in the Table, a Canon whose Bullet is 7. inches high in Dia∣meter, this will be 22. inches in the Circumference,* 1.257 that multiplyed by 3. makes 66. which divided by 5. the quotient is 13. inches, 1/2. the true breadth of the plate, for a Canon Ladle of 7. inches Diameter.

But if it should so happen,* 1.258 that neyther Ladle nor Cartrages were to be had, nor ballances ready to weigh out the due proportion of powder for a charge, then thrust your Rammer into the Cillender of the Peece just to the Touch-hole, and there marke the Staffe even with the mettall at the peeces mouth: then pull the Staffe backe three Diameters for the Canon, and 3 1/2. for the Culverin, and 4. Diameters for the Saker, ••awlcon, and the rest inferiour Peeces. Likewise, marke there another marke, be∣tweene these two markes, is the place of distance, the powder will supply in the Chamber of the Peece. Then take Paper, Parchment, or Cloth, as long as the di∣stance betwixt the two markes, then being wrapped up round, equall with the Bore of the Peece, onely 1/20. part lesse; the sides and bottome being glewed, fill it with powder, and gently put it into the mouth of the Peece, and thrust it home with the Tampion, and see there be just so much powder, as will occupie the place betweene the two markes, so as the last marke be equall to the s••atte of the mouth, the Ram∣mers head being home to the powder.

But by the way,* 1.259 let us take some observations of the mixture of Gunpowder▪ so that the Gunner may not deceive himselfe, in the over or under-charging his Peece, according as the strength or weaknesse of the powder shall happen, by meanes whereof it shall be impossible to make a true shot; for there is a certaine proportio∣nall charge of powder to be found for every Peece, according to the strength of the Peece and the weight of the shot, some hold that the truest charge is a just quantity of fine powder, that shall all fire within the Cillender of the Peece, and what is more is superfluous.

Now we are to observe,* 1.260 there are three sorts of powder in use of severall forces; the first is a small corned powder for Birding-peeces, and Fowling, the ••ngredients is 7. or 8. of Peeter, and one of Cole and of Brimstone, and this is quickest and of greatest force; the second is for Musquets and Pistols; called sine-powder, the Composition is 5. or 6. of Peeter for one of Cole and of Brimstone. The third is called Ordnance powder, and that hath 4. or 5. of Peeter for one of Cole, and of Brim∣stone: to distinguish the force of these severall kindes, or of any powder decayed, there is an instrument invented, the Figure and use of it followes in this Booke, in the discourse of Warlike instruments.* 1.261

Besides, it is easie for a Gunner to know if powder be decayed through mutation or corruption, three severall wayes; the first by the sight. Secondly, by the se••ling; the third and surest way, is by firing it: If it lookes blacke and darke, or if it moul∣ders or clammes together, it is naught and decayed; for good powder will feele nimble, and looke of a blush or tawny colour: if good powder be fired upon a peece

of white paper, if it rise quicke being fired, and spread in a moment, smoke little, but rise in a cleare flash, and leaves no peeces upon the paper, but carries all away cleane, without firing the paper, the powder is very good, otherwise not; by these symp∣tomes, a Gunner cannot be deceived in proportioning his due charge.

Next, we are to know the difference of Bullets; both in their heights, weights, Circumferences, and Mettals, which being not observed, a world of errors will bee committed, and a true proportionable charge can never be found to make a right shot.

Wherefore, first observe our best Gunners doe allow for all kinde of Bullets 1/••. part of the Diameter of the Peeces Bore for vent.

Secondly,* 1.262 according to the weight of the shot, the charge of powder must bee proportioned. Therefore it is most necessary, first to know the true weight of any shot by the Diameter thereof. Secondly, to know the different weights of Bullets, being of one and the selfe-same Diameter, proportion, circumference, and height, but of severall substances: as Iron, Leade, Stone, and the like. Wherefore take no∣tice, the proportion in weight of Iron to Leade, is as 30. to 46.

Likewise,* 1.263 Stone to Leade is as 18. to 72. and Stone to Iron as 18. to 48. the powder due to every charge, must be proportioned according to the weight of the Bullet, be it more or lesse, as Mr. Digges in his 17. Theorem doth shew, and as Mr. Norton Comments upon it: That if a Gunner shoots three severall shots in a Saker, the Bullet of the first being Leade, the second Iron, the third Stone, the true charge of powder being 12. pound as the leaden Bullet requires, then the Leade out-rangeth the other two, and that of Iron will out-range that of Stone; but if these three severall Bullets be discharged with other severall proportions of powder, as the Iron Bullet requires 8. l. of powder,* 1.264 then will the Iron out-range the Leade, and the Leade the Stone-shot. But thirdly, if these three kinde of Bullets bee severally shot with 4 l. of powder, being the true proportionall charge for the Stone-shot, then will the Stone-shot out-range the Iron, and the Iron the Leade.

Further in his 18. Theorem, the convenient weight of a Bullet alters according to the quantity or validity of the powder,* 1.265 for as formerly is shewed, that the Leade shot requires the whole weight of ordinary powder, or ••. of Corne powder, and the Iron-shot ••/2. of ordinary, or 2/3. of the best powder; and the Stone-bullet 2/••. of ordinary, or 1/•• of the best powder.

Moreover, these precedent things being considered, yet there is further to be ob∣served the length of the Peece,* 1.266 for although there be a convenient ponderositie of Powder and Bullet, answerable one to the other, which might cause a perfect shoot, yet if the Cillender of the Peece be not proportioned in length, but is eyther longer or shorter, it will cause alteration; for the longer Peece will require more powder to be fired in her, before the shot can arrive just at the mouth of the Peece to be dis∣charged than the shorter will,* 1.267 for if all the powder be fired before the shot arrives at the mouth, the after running thereof within the mouth of the Cillender, will hinder the swiftnesse thereof: So likewise if the Peece be too short, so that the Bullet be out of the mouth of the Peece before all the powder be fired, having received all the force of powder, for want of sufficient length in the Cillender of the Peece, it cannot possible doe the true execution. For conclusion, we are not to forget to learne the weights of all kinde of Bullets by their Diameters, and by having the true weight of a small Bullet, thereby to finde out the weight of a greater; as also, by having the weight of an Iron Bullet, thereby to finde out the weight of a Bullet of any other mettall.

An Iron Bullet; whose Diameter is 12 inches, the weight thereof is 240. l. the same Diameter of Leade weighes 360. l. and the like in Marble Stone, 90. l. as you may perceive by a Table following, exactly calculated by Mr. Norton.

In the next place,* 1.268 by having the weight of a small Bullet, thereby to finde out the weight of a greater, is performed by this Example following.

An Iron Bullet of 6. inches Diameter weighing 30. pounds; by this I would know, how much a Bullet of 12. inches Diameter weighes, being of the same met∣tall. This is performed by multiplying the Diameter of each Bullet cubically, where I finde the Cube of 6. to be 216. and the Cube of 12. to be 1728. Then by the Rule of proportion I say, if 216. weighes 30. l. weight, what shall that Bullet weigh whose Cube is 1728. So multiplying 1728. by 30. l. the weight of the lesser Bullet

ariseth 51840. which being divided by 216. being the Cube of the lesser Bullet, yeilds in the quotient 240. l. So much shall the Bullet weigh, that is of 12. inches Dia∣meter.

How by the weight of an Iron Bullet, to finde out the weight of a Bullet of Mar∣ble Stone, being of the like Diameter, or by the weight and height of a Marble Bul∣let, to finde out the weight of an Iron Bullet of like height, is thus performed.

As for Example.

An Iron Bullet of 12. inches height, is of 240. l. weight; to know the weight of a Marble Bullet of like Diameter:* 1.269 You must first observe, that a Bullet of Iron to the like Bullet of Marble Stone, shall beare such proportion as 18. to 48. (as before is shewed) and therefore I multiply the weight of the Iron Bullet knowne, being 240. l. by 18. the proportion the Stone Bullet beareth thereto, of which ariseth 4320. this being divided by 48. the quotient is 90. l. Thus much shal the Marble Bullet weigh, that is in Diameter equall with the Bullet of Iron of 12. inches Diameter.

After the same manner take the height and weight of a Stone Bullet,* 1.270 being 12. inches Diameter, which weighes 90. l. and multiply this 90. l. by 48. the Iron Bul∣let beareth to the Stone, which Product being divided by 18. which is the propor∣tion the Stone beareth to the Iron▪ the quotient will be 240. the number of pounds the Iron Bullet weighes.

After the same manner, a Leaden Bullet being of the same Diameter that either an Iron or a Stone Bullet is of, by knowing the proportion betweene Iron and Leade, or Stone and Leade, you may finde out the weight either by the other, as before is shewed.

Moreover, if there be two Bullets, one higher in Diameter than the other, if you want a paire of Callibre Compasses to take the just height, you must take a Cord and guirt the Bullet or Bullets (whose height you desire to know) just in the midst, then lay the measure to an inch Rule, observing how many inches or other measure the same containeth, which being done, multiply the said measure by 7. and divide by 22. the quotient will shew you the just Diameter,* 1.271 then abating the lesse Diameter from the greater, the remainer will shew you how much the one is higher than the other.

As for Example.

If the Circumference of one Bullet be 20. inches, and the Circumference of the other 30 inches; in working as above is taught, I finde the Diameter of the lesse Bullet to be 6 4/••. and the Diameter of the greater Bullet to be, 9 6/••. so abating the lesser from the greater, the remainer is 3. inches 2/11. parts of an inch, shewing the great Bullet is so much in height more than the lesse.

To finde out the Circumference of any Bullet,* 1.272 there is a generall Rule for it; first, the height of the Diameter being knowne, you are to observe in the next place, that the height of the Circumference is as 7. to 22. As suppose the Diameter to be 12. inches, which 12. I multiply by 22. the Product is 264. which being divided by 7. the quotient is 37 ••. the true Circumference of a Bullet 12. inches height.

Likewise, having the Circumference of any Bullet, you may finde out the height of the same; but this is to be wrought contrary to the former conclusion. As sup∣pose the Circumference to be 37 ••/••. as in the former demonstration you may perceive. Therefore, first you are to reduce both the whole and broken numbers, being 37 ••/7. into his proper fraction, and it will be 264/7. then observing Archimides doctrine, mul∣tiplying by 7. and dividing by 22. the quotient will be 12. so many inches is the Diameter of the same Bullet. And for your greater ease, I have borrowed Master Nortons Table, wherein is plainly shewed the height or Diameter from one inch to 14. with the weight of every particular Bullets Diameter, both of Iron, Leade and Stone, fitted to the Assize of our English Measure of inches and parts.

Likewise,* 1.273 according to our weight of Haberde-pois of 16. Ounces to the Pound, the left Margent is to finde out the height of the shot, in the first two Co∣lumes of inches and quarter of inches, in the two second Columes under the title of Iron, pounds, Ounces, you shall finde the weight thereof: The like may bee under∣stood if the shot be Leade, by the third Columes, or of Stone by the two last Co∣lumes, each under his proper Title, and over against the height assigned.

As for Example.

An Iron shot of 6. inches the weight will appeare to be 30. l. and if it were of Leade, it would be 45. l. and of stone 11. l. 4. ounces, view the Table follow∣ing; onely learne these Rules following for your helpe, if an exact Table should be wanting.

First, take the disproportion that Iron beares to Leade, and Leade to Marble Stone; for as formerly is shewed, Iron is in weight to Leade as 30. to 46. Leade to Stone as 72. to 18. and Stone to ••ron as 18. to 48. An Iron Bullet of 6. inches Diameter that weiges 30. l. to know what a Leaden Bullet of the same proportion weighes; First, multiply the weight of the Iron Bullet knowne being 30. l. by 46. the disproportion Leade beareth thereto; there ariseth 1380. which being divided by 30. the quotient is 46. As appeares in this Table.

Secondly, if you would know what a Stone Bullet weighes, of the same propor∣tion a Leaden is of, being 6. inches Diameter, and weighing (as in the quotient be∣fore is shewed) 46. l. and likewise observing the disproportion in weight to be 72. to 18. as before; you must multiply the weight of the Leaden Bullet knowne being 46. l. by 18. the disproportion the Stone beareth thereto, so ariseth 828. which being divided by 72. the quotient is 11 ••/4. and thus of the rest of those weights.

A Table, shewing the height, and weight, of Iron, Leade, and Stone-shot; The use of this Table, is demonstrated in the fore-going Page.

Inches high.	Quarters.	Iron pounds.	Ounces.	Leade pounds.	Ounces.	Stone pounds.	Ounces.
1	0	1	0	0	3	0	1 1/4
1	1	••	0	0	6	0	3
1	2	••	0	0	9	0	4 1/2
1	3	1	0	0	13	0	5 ••/4
2	0	1	1	1	11	0	7
2	1	1	9	2	0	0	9
2	2	2	2	3	0	0	12
2	3	2	14	4	3	1	0
3	0	3	12	5	0	1	4
3	1	4	12	6	9	1	8
3	2	6	1	8	1	2	0
3	3	7	5	9	14	2	7
4	0	8	15	11	5	2	13
4	1	10	10	15	15	3	10
4	2	12	10	17	15	4	3
4	3	14	14	21	5	5	9
5	0	17	5	24	12	6	3
5	1	20	1	30	0	7	8
5	2	23	2	35	10	8	14
5	3	26	6	39	9	10	10
6	0	30	0	46	0	11	2/4
6	1	34	0	51	0	12	12
6	2	38	0	57	0	14	3
6	3	42	0	63	0	15	12
7	0	48	0	72	0	17	10
7	1	53	0	79	8	19	14
7	2	58	0	87	0	21	12
7	3	64	0	96	0	24	0
8	0	72	10	106	8	26	12
8	1	78	0	117	0	28	8
8	2	87	3	130	8	32	8
8	3	95	0	141	8	35	10
9	0	101	0	150	0	37	10
9	1	109	6	161	8	40	4
9	2	121	10	181	13	44	2
9	3	132	11	198	5	49	8
10	2	138	0	207	0	51	10
10	0	164	2	246	0	61	2/4
11	0	184	0	275	8	69	8
11	2	216	0	324	0	81	0
12	0	240	0	360	0	90	0
13	0	305	0	457	8	114	8
14	0	389	2	583	8	146	8

A Table, shewing the Square Root unto 3848. and the Cubicke Root, 238328.

	1		1024	32	32768
4	2	8	1089	33	35937
9	3	27	1156	34	39304
16	4	64	1225	35	42875
25	5	125	1296	36	46656
36	6	216	1369	37	50653
49	7	343	1444	38	54872
64	8	512	1521	39	59319
81	9	729	1600	40	64000
100	10	1000	1681	41	68921
121	11	1331	1764	42	74088
144	12	1728	1849	43	81307
169	13	2197	1936	44	85184
196	14	2744	2025	45	87120
225	15	3375	2116	46	97336
256	16	4096	2209	47	103823
289	17	4913	2304	48	110592
324	18	5832	2401	49	117649
361	19	6859	2500	50	125000
400	20	6800	2601	51	132651
441	21	9261	2704	52	140608
484	22	10648	2809	53	148877
529	23	11197	2916	54	157464
576	24	13824	3205	55	166375
625	25	15625	3136	56	175616
676	26	17576	3249	57	185163
729	27	19683	3364	58	195112
784	28	21952	3481	59	205379
841	29	24389	3600	60	216000
900	30	27000	3721	61	226981
961	31	29791	3844	62	238328
The Square Root.		The Cubick Root.	Square Root.		Cubick Root.

I have adjoyned this Table, of the Square and Cubicke root; to the Table of the height and weight of iron, Leade, and Stone Bullets; because Mr. Norton conceives that a man of a small capacitie and practice, may finde out the weight of any Bullet by the helpe of this Table of the Cubick-root.

As for Example.

Suppose an Iron Bullet of 4. inches Diameter and 1/2. now by dividing the Cube of the Shot by 8. and take the quotient for pounds,* 1.274 and each unite of the Remainer for two Ounces; and so the Cube of 4 ½. being 91. and divided by 8. the quotient will be 11. l. and the 3. remaining will be 6. ounces; the like in all kindes may be done for Stone-shot, by the Rule of 3. onely: Saying, if 48. the proportion of Iron▪ give 202. ounces, what shall 18. the proportion for Stone give? 76. ounces, which is 4. l. and 12. ounces for the weight of the Stone-shot, which is 4. inches 1/2. in height.

Now to proceed in our discourse, the powder and length (being considered) of the Peece, and the Bullets weight observed, to the end that a convenient proportion of powder be found, answerable to the heavinesse or lightnesse of the Bullet. For if one proportion of powder should be taken, for the three severall weights of Bul∣lets, being of divers mettals, as this Table doth distinguish the disproportion be∣tweene Iron, Leade, and Stone, there would prove an infinite variation and confu∣sion. As Mr. Norton well observeth, that a mans hand is able to throw a weight of foure pound Leade, further than a weight of 20. pounds of Iron; or then two pounds of feathers:* 1.275 As he exemplifies it by a Saker, having made 3. shots; the pro∣portion of powder being 12. pounds, as the leaden shot weighes; in this case the shot of Leade, will out-range the other two, and that of Iron will out-range that of Stone But the quantitie of powder being altered to 8. pounds, as the Iron shot weigheth; then the Iron will out-range the Leade, and the Leade the Stone-shot, Thirdly, these Bullets being severally shot againe out of the same Peece, with the proportion of 4 pounds of powder, then will the Stone-shot out-range the Iron, and the Iron the Leade Bullet.

Moreover, this observation is not to be forgot; the higher a Peece is mounted, the more doth the weight of the shot resist the powder,* 1.276 and the lighter the shot is, the easier it is forc'd out of the Peece; so that if the Bullet weighes either too much or too little for the force of the powder, the motion thereof will be various. Where∣fore he holds, the Leaden shot requires for its due charge, the whole weight of ordi∣nary powder, or 4/••. of Corne-powder; and the Iron-shot 4/5. of ordinary powder, or ⅔. of the best; and the Stone ⅔. of ordinary, or ½. of the best. This shall suf∣fice; next, we are to intreate of the Levelling of Ordnance, with the instruments for that purpose, shewing the severall proportionall ranges, according to the mount∣ing or imbasing of the same, as followes.

CHAP. L.

Divers Rules and observations to bee used in levelling of Ordnance, by the Gunners quad∣rant, Scale, Inchsight Rule, and other Instruments very materiall for every Comman∣der to understand.

IN levelling of Ordnance to make a true shot,* 1.277 there is three things considerable; The first is the distance to the marke assigned within the reach of the Peeces levell,* 1.278 called point-blancke, and in this there is neither moun∣ting nor imbasing of the Peece.

The second, is when the marke assigned is farre be∣yond distance of a true levell,* 1.279 or point-blancke; and for the bullet to reach this, the Peece is to bee mounted unto some one degree or other of the quadrant, accord∣ing as the distance of the marke shall be found.

Thirdly,* 1.280 if a Peece of Ordnance be to shoot at a marke which lyes under the true levell of point-blancke, then accordingly shee is to bee imba••ed: Now from these observations there is a fourth ariseth of equall consequence to bee observed with the former (viz.) the finding out the true proportion of distance or paces of ground, whether it be to shoote beyond, or under, or neere the true levell of point-blancke; If both Art and judgement be not used in this, it will prove impossible ever to mount or imbase a Peece to any point to performe a perfect shoot.

Wherefore I hould it best to discourse of the diversity of wayes used by most ex∣perienced Gunners in levelling of Ordnance; wherein we shall be something large, in regard the subject requires it; and in the next Chapter I shall discourse of the in∣struments and rules which which are to bee used in taking a true distance of paces to any marke assigned.

And in this our present discourse, I shall first describe a quadrant, and then shew the use of it; and so breefely proceed to other instruments invented for the like uses, with such due observations as befits this Theame; for indeed this quadrant is an in∣strument by which divers conclusions belonging to this Art may be wrought,

This Gunners quadrant is a Geometricall instrument, containing in circumference one quarter of a circle,* 1.281 divided into 90. equall parts or degrees in the outmost limbe; and in the second limbe within, there is 12. equall parts or divisions, and likewise each of those are subdivided by meanes of parallels, and diagonalls, into 10. equall parts so that each side will be thereby found distinctly divided into 120 equall parts; the use of them is to take all Geometricall mensurations, both of distances, heights, breadths, and depths, which are either accessible or inaccessible, as shall in the next Chapter bee declared.

But as for the degrees and points, principally they are to helpe the Gunners pract∣ice to levell and shoot at the best certainty, both in the right line called point blancke, and also upon the advantage of all kinde of Randons or markes assigned; onely you are to make use of certaine Tables, Scales, and directions which I shall intreat of and demonstrate by Figure.

Wherefore observe this quadrant must have a ruler made very straight about two foot long, which is joyned firmely to one of the sides or Semi-diameters thereof; or rather to have one of the sides extending it selfe out in forme of a ruler; this subse∣quent Figure represents the true proportion of it, as for the severall parts of this In∣strument, which onely belongs to the taking of heights and distances, I omit alto∣gether in this place, reserving it for the next Chapter.

[illustration]

Now therefore observe this Ruler to which the qudarant is artificially joyned, being two foot long, divided into equall Inches and parts, with a hollow S••••t in the midd'st, upon which is placed a plate with a round hole in the midd'st thereof; The use of it is to set the ruler upright at the breech of the Peece, the plate before named moving up and downe as you shall see cause, to take a perfect sight; by this you may know, what length, or what Inches and parts any Peece requires to reach any marke.

Moreover, before you go about to level your Peece by the quadrant to make a Shott; you must first by the use of this ruler, take a true view through the two ••ight holes, upon the backe of the same, then accordingly let the plumbline fall at liberty on the degrees of the quadrant; and if the plumbline falls on the line of levell, then the mark is of equall height with your eye; but if the thred falles towards you, the marke is above point blancke; otherwise, if from the Line of levell, it is under point-blanck▪ by this you shall know whether your marke assigned be higher or lower then your platforme or the Cillender of your Peece, for it is most necessary, first to see whether the Base or lowest part of the sayd marke or altitude bee above or under point-blancke.

Now in levelling your Peece, you are to put the ruler into the mouth of the Peece close to the lowest side of the mettall,* 1.282 within the Concave, Cillender or Bore; then mount or imbase your Peece in her Carriage, untill the plummet fall directly upon the Line of level, and then the Axis of the bore or Concave or Cillender thereof, will lye straight and levell.

But if the marke assigned be found by this instrument to lye beyond the reach of the Peece at point-blancke, so as shee must bee mounted at some one degree or other▪ according as the distance shall be found; in this you must make use of certaine••Tables exactly framed, which hereafter shall bee demonstrated. But before you can attaine to any understanding in them, you must first learne to finde the right Line or right Range of any shot discharged, (out of what kinde of Peece soever it bee) for every elevation.

Next you are to finde out how much of the Horizanticall Line lyeth under the crooked range of the Shot, at any elevation that shall be assigned.

Lastly,* 1.283 the knowledge of the violent, crooked, and naturall motion or course of a shot discharged out of a Peece, at what distance soever assigned.

Further by observing the severall Diameters of divers Peeces, and their various lengths, causeth much alteration in their ranges; yet for the ease of the lngenious Souldier, our moderne Gunners have taken wonderfull paines in framing a Table of the proportions of right ranges; the use of it is thus to bee understood: Let your Peece be of what kinde soever; you must first know and prove how farre this Peece conveyes her shot at any one degree of the quadrant; as suppose you finde your Peece shoots at 6 degrees of mounture, 200 paces in a right Line, not sensibly croo∣ked; now your desire is to know how farre the same Peece will further convey her shot in a straight Line, shee being mounted to ten degrees.

For this you must repaire to the Table following, and propound to your selfe, if 285 the number against sixe degrees giveth 200 paces, what will 354 the number in this Table against 10 degrees give.

A Table of proportions of right rāges or point-blanks:

0	192
1	209
2	227
3	244
4	261
5	278
6	285
7	302
8	320
9	337
10	354
20	524
30	695
40	855
50	1000
60	1140
70	1220
80	1300
90	1353

This being wrought by the Rule of 3, the quotient will be 242 paces, view the Table of the proportions of right ranges in the Mar∣gent.

Yet by the way observe these Tables are not absolutely true, nor cannot possibly correspond in a just exactnesse, in regard of divers Fractions; wherefore practice must be the best Schoole-master in these conclusions.

Now to proceed in our discourse; the next thing to be observed, is the finding out how farre a Peece shoots at every degree of moun∣ture at its dead range, and for to performe this, the right range and crooked being added together into one, is then called the dead range, which is to bee understood the whole distance from the platforme, from which the Peece is discharged, unto the first fall or graze of the Bullet upon the levell Line, or Horzianticall plaine.

And likewise as formerly is sayd, the differences in the Bores and lengths of Peeces, and likewise the strength and feeblenesse of the powder increaseth or diminisheth the course of the Shot, and there∣fore most difficult to finde out the true range, but by Diagrams, Ta∣bles, or Scales made from experiments; and to that end and purpose our late practitioners in this Art, have beaten their braines and la∣boured to arrive at some exactnesse; by their experiments and indu∣strious endeavours they have attained to some seeming perfection, far better then uncertaine guessing, and for that purpose framed Ta∣bles, as appeareth in the Margent, which Mr. Norton hath as he confesses grounded upon often observations and tryalls; the use of this Table of the proportions of dead ranges he hath thus demonstrated; First you must take the right range of the Peece experimented, from the right range of the mounture assigned, and divide the remainder in such reason as the sayd angle of mounture is to the angle of the complement thereof; and to the quotient adde the said right range found, and the product thereof will be the dead range for that Peece: he further gives this example, Suppose a Peece mounted at 30 degrees, shoots 300. paces in the right range, and 300. at the dead range; if you would desire to know the dead range at 40 degrees; to performe this you are to worke in this manner following: First divide the dead range into any number of parts as you shall please, which being set out in a Line, at one end of the right line make an angle (as Euclide demon∣strates by his 23 proposition) and from the other end of the afore∣sayd Line, you must erect a perpendiculer Line (by Eucledes 11 pro∣position) untill it intersect the Line that framed the angle given, and note well how many such parts it containeth; then you must multi∣ply the parts of the dead range, by the parts of that line which fra∣med the angle containeth; then the product being divided by the number of parts, which you divided the Line of the dead range in∣to, and the quotient will be the secant range, which being knowne, then you must worke after this manner following.

A Table of the Proportion of dead Ranges.

Deg.	Paces.
0	192
1	298
2	404
3	510
4	610
5	722
6	828
7	934
8	1044
9	1129
10	1214
11	1396
12	1394
03	1460

14	1544
15	1622
16	1686
17	1744
18	1792
19	1849
20	1917
25	2013
30	2185
35	2249
40	2289
42 1/2	2296
45	2289
52 1/2	2283
60	1792
67 1/2	1214
75	1000
85 1/2	0192
90	0000

As suppose by the rule before, you finde the secant range to bee 1555. paces; And for the dead range 1000. paces given: Then by the Rule of three you must say, if 1555, gives 1000. the whole signe, what shall 1000. the dead range give? 643 1/••. the right signe of the angle the Peece must be mounted unto, upon the advantage to shoot 1000. paces.

Further this industrious Gentleman Mr Norton hath made use of a Table of Randons, calculated by Alexander Bianco, which he hath reduced for the sixe first points of the quadrant, with a Table of secant ranges thereunto annexed, as followes very necessary to be understood and made use of.

	1	2	3	4	5	6
Double Canon of 8.	750	1275	1690	1710	1785	1800
Whole Canon of 7.	675	1147	1431	1489	1606	1620
Demy Canon.	625	1602	1325	1425	1487	1500
Culvering.	750	1275	1590	1710	1785	1800
Demy Culvering.	725	1232	1537	1653	1725	1740
Saker.	625	1062	1325	1425	1487	1500
Minion.	450	765	954	1026	1071	1080
Faulcon.	550	935	1166	1254	1039	1320
Faulconet..	375	637	795	855	892	900

The Table of se∣cant Ranges.

0	1000
1	1000
2	1000
3	1001
4	1002
5	1003
6	1005
7	1007
8	1009
9	1013
10	1015
11	1018
12	1023
13	1026
14	1030
15	1035
16	1040
17	1045
18	1051
19	1057
20	1064
30	1154
40	1305
50	1555
60	2000
70	3923
80	5758
98	Infinit

Wherefore observe, if you have mounted your Peece to any of these sixe points, you must looke against the name of the same Peece you intend to use, and right under that point you mount it unto; In the common angle, you shall finde the number of paces of her Randon; Likewise this Table of secant Ranges are numbers proportionall, whose use is easie to be un∣derstood by the former examples.

Moreover, wee may further observe by the Inch-sight rule, any Peece of Ordnance that is not in length above fifteene foot, and not shorter then sixe, may be mounted to any degree of the quadrant under twenty Grades, as well as by the quadrant it selfe or any other instrument: The Table followes in the next Page, and by the helpe of the Inch-sight rule it is to be made use of.

••	Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.		Foot.
••	6	1/2	7	1/2	8	1/2	9	1/2	10	1/2	11	1/2	12	1/2	13	1/2	14	1/••	15
••	Inch.
••	1 2	1 3	1 4	1 5	1 6	1 7	1 8	1 9	2 0	2 1	2 2	2 3	2 4	2 5	2 6	2 7	2 8	2 9	3 0
••	2 5	2 7	2 9	3 1	3 3	3 5	3 6	3 8	4 0	4 2	4 5	4 7	5 0	5 2	5 4	5 6	5 8	5 9	6 0
••	3 7	4 0	4 3	4 6	4 9	5 3	5 5	5 7	6 0	6 3	6 7	7 1	7 4	7 7	8 0	8 4	8 8	9 0	9 2
••	5 0	5 4	5 8	6 2	5 5	7 0	7 5	7 9	8 4	8 8	9 2	9 6	10 0	10 4	10 8	11 2	11 6	12 0	12 4
••	6 2	6 8	7 4	7 8	8 2	8 7	9 3	10 0	10 5	11 0	11 5	12 0	12 5	13 0	13 6	14 2	14 8	15 2	15 6
••	7 5	8 2	8 9	9 4	9 9	10 4	11 0	11 9	12 6	13 4	14 6	14 8	15 0	15 7	16 4	17 1	17 8	18 3	18 8
••	8 7	9 5	10 4	10 9	11 7	12 1	12 8	13 8	14 5	15 3	16 0	16 7	17 4	18 2	19 0	19 9	20 8	21 3	21 8
••	10 0	10 8	11 9	12 3	13 3	13 8	14 2	15 8	16 6	17 5	18 3	19 2	20 0	20 8	21 ••	22 7	23 0	24 2	24 6
••	11 3	12 3	12 5	13 7	14 5	15 1	15 9	17 7	18 7	19 7	20 6	21 5	22 4	23 4	24 4	25 0	25 8	26 6	27 3
••	12 3	13 0	13 8	15 4	16 7	17 7	18 7	19 8	20 8	21 9	22 9	24 0	25 0	26 0	27 0	27 8	27 9	29 2	30 8
1	13 7	14 8	16 3	17 0	18 4	19 4	20 4	21 7	21 7	24 0	25 4	26 8	27 4	28 5	29 6	31 1	32 6	••3 3	34 0
2	15 0	16 2	17 5	18 7	20 0	21 1	22 2	23 9	24 8	26 2	27 6	29 0	30 0	31 2	32 4	33 7	35 0	36 2	37 4
3	16 2	17 6	18 9	20 3	21 6	22 9	24 2	25 6	26 9	28 2	30 0	31 6	32 4	33 9	35 2	36 5	37 8	39 2	4•• 6
4	17 4	18 9	20 3	21 8	23 3	24 6	25 9	27 5	28 9	30 4	32 0	33 ••	34 8	36 5	37 8	39 0	40 6	41 9	43 6
5	18 6	20 2	21 7	23 3	14 9	26 3	28 1	29 8	30 9	32 8	34 3	35 8	37 2	34 8	40 4	41 9	43 4	45 0	46 6
6	19 8	21 5	23 1	24 8	26 5	28 1	28 8	31 4	33 0	35 0	36 8	38 4	39 8	41 5	43 0	44 8	46 2	47 9	49 6
7	21 2	22 8	24 0	26 3	27 9	29 8	31 2	33 5	34 9	37 1	38 9	40 0	42 4	44 0	45 8	49 3	49 0	50 8	52 6
8	22 4	24 1	25 9	27 1	29 9	31 5	33 0	35 4	36 8	38 3	41 2	43 8	44 8	46 5	48 2	51 0	51 8	53 7	55 6
9	23 5	25 3	26 9	29 3	31 4	33 2	34 8	37 5	38 7	40 2	43 5	45 7	47 0	48 8	50 6	52 0	52 9	55 5	58 6
••	24 6	26 7	28 7	30 8	32 8	34 9	36 9	38 9	41 0	42 1	45 8	47 6	49 4	51 3	53 4	55 4	57 4	59 5	61 6

Further we may observe another ready way to levell, mount, and imbase a Peece; by a Holbert, Linstocke, or any other staffe, which Mr. Norton hath beene very in∣dustrious in making and inventing of it, the manner of performing it is in this kinde.

First marke from one end of the staffe a distance equall unto the pummell or height of the Caskable of the Peece being placed levell upon the platforme.* 1.284

Next you must take the distance betwixt the Center of the Truan••o••s, and the pummell o•• Caskable; which make or imagine a Semi-diameter of a circle, and divide it by diagonalls, and paralells, or otherwise into 1000. equall parts.

Thirdly, you must repaire to the Table of Sines, and take the number answering unto every degree out of the sayd 1000. parts, and set that distance from the sayd marke downewards; and if the totall signe of the Table bee 100000, you must o∣mit the two last figures of each number thereof towards the right hand; and if it chance to be 10000000, then you must omit 4 figures of each number you finde in that Table, and the remaining number will shew how many of those 1000. equall parts are to be set downewards upon the staffe; from the marke beneath the sayd le∣vell for each severall degree,

Fourthly,* 1.285 you must draw 10 paralells and diagonalls, from the first degree to the second, and from the second to the third, successively continued from each to his next, making every degree with arithmtticall Caracters; by this you may from six minutes to sixe minutes, by those right Sines mount your Peece.

This staffe being this framed and ordered, the use of it is thus; You are to bring down the Center of the pummell or Caskable of the Peece, to any number or degree thereon so marked for the Peece, you setting the lower end of the Staffe to the plat∣forme, which being performed; the Axis of the Bore of that Peece will be found to be elevated unto the degree assign'd.

Further, if all these instruments should be wanting, yet the industrious Gunner by arithmeticall skill, may by an Inch rule mount any Peece of Ordnance unto 10 de∣degrees of the quadrant, by measuring the just length ••f the Concave, Cillinder, or Barrell of the Peece; then reducing that measure into Inches, and double the same, afterwards multiplying the number of inches so doubled by 22, and divide by 7 taking

notice of the number of the quotient, which last quotient being likewise divided by 360, the degrees contained in the whole Circumference of every Circle, the last quotient Number, will demonstrate the number of Inches, and parts of an Inch that will make a degree in the quadrant for that Peece, as Smith in his Art of Gun∣nerie demonstrates it, by example of a Saker, whose Concave Cillinder or Bore is just seven foot long, if you would desire to know what parts of an Inch Rule, will mount her to one degree of the quadrant you must worke it thus.

First,* 1.286 reduce the seven foot into Inches, and there ariseth 84, that 84 Inches being doubled makes 168, the which being multiplyed by 22, ariseth 3696, the which be∣ing divided by 7, the quotient will be 528; then againe dividing this quotient num∣ber by 360, that will yeeld 1 1/••, which is as much as one Inch 1/2, wanting 1/15 part of an Inch; by this example you see it confirmed, that any Peece of Ordnance, whose Chase is but seven foot long, being mounted by an Inch Rule, unto one Inch and ••/15 parts, that Peece shall lye just the height, she would have done if you had mounted her unto one degree of the Quadrant.

Moreover, if you would mount the same Peece unto two degrees of the Qua∣drant, by the inch-Rule aforesaid; then you must multiply the measure in your Rule last found, being one inch ••/•• parts, by 2 in the order of Fractions; and you shall have 4/•• the which 44 being the Numerator of the fraction, being divided by the Denominator, which is 15, the quotient being two inches 14/•• is your desire; by this you perceive three inches wanting 1/1•• part, makes two degrees of the Quadrant.

Lastly, observe if you would have your Peece mounted by an inch Rule, for to an∣swer any number of degrees under 10, either you must Multiply that number, by the number of inches, and parts of an inch, that makes the degrees of a Quadrant, other∣wise you may worke as you did the first Conclusion, Multiplying the first product by the number of inches desired, and dividing the product by the numbers before men∣tioned, your last quotient will resolve you.

As for a further example, the peece of Ordnance before mentioned, you desire to ele∣vate by an Inch rule to answer to 8 degrees of the quadrant, first you reduce the length of the Bore into Inches, as formerly is shewed, doubling that measure, & it makes 168 (as in the first conclusion) which 168 Inches, multiplyed by 22, yeelds 3696 Inches, the which Product being now multiplyed by 8, ariseth 29568, which sum divided by 7, the quotient is 4224, the same divided by 360, yeelds in the Quotient 11 Inches 1/15 parts of an Inch. So many Inches, and parts of an inch, must the same Peece be elevated unto, with an Inch-Rule to answer unto 8 degrees of the Quadrant. But to lay your Peece point-blank without instrument, you must bring the height of the Mettle at the mouth, equall with the Horizon, and then the Concave Cillinder will lye point-blanke.

But Master Norton doth mislike Master Smiths wayes in shooting by the Mettall or Mira Comune; and he hath beene very zealous in finding out a more perfect way, and Sayes to shoot with any Peece by the Mettall, or Mira Comune; the difference or mount, about the levell which the Mettall causeth being considered, and exactly examined, will shew the angle of the Peeces Mounture, with the which you must repaire to the precedent Table of proportionall Mountures for the severall Randons upon each point or degree of the Gunners quadrant in page 127, which is thus to be appropriated unto any Peece; first having made one shoot with her at the Moun∣ture of a certaine marke assigned, and finding her dead range for the same; which being reverted to the given elevation, will soone yeeld the range required; the ex∣ample is after this manner given; That suppose by examination it be found out, that by reason of the eminencie of the Mossell Ring; and length of the Chase of the Peece; the directions of the Mettall at the breech, and the Mossell ring, to mount the Peece higher then it would, if the assise of her Bore were duly directed by a true desparte unto any Marke assigned by six degrees, and let it bee imagined that the Marke is elevated six degrees above the Horrizon, so found by the Quadrant, and observing that at the mounture, the Peece did shoot 850 paces for her dead range; the question is, how farre the same Peece would convey the like shotte, with the like loading and accidents, if she weare by the highest of her Mettall at Britch and Mossell, directed to the same marke.

Say then if 722, the number in the Table of dead ranges against 6 degrees gives

850 paces being the measure of the shotte made in her at six degrees of mounture, what shall 1394 the number against 12 degrees of Mounture give? By making use of the Rule of three▪ and multiplying the third of these three Numbers, by the se∣cond dividing the Product by the first, the Quotient will be 1534 paces. Thus ha∣ving collected, and fitted this discourse, so that the ingenuous Souldier may gaine some profit by it, I leave it to his discretion, to cull out such Rules and Examples, as shall best fit his practice.

CHAP. LI.

Divers briefe Observations, most necessary to be learned and understood, concerning the Imb••sing of Ordnance, and shooting in Morter-peeces.

IN this Chapter wee must observe, that as formerly wee have spoken of Mounting a Peece of Ordnance, from degree to degree, untill shee come to about 45 degrees▪ causeth the Peece to convey her bullet at each elevation, one time farther then the other; but being elevated past those degrees, shee shootes every degree shorter than the other, untill she come to shoote perpendiculer, or in a Line right up; and this last kind of elevation is only u∣sed in levelling of Morter-peeces; whose use is to convey her shotte upwards, according to the distance of the far∣nesse, or neerenesse of the marke assigned; And so the shotte falls right downe out of the ayre upon the marke; of this we shall speake largely, towards the finishing of this Chapter.

Now, for these long Peeces of Ordnance; to cause them to shoote ••nder point-blanke at any marke of neerenesse; they must be imbaced (as your Gunners tearme it) or their mouth layed in some proportion neerer to the ground, according as the marke is in neerenesse; and so to performe this, wee will only make choyce of the Staffe before in that Chapter described, invented by Master Norton for that purpose, where you may please to remember, the Staffe was to have the lower end of it set upon the platforme, and so to bring downe the center of the Caskable or pommell of the ••eece to any number of degrees thereon ••o marked for that same peace, and then the Axis of the Bore of that Peece will be found to be elevated unto the degree as∣signed. * 1.287 But for the Imbasing a Peece, we must use a contrary way, by advancing the breech of the Peece upwards, above the first named marke unto those lines and numbers there decyphered, which will direct the Shot to any marke that lyes under point-blanke; Likewise divers other instruments are invented for this purpose, but in regard there askes small cunning to performe this only practice, and use will guide a man to direct the shot by Imbasure to her right marke; I will leave it, and proceed to the use of Morter-Peeces,* 1.288 only by the way observe, there must bee lesse ••owder used in the charge, and the Bullet must be very fully and strongly rammed in; and further, that it is the nature of all Peeces to shoot above the levell of the Marke, if the object be upright, as a side-banke, or the like.

Now for the Morter-peeces, how they are used, and levelled wee shall crave your patience to be more large, in relating the Collections of the rules, and observa∣tions of those that have beene ablest practicioners in this Art.

The Invention of these Morter-Peeces was to annoy the Enemie, when other Ordnance cannot possibly be used against them: and for the making a perfect Shot in one of these peeces two things are requisite to be knowne.

First, how farre your Morter-Peece will carry a Bullet or Fire-ball at the best of her Randon.

Secondly, you must know how farre it is from the Peece to the marke you intend to shoote; these being knowne, you may make a perfect shot; as for example, if you find your Morter-Peece will shoot a Bullet,* 1.289 or fire ball, 700 paces at 45 degrees of the Quadrant; and that the marke you intend to shoot at, is but 500 paces▪ then (by

the Rule of three reverse) you must say,* 1.290 if 700 paces requires 45 degrees, what will 500, thus multiplying the second by the first, and dividing the Product by the third number, you shall find it must be mounted to 63 degrees of the Quadrant to hit that marke.

Further, observe if a Morter Peece will shoot 450 paces, at the best of the Ran∣don, if you should elevate her one degree aboue the utmost Range, shee will shoot 10 paces shorter: to prove this you must divide the distance of the utmost Range (being 450 paces, as before is said) by 45, the degree of the best of the Randon, and you shall find the quotient to be 10, as before is related. But by the way, great care must be had in ordering your Morter Peece, so that she shoot not wide, either upon the one, or other hand; Wherefore to prevent it, you must lay a straite Ruler, upon the mouth of the Peece, and upon it place a Quadrant crosse-wayes, and the plumb∣line will direct you; but withall observe how the windes blow, and so accordingly order your Peece.

Then if you please, you shall make use of such further Rules and Tables, as have beene approved to be certaine and good; the Table followes, and the use of it is af∣ter this manner;

Having once made knowne the distance the Peece did shoot at, being mounted to what point or degree you have first resolved upon, as suppose it be 53 degrees from which she conveyes her shot 700 paces, to know how farre shee will shoot at any other degree of the Quadrant, the Example is this;

You shall levell your Peece at 60 degrees, now because 700 degrees is not at all in this Table, but you shall find against 60 degrees there stands 529 paces, therefore say by the rule of 3, if 562 being the number against 53 degrees, gives 700 paces, what shall 529 the number against 60 degrees give; now according to the Rule, if you multiply 700 by 529,* 1.291 and divide the Product by 562, the quotient will bee 649 ••/4, the number of paces which the said Morter Peece will shoot at 60 degrees mounture. Thus for any other number of paces or degrees, you may helpe your selfe by this Table following, which was Calculated by Captaine Vffanio, for every degree betweene the Levell, and 90 degrees for the Randons of the Morter Peeces.

Degr.	Paces.	degr.
0	100	89
1	122	88
2	143	87
3	164	86
4	285	85
5	104	84
6	224	83
7	243	82
8	262	81
9	280	80
10	297	79
11	314	78
12	331	77
13	347	76
14	393	75
15	377	74
16	362	73
17	406	72
18	419	71
19	432	70
20	445	69
21	457	68
22	468	67
23	479	66
24	490	65
25	500	64
26	510	63
27	518	62
28	524	61
29	529	60
30	534	59
31	539	58
32	543	57
33	549	56
34	552	55
35	558	54
36	562	53
37	568	52
38	573	51
39	477	50
40	580	49
41	582	48
42	583	47
43	584	46
44	582
45	582

Now for the mounting your peece to any of these degrees, it is not so proper to put the Ruler of the Quadrant into the mouth of the Peece, in regard there may be error, because many of these kind are taper-bored, or galed at the mouth: to rectifie this, your Gunners have invented a very apt instrument, framed after this manner; First, there is a Ruler of 18 Inches in length; at the middle point or pricke thereof must be another shorter Ruler framed artificially above a foot long joyned close, and falling perpendicularly on the middle point of the longer Ruler; Whose containing Angle lighteth justly on the middle point of the longer Ruler, from which point is

drawne by Art the 1/•• part of a Circle, and divided into 45 equall divisions or de∣grees, so as the 90 degrees stand just on the Center, or middle point of the lon∣ger Rule.

The use of it is thus, by laying the longer Rule crosse the mouth of the Peece, you shall immediatly perceive at what degree the said Morter Peece is elevated by the Plumb-line, the Peece being mounted at any grade above 45, observe the Figure.

[illustration]

And for to conclude this Chapter remitting all further Circumstances, wee will only take notice of another Table which Vffanio hath likewise Calculated for a Mor∣ter Peece to shoot thereby, fitted to the 12 points of the Gunners Quadrant, as you may perceive; Thus having runne over such rules and examples as I conceive most apt and necessary for the true le∣velling of Ordnance; It now only remaines in the Chapter fol∣lowing to take a view of such Rules, and Instruments, as are most proper and commodious for the taking of heights and distances, without the which it is impossible ever to ac∣complish any designe belonging to this Art of Gunnerie, or to the Art of Myning; Wherefore be pleased to take a Survey of the subsequent Chapter.

Points.	Paces.
0	100
1	24
2	377
3	468
4	534
5	570
6	583
7	566
8	532
9	468
10	377
11	243
12	0••0

CHAP. LII.

The Description of such Instruments with the best selected Rules, which have beene in∣vented, and practised, for the taking of heights and distances, whereby a Gun∣ner may make his Shot at more certaintie.

IT is one of the most necessariest things, (and not to be sli••ghted) the knowledge and understanding of these kind of Instruments, the true use of them, with the Rules and documents, which our ablest Practitioners have through their paines and industrie, inven∣ted for future ages to practice; For the ignorance of this, makes both the Art of Gunnerie, and Myning, lame and imperfect; wherfore I will indeavour to be as briefe, as the matter will permit in discoursing of the severall parts of it. And by the way you may remember, that in the fiftieth Chapter, page 125. I began to describe the Instrument, called a Gunners Quadrant; but I left the description how it should bee used, about the taking of heights and distances, to be discoursed of in this Chapter; only be pleased to have a regard, and reference to the precedent Figure of the Quadrant; and then I shall in∣deavoure to describe those parts of it; that serve for our purpose.

Wherefore observe, as I have said in the Figure, that from the Center A, there is a line drawne aslope (called the Hipothenusall line) which comes to the corner C. upon which if the plumb-line falls upon the Center A, looking through the sights EF, and withall, beholding the extreames or highest parts of any Altitude; Note, then the distance from the middle part of your foot, to the base thereof, is the just height of the said Altitude, adding thereto the height from your eye; But if the Plumb-line, falls on the line A. B. then that marke you view through the Visuall sight EF is of equall height, or levell with your eye; Now the square lines or Scale, which extend it selfe from B to C, and from C to D, are divided into 12 equall parts; and if it were divided into 90, or a 100 divisions, or ten times as many, the better it were for the use of Shadowes, Length, and Heights. Now by the way for∣get not to remember that the side C D, is called the right Shadow; and this serves to measure all the Heights, with the length thereof; but the side B C, is of contrary shadow, and that serves to measure all heights, without the length thereof; the Rule we have described the use of it in page 125.

Now, suppose we were to take the height of a Castle wall, of a Fort, or any other Altitude aproachable; first we must aproach as neere to the object, that wee ghesse we are neere about the length of the height of the same, then set your quadrant to your eye looking through your visuall sights, beholding the extreme or highest part of the Altitude, then moving too, and from the same, untill the thred and plummet cut, or fall upon the part 12 of right shadow; then measuring how farre it is from the middle part of your Foot, to the base of the said Altitude; You have the just height of that Altitude, only adding the height from the ground to your eye. You may further find out any upright height, with the length thereof, both by the sha∣dow and without shadow, if the ground be plaine; wherefore you must aproach as neere to the Base or foot of the Altitude, that the plumb-line may fall on the part of Right shadow; then measuring the distance from the middest of your foot to the Base thereof, multiplying the measure by 12, adding thereunto the height, to your eye, from the ground, and you have the true Altitude.

Or letting the Sunne beames pierce through the Vissuall sights, the Plumb-line falling at liberty upon that part of Right-shadow (then measuring as before is shewed) and multiply that measure by 12, and dividing by the parts whereon the Plumb-line cuts, the quotient will tell you the true height of the same Altitude.

And note this for a generall rule,* 1.292 that upon what part of Right shadow the Plumb-line cuts; if you measure the height or Altitude, it will prove more then the shadow by such proportion, as 12 exceedeth the part or division of the Scale, where the Plumb-line pointed unto; As for example, if the Plumb-line be found to

fall on the part 2 of right shadow, if you measure the distance, from the midst of your foot to the Base for the Altitude six times, that measure is the height of the same, adding from your eye to the ground, for you must observe that the part 2 is contained in 12, being the division of the Scale 6 times.

Likewise, what part soever the Plumb-line falls on of right Shadow, looke how oft that part is contained in 12, just so many times as the measure is from your foot to the Base, is the height of the thing you measure, adding from the ground to your eye.

The contrary Shadow shewes to measure all Altitudes without the length thereof; first multiplying the length of the shadow, by the Point or, division of the Scale, where on the Plumb-line falleth, then dividing the Product by 12, the quotient there∣of, is the true height of the Altitude.

In measuring any Altitude without shadow, you must goe as neere to the same, that you perceive you are within the length thereof, then lifting up your Quadrant, orderly going to,* 1.293 or from the same, untill you espie the top of the Altitude through the Visuall holes, then the threed falling upon the part 12, standing upright with your body; at the middest of your foot make a marke, then goe directly backwards from the same, untill through the visuall sights you espie the highest part againe; the plumb-line falling on the part sixe of contrary shadow; and as before make another marke; the distance betweene these two markes, the height of your eye from the ground being put to it,* 1.294 is the true height of the altitude.

Further observe, if the plumb-line fals on the part 6 of contrary shadow; and at the second station on the part 4, the distance betwixt these two markes is the height of the altitude, adding as before.

Or if the plumb-line fals on the part 4 of contrary shadow at the first sta∣tion; then upon the part 3 at the second, you shall finde the distance betweene your two stations to be the just height, and the furthest station is foure times the length or height thereof.

Or suppose your Plumb-line falls upon the part 2 of contrary shadow;* 1.295 and at the second station, it falls on the part one, then the space betweene the two standings, will be six times the length or height of that Altitude, or the sixt part of the measure is the height of it, and your further station will be twelve times the height thereof.

In the next place we must observe some rules for the taking of distances from the Platforme, or Batteries your Ordnance are planted on, to any Marke you are to shoot at;* 1.296 And to performe this, you must lay your Quadrant flat upon some steady thing, as a stoole or staffe, firmely and perpendicularly set up, then placing your Quadrant upon the same, and turning the edge of the Rule to the marke you desire to measure the distance of, then espying the Marke through the Visuall sights, at that place or station set up a Staffe; then turning your body round, not altering neither Rule nor Quadrant by the Line of levell; then through the Visuall sights, make choyce of some other Marke athwart the ••rst, and set up the second Staffe, the distance whereof suppose to be 60 feet; then comming to the first station where the Quadrant is pla∣ced, viewing through the visuall sights upon the Rule, some other marke in a straite line backe from the first station, the distance whereof suppose to be 100 feet, and there place a third Staffe, so as the first and the third Staffe, will be in a straite line with the marke, then removing the Quadrant to the third station, turning the right Angle or Line of levell overthwart towards the second station, so as the Visuall line may be paralelled to the Line that crosseth from the first station to the second, there you must place a fourth Staffe, so as the Visuall line passing from the same, and run∣ning by the second Staffe may crosse the marke, or end in a point there with the first Visuall line; The distance between these two last stations, suppose to be 65 feet; The Staves being thus orderly placed, you must abate 60 feet the distance between the first and second Staffe or station, from 65 the distance between the third and fourth Staves or stations, the remainder is 5 for your Devisor, then multiply the said 65 by 100 the distance from the first to the third there ariseth 6500, the which divide by 5, the quo∣tient is 1300 feet, the distance from the first Staffe to the marke; Observe this figure following, where the Towre represents the marke, the Vnit. 1. the first Staffe or sta∣tion; the figure 2▪ the second Staffe; the figure 3, the third Staffe; and the figure 4, the fourth Staffe.

[illustration]

Or you may finde out the distance to any marke neere hand by the quadrant and Gunners Staffe divided into even portions; First placing the angle of the quadrant upon the toppe of the Staffe, it being erected perpendicularly; and then through the sights of the rule view the marke you desire to measure, letting a long thred fall to the ground, from the center of the quadrant whereon the plum-line hangs; which thred must be drawn alongst the Line of levell or edge of the quadrant to the ground, observing where the thred points at on the ground, and beholding the marke through the visuall sights, and looking what proportion that part of ground betweene the Staffe and where the thred points at, hath to the Staffe, the same proportion shall the length to the marke have to the height or length of the Staffe, as by this subsequent Figure more plainely appeares.

Wherefore observe the Gunners Staffe A. B. is to be supposed eight foot long, and the distance betweene the Staffe and the ground where the thred points you to; (being the space C. B.)* 1.297 is but eight Inches; Therefore looke what proportion C. B. beareth to the length of the Staffe, (which being reduc'd into Inches, will be 96 In∣ches) the same proportion shall the length to the marke D. have to the Staffe, which by making use of the Rule of three, will discover unto you in this manner; for example; If eight Inches yeelds 96, what will 96 Inches; if you multiply 96 by 96, the product is 9216 Inches, and this divided by 8, yeelds in the quo∣tient 1152 Inches, the true distance from the Staffe to the Marke.

[illustration]

Moreover, by the quadrant you may foresee whether Waters or Springs may possibly bee brought to any place desired, which indeed is a thing of much conse∣quence in the Warres; Wherefore observe, that by going to the head of the Spring

or Waters, and by setting your quadrant to your eye, being in height equall with the Water, so that the plum-line falls preciesely on the Line of levell; now if you may see above the place through the sights, then you may judge the Water is possible to bee brought; but if you sight falls under, then it is impossible: It commeth com∣monly to passe when the place to the which you would have Water conveyd, is of any great distance from the head of the Spring, or Rivers banckes; the Hills, Vallies, and such like impediments, hinder the visuall Line from having its free course: wherefore observe this remedie.

At the head of the Spring or River-bancks you intend to cut out; you shall looke through the sights of the instrument (as before) and take notice of some marke in in the next Hill towards the place, then goe to that marke, and in like manner ob∣serve some other marke if any other Hill happen to bee, and so proceed untill you may see the place desired; if then your sight running through the sight of the Rule, (the thred ever falling upon the Lane of levell) exceeds that place, the conveying of that Water is possible, otherwise not.

If it should chance that a quadrant bee wanting, yet you may take the distance to any place by the Carpenters square; First you must have a Saffe divided in certaine proportions,* 1.298 a 100 or a 1000 parts; at the beginning of your length upon the very toppe directly standing, set the inward angle of the square; lift up or put downe this instrument, untill you see the farthest part of your longitude, your sight running through the visuall holes of the square; The square so remaining, and the Staffe not removed from his height, marke where the other end of the square next unto you noted upon the ground, see then what proportion the Staffe then beareth to the part of the ground, which the neerest end of the square pointed unto from the Staffe, the same shall the length have to the quantity of the same Staffe, as you may more plain∣ly see by the next Figure; where the Staffe A. C. is imagined to bee 6 feet, and the space A. D. 2 foot; Considering now that 6 the length of the Staffe, contai∣neth 2 thrice; therefore the longitude desired A. B. must consequently containe three times the Staffe being 6 foot long, that maketh 18 foot, as by the Figure following you may view the truth of it.* 1.299

But if the ground bee not levell and plaine, their will arise errour: Moreover it behoveth you to have a fine cord made fast to the upper part of your Staffe C. which must bee tyed even with the inward edge of the square, and so drawne to the ground, where the neere end of the square, from the Staffe pointed as you perceive at C. D. the other end directeth truely to the object or distance desired.

[illustration]

The square is here deciphered, and one side of it is supposed to be two Foot long from the inward angle, and the other a just foot; the longer side is divided from the angle A. unto B. into 24 equall parts, and each parts containing 10 minutes; also the side C. D. is divided into 12 equall portions, and each into 6 of the value of 10 Minutes; the plumbline falls from E. to F. the moveable sights are placed in A. G, or a paralell from that Line, whereby all Altitudes are found; the plummet centered in the sixt point cutting H in the middle A G. View the Figure.

[illustration]

Now it remaines we should take farther observations concerning la∣titudes and bredths; the which up∣on the matter may serve for the ta∣king of any distance either in the way of latitude or lōgitude, being a thing most requisite in divers respects. As suppose divers Ordnance being planted upon a Battery against the Enemy, and having Battered sufficient for an assault; the bredth of this breach is to be required that the forces may accordingly be ordered for to enter it; And this may bee done either by the helpe of the quadrant, or the Iacobs-Staffe, if by the quadrant, then you must suppose two markes at each end of the breach; then going directly towards one of the sayd Markes, that by supposition you are ••istant from the same about the length betwixt the two markes, whose distance you would measure: Then laying your quadrant•• flat upon some Stoole, or placing the same upon some skrew of a Staffe being perpendicularly erected, moving the same to or from the marke you stand against, placing the quadrant so as the visuall sights passing from the Center of the quadrant by the Lines of levell, may direct you to the sayd marke; and the visuall Line passing from the Center of the quadrant, by the 12 point or division of the scale, which is called the Hipothenusal line, may direct you to the other marke, and then the length of your standing to the marke, which the Line of levell doth direct you to, is from the same just the distance betweene the two markes you intend to measure; then looking athwart by the other edge of the quadrant, or through your sights on the Rule, espie another marke directly against the marke you meane to measure, and the visuall Line passing betweene the station and the sayd marke will be paralell to the Breach of the sayd Wall or Line passing betweene the two marks, whose distance you would measure; then removing your quadrant before the other Marke, placing the same so as the Line of levell may direct you to the sayd Marke, and the Line passing by your sights on your Ruler may direct you to your first station; the distance betwixt your two stations being measured, is the just space betwixt the two Markes or two ends of the Breach, as by this demonstrative Figure appeares, where the Line A. B. sheweth the length or distance of the Breach to bee measured, as suppose it to bee 100 paces, and the like number you may perceive to bee in C. D. as also in the Line C. A. and D. B.

[illustration]

Moreover, the distance of both the Markes may easily bee taken by the former conclusion at one Station;* 1.300 As suppose the Wind-Mill C to bee your first standing, and the distance C to the end of the Breach A which the Line of levell directs you to, is just 100 paces, that some being squared, makes 1000 paces; the like num∣ber of paces you may perceive in the Line betweene the two ends of the Breach A. B. being multiplied in it selfe: These two summes being joyned together, make 2000 paces, the quadrant Roote hereof, makes 141 paces and almost 1/2 parts, shewing the true distance from your standing to the farthest Mark B.

Likewise by the divisions of the Scale of your quadrant, by knowing the distance to any Tree, Wind-Mill, or Steeple or other marke not farre distant, you shall there∣by know how much the same is higher or lower then yo••r standing; as sup∣pose from your standing to such a Steeple bee 200 feet, then in viewing the same marke through the sights on your Rule, the index or plumbline falls on the part sixe on the scale of your quadrant being contrarie shadow: Wherefore you must di∣vide 12 by 6, the quotient is two, then by the same quotient number againe, I divide 200 feet the space betwixt my standing and the marke; and so I finde 100 foot higher then your eie.

If you turne the contrary angles of the quadrant to your eie, you may finde out all defents.

If a quadrant bee wanting, by the helpe of a Iacobs-Staffe any heighth or bredth is to bee taken by setting the end to your eye, and taking your visuall Lines by the end of the little Staffe that is crosse the long one, which is called the moveable Rule; then goe forwards and backwards, untill you see the foundation and toppe of the Mark you intend to measure, as the example following shewes, where I desire to take the height of the Towre A B, I take my first station at C, and my eie runnes in the Line by the end of the Crosse Rule to the toppe of the Tower B; and at the same in∣stant without moving, my eie-sight runnes by the lower end of the Crosse-Staffe to the Base of the Tower A, for so you must order the Crosse-Rule on the Staffe D •• So that at once, both head and foot of the sayd marke may bee seene; then where you stand, set a marke at C, then measuring the distance betwixt the Lines D E, putting the Crosse-rule to G, at the second station, you must go back untill you can the

second time see the two points A B, then from that station, I measure how many feet betwixt C and H, where you shall finde 25 feet, and so much is the Tower in height from A to B; View the Figure following, which will give you a farther insight how to worke it.

[illustration]

For to take a distance either accessible, or inaccessible, as suppose wee are to take the distance of A. B. and that the place were accessible onely in the middest upon the Line C. F. Then you must dispose your Instrument as before is shewed, and the crosse Rule that moves up and downe, must be set firme upon the first point of the Index: then advancing frowards, or backwards, upon the line C. F. and viewing with your eyes from the end of the Staffe, each end of the crosse movable, so that a true line may goe to A. and to B. then measure the distance of C. and F. and that shall be the halfe of the distance A. B. But if the place be inaccessible that you cannot approach neere enough to make a right Angle, as in C. then shove up the crosse rule two points on the Index, and fall backe into the point D. and as before, bend your visuall rayes towards A and B. setting there a marke in D. then once more shove up the Crosse rule a point on to the Index, then againe retreate backe upon the line C D E just to the point E, there taking your sight againe towards A. and B. then measure the distance betweene D and E, and you shall find it the just halfe betweene A and B. by this Rule you may performe it, were it of a further distance, the figure belonging to this discourse followes on the next page.

[illustration]

A second way to take a distance inaccessible; Let it be the distance A B, that is to be taken, and that B is the nearest place that can be approacht; you must therefore stick down a Marke at the point B, and retire directly backwards towards C, and count the distance betweene D and C, and there sticke downe another Marke in C, then retyre directly to the place F, counting your paces to the just number found between B and C, there also sticke downe a third marke; then taking your Instrument, view into the Points B and C, eyther putting up or pulling downe the Crosse-rule upon the Index, as you shall see it meet: your Instrument being set fit, without any more removing the Rule, goe from D towards F, and in your going, have a regard in what place your sight doth agree with the point A and C. So that you may arrive at the point E,* 1.301 and not otherwise; at which place sticke downe another marke: then let the distance be measured betweene the two observations D E, and that shall be the just distance you desire to know, between A and B. View the Figure fol∣lowing.

[illustration]

The third may take a distance by the Jacobs-Staffe at one place; as suppose wee should take the distance A B, the which is not to be approacht unto no•• to be 〈◊〉〈◊〉 upon the Line K C, and that we must worke onely upon that Line. Wee must f••••••t take a right Line as K C, where must be plac'd a marke paralell to the Line A B, the marke being plac'd in K, then retyring backe to the point D, taking your sight by your instrument towards B and K, by the two extreames of the moveable 〈◊〉〈◊〉 G H, then leaving your instrument so fitly plac'd without varying of the Rule, leave∣ing a marke in D, you must retyre backe againe towards C, untill you come to such a distance that your visuall lines accord in A,* 1.302 and K, being arrived at the point C. and not otherwise, and there place another marke; then measure the distance between C and D, and the same breadth you finde the distance between C and D to be of, the like shall be betweene A and B, which is equall to C D. View the Figure follow∣ing, by the helpe of your Compasses you shall finde the truth of it.

[illustration]

We might have proceeded further, to have shewne how to have taken any height or distance by the Compasse of proportion by the way of Sines, Tangents, and Se∣cants; but herein I should be tedious, desiring the courteous Reader to bee content with these Collections, Rules, and Demonstrations, which I hope will be accepta∣ble to the ingenuous: as for others, the hurt I wish them is, they were bound to take the same paines to amend them, that I have taken to fit them for their Service.

THE ART OF CONVEYING LETTERS OVT OF A FORT, DESCRIBED. SECT. V.

CHAP. LIII.

IN regard the secret conveying of Letters is of great consequence in the time of Warre, I have thought it very necessary to discover such secret wayes, as have formerly taken effect; and likewise, some new wayes in writing of Letters whose secresie cannot possibly be discovered, the use and know∣ledge whereof may bring a double conveniency to Souldiers. First, in making them cunning to in∣terpret and discover an Enemies Letters and inten∣tions. Secondly, in causes of extremity to make use in conveying such Letters, as they conceive may bee most prevalent, and difficultest for the Enemie to discover, if they should be surprized. For great inconvenience attends the surprizing of a Letter, if the Enemy should un∣derstand the contents of it; as was well seene by Claudius Nero, interpreting As∣drubals Letter directed to his Brother Haniball, to meet him at Vmbra to joyne both their powers together, for the subversion of the Romans; presently upon the inter∣cepting and reading it, he left his fellow Consull in the night unknowne to Haniball, and with 6000. Foot and 1000. Horse, came to Livius, another Roman Consull, who lay to intercept Asdruball, comming from the Mountaines into Italy; and there joyning force with his, gave battell to Asdruball, in the fight overcame him and slew him, before ever Haniball knew of his being in Italy. Thus was Haniball brought to distresse, by the knowledge of the Contents of a Letter, whereby time and opportunity was taken to fight: the consideration of which, hath made me lar∣ger in this discourse following.

Paradine in his History of our times writeth; That when as Rhodes was be∣sieged by the Turke, a Frier being treacherous in the Towne, made shew of care∣full looking to the Watch, and finding his fit opportunity, shot a Letter from the Walles bound about an Arrow into the Enemies Campe, whereby he gave them ad∣verstisement in what estate the City stood.

Hystiaeus desiring to write to Aristagoras, did shave the head of one that was his trustiest Servant, and wrote upon the Skull-skin the scope of his minde in certaine briefe Characters, then kept him in his house untill the haire was growne as thicke

as before; then sent him to Aristagoras, willing that he should cause his haire to be clipt close at his first arrivall: by this he understood his friends intents.

Some Philosophers, and others of great insight in the hidden qualities of the Magnes-stone; Have recorded how two friends may discourse upon any subject, although they be a thousand miles distant: the manner to performe it is thus. Take two peeces of round Bords being smothed, about the bignesse of the top of an houre-glasse, upon these must be glewed a peece of cleane paper, which being done, a Cir∣cumference must be drawne on eyther of them, and the Letters of the Crosse-row being set downe distinctly a pretty distance a sunder round the said Circumference, of each of them. Then after the manner of a Sunne-diall, there must be a Steele-nee∣dle plac'd in either of them, of one length and weight, these Needles must be toucht with the Magnes-stone both at one instant; your Friend is to have one of these in∣struments, the other to remaine with your selfe; the just time of the day being ap∣pointed when the discourse should begin, you must with your finger direct the Nee∣dle to such Letters, one sensibly after another, for the making up a word, then pauze so long as you thinke he may well write it downe; then removing the Needle againe to those Letters, which doe spell such words as your minde may be understood, and as you remove your Needle, so voluntarily will your Friends Needle point at the same Letters, whereby you may discourse what you please. Viginerius in his Anno∣tations upon Titus Livius 1316. Columne of his first Volume, doth report that a Letter may bee read through a Stone-wall three foot thicke, by this onely device.

Harpagus writeth to Cyrus concerning the treason of King Astyages, having cunningly unbowelled a Hare, put his Letter therein, and after hee had ingenuously sowed it up againe, delivered it with the Nets to one of his Hunts-men, the faith∣fullest of all his houshold, and he carried it to King Cyrus.

Frontinus, Lib. 3. Chap. 13. Many (saith he) being desirous in actions of Warre to send their Letters missives secretly, whereby their friends may know their mindes, and yet to avoid all meanes of discovery, have written within the Scabbards of their swords, and sent them as acceptable presents.

Machi••vel in his Art of Warre makes mention, how a Captaine in a besieged Towne: may cause his friends to understand his mind; the manner of acting it is thus. He that desires to relate his minde, must write his whole scope downe in paper first; and holding it in one of his hands, and a Torch or two Torches in the other hand▪ Likewise, taking the advantage of a high Steeple or Towre, and the opportunity of a darke night, whereby the Lights may be further seene by his friend, that should observe the same; (wherefore having Inke, Pen, and Paper ready) and for the better understanding how it should be performed, take notice of the Letters of the Crosse-row, how they are placed, that you may discerne how the Lights shall describe eve∣ry severall Letter for the making up a word.

• A B C D E F G H I K L
• This part of the Crosse-row with one light.
• 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
• 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

• M N O P Q R S T V W
• This part of the Crosse-row with two lights
• 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
• 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Now observe that all the Letters of the first Division of the Crosse-row, are to be demonstrated with one light; As for example. If you would Copie downe the Letter A, you must hold up one Light but once, if you desire he should copie downe B, you must shew one light twice, likewise C, one light is to be shewne thrice, and so of the rest▪ as the Figures underneath the Letters will guide you.

The second part of the Crosse-row beginning at M, is to be demonstrated with two lights once N, with two hights twise, O with two lights thrise, and so of the rest, as the figure underneath each Letter shewes how many times you must hold up your Light to demonstrate such a Letter.

Suppose I would have my friend Copie downe the word Man, M, being the first Letter of the second part of the Crosse-row, must be signified with two lights

shewed once, then obscuring the lights untill you thinke he hath copied it downe; next you must shew one light once which signifies A, then obscuring the Light as before, you must next shew two lights twice which signifies N, being the second Letter of the second part of the Crosse-row; the word being finished, you must obscure the Light twice as long as you did it for a Letter; otherwise, a Letter cannot be distinguisht from a Word, nor a Word from a Letter; by this you see the word Man, signified by the helpe of the Light: and by this device your friend may un∣derstand your minde being a mile off.

If you desire to let your Friend, understand your secrets so that they should not be discovered, take a whole sheet of Paper, and with Pen and Inke write upon one side some formall Letter of discourse, farre from the matter you intended to par∣ticipate in secret to your Friend, which being finisht, turne the Leafe over, and with the juyce of an Onion or Leman, write your secrets betweene the Lines written with inke; your Friend knowing the secret of it, will reade it against the fire-light, or putting it into water.

Demoratus desiring to make knowne to the Lacedemonians, how King Xerxes was armed, and prepared for his journey against Greece, did write the counsell of the King in small Tablets of wood, which he covered over with waxe; and in that manner sent them to the Lacedemonians, they taking off the waxe, read all the Con∣tents thereon written.

••ontius likewise reports, that Pachorus sent Letters in a Nosegay of Violets to his beloved Lucretia, likewise he wrapt letters in Balles of waxe, and threw them in at his Mistresses Window.

One of the surest wayes to write a Letter, which is not possible to be read, but by him that is to receive it and knowes the device, is in this kinde to be performed; First, you must have two flat Rulers, three or foure inches broad, and halfe a foot long, they must be both of a breadth, to a haires breadth, then take a sheet of cleane Paper, and cut it out into narrow peeces like your smallest Tape, then with mouth-glew fasten the ends together, and winde it even about the Rule, giving the end you begin to write at a privie marke, then write your secrets upon the Paper, eyther in Letters or Characters, which being unwound from the Rule, can never be pos∣sibly brought together to be read, unlesse it bee wound about your Friends Rule, whereby he may understand your minde.

There is a most excellent way to write, so as it is impossible to bee understood, which is performed after this manner; Take two halfe sheets of Paper, and Rule them one upon the other, so as the Lines may be of equall distance, then take your Pen-knife, and just upon the Lines cut through both the halfe sheets of Paper a Loop-hole, so broad and long as a man may write a word through it; then a prety distance from that hole in the same line, and after the same manner, cut another; thus doing through the whole Paper in convenient distances one from the other; this being done, let your friend keepe one of these papers, and your selfe the other, and when you intend to write your secrets, lay this paper upon a cleane sheet, and write your minde through those holes, which being done, take off the paper, and with your Pen write some other circumstance in the line betweene word and word, which may alter the sense, and make it more obscure; this being sent to your Friend, so soone as he placeth his Paper with the holes over it, he may reade through the holes your intentions, and without this it will seeme impossible ever to make sense of it.

Further, you may take notice of certaine Characters whereby a man may expresse his minde freely, and secretly, to his friend; the manner how to performe it fol∣lowes.

[illustration]

First, you are to observe the fashion of each Character, whose property is to de∣monstrate the Letter that stands within it, as you may perceive by the first 〈☐〉〈☐〉 which

hath a standing in it, and represents the Letter a. Likewise 〈☐〉〈☐〉 hath b in it, and represents the letter b; and so of the rest. Further, you must take notice, that the Characters of the first figure are without any prickes; the Characters of the second Figure, hath to each of them one pricke, as 〈☐〉〈☐〉 which represents k. and 〈☐〉〈☐〉 represents l, the third Figure hath to each Character two prickes, as 〈☐〉〈☐〉 represents t. 〈☐〉〈☐〉 repre∣sents u. As for example; If you would write this word Acknowlidg in Charact∣ers, •••••••••••••••••••• This kinde of writing cannot possibly bee un∣derstood, if it were writ upon the Paper wound about the Rule, as before is shewed.

We may likewise write without inke, that it may not be seene nor read, unlesse the Paper be wet with a kinde of water prepared for the same purpose; To per∣forme this, you must take some Vitriol and powder it finely, then temper it with faire water in a cleane thing, when it is dissolved you may take a Pen and write what you please, and it cannot be read, except you draw it through water, wherein some powder of galles hath beene infused, and so it will shew is blacke as if it had beene written with inke.

Further, we may take the yelke of a new-laid Egge, and grinde it upon a Marble with faire water, so as you may write with it; having ground it on this wise, then with a cleane Pen dippe into it; and draw what Letters you please, upon faire white Paper or Parchment, then being through dry, blacke all the Paper or Parchment over with inke, and let it also dry on; afterwards you may scrape it with a knife, and all the Letters you wrote with the yelke of an Egge will be faire and white; those that knowes not the devise will take it to be a blurred Paper.

There is likewise a most excellent way to send Letters by wilde Pigeons out of a beleaguered Towne; the manner to performe it is thus; When you suspect a Fort shall be beleaguered, take divers old Pigeons, from such a place as you intend to send your Letter to, which being kept in a Basket, and let loose with a Letter fast∣ned about the necke of it, she will speedily ••lee home; where he that knowes the mysterie of it, may take the Pigeon, whereby he shall understand his Friends inten∣tions; This shall suffice for the secret conveying of Letters.

THE ART OF CONVEYING A MINE VNDER A FORT. SECT. VI.

CHAP. LIIII.

How to conduct a Mine under ground to blow up a Bulworke.

THis kinde of undermining hath beene very Anciently used both by the Greekes,* 1.303 and Romans, and of late daies by the Hollander, whereby they have much annoyed their Enemies, and blowne up their Out-Workes, yet many times it proves dangerous to the Pioniers, if they be not carefull to sustaine the earth over their heads with props and boords of two inches thicke; if the ground bee moist and full of Springs, a gutter with a discent must bee made that the Water may runne to some lower eva∣cuation; if that cannot bee, a Well at the month of the Mine must bee made for a receptacle for all the Springs to runne into, and Pumpes and forcers are to bee set sufficient to mount the Water.

There are foure principall causes to impeach the working of a Mine; first, the ill stopping of the Forne;* 1.304 secondly the weaknesse of the sides by Countermines or Ca∣verns; thirdly by fayling of the Traine through moisture or ill contriving; fourthly, the most important is, that the Frame whereon the Barrells stand bee not placed too low, as under the levell of the entrance, which it must ever exceed, because the quali∣tie of fire is ever to ascend.

Now for the conducting of this Mine, their are divers circumstances to bee con∣sidered; First, the distance from the place you intend to sincke your Mine, to the Wall or Bulworke you intend to blow up; Secondly, whether the ground be rising or declining towards the object; Thirdly, whether there bee any Rockes or Ponds which may hinder the direct carrying your Trench to the place assigned: These cir∣cumstances being considered, there are divers Instruments to bee used in the orderly conveying of them;

As first, the quadrant or Iacobs-Staffe to take the distance; Secondly, the Mari∣ners Compasse, (if a fitter instrument cannot bee had) by this you must observe in what point of the Compasse the place you intend to Mine unto stands, from the place you intend to breake ground first; then you must have a levell by which you may see how the ground riseth or declines, and accordingly bee guided, so that you worke not your selfe too farre out of the ground, nor too deepe in.

The Rules with the demonstrative Figures for the taking of heights and distan∣ces, you shall finde in the latter end of the discourse of the use of Artillery. Here I

will shew you a figurative example for the taking the profunditude of a Valley, wher∣by you may the better learne how to conduct your Mine towards a Valley if occasion

[illustration]

should bee; and although it bee somewhat difficult to bee done in regard there are divers observations to be made; and for to begin, we must from the point B take notice of some opposite object in the plaine Horizon as the letter A, the sight where∣of you may in a right Line take with this instrument by the helpe of a Plumb-Rule;* 1.305 then from the point B, you are to take the distance B C as formerly is shewed; that being done, from the point B let your visuall Lines from the moveable Rule of your instrument agree in A and C, your instrument being so set, doe not alter it, but take againe the angle A B C upon the plaine fielding; then turning you about, forme the Angle F B H which is equall to the Angle A B C, then sticke downe some marke upon the Lines B F B H, and upon the Line, B H; count how many paces or feet you can finde betweene B and C, and sticke downe a marke at the end of the last pace or foot, which shall arrive in E; All these things being thus disposed, apply your instrument to make a right Angle, putting the moveable Ruler upon the first point of the Index; for alwaies the instrument makes a right Angle when the Rule is upon the first point of the Index: The instrument being thus pla∣ced that the visuall Lines extends by the points of the Rule upon the Line B and F, so that you may make your sight agree in B and in E or in F and in E,* 1.306 that it may arrive in D, and not otherwise: Then measure the Line D E, and that shall bee equall to the depth of the Valley G C where the Tower stands to bee blowne up; but to build Forts upon the foot of the Valley is not usuall, in regard the Ordnance will command it: Wherefore I have shewed this example but by the way of dis∣course, * 1.307 yet for better explanation of our former discourse, the depth of a Valley be∣ing found, or the true height of a steepe Hill, it will be very easie to finde how many inches or feet you must rise or decline in every five paces of your Mining, by the help of the levell; An easie Arithmitician may performe this, whereby they may easilie perceive when they goe too farre outward, or too deepe inward, and for the erring of either side, the Compasse will direct; If in the conducting your Mine you feare the Enemies Counter-Mines; you must have a Wimble 15 or 16 foot long to pierce the earth in all places, by which you may discover what the Enemy doth.

Moreover, when you have brought the Mine almost to the place, you must then begin to make the Trench very narrow, and Angling about as this figure shewes you, the Barrells of Powder being plac't as you see with vents one to take fire from the o∣ther, with sufficient Rafters and Plankes on the toppe to carry up all before it, then

[illustration]

must there a pipe of Lead, or Reede runne from the Powder alongst the Myne, to the place where fire is to be given, filled with Powder, and raised from the ground, lest the wet should take it, then must the Myne be rammed up close, that no vent may proceed; the arching about will much strengthen it, and stay the reverse of the powder. The manner how to discover a Myne, is in the discourse of Fortification.

THE DVTIES OF SOVLDIERS IN GENERALL, BOTH IN FORT AND FIELD. SECT. VII.

CHAP. LV.

The duties of Souldiers, both Gentlemen and Senteries, generally discourst of.

NOw before wee proceed any further, it seemes to me convenient to take a Survey of the duties, and comple∣ments every Souldier is to bee fitted with; wherein I shall be somewhat large, in regard I must handle two subjects (Viz.) Valour, and Obedience, being things most requisite for a Souldier to understand; and I hope this discourse shall teach every man how to be quallified, and beare the honourable name of a Souldier, well besee∣ming a generous person of that Noble qualitie; And as in a great building there are severall Peeces fitted to such places, as they shall be used in; The like course I intend to take, to fit and shew every Souldier and Officer their duties, to fit them for the weightie employments of warre;* 1.308 Wherefore they must ground their obedi∣ence, valour, and noble deserts upon these foure principles follow••ng; First, to shew their Magnanimitie and forwardnesse to the uttermost of their powers, to the last breath and drop of bloud, in the defence of true Religion. Secondly, wee are tyed in a strict bond of obedience, to seeke, gaine, preserve, and defend, the ho∣nour of our King. Thirdly, we have all a share and reall interest in the defence of our Countrey, our lives, lands, wives, children goods, which are as goades to prick us forwards to trample upon all miseries, and to levell all oppositions that should seeke the ruine of our Land. And fourthly, for the better performance of the pre∣cedent principles; every man, of what degree and quality soever, must and ought to be diligent, and carefull to learne the art of Warre; Whereby we may not only be equall in skill and judgement to our Adversaries, but also to exceed and transcend them, so that our Valour, Obedience, and Policy, may bee antidotes, sufficient to qualifie, and reprocusse the venomous treacherie, and subtill actions of the Ene∣mie. And to move people to be in love with this most necessary profession, let them take notice how very meane men of birth, have beene laded with Honours and Ri∣ches gained by their prowesse, and valiant performances, as Caius Mazzius, Valentin∣an, Maximinus, Nicholas Pichinino, and divers others that were of base birth.

In the first place, let a Souldiers resolution be truly, and sincerely to serve God; keeping a quiet conscience within their breast, which otherwise will gnaw at the rootes of vallour, and undermine all resolutions, wherefore a just and righteous conversation ought to be a Souldiers companion, for his life is daily in danger.

And for our obedience to our King and Officers, that are in authoritie under him,

we may learne even of the brutish Turke, as Pietro Bizari hath recorded in his Histo∣ry, the marvellous obedience that those enumerable Armies, honour their God and King withall, they being in their warfare so just and strict, that they would not transgresse their Edicts in warre,* 1.309 nor abuse one another, when their Armies con∣sisted of 400000 Souldiers, yet not one of them durst transport a woman for his delight, but contenting themselves with meane dyet, (as Alexanders Army did) who in a Famine were constrained, throughout their Army to eate bread made of Rootes and Herbes, they banisht Wine or any delicasie that might effeminate them; And this mighty Army of the Turkes were so well governed, that no quarrells, mu∣tinies, nor distractions was ever seene, nor heard through the whole Army, but low and soft speeches; Alwayes both evening and morning recommending themselves, their safeties and prosperous successe of their actions to their God; The considerati∣on of this should make us that are Christians, if not surpasse, yet equall them in such laudable actions.

In a Souldier is required six speciall vertues,* 1.310 as namely obedience, which is a duty both to God, and to Kings duly to be administred: and as a learned Gentleman hath demonstrated Authoritie, in the resemblance of divers Pictures, as the principall in authority, whose commission from God is very large, he is therefore pictured or por∣trayed, amply and fully, from the crowne of the head, to the sole of the foot, in to∣ken of his great Soveraigntie.

The next in authoritie is drawne but to the middle, his Commission being but li∣mited, having but part of authority.

The last is portrayed but with a face only,* 1.311 or visage of a man drawne to the neck, his commission being of the meanest extent; Yet all these, though they have not the amplenesse that the principall Picture hath, yet they beare the face of it, and so ought to be honoured and obeyed;* 1.312 So that Souldiers must be circumspect in obeying all those that have but the face of authority, so farre as their Commission extends, in as due and obsequious manner, as those in higher authoritie; for the meanest Officer in a private Band, resembles the authority of the greatest Generall.

The next thing that is to be attributed to the honour of a Souldier, is silence, and that is to be taken in a very large sence, but intending brevitie, I will be concise.

First, Souldiers are to be silent in the times of their exercise, that the words of Command may be understood, which are delivered by their Officers.

Secondly, they are to be silent upon their Guards and Watches, lest any Enemie discover any thing by them.

Thirdly, they are to be silent in the execution of any assaults, which are to be made in the night, lest the Enemie discover the designe, and prevent it.

Fourthly, they are to be silent, when Authority commands any one Regiment, Division, or private Company in the Army, to give an assault, or onset, they are not to murmure and cavill, as if they were the men appointed for the slaughter, as the French-men did before the Citie of Antwerp, whereby the whole enterprize was frustrated; But Souldiers ought rather to take it as the greatest honour to be employ∣ed upon any onset; for indeed no wise man can thinke the Generall doth it upon a spleene, in regard every Regiment, throwes the Dice upon the Drummes head, and as his chance falls, so he is to take his fortune.

Fifthly, a Souldier is to bee silent in all adversitie, as when penurie, Famine, wounds, or if pay growes short (if the Generall cannot helpe it) these things hap∣ning in an Army, every man ought to lay his hand on his mouth, and wisely to beare the affliction and crosse, otherwise confusion would soone betide an Army, as ap∣peared by Duke Albert at the Siege of Ostend, he being in some wants, both of mo∣ney and victuals, some few foule-mouthed fellowes, raised a Mutinie, so that 2000 of his Souldiers fled to the Enemie, and had like to have confounded his designes; so that a Souldier in all his wayes and cariages, must have that ornament of silence never wanting.

The next thing required in a Souldier, is to be secret in all his wayes and actions, fearing lest he should disclose any thing which might bee advantagious to the ene∣mie; as many times when Souldiers have beene taken prisoners by the enemie, they have out of a base cowardly feare revealed what they knew concerning the state of

their owne Army, which many times hath proved obnoxious unto them.

The next thing required in a Souldier is Sobriety, which is a vertue that makes a Souldiers honour to shine most bright, and advanceth him into the stirrop of prefer∣ment; for drunkennesse is such a Lethargy in a Souldier, which brings present con∣fusion and death to himselfe, and utter ruine to a whole Army.

The next thing which should adorne a Souldier, is Hardinesse; and this is to be taken in a double sense; viz. Hardy in manly carriages and performances, and like∣wise, hardy to indure and undergoe any misery or paines that accompanies the Warres.

Lastly, every Souldier is to be guirt with Truth and Loyalty; not onely to his Prince, but to all in authority, even to the meanest in Office; this Truth is such a ver∣tue, and that it exceeds the capacity of man to discourse of it, it is such a precious jewell, that neither promises, guifts, affections, nor hopes of preferment can un∣dermine; and likewise no torments, threats, or miseries, are able to make Truth and Loyalty change that unchangeable colour, which duty and affection hath dyed it in. This makes Souldiers ever bound to obey the Commandements of Superiours, and Superiours likewise are to love and imbrace such deserving Souldiers; And further, if Souldiers desire to be prosperous and to attaine to honours, let them bee chaste and honest in their living, refraining all sensuality, and avoyding all occasions which might seduce them to that vice; for those that give themselves that base liberty, are ever infected with cowardice, and are most fit to attend upon that lascivious Gene∣rall Sardanapalus, whose pastime it was to exercise himselfe with Queanes, in all base postures of dalliance.

Hanibals Army, by wofull experience, knew what it was to be lulled in the plea∣sures of women, having beene Garrison'd but one Winter in that delicious Towne of Capua, the edge of their valours, and their steely hardinesse, was softened to poore base cowardly dispositions; so that Marcus Marcellus tooke his opportunity to conquer them.

Further, Souldiers must be obedient in every respect unto those in authoritie over them, although such Officers should bee infected with any notorious vice; as very few but have beene blemisht in one kinde or other. As Cyrus was cruell, co∣vetous, and miserable, yet obeyed and beloved of his Souldiers; in the same kinde was Cambises and Marcus Cato; also Marcus Antonius swomme in his Dallian∣ces, Gluttony, and Riotousnesse, yet his Souldiers would have suffered themselves to have beene crucified, to have done him any gratefull service; and the reason was, indeed his excellent way of Iustice, which he caused to bee administred duely and dayly in his Army; this did worke upon his Souldiers more than his defects in vertue could infect them. And indeed, it is very requisite for all Commanders to beware of gi∣ving ill examples, and to be charie how they doe or speake any thing, that hath but the shadow of unseemelinesse; For as one sayes well, Multa sunt honesta factu quae sunt turpia visu;* 1.313 There are three principall parts in the body of Man; wherein are lod∣ged the three principall powers of the Soule; Concupiscence in the Liver, Anger in the Heart, and Reason in the Head, as being the Citadell; in like manner, there are three severall vertues that doe command and governe them; Sobriety or Tem∣perance to over-sway Concupiscence, Courage against Anger in the Heart, and Wisedome in thinking and judging with reason.

But here I must take an occasion to speake of our Trained Souldiers, which are or should be fitted for a defensive Warre; they doe not consider how deeply every man is interessed in it, for if they did, our yeomandrie would not be so proud and base to refuse to be taught, and to thinke it a shame to serve in their owne Armes, and to understand the use of them; were they but sensible, that there is not the worth of one peny in a Kingdome well secured, without the due use of Armes, and that the Gospell, which is the Garland of our Kingdome, cannot prosper and flourish but under the shadow of a sword: This should incourage all Gentlemen and Yeo∣men to be forward in the practice of Martiall Discipline, I am certaine we can finde times large and sufficient to negotiate trifles, and to hunt after our owne pleasures, solacing our selves in vaine delights, which produceth naught but folly, and ends in griefe; halfe that time, and charge so ill spent, would make us expert; and gai••••

us honour; for as one truly saith, that our times are consumed, either Male agendo, Nihil agendo, vel Aliud agendo; either in doing naughtinesse, or nothing, or im∣pertinences; and by this meanes the principall is neglected.

And because that people are ready to make their excuses, to be spared from ser∣ving in their Armes, either for their youth as being too young, or for their age, as being too old; to decide this question, we will borrow the opinion of the ancient Warriours, and as Caius Gracchus, one of the Consuls of Rome, instituted a decree that none should be exercised in Armes under 17 yeares of age. Which questionlesse is a fit time for the inition of young Souldiers, having more aged to sort with them, for they prove the best and ablest Souldiers, that professe the use of Armes from their youth.

And whereas some imbellicke fellowes holds the opinion that forty yeeres is too late to receive them into the Warres, they are deceived: for a man is of ability to doe good service at 50. yeeres and upwards. Besides, their wisedome and judge∣ments are more setled; and indeed, your Romans would not admit of a Commander, unlesse he were forty or fiftie yeares of age: But some may object, that nature is de∣cayed in this last age, mens strengths are not as formerly they have beene? To this I answer. That the world waxeth old, yet not in post-haste; although Sensim, & sine Sensu, it is soft and faire, and by degrees insensible; as in reading Hackwels A∣pologie you may finde sufficient satisfaction to confute this Objection.

And as Crinitus in his Seventh Booke de Honesta Disciplina, reports of Teren∣tius Varro; from the authority of Discorides, a great Astrologer: That the Egip∣tians, who tooke especiall care by the imbalming of dead bodies, and by their witty reasonings, found out how the utmost age of Man was confined, taking their esti∣mate from the weight of the heart; which every yeare receives the increase of two drammes, untill 50 yeares be expired; after which period, it decayes yeerely two drammes▪ untill fifty more be expired: So that by this, it should bee fond for any man to pleade insufficiencie, unlesse at the least 50 yeares were past.

Likewise, we finde in Demosthenes; that the State being in danger, men of 45 yeares of Age and upwards, did tugge at the Oares; and certainly, a man at 50 and upwards is of more sufficiencie to doe service, than youth at or under 17: As in the second Punicke Warres they made choise of, as Livie reports; Tum decretum vt Tribuni plebis ad populum ferrent, vt qui minores annis 17 Sacramento dixissent, iis perinde stipendia precederunt, ac si 17 annorum aut majores milites facti essent; It was decreed that the Tribunes should tell the people, that such as being under 17 yeares of Age, and had taken their military Oath, should in like sort receive their pay, as if they had beene full 17 or past; but the hopefull age for performance, is betweene 20, and 50 yeares, because strength, gravitie, wisedome, and experi∣ence, at such yeeres, hath a corrivall in managing the actions of men; King Ed∣ward the fourth, was Conquerour in 8 or 9 severall Battels, before he was 41 yeeres old. Likewise, Alexander the Great, had in a manner conquered the known world, at 33 yeeres of his Age.

I confesse, Nature is sooner perfect and ripe in some men, than in others; and likewise, decayes sooner in some constitutions than in others; for if Strength be not the comfort of Age, and Wit the grace of Strength; and Vertue the guide of Wit, in all Souldiers, they are not to be allowed of, eyther young or old; for Stre••gth without Wit is dangerous, Wit without Vertue hurtfull and pernicious; so likewise, Age without Strength is but tedious. Therefore Commanders ought to be of a prime judgement in making choise of such Souldiers as are likely to prove serviceable. And in regard our Weapons are of a divers Nature, as Pike and Musquet; it is to be observed, that Nature hath framed men fit in stature and qualities to use them The tallest and ablest men, ought to be trained up to manage the Pike, the men of meaner stature are to serve in Musquets; and to inable them the better, every man from his youth should exercise themselves in manlike actions, which might make them hardy, setling their joynts, and breeding strength; so that in a short time their Armour and Weapons would seem very easie and light.

Likewise Souldiers must be very carefull to observe their Rankes and Files, and especially in time of Battell, taking notice that upon all occasions they must make

their Leaders place good, if he should chance to be slaine before him; for if the Front of the Battell be not kept compleat, the en••my will soone ruine it: The considera∣tion of which, caused Manlius Torq••••tus for example to p••steritie to put his Sonne to death, because contrary to command he observed not his Rankes.

Likewise, no Officer nor Souldier ought to goe beyond his Commission, al∣though a Conquest might ensue; the reason is, because none may trench upon the jurisdiction of Authority, and also in regard, for the most part, a thousand times more mischiefe may ensue than good possibly can, which made Posthumu•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 use martiall Law against his Sonne Aulus Posthumus, at his returne from his con∣quered Enemy.

If an Army be so fortunate as to gaine a Conquest: so many as are appointed for the execution of the victory, must be diligent in the execution; and not to fall to pillaging, whereby the Enemy may take an opportunity to rally his broken forces and overthrow you.

It were very good for Souldiers to practice all kinde of Weapons, and to bee singuler in the use of them. Likewise Souldiers must be very perfect in the divers beates of the Drumme; they ought to be very expert in swimming, by reason many exploits are to be atchieved by it, and the lives of many Souldiers sav'd by it. They should use themselves to carry heavie burthens, that they may bee the fitter to carry provision in a March, and to carry earth up the Trenches without wearisomnesse; for a Souldier must looke to be exposed to all manner of toyle, upon occasions of ne∣cessity; In consideration whereof, the worthy Commanders of ancient times 〈◊〉〈◊〉 choise of Country labouring fellowes to be their Souldiers, because they could indure paines and hardinesse, rather than out of Cities and Townes, for such are fittest to be Horsemen.

Souldiers are further to take notice, that in Garrison or in a setled Campe, their duty is upon all occasions (not making any delay) at the sound of the Drumme, to repaire to his Colours, with his compleate Armes be it to answer an Alarum, or to releeve the Watch; where no Souldier, of what birth or degree soever, should not take it in scorne, or hold it a disgrace to stand Sentinell, untill such time as hee under∣stands himselfe better; and then being a Gentleman of a Company, he must not re∣fuse to be instructed and taught by the meanest Officer; it must bee farre from any Souldier to disobey any of his Officers precepts, and especially, such as are given in charge by the higher Authority; neyther to contemne or slight the Martiall lawes, lost death be his reward.

Souldiers must be very wary how they undervalue their Officers, especially their Generall; or how they speake invectively, or reproachfully of any service or de∣signe that hath not taken effect.

Souldiers must rather choose death then cowardly to runne from their colou••s, neither must they have any converse with the enemy, either by speech, sending or receiving of Letters, were it from his dearest Friend without the Generalls Lycence. A domesticke Traytour is a Monster amongst enemies; and let such a one know that never any prospered.* 1.314 For as Queene Elizabeth once said in the like case, that shee would make use of the treason, but never trust the Traytour.

Now lastly, we must take notice of each Souldiers particular duty, both in Gar∣rison, and in field, as the next Chapter shall declare.

CHAP. LVI.

The duties both of Officers, and Souldiers in Garrison.

EVery Fort or Garrison hath a Governour, a Major, and a Captaine of the Watch, these are the principallest in au∣thority; Next, there are divers other Captaines and Offi∣cers, both of horse and foot, with their Companies to each belonging; of the duties of each I will discourse briefly of, and I thought it fitting to place this discourse here, ra∣ther then in the end of the tract of Fortification. The duty of a Governour is to be vigilant and carefull, that all Offi∣cers and Souldiers under his jurisdiction,* 1.315 doe punctually performe their duties, and where default is, according as the offence is to punish; he is to have daily intelligence of the enemies proceedings, which he must procure, either by sending out partyes of Foot, or certaine Horse, or else by the Countrey people; hee is to see all the Workes, and Fortifications about the Towne preserved, and kept; and what defences else hee in his wisdome shall thinke necessary to be raised, the Garrison must indeavour to doe it; what out-Wat∣ches, either of Horse or Foot, he sees sit to be placed upon places convenient for the prevention of the enemies secret approaches, he must command it, and his Major must see it executed, he is the chiefe judge in place of judicature, only assisted by the chiefe Officers, who have each of them a voyce, and the Governours stands for two; by which meanes a Malefactour is according to his demerit punished or freed, according as most voyces shall agree upon; by his authority hee may commit the chiefest Officer for any misdemenour, and cause him to be brought to his tryall. By his care and wisedome all things are to be managed; his Major,* 1.316 is his eye, mouth, and hand. His duty is to see the Watches set, to see the Gentlemen of the round doe their duty; the Sentenells stand at their postures, the Ports well guarded, hee is to receive no Troopes into the Fort, but first hee must goe to them with a sufficient guard of Pikes and Musquets; he is to receive the patent from the Captaine of those troopes, which if he findes it to be the Princes hand and Seale, he is immediatly to acquaint the Governour withall, and by his permission to conduct them in; if there be divers Companies, that Company which first enters the Towne hath the pre∣eminence, the rest inccessively in order, and so accordingly they are to take their turnes to watch, the Major is to give to every Officer his billet for his convenient lodging, and the like to every Souldier. At the Drummes beating for the releeving of the Watch, the Major is to have a billet for each severall guard, which being put into a hat,* 1.317 one Serjant of each severall Company, or in his absence a Corporall shall draw one of those Lots or billets, and accordingly is to conduct his squadron to that guard which is specified in the billet, and there he is to set out his Senteryes in convenient places, the Corporal hath the chiefe command of that squadron, and is each houre to relieve his Sentries, if his squadrant be compleat, otherwise he is to order their standing according to the strength of his squadron. The Major is likewise to see the Ports shut, and the keyes brought to the Governour, hee is to receive the watch∣word from the Governour, and after Port-shutting, hee is to deliver it secretly in the eare of every Serjant, who immediatly must carry it to their Officers.

Every morning the day being perfectly broke,* 1.318 and the Sunne up, the Major is to come to the Captaine of the Watch, and cause his Drumme to beat, then the Cap∣taine of the Watch, and all the Gentlemen of the guard, with the guard of Burgers or Citizens, are to troope to each Port, and stand ready upon their postures; the Major is to goe out at a wicket, with a small guard to discover if the enemy should be neere, the coast being cleere, he sends out certaine Horse a mile or two, fearing lest the Enemy should lye in ambush; the Ports being opened, the Squadrons are brought thither to guard, there is one Sentinell to bee placed without the Ports at the Turne-pike, who is to suffer none to passe, unlesse well knowne; there is like∣wise a Centrie to be placed upon the Portculli••, who is suddenly upon occasion to

let them fall, he is to let fall the middlemost first, because then no Cart, nor Waggon can bee brought to hinder the fall of the rest. Alwayes at twelve a clocke the Major must see all the Ports shut for an houre or more untill dinner time be past, if he findes any Souldier negligent in passing upon his duty, whether by day or night, he must imprison him; the easiest punishment is bread and water two or three dayes, or the strappado, or present death; He is to suffer no Cart, Waggon, nor Boate to arive at the Ports of the Towne, but he must gage them with Iron Spitts, fearing lest the enemy should be hid in them. If any partie of Souldiers should be appointed to bee sent out upon any service towards the Enemie, the Maior must cause the Ports to bee shut a long time after their departure, fearing lest s••me intelligence might be con∣veyed from the Towne to the Enemie, which might marre their designe, but for the most part they are sent out in the night to prevent all surmises.

If the Enemie should send his Drumme or Trumpet for a Prisoner, or upon some Ambassage, he is to have a note written, and sewed on to his h••t, what his businesse is with the Governors hand to it, he is not to come within Musquet shot of the Town, but he must beat, or sound a parley; to whom the Maior must goe with a guard, and blindfold him, and so conduct him into the Towne first to the Governour, and then to the Prison; where being courteously used, and his businesse dispatcht, he is againe to be blinded, and conducted out of the ports; The like is to be done to any prisoner that is brought in, lest they should discover the weaknesse of the Towne; every Sun∣day, and Holy-day in the afternoone all the Summer long, the Maior is to see the companies in compleat armour about five a clocke to stand in parrado in the chiefest street, the Governours Company first, then the eldest Captaine, &c. The Companies being viewed by the Governour and the Maior, they are to march every Company to his guard, and the Captaine of the Watch to the round-house, which is a guard so tearmed, because the Gentlemen of the Round, watch there.

The duty of the Captaine of the Watch is to see his guard compleat, and towards evening shut; He by himselfe, or the Maior with him, and a sufficient guard are to walke round the Walls of the Fort, and every Corporall is to come to him from his guard, and give him the word, whereby he understands they have the word right▪ Thus having viewed every guard, he is to returne to the Round-house, and imme∣diatly is to send two Gentlemen, who are to have the word given them; With these should goe a Burger or Citizen, for they watch by Companies, and have their Captaine of the Watch also; every Centeries is to let these passe untill they come to the guard where that C••ntry is to make them stand, and not suffer them to come within him; he is to call the Corporall, who is to command one or two to attend him to them; then the Gentlemen of the round must softly give the Corporall the watch-word, which if they cannot, the guard is to take them in, and not to suffer them further to passe, fearing that they should be enemies: the Gentlemen having past by all the guards, and seene all things right; if they should heare any noise, or discover the lights of any Matches; then they must acquaint the Captaine of the Watch with it at their first comming in, who must send out double rounds; and perceiving the truth must raise the Towne: If any Alarum should be given, the Cap∣taine of the Watch is to keepe his guard in the chiefe streete: and every Captaine, Officer, and private Soldier, at the first beat of the drum must repaire to their Colours with their compleat Armes and there attend the Governours pleasure; but for the most part they are speedily to repaire to that Port or guard, which their Squadron have the Watch at.

The Captaine of the Watch may commit any Souldier for his misdemeaner as well as the Governour or Major, for hee is chiefe next the Governour for that time being; he takes his Place from the Watch setting untill the Watch bee relieved the next evening following.

If any execution of Malefactors be, hee must command his Guard, and such other Companies as the Major shall appoint to guard the place of Execution.

The Captaine of the Watch with the Major and his guard are to goe the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 about the streetes, to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 there be no abuses plotting, nor quarrell, fire, and the like, he is not to be absent from his guard: every Captaine is to take his turne to be Captaine of the Watch, beginning first with the Governo••rs, then the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Captaine; and so in order.

Every Company is divided into three Squadrons, if the Company be 200 strong, then they are to be divided into foure Squadrons,* 1.319 and one Squadron of each Com∣pany is to watch from Sun to Sun; the rest have their freedome, unlesse the Enemy be at hand; then happily, halfe Companies or whole Companies, must watch in com∣pleate Armes.

The Governours Drumme, with the Captaine of the Watches, are to beat about the Streets to gather the Souldiers together, to cut the yce in Winter time, the Bur∣gers and Citizens doe the like; every Company hath his just allowance to cut, it is to be cut 16 or 18 foot wide, that the Enemy may be hindered to passe to the Walles.

The Mayor is to deliver out Powder,* 1.320 Match, Bullets, and all kinde of Tooles, to the Serjeants for the use of the Souldiers, the Tooles are to be returned safe againe; this shall suffice at this time: Next, I will briefly discour•••• of the dutie of Officers in the Field, and also of Souldiers.

CHAP. LVII.

The duties of Officers and Souldiers in the Campe or Field.

THe duties of Officers and Souldiers in the Field or Campe, doe not much differ from those in Garrison; wherefore I shall bee very short in this, and then I will proceed to discourse of the particular Office of each Commander, beginning at the meanest; and so pro∣ceed to the chiefest in Authority; demonstrating every particular thing belonging to their Offices. Now by the way, observe that every Army consists of a Gene∣rall, Lieutenant-Generall, Field-Marshall; Treasurer, Master of the Ordnance, Serjeant Major Generall; These are the chiefe Officers of the Field, and are ••mployed dayly in the Councell of Warre with their Prince, about State-affaires; then the Troopes are divided into Colonies, both the Infantry and Cavalliary, the chiefe whereof is the Colonell, the the Lieutenant Colonell, the Serjeant Major; these are the chiefest in command in each Regiment. Every Regiment is compounded of divers Companies the chiefe of them is the Captaine, the Lieutenant, Ensigne, Serjeants and Corporal••; These last, are exposed to doe their duty in person, with their Companies; the other in higher authority for the most part, leave it to their inferiour Officers, unlesse it be in times and cases of Danger.

The Army being Encamped, the Colonels Lieutenant of each Regiment, who beares the titular name of Captaine, takes place to be the first Captaine of the Watch▪ then successively according to the antiquity of the Captaine: Their watch is set af∣ter the same manner as it is in Garrison, onely no drumme is to beate neither for the setting of the Watch at night, nor for the releeving of the Guards in the Morning, untill the Drum-Majors drum beates, then all are to imitate him. The Captaine of the Watch is to goe no further than the Limits of his owne quarters, where he is to be attended with the Gentlemen of the round, and to take the Word, as before is shewed; that Night his turne is to be Captaine of the Watch, the whole Company is to watch upon some convenient place by the Brest-worke before their quarters. The Serjeant-Major of each Regiment, Colonell, or Lieutenant Colonell, may walke the limits of his owne Regiment. The Serjeant-Major Generall of the Ar∣my may ride through all the quarters of the Army,* 1.321 and take the Word.

If there be any Out-workes, as Redouts to be guarded; then the Serjeant-Ma∣jor of each particular Regiment, is to give Billets to every Captaine, what guards they shall keepe; then accordingly the whole Company is to march to those

Redouts, leaving their colours in the head of their quarters, which is to bee guarded by certaine Senteries appointed out of the next Company, whose duty is also to guard the quarters and Hutts, that no abuses bee committed. The Armes that the Captaine and Ensigne beares with them is a Pike, and his Armour of proofe; hee is to set out his Sentrye Perdues upon all passages; and likewise a Sentery within the Redout, these are to bee relieved by the Serjant or other Officers every houre or two at the most: That Company which shall come to relieve the Watch, must stand in their compleate Armes, untill such times as their Senteryes bee plac't out and the Bridge drawne up, least the Enemy should take an advantage to fall upon them when they are in a confusion: To resist the Enemy in their worke, they are to place betwixt each two Pikes a Musquet; Any of the chiefest Officers in high authority may com∣mand a Guard from one Redout to another, and visit them at any season of the day or night, and are to take the Word from the Captaine himselfe.

Every Souldier must bee very carefull of giving a false Alarum, because all the whole Army will bee disturbed and presently in Armes: If the Enemy comes upon the Sentry perdue, hee is to retreate to the next Sentry behind him, then if the E∣nemy seeme many, they are to retreate into the Worke and prepare to give them a Vallye: Those Horses that watch, must bee plac't to keepe some passage, they must send out their Horse Centryes to stand upon some way (which the Enemy must take,) their stations are to bee a quarter of a mile beyond the foot; the whole Com∣pany must not move off their saddles untill they are relieved.

Those Perdues that are layed out against a besieged Towne,* 1.322 are to lye flat on their bellies because of the Enemies neerenes and continuall shooting; and this shall suffice, and before I proceed any farther, I will have a more particuler discourse of the obedience and vallours both of Souldiers and Subjects.

CHAP. LVIII.

Of the due obedience, both Subjects, Officers, and Souldiers should beare to their Prince or Generall; with a demonstration how Mutinies and Treasons have beene re∣warded with infinite miseries.

NO Kingdome so Fortunate and happy, as those where o∣bedience flowes in a cleare streame; so farre from the power of gusts and stormes, that gentle calmes are per∣petuated to times, and all seasons are as Halcion dayes; when Subjects of all conditions, and in all respects sim∣pathize with their Soveraigne in authority to his lawfull behests and commands, as the shadow imitates the body, or as the parts of the body are ready bent to ob∣serve and execute the pleasures and intents of the heart and faculties of the minde; Obedience and loyalty are the Nerves and Sinewes which strengthen and unite the members of a body politicke to the head, and the strongest Fortifications that King∣domes can bee defended with; These are they which are the onely conquerours in Warre, and stedfast preservatives in Peace; these are the precious jewells which make the Crowne and dignity of a King most splendent and glorious; these are the most precious Diadems that a State can bee adorned with, the commanding power thereof is so potent, that in an excellent transcendency they daunt the puposes of an Enemy, forfeiting his designes; they so farre strengthen the body of authority, that none of the members can possibly bee infected where these Cordialls are placed next the heart; without these, Kingdomes are falling into a consumption, and nothing can be expected but ruine and destruction, as may evidently be seene by taking a sur∣vey of such Histories which record the confusion of Empires and Kingdomes: And first the flourishing Romans whose hearts were elevated by their famous conquests; the whole Orbe of this terrestiall World was filled with the Ecchoes of their resoun¦ding

honours. So long as they stayed themselves upon these Diamond Rocks of o∣bedience and loyalty; their loyalties being ready imbarqued to steere such courses in the streames of fidelity, that their Princes and Generalls (which were their Consulls) should direct and command, by which they victoriously not onely conquered their Princes love and affections, but withall gayned Cities and Countreys to be in subje∣ction to their Royall Scepter; As Italy, and the Carthagenians, whose conquests made a faire way, for sundry other spacious possessions to bee cast into the lappe of Rome; they not forsaking their Generalls untill they had gained footing in all quar∣ters of the earth, both in Europe, Asia, and Africa, subduing people of all conditions, as the Helvetians, Germaines, Gaules, Belgians, Swissons, Neruijans, Sedunians, Ve∣ragrians, Aquittanians, and Brittaines; So that they made themselves to be admired of the World, that with such constancy they should persevere and trample over such eminent dangers, wearisome toyles, and pinching penuries, as there indefatagable constant spirits led them through.

But at last, the pride and ambition of those Cheifes in authority being confultia∣ted and propt up with their infinite treasures, and vastnesse of their Territories, be∣gan to draw a Regency to themselves: The heate whereof, melted their loyalty and obedience into a Sea of Factions, Mutinies, and dissentions; the Waves and Billowes sometimes flasht and foamed betweene the Nobles and Commons; Sometimes the Tribunes swelled over the Bankes, and many times the Consulls prevailed: So that in Townes and Cities were light Skirmishes.

The seed of Civill Warre being sowne, soone sprung up like an ill weed in fertile ground, choaking, and extirpating that tender precious Plant of Loyalty; they most inhumanely, like Beasts of prey, conspire the destruction of their valiant Prince they had chose their Generall, Caesar; which was wrought by degrees through the frets and wounds which they secretly made in the Empire, that a dayly falling off from the State was exercised; untill Constantines Reigne, who neither by Art nor Physicke could keepe it from falling into the Hectick consumption: So continuing in a decay∣ing condition, until Augustus; In whose dayes the whole Monarchie suncke under the burthen of their base disloyalty. They not onely slighting such commandments as Authority commended to them, but altogether neglected the use of Armes, and be∣came most degenerate spirits, made up of nothing but Mutinies, and perverse cour∣ses, * 1.323 whereby the Barbarous Nations ad-joyning, made use of those times, and tooke their fit opportunity with advantage to invade the Romans, and brought Italy seven severall times to the brincke of destruction by fire and sword.

Attila, King of the Hunnes, spoyled Florence, and Lombardy. Genserius, King of the Vandalls, Biergus, King of the Lithuani; fiftly, Goacer, King of the H••∣rulij, who drave Augustulus quite out of Italy: The Heavens in reward of their disobedience, neglects, and factions, layd the Countrey dessolate twice in thirteene yeares: Sixtly, by Theodoricus King of the Gothes; Seventhly, by Gundiball, King of the Burgundians; hee had the pillaging of all Lombardy, and so left it to the Gothes, they injoying this perfidious Countrey 17 yeares, and had nothing to trouble them, but that they were troubled with nothing; which caused the Mosse of security to grow on their backes, so that pride, and riches made them esteeme themselves too great to live under the Rules and Commands prescribed by soveraign∣ty; but grew factious and rebellious.

Whereupon Bellisarius, and Narses, tooke a faire opportunity to destroy them, being a just reward for such mutinous Rebells.

Likewise in what a blessed estate and happy prosperity did the Subjects of the house of Burgundie live in, untill divisions and rebellious thoughts were hatcht and nurtu∣red: And though they were a free State of themselves, whereby they might have as∣sumed some colour for their detractions and rebellions, yet the Heavens would not bee propitious to such monsters, who were bound in Allegeance to Lewis the King of France: But they slighting that regall bond (which men and Angells honour with titles of dignity) began to conceive and project how to set a foot divers inova∣tions, thinking politiquely the greater part would have sided with them, wherby they should have wrung themselves out of their golden fetters of Alleageance, which their base mindes (delighting in charge) esteemed a heavie yoake: The Fates

would not suffer their expectations to bee answerable to their thoughts and wished desires.

They having prepared an Army, and brought them before Paris; (their basenesse was repayed with their owne base Coine) their owne Souldiers refused to bee sub∣ject to their Officers, and would not bee commanded by Authority, neglected alto∣gether their duties (A long peace having worne out the stampe of Mars) they were routed and defeated by the King of France, suffering the sword to range amongst their Troopes, their bloud being the sacrifice which made their new attonement.

In the Reigne of Henry the First who invaded France, and prosecuted Warres many yeares; his Subjects and Souldiers being very loyall, trusty, faithfull, and obedient unto him, that neither penury nor death could betray their fidelities which they had sworne unto him, was the cheife and principall thing (adding their vallours) which possest him in most of the cheife Cities, Forts, and Territories in France, whereby they had heaped up such infinite store of riches,* 1.324 which was the imediate occasion of puffing up his Subjects and Souldiers, thinking then most arrogantly their abilities would beare them out to peeke beyond the Piller of obedience; although they very well knew it had the Herculian inscription; Nil ultra: Whereupon the Nobles began to fume, and parts taking amongst inferiour Subjects, whereby their happie Peace was turned topsie turvey both in France and England; so that by degrees, that which by their loyalty and vallour they had gained in France, now by their basenesse and discords, melted away like Ice against the Sunne.

Then Henry the Sixt Reigned in those critticall dayes, when Samsons Foxes had swinged their fiery tayles of dissention about this Kingdome, that no security could bee enjoyed neither by Peere, nor poore; so that this Ratsbane of disloyalty wrought so strongly, that the murthering of three of their lawfull Kings was hellishly effe∣cted.

But marke what was their successe; The vengeance of Almighty God would not bee appeased, untill these abhominable Traitors were scourged with their owne rods; They employing their disloyall malicious braines, like mad doggs to teare and devoure one the other: The chiefe of these Rebels being the Duke of Yorke was slain In battell, and his head smitten off; all the Nobility of the house of Warwick & Somerset were either slaine in these civell broyles, or by due course of Law beheaded; The Duke of Gloster most inhumanely murthered his Brothers Sonnes, to usurpe King Ed∣wards Crowne.

But was not the Almighty a just avenger? yes questionlesse; He stirred up a poore prisoner the Earle of Richmond, (who had beene in durance in Brittany in France) who by poore meanes, and altogether unexpectedly, was furnished from those parts with ayde to come against England; and at his arrivall gave the usurper battell, and ••••ue that bloudy butcher.

Thus the Almighty avenger, rewarded disloyalty, stubbing them up roote and branch; as Edward at Fourt•• was constrained to hazzard his Person in sixe or se∣ven bloudy battells, to suppresse the distempers of his disobedient Subjects, wherein the sword of vengeance cut off most of his Nobility, and much of the Comonalty flaine and put to flight: Some young Noblemen made an escape into Burgundy, thinking to have beene there secured from the fury of Gods revenging sword; yet they were deceived, for Gods Iustice did not onely prosecute them thither, but per∣secuted them there with overwhelming penury, and reduc't them to the greatest exigent of misery that nature could possibly undergoe; as was seene by that young Nobleman the Duke of Excester, who was constrained by extreame poverty, to runne (bare-legged up to the ancles in durt) after the Duke of Burgundies trayne, begging an Almes for Christs sake.

The serious contemplation of this very one thing (a man would thinke) should make the haire of a disloyall, treacherous hel-hound to stand upright, and that it should bee a president of matchlesse misery for such future times, wherein such Vul∣tures, and Bafilisks, and Cockatri••es should bee hatcht in; for did these devouring Dragons consider how in all ages God by his mighty Arme in a transcendent way, hath used the heighth of severity against such delinquents, they would not dare to harbour the least thought of disloyalty, no not in th••ir seeretst Closets, fearing least

the Birds of the Ayre should reveale it; for God will have Subjects know how hee is interrested and stands ingaged to defend the right of Supreame authority with his right Arme; establishing and supporting such Lawes and Edicts, as the Royall Ma∣jesty of a King shall constitute, being lawfully grounded upon the Lawes of God, of Nature, and Nations.

Kings Prerogatives must and will swimme above the infectious distempers of se∣ditious Subjects, like the precious oyle over the billowes of putrified waters; and as one truely sayes, Lex est Sanctio, Sancta, Jubens honesta, prohibens contraria; had wisdome beene the guide to those geare-braynd transgressours, they would have had a respect to the end; whereas their fancie extended no farther then the begining; for had they fixed one eye upon the act, which is both in the sight of God and man detestable: and the other eye upon the consequence, which determines their owne confusion; They would have prized obedience and loyalty, (although a severe go∣vernment had beene exercised over them) as the most soveraigne preservative against all mortall infections that might betide a Kingdome either in Warre and Peace. But as Salust: well observed, Illis quieta movere, magna merces videbatur; the basenesse of people is such, that they thinke the very disturbances of things established to bee a hire sufficient to set them on worke; and as in times of Pestilence, all diseases turne to the Plague; so, in generall discontents, all turnes to Mutinies, Tumults, and Re∣bellions: And this is the Sun-shine wherein an Enemy desires to make his Hay in; and they expect the best crop when their labour and tillage hath made fit to receive the seeds of Sedition and strifes, wherein they spare no cost in manuring such persons with great summes, as they shall finde fit and tractable for their purposes; for neither gifts nor promises of honours and preferment shall bee wanting to accomplish their ends, as was well seene by Barnavelt, who was an Annuall Pentioner to the Court of Spaine, whose deeds and projects are yet fresh in memory. How had they se∣duc't those monsters of Men by their gifts and promises, to the subversion and clou∣die destruction of State, King, and Nobles, had not God beene propitious to our Land by a miraculous discovery;* 1.325 which sutes with that of the Prophet Daniell; There is a God in Heaven (sayes hee) which revealeth secrets, and maketh knowne to the King what shall bee.

How had Lewis the Eleventh of France, wound in divers of the chiefe Subjects of King Edward of England to bee his Pentioners; hee distributed 16000 Crownes a yeare amongst them:* 1.326 The chiefe whereof, was the Lord Chancellor, the Master of the Roules, the Lord Chamberlaine, &c. These were to disswade the King from assisting the young Lady of Burgundy; and likewise when any Ambassage came, they were to set it forwards: Though these things might seeme tollerable, yet few Kings would like such familiarity; though a wise Statesman may performe wonder∣full good service to his King, by being inward with the Estates of another kingdome; but there must bee a great deale of grace and honesty to the ground-worke, for a King and State to build their confidence upon.

In all the Histories that either I have heard or read, either divine, or prophane, those Subjects never escaped unpunished, which had maliciously and wrongfully per∣petrated any disloyalty to their Soveraign,* 1.327 nay not amongst barbarous Nations; much rather Gods correcting hand will bee knowne amongst Christians;* 1.328 but that either they have perisht before the act of their conspiracy,* 1.329 or in the act, or after the act: The holy Scriptures make mention of divers punishments inflicted upon the Israe∣litish Forces,* 1.330 for their Murmurings,* 1.331 Mutinies, and disobediences committed against their chiefe Generall Moses.

Divines distinguish obedience in a double respect, as filiall and legall, which holds good in the dutie of a subject to his Soveraigne, or to such as he shall constitute over us in the managing of publike affaires; and I hope none are so devoide of reason, but will submit to what Soveraigntie shall lawfully injoyne, in regard punishment attends in a readinesse to be put in execution. But those are a degree neerer, who weare the true character of obedience wrapt up in a tender loving heart, fearing to displease, because love injoynes them to obey; and the frownes of their Soveraigne are like needles at their hearts ever pricking, untill the sunshine of his favour bee re∣gained. This was the obedience and loyaltie the antient Romans honoured their

Senators withall, for their loves did flow in a freer current then their Lawes and Edicts did injoyne; they were prodigall in bestowing their lives and goods (when Authoritie commanded) in their Countreyes behalfe. How famous was Artillus Reg••••us that noble Consull of Rome being taken prisoner by the Carthaginia••s, and by them sent home to redeeme divers of their Captaines which the Romans had in custodie; Hee made a learned Oration to the Senat, letting them understand that hee was old, and worne out with yeares, and that his zeale for the good of his Countrey was such, that he would not admit of the sending backe those able Carthaginian Of∣ficers, * 1.332 who might doe much harme to Rome, but would rather returne backe, and suffer a cruell death with his enemies; Further in the same Warres which the Romans managed against the Carthaginians, by the unexpertnesse of the Generall their whole Navy was overthrowne, yet the wonderfull love and loyaltie of the Commons, freely demonstrating their sincerity and obedience (as a rule for Subjects in future ages) at their owne proper costs and charges, built a new Fleete in all points fit for service; I would this age wherein we live, were so mindfull of their loyalties and obedience, and not to mutter and repine, when Authority justly commands such a poore thing as an Annuall stipend for the setting forth a Navy, for the honour and safetie of our Kingdome. The Netherlanders are to bee admired and commended, for setting their loves afloate above their Lawes, daily tendering their lives and goods, in doing their States service; they are so free from grumbling, or having any seditious thoughts or actions, that even voluntarily they condescend to pay an Impost out of their Meates and Drinkes, towards the maintenance of their Warres, besides their patience in induring their goods many times taken, and their houses ruined by Souldiers; they are so farre from repining, that they thinke all well be∣stowed that tends to the publike good; they banish desire, and will not acknowledge it an act of their obedience, the property thereof being only to looke at things to come, but rather ground their actions upon Love, which points at things present. Wee can protest we desire his Majesties wants were supplyed; but where is the love that should command our purse-string? I say no more, let every obstinate fel∣low blush, and see if his desires without performance can command the advise and costly Drugges from his learned Physitian, for the prevention of some eminent sicknesse, which the Physitian by his wisedome and skill foresees, that without spee∣dy prevention will prove an incurable destruction to his body; let him rest upon it that hath a desire, that either his body or his estate should languish.

Let us but take a further survey of this dutie of obedience, and you shall find it defective, where feare only bindes, and love doth not joyne with it; Triplex amor, as Scholers define it; Emanans, imperatus, & elicitus; Naturall love, all sensitive creatures participate in, being led by an instinct to their objects, there being a kind of necessitie inforcing; as the Pismires love and care is to provide in Summer against Winter; Even so Man in the same kind guided by certaine reasons, is by love trans∣ported to his object. Commanding love is, when firme reasons demonstrate some good thing fit to be beloved, and then our wills command us to affect the same; Free love is when the affections makes choyce of some good thing of excellent qualitie, freely; and in contemplation of the goodnesse and priviledges, that is thereby in∣joyed, drives the spectators into admiration, and the circumstances that attend the actions, and demeanours of the object, begets his free love, and the prosperitie and welfare that it is possest withall, satisfieth the whole desires.

Naturall love, seekes only its owne profit; but that is not here meant, nor com∣mendable in a Subject, when he loves his Prince, only for the quiet gaining or en∣joying of gooods; in this a Prince is not really to returne love againe.

Secondly, when a Subjects will and affections, commands love for by-respects, and ••inister ends, as to be favoured in wicked and impious courses, this of all the rest is not to be respected, but utterly rejected.

The third kind of Love, is the true root from Whence Loyaltie and obedience springs, and that is pure without by-aymes or ends, of an enargeticall and working quality, ever seeking and working such things as may bring Honour and safetie to their Prince and State; Nam anima magis est ubi amat, quam ubi animat; The mem∣bers of a Common-wealth, should take instructions from the Philosophers, who

hold that the Parts love the beeing of the whole, better then it selfe; As for ex∣ample, the water being but the fourth part of the Elements, that the great World is compounded of, ascends up to the ayre, that there should not be a Vaccuum or emp∣tinesse in the universe, for the Elements touch one the other, as may be further pro∣ved by a small-mouthed glasse, the water contrary to the nature of it, runneth up to the ayre, as it is pouring out, that there may not be a voide place, it preferres the good of the whole, to its owne proper Center; and so in the little world Man, when occasion of danger is offered, the hand is ever ready to defend, and preserve the head; Even so ready bent and prest, should every member of a body politique be, to defend and preserve their Prince and State, and to administer such helps, as his necessi∣ties require with a free consent: he being our head, and all in all to us, we should, and are bound in dutie to hazard all for him; For if we consider the large commissi∣on which Almighty God hath beene pleased to give to his Vice-Roys upon earth, and in such a copious manner estated them in their thrones of Regencie, that the sonnes of men never had the like priviledges, as may bee seene by the large Commission granted to Moses, his chiefe, and Generall over his peculiar people, where God commands him, to make him a Trumpet of silver, to assemble the people, and to re∣move the Campe;* 1.333 It was a thing of such great importance, that in the infancy of the world, God himselfe did immediatly by his owne mouth assemble the Congre∣gations, and directed them how, when, and where to incampe, limitting the times of their removals; But after he had made choyce of a chiefe, to be his Generall over the people; he committed his care, and his office of command over to Moses, and left him ample power to goe in and out before his people, as formerly hee himselfe had done, and to take and claime such priviledges as are due, from inferiours to a Majestie: Which made our Saviour Christ very forward for examples sake, to worke a Miracle, rather then he would stand in contention with Caesar, he would disburse for himselfe and his friend, (although he might have pleaded his freedome, as being a man free-borne, or might have claimed the due to himselfe, as being King of Kings) but he well knew affaires of importancy belonging to a State, could not be compassed without daily revenewes, this made him so willingly pay his tribute, which the wisedome of Caesar had imposed upon his Subjects, for the securing of his kingdome, and especially in times of warre: as our Saviour Christ drawing a Para∣ble from the chargeablenesse, and dangerousnesse of it, wished a King first to sit downe and count, before he entertaines warre; Whether his power and abilitie, that is to be understood, not only the quantitie of armed men, but the qualitie, to sustaine them with; which is Money, Munition, and Victuals; and these are to bee derived from the inferiour members; as they may well be paralelled to the rootes of a high sprea∣ding Ceder, which drawes the sappe out from the earth, and by the influence of the atractive rayes of Soveraigne authoritie, forceth it up to the head; so that both blos∣somes and fruit may insue; Without this neither Warre nor peace can be safely ma∣naged; This made David send to Nabal for reliefe (after he was anointed King) whereby he and his Army might subsist; And although the wisedome of Abigal di∣verted his intentions from shedding his bloud, and destroying his goods, for his base denials;* 1.334 Yet after the omnipotent hand had inlightned his dunghilly conscience, as a just reward, he gave up the ghost; Vt poena impii sit cruditio justi; Though Princes are as men before God,* 1.335 yet they are as Gods before men; Virgilius saith that Princes are meerely by Gods providence placed in the highest seate of honour, and owe equall justice to their Subjects; so ought the people to owe dutifull obedience to their Prince,* 1.336 in reverencing his Person, and fulfilling his commandements. Tertullian saith, he that honoureth and obeyeth his Prince, honoureth and obeyeth God; for the Prince is Gods Vicegerent upon earth, and representeth amongst ment the glo∣rious state,* 1.337 and high Majestie of God in heaven. And St. Pauls holy counsell was that every soule should be subject to the higher powers; for there is no power but of God and the powers that be are ordained of God: Whosoever therefore resisteth the power, resisteth the Ordinance of God; But do you thinke this disobedient resisting shall vanish without it's due recompence? no certainely (saith St. Paul) they that are so audacious to resist,* 1.338 shall receive to themselves condemnation: For saith Solo∣mon, The Kings wrath is like the roaring of a Lyon, but his favour is like the de••w upon

the G••asse:* 1.339 And in Titus, there is urged a subjection to Principalities and powers, with a due obedience; and further, exhorting Subjects to bee forward and ready to act and performe every good worke that shall bee required.

But how farre are Subjects in all Nations sweru'd from this straight rule of obe∣dience, and follow the Serpentine parallels of some factious spirits, sprung up from some selfe-conceits, or discontents, as there are too many in this our age, by the strength of their windy Oratory, moves the Sea of waves and billowes of common people to inveigh and batter against their shores, and rocks of Authority, and to their powers ready to submerge them; And this ariseth from the curiositie of divers Subjects of our Litigious times; who strive to soare above their owne Spheare, to peepe into the Arcanity of State affaires, and their fond and false commenting upon the actions and passages of those in high Authority, and according to the fancie of their distempered braines, shape to themselves improper Hyerogliphicks, whereby they would demonstrate as on a stage, what Comedies or Tragedies are in their weake judgements to ensue. These are to be likned unto unskilfull Astronomers, that only have heard of the operation and influence of some Starres and Planets, and in perusing their Almanacke finde some one to have the predominancy for that day, they presently conclude, that according to the disposition or efficatious working of the said Planet, such ill seasons, or such weather must consequently follow; they not having a respect to the Fortunate Conjunctions, and favourable Aspects that may, and doth moderate and allay the malignitie of the most ominous influence (if they so shall deeme it) they being ignorant of that primum mobile that fooles, both Astronomers and Astrologers;* 1.340 These are the Novelists, which (ever since there was a Monarchiall government) have beene very pernitious, both to Generalls and chiefe Officers of the Field, as also disturbers to the quiet of the State at home. For like unskilfull Pesants that desire to pry into the Art of Navigation, and for Novel∣tie sake repaire to some promontory that lookes over into the Sea, where they espie a carefull Pilot well experienced in the conducting of the Vessell he had charge of; and according to his Rules steereth his course, striving might and maine, to gaine the wished Haven of his harbour; yet being denyed the direct course, which formerly a faire wind and Tyde did gently waft him in, the gusts of wind and waves of the Sea being opposite, he in his wisedome is constrained to leviere about quite from the wonted Channell, and all to fetch the wind, and to gaine the best advantage to sayle safe by the waves and gusts, for the security of the Barke, and in this tempest if a leake chance to spring, which might indanger the Vessell and all in her; How is this carefull Pilot constrained to lay her on one side, that the expert Shipwright may se∣curely stoppe the leake! These simple fellows being not acquainted with such Mari∣tine affaires, are presently conceited that this Vessell cannot but suffer shipwracke, when alas a Generall or Princes greatest and insupportablest burden, paines and care is to safegard, and defend his charge, and seeke the safety of those under his authority.

This age of the world hath hatcht such a strange Brood called Novelists; these are alwayes possessing the braines of simple people, with such strange fixions, either deifying some one man for deserts which they esteeme consonant to their mindes and courses, or otherwise vilifying others, and detracting from their goodnesse and worthes, making them a scorne, and rediculous to all such as shall joyne in their fa∣ctions, and favour such vituperating courses, that it is a wonder how those in autho∣rity should have a heart to beare such callumnyes, did not their wisedomes and good∣nesse passe by with a smile the simplicity of such creatures, although many times their aspertions are credited, whereby men in high Government and authority are by their meanes hated, and ill opinions and false censures alwayes opposing any acti∣on that shall be intended, or put in execution for a generall good, either in time of peace or warre: For the nature of these Novelists is such, that those they cannot fan∣cie, let their actions be never so good, and politiquely carried for the publike wel∣fare, yet to them it shall be distastfull, they being cloathed with jelousie and suspiti∣on, that they looke for that they doe not desire to see nor find; for under every faire harbe they dreame of a Serpent lurking, and that every laborious Bee, which strives to extract Waxe and Honey for the preservation of its Common-wealth, in their squint-eyed opinions are Spiders which gather poyson to ruine the same; it is a

cruell reward which is returned as a recompence to those which these kind of peo∣ple hate; Quem metuant oderunt, quem quisque odit pruiise experit: To verifie this I shall need make choyce, but of one example still fresh in memorie, which will serve to exemplifie and prove the truth of this discourse, and that is the Duke of Buc∣kingham, who once, none then living so highly in favour, and generally honoured of the Cominalty, and especially at his returne from Spaine, with our gracious King that now is, it was their whole discourse to magnifie him with their applauses of his worth, wisedome, and fidelitie; but how suddenly those of the Corporation of novelists had changed the wind of his true fame into a contrary quarter, blowing their flie-blowes of aspersions and disgraces so fast upon him, that hee grew more hatefull and odious in the same mens conceits, which formerly so highly honoured him, (and yet for his owne particular the same man, and to his power endeavoured to doe the same good for the Common-wealth which formerly he had done) so that what designe soever the people conceived his finger to have but toucht, was by them vilified, or some doubtfull various constructions made of it, which at length grew to the heighth of censuring, that when those Foote forces which returned from the Ile of Ree were to be quartered, and Billited in Townes, untill his Maje∣sties pleasure was to dismisse them, or farther to have imployed them; the common voyce was, it was the Dukes plot to detaine these forces, to take his occasion to side with the Enemy, and so to ruine our Kingdome: and what base Libells and scuru∣lous songs were made of him? so that at last they did hate his very person, so that by their callumnious reports, and invective inventions they had set on his shoulders (according to the fiction in Ovid) another head, so that his owne friends and Soul∣diers did not know him for their friend, but wrought their owne Masters death most villanously by their wishes, which was acted by the cruell hand of a hellish Murthe∣rer to their contents; but let them put the gaines they purchast by his losse in their eyes, and I beleeve they may still see, whilst he lived the Common-wealth fared not the worse; I think none can be ignorant of the mischiefes and inconueniences which are ingendred by these Monsters of impudent censurings, and bold scrutinies of these Novelists, which they ingrosse to themselves to please their pallats of a co∣vetous desire of newes, and then to gaine a popular applause, or to maintaine Table-talke they retayle it out againe, either to the honour or disparagement of some one or other, as they shall stand affected; or as the time, place, or occasion shall bee offe∣red: Reports soone workes upon the weaknesse of ignorant people, who are apt to beleeve any thing, especially if it comes from one that hath a habit of seeming san∣ctity, and by such they will be drawne, and lead to any thing. These Hitrogeniall courses either of Subjects or Souldiers used to those in Authority over them, makes an Enemie rejoyce, they perceiving by such wayes and courses, their pathes are ev'∣ned and swept; and at their pleasures they can shape their designes and projects, ac∣cording to the distempers and humours of the time, sayling with full wind and tyde unto the haven of their expectations; for mens fancies are like to surfeited bloud, that what infection soever comes first, is most surely taken; and indeed an enemy will not lose his opportunity to fish where the waters are troubled.

And as in the little Empire of the body naturall, the beginning of all motion is from the head, having the Conjugation of all sinewes, and the architecture framed, built, and fashioned with joynts fit for motion, and by a secret instinct and light of Creation annexed to the head from whence the whole strength is produced; now if any of these sinewes or joynts are shrunke or dislocated, it marres and hinders the sudden motion of the whole frame, causing the limme where such a defect is, to bee altogether unusefull, and much hindering the orderly worke of the rest of the limbes, which would be more quicke and apt to helpe and defend the head; the Magnanimous Eagle is easily surprized if but the least joynt of her wings be perisht. This corrupting, putrifying, and dis-joynting the members of a Common-wealth, hath beene a pollicy ever used by the Enemie, and hath afforded him more freedome to set afoot his projects and designes, then any one conclusion he hath made use of; And such dislocations and distempers are usually the forerunners of confusion. Histories make mention of many Nations that have beene infected with this Con∣••••gion, and have languisht in this dea••ly sicknesse, when as the art of Physicke was

not able to purge the glut that lay in the stomacks of these diseased persons, so that their breaths infected all that came neere, and made them unusefull burthens to their heads, so that the Engines of Wit, Art, and Policy, was not able to set them in a right frame and temper.

France once deeply tasted of this deadly cuppe, untill ruine and confusion rent them from their head to a deeper destruction, like gangreene members they were cut off from the body Politicke; the residue being weary of their former smarts be∣gan then to comply with the times, and saw it the peaceablest and safest way for all degrees to joyne in one, for the ayding and supporting their King, and honouring and obeying all in Authority under him; then they showred their transcendent tearmes of loyaltie and obedience upon Lewis the ninth;* 1.341 (and indeed he truly de∣served them) the Commons with one voyce styled him their Father; the Nobility reverenced him with title of just Prince, and faithfull preserver of their Lawes; The grave Doctors and Fathers of the Church ascribed to him the name of Tutor, and Defender against all oppositions, and the whole body of France viva voce, and with one consent proclaimed him the King of truth, and those in Commission un∣der him, true Preservators and Administrators of Iustice: the crabbed fruits of their former follyes had wrought good effects, so that contestings, scrutinies, censurings, and oppositions,* 1.342 were quite banisht; They having learned of Licurgus, to answer those that did desire to meddle out of their Spheare, as hee once answered one that was oppinionated, that a Democrasticall government was most pleasing, hee wisht him to try it first in his owne house if such Corrivals in authority would breed any content; If every busie-braind fellow would make tryall of this, shame would make them blush, and ill-shapt discontents would stop their mouthes, causing them to be ready to imitate the Egyptians, who antiently consecrated to their God Harpo∣crates, the Peach tree, the leaves thereof resemble a Tongue, the fruit a Heart; sim∣bolizing thereby, that their hearts should hence-forth serve him, and their tongues set forth his praise. The same Embleme should every loyall and obedient Subject and Souldier have within his breast and mouth, which he should dedicate to Supremacy, and to all in subordinate authority under him; then every dore would turne merrily upon the hindges without jarring, and a gentle streame of Peace would have a cur∣rant channell through Kingdomes; then there would be no feare of an enemies sow∣ing his seedes of discontents amongst the inferiour members, nor inticing them by gifts and promises to disloyaltie or distractions.

It is recorded of Caesar,* 1.343 that he conquered more in France by complying with the people, profering them favours and curtesies, and giving them large gifts, to those that would yeeld to maintaine Disputes, factions and contentions against Authoritie, he thus exercising his wits but one Winter, gained more Townes and Provinces, then hee and his potent Army could conquer of them in ten yeares warres.

Factions, Murmures, Mutinies, contestations, oppositions, detractions, disloyalty, and disobedience, are farre more dangerous in an Armie, then they possibly can be in a settled Kingdome, in regard the members of an Army are to bee ready prest to goe upon execution, upon every sudden occasion, being alwayes in action tending towards the finishing of the designe it was provided for, so that if any Mutinies or detractions should be, it would fare with that Army, as with a Traveller that by some dangerous slippe in his earnest journeyes over a dangerous Forrest is taken lame, so that he is disappointed of his expected ariving: being exposed to the dan∣gers of the night; and bereaved of his meanes of defending himselfe from the cru∣elty of devouring Beasts, which most certainly will take the present opportunitie to fall upon and devour him; Whereas in a State (no Forraine enemies being neere) such distempers, bruses, and dislocations, time it selfe may weare out the mallady, or some soveraigne course may be used to supple and lythen such dislocated joynts, and stiffe members, so that use may be obtained of them, before any urgent occasion shall command their assistance. It is not the least of all things to be thought of, if occa∣sion should offer it selfe to make use of the Commonaltie, for a speedy defence against an approaching enemy, those that have beene so offward, and refractary in obeying the Edicts of Soveraigne authority, and in yeelding the least of their assistance in contributing towards the mighty charge which is expended both by Sea and Land,

for our peaceable and safe preservations; how strange shall these men bee found in subjecting themselves to Marshall lawes, and to such Commanders as shall ••ee in command over them; or how will they venter their flesh, which were scrupulous in venturing a few shillings: Besides their ignorance in the use of Armes; and no marvell, because our Yeomondry scorne to subject themselves under a Captaine to bee taught, but put their servants into the List: And the cheifer sort that should bee the strength of our Kingdome, slip their neckes out of coller, and every silly poore mecanicke fellow must make the Souldier: Thus dishonouring our Soveraigne, and weakening our State, by putting trust in a company of poore ••••eas that have nei∣ther estate nor reputation to loose, but are fitter subjects to entertain mutinies, or com∣mit mischiefes, then to bee brought into orderly subjection.

You may give Officers leave to complaine, being too well acquainted with their wonderfull disorders in our daily musters, which being not redrest will bee perni∣cious to our Kingdome.

Moreover, our people are so metamorphiz'd from that true worth which in for∣mer ages was inherent to our English, but now so effeminiz'd by their voluptuous living, that they are not fit to undertake the paines and care of a Souldier; their hearts melting like butter, upon the supposition of meeting death in the face; as was seene not many yeares since by the manly carriages of brave fellowes, when the ru∣mour was of the Enemies landing at Wackring, betwixt Maulden, and Lee in Es∣sex; what uproares and disorders it bred, two or three ••estriding a Horse to eschew the danger, partly naked, fearing least the Enemy should have over-taken them, being so stupid, that many of them knew that it was so farre from affording an Ene∣mie a landing, that a Goose might bee gravelled, before shee could obtaine shoare.

And I thinke the two fearefull mistakings of the Enemies approaches at Wethers∣field in Essex,* 1.344 the people being Congregated in a time of Fast; at the discharging of a poore Pistoll by a Horseman returning from Trayning, all the Church was in such a strange uproare, every one running to hide himselfe; tearing the Ayre with their shrikes and cries, deeming they had seene their Neighbours slaine; when they in their hast tumbled one over another, some running a Mile or two before they durst looke backe.

Likewise some few yeares after in the same Church, at the running downe of the waight of the Clocke (which made to their thinking a fearefull noyse) caused such an uproare as if the Divell and a lease of Beares had beene amongst them: these things plainely shewes the pusillanimity and imbellick constitution that Peace and security, with the laciviousnesse of the times hath hatcht in them; it would have beene hard for a Generall or Captain to have gotten these people to have made a stand, and opposed the Enemy at push of Pike, if occasion had beene of the Enemies land∣ing: A County might have been pillaged before they would have assumed the coun∣tenance of a Souldier, they being so fearefully affrighted. If wee did but truely weigh these things, it would make every man more forward in his contribution to∣wards the maintenance of the Navie, which must secure us from these panicke feares.

The ancient Gaules accounted no man further worthy then to serve in the affaires of the house, that was not publickly called and generally thought worthy and meete to beare Armes; and being Armed before the generall Counsell, then hee was ac∣knowledged a Common-wealthes man, and fit to bee employed to doe his Country service: And these were of the best and cheefest sort that strived to obtaine these ho∣nours: How farre are wee dissenting from those, yet wee would bee accounted good Common-wealths men; but wee must first leave our factious jarres and dis∣putes, by which wee thinke to attribute to our selves the name of good Common-wealths men; and as the Gaules did, betake our selves to the service of our King, and the good and safety of our Countrey.

Tacitus makes mention,* 1.345 that the youth in those dayes did use no other recreation, but in preparing themselves and fitting themselves for the Warres; having that ex∣pertnesse, that they would leape voluntarily being naked against swords and Iave∣lins opposed against them, wherein they had an Art to disarme their Enemies, and defend themselves: Hee adds moreouer, that they would play upon such dangerous

adventures, as would make a man blush to bee a spectator.

The Ancient Romans upon their Theaters, tutored up valiant young men in the Art of Fencing; and when they grew expert and hardy, they were renowned with the name of Gladiators, our Gentry and Yeomen are not of that mettall; for either they through coveteousnesse, are adicted like Boares to roote up the earth, to scrape base drosse together, (which they deifie as their god) or else they swimme in a more dangerous streame of drunkenesse, and riotousnesse, which weakens both their bo∣dies and estates, making them not fit to doe neither King nor Countrey service; for it may truely bee sayd of those that sayle in these extreames, that they are ignorant to what end they were borne into the World; which next their duty to God, they are bound in all loyalty and obedience to doe their best service to their King and Countrey; mens owne private ends ought to bee the last thing to bee thought upon.

The Ancients in former ages were not acquainted with such basenes, as this Age is addicted unto; they would not suffer such distempers amongst them: for as Cae∣sar reports, that the Nervians were the most couragio••est of all the Belgians; his reason was, their Governours would not suffer any Wine to bee brought amongst them;* 1.346 or any thing that tended unto delicacie; they held it for an infallible rule, that such things would abate the courage of men: And Strabo further testifies, that Caenus a grave wise Commander perswaded the Getes to plucke up their Vines, for feare of effeminatizing their people;* 1.347 they neither delighted in delicacies nor riches; as Taci∣tus speakes very nobly in the behalfe of the ancient Germanes; who so highly hun∣ted after honours, condemning base cankered wealth, that in their marriage circum∣stances instead of a great dowry, the husband presented a yoake of Oxen; a Horse furnished and fitted for service, a Target with a sword and Iavelin: The Virgin likewise presented her beloved with some weapons of Warre, simbollizing that in all perrills and dangers bee it either in peace or Warre they joyne to run in one fortune. Our age is so farre from this, that although by Statute they are bound to finde Horse and Armour, they will have trickes to shift it, or being compell'd, will borrow of their Neighbours to blinde the eyes of authority; so that in a Troope of Horse of a 100, there is not 80 of these Horse their owne, which ought to bee employed for the Kings service; were these people allotted their possessions, and yet bound to finde Horse and Armour, as Aristotle, testifies of Phaleas, the Calcedonian that hee first published in the Common-wealth;* 1.348 that all goods and chattells should be equally divided, to the end that two principall plagues to mankinde (which are Riches, and Poverty) might bee banisht their Cities.

The Warlike Germanes put this in execution, by a custome received amongst themselves; as Caesar avoucheth in his sixt Booke of his Comentaries; that they had no certaine measure of Land, nor any particular habitation limited them, but as the Princes and Magistrates assigned every yeare unto particular kindreds aud Parenta∣ges, so much ground or Land, or such a Citie or scituation as unto them seemed best and convenient, and the yeare following they were constrained to seek elsewhere: The reasons of this used by the same Author, were first, least the people being retayned by customed continuance, in one place they should bee out of love with the profession of Armes, taking more delight in their beneficiall and pleasing courses of life: se∣condly, from the occasions of withdrawing their mindes from the inlargement of their Territories: thirdly, least they should bee over curious in building and defen∣ding themselves from cold and heate, and so prove starke cowards: fourthly, least a coveteous desire should arise amongst them, scraping and gathering goods together, whereon customarily issues threats, dissensions, and bloud.

These inconveniencies former ages have beene reduc't unto, to deterre them from effeminate courses, and were constrained for all their uncertaine meanes to fur∣nish themselves with Horse and Armour for the Warres: Wee have our compleate possessions from generation to generation defended by his Majesties Lawes; Yet how grievous it is to divers men to have a just taxation of Moneys, Horse, or Armes impos'd upon them; when they know without it, the Realme cannot bee secured. Let any sensible man compare these our dayes with these precedent circumstances; and let him judge what good service, or what loyalty and obedience may bee expe∣cted

of a people, either meerly given over to sensuallity, or altogether begrumbled with covetousnesse, for we are now growne to that height that wee make it an Ar∣ticle of our faith; that the possessing of goods and enjoying of pleasure, is the Sum∣um bonum required.

When as the people of the Iewes, that God so highly delighted in; that he would give kingdomes for their ransomes, and hedged them about with his favours, where∣by they might have presumed to have lived in security: Yet it was the Almighties pleasure so farre to weane them from their eager dispositions of fortifying themselves, which they aymed at for their better security, that they might live uncontrolled, and wallow in their pleasures, and some in their covetousnesse, voyd of feare of the Ene∣mies surprizalls; both their hands were commanded to bee employed, the one about their daily and common affaires, the other was to mannage the sword: So that one eye was employed about finishing and contriving their livelyhood; the other had due respect to the Enemy to prevent and resist them upon the first view: Is our Na∣tion more confident of a miraculous preservation, then they might have claym'd? I rather beleeve the contrary, for it is just wee should suffer, if wee slight (as most of us doe) both Gods precepts, and the commands of Authority which enjoyne us to a due preparation and daily vigilancy, which now is generally disobeyed and sligh∣ted, the noyse of the Enemies Canon sounding so far off, neither as yet hath the Ene∣mie played his part upon our Stage; so that wee shall feare like the Shepheard when the Woolfe comes; indeed wee shall hardly gaine succour and resistance, in regard the common people take all warnings but as mockes and scare-crowes, which by these consequencies following may bee plainely seene.

First, in our refractory carriages, when Authority commands any service for the gayning experience in the use of Armes, as namely our Musters; what murmu∣rings are breathed out for the expence and charge of a little Powder and Match, and the losse of a dayes Worke.

Secondly, what boysterings and stomackings there is against Officers that shall give true information of mens sufficiencie, when accordingly Armes by Authority are imposed.

Thirdly, what strange circustances are used to gaine freedome, and the posting it over to another, happily farre insufficienter then himselfe.

Fourthly, when necessity compells the finding of Armes; what fond delayes, and slight excuses are set abroach to deferre the time; and in this they have a double ayme: First, either that the dallying with time shall bee the meanes to bury it in o••∣livion, or, Secondly, the removing themselves out of the division they conceive to bee prevalent, untill notice bee taken of some other to amplifie the List: Others of lesse rethoricke, take it to bee the cheapest way to borrow their Armes; so that ma∣ny times one Horse or one Armour, is fitted to the service of divers bodies.

Fiftly, those that are compleate in appearance, will hardly bee intreated to bee tutored one third part of the day, but some one evasion or other is put in execution; many times they are so brittle, that they can hardly endure the calling over, which makes them so skilfull at the yeares end, that they can hardly distinguish a Rancke, from a File.

Sixthly, their backwardnesse and unwillingnesse in answering to the commands of Authority, and many times some of them are altogether deficient both in their Armes and appearance, and usually all or the greater part will borrow two or three houres of the set time, before they come to the place where they are to bee called o∣ver; that dayes worke above all other is so tedious, that they desire onely to trifle it to an end.

Seventhly, a base scorning and inveterate hating of such Officers as have a desire to take paines with them, in exercising them and shewing them their postures, and causing them to bring in compleate Armes.

Eighthly, the negligent and beastly keeping of their Armes, that hardly halfe the Armes of the Band are fitted as they should bee for a present use, but altogether defe∣ctive, and making any trash serve to passe the Muster, not regarding future services: In all these particular faults, our Horsemen are guilty of, and may blush for their shamefull abuses to King and State; and in one thing they s••rpasse our Foot-troopes,

and that is the employing of such Horses as are sequestred from common rurall uses, and onely appropriated to the Kings service; they instead of riding them and mana∣ging them for the Warre, set them to Plow and Cart, or to performe some journeys either in a Coach or otherwise; or rather more absurdly make a Cart-horse or Coach-horse serve to beare the great Sadle, which they thinke sufficient to blinde the eyes of Authority; should there bee any suddaine use that our forces should stand in com∣petition with an Enemy, I feare wee shall fall short of what is to bee expected.

And although these defects may seeme but as a shadow to such points of disloyalty and disobedience, as formerly wee have discourst of; yet these defects argue and savour of stupid security, and a base undervalluing esteeme of the use of Armes, which all Nations doe most highly honour and esteeme, as the meanes for safety of King∣domes, the preserver of Lawes, and above all, the preserver and defender of Gods Gospell, which without it, would soone bee dasht under feet, and a confusion over∣flow our Realme: Therefore let us endeavour to amend what hath beene amisse, and in all dutifull obedience follow such directions as Authority shall prescribe, bani∣shing our owne ends, and every day furnishing and fitting our selves to the largest extent of our abilities and powers to doe our God, King, and Country the faithfullest, and best service wee possibly may, and that willingly, and with a delight; for this end wee were first borne, as was truely veryfied by Pompeius Magnus that famous Commander, hee having shipt his men, and ready furnisht them with Victualls and Munition for the reliefe of the City of Rome, which was then by the Enemy besie∣ged and in great distresse: In the interim, a wonderfull tempest of Winde, Raine, Thunder, and Lightning arose, so that nothing but ruine to him could bee expected; his friends and Souldiers besought him not to venter his life and the Navies losse; Hee returned this noble answer, I am borne to obey Authority; Et necesse est ut eam, non ut vivam: Hee knew the Rules and Edicts of Soveraigne Authority were not to bee deferred, but hee tooke them as his Card to steere his course of loyalty and obedience by.

If wee should but draw examples of obedience from the Creatures, and observe how in all things they stand conformable and obedient to the Lawes of Nature; How the great unruly Ocean observes the course of the Moone in bringing in her tides: The Massie earth waites the time and pleasure of the Sunnes revolution, to yeild up the fruit and hidden treasures contained in her bowells to the uttermost of her power: All Creatures both Vegetative and Sensitive, are precise and ready bent in all obedience when Nature enjoynes; And yet Man a Rationall Creature most ob∣stinate and hetrogeniall in his duty, loyalty and obedience to his Superiours, which Nature doth not onely challenge as a right, but God claimes it as a due: And how siily and foolish are men above all other Creatures in making provision for their safety there is no Creature but Nature hath armed it with some defensive weapon, not so much but the poore Bee hath his Pike, which most valiantly and skilfully hee can use for his defence and preservation: But the times wee live in are such, that wee have neither will nor skill; but we referre all to a generall Providence, thinking it suffi∣cient if they be roughcast with riches and prosperity: and the liberty and peace which here hath beene plentifully enjoyed, breeds a boldnesse and foole hardinesse to doe evill; for long peace and large freedomes makes men as unfit to follow the Warres for the present, as pampering and youthfulnesse doth a Colt unridden; he that should have a suddaine occasion to backe him for present service, cannot but expect the Ry∣der should be overthrowne, and worke confusion to himselfe and all that depend on him.

It was partly seene and tried at the Isle of Ree in France at the Siege of Rochell, and although our English had beene some short time tutured and exercised under the banners of Mars; yet the right valiant and judicious Captaines had no more com∣mand of them in the time of need, when the tryall of their obedience, skill, and val∣lours should have beene brocht, then of a Herd of Deere: For all they saw by flight there was no safety but eminent destruction, yet they could not bee perswaded to make an honourable resistance, whereby they might either have freed themselves, or have died like men with their faces towards the Enemy: Now judge you, if such cowardly basenesse was found in those that scorned to give their heads for the wash∣ing

being the prime spirits of our Kingdome, we cannot but expect worse of these here behind remaining, which will fall short many bowes length of their worth, (if we doe not flatter our selues) for they will find warre a wearisome stage where Souldiers must play their parts against their wills; for truly it may bee said of a peo∣ple that are unexercised, and know the Warres but by heare-say: quod valentes sunt, & prevalent ante pericula, in ipsis tamen periculis discedunt; They have ability enough and to spare, untill danger appeares; but when perill indeed comes, they get them gone as Vigetius sayes, there is a rule in the Philosophie of the Warre; In omni praelio non tam multitudo, & virtus in••••cta, quam ••rs & exercitum, solent prestare victoriam; In every Battell, skill and practice doth more towards the victory, then multitudes and rude audacity. But certainly our age is possest that an Enemy will dare at our brave cariages and gay cloathes, as the Larke doth at the Hobby, untill they beate them downe with their bolts. Let such make tryall that please, it will prove but Dulce bellum inexpertus. Matters not usefull prove inductions to terrour; for there are three things which agravates feare; Inexpectation, unacquaintance, and want of preparation; The first distracts the minde, and flai••es the faculties and affections from their due consultations of remedy; the second makes an earthquake in the soule, being not sensible of the event, as the Imbellicke Pesant quakes at the report of a Musquet at his first hearing of it. The third dejects the spirits being voide of all hopes, either of evasion or defence, much lesse of conquering; Therefore lest wee should make our Enemies more terrible to us then indeed they can bee, let us daily expect them, that when they come we may not be to seeke how to expulse them.

And for conclusion of this seventh Section;* 1.349 let every true-hearted Subject imi∣tate the Thracian Captaine Protesilaus, sonne to Iphiclus; who to shew the truth of his love and loyaltie to his Soveraigne, would be the first man of all the warlike Greekes, that should set foot on Troy; albeit he knew that hee should surely die that first toucht the Trojan Land, which came to passe, for he was slaine by Hector, about whose Tombe the Poets were pleased to record to his perpetuall honour, that divers goodly tall greene Trees did divinely spring up, whose branches covered the ruines of Troy; By this we may see in what estimation and honour, loyalty and valour was honoured withall; as one truly sayes, such men deserve all respects and honour that may be to mortall men ascribed, for they are as the Lockes and Barres of the Kings Pallace, and so long as they are kept, fixe, strong, and close, they preserve all in safety; but if infected with Cankered disloyalty, rustie cowardise, and mossie se∣curitie, they leave all open as a prey to Theeves and Robbers.

THE TRVE VALOVR OF SVBIECTS AND SOVLDIERS IN FORT AND FIELD. SECT. VIII.

CHAP. LIX.

The true nature of Valour described, and how men ought to be qualified with it, to make them sit Subjects and Souldiers.

TRue Valour in Subjects and Souldiers, is the summoning of the Faculties of the irascible parts to a mature Consul∣tation with Reason, Iudgement being the principall En∣gine, and Resolution the Modell that turnes all the Wheeles, both of Invention and execution, which makes a man truly valiant, to undertake without rashnesse, and to performe without feare, bearing downe dangers with a loftie courage, trampling on them with successe; it makes a Souldier looke Death in the face, and passe by it with a smile; it makes him afraid of nothing, but to be be∣trayed by feare, desiring rather to have his bloud seen, then his back; it makes a Soul∣dier disdaine life upon all base conditions; Making him prodigall of his bloud, when God, his King and Countrey shall command it; His boldnesse proceedeth neither from Ignorance nor senslesnesse; But first he values the danger, and then disdaines it, having his feares least, when perills are greatest; His Magnanimous mind scornes flatteries, esteeming such as Flyes blowing corruption upon sweet vertues; he hates to feed his spirits upon the fulsomnesse of surfeiting ease; his confidence keepes him safe, and his unapaled lookes doth daunt a base attempter; it is more prevalent then Briareus with his hundred hands, and more potent then Chiron the Centaure, whose strength and wisedome was matchlesse; Valour hath double oddes of a fearefull Coward, for the undaunted carriage of a valiant man, drives feare up to the hilts in a Cowards heart, so that he hath no ability left to offend his enemy, or defend himselfe; This makes victory so easily gaind, for the spirits of a Coward are so retired, and pent up with anguish and distresse, being wrapt up with feare of the approaching evill, and dispayring of his fortitude to avoide it, that there is hardly strength left to make the least resistance; whereby Valour takes his advantage to atchieve his Honourable ends without much trouble, and lesse danger; for as boldnesse fortifies the passions of the soule against the greatest miseries which are most difficult to be avoided, and incourageth it to pursue Honourable atchievements that are most hard to obtaine; so many times fearefull cowardize doth wannesse in it selfe its strength failing; many times fearing that which is not to be feared; having only but a shew

of danger, Saepius opinione laboramus quam re, Many times more troubled and de∣jected with conceits then the thing it selfe. A Cowards eye is of the nature of an augmentation glasse, dilating a small danger, and causing it to appeare tenne times greater then the accident can be; whereas Valour accordeth with the deminution glasse, contracting the dimentions of perils into so smal an Image, that they appeare as shadowes. In a poore faint leaden spirit there are foure kindes of feare that undermine the Heart; first a naturall feare, whereby every thing shunnes the destruction of it selfe, and this is most proper in beasts. Secondly humane, which ariseth of too much desire of this life. Thirdly a base worldly feare, when a man despaires to hazard the losse of goods and credit. Fourthly, a stinking servile disposition which causeth a feare of receiving wounds and death; any one of these is able to subvert the whole fabrick of Valour. That warlike Caesar was free from the least tincture of any of these feares, when his boyling worth in the middest of eminent perils, cheared up his Souldiers and Mariners, and banisht their feares with the comfortable words that Caesar and his fortunes were aboard: Hee was very expert in the opperations of conceits, and passions of the minde upon the body; He being a warlike Phy∣sitian (in the prescription of Regiments to his fearfull Souldiers) he did alwayes consider Accidentia animi to be of greatest force to further or hinder the atchieving of Victory and fortune; for questionlesse imagination is prevalent in altering the fa∣culties and spirits of the imaginant, having a manifest power to hurt, deject, and weaken, the opperation of the spirits; so that there is to be observed an art in warre, and to be used to coroborate, and strengthen the imagination, that they may like the Loadstone, fix their conceits upon nothing but honours, victory and riches, which elevates the spirits into a majestick Spheare.

There is a great deale of difference betweene a naturall inbred hardinesse, and a soffisticated valour; a silly sheepe may be made, managed, and tuter'd, to oppose and use violence to a dogge, but when the victory comes to competition, the wing is preferred before the claw, whereas in a Lyon his naturall inbred magnanimitie can∣not be altered, without the bereaving of life. The subject of Warre is variable, and is only judged by the successe and event; Whereas other Arts and Sciences are judg∣ed by acts, as the Pilot is judged by directing his course aright, and not by the for∣tune of the voyage; it is otherwise with valour, for that may have an aspertion of timerosity, and taxed with indiscreet judgement, when the event is not answerable to the acts performed, when as Imbellick fellowes may stumble on a victory by some strange accident, when neither art nor courage did attend them, which by the weak∣nesse and credulity of men shall be highly esteemed, as may bee manifested by the overthrow of the Duke of Brunswickes Army, who were knowne to bee very vali∣ant, and had so declared and manifested themselves in divers bloudy skirmishes, and principally in a battell fought against Seignior Tilly, where he had all the advantage both in force and place, yet most valiantly the Duke forced a way thorow the ene∣mies Army; the greatest losse to himselfe was only the losse of his hand; yet these brave Souldiers not long after were routed and ruined, by a few base countrey Bores joyned with a few Souldiers which were privatly drawne out of the adjacent Townes, to hinder the Enemies pillaging; these in the dead time of the night found sufficient advantage to set their base mettall a worke, the Brunswickians being con∣fusedly quartered (and their guards neglected) upon a plaine neere Brafford in Gel∣derland, so as the divisions could not have the priviledge to draw themselves into order of Battell to make their resistance, for I dare then say those Grollians and Bores would have fled at the first charge, like Sheepe from Wolves.

True valour is of the nature of perfect coyne which goes currant in all places without contradiction, and dares indure the touchstone, when as seeming hardi∣nesse, like base mettall will not indure the tryall, nor passe currant in valuation, yet happily it may to the view seeme very splendant, as courage raised by the spirits of Wine, may seeme more headstrong and violent (as one truly tearmes it a madnesse, or a worth out of the wits) then the true valour which goes upon the feet of judge∣ment and resolution, yet it will be nipt in the bud, and fall before the fruit be mature; when as true hardy••Souldiers well exercised, and acquainted with dangers, feare them not; Neglecto periculo iminentis mali opus ipsum quantumvis difficile agrediuntur;

They goe about the businesse it selfe, how hard soever it be, although they consider the danger with the mischiefe over their heads it may probably bring, which would distract a Coward.

A Souldier must be so qualified, that adversity must not lessen his courage, nor prosperity his circumspection; our English in former Ages, have beene esteemed the best tempered mettals, transcending other Nations of the world for true valour, and expertnesse in the use of Armes; whereby they have atchieved great victories: as in the Battell of Poictiers, where the French had all advantage against the Blacke-Prince, both in number, force, shew, Country and conceit, with the chiefe strength of the Horse of his Kingdome, which were esteemed the best in Europe, assisted with the greatest and wisest Captaines of his Realme, so that the French Army consisted of 40000. men well appointed, and expert Warriours, nothing wanting in them; but the golden spirits of our English, whose Army consisted but of 8000. men, over∣threw the French Army, and tooke their King Prisoner.

The like difference of worth in Souldiers, was manifestly seene at the Battaile fought by the Estates of the Netherlands, and the Archdukes forces, neare Newport in Flanders, where our English did workes of Supererogation, by the prudency and valour of the Veres, with a handfull of disbanded men, routed the Battalia's of the Enemy, and redeemed the victory lost of their owne side, snatching it out of their Enemies hands, when in the judgement of all men it was lost. And that in∣credible animosity and courage of a poore handfull of Souldiers, which attended Charles King of France, in his junenesse unto the Warres which he intended in Ita∣ly! after the sacking of divers Townes there, he marcht with his Army to the Gates of Rome, and entering a breach in the Wall, drove the inhabitants to such perplexities, that the Pope gladly condiscended to any conditions which they should propound; so as the World did admire their valour, wondring to see that no opposition could withstand their warlike hands; so that Kingdomes trembled to see with what faci∣lity they suodued in all places.

Alphonso understanding this Army approacht neere Naples, feare so farre possest him, that he crowned his Sonne Ferand, thinking that he more valiantly would have defended his Country; for his owne security he fled into Sicily, being indeed toucht in his conscience, for his abhominable wickednesse: but no sooner were the French arrived at the Ports of Naples, but the sheepish Neopolitans durst not once offer a repulse, but yeelded themselves with their Kingdome to his mercy, where he was crowned King of Naples. By these examples we may see the wonderfull difference betwixt an inbred naturall valour, and a forc'd made hardinesse.

As there is a vertue in the Load-stone to draw Iron or Steele to it, the vertue not extending to other mettals; of the same nature is Valour, which in a valiant Commander, will draw all his Captaines, Officers, and common-Souldiers, to step the same paces to gaine honour and renowne; so that they will follow him in all de∣sperate attempts, if they have the least graine of steele in them; which being want∣ing, all the policy in the world is in vaine to seduce or draw them to any performan∣ces; but like Leade (before other mettals) when it comes to the fire of tryall, will soonest melt and runne.

As much may be sayd of an Effeminate Commander, whose mettall is no better, than the Minerall which Saturne ingenders; if he be infected with the Pestilent dis∣ease of Cowardise, all his Souldiers under his command will soone be infected, and participate in his running fore, before his begin to rise; Souldiers are very supersti∣tious, dreaming there is more worth and wisedome in a Commander, than many times is found; and when they perceive timerosity, doubts, and no apt performan∣ces in him, they conceit some strange effects are approaching, that may tend to their confusion; and so like valiant Cravens, bethinke themselves best how to be secu∣red, reposing more confidence in one paire of Wings, than in two paire of clawes; as was well observed by the Battell betweene Po••••bus Diazius a famous Leader of the Portugals, and Alvara King of Congo, who had in his Army 1200000. Souldiers, who by the poore spirits of their Commanders were so astonisht,* 1.350 not daring to maintaine the ground they stood on, were utterly ruin'd by a handfull of Por∣tugals.

Caesar one of our Schoole-masters in the Rudiments of Warre, was not ignorant of the strange effects that the worth of a Commander begets in a Souldier, and what poore Spirits and agast countenances are bred by the sickly courages of Comman∣ders; which made him haste to the Sea-coast, understanding his Navie was assaulted by Achillis,* 1.351 as it lay at Anchor by Pharas in Egipt, over against Alexandria, he being in∣tercepted of his passage by the Egiptians, was compelled to leape into the Sea, swim∣ming for his life, divers times being constrained to dive into the water, to preserve himselfe from their Darts, with much difficulty and danger arrived at his ships, whose presence, with his valourous animating of his Souldiers, got the victory; which otherwise had beene doubtfull.

Likewise, to confirme the base impression of feare that a cowardly Commander stamps in his Souldiers dispositions; and likewise to manifest the worth and cou∣rage which is wrought in poore imbellicke Creatures, by the forwardnesse and bold hardy courage of some in chiefe, you shall finde by the Story of Contarenus the Vene∣tian Governour;* 1.352 he having intelligence of the invasion of Vluz Ali with a Navie of 60 Gallyes, was so stricken with a quaking agne, so that by his cowardly and un∣manly carriage caused all the Townesmen to runne after him, leaving the strong Towne of Curzola to be defended by none but their silly wives; the simple women perceiving eminent danger and destruction to approach, plucke up their womanly spirits, and defended the Walles with stones, fire, and such other weapons as they had, beate the Enemy from the Walles, and God being propitious to them in send∣ing a suddaine violent Tempest, which forc'd the Turkes Generall to remove his Galleyes to a place of more safety.

The like pusillanimity was found in King Etheldred, who in the yeare 978. swayed the Scepter in this Kingdome, being invaded by Swayne King of Denmarke, with a Navie of 350 Sayle, durst not withstand the storme, but tooke his opportu∣nity the speediest way into Normandy, leaving his Subjects to the mercy of the Danish King, who tyrannized over them untill his death. In all the passages of Mar∣tiall Affaires, I have onely observed three severall passages, whereby valiant men have beene subdued.

The first may bee sayd miraculously, as when God is seene plainely and manifest∣ly to bee the Author of a Conquest by a secondary meanes of lesse worth and power used; and that is most usually, when God and his Glory is interressed in it: as in sa∣cred Scriptures, the overthrow of Goliah a man of mighty strength and valour, by David although valiant, yet a Childe in comparison to the Gyant: (for valour and strength must have a cerrivall to make a man compleate) Also the overthrow of King Saul and Ionathan, who had ever beene victorious against their Enemies: Yet the Almighty being at ods with them for their rebellions, in not performing execution against Agag, they were subdued by their Enemies; yet David stiles them (in his Lamentations for them) valiant men.

Also Marcus Antonius the Emperour making Warre against the Quadi,* 1.353 being a Warlicke people that inhabited Silesia; who by their worthes and policies had got∣ten the Emperours Army in such a straight, the mountaines invironing them on the one side, and the Quadi ready to give battell in their teeth; And as calamities sel∣dome walke alone, the season of the yeare was very hot, and infinitely dry; the Em∣perour being ready to compound his safety with his Enemy rather then hazard all, feare had taken such possession of him and his Army: being in this deepe agony, a certaine Captaine presents himselfe, letting the Emperour understand that hee had di∣vers Millitents, meaning Christians, which by their prayers to their God could ob∣taine victory, for whose sakes God was pleased to interest himselfe in this conquest, by sending a miraculous Thunder and Haile, which so beate in their Enemies faces, that they with ease vanquisht them.

Secondly, Valiant Commanders may bee foyled by their owne presumption; it being a domesticke traytor which attends the ruine to valour, and so neere allied to it, that it's hard to bee seperated, and many times it doth trayne and usher forth va∣lour upon extraordinary disadvantages, or blindes it with a superstitious remissenesse and loosenesse, in suggesting and acting such things as should bee requisite for safety; abandoning all such rules and meanes as might tend to preservation and furtherance

in their designes, making meere naked valour the Rocke to ground their confidence upon, as in the Battell betweene L. Silla and the Romans, against Archelans Generall to Mithridates King of Pontus, whose Army consisted of 120000 Souldiers, these reposing their confidence in their valours, and great multitudes of men, having an over-weening presumption of their owne strengths and deserts, caused them to neg∣lect such courses and advantages as might have beene prevalent to a victorious con∣quest, whereby L. Silla tooke an occasion to give them an overthrow with the losse but of fourteene of his owne men; But Archelans paying for his presumption the lives of 2000 of his valiantest youths.

Thirdly, as we have discovered Valour to be of too high a temper, that is com∣pounded with presumption; so likewise when it is of too soft a temper being com∣pounded with feare, as in Instruments of Steele, that which is absolutly Steele, and of too high a temper, is of hardnesse sufficient to file in peeces any Mettall of a sof∣ter temper, only it is brittle and subject to breake through its owne hardnesse; So that Sword that is partly Steele, and partly Iron, so farre as the Steele is in it, and of a true temper it will indure the stroake, and will give no more way, but equally to that which is all Steele, but when the Steele is chopt, and hackt through to the Iron, then that which is all Steele, soone destroyes and cuts through the softer Mettall; accordingly when two valours meet in opposition, happily both sides in∣dures the brunt a long time, so farre as strength and worth will give way, but being cut and worne to the quicke, the tempered edge is taken off, and a softer mettall ap∣peares, which is soone fretted asunder by the true tempered weapon, that hath not that quantity of Iron in it to soften it; So that that Army which indures the assault longest, is most sure of the victory; so that too hard is better then too soft, but the golden meane betwixt them is the best temper of all, which is tough and apt to in∣dure any hardship that shall be opposed; as that famous Battell fought for a King∣dome, betweene King Harold and William the Conquerour, their Mettals were so neere of a temper, and so truly tempered, that the victory was uncertaine which side it would favour, untill the edge of the English valours was worne through by the ominous death of King Harold, then their courages grew so soft and poore, that the hardy Normans destroyed them like Grashoppers.

It was farre otherwise with the true mettalled Swedes, although the Emperours Army had deeply worne into them, by seeking to blunt their edges by the slaughter of the most valiant King Gustavus; Yet in regard there was nothing but true tempe∣red mettall remaining, they indured the force of their Enemies opposition, and in∣during their greatest onsets and assaults, they were predominant over their enemies, standing to their tackling untill they had consumed their foes; Thus you see the two ill tempers (as before I have said) which attends fortitude is feare and rashnesse; The golden meane betweene these two, is only to be chosen by a Souldier; this is a path so difficult to walke in, that few there are but erres; As one compares this meane to the roofe of a Church, on whose top there is scarse roome to turne a foot upon, but on either side a broad rode to ruine, if once falling, the stay is rare, and a re∣covery miraculous.

There are sundry opinions argued betweene Valour and Pollicie, some are opinio∣nated that policie transcends valour, having a respect to the speach of the Philoso∣pher Achimedes, who saying of himselfe that hee could conquer more with his gowne in his studie (meaning his studious way of contriving of Politicke plots) then all his Enemies could performe in the field by their valours; others hold Va∣lour of most force, comparing it to the Saltpeeter in gun-powder which is irresista∣ble; and Policy to the Gunne, which being not charged with this spirit of Salt∣peeter, it cannot of it selfe be prevalent; but from both these ariseth a third thing which effects all, and that is the Bullet; Wherefore Valour and Policie must goe in∣separably together for the effecting of any matter of consequence; For the policie which Iudith had contrived within the Citie for the destruction of Holofer••es, had beene to no purpose,* 1.354 had not her valiant hand put it in execution.

In a valiant Souldier there are two things required to make him able to sustaine so honourable a weighty burthen; First, a love to the Warres; Secondly, a conten∣ted mind to beare any misery, that the fortune of the Warres may reduce him unto;

hee that hath a love to follow the Warres, takes a pleasure and delight in it, which a∣riseth from the sweetnesse of the object, which is honour and riches; All the passi∣ons of a mans soule depend upon pleasure or paine, which ariseth from contentment or distaste received from the object; Contentment is a firme prop to sustaine a Soul∣dier in the bloudiest Warres, after the love of that profession hath invited him to the managing of Armes; and unlesse a Souldier keepes these two companions close to him in his Warlike progresse, the stampe of Mars will soone bee eaten out; For al∣though content bee of an excellent vertue to qualifie a Souldiers disposition in all mat∣ters of griefe and misery, yet there was never any but had some occasion of griefe betyded him, Warre having so many alterations and suddaine changes attending the issue of it: But however it beares him up by the chinne from sincking into a muddy sadnesse,* 1.355 which is a base humour properly hanging about the under∣standing, which heavies and dulls the spirits, and extends to evills past, present, and to come, following the understanding which comprehendeth all these times.

There are three kindes of this blemish of valour which a Souldier should not once communicate with:* 1.356 The first is a sadnesse which ariseth as Schollers define it, prae∣ter rationis Imperium, besides the command of reason; as motions suddenly eja∣culated into the affections, doe surprize a man.

Secondly there is a sadnesse, Erga judicium rationis against the judgement of rea∣son, and this subdueth reason for a while.

Thirdly, there is a sadnesse, Secundum Imperium rationis, according to the com∣mand of reason, for his reason commands to be sad: These sadnesses dimme the bright spirits that should enlighten a Souldiers actions; and as Seneca saith, Tristitia turbans non est in sapiente, Although sadnesse may trouble a wise man, yet it perturbs him not.

Comines makes mention of a noble Family knowne by the names of the Laylands in France,* 1.357 who held the Warres in such high estimation and love, and received such joyfull content in them, that divers generations of them spent their bloud and lives in their Majesties service, so that scarse one of them but died in some honourable attempt.

Also Verticus, a chiefe Commander over the Rhemi, whose worth neither Warre nor age, could consume or blemish, having alwaies borne a love, and taken content in that honourable profession; that even in his decreped age being hardly able to be∣stride a Horse, hee would not consent that any Battell should bee fought in his ab∣sence.

Of the same disposition was Camilogenus a noted Souldier amongst the Alerci,* 1.358 hee could not be importun'd to favour his aged body and to bid the Warre adue, but returned this answer; that although his strength fayled, yet his judgement and coun∣sell should bee of value and esteeme.

Also Strabo makes mention of certaine Frenchmen which were taken prisoners; Alexander taking a survey of their manly dispositions and carriages;* 1.359 demanded of them if they were not fearefull in the Warres, and what it was they most feared; they returned unto him this peremtory answer, (wee, sayd they) feare nothing, ex∣cept the Heavens should fall on our heads.

Times haue wonderfully altered those noble conditions which former ages haue bin indued withall; for in this age wee fall short, (being altogether effeminiz'd, and for want of exercise and experience) even of divers feminine Sexes, whose worthes are recorded in history for our learning and imitation, and to their immortall praise. As first the Warlike Amazons, after their chiefe Leaders Plinos, and Scholpythus were treacherously murthered with all their Warlike forces,* 1.360 which inhabited in Capadocia; their Wives with the rest of the feminine Sex, being possest with griefe and feare which bred desperatenesse in them; like Beares ravisht of their Whelpes, they pluckt up their mad desperate spirits, making choise of Lampedo and Marpetia for their Conductors, who furiously set upon the conquerours, and in battell over∣threw them, and afterwards wonderfully inlarged their dominions.

After this Hippollite and Menalippe challenged the single Combate of Hercules and Theseus.

Likewise Penthesilea assisted Priam King of Troy with a brave troope of Virgins;

the valour of these Feminines was growne to that height, that they scorned their male kinde which proceeded out of their owne loynes, banishing them their socie∣tie; and onely chose to trayne up the Females in the feates of Warre; they in∣vented divers Warlike weapons, that the lubberly Males were not capable of the use of them.

Further, in the Province of Palmira in Syria lived a famous Governesse named Zenobla; being of such worth that shee stood in contestation with Gallienus for the Empire of the World, She swayed all the Easterne parts.

Also the unconquered spirit of Semiramis, who led in her Army 100000 Cha∣riots of Warre, three Millions of Foot, and halfe a Million of Horse: She subdued the Ethiopians, the Indians; and She having re-edified Babylon, newes was brought her (as shee was playting her haire) of the revolt of this Towne; whereupon lea∣ving her haire halfe undrest, shoe went and besieged it, never ordering the rest of her haire untill shee had againe recovered it.

And our late Queene Elizabeth of famous memory may be a patterne to the world for her true worth and undaunted spirit, She managing both her forraigne and do∣mesticke affaires beyond the capacity of man to conceive, that the World admired her high temper: Which was well seene in 88, with what a brave undaunted cou∣rage and heroyicke spirit of resolution, shee comforted, her Subjects in their feares and eminent dangers: The consideration of these unmatclesse spirits might beget worth in our effeminate age, to drown our childish spirits in their seas of valour, or cause us to imitate the worthes and valours of former Ages, who pluckt out their Calvish hearts and infused the spirits of Lions into themselves, whereby they ac∣complisht deeds which merrited wonder; and the rather the more to bee admired because of their meane breeding and simple parentage which could not afford them education; As we finde it recorded in holy Writ, David, Saul, Gideon of meane parentage brought up in rurall affaires; one keeping Sheepe, the other Asses, the last with his Flayle; yet when they assumed the countenance and spirits of the Va∣liant, what wonders they wrought, and with what honours were they dignified; the dangerous't enterprises that ever happened in their times they feared not to at∣tempt, which was the stirrope that elevated them into there Thrones of highest dignity.

Likewise we finde in Histories, what admirable parts men of meane parentage have attained unto, and what Warlike wonders they have wrought; As Achilles the Sonne of Aeacus, was a long time hid under the garments of a Woman amongst the daughters of Licomedes; yet afterwards his spirit aspired so high, that hee con∣cluded the Trojans greatnesse, and overthrew their Citty from the toppe to the bot∣tome.

Galerius Maximianus borne and bred up basely; wherefore he was termed Armentarius, because hee was a Neat-heards Sonne: hee grew very fortunate in the Warres, being indued with great valour and courage, was after for his deserts made Emperour.

Iustia was first a Swine-heard, afterwards a Cow-heard, next a Carpenter, a common Souldier, a Captaine, and by his conquests which he obtained by his valour was made Emperour.

Pompienus Maximus Sonne to a Smith, gave himselfe to vertue, and Millitary services, proving fortunate against the Polonians and Germanes in divers valiant Conquests, was after created Emperour of Italy.

Also Maximinus a silly Shepheard, at his first inition into the Warres, beha∣ved himselfe so honourably, that he was by the Souldiers made Emperour.

It is wonderfull remarkable what strange adventures the worth and valour of men have spurred them unto, to undertake for their Countryes good, and their im∣mortall honours: It were worth the observation, if one of a thousand in these our dayes would endeavour to performe the like, either for their private or popular good; As the Phileni did for the Carthagenians,* 1.361 who were in controversie with the Cyre∣nians about the bounds of their Territories: They being willing to end the quarrell, chose certaine men of either City that should set out at one instant, and where they met, there the confines should determine; These Phileni being swift of foot, got farre

into the Countrey of Cyrene before they were met; whereupon the Cyrenians being inraged, wisht them either to returne backe into their Countrey, or dye on the place; the valiant young men preferring the common good before private safety, accepted to bee slaine.

That Reverent Fether of the Church Swinglius, a man not onely indued with divine knowledge, but great learning, thought it a dishonour to him to withdraw his hands from the Warres for his Countryes good; and the rather because hee had incited others to be valiant in their Countryes behalfe, and to spend their bloud in the defence of it; was himselfe the formost man in the Battell fought neere Zurich in Helvetia, where by his eager valour pressing upon all disadvantages, hee was slaine: Many Divines of our Age are not of that temper, but had rather appropriate some strange irregular wayes to themselves, whereby contentions and factions may breed at home amongst their brethren, then to exhort men to doe their Couutrey service; but by their detractions rather diswade them, then stretch out their owne hands or hazard their bodies for the good of their King and Countrey; for we are growne so farre from incouraging one th' other to follow the Warres, or to distribute any maintenance towards them, that wee altogether discourage those that would venter their Purses, and hazard their bodyes for the good of their Countrey: But we may learne of that ever renowned Lady Tiphania, Wife to Bertran du Gues••lin, and let her bee the patterne to all such detractors which seeke to deterre men from their due service and honourable performances: This Warlike knight renowned in divers Histories for his worthy enterprises, espoused himselfe to this fayre Lady of a noble Family; his fame and honour being one chiefe cause she setled her affections; per∣ceiving shee by her amorous courses did withdraw his spirits and love from follow∣ing the Warres, whereby his honour began to diminish; shee gently reproved him (as hee was courting of her) and blamed him for effeminizing himselfe, and leaving the Warres, whereby formerly hee had atchieved his greatest reputation; and that it neither suted with the nature of valour, nor duty of a true Gentleman, to lose the least repute of honour wone before, by over much affecting his new made choice; as for my part (quoth shee) I ought to shine by the bright radience of your splendent fame; and shall thinke my selfe too much dejected, if you doe not prosecute so ho∣nourable a course begun, and loose your spirits in doting on love: These her noble and wise corrections, did so neere touch and trench upon the knights worth and va∣lour; that hee re-assumed a Warlike course, presenting his body against the hottest assaults that ever our English Nation tendred to the Kingdome of France; he fought against Edward called the blacke Prince; Hee restored Henry the eleventh king of Castile in his Kingdome, maugre the English Forces; hee was after made Con∣stable of France, and highly indeered unto Charles the Fifth.

I could gladly wish all Ladies and Gentlewomen of so noble a temper, esteeming no honour to the fame purchast by Warlike actions, and instead of their teares and fond embraces, to rouze their noble Husbands to prosecute the use of Armes; as the brave spirited women of former ages have done; and for an example of their worths it is recorded in History, how the Women of Aquilegia a City in Italy, did so ani∣mate and assist their Husbands and other Souldiers being beleaguered by Maximinus, that when their Bowstrings fayled, they cut the haire of their heads and made them new strings, all other materialls being spent, whereby they preserved their Citty, and confounded their Enemies, to their never dying honours. I hope I have sayd sufficient concerning this subject, and I take it for granted, that all mens spirits have taken this Cordiall of valour; so that now it stands requisite we should give some Rules, how and when wee should set our Valours a broach, and when to re∣fraine.

First, when two Armies are dayly in readinesse to give Battell,* 1.362 there are three principall things to bee considered; as namely, if wee shall gaine lesse profit by the Victory, then wee may feare detriment if wee should suffer an overthrow, upon this occasion we are to forbeare, and Souldiers must not construe it as a trick of cow∣ardize: To give you an example of the Duke of Guise when hee invaded the King∣dome of Naples; the Duke of Alva had beene unwise if hee had given him Battell, for the French could have lost no more but their Army in that battell; but if the vi∣ctory

had inclined to the French, the Neopollitans had lost their Army and King∣dome with it; for it is a maxime amongst the rules of Mars, to delay an Enemy that is of greater Potency and farre from his Country to gaine reliefe, whereby his Vi∣ctualls and Amunition may bee wasted, so that distractions and mutinies might breed in the Army, the Souldiers being over-wearied in expecting the fatall day of losse or gayne; so that the Natives may take at pleasure their best and safest occasion to give Battell, so that victory may bee atchived.

The second reason why an Army may refuse to try their valours in a pitcht Bat∣tell, * 1.363 and shall not bee imputed as cowardize unto them; is when a Generall under∣stands that his Enemies Army will bee broken and scattered without fight; where∣of the Emperour Charles the Fifth may bee example: For when hee made Warre against the Protestants in Germany hee would never joyne in Battell with them; for hee was credibly informed that their Army consisting of divers Nations could not long agree, but be disperst without Battell.

Thirdly, an Army may shun Battell and yet bee voyd of Cowardize, if hee cer∣tainely knowes his power to bee inferiour by much to the Enemies,* 1.364 so that hee can in no wise hope for victory: In this case a Generall had better doe as once a famous Warriour was wont to say; Hee would rather make his Enemy a Golden Bridge to March away, then give Battell upon unequall tearmes, for it is never good to assault an Enemy if hee bee perceived to make meanes to March quietly away without blowes; for many times an Enemy having beene brought into a desperate case, hath beene the onely thing which hath gayned them the victory; as was well seene not onely by the blacke Prince in France, but also by the Duke de Alva; hee having beleaguered Aultmore in Holland, having blockt up his Enemy in the Town, would neither cappitulate of quarter, nor suffer them to steale out of the Towne by flight; this made the Townesmen and Souldiers resolute, in regard they expected no favour▪ and with their manly courages resisted the Duke and put him to the foyle, who otherwise would have fled and left the Towne to the Conquerour: For indeed it is a great indiscretion to detaine an Enemy that is flying to stoppe his passage: for without question, such valours are deprived of the sinteresis and light of naturall prin∣ciples, becomming equall to beasts, managing their proceedings without feare or wit; that will wilfully spill the precious bloud of man, and may accomplish their ends without the hazard or losse of it: This was the honourable observation of a fa∣mous Warriour who left it in Ryme for future Ages to consider of; the words were these,

Spill not the bloud of man, to winne that hold, At which an Asse may enter at with gold; A Souldiers honour shines as bright In politique Conquest, as in bloudy fight.

Now it still remaines we should take some observations, in the true discerning of Valour in an Army, that Souldiers may not flatter themselves with a false glosse of Magnanimity;* 1.365 and in the performance of this, there are divers circumstances to bee considered;

First, whether any suddaine newes or Alarums, amazeth or feareth them.

Secondly,* 1.366 in time of danger, whether the currant of all mens opinions are level'd a like in their resolutions, to encounter and withstand those stormes of perills to their utmost abilities.

Thirdly,* 1.367 when danger hath invellop'd and surrounded them, that nothing but Herculian blowes can free them; whether then they manfully heaw out their safeties, or basely yeild, upon conditions farre baser.

Fourthly,* 1.368 whether their great brags and high ostentations in time of safety and peace, continues in the same straine of action in time of danger; for Cowards are forwardest in words, and backwardest in actions.

Fifthly, when an Enemy shall have the better of some one Wing or division of the Army,* 1.369 whereby they seeme to bee distressed; and for their particular safety, seeke to save themselves by flight, or to desire quarter, by which others may seeke to doe

the like, preferring their lives before their honours; thus disheartning the rest that would sell their lives at the dearest rate, such must bee branded for Cowards, and are fit for no use but to make a Barricadoe for the Enemy to shoot against.

Sixthly, when Victory is obtained, if there be not clemency and mercy used, as discretion shall see it meet,* 1.370 without an insulting way over poore Captives▪ for it is naturall and consonant to the disposition of a Coward, to use all rigour and severity as hee is a conquerour, that the World should take notice of him to be that which he is not.

Seventhly, an Army being onely in a supposed danger▪ and to eschew it, run themselves into an eminent destruction;* 1.371 for a Coward thinks the presentest danger greatest, and will strive to preventit, though a thousand times greater doth imediately by this occasion ensue.

Eightly,* 1.372 if there bee disputes and detractions upon the point of service who shall give the onset; for it is farre from a cowards temper to give an Assault, but valour will strive to have the honour of the onset.

Now it remaines to shew how Warlike valour may bee begotten bred and che∣risht in the brests of Souldiers.* 1.373

The first is, to bee conversant in reading such Histories as treate of Warlike acti∣ons; this will beget a speculative knowledge of all actions honourably performed by valour, and withall, it will acquaint them with the events that have happened, wher∣by dangers will bee made more familiar to them; so that by this the least sparke of valour will be kindled in a kinde of emulation, to bee possest of the same honours in performing the like victories or undergoing the like perills; as we read of famous Tamberlin, who made it his practise to read often the heroicke deeds of his Proge∣nitors, which did so inflame his virtues, that hee proved the mirrour of the World. For noble acts of Predecessors are as flaming Beacons that fame and time hath set on hills to call us to the like occasions.

Secondly, the Theorie of Warre being truely understood, the stomackes of the valiant will boyle with the conceit of the due honours and renownes that are therby to be attained, and will force a man of courage to enter into the Lists of Mars, to per∣forme in action, what before hee onely conceived incontemplation; in which large field hee shall see all proceedings and events, whereby his body and min•••• will 〈◊〉〈◊〉 habituated unto it, so that the very jawes of death cannot affright such a Souldier, who will sooner choose to be bereaved of life, then staine his honour.

Lastly for conclusion, such valiant Souldiers as take delight in the rudiments of Warre, will alwaies have the faculties of their minde busied in plotting and project∣ing all kindes of circumstances, which may tend to the beautifying of this Profession; as it is recorded in the commendations of that valiant Souldier Pyrrhus; that in what place so ever hee became, hee in his walking would take notice of the Scituation of each place hee came into, and in his fancy would contrive how hee should order his Battell there with the best advantages; observing the fittest places to hide some Am∣busheadoes in to fall upon the Enemies Flankes or Reare; and also which were his convenientest places for his retyre, or for the safe encamping his Army, what passages were fittest to bee guarded, and the like: Also in Fortified Townes hee would ob∣serve the strength of their Fortification, and which place hee could have best advan∣tage to make his assault; with the nature and quality of the ground for the most ad∣vantagious placing his Engines of Battery, with millions of plots and devices, which in his fancy hee contrived; whereby hee grew so expert, that neither time nor place could poze him: This caused Haniball to answer Scipio, that Pyrrhus was the best Souldier.

And to conclude this discourse, let us observe and follow the command that God himselfe gave to his Generall Ioshua in charge, which was That hee should bee strong and of a valiant courage,* 1.374 whereby prosperity should follow him wheresoever his Army should goe: The Lord of Hosts seeing it was a thing of such high conse∣quence, Hee reitterated his former charge in a more emphaticall speech, being a charge so speciall, that onely and above all things, they should bee strong and of a valiant courage, for without this nothing could bee effected in the Warres.

In consideration of this necessity of courage and valour, that valiant Generall

Consalus, when hee had drawne his Army before Naples; he gave his Souldiers to understand by his earnest protestations, (hoping they would imitate him) that hee had rather dye one foot forwards, then to have his life secured for long, by one foot of retreate: Such noble acts and honourable deeds of valiant Souldiers cannot be bu∣ried in oblivion; but like the Phoenix, from whose preserved ashes one or other still doth spring up like unto them.

The Ancients did so esteeme of a famous name that they deemed it immortall, which made them ever ready to sacrifice their lives to gaine honour, which was e∣steemed above the Worlds endowments: Thus according to my poore ability I have finisht this discourse, though not so exactly as the subject requires, in regard my Schollership and capacity are corrivalls in simplicity.

In the next place I intend to bring in a discourse concerning Duells, being a thing which assumes the cloake of valour, and may challenge a place in this discourse: but I have thought it most fit to make a particular draught of it by it selfe, wherein is shewed, who hath favoured this kinde of vindicating of honour by the sword; and what circumstances may bee alleadg∣ed for the supposed lawfulnesse of it, with divers admonitions for the regayning of friend∣ship; and lastly the unlawfulnesse of it, proved both by Lawes divine and humane.

A DISCOVRS VPON VNIVST VALOVR IN DVELS. SECT. IX.

CHAP. LX.

Of the opinions of divers Learned men concerning Duels, with the chiefest Circumstances that can be alledged for the lawfulnesse of it, and so confuted both by Divine and humane reason; and so concluding with divers exhortive rea∣sons for Enemies to entertaine a reconciliation.

IN regard this discourse of Duels hath so neere a cor∣respondency to the former discourse of valour, I thought it meet to intreate of it in this place; and I must confesse it is a high pitch of Magnanimitie could it be warranted by divine and humane autho∣rity; and having duly weighed the nature of Duels, and likewise observed the oppinions of divers learned, they holding it altogether unlawfull in regard it is repugnant to Gods commandements, and the Lawes of all Nations, which hate the idle expence of such precious bloud, and will not ly∣cence the spilling of it, without a lawfull calling for the preservation of King and Countrey; to these I must assent; Yet divers hot spirits have desired to prie further into this subject, think∣ing to skrew out a lawfulnesse, of the which they have falne short; I have therefore used my best endeavours to summon up the likeliest arguments, and pregnantest ex∣amples that my poore reading can afford, to set the best glosse on it for their sakes, although to little purpose; wherefore give me leave to speake my best in the behalfe of the Duellist, and afterwards I will be an Attourney of the other side; wherefore suppose there are divers probabilities that may induce to conceive a lawfulnesse in some particular cases, having a respect to the limitations, and cautions that ought to attend upon Duels; and first having a regard to the necessitie of Warre, and then du∣ly weighing the circumstances belonging unto it; we shall find a secret policie lye hidden, which will plead for it selfe, and will goe neere to prove that combats are necessary, and happily within the limits of lawfulnesse.

And although Yno Bishop of Chartres did complaine against the French Church-men, and especially in his letter to the Bishop of Orlians he assenting with divers other learned men, which had taken a mature consideration of the good effects, the which might be produced from it; and having likewise scand the ill and mischiefe

that might consequently follow, did manifest and ratifie the lawfulnesse of challen∣ging the Combat, which I must likewise suppose they did upon good grounds, they having considered the manifold abuses, and most horrid aspersions that the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of some degenerat spirits would invent, and falsely lay to the charges of those they hated, whereby both reputation and life of innocent men are indangered by false accusations, which being beyond the wit of man to screw out the truth, in regard no proofe can be produced, to leade Authoritie to discerne where the abuse lyes, but only the justifying and denying of the partyes accusing, and accused; so that the Engine of wit cannot invent a more politique and discreet way,* 1.375 then by decyding the controversie by their Weapons; for reason tells a man, that in a just cause there is no man but will be resolute to defend his honour, and put forth his best valour to offend his Antagonist, his Combat being to maintaine the truth, and having a good conscience on his side, doth adde vigour to his courage; whereas contrarily a guilty conscience will so detract from the worth and valour of the false accuser, that feare will under mine his heart, whereby he cannot performe in such a manly way, as that party which hath right on his side; But admit there were no such thing in it, yet it would be prevalent to make men cautelous in abusing their Neighbour, causing to weigh the perill they must hazard; And although some have made this objection, that all men are not of like strength and valour, so that in that kind it may seeme unjust; Yet it is to be supposed in way of answer, that an inferiour man will not offer his superiour in skill and valour, to scandalize him; and if a Superiour in skill and valour should be so base, as to abuse or lay aspersions upon his inferiour, yet the inferiour hath the aduantage to choose his weapon, which shall be fitting to his strength and skill, whereby he shall be able buth to defend himselfe, and offend his enemy; for we daily see by experience that very little weak men have had the better, as by the exam∣ple of Sir Iohn Vere, he (being a very little Gentleman) to maintaine his reputation, be∣ing abused at the Hage in Holland by a French Colonell, being a proper brave fellow, who so farre undervalued Sir Iohn, that at his comming to the place appointed for their Combat, seeing a Coutrey Bore at worke neere that place, he demanded of him if he did not see de cline manicke, meaning the little Gentleman, who presently came, and at a few incounters at single Rapier, slew the brave Caviliere. And for my owne part I have observed, that in all quarrels that were decided by Duels, hee that had done the injurie, and did justifie it by his Sword, did ever goe by the worst, if not lose his life. But some may further object, that there is provision appointed by Authority to take up, and decide quarrels, and that the party abused shall have satisfaction by compelling the abusive to aske pardon, and to shew contrition for the wrongs offered.

I must confesse this is somewhat and very colourable, yet reason and experience tells that such forced acknowledgements of satisfaction, doth not so fully cover the sore of dis-reputation, as when the party grieved compells his Adversary, either to give him satisfaction by justifying the disgrace he hath done, with his sword, or otherwise to bethinke himselfe and cry peccavi; for although the Gentleman abused hath satisfaction before Authority, which God forbid but every man should obey, yet there remaines a secret tincture of disrepute, which will sume in the stomackes of Souldiers, when they conceive Authority bindes the hands of the offendo••, and strengthens the proceedings of the offended; a Souldiers honour and reputation ought to shine so bright, that no blemish should be descride in it, for the smallest staine of basenesse or cowardise pierceth through the heart of Honour and Valour, reducing them to the secret scorne of all that knowes them, in which respect it behoves Gen∣tlemen and Souldiers to manage their actions and courses without giving offence, that they may live blamelesse and untaxt. Besides these reasons let us take a survey of the proceedings of the antient Worthies of former ages. Amongst the Saxons Duels were very frequent and upon such occasions, which indeed are not to bee tol∣lerated; But I find principally in History, that the Gaules and the Saxons ordained a Law to decide such controversies, as no certaine proofe could be produced, and that by foure wayes, as Aenius Silvius reports.

The first••was Campe fight or Combat, the accuser was with the perill, of his body, to prove the accused guilty, and by offering him his Glove or Gauntlet to Challenge

him to his tryall, which the other must accept or acknowledge himselfe culpable of the crime; if the crime deserved death, then to fight on horse or foot untill one were slaine; if imprisonment, then the vanquishing of the Adversary was sufficient, and to take him Prisoner; In this kind of Combat the accused had liberty to take another in his stead, but not the accuser.

Secondly, they had another kind of way to trye out the truth, which they used to Imbellick persons, and to feminine spirits, they tearmed it Fyre-ordeall, and was used upon accusations without manifest proofe, although not without suspition: Hee or shee was after many prayers and invocations to take in their hands a red-hot Iron, or else to confesse guiltie.

Thirdly, they were to be blindfolded, and divers hot Shares and Coulters layed, and the parties offending were led over them; if they escaped without touch, or received no harme by touching them, then they were adjudged guiltlesse; it was practised upon Emma the Mother of King Edward the Confessor, being accused for dishonesty with Alwin Bishop of Winchester, which she performed without hurt; It is likewise reported of Runigund, Wife to the Emperour Henry the second, being falsly accused of adultery, that she to prove her Innocencie, tooke seven hot Irons one after the other in her bare hands, and received no harme thereby.

Fourthly,* 1.376 in holy Writ Almighty God himselfe ordained, that such women as were suspected of Adultery should drinke of the bitter water of the Sanctuary; which if she were guilty, it should make her thighs rotte off, and her belly burst; if innocent she received no hurt.

Before we travell any further in this discourse, let us but duly weigh Gods om∣nipotencie, and his forwardnesse from time to time in protecting and assisting the innocent, which hunts after no wrong; and how ready and neere he is in power to inflict vengeance upon those that are abusive, and seeke the disgrace and detriment of their Friends and Neighbours; which power of the Almighty questionlesse did in∣flame the heart of David to answer the just Combat with Goliah, who had vilified, and dishonoured the Host of Israel.

Solomon the wisest that ever the heavens shadowed, hath delivered it for Divini∣ty in his booke of Proverbs, that an evill tongue wounds like a two-edged Sword, and if it wounds so deepe, it may indanger a mans life; therefore by the law of God and Nations, a man may make use of his weapon in his owne defence, and his bloud be upon his owne head, that dares give the occasion, and stand to justifie it; let this be but by the way.

The third tryall of hotte water was used after the same fashion that the for∣mer was.

Now the last was the tryall of cold Water, which they performed in this man∣ner, the party suspected to be guilty had a rope put about him, then being throwne into a deepe Pond, if he sunke then he was freed, but if against nature hee swome, then hee was adjudged guiltie, because the water abhorred to receive such a base person.

Such hidden secret injuries, scandals, and abuses, perpetrated against the innocent; God did ever favour the manifestation of them, pointing out the truth in a miraculous way by his owne finger: and in the bosome of the Church, where the hornes of the Altar were a refuge for base bloudy Malefactours, yet God would have the Lotte to be in use for to discover, and make manifest the truth.

Likewise David a man after Gods owne heart, could not brooke the scandalous rayling of Shimei, although he would not act it himselfe in person, and in hot bloud, he considering his owne grosse sinnes deserved no lesse, and that his invective vaporings somewhat trencht upon the truth; Yet the good King upon mature con∣sideration gave expresse command, that his hoary head should not goe in peace to the grave:

There hath beene, and still remaines a custome of challenging the Combat for title of Lands, where the truth cannot be otherwayes decided; as Corbius challenged the Combat of Orsua for the title of a Lordship, which was performed upon a solemne day of Tilts and Tournyes.

In England, Edmond Ironside fought a Combat with Can••tus the Dane for a King∣dome.

In Edward the thirds time there was a fight betweene the Earle Momfort, and the Earle of Bloys, their contending was for the Duchie of Britanie; there were thirty English fought against thirty Britaines. Likewise upon the accusation of life, the Lord Henry Bullinbrooke Duke of Harford, and Moubray Duke of Norfolke.

Also betweene Sir Iohn Ansley, and one Catterington, whom Ansley charged with Treason, and proved it upon him being victorious.

The like betweene the Navaroys and one Welch of Grinsby; this Navaroys having accused Welch upon Treason, was by him beaten, and confessed hee had malici∣ously wronged Welch; whereupon hee was drawne out and hanged. These and divers other examples doe plead hard for an Implicite lawfulnesse, see∣ing God doth by a supernaturall hand favour it by bringing the truth to light, and that the Innocent are never put to the foyle; thus former ages were opi∣nionated of the lawfulnesse of Duels, and did give free liberty to Challenge an Ad∣versary in the upholding their honours and rights; yet they would not make it a thing common, neither would they urge it upon every petty trifle, as now••adayes it is, who upon the giving the lye, will be ready to take the life of his Adversary: although indeed of it selfe, it is a very unsufferable thing, yet it is a thing the truth of it may easily be construed; for if he that gives the Lye doe speake falsly, the disho∣nour redounds to himselfe, and shall need no greater punishment; but if he to whom the Lye is given proves guilty of it, indeed it were unconscionable and dishonourable to chalenge him to doe you right, that hath told you the truth (and hee that gives the Lye, although it be upon good grounds shewes ill breeding, and no gentle ca∣riage) but this humour we have borrowed from the French, which they have held for a custome ever since Francis the French King, upon a breach of Faith, sent the Lye unto the Emperour Charles the fift, thereby to draw him to a personall Com∣bat, which afterwards grew to an humour through the whole Realme to make the Lye mortall, whereas formerly none would presume to challenge a man, unlesse it were upon some peremptory abuse done to their persons, or to their honours and re∣putations, which by it was so farre ecclipst, that it was irrecoverably staind, unlesse they skrewed out the truth by this meanes, and before they would adventure to challenge their Adversaries, they would search and seeke out the best meanes to gaine the truth, and did use the fairest meanes they could devise, to bring their Ene∣mies by faire meanes to confesse his abuse, so that the Sword was their last refuge. Many times Authority would undertake the sifting out of the injuries, and then they were very punctually to observe, and stand to such Injunctions as should bee given them in charge to observe or performe.

Many times Friends would seeke to mediate peace, and to sift out the truth; to this they would not be refractory, but did condiscend to whatsoever might stand with their reputations and honours.

Moreover, if their Enemies did desire to be reconciled, and would voluntarily aske pardon, and acknowledge their fault before such Friends, as best knew the ca∣riage of the quarrell: then the party offended would not refuse this satisfaction, un∣lesse it were such an injury as did touch his life.

Further, those that were injured, if they were constrained to challenge the field of their Adversary, in regard of their Enemies peevish refractarinesse, yet they would banish all envie, hatred and malice; not once admitting any of these to bee the subject of their strokes, and that the ground of their challenging was rather to gaine their wounded reputations, then thirsty to shed bloud.

In the next place the ancients of former ages did attribute a great deale of honour to such persons as were injured, yet were not furious and speedy to challenge his enemy, but would waite a convenient time to see if his enemy will come in, and acknowledge his abuses, for it could not be accounted a dishonour if the party offen∣ded did challenge his enemie within a yeare and a day; of all the dishonours that might be done a Gentleman the lye with a blow was held the greatest, and deser∣ved presentest rebuke, because they esteemed a blow an absolute undervaluing, and a high disgrace which had no circumstances of arguing belonging unto it, for it did argue a voluntary and envious act, and there could be no plea of mistaking in it; but in all other abuses they conceived there might be a mistake which being argued might be acknowledged and reconciled.

Lastly, they held that a noble enemy would beare himselfe so valiantly that hee would scorne to take any advantage, although his judicious forwardnesse might have put his enemy to the worst.

Now I have shewed you how former ages did account of this kind of duells,* 1.377 and how they did tollerate them as lawfull, now I can doe no lesse but like Penelopes webbe, unweave what before I had done, and shew you how in divers respects these kinde of Combats are unlawfull and not to be tollerated amongst Christians.

In the first place the Duel or single Combat is denyed to a Christian man, to do it, to grant it, and to see it, by reasons both divine and humane, as well Canonicall, as Civill.

It is prohibited by divine reason according to this argument, every act whereby God may be tempted, is prohibited to a Christian by the Commandement of God; for it is written, thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God: That God is tempted by the Duell or Combat, I prove it in this manner; To make tryall of a thing, which can∣not be reduced to an end by naturall meanes, but only by the hand of heaven: such attempting is to tempt God, as it hapneth in these cases of Combats, where it is plainly and evidently seene (that by naturall course and disposition) the strongest, active, and most powerfull person ever vanquisheth the weaker, and of lesse ability; Contrariwise that the stronger body shall be overcome by the weaker, cannot hap∣pen but miraculously.

Bringing then two such unequall persons into the field, victory is desired for him that hath the right on his side, to the end that the truth may bee made apparant; But then God is tempted,* 1.378 in seeking that hee should performe a miracle; which must needs be so, when the weaker man conquereth the stronger, being a thing as it were directly against nature. I prove it further forbidden by divine reason; after this Ar∣gument, when a Law prohibiteth a thing, it forbiddeth also the doing of it, and a man performeth an especiall inhibited thing, when he knoweth (by the divine Law) that he is not to kill a man;* 1.379 the Combat then is flatly forbidden, because thereby mur∣ther may happen.

I prove it otherwise thus; The divine law forbiddeth every action, that differeth from the fountaine of Charity, which is the scope and end of all vertues, and utterly expelleth vice; the act of Combat is farre off from Charity, leaning unto vice, because charity is nothing else, but to love God and thy Neighbour, and hee that enters the Combat to kill his Neighbour, is out of obedience to God.* 1.380

It is likewise forbidden by the Canonicall Law, because it ever-more followeth the divine Law, and in plaine reason what the one inhibiteth, the other never al∣lowes. Combat is also forbidden by the Law of men; and the proofe is, that every thing, which repugneth and contradicteth naturall equity, is likewise prohibited by the reason of Man; because reason is grounded upon naturall equity: the reason of equity amongst men, willeth that he which committeth a crime, should bee punish∣ed, and the innocent cleered: not withstanding by Combat it falleth out many times quite contrary.

It is further proved by this Argument; Naturall equity whereon (as wee have already said) all reason in men is grounded,* 1.381 is intirely for the conservation and in∣crease of them. The act then which turneth unto the diminution and destruction of men, it is quite forbidden: so ought Combat to be, because thereby men kill one ano∣ther, and men are of greatest price in the world.

Moreover, every act which repugneth the Precepts of naturall equity is forbid∣den by mans reason, because it is grounded thereupon: one of the Precepts is, that no man shall desire profit or honour,* 1.382 by the prejudice of another. The second is, that no man shall wish that to another, which hee would not have done to himselfe. The act of Combat contradicteth them both, because he which commeth so prepa∣red into the field, coveteth his owne glory, by the shame and harme of him against whom he fighteth, which is his Neighbour, and wisheth that to him which hee would not have executed on himselfe, for he would vanquish and kill him.

It is also forbidden by civile reason, and this is the rule; Civile right prohibiteth every act whereby Iustice may be denyed to men, or injury done them; Now in the case of Combat, oftentimes it falls out quite contrary for the innocent man dyeth, and the guilty offender remaineth alive, so that by this meanes Iustice cannot take her due place.

Last of all, the honour of God, and the honour of men are layd into the Ballance, or stand in competition;* 1.383 if Gods honour be slighted to set up the wounded reputa∣tion of a man, it maketh the sinne most damnably presumptuous, and not to be tolle∣rated amongst civill men. Now if you please, we will take a briefe survey of what King James hath delivered in his publication against Combates, and Combartants; where he sayth, Pag. 2.* 1.384 that the Law of Nature, never warranted the presumption of a Subject, to challenge any person to the Combate for his life, in cold ••loud, and upon advisement, nor any other act, then a necessary defence upon a violent assault, because a life might otherwise be lost before a complaint could bee made, the wea∣pons working their outragious effects and ends in an instant, and without hope of redresse. And yet the Civill Lawes, which speake with the voyce of Nature among men, doe not admit so much as this defence of life by the sword, but upon necessity, and as they speake themselves, Ratione inculpatae tutelae, which is in such distresse, as destruction cannot be declined, nor avoyded otherwise: For if it fall out that the party set upon,* 1.385 be able to secure himselfe without sword, eyther by stepping aside, or by craving ayde at the same leisure, that a Gentleman or any other wronged in his reputation, may take his remedy without rage or violence, before a lawfull Iudge. The Duellers of these dayes must want this thinne cover for an excuse of their auda∣citie.

For nothing can bee more certaine (sayth he) then that Gentlemen doe first of∣fend against the Law of Nations,* 1.386 which is indeed the Law of Nature among men that are indued with Reason, and created according to Gods owne Image.

They spare not in like manner to transgresse the written Lawes of God himselfe, which providently referres all kinde of complaints, actions, and suits that concernes the bodyes,* 1.387 and fortunes of men; all kinde of strife betweene Title and Title, Plea and Plea, bloud and bloud; not to the humorous construction of the parties humour that is interessed (and therefore partiality corrupts) but rather to the strength of testimony, to the justice of Lawes, and to the conscience of an upright Iudge; who bending neither to partiality nor prejudice, but looking upon the matter with uprightnesse of conscience and knowledge, is more likely then the persons whom the case so neerely and dearely concernes, to resolve according to the straight levell.

Wee make no question but that if honour had beene reputed such an Individuum vagum, or such a wilde transcendent in former ages, as neither Civill Courts were able to containe (which notwithstanding judge of all matters concerning liberty and life,* 1.388 which are reckoned with reputation, Inter res inaestimabiles) nor the Court of Honour to confine (which was errected to no other end but to preserve mens repu∣tations, and prevent the effusion of bloud; which the other Lawes of the Land did omit as things not appertaining to their ellement) some other course would have bin found before our dayes, that had beene more indifferent to have decided betweene the sense of honour, and the severity of Law: But wee see the Lawes of the King∣dome proceed capitally against all those that are found to kill their Enemies upon pri∣vate quarrells in the field after a fayre manner (according to the phrase) that is without treachery or fraud; and that there is no protection for such offenders ei∣ther by the Court of Chivalrie, or those strict Lawes qualified or repealed by Parlia∣ment; although there have beene many members of the sayd house, which have beene Allied neere in bloud to those Gentlemen that have beene guilty of these crimes.

Thus you see it evident,* 1.389 how farre all Challenges in cold bloud swerve from all prescription and formes of justice that ever were; We may further adde, that against the State of a King (whose Office is to take a precise accompt of all wrongs) and the Iustice of a Kingdome, that make distribution without defect, they transgresse wilfully; for what can be more repugnant both to duty and humanity, than to snatch the sword of Iustice out of our hands, which these Duelists draw and ex∣ercise in their owne wils, as if it lay in their owne election to obey or not obey, as if they might keepe a Posterne Gate ever open, without Watch or Ward, to which it should be lawfull for young Gentlemen, without consulting eyther Prince or Iudge to run headlong to their owne ruine, or as if it could stand with the tender care, which we professe of concerning the Subjects in security, the State in strength, the

Government in peace, to open the great vaine, by which the Common-wealth might bleed, not as Fevers pestilent, ad animi diliquium, but rather as in the heart of Se∣neca, when hopes are desperate, ad vit•• exitum; For this must be the issue of an un∣lawfull act, which excludes all manner of satisfaction for wrongs, besides that of the sword, which observes no measure.

These Challengers,* 1.390 doe likewise strongly crosse the line of their owne pretended levell, and if malice did not stand too much in the light of reason, they would easily confesse. For they pretending above all things to regard honour for a flourish, yet to satisfie their owne inordinate desires, they flye the certaine judgement of the Court of Honour, which is purposely erected to scourge such delinquents, as shall dare to transgresse, causing them to give sufficient satisfaction, for the regaining of the Honour lost.

The wrongs which are grounded of quarrels,* 1.391 are eyther verball; that is, when one Gentleman accuseth another of some dishonest fact,* 1.392 or gives the lye: Or Reall, by which is meant blowes, stripes, or hurts in all degrees, though they differ in pro∣portion; and besides, all scornefull lookes, acts, or figures, that implie contempt; all Libels published in any sort to the disgrace of any Gentleman, or person, whom that Gentleman is bound in credit to defend as himselfe; for all these (sayes his Ma∣jestie) trench as deepely into reputation, as the stabbe it selfe doth, into a man that esteemes honour; wherefore whereinsoever reputation is agrieved though it bee but in the weight of one graine, it ought to be repaired and as much restored as hath beene diminished; by which the seeds of Quarrels shall be bruised in the bud, before they come to beare the bitter fruites that are ever gathered in stormes.

Wherefore, he hath commanded the Lord High-Marshall, and the Lords Lieu∣tenants and their Deputies in their severall precincts,* 1.393 that so soone as they shall have notice of any abuses either by blowes, or speeches, whereby a quarrell may be groun∣ded, * 1.394 that they commit the party thus offending either to his owne house or chamber, onely in respect of disobedience to his royall prohibition: Leaving him to the Earle Marshals discretion in what kinde hee shall giue the party agreeved satisfaction, accor∣ding to the rules and formes, which vpon like occasions; aswell within our King∣dome, as in forraine States are vsuall, before hee be set at full liberty: For it is true, that this small instrument, the tongue in the body of man, being kept in tune, by the wrest of awe, prevents many fearefull accidents that are apt to spring vp out of neglect of discipline.

If from a foule word, vpon which a quarrell is begun the answere leape at the first bound to the lye▪ or a blow be given from which a Challenge is produc'd, or if Choller breakes apruptly into a Challenge at first; (as many times it happens, because the pro∣perty of distempers is to confound all dealings, & to put custome out of course, it ought to be punished both for it selfe, and in it selfe ab origine;) the Saxons layd a fine of sixe shillings, as appeares by antiquity, vpon every one that uncivily misgreeted his Coun∣try men. In Spaine Vn hombre dislingado, a man that vseth ill language, out of his liberty or loosenesse, according to his rancke, is either whipped in the open streetes or sent to the Galleys, and especially for this verball injury the Lye, which workes such conceit of horrour unto gentlemen well borne,* 1.395 that they had rather indure the racke, then the reproch; this his Majesty was pleased to ranke with the highest verball wrongs and to be punished by the Earle Marshall accordingly.

Wherefore his Majesty leaues the Earle Marshall and other Lords authorised by Commission, to use their best discreete indeavours, in devising meanes to satisfie the party that is wounded by the giving of the Lye; wherefore his Majesty manifested his pleasure, that whosoever should stand convicted thereof in the presence of the Earle Marshall;* 1.396 or of the Lord Lieutenants, or their Deputies; by proofe sufficient, should bee presently committed to prison; and that hee be not suffered to depart out of durance, before he shall acknowledge both an errour in his Iudgement▪ and a breach in duty, in vpbrayding anyman with that uncivill terme, which his tender caution hath very sharply prohibited; hee shall also aske forgivenesse of his fault in presence of the Lords, and renounce that interest which men claime in these dayes, in righting themselves by the fury of the sword, when Iustice, eyther Marshall, or Civile, or both, provides with so great tendernesse for their indemnitie.

Touching the first branch of actuall offences by blowes with the hand, stripes with a rod,* 1.397 bruises with a Cudgell, stabbes with a Dagger, or hurts with a Rap••er, his purpose was out of the sense of honour, to extend his punishment, as farre above those ordinary degrees which are now in use, as the facts themselues exceed all humanity; wherefore he leaves the proportions and degrees of satisfaction, for such inhumane wrongs; to the caution and temper of the Earle Marshall, or the Lords Lieutenants or their Deputies:* 1.398 For wee resolue (saith his Majesty) in this offence by blowes, as in the other comming vpon words, to punish the breach of order before, or in a higher straine then wrongs of reputation; wherefore all offenders in this kinde that shalbe convicted orderly before the Lords, eyther by the strength of witnesses or by their owne confessions; of striking hastily for any other cause, then their owne defence vpon assault, shall instantly be committed to prison; to the end, that during this time of breathing and respiring, they may learne, that Princes remit not actions, of such high presumption and contempte,* 1.399 without due punishment; So that if any man shall so transgresse by quarrelling, if he were not in commissiō of the peace before the fact committed, it was his Majesties pleasure he should be peremptorily disabled from being put in, for the space of seaven yeares next ensuing, and if hee were of the peace, upon notice given to the Lord Chancellor, from the Lord high Marshall or the Lords Lieutenants, he is to be removed and put out instantly; beside such parties offen∣ding shall not be quite free before they have acknowledged their offence at the Coun∣cell Table, for breaking the Kings ordinance; he shall promise before the said Lords sollemnly never to offend vpon like occasion in the like contempt; hee shall bee bound to the good behaviour,* 1.400 during the space of the next sixe Moneths ensuing; and if they bee of his Majesties household, they are to absent the Court; besides his Majesties plea∣sure is, that the person which is eyther hurt or stricken shall (besides these satisfacti∣ons given him) take the benefit of his action of battery at common Law, with a mea∣ning that such censures be reputed rather Cumulative, then privatiue, of any lawfull helpe that ••ustice yeelds.

Further it is his Majesties pleasure;* 1.401 that the very least abuses should not passe with out due correction; not so much as the trippe of a Foote, the thrust of an Elbow, the making with the Mouth, or the hand an uncivill signe; and although these doe nei∣ther bruise the bone nor mayme the parts; Yet since the malice, the disgrace, and scorne in these things doe so farre exceed the fact it selfe (expressing the base and dis∣gracefull reckoning,* 1.402 which they that offer these contempts make of the person upon which they braue them) is to bee taxed and corrected by the Lords, upon like termes, and with like severity.

The party that killes,* 1.403 if he escape with life out of the Field, shall be brought by a course of ordinary proceeding, without dispensation, or connivancie to the common Barte for tryall of the fact: And (for a greater discouragement of all men that preferre their passions to civill duties) His royall Majesty doth potest and promise by the word of a King, that he would never by the strength of his royall prerogatiue, grant to any such offender; any pardon for his life, or any lease for life nor any other kind of grace or favour that might put such audacious adventerours into the least hope of life.

But if it happen both parties after meeting,* 1.404 vpon Challenge in cold blood returne alive out of the Field, (though generally wee may observe, that neyther the principals themselves that went of purpose to make good their agreements, nor the Seconds, that in a sort assisted, are punished by an ordinary course, which slacknesse rather multiplyes offenders, then cuts off offenders) yet it was his royall purpose without regard of issues or events,* 1.405 to punish very sharply and severely the presumption it selfe, in seeking eyther by the sending or accepting of a Challenge, to revenge that out of passion which Iustice would examine and correct, with greater indifferency.

Whosoever therefore shall presume; (as it were in despite of Lawes and Magi∣strates (either to send any Challenge, or to declare a voluntary acceptance, of the Chal∣lenge that is sent,* 1.406 whereby Subjects may be drawne to tryall by the Sword for their liues in the Field, his royall pleasure was that hee or they, as number hit, bee first com∣mitted to some prison used in the County for Malifactours that they may learne at good leysure to repent with sorrow what was committed with temerity. The pu∣nishments

prescribed against reproachfull quarrellours,* 1.407 and strikers, with provisio∣nall regard and tender care, shall be added in like manner Cumulative, to the censure of these Chalengers in cold bloud, as the wreckfull executions of all passions, that those preparatory meanes, and outrages have kindled; They shall moreover for the space of seven yeares be suspended from the Court,* 1.408 without hope of forgivenesse, that it may be found more easie for the Sea to brooke a dead carka••••e, then the Court a quareller.

Wherefore beside the penalties expressed in that which goes before, not with the quill of an Ostrich which may bow; but as the Prophet speakes, Vngue Adamanti••••, which cannot breake; Hee doth further bind his purpose, Verbo Regio; that during the seven yeares suspension formerly decreed, both from the Royall presence and his Court; Hee would never use nor employ any Gentleman, &c. in Peace or Warre, at home or abroad,* 1.409 directly or indirectly in his Royall affaires: Hee vowed never to bestow on them the least fruit, or effect of his grace or favour, in Land, Lease, Pensi∣on, or by Letters commendatory to their advantage in the least degree, nor repute them other then as Seare fruitlesse branches, cut off from the body of the Vine, be∣ing made thereby uncapable both of sustinance and support, by which the members of all bodyes as well Naturall as Oeconomicall and Politicke both subsist and flourish.

His Royall Majesty did further commend unto the Lords;* 1.410 the binding of all men to the good behaviour, that after fighting upon Challenge, happen to returne alive out of the field for six moneths at the least: for as the plagues that hang upon this censure are both many, and those very heavy; so doth the quality of the contempt deserve them all; moving busie fellowes that are giddy, rash, and inconsiderate; to be well advised before they leape.* 1.411 Those that thinke themselves secure by agreeing to fight in Forraine parts, where the Kings Writte runnes not, neither can the Lawes of the Kingdome take hold of any Subject in that case, though the Romans, and in the Reigne of the first potent Emperours, would haue thought it strange, that the life of any Subject, taken by another Subject wrongfully, should not be lawfully ac∣counted for. This reason happily did move the States of Brabant, before the duti∣full admittance of Duke Iohn to be their Lord in the right of his wife,* 1.412 to bind him by oath never to spare the life of any Subject in that State, that should kill another in the field, though the act were done in a Forraine Government; the same reason may be, why the Lord Segrave (as appeares upon Record) attempting only to passe over into France from Dover, for to performe a private quarrell, was condemned Iudicio Parium, by the judgement of his Peeres, as if he had preferred by this act, the Iustice of Forraine Countries before his owne.

But for a redresse of this,* 1.413 his Majestie having conferred with the learned Iudges upon this point, that though there can be no proceeding by the Common Law against one Subject that hath slaine another, by agreement upon Challenge to fight in For∣raine parts: Yet by appeale, so often as it shall please his Majestie to appoint a Con∣stable and Marshall of England (for the present only) both to heare and ad judge the cause; the party thus offending may be condemned in that Court to death (as by an Act of Parliament, made in the first yeare of King Henry the Fourth is evident) and to this his Royall Majestie did protest by the word of a Religious just King, to put this in execution; wherefore there should be no hope of former impunity, but that such offenders thus condemned, should without remitting or forgivenesse bee executed.

As for Seconds which these Combatants make choyce of, (to make the best of them) they are only stout assistants to bad ends, and their supporters being restrained upon paine of so deepe penalty, they cannot but shrinke Sublato principali, omnia cadant accessario. Betweene an Actor and an Abettor the difference cannot bee great, where∣fore his Majestie did find by the moderne use of France, of the Archdukes Domini∣ons, and many States in Italy, that the carriers of Chalenges, and they that bring backe answers, are both condemned and punished in a very high degree, upon a vio∣lent presumption, that they either blow the cole, or endeavour not to quench the fire; wherefore his Royall Majestie layes the same proportion of punishment upon the Seconds, the Carriers, and Intercommuners that is due to the principalls them∣selves.

His Majesty chargeth all persons of whatsoever ranke or quality,* 1.414 which are pre∣sent in the place where a quarrell first begins, that upon paine of his Majesti•••• high displeasure, they first apply their best perswasions and endevours, to the taking of the ground of the contention away, and the reconcilement of the partyes mindes if it be possible, if not, to call in with all expedition an Officer of the peace, that may bring the matter before the Lords in Commission before it be too farre exasperated and ••n∣venomed.

Further,* 1.415 his Royall Majesties pleasure was, that whosoever published a Challenge, or any one that did but relate any part of the quarrellous businesse should be brought Ore tenus, or otherwise as the cause requireth into the Starre-Chamber, and there bee punished at the discretion and censure of the Court for their high contempt against his Majestie, and to be banisht the Court, &c. And which is heaviest of all, his Roy∣all Majestie did protest for his owne part, he should never account of them but as Cowards; for it is ever held the part of a man to shew his courage, when hee is by Authority put to it in action: but hee that seekes his reputation by plurality of voy∣ces amongst simple people, it is to be accounted to proceed from the knowledge and jealousie of his owne weake imbellicke parts, as if a man could not winn•• honour, but per ••••••dicata suffragia, in Ordinaries and Taverns.

And to conclude his Majesties publication;* 1.416 he wills every man that should find himselfe grieved with any whisperings or rumours spread abroad, or any other way abused, to resort to the Earle Marshall, who shall right him in his reputation, if hee finds hee be wronged. Thus you see what a soveraigne salve it hath pleased his Ma∣jestie to prepare for the saving and repayring of Gentlemens reputations; so that now you must confesse with me, that there is no dore left open for the Sword to passe out at, unlesse men would runne willingly to destruction, by undergoing the penalty of the Law here, and the eternall wrath of the great God of heaven, who hath reserved revenge to himself, and none but himselfe shall repay it; and let us blesse God that his Royall Majestie hath Authorized an Earle Marshall of so Noble bloud, and so conscious and respective, in desciding such affaires; hee according to his owne worth hath a tender care to render the due rights of honour and reputati∣on to those that shall sue to his Noblenesse, giving them a free admittance to crave his honours warrant for the conventing any such delinquent before him, and upon conviction, imposing due punishment upon such refractary fellowes, with his No∣ble Injunction to the party offending, to restore the blemisht reputation of the complaynant, before he depart his presence, so that never any that came before his Lordship had ever cause to complaine of partiallitie, or remissenesse in his Honoured course of Iudicature.

And for mine owne advise to gentlemen, having three severall times tasted of this bitter fruit which hath growne by the Sword in the field, not so well then under∣standing my selfe, as riper yeares and more mature considerations hath since ingra∣ven in me, I doe rather wish a fayre reconciliation then a foule fray, for the recon∣ciling of an enemy is more safe then to conquer him; my reason is because victory onely deprives him of his power, but reconciliation, of his will, and there is lesse danger in a will that will not hurt, than in a power that cannot, and againe power is not so apt to tempt the will, as the will is studious to finde out meanes to provoke power; if the enemy be base it is a dishonour to meddle with him, if hee be worthy let his worth perswade thee to attonement, for hee that can be a worthy enemy, if once reconciled may be thy worthy friend, for if in a just cause he dares fight against thee, in the like cause as valiantly fight for thee.

It is pollicy to bee reconciled to a base enemy, bee it but to charme his slandrous tongue, and use him as a friend in outward fairenesse, but beware him as an enemy, apt to reassume his base quarrells, for a base foe cannot but prove a false friend.

And further let Gentlemen know that take a delight to busie themselves in such litigious affaires, Sicut not Martyrom pana, sic non fortem pugua, sed causa; as it is not the punishment that makes the Martyr, so it is not fighting that declares a valiant man, but the fighting in a good cause, when his King and Countrey injoynes: And he that makes use of this dangerous Salve to skinne up his Honour, let him not use it as a delight, but as a necessitie to constrayne him; for the lawfulnesse is not to be questi∣oned

when a man is prest with injuries or violent abuses▪ hee may by the law of na∣ture and of all Christian Kings fight in his defene•• to preserve his person and ho∣nour.

I have taken the greater paines in this discourse, in regard Gentlemen and Souldiers might be fully satisfied of the unlawfulnesse of Duells, which is proved by undeni∣able arguments: likewise to informe them if ••ase injuries be offered them how they may gaine lawfull satisfaction by the ayde of Authority provided for that purpose. In the next place I shall proceede to discourse of the particular duties of all Officers, beginning at the mea∣nest, and so proceede untill I shall come to the office of the Generall of an Army.

THE OFFICE AND DVTY OF EVERY PARTICVLAR OF∣FICER IN AN ARMY. SECT. X.

CHAP. LXI.

The Duty and Office of a Drumme to a private Company, and of the Drum-Major of the Regiment.

BEfore we can further proceede in our intended discourse I hould it fit to entreate of the duties and offices of all the officers belonging to an Army, and that for two re∣spects; first that all young Officers that never follow∣ed the Warres, might at the first view know their pla∣ces, and the duties belonging to them; Secondly, that all Souldiers might likewise observe and take notice of eve∣ry particular Officers duty hee is to performe, and the Command he is to beare, that they may the better learne to obey them, and obs••rve such documents as their Offi∣cers shall give them in charge; wherefore first I intend to begin with the meanest Officer of a private Company, and then proceed to discourse of every particular Of∣ficer of a Regiment; and likewise of the chiefe Officers of the Field, with their dependan••es.

A Drumm•• is one of the 〈…〉〈…〉 Officers to a Company and divers 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of waight and moment hee is to be imployed in; for many times they are sent to Parlie with the Enemie, and to redeeme Prisoners from the Enemy; therefore hee ought to be a man of personage, faithfull, secret, and trusty; He ought to speake se∣verall Languages, especially the Drumme of a Colonels Company ought to bee thus qualified, he hath the command of all the Drummes of the Regiment, and upon a March hee appoints every Drumme his place, and time to beate, using a due propor∣tion to every one for their times of reliefe; In a Campe or Leaguer, no Drumme must offer to beate for the releeving of the Watch before the Drumme-Major first begins; Most usually he is sent upon all employments too, and from the Enemy; hee ought to have a small Drumme for lightnesse to carry with him; hee is also to have a paper wherein is writ the Contents of his Message, which is to be placed upon his Hatte; When hee approaches neere the Enemies Towne, hee is to make a stand a Musquet-shot from the Ports, and to beate a Parley, whereby they may know his intent; hee ought to be of a singular good cariage, and discreet, to observe and take notice of all passages, that may give any intelligence to his Officers of the state of the Enemie; Hee must be very wary that nothing be screwd from him, neither by

••ayre nor foule meanes; wherefore he must be wary of the Enemies friendship, in bestowing courtesies upon him especially in giving him drinke, least in his cupps he reveale any secrets: When a drumme is sent out of the Enemies Campe, hee must not bee suffered to approach neere the Guards nor Ports untill an Officer ••ee sent unto him (who must bee attended with a guard of Musquetires) and having blind-foulded him; he is to be conducted into the Campe to the Generalls Pavillion where a guard must passe on him least he should discover the weakenesse of the Campe. A drumme ought daily in the day time in time of peace, to frequent the Guards and beate to the Souldiers, that they may distinguish, and know one kind of beate from th' other (viz) a Call, a March, a Troope, a Charge, an Allarm, a Retreit, &c. He ought to passe precisely upon the houres appointed for the releeving of the watch, to beate their drummes for the summoning of the Souldiers together, and to doe such other duties as shall bee required: hee must be obedient to his Captaine, and the rest of the Officers, whenso∣ever they command him to goe, or stand, or to beate any point of warre, every pri∣vate Company ought to have two Drummes at the least.

CHAP. LXII.

The Office of a Corporall and his Lansprezado, and how they are to demeane themselves, both upon their Guard, and in the Companie.

A Corporall, being an Officer a degree above a private Soul∣dier, ought to be a man of stayed yeeres, of no lesse Wise∣dome, Valour, and Experience, then a Serjant of a private Company should bee; in regard many times, he is to officiat for him, his duty; his carriage and behaviour should bee, such that all his Squadron might take good example there∣by, hee should be free from all Vices, especially the be••o••∣ting Vice of drunkennesse, by which infection a whole guard will soone be taynted; he ought not to suffer any drunkennesse or misbehaviour upon his guard; for by this abhominable vice of drunkennesse, an Enemy hath had the advantage to cut off whole guards, and thereby have surprised Townes and Forts, as by divers examples may be seene; as that of Breda, when the Turffe-boate lay before the Towne with divers Souldiers immured in it, the Enemy had no way to gaine the wall but by the Skipper, who had recourse to the next guard and made them drunke: So that their duties were neglected; some being a drinking and most a sleepe, the Enemy stole upon them at unawarres and slue them, and having gayned the watchword from the Corporall, they soone surprised the rest of the guards, and by a signe given to the Troopes that lay in ambush without, they entred the Forts and surprised the Garrison before there was any allarme given.

Wherefore he ought to passe precisely upon his watch and guards; and to be very vigilant and carefull in setting out his Senturies and duly releeving them, dividing the time of their standing, by the number of Souldiers in his guard, so that they may bring evenly the seasons of their watch about, one Souldier not standing longer then ano∣ther; which he may do by the burning of a match, so many thumbes breadths allowed to each; hee is duly to frequent and visite the Senturies fearing least they should miscarry or be negligent, or sleeping: it is at his choyse to command any one of his guard to stand at Sentury, first or last.

Hee may make choyse of one of the sufficientest Souldiers of his guard to bee his Lansprezado, who shall negotiate his duty and office upon all occasions; and all the Souldiers upon the guard are to obey him; the Corporall is bound once a day to teach his Squadron their postures, in the presence of his superiour Officers; he is to observe the same order and dutifull obedience that the rest should doe; his Command is no further than upon the Guard, where he beares his Captaines authoritie; upon all Alarmes, he is to draw out his souldiers, and to order them so, that the best and safest

resistance may speedily be made, untill more ayde shall come to succour them; He is to have continuall fire upon his Guard, to refresh his souldiers in Winter, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to light their matches thereby; He is to be allowed certaine Candle, that every man may see to arme themselves; he is to examine every Souldiers Bandiliers, what powder is in them, and what Match and Bullets they have; and in time or Warre, every 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is to be loaded with powder and Bullet, and every man his match continually light•• Af∣ter the Watch is set, and he hath the Watch-word from the Serjeant; neither himselfe, nor any souldier shall depart the Guard, upon paine of death, untill the Watch be relee∣ved by sound of Drumme; their duty is to keepe their Guard from Sunne-setting 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Evening following, and then they are to be releeved by their Serjeant with another Squadron, at which time they are to stand ready before their Guard in compleat Armes, untill that Squadron which releeved them, have set out his Sentinels.

Every Sentinell that is plac'd before the Corps du Guard, is to stay and cha••ge his weapon against any man that shall come upon the Wall, not suffering him to passe, untill he calles out his Corporall to take the Word of him, which Word is very se∣cretly to be given and taken; he is to give the Word to the Governour, Major, or Captaine of the Watch, but to none else; The Corporall is to command two or three Souldiers to guard him; he is to have his sword ready drawne, and to place the point towards the breast of him that gives the Word, for feare of treachery, and if hee faulters in the Word, and cannot deliver it right, he is to take him into his Guard, and there keepe him untill the morning, and then send him with a guard before the Governour; also in times and places of danger, he is to set out double Senturies, a Pike and a Musquet, so that if the Enemy approacheth, he may discharge his Mus∣quet, to put the Guards in a readinesse to make their resistance; The Corporall is to be a Musquetier, and is to have the chiefest place in his Squadron, according to his eldership.

CHAP. LXIII.

The Office of a Serjeant to a private Companie, and his duty both in Garrison and in the Field, declared.

A Serjant of a private Company ought to be a man of good expe∣rience; and sufficiently instructed in all Marshall exercises, and if it were possible he should not be inferour in knowledge and skill to his superiour Officers; hee ought to have a quicke spirit, and active body, able both suddainly to conceive, and painfully to exe∣cute, his superiour Officers, orders, and commands, it importeth much that hee bee a skilfull valiant Souldier; in regard hee is put upon weighty and dangerous services; hee ought to be very ready and skillfull, in ordering and rancking the Company, and in knowledge of exercising the same, hee ought to take all occasions in time of peace, to call forth such squadrons as have the guard, and duly to exercise them there, also to shew every particular Souldier their severall postures, and so fit them in readinesse for the chiefe Officers to exercise in grosse; hee ought to be learned both in writing and in Arethmaticke, he is to have al∣wayes a Squadran-rowle about him, wherein hee should distinguish every man by the armes he beares; his duty is when the drumme beates for the watch setting, to re∣pare with his Holberd to his Colours, where he ought to call over particularly every Souldier of that Squadron, and view the fixenesse of their armes, and what match, Bullets, and powder every man hath, he is to rancke the Squadron, and if no superiour Officer bee there, he is to troope away with them to the guard with his Holbert ad∣van'd.

Hee is to attend the comming of the Major of a Garrison, or the Serjant Major of his regiment, * 1.417 (if they bee intrencht in the field) for the watchword; and to receive such orders from him, as hee hath received from the Serjant Major generall of the Army; or from the Governour of a Garrison, he is to give the word to his Captaine first if he bee in place, and then to each superiour Officer, and lastly to the Corporall; The eldest Serjant in a March leadeth up the division of Musqueti••es in the reare, 〈…〉〈…〉

of training they are to looke that every man keepes his Rankes and files duly, helpe order the company all the time of exercise; in time of Warre he is imployed upon par∣ties which are sent out to discover, or to fetch in Bootie and Farrage; likewise many times to the guarding of passages; also in laying out of Perdues and visiting them: Also in ordering of Troopes that are drawne out to charge some part of the Enemy, where he is to bring up the Musquetiers to his superiour Officer in good order to skirmish, and to give fire upon the Enemy, and so orderly to leade them off againe, seeing them ranke themselves fairely, and causing them to make ready their peeces to come up to give fire againe; also in retreite, he ought to assist the Souldiers discreet∣ly in keeping their orders, lest confusion betides them; Also in time of fight to see the Souldiers Bandaliers filled ready that no stay bee made, and to see the Powder transported after them securely; he is also (when his Captaine, is Captaine of the Watch,) to call out the Gentlemen of the Round to doe their duties, and to give them the Word, he ought to assigne every Souldier his due and proper place to March in, that no contention may arise; hee is to place the chiefe Gentlemen in the Front on the right hand file; the next in degree is to leade the left-hand file, so placing e∣very man according to his degree; hee ought to see that every Corporall bee a Mus∣quetiere; hee is to fetch the powder, shot, and match from the Magezine, and distri∣bute it to each Corporall, and so to each Souldier of their Squadron: Hee is at his Captaines command to carry all delinquents to Prison, and see Irons put upon them; If scarsity of Victuals should be in the Campe, he is to procure it from the Ammu∣nutioner of the Army, lest the Company fall in want, which being procured, hee is to distribute it to the Corporalls, and they to their Squadrons; Hee is also to instruct the Drummes the true tone of beating, viz. a Call, a March, a Troope, a Charge, an Allarme, a Retreite, &c. Hee ought to be resolute and forward in times of skirmish∣ing, shewing worthy examples to the Souldiers, that they might imitate him; Hee ought by his serviceablenesse, and care to gaine the love of the whole Company, it must be farre from him to be addicted to the hellish vice of drinking, drabbing, or dicing, using his best indeavours to shame such as should in that kind transgresse; Also he is not to permit any Souldier that is in drinke to performe any duty of charge for that time, for feare of sleeping or quarrelling, whereby much inconveniences may ensue, but rather seeke to punish him severely, that all may take example by him to beware of the like oversight; Hee is every night at Drum-beating to draw Billets for his Guard, and accordingly to leade his Squadron to it; and thus behaving himselfe wisely and valiantly, * 1.418 hee shall gaine honour and reputation, which will bee steps to advance him to higher fortunes: And to define the office of Serjant truly, hee is to be the eye, eare, mouth, hand, and feet of his superiour Officers; I could wish our Serjants of Bands here in England were thus qualified for their Captaines sakes; but I feare the blind will leade the blind, and so fall both into the ditch; it were hap∣py if they would indeavour to learne to understand their office, against his Majesty should have occasion to use them.

CHAP. LXIIII.

The office of an Ensigne to a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field declared.

AN Ensigne being the foundation of the Company, ought to bee indued with Valour and Wisedome, and to equall his superiour Officers in skill if it were possible; The honour and reputation both of Captaine and Souldiers, depends upon the welfare of the Colours, and contrarily there can be no greater dishonour then to lose them; * 1.419 I have read in History of Ensignes that rather then they would undergoe the dishonour of losing their Colours, being so dangerously charged by the Enemy, that ei∣ther they must yeeld them up, or be slaine, have chosen rather to wrappe them about their bodyes, and have leapt into the mercilesse waters, where they have perisht

with their Colours most honourably to their immortall ••ames: after any Company is 〈◊〉〈◊〉, if the Ensigne hath behaved himselfe honourably, the Captaine ought to bestow the Colours on him as a favour; in the absence of his superiour Officers, hee is punctually to supply their places, and to passe upon those duties which they should, whether it be to be Captaine of the Watch, or to bee commanded our with some Troopes for the guarding of some passage to prevent the Enemies approches; Hee is to exercise his Company in all their postures; he ought to bee gallantly apparelled▪ with a faire Sword and Brigandine; if hee be commanded to passe upon any Ser∣vice with part of the Company, he is not to carry his Colours; also, if the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Company are to guard some dangerous Out-workes, as a halfe Moone, or a Redou••, the Company is to troope thither, and he is to leave his Colours in the quarters with a sufficient guard over them, and hee is to take for his weapon a good Pike.

Also, every Souldiers honour is highly ingaged to defend and preserve their En∣signe, and if occasion of necessity should happen, they must not spare to runne up∣on the Pikes to releeve him, as divers valiant Souldiers formerly have done: Histo∣ries have eternized to their immortall fame the honourable exploits of Captaine Mo∣rerula and his two Brothers, one of them being his Ensigne at the siege of the Citie of Africa in Barbary, in Charles the fifts time, when Iohn de Vega Vice-Roy of Si∣cilia scaled the Walls of it; this Ensigne being sore wounded and overthrowne his Brother being Serjeant seconded him, and recovered the Colours, who advancing forwards like a valiant Souldier was slaine; the Captaine Brother to them both, tooke up the Colours, and performed the Ensignes office, who in the scaling of the Wall, was sore hurt and died thereof; thus three valiant brethren died honourably in de∣fending their Colours: if an Ensigne should lose all his Colours from the staffe and hose, it is no dishonour; When an Army is drawne into Batalia, the Ensigne ought to stand out before the front of it some five paces, and if the Generall, or some other chiefe Officer of the Field passe by, he is gently to vaile his Colours holding the butte end of his staffe at his girdlested: Also a maxime that no Souldier moves Hat or Helmet to the greatest Commander that is, but only to bow his body to him; Likewise in time of Battell the Ensigne is to withdraw himselfe for his safety into the middle-most Ranke of the Pikes. Likewise in a March the Ensigne is to march before the first division of Pikes with his flying Colours.

If a King or great Prince passeth by, the Ensigne is to vaile his Colours close to the ground with his knee bending, in token of Alegiance and submission; every Ensigne of private Companies ought to observe how the Ensigne of the Right hand of the Battell orders his Colours, after the same manner hee is to order his; every Souldier upon an Allarme is speedily to repaire to his Colours; likewise not to for∣sake them untill they be lodged; when any Company shall march either into Camp••▪ Guard, Fortresse, or Castle, no Souldier ought to disarme himselfe, untill they see first the Colours placed, and the Ensigne disarmed; Likewise, no sooner shall a Soul∣dier see the Ensigne take up his Colours, but they should arme and ranke themselves immediately.

No Ensigne ought to disarme himselfe upon any Guard, Campe, or Field, untill hee sees that with safety hee may doe it; Likewise an Ensigne should shew himselfe forwardest with his Colours in assaulting a Fort, or entring a Breach to incourage the Souldiers manfully to fall on to defend, and make way for them; he ought to be∣have himselfe so, that he may gaine the love of all the Souldiers, whereby his owne person shall be in the more safetie, when he shall attempt any perrillous exploits, for love will command a Souldier to fight, when all things in the world else 〈…〉〈…〉 him forwards, and let him know that the vertue of the Ensigne 〈…〉〈…〉 the vertue and valour of the Captaine, and his whole band; I could wish 〈…〉〈…〉 Captaines would be pleased to be more circumspect in their election of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and not to put undeserving fellowes, of base birth and qualitie into place of 〈◊〉〈◊〉, which deserves Gentlemen of quality to officiate, the Office of 〈…〉〈…〉 place of repute and honour, doth not s••te with every Yeoman, Taylor, or Fidler, as I have knowne to one Company in Essex, all these o•• the like Mechanick fellowes have had the honour to beare the Colours before a generous Captaine of Noble birth, whose name I forbeare to relate, but let it be an 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to all generous Captaines to

make choyce of Officers that are well bred and deserving, otherwise they doe but disgrace themselves, and abuse his Majesties service, and the reputation of our Countrey.

CHAP. LXV.

The Office of a Lieu••tenant to a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field declared.

A Lieuetenant is an Office of high credit and reputation, and he ought in all respects to bee well indoctrinated and qualified in the Arts Millitary, and ought not to bee inferiour in knowledge to any Offi∣cer of higher authority; for an unskilfull Captaine may better demean himselfe with an experienst Lieuetenant, then an unskilfull Lieue∣tenant can ••adge with a skilfull Captain; because all businesse be∣longing to a Company, is for the most part ordered by the Lieuetenant, the Captaine having other imployments of greate importance; hee is to see the company fitted in all respects for service, hee is the right hand to his Captaine in ayding and assisting him as well in the brunt of Battell, as in Peace; hee is to see to the fitting and furni∣shing of all things necessary belonging to the Company; hee is to keepe a perfect roule of all the Souldiers in the Company, and to observe that every Squadron bee compleate, hee is to view the sufficiency and ••••••enesse of the Armes, and to give or∣der for the repayring of such as shall bee found defective: hee is to order and ranke the Company fit for his Captaine to March with; hee is to divide his Company into foure divisions, making two divisions of the Pikes, and two of the Musquetieres; hee is to ranke the first division of Musquets in the Front, and the second division of Musquets in the Reare of the Pikes; hee is to March in the Reare of the Company into the Field, and in Marching out of the Field, the Captaine is to March in the Reare and the Lieuetenant in the Front; he is carefully to passe upon his duty to see the squadrons drawne to the Guards for to Watch; hee is to bee very carefull and diligent in exercising his Company, either by squadrons uppon the Guards, or the whole Company in the Field, assuming fit and convenient times; hee is to leade on the left Wing of shot in time of service; in time of exercising hee is to helpe order the Company so that his Captaine may have the more ease and freedome; hee ought to bee silent, and to cause silence in the Company during the time of his Captaines ex∣ercise; he ought to bee in the Reare of the Company to instruct the Souldiers how to act and observe the Captaines commands, he ought to call over the Company, and take a particular survey of every defect; hee ought to rule over the Company, and take a particular survey of every Souldier in his Captaines absence, for then hee is in absolute authority, and the Souldiers are bound to obey him as their cheife in all re∣spects; hee ought not to refuse to bee put upon any service by his Captaine; or Colo∣nell, or any cheife Officer of the Field; also he is not to bee sent upon any convoy, or to guard any passage without a sufficient Troope of Souldiers, fifty or sixty at least, if lesse, then the Ensigne is of sufficiency to command them: hee is to view his Cap∣taine thrice a day, Morne, Noone, and Night, but especially in the time of Warre to see what hee hath to command him; hee is to take notice of what discords, quarrels and debates arise amongst the Souldiers of his Band, hee is to pacifie them if it may bee, otherwise to commit them; hee is to judge and determine such disputes with gravity and good speeches, and where the fault is, to make him acknowledge it and crave pardon of the party hee hath abused; hee is duely to see the Watch set, and to follow them to the Guard and see the Sentinells set out, and give them their charge what they are to doe: If hee be in the Field, hee is to visit the Sentry Perdues very often, hee is to command the Souldiers in a kinde of perswasory way to obey their Corporalls, and Serjants; wherefore hee ought to give good language, in a dis∣creet and wise manner to move and perswade them, with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 reasons to the obser∣vation and obedience of Millitary discipline, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his Captaine of many ••oyles; hee is to bee carefull that every Souldier have a sufficient lodging in Garrison

and in the Field a Hut: hee is also to take due care of the sicke and maymed, that they perish not for want of means or looking unto; he is also to take care that the Sutlers do not oppresse and rack the poore Souldiers in their victuals and drinke; he is to see the Company provided with all kinde of Amunition, with Axes, Mattockes, Spades, and the like to build their Hutts withall; these instruments are to have the marke of the Gallowse set on them, in token of death to them that steale them; Hee is in his Captaines absence to sit in the Christrade or Marshalls Court, to define of the punish∣ments which are to bee inflicted upon Delinquents and Malefactorus, their punish∣ment going by most voyces; hee is to set a Guard at his Captaines Tent, and like∣wise at the Cullours, where hee ought to give order for a fitting place to hang up loose Armes; His Hutt ought to bee in the head of the quarter upon the right hand, and the Ensignes on the left, and the Serjants at the Reare of the quarter; hee is to bee alwaies in a readinesse to answer an Allarum, and with all speed draw his men if they bee in Garrison, to that Port or Guard his squadron hath the Watch at; if in the Campe, then to the Brest-worke before their quarters, where hee is to place be∣twixt each Musquet a Pike for their better defence: In Garrison hee is to bee Cap∣taine of the Watch in his Captaines stead, onely for the ease of his Captaine, where he must bee very circumspect upon his Guard; hee is to have his Ensigne and his Ser∣jants to attend him, hee is to goe the first round with a Serjant and two Gentlemen at the least to attend him, where hee is to take the Word of every Corporall, and to see that the Sentinells bee duely pla'ct out, and to give them charge to bee very cir∣cumspect in their Watches, that upon the sight of the Enemy, or the seeing of their Matches sparkle, or hearing their Armour clatter; they presently informe the Cor∣poralls, so that an Allarum may bee given to the Towne, but hee that shall give a false Alarum is to bee imprisoned; The Lieuetenant is to go the Patroule with a sufficient Guard about all the Streets within the night to prevent treason in the Town, or to dis∣cover fire or ill orders as quarrelling, &c. Hee is to March in the morning with the Major of the Garrison at the Drumme beating to the opening of the Ports; hee is to bee guarded with all the Gentlemen of the round; In Sommer time at Watch set, he is to draw his men in Parrado in the Market place, with all the rest of the Companies in the Towne, their Companies being compleate: If in the Field and to goe upon service, hee ought to see prayers read in the head of the Troopes every night, and every Sabbath all those Souldiers that have not the Guard, hee is to compell them to goe to their Colonells Tent to heare Prayers and preaching; hee is to bee religious, valiant, and wise, his Armes is onely a Gorget and a Pattisen.

CHAP. LXVI.

The Office of a Captaine of a private Company, and his duty both in Garrison and in the Field briefely declared.

THe Office of a Captaine being so honourable, and a place of such great consequence that it ought not slightly to bee considered of; wherefore they ought to bee men of ex∣cellent quallity and of undaunted valiant resolution; hee should not bee inferiour in knowledge and skill, in all the circumstances and actions belonging to Warre, in as profound a manner as the chiefest Officer of the Field, for hee hath a charge of great importance committed un∣to him, hee being many times called to execute the Of∣fice of Serjant Major, or Lieuetenant Collonell; besides hee is exposed to all manner of danger in the Warres, for no Captaine but must leade on his men in the face of the Enemy, and charge them in the teeth, which if hee bee not skilfull as well to leade them off as draw them on, hee may bee the occasion of spilling of much bloud; hee ought not to bee a man cho∣sen altogether for Birth, Meanes, Personage, favour or affection; but for his wise∣dome,

civility, valour, and experience; the unexpertnesse of a Captaine hath beene the ruine of Armies, and destruction of Common-wealths; In the time of peace every brave fellow desires to bee honoured with the name and charge of a Captaine; but when Warre approacheth and the Enemy is at hand, they quake their swords out of their scabberds, and had rather make use in fight of their Wings, then their tallents: A Captaine ought to be well seene and read in all the Liberall Sciences, to be acquain∣ted with History, and to have what speculative knowledge that may bee to joyne with their practice, all kinde of Stratagems should be similiar with him, and no∣thing should be wanting that might make him an accomplisht Souldier: A Captaine ought to have regard to the due exercising of his Souldiers, fitting them in all points for service; hee ought to see his Souldiers furnished with all things needfull; as Armes, Munition, and their Weekely pay duely at the appoynted times; hee is to bee very conscionable in delivering them their off-reckonings and apparrell; hee is to passe very strictly (if it be in time of Warre) upon his Watch; being Captaine of the Watch, hee is to command the Gentlemen of the Rounds to bee set out, and to have the Word given them. If he be in the Field, he should leade out the Perdues and see them visited in due season; then afterwards his Lieuetenant, and other inferiour Of∣ficers are to doe the like: If he be in Garrison, in time of danger, hee is precisely to goe the first Round himselfe, being ayded with his Serjants and divers Gentlemen, where hee must view the strength and sufficiency of every Guard, and how every Officer doth dispose of his Souldiers; hee is to take the Word of every Officer in his Round at every Corps-du-guard▪ If he be In••ampt in the Field, then hee is to goe the Patroule through his owne Regiment, and cause all Sutlers to exstinguish their Candles, and to suffer no drinking after the warning Peece is discharged: If his Com∣pany bee 200 strong, hee is to have foure Corporalls, and to divide his Company into foure even parts (viz.) Fifty Souldiers in a Corporal-ship: In the time of Peace and being in Garrison, one Squadron onely watcheth, begining with the el∣dest Corporal-ship the first night, and so successively one Corporal-ship relieving the other: In time of Warre, halfe or whole Companies, specially being in the Field, no Guard shall bee relieved but once in 24 houres; hee is to make choyce of the chiefe and ablest Souldiers being men of quality to be Gentlemen of his Company, and they are to Guard with the Captaine of the Watch by turns, and to walke the Round about all the Walls and Bulworkes; they are to give the Word to the Corporalls at every Guard; they are to discover the Enemy, and to see the Sentinells doe their du∣ty; which if they cannot or mistake it, the Guard is to charge them with their wea∣pons and apprehend them as Enemies; The Captaine is to lay out these Gentlemen Perdue upon convenient passages ••nd apt places, to discover if the Enemy should Sal∣ly out, according as the place is in distance from the Enemies Trenches, so must the number of Perdues be layd, one a pretty distance behinde the other, so that if occa∣sion bee they may retreate backe one to the other, and so give notice to the Campe that they may prepare for an Assault: those are to bee relieved every houre or halfe houre; also the Captaine is to instruct his Souldiers how to make an Assault against the Enemy, and also how to defend an Assault: Hee must be a good Enginiere, to know how to rayse all kinde of Workes and Trenches, and how to place his men up∣on the Flankes to scowre the Bulworkes by the lyne of Levell; upon a Brestworke in the Campe hee is to place betwixt every two Musquets, a Pike, the Musquetiers are to give fire and fall off, and another imediately to present in his place, the Pikes are to stand firme: the Captaine is to have his Armour of proofe, and a faire Pike for his defensive and offensive Armes: He is to have two great Bougets made of dry Neats-leather, which will hold a hundred weight of Powder a peece to furnish his Musquetiers withall: Hee is to see the Bandyliers filled with Powder, with suffi∣cient Match, and Bullets; hee must bee ever in a readinesse to answer an Allarum, and the first that shall charge the Enemy: If the Enemy makes his approaches against the Campe, after the Captaine hath drawne his men up to the Parrapet to make resi∣stance, and being all ready to give fire, hee is to command that no man gives fire un∣till hee gives order, and so suffer the Enemy to come up as close as may bee, and then give him a brave volly of Shot altogether in his teeth, * 1.420 one Musquetire relieving the other, the Pikes charging manfully and stedfastly; at all convenient times hee is to

drill his souldiers very accurately, shewing them all the postures of the Pike and Mus∣quet, then how to march, counter-march, to double their Files, and Rankes, the middle men to double to the Front, to advance forwards, and to retreat backwards at the sound of the Drumme, to wheele about his Musquetiers, to make ready, pre∣sent, and give fire, to give fire in the Front, in the Reare, and upon either Flanke, to fall off by Files and give fire, as we shall hereafter more largely discourse of. A Captaine ought to march into the Field in the Front of his Company, and his Lieute∣nant in the Reare; but marching out of the Field, the Captaines place is to bring up the Reare, and the Lieutenant to leade the Company; the Ensigne is to march before the first Division of Pikes, the eldest Serjeant is to bring up the next Division of Pikes, and another Serjeant the last Division of Musquetiers.

The Captaine ought not to doe any reall act in the Warres, without Commission from higher Authority, he is to lead up the right Wing of his Musquetiers to charge the Enemy, and his Lieutenant the left: when a Captaine makes choice of a Lieute∣nant or Ensigne, he is to draw his Company into Armes, and one of the Gentlem••n is to carry the Pattisen or Colours, and being marcht into the Field, the Captaine is to deliver the Pattisen or Colours (in the head of the Troope) to the Officer he hath made choise of, commanding the Souldiers to take notice of him, and to obey him as their Officer; he is to make choise of diligent Serjeants, and vigilant Corporals, a trusty Clerke, and good Drummes; he ought to have one Wagon at the least, to carry his Baggage, and to conduct sicke souldiers; he is to be as little pestered with luggage of his owne, or his souldiers, as possibly may be▪ lest it should hinder their march, and also upon any service, be rather forward to fight for goods, than have their mindes homewards, fearing to lose their owne; he ought not to be covetous nor niggardly, but forward to gratifie all good services with some guifts and courte∣sie, whereby he shall indeere his Souldiers to be prodigall of their lives to doe him service: he must be familiar, and eloquent in perswading and diswading his Soul∣diers, and to stirre up their valours to undergoe paine and perill; if a Souldior trans∣gresse, * 1.421 he ought not to beate him, but to send him to the Provost-Marshall to have Irons laid on him, by beating of a Souldier, a world of hatred will be stirred up, and happily private revenge; he ought to be very carefull to keepe his Souldiers in action, whereby idle expence of time (as drinking and playing) may be prevented which usually ends in quarrelling and bloud-shed: He is to have Lanthornes and Torches, such as will burne in any Storme and Tempest, for they may stand him many times in great stead: he is to have his Tent in the head of all his Troope, and to bee conver∣sant with them, shewing them ensamples of hardship; he ought alwayes to have his Colours and his Drumme in the Field when he exerciseth his Company, as well to give the more reputation unto the action, as also that the use of them may be well knowne.

Lastly, * 1.422 a Captaine ought to carry himselfe in such a way, that his souldiers may both feare and love him, too much familiarity breeds contempt, and too sterne a car∣riage begets hatred; and so let him not over-value his life, but expose it to the for∣tune of the Warre, using his best skill and indeavours to annoy his Enemies, and to be diligent and forward in executing such commands as Authority injoynes him, and so to persist in a resolution to feare nothing but infamie.

And I will conclude, with an Exhortation to all Noble Captaines, desiring them for their credits sake, and for the honour of our gracious King, and welfare of our Kingdome, to be more diligent in the discipling of their souldiers, and not to chop and change so many new men into their Companies that betweene muster, and muster the third part of the company are new untutored fellowes, that knowes not their right hand from their left, so that it is a labor in vain to instruct them; and they are the meanes of putting all those that have some knowledge out of square, by their aukward doings, besides all base beggerly fellowes are admitted into the muster Rowle, when as the best and chiefest yeomen ought to doe their King and country service in their owne persons. Then lastly that every Captaine would command his Officers to in∣struct the pikes and musquets whilst the rest are a calling over, and then eyther him∣selfe or his Lieutenant to exercise them in grosse all their postures; and cause them to give fire in way of skirmish; and not to goe into the Towne untill all the exercise bee finisht.

CHAP. LXVII.

The Office of a Serjeant-Major of a Regiment, and his dutie both in Garrison and in the Field, briefely declared.

A Serjeant-Major, is the third principall Officer in a Regi∣ment; and in regard he is an Officer of the Field, hee ought to participate of all the perfections that Officers of higher Authority should have; His Place and Office doth somewhat correspond with the Major-Generals; onely his duty is tending to Officiate betweene the Colonell, and the Officers of the Regiment; he is to be learned in all the Liberall Sciences, he ought to have both Speculative and Practicke knowledge in all things belonging to his pro∣fession; he must be very civill, wise, and discreet, in his carriage and actions, in regard he is to manage a world of affaires of high conse∣quence, which may serve to the conserving or ruining of the Army; he is duly to attend his Colonels pleasure; and Morning, ••oone, and Night, he is to waite upon the Major Generall, and to receive such orders, as are by the Generall of the Army deli∣vered unto him; he is speedily to certifie his Colonell what the orders are, and what the Generals pleasure is, and also, with all celerity, to execute such things as his Co∣lonell shall give him in charge: He is not onely to be a good Scholler, and witty, but he must be quick in apprehension, and furnisht with an able memory; he must have a Paper-book, with Pen and Incke, to set downe all Orders and Commands that he, may not erre nor vary one title from what was delivered him in charge; at Drums∣beat, he is to repaire to the Generals Tent, and take the Word of the Major Generall, and Orders for that Nights proceedings, then he is to repaire to his Colonels Tent, where he is to deliver him the Word, and to his Lieutenant Colonel, with such or∣ders as he hath received.

The Serjeants of every Company of his Regiment; * 1.423 are to repaire to him to take the Word from him, with such Orders as he shall give them, and they are speedily to acquaint their Captaine, and other Officers with it, all the inferiour Serjeants are to stand round about him, and he is to deliver the Word very privately in the eare of that Serjeant which stands at his right hand, and he is secretly to whisper it in the eare of the next, and so from one to another round, and the last man is to give it to the Serjant-Major againe, if the last man gives it to him wrong, then he must give it over againe. * 1.424 He is to have them draw Billets for their Guards, in regard much di∣sputes may arise, because many Guards are more subject to the danger of the Enemy, than some others are, and also to prevent treason, so that no Officer knowes his Guard before-hand; he is also to provide Powder, Match, and Bullets, and distri∣bute it amongst the Officers of his Regiment; he ought to have able Officers to his owne Company because he cannot tend unto them his imployments are so great; he ought to have a swift Nagge to carry him about the Quarters, and to visit his Guards, for his businesse lyes very confusedly in the Army; he is likewise to view all outward Gvards, both in the day time and in the night, where his Regiment hath command, every Captaine is to give him the Word, and from one Guard to ano∣ther he is to be guarded with certaine Musquetiers; He is to instruct and shew such of his Officers, as are to passe upon Watch, where to place their Sentinels and Perdues, he is likewise to shew every Officer, whether to draw his Company, to joyne with the rest in Battalia, if the Enemy should give an Alarme. He is to exercise all the Companies of his Regiment at convenient times.

CHAP. LXVIII.

The Office of a Lieutenant-Colonell of a Regiment, and his duty both in Garrison and in Field, briefly declared.

A Lieutenant Colonell to a Regiment is a place of high consequence and great dignitie, being the second person in the Regiment, hee is not to be deficient in all kindes of Literature, but to bee as able both in valour and experience as the Colonell, in regard in the Colonels absence, hee hath the sole ordering of the Regiment, and upon all occasions as his Colonell shall command, hee is to bee ready and du∣tifull to performe: there is much toyle and paines belonging to his office, in regard hee frees his Colonels execution•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his duties; hee ought in time, and causes of pre∣sent perill to give his best advise to his Colonell, and to give him notice of every particular passage in the Regiment; hee is not of his owne authority to act any thing without his Colonels command; All the Captaines and Officers of the Regiment ought to respect and obey his commands; Hee is to see the Regiment well ordered, the Watches set, and the guards duly releeved; in time of Battell hee is many times commanded to draw up divisions to charge the Enemy: In besieges hee relieves his Colonell, taking his command by turnes, it is his charge to see to the Regiment that all things are orderly performed, and that all necessaries be provided both for food and Amunition; hee is to see every Captaine demeane themselves faire to their Compa∣nies, that their pay be duly distributed amongst the Souldiers; hee is to see their Armes fixed and fitting for service: Every Captaine is to have two Powder bo••gets with Powder, Bullets, and Match; hee is to command the Captaines to draw out their Companies into the field, and to see them exercise them; hee is to exercise eve∣ry Company in the Regiment himselfe at his pleasure; hee is to observe how every Captaine clothes his Souldiers, and to have his eare open to the complaints of poore distressed Souldiers, and see them righted; hee is to take notice of all quarrels and disputes amongst the Officers, and endeavour to reconcile them, otherwise to lay his command on, them, and to confine them to their lodgings untill his Colonell understands of it; hee is to release no delinquent from Prison, that is laid in by the consent of his Colonell; hee is to sit in the Marshalls Court in the absence of his Co∣lonell; hee is to see the Serjant Major order the Regiment for the march, and he is to assist him in ordering and drawing up the divisions into Battalia; And to conclude, hee ought to be discreet, wise, valiant, and religious, so that hee should be a patterne to all the Officers of his Regiment to steere their courses by.

CHAP. LXIX.

The office and duty of a Colonell over a Regiment, and his Command both in Garrison, and in the Field.

THe office of a Colonell is very honourable, and a place of great consequence in the Army, wherefore hee ought to bee a grave experienced Souldier, religious, wise, temperate, and valiant; his Command is not of so high an extent as the Serjant Major Generalls is; for his command extends no further then tenne or twelve Companies, which he is to see well ordered, and strictly governed; hee that hath his Commission first, is to be accounted the eldest, and is to take place, both in the quarters, and in the March, and so every one successively according to the date of their Commission; Hee hath under his command two speciall Officers, his Lieutenant-Colonell, and Serjant-Major; His office is in time of Warre to see his Regiment compleate, and to order his Divisions, and draw them into forme of Battell; His place in the Battell is various, according as hee shall be commanded by the Generall, but most usuall, he takes his place before

the right Wing of his owne Regiment, ordering his Officers as hee shall have dire∣ctions from his Superiours in authority; Hee is to be forward in shewing good ex∣amples to his Officers, that his worth and valour may not be blemished; his eye is to be duly upon his owne Officers and Souldiers, to rebuke them that are negligent, and cowardly, and to animate those that are forward; hee ought to have all the Co∣lours of his Regiment to be alike both in colour and in fashion to avoide confusion, so that the Souldiers may discerne their owne Regiment from the other Troopes; Likewise, every particular Captaine of his Regiment may have some small distincti∣on in their Colours, as their Armes, or some Embleme, or the like, so that one Com∣pany may be discerned from another; hee ought in the time of skirmishing in Battell, to pry and take serious notice of the Enemies Battallias, how they are ordered, and what advantages are to be gained, which suddenly he is to incounter and atchieve▪ hee must be as cautelous and circumspect in taking notice how the Enemy playes his game, as himselfe is to be wary and cunning in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and managing his owne; hee is not to be put upon any desperate service, unlesse 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ath the command of five hun∣dred, or a thousand Souldiers; hee ought to be very expert in raising of Fortificati∣ons, and in all kind of stratagems, in as ample manner as the Generall, because many times he hath the sole command in beleaguered Townes, and in certaine quarters in the Trenches against a Fort beleaguered; Also many times hee is to command divers Troopes as Generall in some kind of services; hee is to have a well-governed and Religious Preacher to his Regiment, so that by his life and doctrine the Souldiers may be drawne to goodnesse; Hee is to cause so many of his Regiment as are to re∣leeve the Watch, morning and evening to bee drawne in parado before the head of the Quarters, where Divine duties are to bee performed by the Preacher amongst them: Every Sabbath day he is to have a Sermon in his Tent forenoone and after∣noone, and every Officer of his Regiment is to compell his Souldiers that are freed from the guard to repaire thither; and that no Suttler shall draw any Beere in the time of divine Service and Sermon: Hee is to have a speciall care to see such dutyes performed by his Officers as are given them in charge: there is no impunity or remis∣nesse to be used in the Warres, to any one that shall neglect or slight any duty b•• command: Hee is to see that all guards, passages, and Fortifications, wherein any of his Regiment are to guard or maintaine, that it be sufficiently guarded with Soul∣diers; Hee seldome watcheth himselfe in person in the Campe, only in beleagured Townes hee passeth upon his duty; hee is to cause his owne Drumme to beate to prepare for the reliefe of the Watch morning and evening; Likewise, all the Drums of the Regiment are at the same time to beate; Hee is to appoint the Captaine of the Watch in his Regiment; the eldest Captaine first beginneth, and successively one af∣ter another according to their antiquity; hee hath only a Lieutenant and Ensigne, his Lieutenant is titularly called Captaine; hee is to have a sufficient quarter-master to his Regiment; hee is also to have an under-Marshall, whose office is to lay Irons upon such delinquents as shall be committed to his charge, hee is likewise to looke to all the Suttlers, that no abuse be in their excessive prices, or ill measures; There are able and sufficient Sulters to be provided for his Regiment: The Colonell is to sit in Counsell with the Generall, and to advise according to his wisedome and experience about all States affaires: Hee is to sit in the Marshals Court, and to give his voyce for the punishing of delinquents; Hee is to bee a man free from all vices; hee is to bee religious, grave, wise, and truly valiant.

CHAP. LXX.

The office of a Serjeant-Major-Generall of an Army, and his duty both in Garrison and Field briefely declared.

THee office of a Serjeant-Major-Generall of the Army: is a place of great honour and renowne, there being committed to his charge, the affaires of a whole Army, for through his hands all the affaires, practises, and actions that betides an Army daily runnes; Hee being the conduit-pipe to convey all orders and instructions from the Generall, to all the subordinate Officers, wherefore hee ought to bee a man of a ready wit and conception, of a sound judgement, of a strong memory, so that hee must conceive and retaine such things as are given him in charge, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 mistake may prejudice the proceedings of a waighty consequence; therefore his Pen and Paper-booke must be ready to take the true notes from his Generall, that he may not erre in delivering of his orders to the Majors of each Regiment: Hee is to be at his Tent ready at a prefixt houre, both morning and evening, to deliver them such orders and instructions as are delivered unto him, that so speedily they may be conveyed to each Officer in every particular Regiment throughout all the whole Army; Hee must be very vigilant and circum∣spect, to prie and dive into all passages that concernes the good or safety of the Army: Above all other Officers, the Major-Generall ought to bee a good Scholer, and well indoctrinated in the Liberall Arts;* 1.425 hee is to bee a good linguist, hee is to bee well skilled in ordering and forming of Battels, and in speedy reducing them from one forme into another, as occasion shall offer; Hee is to informe his Generall that such things as hee sees needfull and of consequence, either for the safety or good of the Army may bee put in execution, as the raising of Skonces, Redouts, &c. for the for∣tifying of passages, and securing of Bridges, and guarding of shallow Fordes, by which an Enemy shall bee impeached from taking an advantage to indanger an Army; hee must take a serious view how every Officer, both Colonels and Captaines performe their dutyes; hee is at his convenient leisure to ride from guard to guard, being conducted with a sufficient guard of Musquetiers, to see such orders put in execution as was given the Captaines in charge, and that their Guards bee not too slightly manned, and where neglect shall bee, hee is to punish the delinquents, and to see those defects supplyed; He is to be in his Generals presence as oft as his occasions will permit, but especially morne, noone, and night, either to informe the Generall of such newes, and passages as are of consequence, or to receive instructions from him, which he is suddently to put in execution: hee is by the Generalls command to call his Officers before him to sit in Councell upon such things as may seeme diffi∣cult, so that the best advice may be taken. Every Officer is to order and demeane his Troopes according as hee shall please to give them directions; he is of himselfe war∣rant sufficient to order and dispose all Commanders, and they are to obey him and execute what he is pleased to give them in charge. Every Officer ought to relate unto him what wants and defects are to their knowledge in the Army, whether Armes, Amunition, Victuals, or the like, that there may bee present order taken by the Generall, to supply all wants and defects; all the Serjeant-Majors of every Regi∣ment in the Army are to attend the Major-Generall morning and night, to receive the Word and Orders, which they must take from his secretly, and as secretly im∣part it to the inferiour Officers: his command extends over all Regiments whatsoe∣ver, and in time of Battell he may draw forth what divisions he pleaseth, he may com∣mand what Officer he pleaseth to lead them to such services, as hee shall in his wise∣dome thinke convenient, either to assist the Wings that are in fight, or to strengthen some one part of the Army that is most assaulted, so that hee is to bee indued with all the properties that the Generall should be accomplisht with; Hee is also in time of Battell to bee neere the Generall to advise in cases of extremity, what is best and safest to be done: also to goe from Regiment to Regiment, to give Commanders such orders as are delivered to him: hee is of power sufficient to command the Cap∣taine of the Watch, and if hee perceive any disorders or neglects in his duties, hee

may punish him: The Serjeant Major ought to premeditate how to bring his men in∣to order the easiest and most readiest way in time of Battell, causing every Major of a Regiment to draw up their divisions into even squares, or otherwise as hee shall please to thinke fittest; hee is to give order to the Quarter-Masters how they shall pitch their Standerds that accordingly the Troopes may range themselves, what distances betwixt the Forlorne hopes, and the maine Battell, and betwixt the maine Battell, and the Battell of succour, &c. What distance betwixt the Horse and the Flankes of the foot, and where the Ordnance are to be plac't most convenientest, &c. Hee is to draw out no Wings of shot to give fire upon the Enemy, but must have a competency of Pikes to guard them from the fury of the Horse; hee is lisiewise in time of Battell to appoynt every Colonell his place, and every other chiefe Officer their places, some in the Front of the mayne Battell, others to command the For∣lorne ••opes, some in the Battell of succour, others in the Reare.

Likewise in Marches, in regard divers Officers i•• high authority are not to March with their private Companies, but are employed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Generall upon other weighty affaires; the Major may command such Officers as hee shall thinke fitting to leade such Troopes as hee shall command them; and such Officers as he placeth, are to command with as much Authority, and the Souldiers bound to obey them with as much diligence and dutifulnesse, as if they were their owne Officers; also he may command any Colonel or Major of a Regiment to send out what Officer of his Regi∣ment hee pleaseth, and what forces hee shall thinke fitting either upon Convoyes, or to the guarding of passages or the like. And to conclude, hee is to bee the eyes, eares, mouth, hands, and feet of the Generall.

CHAP. LXXI.

The Office of the Lord Marshall in the Warres, and of his high jurisdiction and Command in the Army.

THe Lord Marshall of an Army above all other Officers ought to bee a most approved Scholler, in regard his Office is to sit many times in the seate of Iudicature, he is also to be a most approved Souldier; for howsoever in the greatnesse of other great places in the Warres there may be a dispen∣sation of skill, yet in this Office it may not be so; for a∣bove all others it hath the greatest place of action and di∣rection in all the Army, and hee Commands in a higher straine then any the fore mentioned Officers in the Army, hee having them all at his command; yet all of them can∣not assist him to dispense or lessen the least duty belonging to his place or person; for though the Generall or Lieuetenant Generall preceds him in place,* 1.426 yet they ought not in knowledge and experience, in regard both themselves and the whole Army both Horse and Foot are bound to move at his directions; and though hee may not command his Generall, yet he may in a directory way advise, and say your Excel∣lency ought to stand here in this place, or order your Armies according to such rules; Wherefore, he must be a man of great performance, accomplisht with Wisedome, Temperance, Valour; and Vertue; It will bee hard for a Prince to finde a man fit and sutable for this imployment.

Next the Generall, the Lord Marshall is sayd to have the supreame command of the whole Army; wherefore usually his Trumpet is first in the morning to discharge the Watch, and his Troope ought first of all to be mounted; for it is an honour due to his place, and allowed him by the Army, by reason of the infinite paines which hee taketh in his owne particular person; neither ought his Troope to Watch or Ward, but are freed of that duty, by reason of their more serious occasions; After he and his Troope are mounted, he ma••cheth to the out-m••st borders of the Campe, and 〈…〉〈…〉 his stand untill the whole Army are R••••ged, neither ••••its his sta∣tion

untill the last man be Marcht away: Hee is himselfe in all things both assistant and directive to the Generall of the Horse, and the Serjeant Major Generall; all the day long hee is tyed to no Battalion, but at his pleasure may dispose of his owne Per∣son, sometimes accompanying the Generall, and sometimes conducting his owne Troopes; and indeed alwaies where the greatest occasion of necessity is, and where the Enemy is most likelyest to assayle, there hee should be to make resistance: Also as his Person, so is his Troope not tyed to any especiall or certaine place, but may vary and alter, as danger shall offer it selfe for them to oppose, still supplying what∣soever is weakest, and ever ready to entertaine the Enemy upon all his approaches, upon all Retreats; the Reare is his place which he is to bring up with safety, and to defend it with courage: When the Army is to bee Incamped, he stayeth untill eve∣ry man be dismounted and the whole Army lodged; then he with his Troope dis∣mounteth; he taketh order for the Scouts, he adviseth with the Serjeant Major for the Guards, vieweth the strength of the Campe, &c.

When the Army is to be Incamped in any new place, the Serjeant Major Generall, the Quarter Master Generall, the Serjeant Major of Regiments, the Scout-Master, and all inferiour Quarter Masters, with a sufficient Guard of the best Horsemen, are to attend the Lord High Marshall; and he out of his owne power, with the discreet advise of the Serjeant Major Generall, and the Scoute Master Generall, shall assigne the Campe where the fittingest place is to pitch it in, the manner, forme, and pro∣portion it shall carry, the bounds it shall containe, and the distinction of every place and commodity, advantage, strength, or discommodity, which it shall please him to annex unto the same, and according to his pleasure and demonstration, so shall the Quarter Master Generall see it divided, leaving the Intrenchments to the Trench-Master; and the other inferiour divisions to the Serjeant Major Generall, the Serjeant Major of Regiments, and their Quarter Masters.

It is in the power of his Office also (after the Army is Incamped, having taken a survey of all the convenientest places for the Guards) to appoint all the Regiments, in what manner they shall place their Corps-du-guards, the Scouts, and Sentinell••, so as no man may passe either in or out, but to be continuall upon their discovery; and likewise to provide for the raysing of all Out-workes, as Skonses, and Redouts upon all passages and Fordes, for the safety of the whole Army.

And as in the constant settling of the Army, so in the Marching and removing thereof; the Lord Marshall is to have a speciall regard to his strength and ability to encounter with the Enemy, and whether it be meet to enter into the face of Battell or no, or whether the time bee mature and ripe for matters of execution; or else to deferre and prevent all occasions of encounters, in which if he find himselfe the wea∣ker, hee shall order his March through woody places, and places inaccessible; there∣by to adde a naturall strength to his Army, and to hinder the execution of the Ene∣mies Horse; he is to have the lighter sort of Horsemen to March so neere unto the Enemy, that continually upon every alteration hee may have sudden intelligence of the Enemies designes: But if the necessity of the March bee through the Champion and Plaines, where the nature of the ground affordeth no assistance; then the Lord Marshall must so order his Horse Troopes in such sort, to make them shew great and innumerable, for to a maze and distract the Enemy in his approaches.

Hee is to have a most speciall regard in removing his Campe, whether it bee by night or by day; it is very bold and audacious to remove a Campe in the day if the Enemy bee neere hand, but to remove in the night, it argues a weakenesse and di••a∣bility in the Army,* 1.427 for it is little better then a flight: Wherefore there must be great licie used with silence and diligence, and the March and good Array to bee held with all care and industry; and therefore it requireth all the skill and Art of the Marshall, and all the care and obedience that can bee required in a Souldier, for it is a Rul•• in Martiall Discipline, that no remove by night can be absolutely secure.

It is the Office of the Lord Marshall, to give order to the Master of the Ordnance, both for his March and his passage; both where, when, and which way all his Pro∣vision shall goe for the best advantage and safety: And at the planting o•• Artillery or making of Batteries, the Marshall is to oversee the proceedings, and to give directi∣ons upon any doubt or misse-adventure; Hee is to give order unto the Victuall Ma∣ster,

Wagon-master, and all Officers of their natures, both for their allodgements, stores, and all other necessary accommodations, and against all violence and injuries which shall be offered them, he is to see carefull and speedy reformation.

The Lord High-Marshall, is the supreame and onely powerfull Iudge, in all cau∣ses of life and death, in criminall offences and controversies in the Army, of all man∣ner of natures, and provideth for the due execution of all the Lawes, Articles, and Institutions, which shall be appointed by the Generall to be observed, and to see due punishment executed for any breach of the same: Wherefore he ought to be excee∣dingly well read, and learned in all Marshall Lawes, the custome of Countries, the degrees of Honour, and the distribution of Blouds, places, and imployments; and that he may the better proceed in these affaires, he is to be assisted with divers lear∣ned and experienced Officers under him, as the Iudge-Marshall, and Provost-Mar∣shall, an Auditor, and two Clerkes, the under-Provost, &c. He is to have twen∣ty or thirty Gentlemen for a continuall guard about him; the Iudge-Marshall is to assist him in all difficult and curious interpretations of the Law, and in deciding such controversies, as shall happen in the taking of Prisoners, &c. He is to direct the Scout-master in all his proceedings, and to receive from him all the intelligence and observations which he hath found out in his discoveries, and to deliver unto him any other instructions, which had formerly beene neglected: what the Lord Mar∣shall is to doe about the restoring of Gentlemens honours which have beene malici∣ously disgrac'd, and his deciding of all quarrels, I have formerly intreated of, in the Discourse of unjust valour; but this will suffice to let the ingenuous souldier see a glimpse of this noble Office.

CHAP. LXXII.

Of the Councell of Warre and of their Office and duties in the time of Warre, the Army be∣ing in Campe or otherwise.

THere is nothing in this sublunary World, which requires more mature Consultations, Deliberations, and grave ad∣vise then the Subject of Warre; in regard the welfare of Citties, Countries, and Kingdomes, wholy depends upon it: Wherefore, above all other Marshall men, those of the counsell of Warre, are to bee best experienced, and of most approved judgements: And that Generall is happy that hath for his Counsellours, grave, wise, skilfull, experienced, vertuous, and painfull men, for his assistance, to expostulate all matters, and occurrences, which shall appertaine to the good and safety of the Army; and to the weakning and ruining of the Enemy.

When a Generall is engaged in these great businesses of the Warres, and hath for the government and ruling of his Army and the affaires thereunto belonging, appoin∣ted his superiour Officers; hee is then out of the whole and entire number to select an especiall company of the most religious, valiant, expert wise men, whose yeeres, and judgements, are mature, to bee of his Counsell; as namely all Colonells, and their equalls: Yet it is to bee understood; that from hence, hath growne a distinguishment of Counsels, and according to the variation of Marshall Courts, so they have altered both in emminency and application, some being Generall, as in the tryall and judging of criminall offenders; and to this all Captaines enrowled within the Generalls list, may freely and by their owne right be admitted; others are more especiall, as where the debatement of provisions, the Raysing of Taxes, and the ordering of the publike affaires of the Campe are handled; and to this all Colonells and Officers within their rancke are admitted; and doe consult and conclude with the Generall, for all the wel∣fares and benefits which doe appertaine unto the Army; But the last Councell of all is a great deale more private, and the matters which are handled therein are of that consequence, for secre••ie and ••ffect; that it were unfit and not allowable so many should bee drawne thereunto; ••or that all sorts of men should partake of every Stat••

Negotiation; or those powerfull stratagems which indeed should lodge in the strongest and safest bosomes; for notwithstanding men of great experience and valour, or men of high birth and Rancke may in a short space of time, ascend to command a Colonells place in the field; yet may Learning, Iudgement, Secre••ie, and divers other vertues (without which a priuy Councellour cannot subsist) be so farre removed and distant from his nature; that it were a great solicisme in State to admit such trust to his Bosome: So on the other side men of meaner and lower advancement; who are not capable of those high places in the Army; may yet bee much apter to advise, and have a better and stronger Fort wherein to keepe secrets from perishing, then those of a higher calling; and therefore (not without good warrant) are many times cho∣sen and admitted to this noble place of trust and preferment; Alexander tooke ••ar∣menio, Clytus and all the ouldest of his Father Philips Commanders; to advise, coun∣sell, and strengthen him in all his Warlike affaires: Caesar likewise made choyse of Cato that by his advice he might ruine Pompey; thus Antony prevayled during the life of Publicalo; and Augustus held himselfe fortunate in the Councels of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Likewise wee have moderne instances how Philip of Spaine gave to Don Iohn Duke of Austria; (that brave Souldier) Don Lewis de Zuniga to counsell him in all Marshall occasions: and our Edward the third did the like for the blacke Prince, Hee made choyse for his Councellors the Earle of Warwicke, Suffolke, Salisbury, and Oxford; by the strength of whose advice in the Battell of Poicteirs; hee not onely overthrew all the Flowers of France; but also tooke Iohn their King and Philip his Sonne Prisoners. Those Generalls that have runne in precipitate courses rejecting both Councellours and Councells, have soone ruined themselves and their Armyes; as Crassus, when he brought himselfe and eleven Legions to bee rowted and massacred in Parthia; and Tyberius Gracchus when he had his braines dasht out in the Capitoll: After the same manner did Caius Gracchus, who was made a bloudy sacrifice on the top of Mount Aventine, for the much advised tempting of his fortunes.

By this we may see, there is nothing more necessary, than a sufficient Councell of Warre, for their counsell and advice is more prevailent in Marshall-discipline, than eyther Armour or Weapons, and more brave exployts have beene atchieved by wise∣dome and policy, than ever could be brought under by violence and daring.

To speake generally of this especiall and private Councell of Warre,* 1.428 and who are to be supposed meetest to succeed and rise unto the same, they are these especiall Officers following, who by vertue of their first place, are ever capable of the second; because none of lesse merit and desert, may or ought to assume unto the sway or com∣mand of this prime dignity. Of these privie Councellors, the Lieutenant-Generall of the Horse hath the first place, the Lord Marshall hath the second, the Master of the Ordnance hath the third, the Treasurer of the Warre the fourth, and the eldest Co••••∣••ell in the Field the fifth: But if the number of Councellors arise to any great extent, then they are chosen out of other great personages of eminency and worth, at the dis∣cretion of the Generall; these private Councell of Warre, are to negotiate and deale in matters that are profound, dangerous, and difficult, and are to argue and dispute them, with sound understandings, and deepe judgements; And this shall suffice to conclude this discourse. As for other Officers belonging to the Army, I omit to dis∣course of their Offices, in regard they have no charge of Souldiers under them; as the Treasurer, the foure Corporals of the Field, the Quarter-masters, the Muster-ma∣sters, Scout-master, Provost-marshall, Victuall-master, Forrage-master, Wagon-master, Trench-master, Captaine of the Pioners, &c. Happily, I shall take occasion to discourse afterwards of some of these Offices, in the Treatise of Incam∣ping the Army, and in the Discourse of Framing of Battels, where I shall more fitly give a touch of them: We are in the next place to discourse of the Exercising of the Foot and Horse.

THE ART OF DRILLING, OR EXERCISING A FOOTE COMPANY. SECT. XI.

CHAP. LXXIII.

The manner how every Officer should drill, and exercise their Companyes of Foote in all their Postures, and motions with the severall wayes of giving fire.

ALthough it bee a thing familiar to divers men to Drill, and exercise a Foote Company, and that some men have formerly to good purpose, intreated of the Postures both of Pike and Musquet; yet in re∣gard my intent is to write a generall discourse of every part of the body of Warre, I thinke it con∣venient in as short and briefe tearmes as the subject will require, to demonstrate the parts requisite to bee understood in the exercising of Companies; shewing the grounds and reasons of every Posture and motion that is materiall, either to offend or de∣fend, the reasons why they were invented, and what advantage is in them; for although a Souldier should know how to order, and demeane himselfe exquisitly in this Art of drilling, yet if he doth not conceive the reasons to what purpose they were invented, and the severall advantages they afford against the Enemy, in time of necessity hee will be to seeke, whereby the whole grounds of Souldiarisme may miscarry, and the ends they were invented for, lose their effect; and let no man expect that I should invent any new anticke Postures, there being more already in use then are profitable; But I could wish a Souldier should only make use of such circumstances as are really most fit, and apt for imployment of Wa••res, and of quickest dispatch in execution. Farre be it from me to discommend a comely manlike gesture and a correspondency in the agitation of the limmes, when a Souldier handles his Armes; yet upon the point of service all superfluous Postures are lopt off, and reduced only to these three acti∣ons, * 1.429 Making ready, Presenting, and giving fire. For should a Commander nominate all the Postures in the time of service, hee would have no breath to oppose his Ene∣my, neither could use any circumspection how to incounter with him; wherefore I would rather wish all Commanders to affect the plaine and readiest way in exer∣cising, which may best sute with the actions and capacities of plaine Souldiers, which will prove more substantiall and essentiall; and those thus educated, are men

likeliest to sustaine the brunt of an Enemies fury, and stand to their tackling, when others with their Circumstantiall complements and superfluous slender devices, may take a retraite for a charge, Wherefore in the first place let us observe that in compo∣sing of multitudes into an orderly way of exercising, they must bee reduced into Rankes and Files,

A File is a certaine number of Souldiers standing in a direct lyne one behinde a∣nother face to backe, which number must not exceed ten in depth.

A Ranke is a number of Souldiers standing in an eeven lyne side-wayes, shoul∣der to shoulder, and this is not limited to any certaine proportion of number, but en∣creaseth or decreaseth accidentally, according to the greatnesse or smallnesse of the number.

A Company being thus ordered into Ranke and File, the next thing considerable, is the distance, or orderly space betweene File and File, Ranke and Ranke.

There are foure orders or distances, observable betweene File and File, or Ranke and Ranke, being these under mamed;

• Close order
• Order
• Open order
• Double distance
  • which is both in Ranke and File
    • one foote and a halfe.
    • three foote.
    • sixe foote.
    • twelve foote.

There is further to bee considered in distance, three especiall circumstance, viz.

• Distance
  • For March.
  • For Motion.
  • For Skirmish,

The distance for March is to be three foote betweene File and file: and sixe foote betweene ranke and ranke.

The distance for Skirmish and for wheeling, is three foote in ranke and file; onely in receiving a charge from the Horse, it is convenient the Files of Pike-men should be at close Order.

CHAP. LXXIV.

How a Captaine shall cause his Officers to order and ranke his Companie sit to march into the Field.

THE Drums having called the Souldiers together to their Colours, the Ensigne standing forth with them; then the Lievtenant and Serjeants shall command the Pikes and Musquettiers to ranke them selves 4. 5. or 6. abreast as the Captaine shall be pleased to command; observing the Files to be at order, and the Rankes at open order.

If the Commander will observe the French manner of Marching,* 1.430 then you must divide the Musquets; the first Division is to March in the Van next after the Cap∣taine, * 1.431 the Pikes are to make the Battell, and to March after the Ensigne in two Divisions, the second Division being led by the eldest Serjeant; the Musquetiers of the left Flanke (called the second division of Mus∣quets) makes the Reare-gaurd, which is to bee led commonly by the second Ser∣jant; the Drumme is to bee placed in the third Ranke of Musquetieres; the second Drumme betweene the third and fourth Ranke of the second Division of Pikes; The third Serjeant is to march in the left Flanke of the Musquets in the Reare; the fourth Serjeant is to be on the right Flanke of the Musquetiers, and the Lieutenant

in the Reare,* 1.432 as by the sequent Figure you may perceive two hundred men in order to March into the Field, the Captaine leading his Companie with a Souldier-like gesture, the rest of the Officers fol∣lowing in their due places in a faire equi∣page: And being arrived at the place of exercise, you are to draw your Compa∣nie into Battalia after this manner: First you are to command your Front division to stand, then the Ensigne is to draw up his division of Pikes upon the left Flanke of the first division of Musqueteires, with his Colours flying, and the Pikes to continue shouldered so long as the drum beates a March; but if it beates a Troope, then they are to advance and close their Rankes forward to their order, and then the Ensigne is to Troope them up with his Colours firled: The eldest Serjeant is to leade up the second division of Pikes. The se∣cond Serjeant is to lead up the se∣cond or Reare divisions o•• Mus∣quetiers; each divisi∣on still marching up to the left of that division next before it; the man∣ner you may plainly see in the Figure upon the right side of this Page; where the first division is marked in the Reare with the Figure 6. the first division of Pikes with the Figure 7. the second division of Pikes with the Figure 8. the second di∣vision of Mus∣quettiers hath in the reare the Fi∣gure 9. In the next Page you shall finde a Fi∣gure in forme of a square, as they stand in a Bat∣talia.

Front.

C

• s s s s s
• S 4
• s s s s s
• s s s s

D. 1.

• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s

E

• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p

S. 1.

• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p

D 2

• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p
• p p p p p

S 2

• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s
• s s s s s

L

• Reare.

C

• S 4.
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss

D

• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• 6

E

• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• 7

S

• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp

D 2

• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• ppppp
• 8

S 2.

• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• sssss
• 9.

E C

S. 2.	sssss	D	pppppppppp	D	sssss	S. 1.
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss
S. 3.	sssss		pppppppppp		sssss	S. 4.

In this precedent Figure, you see the divisions of the Company drawne up into an even body or Battalia, all the Fell-leaders standing even in Front together mak∣ing one Ranke.

CHAP. LXXV.

How the Officers are to draw both Pikes and Musquets (one File sequenting another) into a Ring for the better and speedier exercising them in their postures.

THe Company standing in an even body as the former Fi∣gure shewes, before the Captaine shall exercise them in grosse as they now stand; the easiest, readiest, and most convenient way, is to see every man particularly doe his postures both of Pike and Musquet; Wherefore first draw out the body of Pikes from the shot, then com∣mand the right Wing of shot to face to the left hand, and the left Wing of shot to face to the right hand; then Marching forwards, joyn their Files together, so facing as they were makes them stand in an even body: That Officer which intends to exercise the Pikes, is to draw them into one side of the Field, and some other Officer is to take the Musquets and draw them another way a convenient distance apart, so that one division may not interrupt the other; then either Officers drawing out their Files one following another, leading them round into a Ring, the Officers standing in the middest, every Souldier facing towards him so that hee may see all their actions; and likewise they may heare his words of command, and observe how hee handles his Armes, that they may imitate him, and where he sees any one aukeward and ignorant, hee is speedily to step to him and to shew him how to demeane himselfe, the words of Command and the postures fol∣lowe in the next Chapter.

CHAP. LXXVI.

How an Officer is to demeane himselfe, in the Exercising of the Musquetieres, and how every Souldier is to observe and imitate him punctually, from Posture, to Posture.

THe Officer having disposed his men as before is shewed, him∣selfe standing in the middest of them, taking a Musquet in his hand, and Bandelieres about him, he shall command silence, and being presupposed they stand with their Bandiliers on, their match betweene their fingers, their Musquets shouldred, and their Rests in their hands; the Officer commands them to

• 1 Rest your Musquet.
  • This Pocture is performed, the Musquet being shouldred; First by slipping it,* 1.433 then bringing about the right hand, and grasping the Musquet at the breech, and at the same instant drawing in your right heele to your left ankle, with a small jutte of the shoulder, you raise the Peece, and poise it in the right hand being stretcht out, with the Musquet-rest in the left hand likewise stretch'd out; then bringing about your left hand and foot, you meet the Musquet with your Rest, placing it upon the ground aslant from you, your Thumbe pressing the side of the Barrell and the Forke of the Rest together, your right legge being brought a little forwards, standing with a full body towards the mouth of the Peece, the But end close to your side above your huckle bone.
• 2 Poise your Musquets.
  • This Posture is performed,* 1.434 by bringing up the right leg to the ankle of the left, the Peece being stayed upon the Rest by the pinching of the Thumbe, the right hand at the same motion graspes the Peece at the Breech, the middle joynt of the fore-finger plac'd under the Pan,* 1.435 the upper joynt next the hand just with the breech-pin, the Thumbe upon the inside of the Stocke, a little pressing downe the right hand, and raising the left with the Rest, you receive it and hold it at armes end, with the mouth plum upwards, the Rest in the left hand, with the Arme out-stretch'd, the right foot being removed side-wayes, at the same instant with the right hand, the body will stand full and comely.
• 3 Shoulder your Mus∣quet.
  • The Musquet being poised,* 1.436 you must bring about your right hand, drawing up the heele of your right foot, to your left ankle; and as your Musquet is ready to touch your left shoulder, you must at the same instant, bring about your left hand over the But end of the Peece, with the Rest in it, the ground end of your Rest pointing towards your right thigh, joyning the Sear•• of the Peece close to your shoulder; Note, when you intend to poise it as in the for∣mer posture, you must turne the point of your Rest in∣wards towarde your left thigh, and withall let the Peece slip a little, the Breech will lye fit for the right hand to re∣ceive it.
• ...

• 4 Take your Rest in your right hand fit for march.
  • There needs no great commenting upon this Posture, onely when the Musquet is shouldred, you are take the Rest into your right hand, for to be a stay unto you in your march.
• 5 Take your match be∣tweene the fingers of your right hand.* 1.437
  • This Posture is performed by bringing about your right hand, and betweene the fore-finger and thumbe thereof, take the Match within an inch of the Cole, from betweene the little and third finger of the left hand, then holding your right hand out from your body.
• 6. Put your Rest string about your left wrist, and carry your Rest in your left hand.
  • There needs no great circumstance about this Po∣sture, onely you having the Rest in your right hand upon a March, you now put on the String upon the left hand, holding the Rest in it over the But end of the Musquet, by which you are in a readinesse to make present use of it.
• 7 Returne your Match betweene the fingers of the Left hand.
  • This Posture is performed, having the Match be∣tweene the finger and the Thumbe of the right hand; you are to bring your Arme about towards the left hand, there placing the Cole end of the Match be∣tweene the middle and third finger thereof, the light end to the backe of the hand-ward, then taking the other end of the Match, and place it in like manner betweene the third and little finger, by this meanes it is not troublesome, but readie to bee used upon all occasions.
• 8 Vnshoulder your Musquet.
  • This Pcture is performed, by turning the point of your Rest outwards towards your left knee, and withall letting the Musquet slip a little downe your breast, the Breech of the Peece will lye faire for the right hand to take it with a graspe, just under the pan, with the middle joynt of the fore-finger; the uppermost joynt next the hand against the Breech-pin, and the thumbe upon the Stocke on the inner side, and with a small jutte (the left hand with the Rest being taken off from the Stocke) the right hand will poize it up, standing with a full body, the mouth of the Peece right up, and armes out-strecht, as more plainly in the first Posture is discourc'd of, not for∣getting to let the foot act with the hand.
• 9 Joyne your Rest to the outside of your Mus∣quet.
  • The Musquet being poised, you are to step for∣ward with your left leg, and withall bringing your left hand with your thumbe prest against the inner side of the Forke of your Rest, then drawing in your right elbow, you gently let the Musquet and the Rest meet, the upper side of the Forke plac'd against the out-side of the Stocke, the thumbe pressing the lower; and the end of the Rest lockt in the in••ide of the But end of the Peece, it rests in an equall ballance in the left hand.
• ...

• 10. Open.
• 11. Cleere
• 12. Prime
• 13. Shut
  • your Pan.
    • The Musquet and Rest being joyned together, with your two fore-fingers thrust betweene the Barrell and the tippe of the Pan, thrusting them side-wayes makes it open with ease, then with the boale of your thumbe prest downe in∣to the Pan and wrung about cleeres it; then take your Pri∣mer in your right hand, and knocking it gently against the side of the Pan, untill the concavity of it bee filled, then with your fingers shut ti, and a little turning the butte end of your Musquet from you give te a jogge or two.
• 14. Cast off your loose cornes.
  • The Musquet being primed,* 1.438 and the Pan shut, you are to turne the butte end from your right side a little distance, as the Peece rests upon the Rest, then with a shogge or two shake off the superfluous cornes of Powder, to prevent ta∣king of fire when you try your Match.
• 15. Blow off your loose cornes.
• 16. And cast about your Musquet to your left side.
  • This posture of blowing off the loose cornes is to be per∣formed, either the Musquet being rested (as I have said before) or when the Musquet and the Rest are joyned to∣gether; for the first you are onely to stoope with your head, and with a puffe or two blow them off, otherwise you are to bring the Musquet towards your head, tilluing the pan somewhat from you, and with a sudden strong blast beate them off, so that when the Match is tryed, it may not indanger the firing. Now for the casting about your Musquet after the loose cornes be blowne off, it is but slipping backe your left legge, and you holding your Mus∣quet and Rest together in your left hand; with your right hand you convey the butt end of the Peece on to the left side, and in the motion turne the stocke upwards, and let∣ting your Rest slip, you may easily charge.
• 17. Trayle your Rest.
• 18. Ballance your Mus∣quet in your left hand.
  • This posture is performed after the Musquet is brought about to the left side,* 1.439 stepping forward with your right foot, and at the same instant you bring about your Musquet; and withall your right hand graspes the barrell of the Peece some foote from the mouth, untill the Rest bee slipt and trayled, and the Peece ballanc'd in the left hand fit for to charge.
• 19. Charge
• 20. with
  • Powder, Bullet.
    • This Posture is performed after the Musquet is ballanc'd in your left hand, by taking one of the Charges of your Bandelieres in your right hand, and pulling the lidde of it off with your teeth; then thrusting the mouth of the charge into the bore of the Peece, giving it a shogge or two, that the Powder may empty into it; then giving the Peece another jogge with the butt end of it against the ground, to make the Powder sinke to the bottome of the barrell; then having your bullet ready in your mouth, and taking it in your right hand betweene your forefinger and thumbe, setting your right legge forwards towards the mouth of the Peece, as you bring your hand to the same, letting the bullet drop in with a jogge to sinke it to the Powder; or by ramming it downe with the Gunne-sticke.
• ...

• 21. Draw forth
• 22. Shorten
  • your scow∣ring-stick.
    • This Posture is performed by drawing forth the Scow∣ring-sticke with the right hand, at three even pulls, the lower side of your hand towards the upper end of the Musquet; the Scowring-sticke being thus produc'd, you are to shorten it against your breast, your hand slipping downe almost to the lower end of it, so that with ease it may bee put into the mouth, then thrusting it downe part of the way, at the second motion, and ramming downe the Pow∣der at the third.
• 23. Put your Scowring-stick into your Mus∣quet.
  • This Posture is performed (as before is said) after the Scowring-sticke is produc'd and shortned, the right hand holding it close by the lower end, the right foote being set out a pretty step towards the mouth of the Peece, is with ease put in, and rammed downe.
• 24. Ramme home your charge.
  • This is performed after the Scowring-sticke is entred the Bore of the barrell about a handfull, then at two moti∣ons more you thrust it downe to the Powder or Bullet, gi∣ving a good jobbe or two downe, that the Bullet may bee home to the Powder.
• 25. Withdraw
• 26. Shorten
• 27. Returne
  • your scowring sticke.
    • This Posture is performed by taking the Scowring-stick in your right hand, the upper-side of your hand towards the mouth of the Peece, so that all your fingers takes the stick flat about the middle, the joynts upon the outside of it, and the thumbe upon the inside, then making three even di∣stinct pulls in withdrawing it, turning your hand, so as the small end of the sticke is towards your breast, then shorten∣ing it against the same, you have it fit to returne into the stocke, which is to bee done likewise at three even por∣tions.
• 28. Bring forward your Musquet and Rest.
  • This Posture is performed after the Scowring-stick is returned by drawing backe your right foote, and bringing your Musquet with your left hand before you, so as the bar∣rell of the Peece may be towards your breast; the Rest is to trayle after by the string that hangs upon your wrist.
• 29. Poyze your Mus∣quet, and recover your Rest.
  • This Posture is performed, your right heele being drawne in towards the small of your left foot; at the same instant your right hand is to take the Peece below under at the great screw; then poyze it upwards, setting your Right foot out againe, then bringing your Rest forwards with your left hand, so farre as the string will permit, you shall easily receive it, and so with a full Body stand poysed.
• 30. Ioyne your Rest to the outside of your Mus∣quet.
  • The Posture is performed after the Musquet is poyzed, by drawing in your left heele towards the small of your right foot, your left hand holding the Rest close by the forke; and your thumbe pressing the end of the forke close, you bring it to the Musquet; then joyning the Rest to the out-side of the Musquet, and locking them fixe together by pressing the lower side of the forke with your thumbe, the Peece lyes firme in your left hand in one even ballance, your right hand being at freedome, and your left legge set out againe.
• ...

• 31 Draw forth your Match.
  • This posture is performed by drawing in the right heele to the small of the left foot, at the same instant bringing your right hand with a kinde of circumference towards your left; you are to take the Match betwixt the thumbe and second finger, then holding it out towards your right side, at the same instant you are to set out your right legge againe, your Musquet being held in a due height.
• 32 Blow your Cole.
  • Having taken the Match from between the little finger and the third finger of the left hand, betwixt the thumbe and second finger of the right hand within an inch of the coale of it; then bringing it towards your mouth, turning your head towards your right side stooping very little, you gently blow it, your right legge being let out forwards.
• 33 Cock
• 34 Fit
  • Your Match.
    • Having blowne your Match as aforesayd, you are to bring it with a little circumference to the Cocke, and are to fit it into the same with your thumbe and finger, not screwing it in, having before directed the widenesse of the Cocke to the thicknesse of the Match; your left legge being set forwards with the knee somewhat bending out.
• 35 Guard your Pan.
  • Having tryed and governed the Match with your thumbe and second finger, to the end you may set it higher, lower, shorter, or longer; and your left heele being drawn towards the small of your right foot, you are gently to lay the two fore fingers of the right hand full upon the Pan to defend the Powder from the sparkles of the Match.
• 36 Blow the ashes from your Cole.
  • Having guarded your Pan as aforesayd, and your left heele being drawne towards the small of your right foote, you are gently to raise the Peece up towards your mouth, and without stooping, blow off the ashes from your Cole.
• 37 Open your Pan.
  • Having blown off the ashes from the Cole (standing in the same posture as aforesayd) you are at the same instant, hand∣somely with your middle finger to shove aside the Pan lid; and removing your left legge forwards with the knee ben∣ding out.
• 38 Present upon your Rest.
  • Your left leg being set out as aforesayd, and your right hand having graspt the Musquet with your thumbe in the small of the Stocke, and your middle finger plac't against the tricker; then having plac'd the Musquet in the Rest, the mouth of it being kept at a reasonable height, and the low∣er end of your Rest being set forwards, the Butt end of your Peece will be plac'd full upon your right breast; then setting your right legge somewhat out side-wayes, standing with a full body towards the mouth of your Peeece, you shall bee ready to give fire.
• ...

• 39 Give fire breast high.
  • Having as before is shewed, presented well (viz) hol∣ding the Musquet and the Rest in the left hand, bearing the right Arme or elbowe somewhat up, and turning a little the body to the left side, the left knee bowed, and the right legge straight, and not laying your cheeke to the Stocke before you shall set the Musquet to your breast; then taking your ayme breast high, without starting or winking, you are gently to pull downe the tricker, and so give fire with a full body upon the Enemy.
• 40 Dismounte your Musquet, joyning your Rest to the outside of your Musquet.
  • You having discharged, must pull in your right legge a little; then thrusting your Musquet a little forwards, you shall joyne your Rest to the outside of your Musquet, hold∣ing it in an even ballance in your left hand, not forgetting to hold the mouth up; (especially if it hath not gone off) for feare of hurting any man.
• 41 Vncocke and returne your Match.
  • Your right heele being drawne towards the small of your left foote; you are to bring about your right hand in a comely manner, and with your thumbe and second finger pull the Match out of the Cocke, and returne it betweene the two last fingers of the left hand.
• 42 Cleere
• 43 Shut
  • your Pan.
    • You standing in the same posture as before; after you have returned your Match, you are with the thumbe of your right hand to run the Pan and cleare it, that no sparkles may remaine: then with your fore-finger you are to thrust the cover of the Pan close: after you have blowne off the sparkles.
• 44 Poize
• 45 Shoul∣der
  • your Mus∣quet.
    • After you have cleared and shut your Pan, you must graspe your Musquet with your right hand close by the britch-pin, as in the second Posture is shewed: then raising the Musquet with your left hand, you poize it up, holding the mouth of it right upwards, your right arme being stret∣ched out, your rest remaining in your left hand likewise ex∣tended: then drawing your right heele to the small of your left foote, at the very instant your right hand brings the Musquet to your left shoulder; your left hand with the Rest in it being ready (the same moment) to embrace it at the butt end, the Seare being thrust close to your shoulder; then removing your right legge againe to his former station, you stand upright with a full body.
• 46 Take the Match be∣tweene the fingers of the right hand.
  • To performe this, view the posture before descri∣bed at the figure 5. onely the Match is to bee placed be∣tweene your fingers of your right hand; as before it was in the left:
• 47 Take your Rest in∣to your right hand, clea∣ring your string from your wrist.
  • This is to be performed first by drawing in your right heele to the small of your left foote, and withall bringing your right hand to your left, you receive the Rest, clearing your left wrist from the string.
• ...

• 48 Returne your Rest into your left hand, the String loose.
  • This is performed as the former Posture is, at the Fi∣gure 47 in reverse.
• 49 Return your Match into your left hand.
  • This is performed as the former Posture is at the Fi∣gure 5.
• 50 Vnshoulder your Musquet and Poize.
  • This is performed, as the former Posture is; at the Fi∣gure 8.
• 51 Rest your Mus∣quet.
  • This is likewise performed, as is shewed in the former Posture, at the Figure 1.
• 52 Set the But end of your Musquet upon the ground.
  • You are to dismount your Musquet off the Rest, then placing the But end of it upon the ground, close by the outside of your right foot, with the Stocke towards you, your right hand holding it somewhat more than halfe way towards the mouth; you stand with a full body boult up∣right, with the Musquet in the same manner by your right side.
• 53 Lay down your
  • Mus∣quet & Rest. Match
    • This Posture is performed, by stepping forwards with your right foot (your selfe and Peece, standing as in the pre∣cedent Posture) then declining with your body, you lay it downe gently with the mouth in a right line from you, and and the locke upwards; after the same manner also your Rest and Match is to be disposed of.
• 54 Take off
• 55 Lay down
  • your Bande∣liers.
    • After your hands are free from your Musquet, Match, and Rest, you may with your left hand take off your Hat, which may hinder you, and with your right hand neatly convey them over your head, and so (as before) lay them downe along by the side of your Musquet, but so as the Match may not fire them.
• 56 March from your Armes.
  • This is principally used to make the Souldiers apt and ready to finde their owne places againe, and to be quicke in re-arming themselves upon a suddaine Allarme.

The Sentinell Posture is no otherwise, then having your Musquet rested, primed, and charged with powder and Bullet, for your better ease and readinesse to give fire upon the Enemy, to make an Allarme, you, stand at that Posture with the But end of your Musquet at your right huckle bone, with a light match cockt, the mouth of the Peece somewhat mounting, and your hand grasping the Stocke, with your finger upon the Seare: And this shall suffice for the Postures of the Musquet, onely you are to draw your Files into an even body againe, fit to joyne with the Body of Pikes.

CHAP. LXXVII.

How a•• Officer is to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 himselfe, in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Pikes, and 〈…〉〈…〉 Souldier ••s to imitate him punctually from Posture to Posture.

THe Officer having disposed his Pi••••emen as before is shewed, and standing in the midst of the Ring with a Pike in his hand, after he hath ••••••••••••∣ded silence, and being presupposed that the Souldiers stand with their Pikes advanc'd; The Officer commands them to

• Order your Pikes.
  • This Posture is performed (the Pike being advanc'd) by drawing in your left heele towards the small of your right foot, and at the same instant raising your left hand as farre as you can indifferently stretch it, you graspe the Pike in it, towards the top of your head, then loosening your right hand which holds the But end of the Pike, and withall sink∣ing your left hand with the Pike in it as low as your skirts, you againe raise up your right hand, and guiding the Pike with your left, you place the But end of it by the out-side of your right foot, your right hand holding it even with your eye, and your thumbe right up, then removing your legge to his former station, your left arme being set a kimbo by your side, you shall stand with a full body in a comely Po∣sture.
• Advance your Pikes.
  • The Pike being ordered as in the former Posture is shew∣ed, without changing of your hold, you must with your right hand lift the Pike a little from the ground, and taking it suddainly againe with the left hand towards the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 end, leaving so much length below, as you can afterwards reach well with the right hand, where it is stayed in the fist at the full length of the arme, hanging right downewards; your fore-finger and thumbe close at the But end, resting it close to your thigh, and bearing against the shoulder close to your breast, causeth it to stand firme and upright, with∣out wavering.
• Shoulder your Pike.
  • This Posture may be performed, eyther when the Pike is advanc'd, or ordered; (If advanc'd) then your left hand is to be brought about to your right side, and being stretcht upwards, you are to take hold of the Pike towards the top of your head, then loosening your right hand which holds the But end, the left hand sinkes the Pike downewards, sloping in a right line forwarns; so that the right hand re∣ceiving the second hold as high as it can conveniently reach, and graspes the Pike with the thumbe long-wayes upon the Pike, and underneath it. Then your left hand lea∣ving its former hold, immediately graspes the Pike just be∣low your right hand, and so both hands being joyned to∣gether, they gently conveyes it unto the right shoulder, leaving the right fist close prest to the Plate bone thereof; with your right elbow close downe by your side, and your left elbow set a kimbo, you stand with an upright full body. Note, that in acting this Posture, your feet are not to bee removed eyther backwards or forwards, but occasionally side-wayes; as the hands are imployed in the executing this Posture: some never stirre any foot at all, I leave it as a thing indifferent.
• ...

• Levell your Pikes.
  • This is performed the Pike being shouldered, by bring∣ing your left hand to the Pike, and grasping it close under your right hand (and withall at the same instant drawing in your left heele towards the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of your right foot) then with an even motion of both your hands, you are to raise the butte end of your Pike, untill it lyes levell upon your shoulder; then returning your hand and foot to their due places, you shall stand in a fai•••• Posture. This may bee performed without moving the foot, but then it hath not the like grace with it:
• Slope your Pikes.
  • This Posture is performed in the same kind the former was, only the hands presseth downe the butte end of the Pike, within halfe a foote of the ground, which causeth it to lye right sloping.
• Charge your Pikes to the Front.
  • This Posture may be performed; either when the Pike is advanced, or shouldered; wherealso you must further ob∣serve, whether it be to be acted standing, or Marching; If so be your Pike bee advanced, and you are to act this Po∣sture standing; Then you must only slip backe your right hand, and your right foote a good stride, placing your foote side-wayes from your body; Then with your left hand, you are to receive the Pike about a yard from the butte end, holding your elbow, in an even distance from your body, with your hand close to your breast, so that the Pike may have the more freedome to play forwards and backwards, just breast-high of a man, your left knee being bent for wards, and your body yeelding towards the point of the Speare, so as you may not easily be thrust back by the Enemy. If your Pike be shouldered, then you must receive the Pike in your left hand a pretty reach downewards, t••wards the butte end of the same; at the same instant you are to raise the Pike with your right hand from your shoulder, and with your left hand draw in the butt end of the same to∣wards the outside of your right thigh, then slipping backe your right foote and hand, you receive the butt-end of it, you charge it as before is shewed.
  • If this Posture be to be performed Marching (your Pike being shouldred) then first steppe forwards with your right foote, and let your left hand receive the Pike, and e∣quall distance (from your right hand) towards the butt-end of the same, raising your Pike forwards with your right hand from your shoulder, then at the same instant step forwards with your left foot, and receive the butt-end of the Pike, with your right hand, just behind the side of your right thigh.
  • But to performe this Posture, ••rooping, and your Pike advanced; then you are only to step forwards with your left foot; and with a little shogge of the shoulder, and drawing backe the butt-end of your Pike in your right hand, will cause the Pike to fall forwards, where your left hand is at the instant to be ready to receive it betweene the Thumbe and the forefingers at a convenient distance.
• ...

• Charge to the Horse.
  • Note in charging to the Horse it hath beene in former ages used, to place the but-end of your Pike in the ground by the inside of your right foot, and so to draw your Sword over your left arme; and divers Rankes of Mus∣quetiers plac'd to shoot over their heads behind them: No question it is a very good way for your Bow-pikes; but the former charging is most in use.
• Charge to the Reare.
  • You may by the precedent Posture conceive how to charge your Pike, either to the right or left hand; But for the charging to the Reare, the Pikes being either shoulde∣red or advanced, is somewhat difficult.
  • Therefore you may please to observe, that if the Pike bee advanced, you must with your left hand take it in his pro∣per place up towards your head, then suddenly turning your body about towards your left hand, and being faced about, you are to thrust backe your right hand with the butt-end of the Pike in it, and withall your right leg is to be set out with it; this will bring you into the right Posture.
  • But if your Pike be shouldered (and you are to charge to the Reare) then you must take the Pike in your left hand, a good distance from your right hand towards the butt-end, and at the same instant with your right hand, raise the Pike from your shoulder as high above your head to∣wards your left side as possibly you may, then standing firme with your left legge, you are to bring about your right side and legge towards the left hand about, and being halfe turned, you are to let loose your right hand, and with your left hand you are somewhat to advance the point of the Pike forwards, so that the butt-end may bee drawne backe by your right side for your right hand to receive it, your right foot also at the very instant being stept backe, makes you stand fully charged.
• Port your Pikes.
  • This Posture is performed by holding the Pike a halfe distance betweene advancing and charging; and was only invented to case the hind most Rankes from the intollerable labour of continuall charging, and to secure the Pikes from the Bullets, which would have more power to breake them if they hold them advanc'd.
  • Besides, it is the most aptest and comliest Posture for a Company to use in marching thorow a Port or Gate, and most readiest for to charge upon a sudden.
• Checke your Pike.
  • This Posture is to be performed at three Motions; First if your Pike be shouldered, you are to raise it with your right hand from your shoulder, and with a ticke of your left hand, you are to convey the butt-end of it by your right side, then thrusting backe your right with the Pike in it so farre as conveniently may be; you are to take a fathom with your left hand as farre towards the Speare end of the Pike as possibly you may; then conveying the Pike in your left hand baackward as before, you are againe with your right hand to take another fathome, within a foot of your Pikes end; Lastly, stepping forwards with your left foote, you bring your left hand withall, which receives the Pike with∣in a quarter of a foot of the Speares end, Provided alwayes that in all the motions of the hands, you suffer not the butt-end to touch the ground, untill you have checkt it with your left hand. Pikes as you were.
• ...

• Trayle your Pikes.
  • This Posture is performed after you have used the Cir∣cumstances in checking (as in the precedent Posture is shewed) by bringing up your Right foot even with your left, and by removing your right hand just before your left, close to the end of the Pike, then you are to withdraw your left hand, and place it a-kimbo by your side, and your right hand will hold the end of the Speare just above your right huckle-bone, with your body standing full forwards. Pikes as you were.
• Lay downe your Pikes.
  • This Posture is to bee performed your Pike being ad∣vanced, by stepping forwards with your right foot, then your right shoulder with a small bearing forwards, and with it a little jogge, causeth the Pike to meet the left hand, which gently conveyes the Speares end to the ground, then turning about your right arme in a kind of Circle, will cause the backe of your hand to bee next the outside of your right Thigh; then leaning your body for∣wards, you convey the butt-end to the ground, close at the side of your right foot, so as the Pike will lye in an even line from your foot forwards.
• Recover your Pikes and charge.
  • This Posture is performed your feet standing even toge∣ther, only owing your body forwards, you cause the backe of your right hand to bee put downe close by the out-side of your right foot, then in the raising of the butt-end of your Pike, you turne your hand with the Pike in it, so that the inside of your hand will bee towards your right side; Then your left hand in the raising, taketh the Pike at a con∣venient place or distance, and elevates it either to the Po∣sture of charging or ordering, as the Officer shall please to command; The word of Command which the Officer is to use for the reducing of these Postures to their first station is; Pikes as you were.
  • There are divers other Postures which I doe here omit, referring you to the booke of Militarie discipline, Compo∣sed by that worthy Gentleman, Master William Barrife, Lieutenant to the Artillery Garden, who hath merited much honour in performing so Noble a worke, in a most concise, and exquisite way, for the which our Kingdome is much bound to him.

CHAP. LXXVIII.

How the Commanders shall draw their Files, both of Musquetiers and Pikes, and joyne them in one body, fit to be exercised in grosse.

YOu have seene every Souldier performe his Postures well, then you must draw out the File-leader of the Right-hand-file, with his whole File, Commanding every File-leader successively to draw up his File, either of other; And being drawne into a body, command them to ad∣vance their Pikes.

In the meane time the Lieutenant or some other Officer is to divide the Musquetiers (they being drawne into a body, as aforesaid) into two equall parts or Divisions; if there should bee an odde File in one of the Divisions, it makes no matter.

Next you are to draw up your body of Pikes betweene those Divisions of

Musquets, fronting them with the Musquets in an even line.

Or otherwise, you may draw your Musquetiers upon the left wing of your body of Pikes, their Front and Rankes being placed even one against another; you are to command the Pikes to open their Rankes, and to order their Pikes; the Musquetiers are to have all their Musquets Rested.

Then commanding the right-hand-division (only) to shoulder their Musquets, and to face to the Right-hand.

Then commanding them to March even, through the Rankes of the Pikes an or∣dinary distance beyond them, and causing them to face to the left-hand, will bring them into true order with the Pikes.

Next you are to command the residue, or left wing of Musquets to shoulder their Peeces, and to face to the right hand, and advance them forwards to the side of the Pikes; observing their distance betwixt them; then facing them to the Left hand makes them stand even with the Pikes.

Or if you please, you may make use of a third way, to draw your Musquetiers up∣on either Wing of your Pikes.

Your Pikes being first drawne into a square body, and your Musquetiers in a like square body, being drawne up to the reare of the Pikes.

You may command them to double their Front to the Right and left hand by Division, which is in this kind performed;

One halfe of the Files of Musqueteirs are to face to the right hand, and the other halfe to the left hand, either Division marching after they are turned right forwards about sixe foot beyond the flankes of the Pikes.

Then that Division of Musquetiers which marched towards the left-hand, you are to command them to face to the right hand.

And the division of Musquetiers that marched to the right hand, you are to com∣mand them to face to the Left.

Then both the divisions of Shotte at one instant in an even order, are to March up by the side of the Pikes, untill they front even with them.

These things being thus performed, you are to command your Musquetiers to shoulder their Musquets and slope them.

You are likewise to command your Pikemen to advance their Pikes, and then begin to exercise them in their Motions as followeth, having first ordered them in their distance for Motion at six foote both in Ranke and File.

CHAP. LXXIX.

How a Commander shall exercise his Company in grosse, in their proper Motions, after hee hath drawne the Shotte upon either Wing of the Body of Pikes: with the words of Command for the performance thereof; as also for the reducing them to their first station.

HAving duly performed those Circumstances specified in the former Chapter, and now standing in the head of your Company; the Lieute∣nant in the Reare, and the Serjeants upon either Flanke, after you have commanded silence, and also to stand right in their Rankes and Files, you shall command them to.

Faces to the right hand.

This Motion is performed only by turning your body to the place where your right hand stood,* 1.440 not moving your right foot at all, but turning it a little upon the ball; and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this word of Command (As you were) so turning to the left hand againe, brings them to their former station.

• Faces to the left hand.
  • This motion is performed by turning your body to the place where your left hand stood,* 1.441 bringing your left legge somewhat about, and onely turning your right foot a little upon the Ball: and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this Word of Command (As you were) so turn∣ing off to the right hand, brings them to their first Station.
• Faces to the right hand about.
  • This motion is performed, by turning of your body round about by the right hand, so that your face stands where your back parts did, and to reduce them to their former station, you must use this Word of Command, (To the left hand about as you were) so turning backe againe by the left hand, brings them to their first Station.
• Faces to the left hand about.
  • This motion is performed,* 1.442 by turning of your body round about by the left hand, so that your face stands where your backe parts did: and to reduce them to their former Sta∣tion, you must use this word of Command (To the right hand about as you were) so turning backe againe by the right hand, brings them to their first Station.

These motions of facing being perfectly done, you shall command the whole Company to front to the right hand, and cause them there to begin anew the afore∣said motions; where ten to one, you shall finde them anew to seeke; so fronting them from hand to hand round about, will make them perfect; otherwise, they will be to seeke, as oft as you alter your Front.

CHAP. LXXX.

Of Facing Square, and how to performe it; The usefulnesse of Facings, and the severall parts thereof.

FAcings are so usefull and necessary, that a Commander may as well dispence with any one of the grounds of Disci∣pline as with them; for upon all occasions in Service they are usefull, and not onely sooner executed than any other of the motions, but may be needfull when wheelings and Counter-marches cannot be used, as in a strait. There are no more than foure faces intire, besides Angular; as in the precedent Chapter is shewed; But as for your divisionall there be divers which I have omitted.

Intire Facings, are so called, when the aspect of the whole Companie is directed one way.

Divisionall Facings are so called, when the aspect of the Souldiers is at one and the same time directed divers wayes; as to the Front and Reare, the Right, the Right and Left, or to all foure at once, &c.

Angular Facings are so called, when the Aspect of the Companie is directed to the right Corner man, which is the right Angle, or to the left Corner man, which is the left Angle, or to the foure Corner men, which are termed the foure Angles.

These Angular Facings, amongst the Grecians were of great use, for they made use of them by reducing out of the Square, a Diamond Battell; and from the Dia∣mond, they reduc'd two Triangles, by cutting or dividing the same in the middest at the two flat Angles; and of two Triangles they framed a Sheere Battell; and of three or foure Triangles, they framed their Saw-Battell, &c.

Now for the instructing of your Souldiers how to Face Square (if the body bee

but eight in depth) you must command the two first Rankes to stand fast, likewise the two last Rankes are to face about, the rest of the Body, are to face to the Right and Left; if the Body be deeper, then you must command more Rankes to the Front, and so likewise to the Reare; and in the viewing the subsequent Figure, you shall the better understand the manner of performing this motion of Square Facing.

Face Square, and March.

Proper Front.

[illustration]

* 1.443

Front accidentall.

Front accident all.

The Front of the Reere.

The Words of Command commonly used to produce this precedent Figure, are these as followeth, if they be 10 in depth, and 20 in Ranke.

The first three Rankes stand.

The three last Rankes face about.

The rest of the Body face to the Right and Left, (then) March all.

To reduce them to their first Order:

Face all about to the Right; March, and close your Divisions.

Face all to your Leader, (who then stands at his Front proper.)

Another way of facing Square, and Marching upon it.

The Front proper.

[illustration]

The Front of the left Flanke.

The Front of the right Flank.

The Front of the Reere.

The words of Command customarily used to produce this Figure, are these as followeth.

Musquetiers, face to the right and left.

Halfe-files of Pikes, faces about to the right (then) March all.

To reduce them to their former order.

Face all about to the right, March and close your Divisions.

Face all to your Leader.

In the next Chapter I shall shew the manner of Opening and Closing both of Files and Rankes; and then some instructions of doubling them, with their use and parts.

CHAP. LXXXI.

The manner of opening, and closing, both of Rankes and Files, and how to double them with the use and parts there∣unto belonging.

IN the opening, and closing of Rankes and Files, there are divers things considerable, as first in the motion of Files, you are to observe your Leader.

Secondly, in your motion of Rankes, you are to ob∣serve your right-hand 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

Thirdly, when Files open to the right, the Left-hand-file, must stand fast, every 〈◊〉〈◊〉 taking 〈◊〉〈◊〉 distance from the File next his left hand.

Fourthly, when they open to the Le, then the right hand File stands; every File taking his distance from the File next his Right hand.

Fiftly, in closing of Files if it be to the right, then contrary to the opening the Right-hand-file stands: the rest closing to the right taking then Distance, from their next right hand-file.

Sixthly, if you close to the left, then the Left-hand-file stands, the rest of the Files closing to the left, taking their distance in like manner.

Seventhly, when Files close to the right and left, then they close inwards, taking their distance from the Files within them, neerer to the middest of the body.

Eighthly, note when Files are commanded to open to the right and left (or by di∣vision) it must be outward.

Likewise you must observe when Rankes open forwards, then the last Ranke stands, every Ranke taking his distance from the Ranke next behind him.

Secondly, when they open backwards, then the first Ranke is to stand, and every Ranke is to take his distance from the Ranke next before him.

Thirdly, if Rankes close to Front and Reare, then the first and last Ranke stands, the other taking their distances from them.

Fourthly, if they close Rankes towards the Center or middest, then they close to∣wards their two middlemost rankes.

Lastly, you are to observe, that in opening of Files and Ranks, you are (in the act∣ing of it) either to face to the right, or to the right about; these things being consi∣dered, and you hauing commanded them to even their Rankes, and straighten their Files, you are to use these words of Command following

Rankes and Files to your close order.* 1.444

• Files open to the right
• Rankes open forwards
  • to your Order.
• Files open to the right
• Rankes open forwards
  • to your open order.
• Files open to the right
• Rankes open forwards
  • to your double distance.
• Files close to the Right
• Rankes close forwards
  • to your open order.
• Files close to the right
• Rankes close forwards
  • to your order.
• Files close to the Right
• Rankes close forwards
  • to your close order.
• Files open to the Left
• Rankes open backwards
  • to your order.
• ...

• Files, open to the left.
• Rankes, open backwards.
  • to your open order.
• Files, open to the left.
• Rankes, open backwards.
  • to your double distance.
• Files, close to the left.
• Rankes close backward.
  • to your open order
• Files, close to the left.
• Rankes, close backward.
  • to your order.
• Files, close to the left.
• Rankes, close backward.
  • to your close order.
• Files,
• Rankes,
  • open to the
    • right and left
    • front and reare.
      • to your order.
• Files,
• Rankes,
  • open to the
    • right and left
    • front and reare
      • to your open order.
• Files,
• Rankes,
  • open to the
    • right and left,
    • front and reare,
      • to your double distance.
• Files,
• Rankes,
  • close to the
    • right and left inward
    • middest,
      • to your open order.

These motions being performed by the Souldiers fairly, and with out mistakes; you may proceed to exercise them, in their doublings; and shew them their use and parts; as the following Chapter will direct.

CHAP. LXXXII.

How an Officer shall exercise his Company in doubling of their Rankes and Files with the use thereof, and the severall parts and branches thereto belonging.

THe use of doublings were invented for the strengthe∣ning of any part of the Battell, according to the discre∣tion of the wise Commander, and are distinguished in∣to these two generalls, viz. doublings of length, and doublings of depth.

Doubling of Rankes doth make the number double so much as was before, whereby the length of the Battell is extended to the double proportion of ground.

Doubling of Files (or Flankes) doth likewise double the number in depth; as the former did in length: and before wee proceed to particularize these doublings; let us take notice of these obser∣vations following.

First, that in this motion of doubling there is one part of the body stands firme and the other part moves, viz. the standing part is to be doubled, the part moving are those that double.

Secondly, observe that the distance for particular and divisionall doublings, is open Order in Ranke and File.

Thirdly, observe that the ordinary doublings of Rankes and Files is or ought to be performed by three steps; viz, first stepping forth with that foote which is next un∣to the place named.

Fourthly, in the reducement to your former station, you must returne by the con∣trary hand.

Fifthly, observe in doubling of Rankes and Files, viz, if you double Rankes either to the right or left hand; if you double your Files to the contrary hand, reduceth them into their former station; or in doubling of Files to either hand; doubling of your rankes to the contrary will reduce them.

Lastly, observe the severall parts or branches of doublings; which are,

• Doublings of
  • First, Rankes.
  • Secondly, Halfe-Files.
  • Thirdly, Bringers up.
  • Fourthly, The Reare.
  • Fifthly, Files.
  • Sixthly, Halfe-Rankes,

The first is doubling of Rankes, which is performed when every Even-ranke is doubled into the Odde.

The second is, when the halfe Files double their Rankes forwards into the Front.

The third is, when the Bringers-up double their Rankes forwards into the Front.

The fourth is, when the Front halfe Files doubleth the Reare: these first foure be∣ing doublings of Rankes, causeth the length of the Battell to be extended either sim∣ply in number, or both in number and place.

The fift is, the ordinary doubling of Files, viz. every one of the even Files being inserted into the odde Files; accounting from the hand named.

The sixt and last is, the doubling of halfe Rankes; which is to be understood when one Flanke doubles the other, either by passing through, Counter-march, doubling entire, or divisionall;

The words of Command most properly used for doublings.

• Rankes, to the
  • Right
  • Left.
    • double.
• Rankes, as you were.
• Files, to the
  • Right.
  • Left.
    • double.
  • Files, as you were.

• Bringers up, double your Rankes forward to the right.
• Bringers up, face about to the left: march forth into your places.
• Bringers up, double your Rankes forward to the left.
• Bringers up, face about to the right: march forth into your places.

• Files, to the right and left double.
  • Outward,
  • Inward.
    • Files, as you were.

• Halfe Files, double your Rankes forward to the right.
• Halfe Files, face about to the left: march forth into your places.
• Halfe Files, double yur Rankes forwards to the left.
• Halfe Files, face about to the right: march forth into yrur places.

• Front halfe Files, face about to the Left.
  • And double the Reare to the right.
  • March forth into your places.

• Front halfe Files, face about to the right.
  • And double the Reare to the left.
  • March forth into your places,

• Front Halfe-files double the Reare to the Right by Counter-march.
• Front Halfe-files face about to the left; March forth into your places.
• Front Halfe-files double the Reere to the left by Counter-march.
• Front Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.
• Halfe Rankes to the Right by Counter-march double your Left Flanke,
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the Right; March forth into your places.
• Halfe-Rankes to the left by Counter-march, double your Right flanke.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the Left; March forth into your places;
• Halfe-rankes of the Right, double your left flanke.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the right; March forth into your places.
• Halfe Rankes of the left, double your right flanke.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face to the left. March forth into your places.
• Halfe-files double your front to the right intire.
• Halfe-files face about to the left; March forth into your places.
• Halfe-files double your front to the left intire.
• Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.
• Halfe-files double your front inward intire.
• Halfe-files face about to the right; March forth into your places.
• Halfe-files double your front by division.
• Halfe-files, face about to the right and left; March forth into your places.
• Front halfe-files, double your Reare by Division.
• Front halfe-files, face about to the right and left inward; March to your places.
• Front halfe-files, double your reare to the right intire.
• Front halfe-files, face about to the left; March forth into your places.
• Front halfe-files, double your Reare to the left intire.
• Front halfe-files, face about to the right; March forth into your places:
• Halfe-rankes of the right, double your left flanke, intire to the right.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the left; March forth into your places.
• Halfe-rankes of the left, double your right flankes intire to the left.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the right; March into your places.
• Halfe-rankes of the right, double your left flanke by Division.
• Halfe-rankes that doubled, face about to the right, and left inward; March forth into, &c.
• Double your Rankes to the right intire.
• Rankes that doubled, face to the left; March forth into your places.
• Double your Rankes to the left intire.
• Rankes that doubled face to the right; March forth into your places.
• Double your Rankes by Division.
• Rankes that doubled, face to the right and left inward; March forth into your places.
• Double your Files to the right intire advancing.
• Files that doubled, face about to the left; March forth into your places.
• Double your files to the left intire advancing.

• Files that doubled face about to the right: March forth into your places.
• Files double your depth intire to the
  • Right,
  • Left.
    • Files that doubled, as you were.
• Files double your depth to the Right: every man falling behinde his Bringer-up.
• Files that doubled, as your were.

Thus have I runne over the Words of Command, whereby the doubling both of Rankes and Files are produc'd, and also the aptest way and termes to reduce them to their first forme and station, as for demonstrating them by Figure, it would bee too tedious; in regard I am to discourse of all the parts belonging to the Body of Warre; wherefore I shall onely exemplifie them, by discourse in the following Chapter.

CHAP. LXXXIII.

Directions how to performe those severall kindes of doublings: and how to reduce them againe, according to the fore-going Words of Command, for producing and reducing them.

HAving spoken briefly in the fore-going Chapter, concerning the seve∣rall kindes of doublings, and mentioned both the words of Com∣mand, which produceth them; and also the words of Direction for the reducing of them to their first Forme and Station; In this Chapter, I shall endeavour to set downe briefe directions, how they may best be performed; with the readiest way for the executing of them. The Words of Command (you shall finde in the Margent) which produceth each severall motion, of doubling both of Rankes and Files.

• Rankes to the Right double.
  • This doubling of Rankes to the Right, is naught else but the inserting of the Even-rankes into the Odde-rankes; wherein you must note, that in the doubling of Rankes, the Even-rankes are to double into the Odde, beginning al∣wayes to reckon from the first Ranke; so that the second Ranke doubles into the first, entring in upon the Right hand of him that stands in the Ranke right before him, and so stands even a-Brest with them. The fourth Ranke, after the same manner doubles upon the right hand of him that stands before him in the third Ranke. The sixt Ranke after the same manner doubles into the fifth Ranke. The eighth into the seventh, and the tenth into the ninth. So that the Right-hand man of that Ranke that doubleth to the Right, is alwayes to take his place upon the outermost side of the Right-hand man of that Ranke that was doubled, the rest of his Ranke doing accordingly. After the same manner, it is to be performed to the Left hand, onely now you are to take the left hand of him that stands in the Ranke before you after the same manner as before you did the Right. For the reducing of them, those Rankes that doubled, must turne off to the contrary hand of that they doubled unto: The Command is, Rankes as you were. Or otherwise you may reduce them, by commanding the Leaders to draw out their Files, (viz.) those Rankes that doubled, are to stand firme; and those that were doubled are to march out, untill their last Ranke be a pretty distance before the first Ranke of them that doubled, and then they are to step into their Even distances, and stand even in Ranke and File, as before.
• ...

• Files to the Left double.
  • The words of Command which produceth this doubling of Files is placed in the Margent: * 1.445 And the way to per∣forme it is as followeth; First each of the even Files dou∣bleth into the odde Files, beginning from the hand named; as in this doubling of Files to the Left; The Left-hand-file stands fast, and the second File doubleth into it by stepping behinde his Left-hand-man at three steppes; The fourth File doubleth into the third, and so for the rest; If your Com∣mand be to double your Files to the right; then contrari∣wise the Right-hand-file stands fast; the rest of the even Files doubling into the odde, accounting from the Right, as before from the Left; And by the way observe, that as in doubling of Rankes any way, you are to observe your Right-hand leader; So in doubling of Files you are to ob∣serve your File-leader; so that as neere as possibly may bee, you may either in Ranke or File, be altogether in one mo∣tion; Also take notice that this kind of doubling, is a doub∣ling of number, and not of place, for the depth of the Battel is not thereby extended, the words of Command used for the reducing of them is, Files as you were.
• Bringers up, double your Rankes forward to the Right.
  • In this doubling of Rankes by Bringers-up, as likewise in all other of like nature; * 1.446 they that are to move, are first to advance their Armes; in the next place they must bee sure to observe their Right-hand-men. This doubling of Rankes by Bringers-up differeth from the other doubling of Ranks before demonstrated, both in quantity and qualitie: In quantitie it differeth, in regard the other leaves a large di∣stance betweene Ranke and Ranke, being double the di∣stance they formerly stood at. This contrariwise continu∣ing and preserving the same distance they formerly stood at betweene each Ranke; It differeth also in quality, be∣cause it brings the best, and second sort of Souldiers, toge∣ther into the Front; The words of Command, and directi∣on (whereby this motion is produced) is placed in the Margent; The manner of performing this Motion is thus; the tenth or last Ranke, which are the bringers up, are to passe forwards even in ranke, through or betweene the In∣tervals to the right of them that stand before them, untill they come even in Ranke with the Front; the ninth Ranke following those which marched from behind them, placing themselves in the second Ranke. The eight eight Ranke in the third. The seventh Ranke in the fourth. The sixt ranke or Halfe-files, in the fifth or reare of the front halfe-files. This doubling maketh a very able Front in bringing the ablest Souldiers together, and al∣though the depth of the Battell bee diminished, yet the length of it is double in number; this doubling is in quan∣tity of number, not of ground.
  • When you march into your places, you must not forget, that the Ranke which last toke his place in the execution of this Motion, must first march into his place in the way of reducement, for as they are led forth by their brin∣gers up, contrariwise they are led off by their halfe-file Lea∣ders. As for the doubling the Front to the Left hand by Bringers up, it is the same; onely differing in this, that whereas it was to the Right, this must bee performed to the Left; The Words of Command and direction for re∣ducement

• ...
  • of this motion is, Bringers up, face about to the left, march forth into your places.
• Files, to the right and left double outwards;
  • I will in the first place describe the manner of doubling of Files outwards; * 1.447 which worketh the same effect, as to double Files to the right and left; for the right Flanke is to double to the right, and the left Flanke to the left; by this doubling of Files to the right and left outwards both the Flankes at one instant are strengthened by doubling their number in depth; but it weakeneth the inward part, where it taketh two Files cleane away, leaving a large in∣tervall in the midst; after the word of command is given; the outmost File of each Flanke stands, and the second File doubles into them; the third from each Flanke stands, and the fourth File doubles into the third, the sixt into the fift, and so likewise of all the rest. Note, that in doubling of Files you must alwayes step behinde the side-man that you are to double into.
  • If you would double Files to the right and left inwards; it is to be done the contrary way: * 1.448 for whereas in the prece∣dent doubling the outmost Files stand; and the other dou∣bling outwards in to them: Contrariwise in this; the two inmost Files shall stand, and the rest are to double inwards to them; and whereas in the other there is a larger distance in the midst then in any other part; but in this doubling inwards the midst will be as close as any other part; the words of Command for the reducing of them into their first forme is; Files, as you were. Then the Files which doubled inwards upon the right Flanke are to turne off to the right, and those of the left Flanke to the left; and so step into their places.
  • This doubling of rankes forewards by halfe-files; * 1.449 is a motion generally approved of to be very serviceable. It differeth from the other doublings by Bringers-up in quali∣ty though not in quantity (for in quantity they keepe one and the same proportion) In quality it differs thus: the doubling by Bringers-up doth bring the best and second sort of Souldiers together into the Front; the fourth and third sort into the Reare; so that the Reare is 4/7 worse then the front. But this doubling by halfe-files brings the best and the third together into the front; and leaves the se∣cond and fourth in the Reare; so that the Front is made more able then the Reare by 1/3.
• Halfe-Files, double your Rankes, forwards to the right.
  • It differeth like wise in motion thus: for whereas in the other doubling by Bringers-up the motion was begun by the last ranke, ever ranke following the ranke which came from behind him. But this contrariwise is directly led forth by the sixt ranke from the front (they being ten deepe in File) and so is executed more surely and suddainly.
  • After the words of Command are give (as you see pla∣ced in the Margent;) then the sixt ranke passing up into the first; the seventy ranke into the second; the eighth Ranke into the third; and so for the rest. For the reducement the words of Command are, Halfe-Files face about to the left, march forth into your places. Then as the motion was led on by the halfe File Leaders; so in the Reducement they are led off by the Bringers up.
  • You may double your halfe-Files to the left after the same manner of the former; only changing to the contrary hand.
• ...

• Front, halfe Files; face about to the left, and double your reare to the right.
  • This doubling the Reare by front halfe Files; is differing from the doubling last discourst of more in manner then matter; * 1.450 For they both correspond in Substance, onely they differ in circumstance: After the words of command, and direction are given (as is exprest in the margent;) then the Front halfe Files are to face about to the left (the Pikes being all advanced, and the Musquetttiers all either poized or shouldred) and so being led by the halfe File Lea∣ders to the Reare they March directly forwards to the right of the other part of the body, which stood faced in opposi∣tion, vntill the Leaders of the doubling have ranked even in ranke with the bringers up; the rest ranking even with the other standing Rankes, according to their places: If this doubling be used in service, then the whole body is to face about to the reare, being the part to be doubled; but in way of exercise the Commander may keepe his place, and the doubling being performed; and the whole body faced to the leader. Then for reducement you may command Files to the Right intire adllancing; then every man falling before his Leader will reduce each man to his first station.
  • Or otherwise you may command; Front Halfe-files, face about to the Left, march forth into your places; which they performing accordingly will reduce them.
• Front halfe-files, double your Reare to the Right by Countermarch.
  • This kind of doubling of the Reare, by the Front halfe Files, * 1.451 is performed contrary to the former, for it is done by way of the Lacedemonian counter-march, and doth pro∣duce the same effect to the reare, as doubling the Front by Bringers up doth into the Front: the counter-march by which it is performed, is a counter-march of losse of ground: * 1.452 where note, one part or moitie of the body coun∣termarcheth; thereby not altring the number of the length and depth of the figure; but onely transferring one part in∣to another.
  • You must further observe that if the reare be doubled to the right, then the counter-march must bee to the left: If the doubling be to the Left, then the Countermarch must be to the Left; If the doubling bee to the Left, then the Countermarch must be to the Right. The way to reduce them is (if the Commander stand at the head of that part that is doubled) to Command: Front halfe-files, face about to the Right, March forth into your places. But if he keepes his first standing, and having faced them to him: Then, Front halfe-files, march forth into your places; To double the Reare to the Left is the same, onely changing the hand.
• Halfe Rankes to the Right, by Countermarch double your left Flanke.
  • Halfe-rankes (or Flankes) are then sayd to be doubled when the depth of the Battalia is increased, * 1.453 to double their former proportion of number, or place, or both; this doubling of halfe-rankes to the left Flanke by Counter∣march, is a doubling of number and not of place, for the depth still retaines the same proportion, onely augmen∣ted by one man, but the length of the Battalia is diminished both in number and place, the right Flanke being wholly inserted into the left Flanke; after the words of Command is given (that produceth this motion) which you shall finde plac'd in the Margent; then the halfe Rankes to the

• ...
  • Right, are to face to the Right, and then even in Ranke to∣gether they are to counter March betweene the Intervalls, untill to the outmost File to the Right, be come into the outmost File of the Left Flancke, (the body being 20 in Ranke, or brest) then the second into the nineteenth, the third into the eighteenth, the fourth into the seventeenth, the fifth into the sixteenth, and the rest in like manner. The use of this doubling is to strengthen one of the Flanckes; by bringing more hands to doe present execution, the o∣ther Flancke being in more surety. The way for reducement of this motion is after this manner, the halfe Rankes last doubled, being faced to the Right; then they which were the Last, which tooke their places in the motion; now are the first which take their places in the reducement, orderly Marching in Ranke together untill they come to their pla∣ces; then facing to their Leader they become Files againe. The left Flancke may in like manner, double the right by Counter-march; the difference is this: The right Flancke stands, the left Flancke is inserted into the Right as before the Right was into the Left.
• Halfe Files double your front to the Right intire.
  • If in this doubling of Halfe Files to the Right intire, it should be performed, * 1.454 as the body stands in an ordinary Square, Flanked with Musquetiers, then it would produce a mixture of Armes; wherefore to avoid this, before you enter upon this doubling of passing in, through or betweene your halfe Ranckes: Cause your halfe Files to double the Front to the Right intire; which being performed, you may then proceed to the doubling of your Flanckes, any way you please without Mixture of Armes. This doub∣ling of the Front by Halfe-files to the Right intire, is thus performed; After the words of Command are gi∣ven, the halfe-files are to face to the Right; then march∣ing out forwards untill the left-hand File belonging to the Reere, be marcht past the right halfe-file belonging to the Front, then facing to the left, they march up even abreast, untill the File-Leaders of the halfe-files to the Reere, bee plac'd even in ranke with the File-leaders of the Front; all the rest of the rankes placing themselves even with the other rankes. This manner of doubling halfe-files is a doub∣ling both of number and place, for the length of the Battell is not onely double so many a-brest as they were before, but they also have extended their Length to double their pro∣portion of ground which formerly they did occupie; now you are to conceive that this doubling of Halfe Files which I have now discour'st of, is performed for this purpose, that when the Halfe Rankes of the Right, double the Left Flanke; there shall by this meanes bee no mixture of Armes.
• Halfe Rankes of the right double your left flanke.
  • In the next place let us demonstrate the way how the Halfe Rankes of the Right should double their Left Flanke, * 1.455 which is thus performed; the Left Flanke stands, the Halfe Rankes of the Right are to face to the Left; and then the inmost File of the Right Flanke (all the Files of the Right Flanke, being by this facing become Rankes) is the Leader of this motion, marching forth Right to their Left hands, betweene the Intervalls of the Rankes of the left Flanke; untill the twentieth File (accounting from the Right

• ...
  • Flanke which now is become a Ranke) have placed themselves or∣derly in the fortieth File, * 1.456 which is the outmost File of the Left Flanke; the nineteenth in the nine and thirty, the eighteenth in the eight and thirty, and so of all the rest; this doubling is of number and not of place. For reducement to both these doublings; first cause the halfe Rankes, which last doubled, to face to the Right, and so to march out into their places: They that last tooke their place in the motion, are the first that take their places in the reducements: the doubling of Halfe Rankes be∣ing thus reduced, You are next to reduce the Halfe Files; by comman∣ding them to face about to the Left, and to March forth into their pla∣ces: Note these kind of divisionall doublings requires open order in Ranke and File. And for your Intire doublings there is onely the di∣stance of order in Ranke and File required.
• Halfe-files double your front to the left intire.
  • All doublings aer either Intire or divisionall; * 1.457 Intire doublings are to bee understood, when as Files or halfe-files, Rankes, or halfe-rankes; (according as the Command is given) doe March forth jointly toge∣ther without division or dissipation, to double the part Commanded.
  • Divisionall doublings, are such as formerly is shewed (viz.) when the Files or halfe-files, Rankes or halfe-rankes, are disranked and divi∣ded into more parts, or places then one,
  • This doubling of halfe-files to the Left intire is thus to be performed, first the halfe-files to the Reere, face to the Left, and March forwards untill they are quite cleare of that part of the body, which stands, then they face to their Leader; and so March up untill they are become e∣ven in Ranke with those that stand upon the Right Flanke, and then, the forme is perfect, the word of Command which produceth it, is placed in the Margent.
  • For the Reducement, the halfe-files that doubled having faced about they March straight forth untill they be cleare of the Front halfe-files; then they face to the Left, and March straight forth untill every man hath his right place, and then they are to face right after their Leaders, the words of Command and direction for this Reducement is, Halfe-files face about to the Right, March forth into your places.
  • This kind of doubling of halfe-files hath beene held a better doubling, then eyther the ordinary doubling of Rankes, or the usuall way of doubling by halfe-files, or bringers up, the reasons are these, first it makes no disturbance to the other part of the Battalia; but that it may eyther be executed in time of Motion, Exercise or Skirmish: Secondly it ap∣peares another solid body; to the great disheartning of an Enemy: Thirdly it is very apt for over Fronting; it being a doubling both of number and place.
• Halfe-files double your front in∣ward in∣tire.
  • This Motion of doubling the Front inward intire, hath beene of great request; * 1.458 and is most commonly used by great Bodies; as when a Re∣giment, Division, or Maniple, Moveth forwards, betweene two others, thereby seconding or releeving them: Whereby the Front of all the three Divisions become ranged in an even Line; the words of Com∣mand & direction that produceth this Motion is placed in the Margent The Motion of this doubling is thus to be performed: The halfe-files of the Front, faceth to the Right and Left; and eyther Division March∣eth right forth untill they have left a distance betweene them sufficient to receive the halfe-files of the Reere, and then they are to stand and face to their Leader: Then the halfe-files March up and even their Front.
  • For the Reducement of this figure; Let the halfe-files face to the Reere, and March untill they are cleare of the Front Halfe-files, then stand and face about to their Leader or Commander; then the other

• ...
  • halfe-files of the Front, are to close their Division, and they are redu∣ced. The Words of Command used for this reducement are, Halfe-files, face about, and march. Front halfe-files, close your Divisions, face all to your Leader.
• Halfe-files double your front by Di∣vision.
  • This kinde of doubling, * 1.459 as before is shewed, is of singular good use, because it may be performed in time of fight, without disturbance to the other part of the Battell. The way to performe this motion, is as followeth; first, the halfe-files of the Reere are to face to the right and left; and then to march right-forth untill they are cleare of the Reare part of the Front-division, then they are to face to their Leader, and march, untill they become even in ranke with the Front, and so stand; which perfects this doubling.
  • The way to reduce them is as followeth; viz. the halfe-files are to face about to the Reere, and to march forth-right, untill they are cleare of the Front halfe-files, and then they are to face to the right and left inwards, and so to march and close their Divisions; then being faced to their Leader they are reduced. The Words of Command for reduce∣ment, are Halfe-files face about inwards, March forth into your places.
• Front halfe-files double your Reare by Division.
  • This doubling of the Reare by the Front halfe-files, will worke the same effect to the Reare, * 1.460 as the last doubling by division did to the Front. It may be usefull in the passing of a River, when the Enemy chargeth or pursueth in the Reare, the Front-division eyther opening and suffering the Reare halfe-files to passe through them, they main∣taining the skirmish, untill the other have attained the further Banke of the River: Or else the Front halfe-files being opened to the right and left, and faced upon the Enemy, march valiantly up and receive the charge, whil'st the other provide for themselves; for the manner and way of this motion, it may be thus performed. After the Command is given, the Front halfe-files are to face to the right and left, and march right forth until they are cleere of the other halfe-files of the Reare, then they face to the Reare and march on, untill they have attained to be even in rank with them whom they had command to double; which perfects the doubling. The way to reduce them followeth; if you keep your place of the first Front, then let your half-files face about, and march until they are cleare of the Reare halfe-files which stand, then face to the right and left inwards, and close their Division, and being againe faced to their Leader, they are reduced to their first forme. The words of Com∣mand properly used for this reducement, is; Front halfe-files, face about to the right and left inward, March forth into your places.
• Front halfe-files double your Reare to the right intire.
  • This doubling of the Reare to the Right intire by the Front halfe-Files, * 1.461 is thus to be performed; after the Word of Command is given, the halfe Files of the Front are to face to the Left, and march straight out, untill they are cleare of that part of the Body which stands; then they are to face againe to the Left (which is the Reare) and march out-right untill they ranke even with the last Ranke of the Reere-division; which gives conclusion to the doubling. For reduce∣ment thereof, your Front halfe-Files face about to the left, and march right forth untill they are cleare of the Reere halfe-Files, then face them to the Right, and let them march into their places; then if the Commander goe to his first Front, and face them all to him, they are reduced as at first. To double the Reare to the Left intire, may bee done after the same manner, onely differing in hand. The Words of Command which reduceth it, are Front halfe-Files, face about to the left, March forth into your places.
• ...

• Halfe Ranks of the right, double your left Flank intire to the right.
  • This doubling of the left Flank by advancing the right Flank, * 1.462 and placing it before the Leaders of the left Flank, which is a doubling both of number and place, being very usefull for the strengthning of any Flank where it shall seem needfull.
  • And if you desire to have your Musketires to double even with the Musketires of the contrary Flank; then you must first cause the half Ranks of the right Flank to march forth-right, untill the Rear-Rank of the right Flank be advanced about 3 foot before the Front of the left Flank; and then cause that Flank so advanced to counter-march their Ranks to the right, and then all your Musketires will be together, and the Pikes likewise by themselves. The manner of performing this motion according to the words of Command in the Margent, is as followeth: First the left Flank stands, and the right Flank marcheth forth-right, untill the Rear of the right Flank be ad∣vanced before the Front of the left Flank (as before is shewed) then face them to the left, and cause them to march untill the Pikes are even in Rank with the Musketires, which perfects the doubling. For the Reducement, let the halfe Ranks that doubled face about to the left, and march untill they are cleer of the left Flank, then cause them to face to the right, and to march straight down into their places: then the Commander being at his first Front faceth them all to him, which reduceth them as at first. The left Flank may also double the right Flank intire after the former manner, only changing the hand; the Command for reducement is Halfe Ranks that doubled, face a∣bout to the Left, march forth into your places.
• Half Ranks of the left, double your right Flank by division.
  • This motion of doubling Flanks by division doth make a strong form of Battell to give fire three severall waies at once; * 1.463 The manner of performing it after the word of Command is given as followeth: The Rear half-Files of the left Flank face about to the right, and then both the Front half-Files and Rear half-Files march forth-right untill they are clear of that part of the body that stands; then each division faceth that way which they are to double (which the Front half-Files must do to the right, and the Rear half-Files to the left) & so march forth-right untill the doubling be performed. For reducement, if the Commander stands at the right Flank (which is the part that was doubled) then the reducement is as followeth; the half Ranks that doubled are to face about inwards, and march forth-right untill they are clear of the right Flank which stands; then the Front half-Files face to the left, and the Rear half-Files to the right, and then close their division. The Com∣mander going to his first Front and facing the whole body to him, they are reduc'd as at first, If that the right Flank would double the left Flank by division, the way is the same, only dif∣fering in the hand. The words of Command to reduce it, are, Halfe Ranks that doubled, Face about inwards, March forth into your places.
• Double your Ranks to the right intire.
  • This doubling of Ranks intire to the right, * 1.464 is a doubling both of number and place, and in some sort worketh the same effect as the doubling of half Files doth to the right intire; but differeth in regard of the parties which are the doublers, and in the distance left after the doubling. The motion of this dou∣bling ought to be thus performed: After the word of Command is given for the doubling to the right, as in the Margent is ex∣prest:

• ...
  • then every even Rank faceth to the right. The right hand man of each Rank becoming the Leader of his Rank, like∣wise leading them forth, and in their March of moving for∣wards, a little bending to the left, that when the left-hand man of each Rank (which are the bringers up of the motion) are clear of the standing part of the body, by only facing to the Front, they may stand even in Rank with the rest of the Company. For reducement of this doubling, you must observe that the left-hand men are the Leaders of the motion: where∣fore command the Ranks that doubled to face to the left, and march forth-right into their places. Or you may command the halfe Ranks of the right to face to the left, and double the left Flank; this will work the same effect with the former.
  • To double Ranks to the left intire, is to bee done after the same manner, onely observe the difference of the hand. This kind of doubling may also be done by division. The words of Command used for this reduceme••t, are, Ranks that doubled, face to the left: march forth into your places.
• Double your Files to the right intire, ad∣vancing.
  • This kind of doubling of Files intire to the right advancing, * 1.465 is also a doubling both of number and place; for it increaseth the depth, to double their former proportion of number, as from ten to twenty. It also gaineth so much ground the more before the Front, as formerly the Battell did contain, by transferring the even Files of the body into the ground before the Front of the odd Files; But this doubling doth diminish the number of the length of your Battell, although it preserves their place. The manner of performing this motion of doubling is thus to be done; first the word of Command being given (as in the Margent is specified) the odd Files are to stand, beginning your account from the outmost File to the hand named; the Mus∣ketires and Pikes of the even Files are to advance their Arms and follow their File-Leaders, every File-Leader leading his File forth-right before his next File to the right, untill the bringers up of the even Files are orderly placed before the Lea∣ders of the odd Files. For reducement, Let the Files that dou∣bled face about to the left, the bringers up of each File leading them forth-right downe the distance or spaces which are on their left hand, untill they are come even with the Rear, and then stand and face about to their Commander, and they will bee in their first forme and station. The doubling of Files to the left intire advancing is after the same manner, only differ∣ing in the hand. The words of Command used for this reduce∣ment, are, Files that doubled, face about to the left: march forth into your places.
• Files double your depth to the right, every man falling behind his Bringer up.
  • This kind of doubling of the depth of Files to the right doth sympathize with the former doubling last discourst of, * 1.466 both for number and place; only it differeth from the other both in the manner of executing, and in some sort of the matter execu∣ted: for whereas the other doubling by advancing of Files did transferre all the even Files into the ground before the Front; contrariwise, this doubling doth transfer them into the ground next behind the Rear. And as in the other doublings, half the File-Leaders did remain in the Front, and the other halfe were halfe-File-Leaders. Now in this doubling halfe the File-Lea∣ders are to remain in the Front, and the other half are brought down and plac'd in the last Rank of the Rear, and those which

• ...
  • were Bringers up, are now in this motion become the middle∣most Ranks. The manner of performing this doubling, is thus first having given the word of Command that produceth this motion (as is specified in the Margent); then every man falling behind his Bringer up, the even Files (accounting from the hand named) immediately are to face about to the right, and the Bringers up of each of the even Files are to turne behind the Bringers up of the odd Files that stand; And so every man as hee commeth downe to the Reare, turneth to the left behind him that marcheth down the next before him, untill those that were Leaders of the even Files are become the Bring∣ers up to those that were the odd Files.
  • The reducement is thus to bee performed, according to the words of Command used for that purpose, Bringers up (that now are) double your Ranks forwards to the left. The instru∣ctions for this doubling the Ranks forwards (by the Bring∣ers up) into the Front, is discourst of in the beginning of this Chapter: where you shall find in the Margent the manner of doubling of Ranks, by the Bringers up descri∣bed. In the next Chapter following I shall endeavour to shew the difference between Inversion and Conversion, with the words of Command and Reducement belonging to those motions.

CHAP. LXXXIIII.

Of Inversion and Conversion with their words of Command, whereby those motions are produc'd, and the way of reducing them described.

FOR Etymologie of these words, you may be pleased to observe, that Inversion doth alwaies produce File or Files; and Conversion Rank or Ranks.

Inversion consists of the Files filing, or of Ranks filing; but Coversion consists of Ranks ranking to the right or left.

Or by increase of Files ranking by even or uneven parts, and of Ranks wheeling to the right or left. But in performing these motions there is a larger distance of ground required than in any other motion. The words of Command with their severall reducements are as followeth.

• Files File on to the
  • Right.
  • Left.
    • This word of Command is performed by causing the right-hand File to march away single: * 1.467 the second File from the right falleth into the Rear of the first, the third behind the se∣cond, the fourth behind the third, & so consequently all the rest of the Files fall into the Rear of their next right-hand Files, untill all the whole Company become one File. This was in∣vented to passe narrow Bridges or straight Paths in Woods, where but one at once can passe; for the reducing of these in∣to their former stations, the word of Command is, File-Lea∣ders Lead up your Files as your were: which is performed, eve∣ry File-leader leading up his File to the left of him that mar∣cheth before him, until all the File-leaders are even in Rank to∣gether, * 1.468 and their Files orderly following of them.
    • For the Files filing on to the left may bee performed after this precedent manner, only altering the hand &c.
• This filing by division is to bee performed after the same manner the precedent was, onely this difference; that

• Files, File to the right and left, by division.
  • The right-hand File of the Companie, and the left-hand File of the same begin to leade forth at one and the same time, in their severall places, viz. The Files of the right Flank falling likewise behind the right-hand File; the Files of the left Flank falling in like manner behind the left-hand File, so that if the bodie of Pikes bee flankt with Musketires, then this filing by division bringeth all the Musketires into the Front-division, and the Pikes into the Rear of them. The word for reducement, is, File-Leaders, Leade up your Files as you were.
• Ranks, File to the
  • Right.
  • Left.
    • To performe this, all the Ranks are to bee inverted to the outmost File to the right. Wherefore let all your Files bee closed to their order, or close order, and your Ranks opened (either forwards or backwards) to double distance, or twice double distance (according to your number of men in Rank).
    • Then let every Rank move after his right-hand man untill all the Ranks stand right in one File, after the right-hand Lea∣der of his Rank.
    • If the Commander will performe this upon a March, then the Ranks shall not need to bee opened to any distance, but let them take their distance in the execution of it, which is the easiest way thus to performe it, viz. The right-hand man of the first Rank marcheth forth-right, all his Rank facing to the right, and marching likewise after him.
    • The right-hand man of the second Rank falling immedi∣ately after the left-hand man of the first Rank, all his Rank in like manner following of him.
    • The right-hand man of the third Rank falleth into the File after the left-hand man of the second, his Rank likewise fol∣lowing of him; and so of all the rest of the Ranks untill they become one File; this kind of filing by Ranks is sooner per∣formed than Files filing; and is readier to bee reduc'd to make resistance against any opposition in the Front.
    • The word of Command to reduce them, is, Files, Ranke as you were. The manner to performe this reducement, is, if they were ten men in the formost Rank, then the first tenne men rank to the left into the Front as they were at first. The next ten men next after them, which makes the second Rank. The third ten men ranking to the left, makes the third Rank; and so of all the rest, untill they be reduc'd into their first forme or station.
    • As for Ranks filing to the left, &c. it is to be performed af∣ter this very same manner, only it differeth in the hands: for in this the left-hand man of the first Rank marcheth forth-right, and all his Rank facing to the left, marcheth likewise after him; and so of the rest.
    • If you desire to avoid the mixture of Armes, you may march forwards your Musketires of each division, and close them be∣fore the Pikes, and invert them first: or you may march for∣wards your Pikes first, and leave the Muskets to come in the Rear; or you may invert the Front-division of Shot, then the Pikes, and last the Rear-division of Shot.
• Ranks, File to the
  • Right.
  • Left.
    • Ranks filing to the right and left, is a doubling of the depth by an unequall proportion: for in other doublings, either the number of length or depth is augmented. But this doubling of

• ...
  • ...
    • Inversion makes their depth so many times more in number as there are Files to double; or halfe so many, if it be done by division: the use of it is to avoid the Shot of great Ordnance; it serves also for a guard for any great Personage or Comman∣der to passe through: It is also commonly used for the Lodg∣ing of the Colours.
    • The manner to performe this motion is the same with the last precedent motion, differing only in this; that whereas in the former all the whole Ranks turned to the right, behind their right-hand men; in this motion the left Flank (or half-Ranks to the left) fall into the outmost File to the left, and the halfe-Ranks to the right behind their severall right-hand men.
    • For reducement, the word of Command for it, is, Files, Rank to the right and left inwards, as you were: viz. the Ranks which before inverted into Files, now are to convert into Ranks as they were.

The nature of this motion, which is performed by conversion, produceth Ranks, as the former motion of Inversion did Files. Wherefore you may use this word of Com∣mand,

• Ranks, Ranke.
  • 3. 5. 7. or 9. to the right.
  • 4. 6. 8. or 10. to the left.
  • By increase, 2. 4. 6. 8. &c. to the right.
  • By increase, 1. 3. 5. 7. &c. to the left.
  • Intire to the right, into the Front.
  • Intire to the left, into the Front.
  • By division into the Front.
    • The word of Command to re∣duce these into their former stati∣on, is.
    • Rank, Ranks as you were.
• Ranks Wheel to the
  • Right.
  • Left.
  • Right and left.
• Files, Rank.
  • 3. 5. 7. or 9. to the right.
  • 4. 6. 8. or 10. to the left.
  • By increase to the right, 1. 3. 5. 7. &c.
  • By increase to the left, 2. 4. 6. 8. &c.
  • To the right,
  • To the left,
    • into the Front.
      • The word of Command to re∣duce these into their former stati∣on is,
      • Ranks, File as you were.

Now observe, that the severall parts of this motion, which is distinguished by the name of Conversion, consists of

• Ranks Ranking
  • In equall parts.
  • In unequall parts.
  • Intire into the Front.
  • By division into the Front.
  • By wheeling to the Flanks.
• Files Ranking
  • By equall parts.
  • By unequall parts.
  • Intire into the Front.

First of Ranks ranking in equall parts, it is thus to be understood; when there are 12 or 20 (more or lesse) marching a Brest, and the Commander finding his passage nar∣row, or for any other intent, commandeth his Ranks to Rank 3 or 6 a Brest, or 5, 10, or any other number, every Rank holding equality of number.

Secondly observe, that Ranks then Rank by unequall parts, when they Rank by

increase or decrease: as for example, when the first Rank shall be 3, the next 5, then 7, 9, &c. which is commonly used in triangular figures, as the Horsemans-wedge, or the Diamond-Battell.

Thirdly observe, that Ranks then rank intire into the Front, when the first Rank stands, the second Rank placeth it self upon the right or left of the first; the third by the second; the fourth by the third; and so forwards for all the rest, untill all the Ranks, ac∣cording to their Cōmand, either to the right or left, are become one Rank in the Front.

Fourthly observe, that Ranks then rank by division into the Front, when the second Rank, and all the rest of the Ranks behind open to the right & left, the one part going to the right, and the other to the left, ranking even with the first, as is shewed in the former; and all these being joyned together, makes one intire Rank.

Fifthly observe, that Ranks then rank to the Flank or Flanks, when either the right-hand man of each Rank, or left-hand man (or both together) are as it were the Hinge of the motion; the residue of each Rank wheeling about them to the right or left (or to each hand by division) untill that every Rank bee brought into the distance which was before the Rank, between the right-handman of the Rank next before, and the right-hand man of the same Rank you stand in. If it bee to the left, then they wheel into the distance between the left-hand Leaders of each Rank. If it bee by division, then halfe the Rank wheeleth to the right, and the other halfe to the left, which pro∣duceth two Ranks.

Sixthly observe, that Files then rank by equall parts when they rank 3, 4 or 5 a Brest (be it more or lesse) still keeping the number of men in Rank, of due proportion. If you rank three a Brest (either to the right or left) and your Files be but ten deep; then the first nine men makes three Ranks, and the fourth Rank must be made up by the Leader, and the next that follows him of the second File: and so for all the rest. If you rank five, and the Files be ten deep, then every File makes two Ranks, &c.

Seventhly observe, that Files then rank by unequall parts when they either rank by progressionall increase or by decrease: as when every Rank exceeds the Rank be∣fore it, by two, three or foure, bee it more or lesse; or else that each Rank decreaseth after the same manner.

Eighthly observe, that Files then rank intire into the Front, when there is so much distance between File and File, as will contain each File Rank-wise, every man in the File marching forwards to the right or left, as shall bee commanded, untill he stand even in Rank with the Leader of his File, which brings the body into one Rank.

As for Ranks wheeling by Conversion to the right and left, or Ranks ranking to each Flank by wheeling, it differeth from Ranks filing both in manner and matter.

In differs in manner thus; whereas in Ranks filing to the right and left, the right and left-hand File-Leaders preserve and continue their places: in this wheeling by Conversion to the right and left, you shall find it contrary to Ranks filing: for the innermost File-Leaders become the outmost men in that part where the Front stood, the other File-Leaders rank even within them; for when the word of Command is given for wheeling, you are to wheel your aspects unto the hand or part named, where∣by you either become a Rank or Ranks, and not Files.

This way of wheeling is a very speedy motion for a great body (if they have their due distance) to give fire to one or both Flanks. The manner or performing it follows.

• Ranks, wheele to the right and left by divi∣sion.
  • To perform this wheeling by division, the right and left-hand men of every Rank are to become the hinges of the motion; the rest of each Rank wheeling by equall division to the right and left about, and above the right and left-hand Leaders, untill they become Ranks to the Flanks.
  • If you will avoid mixture of Arms, then place all your Mus∣kets in Front or Rear, or else wheele only your Muskets and leave your Pikes standing; or else it may be done, the body mar∣ching at length, the Muskets being in the Front & Rear divisi∣on. The word for the reducemēt, is, Ranks, Rank as you were: w^ch is performed by facing to the Rear, and then to wheel back into their places; then face to their Leaders, and they will be in their former station.

Now it remains to demonstrate the way and manner of Files ranking by Conversi∣on in equall parts; the word of Command is,

• Files, Rank ••our to the left.
  • To performe this motion, the right-hand File-leader leadeth forth his File, & the three next men behind him move forwards to the left hand of each other, untill they rank even a Brest with their File-leader. The next four in like manner ranking to the left, do make the second Rank, they being but eight deep. The File-leader of the second File placeth himselfe next after him that was the half-File-leader of the first, which now is be∣come the right-hand man of the second Rank: the three next men behind him makes up his Rank; and so in like manner for all the rest untill the motion be quite perfected. This converts each File into two Ranks, and brings all the proper File-leaders and half-File-leaders to make the outmost File to the right. The Bringers up both of the Front and Rear half-Files, maketh the outmost File to the left. For the reducement of this motion of Files ranking four to the left, is thus to bee performed: first cause your Ranks to file (or invert) to the right; which being done, command every File-leader to lead up his File to the left, and so every man will bee in his first station.

CHAP. LXXXV.

How an Officer is to exercise his souldiers in three manner of Countermarches, which are to be performed two manner of wayes, viz. one by File, the other by Rank.

THe next thing to bee performed after you have exercised your men in the doubling of their Ranks and Files, * 1.469 is, to teach them how to countermarch. Wherefore you may first begin with intire Countermarches by File. The word of Command which produceth it, followeth.

• Files, to the right-hand Countermarch.
  • As soon as the word of Command is given, * 1.470 if they be to coun∣termarch to the right; then all the File-leaders are to step for∣wards with their right-legs, and face about to the right-hand: every File-leader with his File following him, passing down to∣wards to the Rear, through the Intervall on his right hand, still observing to keep even in Rank with his right-hand man; * 1.471 and note, That no man must turne untill hee come to the ground where at first his File-leader began the Countermarch. This motion is performed when the Bringers up have attained unto the place where before their File-leaders stood.
• Files, to the left-hand Countermarch.
  • To countermarch to the left-hand worketh the same effect, and is done after the same manner, only differing in hands.
  • For reducing them into their former stations, If you coun∣termarch to the right, by countermarching again to the left, brings them into their first forme.
• Files, to the right-hand Countermarch, every man turning af∣ter his Leader, on the ground he stands.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch is to be performed as fol∣loweth: * 1.472 the File-leaders of each File are to step side-waies to the right-hand, and therewithall to face about to the Rear, and so march even in Rank down together between the Intervalls or spaces of ground between File and File; no man advancing a foot forwards, but turning off the ground they stand on after their Leaders when they are past by them; still observing to keep their due distance: and so Rank after Rank, still tur∣ning off to the right, untill the motion be performed.
• ...

• Files, to the left-hand Countermarch; every man turning after his Leader on the ground hee stands.
  • To countermarch to the left-hand, worketh the same effect, and is to be performed after the same manner, only differing in hand. For reducing them into their former stations, If first they countermarcht to the right-hand, by countermarching again to the left, brings them into their first forme.
• Bringers up face about to the right; the rest passe through to the Rear, and place your selves before your Bringers up.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch doth lose the ground al∣so whereon it formerly stood, and takes the ground behind the Rear. The manner of the motion is as followeth, viz. the last Rank of Bringers up face to the Rear, and stand: the rest of the Body facing about in like manner, and passing through, or be∣tween their bringers up, and placing themselves even in Rank before them. The Motion is begun by the Rank next the Brin∣gers up, and so continued successively by the rest, untill the Countermarch be ended. It is to be reduc'd by performing the same motion to the contrary hand; or the next subsequent mo∣tion following will reduce this into its former station.
• Bringers up, stand; the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves behind your Bringers up.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch (by which the former may be reduc'd) is thus to be performed. The last Rank (or Bringers up) are to stand firm, and the rest of the Body are to face to the Rear, and passe through to the right, & place themselves behind their Bringers up, contrary to the Countermarch last shown, in which they plac'd themselves before. The motion is also be∣gun by the second Rank from the Rear, the rest following suc∣cessively, until the File-leaders are become the Bringers up; then face them about after their proper File-leaders, and they are reduc'd.
• File-Leaders, face a∣bout to the right; the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves behind your Leaders.
  • The motion of this Macedonian Countermarch is from the Rear to the Front: * 1.473 quite contrary to the Lacedaemonian, whose motion was from the Front to the Rear. This Macedonian Countermarch makes semblance in the Rear of flight, but pre∣sently produceth a setled Front, when perhaps the enemy with a too early pursuit hath broken the order of array.
  • The way to perform this Countermarch is as followeth; The File-leaders or first Rank face about to the right, the rest of the body passe through between the Intervals (or distance betwixt Files) to the left, and place themselves behind their Leaders, e∣very Rank (beginning with that next the File-leaders) passing through successively, and taking their places, untill the Coun∣termarch be fully executed. This may be reduc'd as the former were, by doing the same to the contrary hand; or as formerly is said by any intire Countermarch of File: or it may bee re∣duc'd by another Macedonian Countermarch, which in the next place shall be described.
• File-Leaders, face to the Rear; the rest of the Body passe through to the left, following your Bringers up, pla∣cing your selves be∣hind your Leaders.
  • By this Macedonian Countermarch the precedent Counter∣march may be reduc'd to its former station; and it is thus per∣formed: The first Rank or File-leaders face to the Rear, then the last Rank begin the Countermarch: passing forwards be∣tween the Intervalls, the seventh Rank following the eighth, the sixth following the seventh; and so likewise the rest untill the whole body bee trans-ferred into the ground before the Front, and then joyntly together facing to the right about after their Leaders: the Countermarch is ended. For reducement, take this for a Rule, that any intire Countermarch of File may bee reduc'd by another intire Countermarch by File, of what kind, or to what hand soever.
• ...

• File-Leaders, stand; the rest passe through to the right and place your selves before your Leaders.
  • This Bastard Countermarch being partly derived from the Macedonian and Lacedaemonian Countermarches, is thus to be performed; The File-Leaders stand, the rest of the Body ad∣vance their Armes. The second Rank first passing through to the right, and placing themselves before the first Rank, the third Rank before the second, the fourth before the third, and so forwards for all the rest, untill the last Rank (or Bringers up) are become the formost, which perfects the motion. You may reduce it by countermarching to the contrary hand; or if you please, you may reduce it by another like it selfe.
• Ranks to the right-hand Countermarch.
  • This Chorean Countermarch of Ranks, * 1.474 is an altering or changing of one Flank for the other, the Battalia still keeping the same ground; only the right Flank becomes the left, and the left is changed into the right.
  • To performe this motion, you are to command your Com∣pany to face to the right (by which the Ranks are become now Files) then countermarching them down the Intervalls (or di∣stance between Rank and Rank) marching forth-right unto the part which was the left Flank, with their Ranks File-wise following them. Being come unto their ground, they face as before; and the Countermarch is performed.
  • For the reducement, let them countermarch to the left-hand back again, and they will be in their first station.
• Ranks, to the right-hand Countermarch, every man turning af∣ter his right-hand man, on the ground he stands.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of Ranks is a falling on upon the left Flank, * 1.475 the motion being begun by the right; it leaves all the ground the Battalia stood on, and assumes in place thereof the ground besides the left Flank, turning the a∣spect to the left: It is thus to bee performed. The whole Body faceth to the right, and then the right-hand File being faced (becomes a Rank) begins the Countermarch, turning down the Intervalls of the Ranks (which by this facing is made the di∣stance between the Files) and so marcheth forth-right beyond the left Flank, every man following of him that was his right-hand man, but not stepping forward one foot of ground untill the Countermarch be performed.
  • For the reducement of this Countermarch, you must com∣mand them to countermarch again to the left, and they will be as at first; or if you please, you may reduce it by another of the same kind as followeth.
• Right-hand File, face to the right; the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves before your Right-hand men.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of Ranks makes a falling on upon the right Flank, the motion being from the left Flank to the right, leaving all the ground whereon the Battalia stood, and in lieu thereof takes the ground besides the right Flank. It is performed after this manner. The right-hand File faceth to the right, and passeth through the Intervalls or Spaces to the right, placing themselves before their right-hand men, until the left-hand File become the formost Rank▪ if you do this Coun∣termarch by it self; then for reducement, first face them to their Front proper; then let the left-hand Files face to the left, and do as much to the left, and they will be in their first station.
• Right-hand Files, face to the left; the rest passe through to the right, placing your selves behind your right-hand men.
  • This Macedonian Countermarch of Ranks is contrary to the former, for it dismarcheth from the enemy upon that Flank where he approaches & presents the contrary Flank to receive the Charge. It is performed after this manner; The outmost

• ...
  • File to the right faceth to the left; the rest of the Body or Battalia faceth to the right, every man passing through to the right, and placing themselves behind their right-hand men.
  • For the reducement of this Countermarch, do but command them to doe as much to the left as first they did to the right, and they will be in their first forme.
  • Or if you please, you may make use of this following Ba∣stard Countermarch to performe the same.
• Right-hand file, stand, the rest passe through to the right, placing your selves on the out∣side of your right-hand man.
  • This Bastard Countermarch of Ranks doth alter both ground and Flank (still reserving the Aspect without altera∣tion): the manner of acting it followeth.
  • The outmost or right-hand File standeth; the rest of the Bo∣dy facing to the right, passe through to the right, every man placing of himselfe on the right side of his right-hand man, and so standing even in Rank, the motion still continuing untill the left-hand File is become the right, and the right-hand File the left. If you command this Countermarch to bee per∣formed alone, then to reduce it, you must cause the left-hand File to stand, then do as much to the left as before you did to the right, and they will be in their first forme.
• Countermarch Front and Rear into the midst.
  • This divisionall Chorean Countermarch brings your File-Leaders and Bringers up together in the midst, and the Ranks that were in the midst into the Front and Rear. Every man is to march up into his Leaders ground before he faceth about to countermarch. To performe this, you must cause the halfe-Files to face about; * 1.476 then the File-Leaders stepping forwards with the right legge, are to face about to the right, passing down the Intervalls upon the right hand; the rest of the Front half-Files following their Leaders, and not turning untill they come to the ground where their Leaders turned down before them. The Bringers up with the Rear half-Files at the same in∣stant are to turn down their Intervalls, upon the left-hand, the rest of their division following them, untill the File-Leaders and Bringers up meet together in the midst of the Battell, and then having faced all to their Leaders, the motion is perfor∣med. You may reduce it by doing the same thing over again, or any other divisionall Countermarch of File.
• File-Leaders & half-File-Leaders, stand; the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves before your Leaders.
  • This Bastard Countermarch doth bring the Leaders and Bringers up together into the midst, * 1.477 and saves two facings, and is more readily performed than the former; The way to per∣forme the motion is as followeth.
  • The first Rank stands, and the halfe-File-Leaders stand, then those of the Front half-Files are to passe through their In∣tervalls to the right, placing themselves before their File-Lea∣ders: the second Rank are to place themselves before the first, the third before the second, the fourth before the third, &c. The Rear half-Files at the same instant are to perform the like, pla∣cing themselves before their half-File-Leaders as the other did before their File-Leaders.
  • This motion may either bee reduced by acting the same over againe to the contrary hand, or else by coun∣termarching the Front and Rear into the midst, or by any other divisionall Countermarches of Files. Only observe by the way, that as the Front half-Files emptieth the spaces

• ...
  • of ground between the Leaders and the halfe-File Leaders, pla∣cing themselves in the ground before the Front. So in the mean time their places are to be replenisht by the Souldiers of the Rear halfe-Files, who are to march up and supply their roomes.
• File-Leaders and Bringers up stand; the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves before your Leaders and Bring∣ers up.
  • This divisionall Lacedaemonian Countermarch makes sem∣blance of falling on or charging the enemy both to Front and Rear, * 1.478 and leaves all the ground whereon they stood, transfer∣ring them into the ground before the Front, and behind the Rear, the ground or place of their former standing being va∣cant. The motion is thus to bee performed: The Rear halfe-Files are commanded to face to the Rear; and then the Front halfe-Files passe through to the right, placing themselves be∣fore their Leaders; the second Rank before the first, the third before the second, the fourth before the third, &c. The Rear halfe-Files at the same instant passing through to the Rear, placing themselves before their bringers up. To reduce this motion into their former stations, (if you have not closed their distance) you may face them about, and so let them returne into their places: or else by doing the same Countermarch over againe, or to the contrary hand, or any such like way will reduce them. Note, if you reduce them by another Countermarch, you must first close their divisions.
• File-Leaders face a∣bout, Bringers up stand, the rest passe through to the right, and place your selves behind your File-Lea∣ders and Bringers up.
  • This divisionall Macedonian Countermarch doth little differ from the last; onely that turned the aspect outwards to the Front and Rear, but this Countermarch turnes the aspect inwards toward the midst, placing the best souldiers in the midst, with a large lane or distance betwixt them, through which any great Personage may bee conducted crosse the length of your Battell, whereby the bravery of the souldiers may be seene.
  • This motion is thus to bee performed: The first Rank (or File-Leaders) face about, the last Rank stands, the Rear halfe-Files face about, and so the Front-division passe forwards and place themselves behind the File-Leaders; and the Reare halfe-Files behinde their bringers up. Note, that when the Rear halfe-Files face about, the last Rank which are the bringers up, are still to keepe their standing.
  • The way to reduce this motion is to bee done either by the same word of Command which produced it, or else by any of the precedent divisionall Countermarches.
• Front halfe-Files, in∣terchange ground with the Reare passing through to the right.
  • This Bastard Countermarch of enterchanging ground is not truely derived from any one particular ground of Countermarch, but rather participating of them all; and yet in it selfe it differs from them all: for whereas the other Countermarches of Files in division did bring their Front and Rear into the midst, yet their Front half-Files continued still on the same part, and their Rear halfe-Files did not alter into the place of the other. But this, contrary to any other of the divisionall Countermarches, transfers the Front halfe-Files into the ground or place of the Rear halfe-Files, and them into the contrary part, bringing the File-Leaders

• ...
  • and bringers up together into the midst.
  • For the performing this motion, you must cause the Front halfe-Files to face about, passing forwards to the right (being led by the bringers up of the Front half-Files) between the in∣tervalls towards the Rear.
  • The Rear half-Files, at the same instant, in like manner marching forwards between the intervals on their right hands into the Front, untill the Front-division have attained the place of the Rear, and they contrariwise the place of the Front. For the reducement of this countermarch, do as much back again; or if you would reduce it some other way, you may first make an entire Countermarch of Files, and then countermarch Front and Rear into the midst. Under two Countermarches it cannot be reduced.
• Countermarch your Flanks into the midst.
  • This Chorean Countermarch of the Flanks into the midst by bringing the outermost Files to be the innermost, is thus to bee performed; You must first command the whole body to face to the right and left hand by division. The outermost Files by this facing becomming Ranks, every man in the right-hand File being a Leader in his halfe Rank, File-wise: and so likewise in the left-hand File the same. Then you are to coun∣termarch the right Flank to the right, and the left Flank to the lelft, which you must alwaies observe to doe; and your Flanks will meet just in the midst of your Battalia. Lastly, having faced them to their first Front, the Countermarch is ended.
  • To reduce them, you may either make use of the same Coun∣termarch again, or any of these following divisionall Coun∣termarches of Flanks, unlesse it bee that of enterchanging of ground. Note that upon the Countermarching of Flanks in∣to the midst, the right Flank must alwaies observe to turne to the right hand, and the left Flank to the left hand: for if they should both turn off to the right, they will meet wrong, or if they turne off both to the left it, will be as bad.
• Outmost Files of each Flank, face outward; the rest passe through to the right and left, placing your selves be∣fore your outside men.
  • This Lacedaemonian Countermarch of half Ranks or Flanks makes shew of charging the enemy with both Flanks, * 1.479 but leaves a wast distance of ground unoccupied between the two outermost Files or midst of the Battell: the way to performe this motion is after this manner; First you must cause your right-hand File to face to the right, and the left-hand File to the left; the rest of the body faceth to the right and left, the right Flank passing through to the right, and placing them∣selves before their right-hand men; the second File from the right begins the motion on the right Flank, the left Flank in right manner passing through to the left, and placing them∣selves before their left-hand men, the second File accounting from the left begins the motion on the left Flank: but you must note that the Files become Ranks with the facing. For re∣ducement, if you will first face them to their proper Front, you must command the two inmost Files to stand, the rest are to passe through to the right and left-hand inwards and take their place: or you may make use of a Chorean or a Macedo∣nian Countermarch of Ranks by division and with a fa∣cing, and closing their divisions they will bee in their first forme.
• ...

• The out most File of each Flanke face in∣wards, the rest passe through to the right and left, placing your selves behinde your outside men.
  • This Macedonian Counter-March corespondes with the last; * 1.480 onely it differs in turning the Aspct inwards, whereas the former directed their Aspects outwards; and it is thus performed: The outmost Files of each Flanke are to face inwards, and the rest of the body are to face to the right, the left are to face outward, those of the right Flanke passing through the right, and placing themselves behind their right hand men, those of the left Flanke passing through to the left, and placing themselves behind their left hand men, the motion is to be begun by the second File from each Flank.
  • For the reducement of this Counter-March, you must first face them to their first Front; then commanding the two innermost Files to face outwards, and the rest are to passe through to the right and left inward, placing themselves behind their right and left hand men, which being done, the whole body will stand faced to the right and left outwards; then being faced to their Leaders they are reduced into their first stations.
  • Or you may make use of the Counter March next before, or of the next following, or of any other divisionall Counter-March of Rankes (which doe not interchange ground.)
• The outmost file of each flanke stand, the rest passe through to the right, and left, & place your selves on the out∣side of your right and left hand men.
  • This divisionall Bastard Counter-March produceth the same effect which the other two next before it wrought, * 1.481 one∣ly differing in the Aspect; for the Lacedemonian turned the Aspect outwards, the Macedonian turned the Aspect in∣wards, and this keepes the aspect still directed the same way. To performe this motion you must command the out∣most File of each Flanke to stand, the rest of the body are to face to the right and left outwards (viz) the right Flanke passing through to the right, and the left Flanke to the left; those of the right Flanke placing themselves on the outside of their right hand men; in like manner those of the left Flanke are to place themselves on the outside of their left hand men.
  • It may be reduced eyther by any of the foregoing divisio∣nall Counter-Marches of Rankes, or else being faced to any of the Flankes, then the Rankes become Files. And by di∣visionall Counter-marches of Files you may reduce devisio∣nall Counter-marches of Rankes, or by Rankes Files: onely you must observe some facings, yet you may reduce this mo∣tion by commanding the two inmost Files to stand, the rest are to face to the right and left inwards, and so march into their places.
• Interchange Flanks:
  • This exchanging of Flankes or Bastard Counter-march is differing from all the other divisionall Counter-marches of Rankes, * 1.482 for this transferres the right Flanke into the place of the left, and the left Flanke into the place of the right: it is very proper to receive a sudden charge from the horse, for so soone as they shall bee commanded to enterchange their Flankes they face to the right and left inwards, and then the inmost Files of the Pikes begins the motion; the rest of each Flanke following orderly, likewise the Pikes are to port so soone as they begin to move, and are to charge as they see occasion; if neede bee the Pikes may charge at the foot, the Musquetiers giving fire over their shoulders; if the Pikes have too large a distance, they may close at their owne pleasures as soone as they have past through.
  • For reducement you may interchange ground againe, or

• ...
  • otherwise you may Counter-march your Flankes into the middest, and then an intire Counter-march eyther of Rankes or Files will reduce them. And this shall suffice to finish this discourse of Counter-marches, wishing every commander to be ready and well verst in all of them, but principally to make use of the three first intire Counter-marches of Files, as also the same of Rankes, for those you cannot possibly omit in your drillings, the rest you may dispense with all at your pleasure: And having thus exercised your men in these mo∣tions of Counter-march; the next things you are to teach them are wheelings, and they are of two kinds, as in the next Chapter shall more fully be demonstrated.

CHAP. LXXXVI.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in the motions of wheeling, with the description of their kindes and uses, with their severall words of command placed in the Margent.

WHeelings are of two kindes (viz.) wheelings Anguler, and wheelings on the Center, and these are eyther intire or divisionall.

The use of intire wheelings is to turne the Aspect of the front proper, ey∣ther to the right, to the left, or to the reere, eyther for the gayning of the Wind, Sunne, or some such like advantages, or to entertaine their enemy with their best Souldiers; and for your better performing of these motions of whee∣lings, you must first close both your Rankes and Files to their order, which is three foote both in Ranke and File; and likewise upon all wheelings you must be sure to observe your Leader, and follow him keeping your due distance, your Musquets are all eyther to be poyzed, or shouldred, your Pikes are to be advanced: further observe that upon the exercise of the motions whether it be distance, facings, doublings or Counter-marches, or wheelings; the Musquetiers ought to bee all upon one and the same Po∣sture eyther poyzed or shouldred, and the Pikes in like manner eyther shouldred or advanced; the words of command followes in the Margent, and the directions how to performe the motions, right against them: Wherefore first you are to command them to,

• Wheele your Bat∣tell to the right.
  • This Anguler wheeling transferres the Aspect or Counte∣nance of the front proper into that part which was the right Flanke:* 1.483 it also remove the Battallia from the ground where∣on formerly it stood, and placeth it on the part before the front; the Hinge of the motion is the right corner man which hath the leading of the right hand File, he with a gentle motion moveth to the right, and every man the more remote his place is from the right Angle, the swifter must be his motion, because he is to go a greater circumstance. For reducement, wheele your Bat∣tallia to the left in the like manner as it was wheeled to the right; but withall note, that this will not bring you backe into the same ground you formerly stood on, because it hath advanced you the length of your Battallia before the place of your first Front, wherefore to reduce you into the same place you stood on first; you must face your Battallia to the right, and being so faced whele your Battell to the left, which being performed, face to the left and then they are compleately reduced to their first forme and station.
  • This also is an Angular wheeling and transferreth the Aspect of the Front proper towards the Reere; it is performed after the same manner of the former, onely the motion is twise as much,

• ...
  • wherefore observe the directions in the former; Note the ground you formerly did possesse will bee twise the length of your Battallia to the left of your left Flanke: For the re∣ducing them as well to their first ground as their first aspect, you must face them to the right, and then wheele then to the left about; which being performed, face them again to the left and they are reduced perfectly to their first forme & sta∣tion: Further observe that every following wheeling is a reducement unto that which is placed next before it, and the wheeling next before may reduce that next following: as to wheele your Flankes into the front, by wheeling your Flankes into the Reere it is reduced; or to wheele Front and Reere into both Flankes, if you wheele both Flankes into the Front and Reere, they are likewise reduced as before.
• Wheele your Battaile to the right on the same ground.
  • This wheeling on the Center is more suddenly performed then the Angular wheelings,* 1.484 and may be done in farre lesse ground, for the left Flanke advanceth forwards, still whee∣ling to the right, the right Flanke contrariwise facing to the left, and so falling backwards; if you have an odde File then the middle File leader must be the Center of the moti∣on, but if you have an even number of files, then the mid∣dlemost file leader from the left, or if your wheeling bee to the left, then the middlemost file-leader to the right must be the Center; This hath beene used by the Grave van Nassaw in the Netherlands.
  • For the reducement you must wheele your battell to the left on the same ground and they will be in their first forme and station.
• Wheele your Battell to the right about on the same ground.
  • This wheeling is also a wheeling on the Center or midst of the Front, whereby the aspect of the Front proper is trans∣ferred towards the Reere and withall the Battell is remo∣moved from off the ground whereon formerly it stood, and is placed upon the ground before the front; it requires the very same action the former did, onely the motion is double to the other. To performe this motion every man of the left Flanke is to observe duly his right hand man, and the right Flanke must keepe even and straight after their left hand man, which becomes their Leaders filewise, untill they have attained their ground, after which they face as before, making an even Front.
  • For the reducement, wheele your Battell to the left about upon the same ground, and they will be in their first forme.
• Wheele off your front by division.
  • This motion of wheeling by division in great Battallias is very efficatious to oppose severall enemies at one and the same time with the front of your Battallia, whereby your ablest Souldiers will bee first brought to action; but if you wheele off your Battell by division, and joyne them againe when they be in the Reere, then all your Musquetiers are brought from the flankes into the midst of your Battallia, and your Pikes will be upon the flankes; this motion is easie to be performed, for all the file-Leaders to the right flanke are to wheele about to the right, the rest of each file following their Leaders; the file-Leaders likewise of the left flanke are to wheele about to the left, and then joyne or close their di∣visions. To reduce them you must wheele them off againe by division, or the wheeling next following will performe it.
• ...

• Wheele your Front inwards to the Reere.
  • This divisionall wheeling of the Front inwards to the Reere may serve for a reducement unto the precedent wheelings,* 1.485 and so it brings the Musquetiers to the flankes againe, but if you performe this motion, the company being first reduced, then it brings the Pikes to the flankes, if you chance to be anoyed with Horse in the Reere upon a March, you having gayned some place of advantage as aside hill or the like, then by wheeling your front inwards to the Reere, you may perswade the enemy you are taking your flight, but you shall be ready to entertayne his aproches with a setled orderly body, for your shot will bee in the middest, and the Pikes impaling their flankes, so as the Horse can have no power over the shot to route them, but they shall bee able to give fire upon them continually; this motion is thus to bee performed: The right hand file-Leader, with all the Leaders of the right flanke are to advance forwards, and so are to wheele about to the left, every file still keeping close to their right hand file: likewise the left hand file-Lea∣der, with all the Leaders of the left flanke are to advance for∣wards, and wheele about to the right, every file of the left flanke closing close to the left, thus the outmost file of each flanke will meet and become the innermost, the front being metamorphis'd into the Reere.
  • For reducement you may wheele them againe off to the right and left by division, or else wheele your front inward to the Reere
• Wheele your Flanks into the Front.
  • This divisionall wheeling of the flankes into the front is Cosen∣german to a doubling,* 1.486 for by it all your shot are brought from both the flankes into the front, and thereby so many shot more are brought to doe execution accordingly as the depth will permit. This motion of wheeling your flankes into the front will not onely secure your shot, but also is very proper to baricado up any passage with your Pikes, so as the enemies horse will be defeated of their expectations; upon the first motion of dividing, every devision wheeleth about his owne angle untill the outmost file Leaders of each flanke meete together in the midst, then facing to their Leader performes it: For reducement of this motion; wheele your flankes into the Reere, or else foure times the same, although the further way about.
• Face all about to the Right, and wheele your Flanks into the Reere.
  • This divisionall wheeling of the Flankes into the Reere is also neere akind to a doubling,* 1.487 and is to be performed as the other in all respects, for this wheeling brings your two outmost Files to be the first Ranke, the bringers up of the right and left hand files meeting together, the bringers up of the left flanke meeting face to face with the bringers up of the right flanke, and so being faced to their Leader they which before were compleate files, are now become halfe Rankes, eyther to the right or left; but you must note that before you beginne to wheele, you must face your body about to the Reere, and then the action will be all one as if you wheeled your flankes into the front; It shall neede no further explayning in re∣gard in the motion before this it is fully exprest. But by the way take notice that in all wheelings you must observe to follow your Leaders, which must be understood as well of those which are ac∣cidentally become Leaders (by reason of facings) as of those which be the first and propet Leaders, as for example, in this wheeling you must note that the bringers up are become the Leaders of the mo∣tion; also you may further observe that the two middlemost brin∣gers up are the Hinges of the wheeling.
  • For the reducement of this wheeling, the Commander being at his front accidentall, may command them to wheele their wings

• ...
  • into the reere, and so passing through to that part where his proper file-leaders are••, and then face them to him and they are in their first forme. Or else when the Commander hath past through to the Reere, and faced his company to him, then (his pikes being foremost) let him wheele his flankes into the Front, who being faced to their leader are reduced.
• Wheele front, and Reere into the right flanke.
  • This divisionall wheeling of the Front and Reere, into the right flanke; doth quadruple the depth: as for example if the body of your Battallia be but ten in depth,* 1.488 this wheeling to the right flanke makes them forty deepe in file, and but five in ranke or brest; you may observe how the Musque∣teires of the left flanke are devided (viz) the one halfe of them wheeling to the front; and the other halfe to the reere; Likewise the Musqueteirs of the right flanke are to wheele together into the midst. The Pikes are likewise divi∣ded: those that were the front halfe files; are to wheele into the midst of the front division of Musquetiers, And those that were the Reere division of Pikes are to wheele into the reere division of shott; After the word of Com∣mand is given to wheele front and reere, into the right flanke; you must cause your Souldiers for to face to the right: (that being done) they are to wheele together; about the fifth and sixth men in the right hand file; which is the halfe file leader to the front, and halfe file leader to the reere; this motion being performed right, the two halfe files to the right, will be converted into the two midle rankes of the Battallia; and the file-leaders to the front, and the bringers of the reere will be the right hand file.
  • For the reducement; there may be many wayes; accor∣ding as the body of the Battallia may be faced; but suppose they stand faced in the same forme that this Battallia did before the Motion began and then the wheeling of front and reere into the left flanke will reduce them to their first station, they being faced to their Leader; Or if you please to face them that way which they wheeled in the Motion which was to the right, then wheele your flankes into the reere, and then facing them to their proper front they are reduced.
• Wheele front and Reere into the left flanke.
  • This divisionall wheeling of the front and reere into the left flanke;* 1.489 is a doubling of the depth as the former was: and the nature of the Motion is the same with the prece∣dent, the difference is onely in the flankes wherefore first you must cause the Battallia to face to the left; and then you must wheele them as before you did wheele the flankes into the front. But suppose that all the shott are placed upon the right flanke before you begin this motion; then this whee∣ling will bring the one halfe of them into the front and the other halfe into the reere: and the motion being performed and they faced towards their Commander they will be 40 deepe in file, and five in ranke as the precedent motion was.
  • For reducement: the usuall way is to wheele the front and reere into the Right flanke, or if upon occasion, you have faced your Battallia to the same way they have wheeled (which was to the left flanke) and would give your Com∣mand from thence, then you must cause them to wheele, their flankes into the reere, this being done, you must passe

• ...
  • to your first front, then causing them to face towards you they are in the same forme they were at first: Then cause the five files of shott, to face to the left: and then to passe through their places. Lastly, you must close their rankes and files to their due distance and all is performed.
• Wheele both flankes into the Front and Reere.
  • This divisionall wheeling of both flankes into the front and reere:* 1.490 doth double the depth, making them from ten deepe to be twenty. It doth also transferre the Musque∣tiers from both the flankes into the front and reere, making a division betweene the front halfe files, and the reere halfe∣files. So that of one Body flankte with shott it maketh two, each having their shot in the front. To performe this whee∣ling you must take these following directions. The word of Command being given as in the Margent is exprest, the first thing the Souldiers have to doe; is for the halfe files to face about to the reere and then the front halfe files, and the reere halfe Files are to wheele at one and the same in∣stant. The front division are to wheele about their two innermost file Leaders; untill the file Leaders of the right flanke meete together in the midst with the file Leaders of the left flanke; the residue of their divisions orderly fol∣lowing of them. The halfe files in like maner being faced about, the bringers up in the same order as the former did are to wheele together being now the leaders of the motion in the reere. This being performed and the Commander standing at the place of his first front, he is to cause them to face towards him: then he is to Command them to close their division, which being done all your file Leaders are in the two innermost files of the front division file wise, and all the bringers up, in the reere division of the same files.
  • For reducement you may face them to either of the flankes, and then Command them to wheele both flankes into the front and reere: then facing them againe to their proper front, and closing their divisions, they will be as at first; or if you please the Subsequent motion of wheeling will reduce it.
• Wheele front and reere into both flankes.
  • This wheeling of front and Reere into both flankes is also a doubling of depth.* 1.491 So that from ten deepe it makes them twenty. And by this motion the shot which in the prece∣dent wheeling was placed upon the flankes, by this motion of wheeling are transferd into the midst betweene the front and the reere of the Pikes; and whereas in this former motion, their wheeling was about the two midlemost file leaders, and Bringers up. This wheeling contrariwise is about the two halfe file leaders of the outmost files of each flanke. In the other wheeling the file Leaders and bringers up, made the Inmost file, but in this they make the outermost file of each flanke. This motion being performed, it leaves a large Intervall (or division) from front to reere betweene the flankes: which if the Commander passe into the midst, betweene each division, and face them all to him, causing them to close their divisions: and then he being marcht forth into his first place, causing the souldiers to direct their aspects to him, then will the Pikes be in the Front and Reere.
  • For the reducement of this Motion of wheeling to its first forme and station, you must cause the Battallia to face to one of the flankes, which being done, you must Command them

• ...
  • againe to wheele Front and Reere into both flankes, then facing them to their first Front, and closing their division, they are reduced, or you may wheele both flankes into the Front and Reere, and then face them to their Leader and close their division.
  • Thus having shewed the wayes and properties of whee∣lings, in their severall kindes wishing every Commander at least to make use of the Intire wheelings: and to make their Souldiers perfect in them, so that they may wheele to the Right, to the Left and to the Reere, and as for the rest you may use your pleasure: (if time will not permit you) to exercise your Souldiers in them. The next thing that a Com∣mander is to teach his Souldiers, is the severall wayes of giving fire, and the fitting and preparing them for Skirmish which in the next Chapter shall be discours'd of.

CHAP. LXXXVII.

How a Commauder shall prepare his Souldiers for Skirmish, with the maner, and use of firing by forlorne Files, in the Front.

WHen a Commander hath exercised his Company in their Postures, Doublings, Counter-marches, and Wheelings, the next thing requisite to be taught the Souldiers, is how they should skirmish, with the maner and use of firing, wherefore your Company being first drawne in Bat∣tallia, every man observing his order both in ranke and file. The Officers in their due places (viz) the Captaine and Ensigne in the Front of Pikes, the Lieutenant in the Reere, the Serjants on the flankes, the Drummes on the Front and reere Angle of the Pikes: Every man thus standing in his right equipage, the Captaine shall command the Drums to beate a march, the colours flying at the head of the pikes, the pikes and Musquets shouldred marching at their distance of order in file, and at their open order in ranke, the Commander is to give a signe to the Drume to beare a preparative, at which time the Ensigne is to furle-up his colours, and to retire into the midst of the Pikes, every man is to advance his Pike, and to close all their Rankes forwards to their order, the Musquetiers art to make ready every one prepar∣ing himselfe for skirmish, But before we proceede any further it will be very con∣venient to shew the maner and use of firings that the Souldiers may be the better able to performe them,* 1.492 when they come to the proofe and tryall, wherefore observe that all firings are either direct or oblique. The maner of firings, are sometimes advancing a∣gainst an Enemie,* 1.493 sometimes receiving the Enemies charge upon a stand, or else retiring (for we may be constrained to give fire in the Reere, marching from the Enemie) or in, flanke marching by an Enemie, or it may fall out that the Enemy may charge in severall places at once, as in Front and Flanke or in Front, Reere, and Flanke, these particulars shall be more fully discust in the following discourses.

And first to begin with the firings in Front, both advancing and standing. I will fol∣low Master Barrifes directions, who hath excellently well described them, both by discourse and figure.

Wherefore first take notice of giving fire by forlorne files, which most commonly is used two maner of wayes in the exercising of companies.

The first is, for the two outermost files of each flanke of shot to march forth (being led on by the two yongest Serjants,) a convenient distance beyond the Front of the battell, who being there arived ought to make there stand, the foremost Rankes are to give fire, wheeling off both to the right, (or to the right and left if it be commanded) and to place themselves in the Reere of their owne Files, the rest of the Rankes firing and doing of the like, untill they have fired once, or twice over, according as they shall be directed, this being performed, the next two out most files, of each flanke are to march forwards unto the place assigned, and are there to doe the like.

Those files which formerly faced are in the meane time to troope backe,* 1.494 and place themselves next the flankes of the Pikes, upon the inside of the division of Musquetiers.

The rest of the shot after the former manner are to march up and give fire, placing themselves as before is shewed, when they have fired all over and placed themselves according to these directions they are reduced into their first stations.

The second way of firing by forlorne Files is thus to be performed: The outmost files of each Flanke are led forth by the Serjeants unto the place assigned, and then they command their Files to ranke inwards, and to present and give fire all at one instant as by the subsequent figure you may perceive.

[illustration]

Serjeant Serjeant

Captaine Ensigne

Serjeant Serjeant

Lievetenant.

The first two files having ranked inwards and joyned together making one brest as you may perceive at the figure 4. and having presented and given fire, they are to wheele off to the right and left, each man following his Leader in single file (and per∣forming their postures of priming and charging, &c.) as they troope downe to place themselves on the inside of their division of shot alongst by the Flankes of the Pikes: The next outmost File which followed the first in the Reere in the meane time are to ranke themselves inwards, and are to give fire and wheele off as the former did, pla∣cing themselves alongst by the Flankes of the Pikes, after the same manner all the rest of the Files are to performe their indeavours. Note the odde Files may eyther march up and give fire single or else the next outermost File may sequent them.

CHAP. LXXXVIII.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers to give fire by two Rankes, advancing them ten or twenty paces before the Front of the Battalia, then even with the Front, and lastly even with the halfe-Files.

THis manner of advancing two Rankes a certaine distance be∣fore the Front of the Battell is commonly used, when two Battells make their approaches one against the other, where∣by they are brought within distance to doe certaine executi∣on; a Serjeant from each Flanke is to leade these two formost rankes up to the place assigned: The first Ranke of each wing of shot is to present and to give fire, wheeling off eyther to the right, or to the right and left, the second Ranke stands ready with their Musquets rested, their Match-cocked and pans guarded, mounting the muzells of their Peeces cleere

of their Leaders, and standing the distance of three foote behind the first Ranke, are ready to Levell and give fire so soone as their Leaders are wheeled off from before them. The first Rankes having presented and given fire (as aforesayd) in their whee∣ling off they are to march downe in single File close by the outside of the wings of shot, untill they come to the Reere of their owne divisions where every man is to place himselfe in the Reere of his owne file. The second Ranke having discharged are after the same manner to wheele off, and to place themselves in the Reere as the former did.

The next two Rankes are to beginne to advance forwards, when they see the last of the two former Rankes presented and ready to give fire, and they also having gi∣ven fire are to wheele off as the former did, and so successively the rest of the Rankes advancing are to imitate the former in all the points.

The body of Pikes are to march very slowly forwards, all the while that the shot are drawne up to give fire before the Front, and if the enemies Battallias be not neare, the Pikes may march shouldred.

But when the enemies Battallias be approacht,* 1.495 within six or eight score, or lesse, then the Musquetiers are to give fire even with the Front of the body of Pikes, and then the Pikemen are to advance their Pikes, and close their Rankes to the distance of three foote, and the shot to advance up even with the first Ranke of Pikes, and there giving fire, they are to wheele off to the right and left, as in the former directions. Note when the first Ranke hath given fire and wheeled off, the next Rankes are to move forwards at three motions into their place,* 1.496 and there to give fire after the same manner whee∣ling away againe, and placing themselves according to the former directions, every Ranke still making good their Leaders ground, by this meanes they may continue gi∣ving fire untill the two Battells are ready to joyne at push of Pike, at which time, the shot are to give fire eyther retiring, or else not to advance further then the halfe files of Pikes, for there they shall be secure from the enemies Pikes offending them, besides they may do as good execution there, as being placed even with the front.

If so be the Drumme beate a retreite, then the shot ought neyther to advance nor retreite, but every Ranke is to give fire upon the same ground they stand on: and then wheele off that the next ranke may doe as much.

Never the lesse, when the forlorne files march forth, or that two Rankes march forth ten paces (or more) before the Front, then they are to give fire as upon a retreit, unlesse the enemy flee.

The Skirmish being ended, the reducement is easie, the Leader of each File, being in his place at the head of his File is to draw up the shot even with the Front of Pikes, and then they will be as at first.

CHAP. LXXXIX.

How a Commander shall exercise his wings of Musquetiers to give fire, they being advanc'd a small distance before the Front of the Pikes, in man∣ner of a Horne battell, and also how to reduce it.

THis kinde of giving fire, (the shot being advanc'd before the Front of the Pikes, the bringers up of eyther winge of Musquetiers being rankt even with the first ranke of Pikes in the Front) is of the same use that the firing by two Rankes, ten paces advanst before the Front, is of, & cannot choose but be more serviceable upon some occasions, in regard the shot doe their execution more readily without intermission of time, or stragling from their bodies; besides it is an apt forme for over fronting, and they are easily to be wheeled, where∣by they may charge the enemy in Flanke; each of these wings of shot may bee led up by a Serjeant, (or some other superiour officer) unto the place assigned by the Chiefe. After the word of command is given for the bringing them into this forme, as in the Margent is expressed, the manner of giving fire is thus to be performed.

• Pikes stand, Musque∣tiers, march untill the bringers up ranke with the Front of Pikes.
  • The first Ranke of Musquetiers presents and give fire wheeling off, eyther all to the right, or to the right and left, (according as they shall be directed) and placing themselves orderly in the Reere of their owne Files; The next Ranke (after the same manner) are to

• ...
  • give fire and wheele off placing themselves behinde those which were their Leaders; thus is every Ranke successive∣ly to doe the like, untill they have all given fire.
  • If you desire to continue giving fire still in this forme, then your shot must moue forwards into the grounde of them that fired before them and the forme will be still the same.
  • But if you desire after once, or twice firing over, to have your shot flanke their Pikes; then the Musquetiers, must not advance into their leaders ground, but contrarily every ranke is to present & give fire upon the same ground they stand on, falling off into the Reere one after another, by which meanes they will be brought even with the Pikes.
  • Or if you please, the Pikes may advance, and march up, to make their Front intire with the File Leaders of the shot, whereby they will be reduced.
• Pikes stand, Musque∣tiers, advance before your Front of Pikes and close your divisions.
  • The forme of this next kinde of firing is produced accor∣ding to the words of Command placed in the Margent,* 1.497 the manner of the forme is thus, the two winges of shot are ad∣vanced before the Front of the body of Pikes: and closing their divisions they shelter the Pikes from the fury of the Enemies shot. And there may be as great execution perfor∣med by this forme of firing, as by any of the former, in re∣gard it is so sollid and stable. In the former firings, the Pikes either rank'd even with the wings of shot, or else the division betweene the wings of shot being open, the Pikes are liable to the danger of the Enemies shot, the Pikes are not able of themselves to doe any thing either in the way of offence, or defence, untill the Enemie be within push of Pike. But this kinde of Demie-hearse Battell covers the Front of their Pikes securely with the wings of their owne shot, untill the Enemie be come within distance.
  • There are two principall wayes of giving fire belonging to this forme, namely first the Musquetiers may give fire in the Front, and so wheele off by division, or if the Comman∣der pleaseth, they may wheele all off to the right, placing themselves in the Reere of their owne divisions and Files of shot just before the Front of the Pikes.
  • The next Rankes are immediately to move forwards into their Leaders ground, and are likewise to give fire and wheele off placing themselves after the maner of the former, the rest of the rankes of Musquetiers performing the like, untill they have all given fire: Thus having fired once or twice over this way, you may make use of a second way of firing, which shall serve for reducement of the former.
  • Wherefore observe that in this second way of firing, when the first Rankes have given fire, they are to wheele equally off by division, each part faling file wise downe close by the flankes of the wings of Musquetiers, untill the Leaders of the rankes of shot are come downe as low as the first ranke of Pikes, which being performed they are to face outwards: and to move so farre forth in a straight line untill they have ranked even with the first ranke of Pikes, not forgetting to leave there a distance betwixt the Inermost Musquet of each Flanke, and the outermost File-Leader of the Pikes. So soone as the first Ranke hath given fire and wheeled away, the second Ranke is to give fire, wheeling off as before, and passing down betweene the Intervalls of the Flankes placing themselves after their Leaders. The same is every Ranke suc∣cessively

• ...
  • to doe untill all the shot be drawne from before the Front, & placed on the Flankes of their Pikes. But when all the shot in the front hath discharged unto the two last rankes, then the Pikes are to porte, and when they have all fired and wheeled away, then they are to charge their Pikes; then ad∣vancing their Pikes again, the Battallia stands reduced as in its first forme.
• Musquetiers make ready to give fire by Introduction to the right.
• Files of Musquetires open by division to your open order.
  • You shall finde in the Margent the words of Command that produceth this forme of giving fire,* 1.498 by way of Intro∣duction, it being a kinde of advancing against the Enemie, and of gayning ground, although not used (in these our Mo∣derne warres) but in way of exercise. It is to be performed two wayes. The first, when the motion is begun by the second Ranke from the Front. The other when it is begun by the bringers up; wherefore observe before the firing be∣gin, you must open your Files of Musquetiers, to their open order, so that the shot may passe betweene the Intervalls of each File to give fire in the Front. The maner and forme of this kind of firing by Introduction may be thus performed. The Pikes being flanked with the Musquetiers, the first ranke of each flanke is to present and give fire, and having fired, they stand and make ready againe in the same place. The second Ranke passing forwards before the first, doe there also fire and stand. The third Ranke then passing forwards, after the second, and standing even in Ranke with them that first fired, that so soone as the second Ranke hath fired, they may presently step before them and fire in like maner. In this firing still the ranke which is next to fire, stands even in ranke with them which last fired, untill those which stand presented have first given fire, after which they then passe before them; the Ranke which was their next followers, passing forwarde, & Ranking with those which last fired, every man following his Leader successively, untill the bringers up give fire and stand in the Front of all; and then this forme will be like the figure of a Horne battell. All the while that this firing by Introducti∣on is continued, the Pikes may be shouldred, if there be no feare of the Enemies Horse. If you continue this firing twice over the Musquetiers will have their right place: which being done, march up your Pikes and Ranke them even in Front with the shot, and they are reduced.
  • The second way of firing by introduction: The first Ranke, (or File Leaders) are to give fire as before, and to stand. The last Ranke (or bringers up) in the interim of their firing marching up, and ranking even with the second Ranke: the rest follow their bringers up, as they doe when bringers up double their Front: the first Ranke having fired, the bringers up step imediatly before them, present, and give fire, the rest still successively doing the like, untill every ranke have given fire once over: observe with all, that the File Leaders are to give fire twice over, being the first, and the last, and then to stand, the Pikes marching up even with their Front of Mus∣quetiers. And thus they are reduced as at first. If the two first rankes of Pikes in every Battallia should have bowes fastned to their Pikes,* 1.499 they might do good service against the enemie whilst the shot performes their duties in giving fire.
  • The words of Command which produceth this forme of a Diamand Battell, is in the Margent, Amongst the Ancients it hath bin of great account, but in these late ages

• ...
  • Musquetiers, Ranke, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, &c. by in∣crease to the left.
• Files of Pikes ran∣ked by decrease after your Musquetiers.
  • not used in the warres, The manner of forming it is thus: first you must cause your Musquetiers of the right flanke, to open to the right, to a sufficient distance for the receiving the shot of the left flanke. Then you must Command the left flanke of Musquetiers, to passe through into the space of ground on the right. This being done, for to frame this battell you must command your Files of Musquetires to ranke, 1, 3, 5, 7 &c. by increase to the left, then you must command the Files of Pikes to ranke by decrease after the Musquetiers; The Mus∣quitiers may give fire from this forme of Battell two wayes principally, the first is the giving fire in Ranke (viz.) the first man (or point of the diamond) is first to give fire, then he is to wheele off to the right, and place himselfe just be∣hind the single Pikemen in the Reere; then the next Ranke consisting of three men are to give fire, and to wheele off by division, and are to place themselves in Ranke behind the single Musquetiere as they were before the firing began, next the Ranke of five Musquitiers gives fire wheeling off in like manner by division, ever observing that where the num∣ber is odde, and they commanded to wheele off by division, there the greatest number alwayes goes to the right: And after this manner every Ranke gives fire successively, and place themselves after their Leaders, as before is shewed: when all the shot have given fire and are wheeled off, then let the Pikes charge, which will be fiveteene in the first Rank, the rest decreasing (having advanced your forme) will stand like two wedges with their points joyned.
  • If you would reduce your men from this forme, with∣out giving fire, then let the Musquitiers stand, and the Pikes face to the Reere, and then the wedge will stand faced in opposition: Next you may command them to interchange ground, the Musquetiers advancing forwards into the ground of the Pikes, and the Pikes moving into the ground of the Musquetiers, and then by facing the Pikes to the former front, the body will stand in forme of a diamond againe. If you would give fire from this forme in regard all the Mus∣quetiers are placed in the Reere, the body must face about, & so the firing will bee contrary to the former. But if you wheele them about, then they may give fire the same way: However after fire is given they must wheele off by divisi∣on, and place themselves in the Reere of the Pikes, even in Rank againe as they were when they gave fire: Thus having all fired over & wheeled away, the Pikes may charge, & be∣ing againe advanced, the body wil stand in form of a diamond.
  • The second way of firing on this Diamond forme is by way of Counter-march, and is an oblique firing, for where∣as in the other firing by Rankes in the Diamond Battell, each Ranke fired by increase of two, beginning with one, and en∣ding with 15. 17. or 21, &c. (according to the quantitie of your Souldiers) in a Ranke; this second kind of firing con∣trary wise may beginne with 15. 17. or 21, &c. and end with one, still decreasing two; and to performe this firing your Files must be at open order, because the Musquetiers must Counter-march downe betweene the Intervals of their owne Files to the right, every Musquetiere that findes him∣himselfe without a Leader, being to present and give fire, and then to Counter-march to the right, and to place him∣selfe in the Reere of his owne File behind the Pikes, when

• ...
  • the first Ranke (if it consists but of 15.) have given fire, then the next Ranke of 13. is to present, give fire, and Counter-march, still placing themselves in the Reere of their owne files; next there fireth 11. then 9, &c. And in this manner of firing they that fire together stand nei∣ther in Ranke nor File, but obliquely when all the shot have fired, and are Counter-marcht into the Reere of their owne Files, then the Rankes will become two, and two of a number.
  • Your men standing in the forme before described if you please you may produce another forme by facing them all to the Reere, then com∣mand your Musquetiers to march ten or twelve paces, your Pikes to stand, and your Musquetiers will make resemblance of a hollow wedge, and your Piks of a sollid wedge. Lastly, to reduce all these severall formes into the first proper square battell; first let the sollid wedge, close for∣wards into the hollow of the other, then let the shot make ready, present, and give fire as before (viz.) every Musquetiere that findes himselfe with∣out a Leader is to give fire and Counter-march to the Reere of his owne File, and the rest doing the like successively, when they have all fired and are all Counter-marcht cleare, let the Pikes charge and then the body of your Battallia will have the forme of a Diamond againe.
  • Next face them all to the Reere and command the Rankes to file 8. &c. to the right, which being done, passe the shot through which belongs to the left flanke into their places, and close the Musquetiers to the right Flanke to their due distance, and then they will stand in their proper re∣ducement.
• Wheele your Flankes in∣to the front, and face the body to one of the flanks, and wheele your battell into a Con∣vex halfe Moone.
  • The manner and use of the severall wayes of firing belonging to this forme of the Convex,* 1.500 half Moone, or semi-circuler Battell, is a forme which our Schoolemaster in the rudiments (Julius Casar) did highly esteeme of, it makes shew but of a few Souldiers in regard of the ro∣tunditie of it, yet being drawne out in Length it makes a very long Front, it may be for the Landing of Souldiers in the enemies country, or being secured in the Reere with Rivers, Bogges, Ditches or the like, it hath beene accounted very prevalent to be opposed against an Armie of greater power, It may be framed either with the shot outermost or in∣nermost or lined.
  • If your battell be in forme of a Hearse then wheele them to the right and left about, untill they have attained this forme of a Semicircle, but if in a square then you must make use of those words of command plac'd in the Margent which will produce this Convex forme.
  • Having brought your Souldiers into this Semicircle, you may face them all inwards the better to heare such speeches or orations as shall be by the Commander delivered unto them, but for to receive a charge from the enemy you must face them outwards, there must be certaine intervalls or distances betwixt each division for the shot to wheele off and march downe in: The outmost Arch or first ranke of each division is to present and give fire, those of the right Flanke wheeling off to the right, and the left Flanke to the left, placing themselves in the Reere of their owne divisions of Musquetiers, still making good their Leaders ground, the rest of the Rankes are to doe the same until they have all given fire.
  • Never the lesse if the enemies horse should bee too potent then let them give fire by division as is shewed before, passing quite through their intervalls, and placing themselves in the Reere of the Pikes, every ranke is to make good his Leaders ground. Thus also are the rest of the Musquitiers to give fire, placing themselves in the concave part of the body as aforesaid, following the Pikes which now makes good the Mus∣quetiers ground; the Pikes may eyther charge over hand or upon occa∣sion at the foote, drawing forth their Swords over their left arme, and couching downe their heads, by which meanes the Musquitiers may

• ...
  • play over their shoulders for the first ranke having fired may kneele downe and charge againe, and so the second ranke may give fire, and kneele in like sort making ready againe, and so all the rest, untill the first ranke riseth up with the rest and give fire over againe. So the skirmish may be continued the Pikes still opposing the Horse.
• Pikes stand; Musque∣tiers face to the reere, and march un∣til your are cleere of your body of Pikes. Then face inwards, and close your division, then face to your Leader and double your Rankes
  • For the reducement of this forme, and to bring every Man to his place. Let your shot (either by firing, or passing through) be brought into the place they were in, before they first gave fire, then face the whole body to one of the flankes; and march them untill they have evened their Rankes, and straitned their Files, this done then if all your Pikes be upon the right flanke, wheele your right flanke into the midst, if on the left flanke wheele Front and Reere into the left flanke. This being prefor∣med the Commander must passe to his proper file-Leaders, and face the whole body to him, and they will be in their first forme.
  • This way of firing by extraduction is also a firing in Front, it is of sin∣guler good use in a Strait or narrow passage,* 1.501 where the wings and Reere may be secured from the fury of the Enemies Horse, you must fill the mouth of the Passage with your Pikes, and if the length of your Com∣pany be not sufficient to doe it, then double your Rankes, and your Pikes being charged, Your Musquetiers being in the Reere are to march up into the Front, and give fire, as in the next place shal be demonstrated, onely first by the way observe the words of directions placed in the Margent, which produceth this forme. The battel being ordred as a fore∣said Let the first Ranke of Musquetiers, (which are those that followes next after the Pikes) face to the right and march forth (File-wise) up close by the right flanke of Pikes, untill he that is the conductor of them become into the Front of the Pikes, then he is to leade them quite crosse the Front of Pikes, untill he have attained the further part of the Front to the left: which being done, they are all to stand present and give fire. You must observe withall that he in this firing that was the right hand man of the Ranke, and was the Leader of the motion: now becomes the left hand man when he gives fire, and when they have fired they are to wheele off to the left close by the left flanke of Pikes and so to fall into the Reere of the Musquetiers. In the Interim whilst that the Ranke that first fired, is wheeling away, the second ranke is marching into their places to give fire. And in this maner they may maintaine their skirmish so long as they please: the Pikes either porting or charging all the while. The Musquetiers in their time of their crossing the Front, are to couch, or stoope under their Pikes, that they may be no impediment to them in their charge.
  • There is another way of firing by extraduction, which is that the Right hand Leader of Musquetiers placeth himselfe before the right File Leader of Pikes,* 1.502 the rest all faling beyond him but this is a more im∣perfect way then the former and not worth the further describing.
  • For Reducement you must command your Pikes to stand, and your Musquets to double their Front by division. But if you want roome to doe it, then first double your Files to the contrary hand of that which you doubled your rankes, and so having doubled by division, as a fore∣said they will be reduced as at first.
• Wheele your flankes into the front, face to your Leader.
  • The firings belonging to a broad fronted battell are of singular use either offensive,* 1.503 or defensive. The words of direction that produceth this forme is in the Margent, and the maner of performing it is thus, first cause your Pikes to stand, and your Musquetiers to march untill the reere ranke of Musquetiers be advanced a little space before the Front of the Pikes, then let the Musquetiers face inwards, (or in opposition) and close their divisi∣on, and then face to their Leaders, And if you would bring more hands to fight, double rankes to any hand. But the speediest way to produce thus forme, is to wheele both flankes into the Front. For the manner of firing,

• ...
  • there are Intervalls made for each division to the right; that so they may either fall into the reere of the shot, and there continue the firing; or else fall into the reere of the Pikes: and be thereby secured from the enemies horse. Wherefore be pleased to observe the words of Command whereby this forme is produced (which is placed in the Margent,) For the performance of this firing, the first ranke is to present and give fire, then wheele off to the right; all passing downe the Intervalls to the right and placing themselves in the reere of their owne shot, the Musquetiers making good their Leaders ground. Likewise after the next rankes have fired, they are after the former Manner to wheele off and to place them∣selves. This way they may give fire once or twise over, and then make use of a second way. And that is to place themselves in the reere of the Pikes; either standing or advancing: Or if neede be the Pikes may close their divisions, and charge at the foote, the Musquetiers giving fire over them. For Reducement: If you make this forme of battell by wheeling your flankes into the front and there having given fire, as foresaid; Then you must cause them to give fire over againe, and so fall into their former places: for you must observe that the second firing will cause the body to face to the Reere, which then becomes a Front accidentall, and then by wheeling your Flankes into the Front againe, and facing them about to the right; will bring them into their first station: or if you would re∣duce them without giving of fire over againe; then you must Command your shot to double their Front by division, that being done, you are to wheele both Flankes into the Reare, then facing to their Leaders, you must againe Command the Musquetiers to double their Front by divi∣sion, and they will be in their first forme and station.

CHAP. XC.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in giving fire to the Reere, with the severall wayes there to belonging, and how they ought to be performed.

HAving in the former discourse shewed the diverse and sun∣dry wayes of giving fire in the Front. It seemes now requisit I should doe the same Office, in demonstrating the severall wayes of giving fire in the Reere. Where∣fore after the Commander hath taught his Souldiers these wayes, (or at least the chiefest of them) in giving fire in the Front, he must performe the like paines in exercising them in their firings in the Reere. And first having Com∣manded them to face about into the Reere, or wheele them about, or performe it by Counter marching. The Company, we presuppose stands in Battallia, with the wings of shot, upon each flanke of the body of Pikes: the Pikes being shouldred you may cause them to march easily forwards; the Enemie being supposed to appeare in the Reere, Com∣mand your last ranke of Musquetiers to face about, present, and give fire, wheeling off by division, File-wise marching uptoward the Front, and there placing themselves before the foremost ranke of shot, (the outmost man of each ranke, being the Leader up of those which have fired) where first taking their place on the outside, the rest wheeling about them, and ranking even with them on the inside, ever observing that they ranke even with the second ranke of Pikes; the rest of the shot also doing the like, and in this manner to continue the firing: as occasion shall require. This kinde of firing may easily be performed if Souldiers will but observe these following directions, (viz) when the last ranke of Musquetiers have presented to the reere and are giving of fire, then the ranke which marcheth next before them must blow, open, and present at three motions* 1.504 still keeping along even with the body of Pikes, untill that (lastly)

they present to the reere, by which time the ranke that last fired, will be wheeled a∣way. The next ranke so soone as the other hath presented, is likewise at three moti∣ons, to doe the same; and so successively for all the rest, every ranke observing, upon each rankes firing, to loose one, and to march one ranke neerer to the reere of the battell, that so that part may still be kept absolute, Captaine Swan, (at the giving over of Deventer, in Gilderland, by Stanly, and Yorke) did defend himselfe from the enemies Horse by giving fire in the reere untill he had gained a place of strength, which honorable performance will never be buried in oblivion.

But suppose the Enemies horse shall still pursue your troopes in the reere, you ha∣ving gained some straight, or place of aduantage, then your best way will be to wheele your Flanke into the Front, and then face them about into the reere, and with your charged Pikes defend your shot, which will be in the reere of the Pikes, after they have wheeled as aforesaid. The Body standing in this forme, the shot may sleeve up by way of Extraduction, or otherwise you may cause your Pikes to charge at foote, and the Musquetiers to give fire over them.

For reducing them having thus fired, you must command them to wheele their Flankes into the Front, and to face about after their proper File Leaders, and they will be in their first forme.

A second way to give fire in the reere,* 1.505 is to place all your shot marching, in the reere of the Pikes. The manner of performing the motion, is as before is shewed. But the placing of the men after they have given fire, may be diversly performed. As to wheele off by division, placing themselves in the Front of the Musquetiers, next behinde the reere of the Pikes.

Or if the Body be Large, to wheele all off to the right, through distances for that purpose made, and so to march into the Front of the Pikes.

Or otherwise they may wheele off by division and Flanke their Pikes, and so give fire over againe as at first.

If in giving fire in the reere, your Musquetiers wheele off and place themselves before the Front of the Pikes, then to reduce them, you may either wheele the body about, and give fire in Front causing your Musquetiers to fail off by division, and to flanke their Pikes; Or if you will reduce them with out a firing, cause your Musque∣tiers to open to the right and left, and the Pikes to march up into the midst, and then facing them to their Leader and they will be in their first forme.

Let these Instructions suffice, for the giving fire in the reere: desiring every Com∣mander to be uery carefull, and punctuall, in exercising their shot in these kinde of firings in the reere, It being a thing of great Consequence, and very aduantagious for the preservation of Foote troopes from the fury of a prosecuting enemie, that would seeke to cut them off: or at least deterr them from ariving at their place of strength where they may be secured. In the next place, shall be shewne, the wayes of giving fire in the Flankes, so that a Companie may be made compleate in their performances of Exercise.

CHAP. XCI.

How a Commander shall exercise his Company in giving fire in the Flankes, with the Circumstances there unto belonging.

THe Manner of giving fire in Flanke is used in two respects; The first is, when the Enemie shall make his aproaches to charge your Troopes on the Flanke in a march.

The second, is when as by some sudden attempt or ambushment, the whole Body of an Army is ingaged: and so forced to stand, and to face to the right, or left, or both; by which facings the flankes become Fronts accidentall, and their firings will be after the same manner of the firings in Front, wherefore I will indeavour to shew such firings in Flanke, as are of use in a march, which are these following.

The first is for the outmost File to give fire, and stand, untill the next File hath fired.

Secondly, after they have given fire in Flanke they are to be led up betweene Musquetiers and Pikes.

The third way of firing in Flanke after they have performed it, they are led off by the bringers up.

The forth way after they have given fire, they are placed as sleeves upon the con∣trary flanke of Pikes.

The Fifth way is after they have given fire in flanke, they are drawne up betweene the inmost Files of Pikes: of these I shall discourse severally, in their due places. In the meane time suppose all your Musquetiers to be placed upon the right wing of your Pikes, and casting your eye into the Margent, you shall finde the words of Com∣mand, which produceth this firing in the Flanke.

• Musque∣tiers give fire to the right, and gather up your Files.
  • The Command being, to give fire to the right, presently the outermost File to the right faceth outward, and presents, the rest of the body still marching forwards. Then the presented File gives fire, and stands facing againe to their first Front, by that time the body will be marched cleere of the standing File, then the next outermost File, presents, and fires in like manner, the body facing as before; having fired they in like manner facing to their first Front and stand, a Serjeant Leading up the File that first fired on the outside of the File that last fired, Then they both stand together, untill the third File hath given fire after the same manner, and then the Serjeant Leades up the two Files, even with the third which last fired. And after this manner all the Files of Musque∣tiers are to face to the Flanke, and give fire successively, and stand; untill the Serjant Leades up the rest of the Files which fired, even with the Front of the File which last fired. Thus having all fired over they are to march up againe even with the Front of Pikes, and this re∣duceth them, as at first.
• Musque∣tiers give fire, in flanke, march up be••eene the Pikes and Musquets.
  • The second manner of giving fire to the Flanke is a more secure way,* 1.506 then the former: and yet full as Serviceable for matter of execution, for this way after the shot hath fired, they shall be secured from the Enemies shot, farre better then the former, and also the body shall continue more intire without seperation. And this forme is of very good use when two Enemies are divided by a River, or by some such like meanes se∣cured from the Incursions of Horse, for then the shot being drawne up betweene the innermost Files of the Musquetiers and the outermost File of Pikes to the right, your skirmish may be continued as long as occasion shall serve. The words of Command which produceth this forme is placed in the Margent. And the way to performe this motion of firing is as followeth (Onely take notice that as in the former manner of firing, the shot were placed upon the right flanke of Pikes, after the same manner they are placed now, with a distance betwixt the outer∣flanke of the Pikes and the inmost flanke of the Musquetiers for the shot to march up into after they have given fire).
  • The outermost File of Musquetiers being Commanded to face to the right, and present: the rest of the body marcheth away, and the standing File gives fire. This done and the body is marched cleere of the standing file, the next file presents to the right, and the file that first gave fire, faceth to the first Front, and is led by a Serjeant crosse the reere of Musque∣tiers up into the distance between the Musquets and Pikes. The Musque∣tiers are still open to the right, as they march that so there may be Roome for one File to march betweene them and the Pikes. And so successive∣ly each file having fired marcheth up next unto the right flanke of Pikes: when all your shot hath given fire once over, they are reduced as at first.
• Musquetiers give fire to the right, whee∣ling off after your bringers up, and placing your selves be∣tweene your divisions.
  • The third way of giving fire in flanke,* 1.507 differeth nothing from the former. But onely their manner of wheeling off, and placing them, doth differ: for you remember in the former, that the File of Musquetiers,

• ...
  • after that they had given fire were led off by their proper File-Lea∣dere, but this must be led off to the contrary by their bringers up, and this indeede if the body bee upon a slow march is the readiest and quickest way, and doth more speedily secure the shot after they have given fire: The Pikes and Shot being placed in Battallia as before is described, you may take the words of command and direction which produceth this firing, as it is placed in the Margent, and the way of performing this firing is as followeth.
  • Frst you must presuppose your body to be marching (as before is shewed upon all these firings in Flanke) with their Pikes shouldred. The command being given, the outmost File presents to the right, and gives fire, then faceth to the right, after their bringers up who leadeth them off, crosse the Reere of Musquetiers marching them up betweene the divisions, the bringers up supplying the File-Leaders place, and marching even in Ranke in the Front with the File-Lea∣ders, and the file Leader of the same File becomming the bringer up in the Reere. The Files of Musquetiers or Pikes, (according as the Command shall be given) are as they march, to open, thereby giving way to the Musquetiers, after they have fired to come up betweene the divisions; and so soone as the first file that fired is cleare from the right Flanke, the second File is then to present and give fire, and in like manner to wheele off as before, and so to march up betweene the Pikes and Musquetiers; every File successively giving fire, and wheeling off as aforesaid. This firing may be performed as often as the Commander pleaseth: Never the lesse if it be twise performed the men are reduced as at first, every man possessing his right place. There is another way for the bringers up to wheele off, and each of them to leade off his File untill he comes to the Reere of his division, which is betweene the Musquets and the Pikes, and there hee is to stand and ranke with the bringers up, the rest that follow passing on forwards by way of introduction, and every man ranking before him that was his Leader in the wheeling off, untill the proper File-Leader be come into his place againe, and after this way they may give fire, each firing being his owne reducement.
• Musquetiers give fire to the right, placing your selves on the outside of the left Flank of Pikes.
  • The fourth way of giving f••re in the Flanke differeth nothing from the former,* 1.508 but in the manner of placing the Files, that they may be the better defended from the fury of the enemies Horse, after they have given fire upon them in the Flanke, for the same purpose there∣fore after the shot have fired, they are to be drawne up on the outer∣side of the left Flanke of Pikes for their safeguard: if there bee any Rivers, Ponds, Ditches, Hedges, Marish grounds or the like, whereby the Horse may be disabled from performing any execution against them, and then the Pikes are to make their best defence, if neede be charging at the foote closely seried together with their Swords drawne, so that the shot may give fire over them. Now by the way you are to presuppose that the shot and Pikes are ranged in forme, as before is described in the former wayes of firing in the Flanke; and taking with you the words of command and direction pla∣ced in the Margent, you shall perceive the manner of firing and pla∣cing of the men as followeth: First the outermost file having presen∣ted to the right, the rest of the body continueth the march, whilst they in the meane time are giving fire, which being done and the bo∣dy cleare, the next outmost File presents: The File that last fired in the interim facing to the left after their proper File-Leader, who lea∣deth them crosse the Reere, both of Musquets and Pikes a good round pace, sleeving them upon the outside of the left Flanke of Pikes; the next File having in like manner fired, doth also troope up on the out∣side of the File led off before: Every File having given fire and placed

• ...
  • ... ••••••mselves as before is described then the Pikes may charge. Having ••••••en fire to the right Flanke and drawne all your shot upon the left ••••nke, you may cause them in like sort to give fire on the left Flanke, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 bring them back againe to the right Flanke, by which meanes they will be reduced into their first forme: Or if you would reduce them without firing, then either passe your Musquetiers through be∣tweene your Rankes of Pikes, or else let your whole division of shot be drawne crosse, eyther the Front or Reere of Pikes, into their places.
  • Or if you please your shot may give fire in Flanke by division; the first fire sleeving on the left Flanke, the rest of the Files still falling betweene the Pikes, and the Musquetiers that wheeled off before the last before them, and this is a very good way of firing and may be re∣duced with doing the same way backe againe.
• Musquetiers give fire to the right, march∣ing up be∣tweene the midst of the Pikes.
  • The fift way of firing in a Flanke,* 1.509 and bringing them off betweene the midst of the Pikes, is to be used at such times when as you would secure your shot from the enemies Horse, there being no other na∣turall strength to defend them; and upon occasion you may draw three or foure Files of Pikes (more or lesse, according to your number, or the danger) crosse the Musquetiers both in Front and Reere which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the midst betwixt the Pikes, which may serve for an impalement 〈◊〉〈◊〉 defend the shot both in Front and Reere as in Flanke. The forme ••f this battell is after this manner; the shot are placed upon the right ••••ing of the Pikes, as is described in the former firings, and the Pikes are divided in the middlemost File, leaving such a proportionable distance as may conveniently receive all the Files of shot after they have fired. The word of command and direction you shall finde pla∣ced in the Margent: The command being given for the outermost File to present to the right, (as formerly is shewed in the other firings in the Flanke) the rest of the body still marcheth on untill that the outermost File hath fired, and is faced to the left againe, following their Leader: He now leading them off to the left, marched up in the distance which is made betweene the middlemost Files of Pikes, who are then to open to the right and left, so to give them roome to march up betweene them; in the meane time the next File having given fire, wheeleth off in like manner, marching up on the left hand of the File that fired last before, and so successively for all the rest of the Files of Musquetiers, all which are to give fire and wheele off as before, placing them still on the left hand of the Files which last fired; wherein still is to be noted that the Pikes are still to open to the right and left, for the receiving the shot betweene them after they have discharged. This firing, as well as all the former firings in Flank may be led off by their bringers up, as well as by their File-Leaders, and then the reducement will be answerable. The shot having all given fire the Pikes may seeke to defend themselves by charging at push of Pike, or at foote; if there bee any Bow Pikes they may gall the ene∣my in the meane time, or the shot may play over the shoulders of the Pikes as they charge at the foote, one ranke giving fire after ano∣ther, for the formost Ranke having fired may kneele downe, and there make ready againe untill the next Ranke behind hath also fired, &c. For reducement and to bring the Musquetiers into both flankes againe as they were before wee discoursed of these severall firings in Flankes; you must first command your Pikes to face inwards, and your Musquetiers to the right and left outward, and so to passe them through and interchange ground, then facing them to their Leader they will be reduced as at first.
  • You must observe that all these firings in flanke may as well be per∣formed to the left hand and with the same words, onely the words of

• ...
  • right must be changed for left, and left for right.
  • The next discourse shall be of divisionall firings.

CHAP. XCII.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in divisionall firings (viz.) front and reere upon a March.

• Musquetiers give fire to the Front and Reere, and flanke your Pikes.
  • YOu may please to remember how that in the last foregoing firings in the flanke, the Shot were placed in the middest of the Pikes, and now before we can give directions for these divisionall firings in Front and Reere, we must ob∣serve the way of reducing the Musquetiers into the Front and Reere of the Pikes, from the forme wherein they last stood. To performe this, you must command the halfe Files of Musquetiers to face about, which done, let the Pikes stand and the Musquetires march, untill they are cleare both of Front and Reere of Pikes, then let them stand and face to their Leader, then command your Pikes to close their divi∣sions, and the shot will bee one halfe of them in Front and the other halfe in the Reere, in a readinesse to performe this firing which wee are now about to discourse of: The Pikes being shouldred and the words of command and direction given (as in the Margent is specifi∣ed) the first Ranke in the Front presents, and the last Ranke faceth about to the Reere and doth the like, and so by giving fire together wheele off by division, (viz.) the one halfe of the Ranke following after the right hand man of the same Ranke, the other halfe after the left hand man who leads them close downe by the sides or flankes of the Musquetiers untill they come to the Pikes: The first Ranke of Musquetiers in the Front are to ranke even with the first Ranke of Pikes, and the last Ranke of Musquetiers in the Reere are to ranke even with the last Ranke of Pikes, leaving a sufficient di∣stance betwixt them and their Pikes for the other Musquetiers to march betweene. And by the way take notice that he that was outer∣most when they gave fire, must likewise be outermost when they have taken their places on the Flanks; the first and last Ranke having fired and wheeled off, the next rankes (the body marching on, three or foure steppes) are in like manner to present and give fire, wheeling off by di∣vision, and passing betweene the divisions, there placing themselves, they of the Front division are to place them selves behind those which fired last before them, and they of the Reere division before them which fired last in the Reere behind them; and thus they may con∣tinue to give fire after the same manner untill they have all given fire over once, then may the body make a stand and the Pikes charge to the Front and Reere if occasion be; or if the Commander would conti∣nue his firing to the front and Reere still upon this same forme, then let the shot of the Front place themselves (after they have given fire) behind the Musquetiers of their owne division, and those of the Reere division are to place themseleves betwixt the Reere of Pikes and the shot of their owne division, and so the body moving but slowly forwards they may continue the firing.
• Musquetiers give fire to the Front and Reere, placing your selves be∣tweene your divisions.
  • In the precedent discourse after fire was given to Front and Reere,* 1.510 the shot flanked the Pikes, now from this forme I will indeavour to shew you a second way of firing to Front and Reere, which may ea∣sily be effected if the Souldiers be well instructed. To performe this firing take these words of command and directions (placed in the Margent) which will produce this forme of firing following. The command being thus given the first Ranke presents to the front, like∣wise the last Ranke of Musquetiers in the Reere faceth about and pre∣sents towards the Reere, then both at one instant gives fire, wheeling

• ...
  • off by division, and placing themselves betweene the Musquetiers of their division, These, namely, which were of the Front halfe files falling into the Reere of their owne divisions, and those of the Reere halfe files (con∣trary wise) falling before their halfe File-Leaders, and ranking even with the halfe File-Leaders of the Pikes, the next Ranke successively firing and wheeling off after the same manner: Having fired once over they are reduced every man to his place. The Officer must take some paines in teaching his Souldiers these two last firings, otherwise they will seeme very difficult at first for them to performe.

CHAP. XCIII.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in giving fire to the Reere and right Flanke marching, and likewise to both Flankes at once marching, and also to both Flankes standing.

• Musque∣tiers, give fire to the right flanke and reere, placing your selves be∣tweene the Pikes and your owne divisions.
  • THis kinde of firing in Reere and Flanke upon a march, is very serviceable at such times as the enemy shall skirmish with the body, to annoy them in their passage in Flanke and Reere at one time, And this kinde of firing you may performe two severall wayes, as first your Musquetiers being placed in their ordinary place upon the Flankes of their Pikes: The se∣cond and more securer way for the Pikes will be, to draw the Musquetieres from that flanke which is least in danger, crosse the Reere of Pikemen. The words of command and direction you shall finde in the Margent, which produceth this latter forme of firing: the words of command being given to fire to the Reere and right Flanke: The outermost File of Musquetiers presents to the right; and the last Ranke of Musquetiers presents to the Reere, and so both give fire; the rest of the body in the meane time marching a reasonable pace: The right hand File on the right Flanke; and the last Ranke of the Mus∣quetiers in the Reere of the Pikes, having fired, the File facech to the left after their File Leader, and so marcheth up betweene the Musque∣tiers of the same division and the Pikes; the Rankes also wheeling off to the right, and placing it selfe next after the Reere of Pikes: and if you please you may make an Intervall or space betweene the Musquetiers in the Reere that so one part may wheele off to the right on the outside, & the other part wheele off to the right, and march up betweene the Inter∣valls into their places. The first File file upon the Flanke, and the first Ranke in the Reere that presented, having given fire and wheeled cleare of the body; the next File and ranke is to present and give fire; after the same manner wheeling off and taking their places as aforesaid, and so successively the rest, both Files and Rankes gives fire, observing the same order, and having given fire once, twice or oftner over they are still reduced to the same they were before the firing began; then draw your shot from the Reere to the left Flanke againe, and they will be in their first forme and station.
• Musque∣tiers give fire to both Flankes, marching up betweene the Pikes and your owne divi∣sions.
  • This kinde of firing to both Flankes marching,* 1.511 may be upon some oc∣casions serviceable, and the shot after they have given fire may be eyther placed betweene their owne divisions and the Pikes, or betweene the midst of the Pikes, for their better securitie; the shot being placed up∣on both the Flankes of the Pikes, as we left them in the former discourse, you must make use of the words of command and direction (which is placed in the Margent) which will produce this forme of firing. The command being given the outmost file of each Flanke presents outward, the rest of the body still continuing of the march; the presented Files (in the interim) giving fire, then facing after their proper File-Leaders, who are to leade them up betweene the Musquetiers of their owne divi∣sions and the Pikes) in the time of their wheeling away) the next two

• ...
  • outermost Files are to present, firing after the same manner, and leading up as before; the rest successively doing the like untill they have fired all over, which brings them to their former places.
• Advance your Pikes, and stand, face to the right and left; Mus∣quetiers give fire and Flanke your Pikes.
  • This kinde of firing to both Flankes upon a stand, is produced by the words of command and directions placed in the Margent,* 1.512 onely observe, the Musquetiers are placed upon both Flankes of the body of Pikes, as you left them in the precedent discourse. The words of command be∣ing given, the whole body both of Pikes and Shot are to face to the right and left hand, and then the formost Rankes of Musquetiers (which before the facing were the outermost Files) are to present and give fire, and then wheele off by division, Ranking even with the formost Rankes of Pikes, and leaving sufficient Intervalls for the rest of the Musque∣tiers to march betweene them and the Pikes: The next Ranke presen∣ting and firing after the same manner, but not advancing forwards, onely firing upon the same ground and wheeling off by division: after∣wards passing downe betweene the Intervalls, and so ranking after their Leaders; but you must observe by the way, that they that were outer∣most when they gave fire are likewise to be so, when they have taken their places: All the Rankes of Musquetiers having fired and wheeled off as before, the Pikes if neede be may charge, and the Musquetiers giving fire over againe, wheeling off outwards, and placing themselves in the Reere of their owne divisious: Having advanced your Pikes, and faced your body to their first Front, all your Musquetiers will be in Front and Reere, and then if your halfe Files about and give fire (after the same manner formerly discoursed of) to the Front and Reere, having faced them againe to their first Front, they will be reduced as at first into their ordinary square.

CHAP. XCIIII.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in a Triple way of giving fire to the Front.

BY this triple firing to the Front the precedent forme of firing to both Flankes standing may be reduced, for the Musquetiers of the Reere di∣vision opening to the right and left, and sleeving upon the Flankes of the Pikes, untill the Leaders of the Reere division, (who then were the halfe File-Leaders) ranke even with the Front of Pikes; and those in the front division are placed before the Pikes in the Front, securely covering them from the ene∣my; The word of command and directions that produceth this forme of firing is pla∣ced in the Margent.

• Musque∣tiers of the Reere, dou∣ble your Front of Pikes by division.
  • The one halfe of the shot being placed before the front of the Pikes, and the other halfe placed upon eyther flanke even with the first Ranke of Pikes, and the word of command being given, then the first Ranke of Musquetiers (both of front and flankes) presents to the front and gives fire, wheeling off to the right and left by division. The Musquetiers of the front division being wheeled off (as aforesaid) close by the flankes of their owne Musquetiers, passe directly downe betweene the Intervals, and place themselves even in Ranke behind the Musquetiers of the Reere divisi∣on, which are upon the flanks, like wise the Musqueters that fired at the same time on the flankes wheele also off the right flanke to the right, & the left flanke to the left) marching directly downe even with the reere Rankes of the Pikes, and there place themselves againe even in ranke with the last ranke of Pikes; this done the rest of the rankes successively give fire, and doe the like, every ranke taking his place, after the ranke that fired last before them; the other Rankes mooving one ranke forwarder; the Musquetiers having given fire once over, and falling off according to this direction, they will all be reduced to the Flanke againe as at first. View the figure in the next page.

[illustration]

The Figure of the Triple firing to the Front.

Front.

Serjeant Serjeant.

Serjeant Serjeant

CHAP. XCV.

How a Commander shall exercise his Souldiers in giving fire three wayes at once, (viz.) to the Front, Reere and right Flanke.

IN performing this firing three wayes at once, first you may suppose the Musquetiers to be placed upon eyther Flanke of the Pikes, then by commanding the halfe Rankes of the left, to double their right Flanke by division, then the Reere halfe Files of the left Flanke are to face about to the right, and then both the Front halfe Files, and the Reere halfe Files are to march forthright, untill they are cleere of that part of the body that stands, then each division faceth that way they are to double) which the Front halfe Files must doe to the right, and the Reere halfe Files to the left) and so march forth right untill the doubling be performed, then the Reere division that doubled is to face to the Reere, and the Front division is to face front proper, and the right flanke that stood is to face to the right hand, whereby they are fast ready to give fire three severall wayes at once; the manner of firing is thus performed, the formost Rankes of Musquetiers on each part having fired, they wheele off to the right or to the right and left (according as they shall bee commanded) placing themselves in the Reere of their owne divisi∣ons, the next Ranke in the meane time moving forwards into their Leaders ground, there in like manner firing wheeling off and placing themselves as before; the rest of the rankes performing the like successively; for reducement face them all to their Front proper, then command the halfe rankes that doubled to face to the left, and so to march into their places, the figure of this precedent discourse followeth in the next Page.

[illustration]

Front proper.

Serjeant

Serjeant

Front of the right Flanke

Serjeant

Front of the Reere.* 1.513

There are divers other wayes of firings which I am forced to omit, desiring you to turne into the excellent book of Millitary discipline, composed by Lievetenant Barriff, wherein you may be further instructed, and see the Poligons or Figures belonging to most of these instructions which I have briefely discoursed of, wishing you by all meanes not to omit any of them in your exercises, if time and patience may give you leave and if you should passe by any▪ let them be onely your divisionall Motions, as for your intire motions eyther of doublings, Counter-marches or wheelings, &c. you must be very circumspect and carefull to performe them all, otherwise all your paines will be to no purpose.

Now for the marching out of the field, your Company standing in a square forme (viz.) the shot upon each flanke of the Pikes; the Lievetenant leads away the first division of shot with a Serjeant attending him, the Drumme beating betweene the third and fourth ranke of the same division of shot; the Ensigne is to march before the first division of Pikes, following a pritty distance behind the first division of shot with the Drum pla∣ced as before: The eldest Serjeant is to march before the second division of Pikes: The second Serjeant marcheth before the last division of shot, with the Captaine in the Reere of all: and being marcht to the place where the Colours should be lodged, let them as they march invert to the right and left (viz.) the rankes are to file to the right and left by division, then all the Musquetiers are to face in opposition, to cocke their matches, guard their Pans, and rest their Musquets; the Pikemen in the meane time are to ad∣vance their Pikes, and close their Rankes and Files to their order, which being done, (the Drum beating a Troope at the head of the Pikes): All the chiefe Officers in their due places are to passe through this guard into the appointed place for the Allodgement of the colours, then the Serjeant is to cause all the Musquetiers to face about to the right, and present, and upon the first beate of the Drum they are all to give fire in one volley; then the Drum beating a call and makes proclamation of silence the captaine is to deli∣ver them such orders as he hath in charge to acquaint them with all eyther from the Lord Lievetenants or the Counsell, which being done he is to dismisse them untill the next summons for their appearance.

In the next discourse I shall intreate about the exercising of Horse-Troopes; and so make a generall discourse of all the parts belonging to the body of Warre.

THE DRILLING OR EXERCISING OF HORSE TROOPES. SECT. XII.

CHAP. XCVI.

Of the preheminency and dignitie of Officers, for the avoiding of disputes, with a short Declaration of the high Office of the Generall of the Horse.

HAving finished those instructions concerning the exerci∣sing of foote Companies;* 1.514 by which meanes they may be fitted and prepared for Service: And before we can come to intreate either of Marching, Incamping, or Imbattel∣ling; It is necessary wee should shew some briefe instru∣ctions for the Drilling and exercising of Horse troopes; in regard no Army can be compleate in power and strength, for the exercising of such things of Importance, as the cause may require, unlesse compounded of Foote and Horse; otherwise it must of necessity hault, and make use of the stilt of some peculiar place for advantage and safetie, and not to looke the Enemy in the face in all places.* 1.515

And in regard divers Nations are diversly opinionated; some esteeming the In∣fantrie better than the Caualliary, as our English hath done; others esteeme the Cavalliarie better than the Infantry, as the French, yet according to the nature and situation of the country or place, the Army is to be imployed in, whether Inclo∣sures, or Champion, accordingly it must be compounded, of more or lesse, of th' one or th' other.* 1.516

But for the avoiding of disputes which may arise amongst the Officers of either part for place of preheminencie and dignitie: you shall finde by this Aphorisme am∣plified with the authority of the Ancient Sages:* 1.517 that in profession either Civill or Millitary; those are more honourable, which have greater charge, or require grea∣ter knowledge; as to rule a State is more noble than to governe a Cittie; and this more eminent, than to order a Family; In which respect though the true end of Horse and foote be one and the same, to defend aright, and redresse a wrong: and per case that of foote be generally more usefull, yet this of Horse is the more ho∣norable Service;* 1.518 because his vertue and knowledge is exercised as well in Mana∣ging and defending of his Horse, as of himselfe: upon whose safegarde his life and honour depends, as well as in immediate defence of his owne person: thus much for the dignity of place.

As for the Officers of the Cauallrie;* 1.519 I wil onely with all brevitie touch such things for instruction as are most naturall in every particular Office; and then transferre them to the taking of a practicall Surveigh of what is commended to the Generall of the Army, and to the rest of the Officers of the Infantrie; for if it were possible

there ought to be no difference in experience, Wisedome and Valour, amongst all Officers if they could attaine unto it.

The Generall of the Horse hath the eminent controule and commande of all the Cavalrie or Horse Regiments,* 1.520 of what nature or composition whatsoever, and is respectively bound, as other Captaines are to looke to the happie government of his owne Troope, and so consequently to his owne Regiments; which done hee is to have a Generall eye of Surveigh over all other Colonells of Horse, their Regi∣ments, Officers, and Souldiers; for that part of the Army which consists of Horse are comprised within his charge:* 1.521 wherefore it behoves him to see his Troopes fairely de••••e••••ed; for what offence or disparagement happens amongst them, the spot of it will staine his reputation: wherefore not onely his eye, but the eyes of every particular Officer ought continually to watch and guard over all their af∣faires.

The Generall ought to have delivered unto him by the Mustermaster generall; and the Colonells and Captaines of the Cavalrie, a true role containing the Cata∣logue or List of all his Commanders belonging to the Cavalrie, with the distinction of the Armes they serve in, as namely which are Harquebuziers, Carbines, Curas∣sies or Dragoones; by which hee shall the better know how to order them in Service.

He must be very politicke, and wise to set his valour rightly on worke, otherwise he is liable to doe more mischiefe to his owne foote Troopes, by the misgoverning of his Horses, then possibly hee can offend the Enemy by his well managing of them.

There is nothing so dangerous in a Campe,* 1.522 as souldiers to contemne their Gene∣rall, and there is nothing breedes it sooner, than remissenesse and Lenitie: for hee that suffereth one mischiefe passe unpunished inviteth another, which brings his command into discredit;* 1.523 and the service into despaire; wherefore as in men of great ranke it is lesse blame worthy; to be overstately and imperious, than over∣familiar and base: So for a Generall it is a lesse fault to be over-rigorous, than not to punish delinquents at all: Likewise not forgetting to reward desert in a bounti∣full manner;* 1.524 for hereby his Officers and Souldiers will be kept in an awfull readi∣nesse to doe as they are Commanded; for neither his maturitie of judgement to undertake, nor his alacritie of spirit to execute, availes in the perfecting of his re∣solved enterprise, if he want a powerfull Majestie in his command: likewise if he hath never such obedient and valiant souldiers,* 1.525 fitted with all kinde of warlike habilliments, yet all his strength is but lame, and unable to move it selfe without money the sinnewes of warre.

CHAP. XCVII.

The office of the Linetenant Generall of the Cavalrie.

THe Lievetenant Generall of the Horse; besides his excellent worth and knowledge in the Art of warre: Is like wise to be the eye and hand of the Generall, spying out all defects, and a ready hand to demonstrate and point out what is to be per∣formed.

The Generall for the most part is absent from the Troopes being with the Generall of the Army to assist him in his con∣sultations, and aiding his judgement, in contriving what shall be best and fittest to be put in action, for their owne safties, and the defeite of the Enemy.

First it is his dutie to take notice how the Troopes are exercised, and the Officers and Souldiers dem••ened?* 1.526 next he is to imitate the noble Generall Pyrrhus, whose daily course was to bethinke himselfe what wayes and courses; or what advanta∣ges the Enemy may take to offend him,* 1.527 as also to consider what places are most ad∣vantagious to hinder his proceedings; he did alwayes premeditate how commo∣diously

hee might assault the enemy when occasion was offered.* 1.528

Hee had alwayes true and exact mappe of the place or country he was to goe puon execution, whereby he did the better know, whether and how farre to march alwayes providing commodius places to quarter his Armie in; it behoves this Lievetenant Generall to doe the like; and also to see the Campe well secured by setting out sufficient guardes, and placing Sentinells; he is to cause the wayes to be discovered by sending out parties of Horse before the Armie; hee must have all kinde of stratagems and policies at his fingers ends, the which wisely he is to put in execution.

And let this be a caution to him and to all in authority that they stand upon Glasse;* 1.529 which by its slipperinesse and brittlenesse may cause them to faile at once; for as to rise to preferment is craggie. So to fall downewards is icie; for the least aspersion will cause him slippe;* 1.530 and betweene the heighest fortune and the lowest ebbe there is no stay.

CHAP. XCVIII.

Of the Sergeant Major Generall of the Cavalliary.

THis great officer is to walke the same path that the Sergeant Major Generall of the Infantry steppes in; for he is not one∣ly to be the eye and hand, but also to be the eare and legges of the Generall and Lievetenant Generall; for hee must be the Embassadour betweene the Generall and the inferiour Officers; he is to attend the Generall thrice a day at the least, both to bring newes of the Enemies proceedings; and of the defects in the army; as also to receive such Orders as shall be given him in charge from the Generall to deliver to the Colonells and the rest of the Officers. Hee is likewise to take the watch word; and secretly to deliver it to the Generall, and to the Livetenant Generall of the Cavalrie, and so to the Quarter-Master Generall, that he may distribute it to the in∣feriour Officers: He must be ware of doing ill Offices betweene the head and infe∣riour Officers.

He is never to report any newes from what others doe say,* 1.531 but from his owne immediate knowledge, or from some trustie friend that hath informed him▪ like∣wise, whatsoever he is truely possest with, it is necessary he should truely relate, al∣though it be never so small an accident.* 1.532

Likewise hee must be very carefull, as he officiates his dutie in visiting the Guards, and going about the quarters, that hee gives no occasion of allarme to the souldiers, nor take no alarme unlesse it be justly, for it may breede much incon∣venience.

When hee is to visite the outmost Guards;* 1.533 hee is to have a sufficient guard of Horsemen to attend him, for feare of being surprised by the enemie. Such orders as hee shall receive from the Generall; hee must not betrust his memory with, but commit it presently to writing, for a small mistake can pleade no excuse in the warres, but is highly to be punished, for by mistakings a world of mischiefe hath insued many times to the ruining of part, or of the whole Army.

CHAP. XCIX.

Of the Quarter Master Generall of the Cavallry.

THis Office is of great respect, and importance; hee ought to be full of sound knowledge in Marshall discipline; and well read in divers of the Liberall Sciences, but especially in Arithmeticke and Geometry, so that he is to have an insight in the Art of Surveighing and measuring of grounds, being able upon the first view, to take the best advantage thereof for any singular purpose; especially for the Quartering or Incamping his Troopes in the best and safest manner that may be.* 1.534 He is likewise to be skilfull and well experienced in the use of Mappes; that thereby he may truely know how all the Roades and wayes lye: with the Situation and distances, betweene Towne and Towne.

He is to keepe a List of the Guards, and is to visit them both day and night, shew∣ing the Allarme place, to all the inferiour Quartermasters, when they come to take the word of him

When the Lord High Marshall takes a view of the ground whereon to Incampe the Armie; he is to Summon all the inferiour Quartermasters, belonging to every Regiment, and those Quartermasters are to call together every Furrier and Har∣benger; and so are to attend the Lord Marshall to the intended Campe; then the Chiefe Quartermaster is to stake out the forme of the Incampement or intrench∣ment, and also the distances for each Regiment, and then every particular Quarter∣master is to allot out the distances for the alodgement of every private Com∣pany.

He is to give his due attendance to the Generall, and to the Lord High Marshall to be imployed about such things as they shall give him in charge; If any order for hast bee given him by word of mouth, himselfe must goe and deliver it, and not trust it to others; the Inferiour Quartermasters are to assist him in all his affaires.

CHAP. C.

The Office of the Captaine of the Cavallry.

THis Officer ought to be qualified with all those Noble parts,* 1.535 which are to be expected in a foot Captaine, and rather in a fuller measure, in regard he is to governe man and beast: He must bee a perfect and absolute Horseman, teaching his Horse by the Motion of his hand, legge, and body, to understand all things belonging to the Riders pleasure; he must be carefull in making his whole Troope good Horsemen teaching them how to sit a horse in a comely posture; carrying his body upright, the right hand bearing his Pistoll or Carbine coucht upon his thigh: the left hand with the bridle raines under the guard of the Pummell of the Saddle; and his legges close and streight by the horses sides, with his toes turned a little in∣wards; * 1.536 his horse so well managed that he will stand constantly without rage or distemper: then he is to be made sensible (by yeelding the body, or thrusting for∣wards the riders legges) when to put himselfe forwards into a short or large trot; then how by the even stroke of both is spu••res to passe into a swift Carrire; then how to gallop the field either in large ringes; midles or lesse rings, either to turne with speede upon the one or the other hand; then to put him into a gentle gallop right forth in an even line, and suddenly to stop, and upon the halfe stop to turne swiftly and roundly.

Then lastly how to retire backe, or to make him flye sidewayes, on the one or

the other side according as the advantage of fight shall give him occasion; he is like∣wise to see his Souldiers well horst, with compleate armour, their furniture suffi∣cient their bridles well rayned and lyned with a wire chaine, their Pistolls and Car∣bines strong and fixe; and he must strive to make all his Souldiers, as good Shot or markes men as himselfe,* 1.537 or else all his labour will be to little purpose.

He must be wary of over slipping any opportunity,* 1.538 which may be taken either in offending the Enemie, or securing himselfe; for not to adventure when he should is cowardize and not prudence,* 1.539 and to dare when he should not is rashnesse and not valour; wherefore he must frame his Counsells and actions, upon the Mould of necessary circumstances,* 1.540 He must further know that the weapons of Victory are formed on the forge of Discipline; for it both Captaine and Souldiers have not this temper; they will loose the edge of their valours in the tryall, and turne the points into their owne Bowels.* 1.541

Further, there is nothing snatcheth victory out of the hand of the Conquerour, so much as untimely falling to the spoyle, upon such disorder fortune alwayes turnes her wheele, and maketh victors of them that before were vanquished.

He must diligently observe the orders which shall be given him from his Superi∣ours,* 1.542 and not faile to be with his Troope, at the time and place required.

Vpon all occasions he is to be first mounted on horse backe,* 1.543 and is to have his Company full and compleate, and what ill fortune so ever should seeme to befall him, he must not discover any feare, for upon his courage and countenance the soul∣diers depend, wherefore he must have a good resolution attend him.

In a pitcht battell he must seldome or never seeke to charge the enemie in the Front,* 1.544 especially if the two armies are neere joyning, fearing least his horses wrong his foote troopes, by a disorderly retreate than possibly he can offend the enemie, wherefore the best and safest place to charge the enemie upon, is the flankes and reare.

When the enemie shall charge you with one of his Troopes, doe not you rush forth to meete them, but if your ground be of advantage keepe it; if not advance softly forwards; untill the enemy be within 100. paces of you, and then fall into your Careire, by this meanes your horse will be in breath and good order, when as the Enemie will be to seeke.

The Captaine of the Cuirassiers hath the Priority, the next is the Captaine of the Harquinburies, the Captaine of the Carbines hath the third place, the Dragones are of the meanest account, although many times they doe the best service.

And for conclusion let all noble Captaines, that desire the honour of their King, and welfare of the Countrie, not suffer themselves to be gold and deluded by their Souldiers; which bring them borrowed horses, and furniture not of their owne; and chopping and changing of their men, and not appearances; so that our Troopes are so deficient, that if an enemie should aproach we shall be to seeke of halfe our Troopes, and them not halfe exercised.

CHAP. CI.

The Office of the Liefetenant of the Cavallry.

THis Officer is to beare the true Image of his Captaine,* 1.545 for he is im∣ployed upon many services by his Captaine, more than any other inferiour Officers are; as guarding some particular passages, riding out upon parties to scowre the Country, and to gaine intelligence (from the Country people) of the enemies proceedings.

He is many times sent out to command a certaine number of horse for the safeguard of the Forragers and for the intercepting and guarding of some Fords and passages.* 1.546

He is to exercise and Drill his men wisely and orderly, using his command over them; that he may be more beloved than feared.

He commands in his Captaines absence soly, he is to March in the reare of his Troope; causing the Souldiers to follow their Captaine and Corner in good order: not suffering any to straggle from the Troope.

When he is to passe upon any duty, he is first to gaine the best instructions for the advantage in managing the service he is imployed about.

He is to be alwayes armed during the time of his guard, and is not onely to place out the Sentinels, but also to visit and revisit them: if they be quartered in any vil∣lage, in case of an Allarme, the Souldiers are to repaire to the Cornets Lod∣ging.

He is to see every Souldier have his Billet delivered him from the Quartermaster, unlesse it be in Garrison, then the Major of the Towne performes that office. He is to see good orders kept by visiting their Huts, and commanding their fires to bee extinguished immediately after the warning peece is discharged.* 1.547

He is to be very carefull of his owne demeanurs for example sake.

He must have some Schollership in him in regard he is to keepe a List of all his Souldiers names,* 1.548 and by reason of orders or letters sent to him from his Superiors, which he is to keepe secret, and not to shew to others.

The company being drawne to the guard in any place, and approaching neere it; the Lieftenant is to ride before to take notice of the Corpes duguard, and is to con∣ferre with the Company, who are then to be releeved, what Sentinells are to bee plac't out, and what wayes are to be scowred, and all other things requisite.

CHAP. CII.

Of the Cornet belonging to the Cavalry.

THe Cornet of Horse ought to be a man of a haughty courage, and of a singular behaviour, he commandeth the Company in the absence of the Captaine and Livetenant, his place of March is in the Front, before the first ranke; yet behind the Captaine. In fight he is not to regard the breaking of his Standard in regard it shall be an honour unto him although the enemie should gaine a peece of it, his usuall place in time of Skirmish, is to be in the middle of the Troope, those before him must be the aprovedst Souldiers and best armed.

He is to keepe a List of the Company to send so many to the guard as the Cap∣taine or Lievetenant shall appoint.

Once a day at the Lord Generalls first passing by the Troope, he is to doe obey∣sance by inclining his Cornet towards the ground.

And because I intend brevity, I will onely name the residue of Officers belong∣ing to the Cavalry, referring the Reader for his better satisfaction to Markhams Decads, and to Captaine Iohn Crus••e his Millitary Instructions.

The Quartermasters of every particular Regiments duty is to assist the Quarter∣master generall in making the Quarters;* 1.549 they are to distribute the Word and the Billets for the Souldiers lodgings.

The Corporalls to a Troope are usually three or two at the least,* 1.550 they are to assist the Leivetenants in placing the Sentinells, and in ordering of the Troope, they have the command of a Squadron to guide some passages, or to ride out upon discovery; he is to keepe a List of his Squadron.

There ought to be two Trumpers at the least to each Troope of Horse;* 1.551 whose duty is besides their knowledge in distinguishing their sounds and points of warre. But they must be wise in delivering Embasses and Messages, and very observative how the Enemy demeanes his forces, and how his guards are kept, one Trumpet is to lodge with the Cornet, to be in a readinesse for all suddaine Allarmes.

There is but one Auditor or Fiscall generall allowed to the Army,* 1.552 both of Horse and foote.

The Provost Marshall is an Officer under the high Marshall;* 1.553 hee is to keepe in safe custody all delinquents, every Regiment hath an inferiour Marshall belonging to it, they are to see to the Victuallers, Butchers, and to the Weights and Measures of Bread, Beare, and the like; they are to informe the Commissary, and Auditor what rates the Sutlers, Butchers, &c. may afford their provision for that they may set the Taxe accordingly.

They are to carry a Trunshon with a Ribbin in it by which they are distin∣guished.

They are to attach all straggling souldiers in a March, to prevent him from pil∣liging.

And to conclude this discourse, I would have all Officers of such a true temper of valour;* 1.554 and so constant in all their proceedings, that honour and prosperity should not make them Imperious; nor the worst of fortunes deject them. For that man that beares his prosperitie, neither with moderation nor prudence but is full blowne like a bladder with the winde of pride; hee seldome in adversity shewes either constancie or courage,* 1.555 for one pricke of distaster will emptie his swolne heart of all hopes; and will make him prove like an unskilfull and dejected Sea man, upon every little storme to cut his Cables,* 1.556 and Maste, and throw all over boorde; where as a Noble resolution would finde a remedy by slacking of some few Sayles to indure the storme, and save all he hath in charge.

CHAP. CIII.

Of the ordering and riding of Horses to make them fit for Service.

IT is a thing of great consequence for souldiers to understand how to order themselves,* 1.557 towards their horses, to make them the apter to understand the Riders meaning, and to be fitted for exercise, for an Officer shall finde it a thing impossible to exercise a troope of horses, unlesse they be first prepared for that service; Therefore let me request you to apply your indeavours to such documents, as the best experien∣ced Riders have observed.* 1.558

And first a souldier may fit and helpe his horse sixe manner of wayes (viz.) with his Voyce, with his Tongue, with his Rodde, with his Bridle, with the Caulfes of his Legges, with his Sturrop, and with his Spurres, likewise when your horse hath performed his exercise well, you have two wayes to cheerish and coye him, which is by your voyce in speaking to him gently, or else by scratchiug and coying him with your hand, or with the end of your Rodde.

And although helpes and corrections may seeme one,* 1.559 yet there is this difference, having a respect to the time, for the one goeth before errour, and the other com∣meth after: for you helpe your Horse to the intent he should not erre; but you cor∣rect him because he hath already erred.

For the first of the seaven helpes before specified, which is the Voyce, it is used divers wayes, as in the way of Correction, for his obstinacie or wrestinesse: a terri∣ble voyce is used with some opprobrious termes, but in the way of helping or che∣rishing him, you must use milde termes with a cheerefull voyce; as in running him, you must say, Hey, hey, or the like; if to retreate, you must use a low voyce, Backe, backe boy, backe, I say.

If you would helpe him to advance at the stop, you must say cheerefully, Hup, hup, or Hoyse, hoyse.

Likewise to make him lite behinde, you must say Derier, or such termes as you shall please.

In cherishing your horse, or coying him for doing well, your voyce must be most milde of all, as saying, well boy, well.* 1.560

The next thing observeable it the tongue, which is onely a clocking it to the

roofe of the mouth, and likewise the lippes, with a kinde of Chirrupping: doth much put a horse forwards in a gentle straine.

The Rod is a very necessary instrument if used aright (viz.) not to correct your Horse with it out of season,* 1.561 but onely at the very instant he erreth: for there is no such way as a good wand, well labored upon a stubborne horse that is wresty.

The Bridle governes a Horse as the Helme doth the Ship, and it is the principall instrument about him, to bring him in subjection; and to fit him for service, where∣fore divers things in it are considerable: as the fashion of the bit, sutable to the tendernesse of his mouth, the Musrowle, the Cheekes, kurbles, ports, treaches and such like bitts according to the discretion of the Rider. He most likewise know when to ride his Horse with a Bitte, then with what manner of Bitte, and how to use it at first putting on, and in what part of his mouth it must rest.

Likewise how to hold the Raynes, when even together; and when one shorter than another, and what measure he shall keepe with his hand, in bearing hard or loose,* 1.562 high or low, when to use the false Raynes or Musrowle, and when to leave them; when and how to correct him with the Bridle, and when to helpe him.

Many men spoile their Horse at first, by using to sharpe a Bitte; wherefore the safest way is to take a plaine Cannon with right cheekes, and that hath beene for∣merly used,* 1.563 placing it a little above his great teeth, annointing it with a little honey mixt with salt, which will make him leane to it, and delight in it the better.

The Raynes you must hold in your left hand; so as your little finger, and Ring finger be betwixt the two Raynes, and your thumbe may lye close upon the Raynes, with the brane thereof turned towards the sadles pummell; being destitute of a Rodde, take the overplusse that hangeth downe by the middest in your right hand, holding just by your right thigh.

In bearing your bridle you must observe three severall wayes: first, by bearing the Raynes low beneath the pummell of the saddle, even with the wither••, which is a ready way to correct him.

Secondly,* 1.564 bearing your hand heigher towards the middest of the pommell, th•••• maintaines him.

Thirdly, bearing him just above the Pommell, that is used in managing him; to beare the hand higher is by sundry Authors disallowed; first, in regard it we••••ieth the arme; secondly, if neede require, you have not so much power to stoppe your Horse when you would.

Thirdly, being upon Service in the field against your enemy, the bearing of your hand so high, would be a trouble unto your defence, and a commodity to your ene∣mie, for thereby he may easily cut your Raynes in sunder.

Lastly, you can have no steady hand upon your horse, for any continnance, by meanes whereof he can never rayne well, nor port his head steedy, unlesse you beare your hand low, remembring when you turne your horse, neither to draw your armes nor hands more on the one side than the other, but keepe it even with the horses crest, and onely to turne your fist a little inward, or outwards, to signifie unto him what hand you would have him turne unto: for the helpe of the caulfe and heele in riding the Ring, you must consider divers Circumstances, as first a single stroake of the contrary legge,* 1.565 to the side you intend to turne upon: as for example, if you would have him turne on the right side,* 1.566 then you must touch him with your left legge, if on the left hand, then with your right legge.

Secondly, a double stroake, striking him with both your legges together with an even stroake, and this is to make him thrust forwards.

Thirdly, the closing stroake; as for example, when you would have your horse close his turne well, as namely to the right hand; then in his turning touch him with your left legge in the spurring place,* 1.567 and with your right legge immediatly af∣ter more backwards towards his flanke.

Fourthly, to strike with both heeles one after the other foure or five times, serves for a correction when your horse transgresseth.

The use of the Stir••op availeth much in helping a young horse in his beginning; for if he carries his head or necke a wry,* 1.568 or hang on one side, more than another by

striking him with the Stirrop under the shoulder, on the contrary side, will cause him to amend his fault.

The use of the Spurre is to helpe when the horse hath beene first backt halfe a score times;* 1.569 and when you first use them,* 1.570 let it be in a new fallow field which lyes upon stetches, and then tro: the Ring; and when you put spurres to him, forget not to helpe him with your voyce or lippes.

How and when to use the spurre, you may observe what is before spoken of the calfe and heele.

CHAP. CIV.

Further Instructions concerning the ordering and riding of a Horse for Service, with the use of the Ring.

NOw let us proceede further,* 1.571 to the instructing of horses, and fitting them for the imployment of warre; wherein the Rider must use great diligence in making him tread loftily to keepe one path, and to trot cleane, which is one of the chiefest points; then to goe softly, to runne or to gallope. Secondly, you must teach him to be light at stoppe: Thirdly, to advance or rise up with his fore legges. Fourthly, to turne readily upon both hands, with single turne or double turne. Fiftly, to make a sure and ready mannage. Sixth∣ly, to passe a swift carriere; for which purpose you must take a new fallowed land with deepe forrowes to make him lift up his feete; then trotting him right out a∣bout the length of a hundred paces crosse the Ridges; then ride him a good way up one of the furrowes,* 1.572 in such part of the land as will admitte space enough; Then beginne to turne on the right hand, making him easily treade out a round circle twise together, containing twenty five, or thirty paces; and being come about at the second time to the place you began; then tread out the like circle Ring on the left hand, after twise going about it; then beginne againe on the right hand, and so shift from Ring to Ring, treading each of them, twice about, untill you have gone about the left Ring foure times, and the right Ring sixe times; this being performed,* 1.573 trot him right out in the same furrow where he began first, the length of thirty paces.

And then pulling in your Bridle hand, stoppe him, and stay a pretty while toge∣ther, causing him to stand still, keeping his head and body right in the furrow; this being performed, then turne him softly on the right hand, and being come round againe in to the same path, trot him backe againe into the place from whence first he came;* 1.574 then alight off his backe, coying and encouraging him; this you must performe eight dayes together; but after that time is expired, you must increase his Ring turnes, by two and by two, untill he comes to twenty two (viz.) ten for the left Ring,* 1.575 and twelve for the right, the proportion of the Ring I have here drawne, whereby any man may perceive, both the Rings together with the fur∣rowes, and place of stopping and turning.

[illustration]

If you finde your horse not fitting but untoward and unable to tread out this Ring; then let some other horse that is perfect tread it out before him; and let him follow him; but if you tread it out your selfe, doe not trot your horse, but tread it out softly, untill the way be beaten, that he may the better see how to demeane himselfe, then afterwards to fall on with a gentle trot.

But if your horse be over metled, you shall not suffer him to trot the Rings at all, but onely to tread them faire and softly, for two or three dayes together, untill be be staied and acquainted with them.

If through often treading;* 1.576 the Rings grow hard, then tread out new ones.

When you come to mannage your horse, or to passe a carriere, it is not then best to use one place alwayes, or one length, lest hee be to seeke, when he change places, thinking he should not doe it, in any other place; or that hee should not passe his accustomed length, and so stoppe before you would have him.

After you have ridden your horse a few weekes, you may increase your Ring turnes every day two times, untill hee come to 46. which makes a leaven large turnes and a halfe, (viz.) 22. for the left Ring, and 24. for the right.

When soever you gallop your horse in the Ring, remember alwayes to helpe him with your Voyce, Rodde, or Spurre, according as the quality of the horse shall re∣quire, and when he doth well forget not to cherish him.

When you have trotted or troad your number of Rings, that you shall see meete, then trot your horse right out in the furrow between the two rings, untill you come to the place of stop, there staying a good pretty while together, keepe his body right in the path: and after hee hath made his stoppe, you must cause him to goe backe;

three or foure steps, which will not onely stay his mouth, and make him easie ray∣ned; but also lift his legges, and be apt to advance, or rise before.

To teach him to goe backe, you must so soone as he hath stopt, pull in your bridle hand moderately, according as the horses resistance shall require, so keeping your hand steady, without giving him any liberty, strike him softly upon the bowing of his necke with your riding rod, saying with a soft voyce in that instant, back, back I say, thus being obsequious unto him a pretty while together, if he then will not move his legges,* 1.577 or doth make resistance, then spurre him in time, first with one spurre, then with the other, but most of that side his hinder part stands out of or∣der, when these things are performed, and your horse well verst in them, then at the stop you shall further teach him to advance or rise, with both his fore feete to∣gether three or foure times, a foote or halfe a yard above the ground, this thing is so necessary that the horse cannot manage well, nor turne readily without this per∣formance.

If he will not advance by striking him at his stoppe on the right shoulder with your rod,* 1.578 then keepe still a steady hand, and correct him twise or thrice together with the even stroke of your spurres, or else with one spurre after another, cheri∣shing him with your voyce, as saying hup, hup, or hoyce, immediately after trot him out againe, the distance of forty or fifty foote, with a swift trot, and at the stoppe doe as you did before, continuing the same course untill he be perfect, like∣wise you may teach him the same devices upon his gallop.

In the next place we are to take notice of the narrow and streight turnes (ha∣ving sufficiently spoken of the former large turnes) of the narrow turnes there are three kindes (viz.) halfe turnes,* 1.579 whole turnes, and double turnes.

The halfe turne is when the Horse turneth on the one side, and setteth his head the way his Tayle before stood, the way he goes being but halfe a Circle, but if he doubles it and goes the whole circumference of the Circle, his head will stand as it did at his first setting out, and this is called a whole turne, and two such whole turnes will make a double turne,* 1.580 in these turnes divers things are to be considered.

First that the horse brings in the contrary legge upon the other, and that he carries his legges neither too high nor too low, also that he keepeth alwayes one path: and that he neither presseth forwards not reeleth backwards in his turning, also that he keepeth his body at one stay, not any wayes awry, neither head, necke, nor any part of his body, but to come in whole and round together, and to close his turnes, in so narrow a roome as may be.

When you are come out of your Ring,* 1.581 trot your horse right out in the middle furrow, unto the place of stop, and having stopt; turne your horse faire and softly on the right hand, taking circumference enough: that being done give him the like turne on the left hand, and then returne him againe; (as before) on the right hand.

Note when he is to turne on the right hand, he is to bring his left foote over the right foote before, which is performed by helping him with your voyce, in saying to him turne here; and by striking him with your rod, moderately upon the left shoulder.

Likewise when you turne him on the left hand,* 1.582 helpe him with your voyce as before, and with your rod on the right shoulder, to bring in the right fore foote over the left fore foote.

If your horse be harder to turne on one side than on the other, you must helpe him with the contrary legge or spurre, or with your rod by beating him on the con∣trary shoulder.

And to make him close truely, it shall be needfull to helpe him with your closing stroke of your heele and Spurre. Further if your Horse be so stiffe necked and wresty that he will turne upon one hand and not upon the other, you shall tread out in new plowed Land another fashioned Ring, as beneath is figured, which both differs in shape, and in the order of treading from the former.

[illustration]

* 1.583

For whereas you were wont before in the former figure to goe twice about in the right ring, following still the right hand; and then to goe twice about the left ring, following then the left hand: Now in this last ring you shall goe three times about each of them following still the right hand in both of them, and whereas be∣fore foure goings about made a large turne, now sixe goings about, shall doe no more than make a large turne,* 1.584 the reason is this, if you should goe out of the right ring at the second turne, for to enter into the left ring and would follow still the right hand (as you must doe) then you shall lacke a good deals of closing the second turne, as you may perceive by this last figure in the right ring; where the place is marked (that you should goe out of, for to enter into the left wing) with the letter A. and the place of closing your turne with the letter B. betwixt which two letters is contained the portion of a Circle, which will be wanting, wherefore of necessity you must goe thrice about, to the intent the second turne may be fully ended, as for any overplusse it makes no matter.

To this last ring, is also added a middle furrow with two places of stoppings and turnings,* 1.585 meete to mannage a horse, trotting him there in the length of a good Ca∣riere, and having made him stoppe and advance, make much of him and stay a good while, and untill he hath mended his fault of not turning which way you would have him; you must with your bridle hand, shorten one Rayne of that side he desires he should turne upon,* 1.586 then having a foote man standing against him with a sticke in his hand, and as you move your fist to turne your horse, on that side he is unwilling to turne upon, at that same instant shall strike him upon the nose, not leaving him untill he turnes: Likewise making use of his voyce to provoke him; then being turned and trotted the uppermost ring round, you must returne backe in the same furrow againe, even hard to the second little ring, and there likewise let a man stand as before is shewed, to strike him upon the stop, and cause him to turne upon the right hand, which hand a horse must alwayes first turne upon, but if he be

harder to turne on the left hand than on the right, then begin in first with the left Ring observing the order and directions before exprest.

Likewise with a Cord fastned to the middle eye of the bit,* 1.587 on the side he will not turne upon, and tye the other end unto the Sursingle, on the same side strayning it pritty hard to make him bow his necke: thus chasing him round in the Circle, di∣vers times unloosen the cord and hold it in that hand which is next the side he will not turne upon in stead of a false rayne, then trot him forth the length of twenty or thirty paces, and there stop, where one must stand with a rod threatning him; and if neede be, beating him upon the contrary side to cause him to turne; and the rider strayning the cord a little will make him performe it.* 1.588

Then trot him backe, and cause him to performe the like, using the same meanes a fore prescribed.

CHAP. CV.

How to manage a Horse for Service, foure kindes of wayes.

IN this next progresse we are to observe foure kindes of managing a Horse to fit him for service.

First when you make your Horse double his turnes.

Secondly when you gallop the field, making him wave in and out, as is used in single skirmish.

Thirdly when you make him leape a loft, fetching divers saltes or curveates; but this is not so proper to teach to a horse for service.

Fourthly when you pace,* 1.589 trot, and gallop, him too and fro in one path, the length of twenty or thirty paces, turning him at each end thereof, either with sin∣gle turne, whole turne, or double turne, (this is termed manage) and in this word there is three things observable, as first the manage with halfe rest, that is to cause your horse at the end of every managing path, to stop and then to advance twise together, and at the second bound to turne, whereby you rest one bound.

The manage with the whole r••st,* 1.590 is when you turne him at the third bound, and so you rest two bounds, the managing without rest, is when you turne him imme∣diately upon the stop, without any tarriance at all, which is most in use with us.

Note when your Horse turneth upon the right Hand, turne you your left shoul∣der towards his left eare, keeping your body upright in the Saddle, so that the raynes of your backe may directly answere the ridg-bone of the horses backe, never the lesse when you feele him to bend his hinder houghs, then leane you somewhat backewards, for that will make him close his turne the more roundly and swiftly, likewise when he turnes on the left hand accompany him with your right shoulder towards his right eare,* 1.591 observing as before.

Your horse being perfect in all points before mentioned you shall ride him into some plaine sandy way, voyde of all occasions of stumbling, and to acquaint him with the way, pace him faire and softly the length of a good Carriere, which must be measured out according to the strength and quality of the horse.

At the end of the Carriere path, let your Horse stop and advance, and at the se∣cond bound;* 1.592 turne him faire and softly upon the right hand, and so stay a little while then suddenly with a lively voyce, crying hay, hay, put him forwards with both Spurres at once, forcing him to runne all the path as swift as possibly may be, just up to the end, to the intent he may stop on his buttockes; this being performed turne him upon the left hand, and pace him forth faire and softly, unto the other end of the Carriere path, and there stop him, and turne him againe upon the right hand, as you did before and so leave him.

Note there is no better way to bring a horse to this, than by using him to tread the ring with a very swift trot, which will make him nimble of his legges, and so swift and stayed of head,* 1.593 that comming afterwards to be runne, it shall bee easie to him to performe; this was observed by that famous Rider Cola Pagano, who would never runne his horse untill he saw him wel stayed of head, and well broken, for although a horse may be halfe a yeare in breaking, yet in eight dayes he may be taught to runne and stoppe in a most perfect manner.

Likewise to teach your horse to goe side wayes, (it being a thing of much conse∣quence in the wars) you must performe it thus, as namely you desire to have him goe side longs towards the left hand, you must beare your bridle even and steady: and clap your right legge close to his belly, and hold it there still, making him feele the spurre on the right side; if he moveth his body that way you desire, then sudden∣ly pull away your legge from thence, and make much of him, that being performed make him doe as much with your left legge; and leaving to molest him on either side untill he understands your meaning, thus with a little exercise, so soone as he shall feele you stay your bridle hand, and touch him with your legge or spurres, on the contrary side he will goe side wayes, so much, or so little as you will have him.

Likewise to make him keepe his head alwayes towards the Enemie,* 1.594 being in fight at single duell; you must make him goe sidewayes with his hinde part onely, and his fore part stand party steady, to performe this you must turne your bridle hand somewhat on that side you touch him, likewise you must helpe him with your rod, by striking him therewith on the contrary flanke behinde.

Further take notice the carriage of your Horses head is a matter of no small con∣sequence; his forehead being the strongest part of his head; his snought or mussell the weakest and tendrest;* 1.595 the more he thrusteth out his mussell, the more he disten∣deth his backe, and beareth the lesse force in his actions; and it is impossible hee should ever make good Manage, observe time, keepe order, or continue in breath, any space of time together; whereas by bringing in his mussell and extending his forehead, he uniteth his force together, and gathereth his strength in his backe, whereby he becommeth more nimble in his actions.

Secondly, he shall see his way the better, and be in lesse danger of falling in run∣ning; and if he should chance to fall he is the abler to rise speedily.

Thirdly, in his performances against an enemie, he shall be able to execute, or suf∣fer more with his forehead, than can be expected from his Mussell, being the ten∣drest part of him.

Fourthly he cannot be so apt to be urged right forwards upon a sudden, as other∣wise he might doe.

Lastly the Horse that Raynes well, and bringeth in his head shall alwayes bee better stayed, both of head and necke, and have a better mouth than other∣wise.

Wherefore if your horse will not bring in his head at any time when you stop him with your bridle hand,* 1.596 then holding your hand still at that stay, correct him sometimes with your right Spurre, and sometime with your left, and sometimes with both your spurres at once; and at the selfe same instant thrust him with your right hand upon the necke towards his eares; to force him to bring in his head, but if he will not yeeld with that, then by pulling your bridle towards you, cause him to goe backe, some three paces, and then to returne faire and softly to his first place; this being put in action divers times together; and every time he thrusteth out his nose correct him as before is shewed.

Moreover if your horse by wresty,* 1.597 so as he cannot be put forwards; then let one take a Cat tyed by the tayle to a long pole, and when he goes backewards thrust the Cat towards his stones, where she may claw him, and forget not to threaten your horse with a terrible Noyse: or otherwise take a Hedgehog and tye him streight by one of his feete to the inside of the horses tayle, so that he may squeake and pricke him.

Likewise if your horse be fearefull and shie,* 1.598 so that he is afrayd of every thing he sees, you must take heede that in no wise you correct him for it, least he should take

the thing he beholdeth and shunneth, to be the cause of his chastisements, and so be∣come more fearefull than before, but rather stay a while and doe not force him for∣wards, but by gentle meanes make him by little and little aproach neere the thing he feares, which if he performes, cherish him with your speech and hand, and you shall set by standing still sometimes to looke on it, and sometimes by going to∣wards the object he feares, he will be so acquainted therewith as he will not feare it, and when he commeth at it, let him gaze and smell on it a good while, to the intent he may be more assured thereof.

Further to embolden your horse to make him hardy in the warres, you must use to incounter upon a soft pace or trot,* 1.599 with another horse man face to face, in one path, but beware they dos••e not one the other, but rather let the adverse horse bee compelled backe a few steps which will harty the other, or if you please you may incounter one with the other, riding in two sundry pathes, the one comming cheeke by cheeke within a foote of the other, the pathes being both of a just length; each of them containing about tenne paces, to the intent in managing your horse too and fro upon a trot, you comming one towards another, from two contrary ends, may both meete right in the midst of your course passing one by another, which you cannot chuse but doe if you keepe true time, as well in their trotting as in their ••urning, also not forgetting, upon what hand soever the one turneth, the other must doe the same,* 1.600 and in the selfe same instant. Moreover when you trot the Ring, you may embolden your horse, by entring both together into the Right Ring, then turning your horse tayle to tayle, follow you the right hand, and let him follow the left in the same Ring, the ring path being so inlarged, that at your meeting in ryding it about you may not touch one the other.

Having ridden thus about twise, you may enter the left ring, and doe as before was shewed.

CHAP. CVI.

How to make a Horse endure Pike, Sword, Gunshot, Drumme and the like.

IN this Chapter we are to deale with the difficultest matter of all; and that is now to make a Horse abide Pike, Gunshot, Sword, Drumme, and the clattering of Armour, or to runne upon any hazard, to performe this you must acquaint him throughly with the rod or truntion, so as he may not feare it; sometimes coying him therewith upon the Necke, and by holding the point right forth by his eye, or betwixt his eares, so as it may bee alwayes in his sight, and being throughly assured of the rod, then appoint a foote man, having a staffe in his hand or pike, to stand in your way as you should passe, and as you aproach, let the footeman by little and little make signes, seeming to strike your horse upon the head, then encourage your horse to goe on towards the footeman, who at the same instant must retreate backe as if he would flee, in doing this you shall much imbolden him.

Likewise to make him abide the sword, a footeman must performe it in the same manner as he did with the Pike, but be ware he strikes him not.

After this, cause half a dozen footemen or more to stand in his way, making a gre••t shouting and noyse, threatning him with their loude voyces, against whom you must incourage him to goe forwards; first with a soft pace, secondly with a trot, thirdly with a gallop; at which time let the footemen retreate, fayning to runne away, also let them threaten them with their staves, Pikes or swords.

To make him dure Gunshot, Drumme, or clattering of Armour; or any hide∣ous noyse whatsoever; let your horse goe hard by another horse, or rather betwixt two other horses, that are accustomed to the like noyse, and are not afrayd, and as you ride together cause three or foure Pistols to be discharged, first a good distance off, then neerer hand, according as your horse beginneth to abide them; during which time forget not to make much of him.

Likewise every morning before he is drest discharge a Musket or two, and sound a Trumpet, and beate a charge with your drumme, and then when he is patient feede him and cherish him, the Groome may sometime dresse him in bright ar∣mour, hee may be used to eate his Oates from off the Drumme head, you may ride him against an armour, plac't upon a stake, that he may overthrow it, and tram∣ple it under his feete: Every horseman that doth not observe these briefe obser∣vations, and fit himselfe and his horse in all respects before hee come to be tray∣ned, they will prove both unfit for service; neither would I wish any Captaine to approve either of man or horse, that in some reasonable manner, hath not attained to this perfection; for an Oxe well Managed may in possibility doe better service than an ill ridden wresty horse; neither can any security or reputation bee expected by any service they shall undertake if the Officers be not diligent to see their Troopes well ordered and demeaned.

Thus premising every Horseman is or will be in this nature qualified, wee will proceede to the Exercising of private Troopes, and breefely shew all their Po∣stures, and how they ought to be imbattelled; but first it is necessary to give a touch about the severall kinde of arming both of Curassiers, Harquebuzires, Carabines, and Dragoones, as followeth.

CHAP. CVII.

How the horse Troopes ought to be devided and distinguished by their severall armes, apt and fit for divers services, and what proportion of Cavalry ought to be joyned with the Infantry.

WE are to understand how our Generalls of late ages have divided their horse Troopes into foure severall kindes, proper for divers Services, and accordingly, their armings are sutable to their Of∣fices; as

• The arming of the
  • C••irassier.
  • Harquebuzier.
  • Carbine.
  • Dragoone.
    • is chiefely
      • Defensive.
      • Offensive.
      • Offensive and Defensive.

The light armed which are the Harquebuziers, Carabines and Dragoones are imployed to begin a charge against the Infantry,* 1.601 upon flanke and reare at once, (the Front is dangerous if the two armies of foote be ready to joyne) then the heavie armed (viz.) the Cuirassiers shall take the advantage of such disorders as are pro∣cured by the light armed; for their compleate arming is efficatious to defend their bodies from the push of pikes; the better to thrust in amongst them: The light armed are also more apt and fit to be sent upon services that require expedition, which the heavie armed are unfit to performe; for the Cuirassier is to be compleately armed,

Capapè, with a good Buffe coate, to preserve his body from the pinching of his pondrous armour; his horse is to be fifteene hand high and upwards; he is also to have his Bedee Nagge, and a Boy to carry his Armes and Snapsacke, and to get him forrage for his horses; his Saddle and Bitte must be strong and good, whereunto must be fixed upon each side of it a case of good Firelocke Pistolles,* 1.602 the barrell being full eighteene inches long, and the bore of twenty or twenty foure bullets in the pound, with his Spanner and flaske boxes a good sword and a scarffe over his armes to distinguish him from the enemie. His service in the warres is chiefely defen∣sive.

As for the proportion which the horse should beare to the foote, there are divers of sundry opinions, but the Prince of Orange used to allow three to tenne, or twelve at most (viz.) 3000. horse to 1000. or 12000. foote, and every troope consisting of five score horse, which are ordered twenty in ranke, and five deepe in file; the which custome they use the rather, because of the scarsitie of their horse; and againe they are opiniated that in regard each horse man hath two Pistolles, they may perfect their fight, as well as a Troope of Musquetiers that are tenne deepe in ••yle, having but one Musquet apeece: but from this hath proceeded many inconve∣niences, as Captaine Beumount hath observed: wherefore his advice was to have the horse Troopes consist of sixe score; so they may be ranked twenty in breast, and sixe deepe in file, they being then more apt, and proper to double their rankes; whereby their front may be extended; or if (being in skirmish with the enemy) any shot should be drawne out to give fire upon them in the reare; then the two hindmost rankes of a horse, may peckiere about and put them to retreate▪ and the foure foremost rankes in the front may be the better able to prosecute their fight; wherefore my discourse shall be to shew you how the Troopes consisting of 120. horse ranked, twentie in brest, and sixe deepe in file shall be exercised and fitted for the warres, and leave it to the judicious Commander to take his choyse.

CHAP. CVIII.

How the Harquebuziers and the Carbines ought to demeane themselves.

THese kinde of horse men are to be armed with an open Caske, Gorget, backe and brest more than Pistoll proofe, with good Buffe coate to preserve their bodies from bruising: Their Harquebuzes are to be two foote and a halfe in length, their bores of seventeene bullets to the pound; about their neckes a strong leather Belt, with a Swivell to hang the Ring of their peeces upon a Flaske and Touch boxe and Pistolls like to the Cuirassiers: Their horses ought not to be under the size of fifteene hands in height; when they passe by the Generall, or Troope through the streetes of a towne, they place the but end upon their right thigh, and their right hand grasping the barrell towards the middest of it, the locke towards their bodies; otherwise in their march, if the enemy be not neere, they hang downe by their sides.

Likewise the Carbine requires a smaller horse, a faire Buffe coate; his Carabine twentie seven inches long, the bore of twentie foure bullets to the pound; and he is to demeane himselfe upon all points like the Harquebuze having his sword in a strong belt; Flaske and touch boxe.

CHAP. CIX.

How the Dragoones ought to arme and demeane themselves.

THe Dragoones are no lesse than a foote company, consisting of Pikes and Muskets, only for their quicker expedition they are mounted upon horses they are of great use for the guar∣ding of passages and fordes, in regard of their swiftnesse they may prevent the enemies foote, and gaine places of ad∣vantage to hinder their passage.

Their Pikes are to have thongs of leather about the mid∣dle of them, for the easier carriage of them.

The Muskets are to have a broad strong belt fastened to the stocke of them, well neere from one end to the other, whereby he hangs it upon his backe when hee rideth, holding his match and bridle in his left hand: any horse if he be swif•• will performe this service, in regard they alight and doe their service a foote; so that when tenne men alight, the eleventh holdeth their horses; so that to everytroope of 120. there is 132. men allowed.

CHAP. CX.

How a single Troope of horse ought to be drawne into Ranke and File.

NOw it remaynes wee should make entrance into the discourse of Exercising a single Troope; Therefore supposing our Troope to consist of one hundred and twenty horse, wee must first order them into Rankes and Files.

Rankes are a number uncertaine,* 1.603 and hapens according to the quantitie of souldiers, be they more or lesse.

A File is a number certaine consisting of sixe persons (viz) a Leader,* 1.604 two Middle men, a Bringer up, a Follower betweene the Leader, and the Mid∣dleman to the Reare; and a Follower betweene the Middleman to the Front, and the Brin∣ger up, which is the last man in the File called the Reare.

A File differs from a Ranke, because they stand face to backe, and never above sixe deepe.

A Ranke differs from a File, in regard they stand even a breast, shoulder to shoulder, and have no certaine extent.

The order of a File you shall see in this discription following.

• 0 Leader.
• 1 Follower.
• 0 Middleman to the Reare.
• 0 Middleman to the Front.
• 1 Follower.
• 0 Bringer up.

The description of a Ranke you shall understand by this demonstation following; where you shall suppose twenty in Ranke, and sixe deepe in File.

[illustration]

Sixe in File.* 1.605

Reare.

CHAP. CXI.

What Orders and distances a horse Troope should observe in exercise.

NOw let us take notice what Orders or Distances these Files and Rankes are to observe; in exercising, where note, that in horse Troopes, there are but two sorts of distances or orders, either in Ranke or File, (viz.) close order, and open order.

Close Order in Files is knee to knee.

Open Order in Files is sixe foote, which is accounted a horses length.

Likewise close Order in Rankes, is to the Horses crooper; so that little or no distance remaines betweene the head of the Follower and the crooper of the Leader.

Likewise open order in Rankes is sixe foote, above which they must never open.

CAAP. CXII.

The motions which the Cavalrie are to observe in their exercise.

THe Motions of the Cavallrie are of foure kindes, as namely, first, Facings; secondly, Doublings; thirdly, Counter-Marches; fourthly, Wheelings.

The use of Facing is to make the company perfect, to be suddenly prepared for a charge; on either of the Flankes or the Reare.

Doubling of Rankes; or doubling by halfe Files, or Bringers up, is used upon occasion of strengthening the Front.

Doubling of Files, or Doubling by halfe Rankes, serveth to strengthen the Flankes.

Counter-Marches, serve either to reduce the File-leaders, into the place of the Bringers up; and so to have the best men ready to receive the charge of an Enemy in the Reare; or to bring one Flanke into the place of the other: or Front, and Reere, or either Flanke into the middle of the body.

The use of Wheeling, is to bring the Front, (which) is all wayes supposed to consist of the ablest men to be ready to receive the charge of the Enemy; on either Flanke, or Reere.

CHAP. CXIII.

The Manner how a Commander over 120. Horse, besides Officers, should Troope with them into the Field to be exercised.

NOw wee are to suppose this Troope of 120. horsemen are to be ordered in Ranke and File; fit to draw into the Field for exercise; where note they are five in Ranke, and sixe deepe in File, and every Officer marching in his due place, as appeares by this subsequent demonstration.

[illustration]

Captaine.

Trumpet. * 1.606

Cornet. * 1.607

Eld. Corporall.

Second Corporall.

Yongest Corporall.

Livetenant.

Trumpet.

CHAP. CXIV.

How a Commander should draw this Troope of Horse into a body in manner of Battalia standing at their open Order or Distance of sixe foote.

YOur Troope of horse being drawne into the Field, before you can exercise them; you must draw up the dimissions in∣to an even body, in manner of Battallia; (viz.) the first de∣vision, led by the Captaine, being come to a convenient place of Exercise, is to stand firme.

Then the Cornet is to leade up the second Division upon the left side of the former, fronting even, and keeping even destances both in Ranke and File.

Thirdly, the Eldest Corporall is to leade up his Devision upon the left side of the Cornets, fronting them even with the former.

Lastly, the second Corporall brings up his last Division upon the left hand of the eldest corporall, observing their due orders and proportions both in Rankes and Files.

And being thus drawne in Battallia there shall be consequently be in the Front; the Captaine whose place is to stand upon the right hand before the Front of the first Division.

The eldest Trumpet and Cornet before the Front of the second Devisions

The eldest Corporall before the Front of the third Division.

The second Corporall before the Front of the fourth Division.

And in the Reare, the Lievetenant, the youngest Corporall, and youngest Trumpet.

[illustration]

Trumpet.

Second Corporall. Eldest Corporall. Cornet. Captaine.

Front. * 1.608

Reare.

Livetenant. Trumpet. Corporall.

CHAP. CXV.

How Souldiers are to be made to understand their Commanders intention in time of skirmish.

BEfore wee can proceede to the Exercising of this Troope of Horse; wee must take notice how and by what meanes the souldiers should understand their Commanders 〈◊〉〈◊〉, that accordingly they may immediatly act and put in execution, such things as are commanded: And this is to be performed by the Commander three severall wayes.

First, by the immediate command of the Captaine, either so that every souldier heares the word of Command distinctly himselfe, or by Tradi∣tion from inferiour Officers, whose office is to eccho such commands throughout the Troope, and this is termed vocall.

Secondly, when the Captaine commands the Trumpet to sound such points of warre as are generally knowne to every particular souldier; this is termed Semi∣vocall.

The first point of warre the Trumpet sounds,* 1.609 is (Butte Sella) this is the warning to clappe on the Saddles.

The second is (Mountè Cavallo) that is the warning for the souldiers to mount upon horse backe.

The third is (Tucquet) that is the warning for a March.

The fourth is (Carga, Carga) that is a command for to charge the Enemy.

The fift is (Al•• Stand••rdo) that is a command for to retreate to the Colours.

The sixt and last is (Auquet) that is a command for the souldiers to repaire to their Watch or Guards, or for the discharging of the Watch or Guards.

In the third place when the Commander shall make such perfect signes pregnant to the sight; as by charging with his Trun••ion, or Pistoll, or by holding up the colours; whereby the souldiers take notice by the first to charge on; and by the se∣cond to make a stand; and this is termed Mute; wherefore you may perceive it is a thing of great consequence to accustome your souldiers to these things, without which a world of inconveniences, and confusion must of necessitie betide you in times of skirmishing.

Further, in regard the exercising a Troope of Horse is tedious and painefull for a Captaine to performe; it shall prove very convenient to take some extraordinary paines in making every File-Leaders most perfect in their Postures and Motions, and then every particular File-Leader shall teach and instruct the residue of his File in the same manner; from whence will arise such an emulation betweene each File, who shall be most expert, and make the best performances, that in a short space they will transcend in their Millitary discipline. These things being thus per∣formed, and the Troope drawne in Battallia, as befor•• is deciphered; then the Commander at his ease and pleasure may exercise them in grosse, in this Subse∣quent forme.

CHAP. CXVI.

The Description of the Postures for the Cavalry, which every Officer is to teach his Souldiers before they can be fit for Service.

FOrmerly I have shewed you how to backe your Horse, to use his Raines, to ride him in the best and aprovedst way for Service, now it remaines before you exercise them in their Motions, to shew them first their postures: and premising that a Horseman cannot fit him∣selfe for exercise; or to execute any Service, unlesse he be first moun∣ted on horsebacke, compleately armed as formerly is taught, there∣fore I will omit those things; and begin with the first posture according to the Ne∣therlandish rules, the words of command follow▪ viz.

• 1. Vncap your Pistols.
  • This posture is performed by turning downe the Caps of the Pistoll cases with your right hand.
• 2. Draw forth your Pistoll.
  • You are to draw your Pistoll out of the case, with your right hand; the left Pistoll first, in regard it is most trouble some for the right hand to draw, and at first there is most time to performe it, being drawne, mount the Muzzell of it.
• 3. Order your Pistoll.
  • You are to sinke your Pistoll into your Bridle hand, and instantly remove your right hand towards the midst of it, and then rest the But end upon the right thigh.
• 4. Span your Pistoll.
  • This is performed by sinking the Pistoll into his Bridle hand, and taking the Spanner in his right hand, to put it upon the Axeltree, and winding about the wheele till it sticke, and then to returne the Spanner to his place, which most usually'st hanges about their neckes in a silken string, or plac't in the case.
• 5. Prime your Pan.
  • Your Pistoll being held in your Bridle hand, not farre a∣bove the locke, you are to take your priming boxe in your right hand, (and pressing the spring with your fore finger to open the boxe) to put powder into the Pan.
• 6 Shut your Pan.
  • You are to presse in your Pan pin, with your right thumbe whereby it will easily close.
• 7. Cast about your Pistoll.
  • You are to assume the Pistoll in your bridle hand, and casting it about against the left side, erecting the mouth of it.
• 8. Gage your Flaske.
  • You are to take the flaske into your right hand, and with your fore finger pull backe the Spring, and turning the Mouth of the Flaske downeward, you are to let goe the Spring.
• ...

• 9. Lade your Pistoll.
  • Having gaged your Flaske (as in the former posture) you are to presse downe the Spring, which openeth the Flaske with your fore finger, then placing the mouth of it in your Pistoll, give it a shogge to cause the pow∣der to proceed.
• 10. Draw out your Rammer.
  • You are to draw out your Gunsticke with your right hand turned, and to shorten the great end of it against your brest, whereby you may the easier put it to the mouth of your peece for to ramme it.
• 11. Lade with Bullet and Ramme home.
  • Holding your Rammer head in your right hand (as before) you are to take the Bullet out of your mouth with your Thumbe and fore finger; and so put it into the mouth of the Pistoll, and immedi∣ately ramme it home.
• 12. Returne your Rammer.
  • You are to draw forth your Rammer with your right hand turned (and shortning it against your brest as before) returne it to it's place.
• 13. Pull downe your Cocke.
  • You are to bring backe the Pistoll with your Bridle hand, towards your right side; and placing the Butt end, upon your right thigh you may pull downe the Cocke.
• 14. Recover your Pistoll.
  • You are to take your Pistoll in his due place, with your right hand bearing up the Muzzell.
• 15. Present, and give fire.
  • Having your Pistoll in your right hand, with your finger upon the tricker, you are to incline the Muzzell (with a steady eye) towards the Marke, not suddenly but by degrees, according to the distance you ride, before a necessity of dischar∣ging shall be, you are not to give fire directly forwards the horses head, but in a diameter line, by his right side, turning his right hand so as the locke of the Pistoll may bee upward, and having a true view of the Marke, draw the tricker and let flye.
• 16. Returne your Pistoll.
  • You are to returne the Pistoll into the Case, and spee∣dily draw out your other Pistoll, (if occasion com∣mands) making the same performances as be∣fore.
• 17. Bend your Cocke.
  • Now in regard our English Pistolls differ from the fire∣locke Pistoll, I will briefely touch two or three po∣stures that are Heterogen••all to the former.
  • And as before is taught, the holding of your Pistoll in your bridle hand; now to performe this posture you are to place your two fore fingers of your right hand upon the vice pin that sk••ues in the stone, and by it to draw up the Cocke.
• ...

• 18. Guard your Cocke.
  • With your Right hand you are to pull downe the backe locke, and then be carefull in securing the Cocke, from striking downe.
• 19. Order your Hammer.
  • You are gently to draw downe your ste••ele upon the Pan with your right hand; provided alwayes there be a good flint, and that it be evenly mea∣sured, least it under or over reacheth, which may hazard the firing.
• 20. Free your Cocke.
  • You are to thrust backe your backe locke with your thumbe and fore finger of your right hand, so as the Cocke may be let downe without danger of staying it from giving fire.

CHAP. CXVII.

Of the exercising of the Harquebuz and Carabine with the Postures to them belonging, and diuers breefe rules appertaining to the use of them as also to Cuirassiers.

HAving discourst of the managing of the Pistoll, in his se∣verall postures; it will seeme convenient here by the way to observe some briefe notes, concerning the use and managing both of Pistols, Harquebuzes, and Cara∣bines; and then onely name the Postures belonging to the Harquebuz, and Carabine, that goe with Sna∣phanes.

The quickest and most compendious way of charging either the Pistols belonging to the Cuirassiers; or other Peeces of what kinde soever, is by using of Cazrouches, which are made of white paper after this manner following. First you are to have a former of wood of the just widenesse of your Pistols bore, about this you are to winde a Paper,* 1.610 which shall containe the true charge of powder and Bullet, the ends must be tyed with a thred and in the midst betwixt the powder and the Bullet, when you are to use them, you are to bite of the end of the Paper close to the pow∣der and so put it into the Barrell of your Pistoll ramming it downe close so as the powder may take at the Touch-hole by this meanes a Souldier shall be farre readier in his postures, you are also to observe that the armes of the Cuirassiers are Pistoll proofe; wherefore that Souldier that incounters against them must bee sure not to shot untill he be within three or foure paces:* 1.611 the Hollanders use to discharge their Pistols at the enemies eare, as a place most certaine to speede them; others at the lower part of the Belly, or his arme Pits or about the necke or throate; a Cuirassiere usually giveth this charge upon the trot, and very seldome upon the Gallop, if you misse the speeding of the man, then you are to direct your next charge against the Horse,* 1.612 where you shall be sure to speed him either upon the head or brest; the sword is to be managed after you have done your indeavours with the Pistoll; and the principall thing required is to disable your adversary by hacking a two the Raynes of his bridle, or the Buckles of his Pouldrons, whereby he shall be disabled from making any resistance.

The Cuirassire, in fight is to strive to gaine the right side of his Enemie being most proper to discharge his Pistols against him.

The Harquebuziers and Carabines, must contrarily strive to get the left side of

of their Enemies, because that in presenting hee is to rest his Carabine upon his Bridle hand,* 1.613 placing the Butt end upon the right side of his brest neere his shoul∣der.

Our Moderne Generalls thinke it best to order the Cuirassiers in grosse Bodies, by which meanes they are more powerfull and strong, against the shocke of the ene∣mie, they are for the most part reserved to second the light armed; so that when they are broken they may have shelter, and time to reu••ite themselves behinde the Cuirassiers.

Note that in a pitcht Battell if the enemies Ordnance be planted upon some hill so advantagious that they may annoy the Horse troops; then the horse are to be drawn into some place of security, or into the Reare of your Battell of the Infantery; un∣till such time as their Ordnance be intercepted by certaine disbanded Troopes both of Horse and Foote, sent for that purpose; as for the Postures of the Harquebuz and Carabine, they may receive their instruction from the Cuirassiers; yet in regard most of our peeces goe with English lockes, which differ from firelockes, you shall finde here underneath the order of handling them with the words of Com∣mand.

The Postures belonging to the Snaphane Carabine ut sequit.

• 1. Order your Carabine.
• 2. Sinke your Carabine into your Bridle hand.
• 3. Bend your Cocke.
• 4. Guard your Cocke.
• 5. Prime.
• 6. Shut your Pan.
• 7. Cast about your Carabine.
• 8. Gage your Flaske.
• 9. Lade your Carabine.
• 10. Draw your Rammer.
• 11. Shorten your Rammer.
• 12. Lude with Bullet and Ramme 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪
• 13. Withdraw your Rammer.
• 14. Shorten your Rammer.
• 15. Returne your Rammer.
• 16. Recover your Carabine.
• 17. Order your Hammer.
• 18. Free your Cocke.
• 19. Present.
• 20. Give Fire.

CHAP. CXVIII.

Of the Excellent Service which may be performed by the Dragoones here in our Island of England.

AS for the Dragoones, their Service and use of armes doth so neer∣ly corespond with the Postures of the Infantry, to which po∣stures I altogether referre them.

They were invented for speciall services, to assist both the Cavalry and Infantry, for there are many exploits which cannot be effected by the Cavalry alone.

The Musquetei••es are to exercise themselves to give fire

on horsebacke, in the same fashion as the Harquebuzirs ought to doe.

Being come to Guarde a passage or to doe any other the like Service; they are to alight and demeane themselves as infantry, as in diverse places in this booke you may read, onely here by the way I will shew how necessary it were, to breede and traine up certaine companies of them in this our Kingdome, which being an Island, and the chiefest of our Land forces farre remote from the Maritime places, where an enemie may possibly land, which will be troublesome, and require much time to March to our Coast side with our foote troopes, and when wee are arived; with the strength of our Land thinking to encounter with them;

The Enemy may easily delude us by the advantage of a darke night or mistie day which may so favour them, that by rebarking themselves, and setting sayle, by the next night they may be landed on the other side of the Kingdome, which were a thing impossible to March to them with our Army to oppose them; but these Dragoones may easily crosse the Kingdome, and may suddenly arive in any place thereof to assist such Forces, as that Coast shall be able to rayse.

And although we should admit of that Noble Gentlemans advice,* 1.614 which was to divide the Forces of certaine adjacent Counties, into three divisions; making an entire armie of the one halfe of them: intrenching them neere the place suspected for greatest danger for conveniencie of landing them; as he exemplifies it by Fulke-stone in Kent, where he would have lodged 6000. men, then upon the right wing twelve miles distant from this body, being the point of Nesse, he would have 3000. men lodged, and upon the left wing 12. miles distant, being the Towne of Margate, he would have 3000. more lodged; and so accordingly to inguirt the whole Island, by this they should mutually give helpe one to another: so that if the body of this army being 6000. men, should be distrest, then the two wings were speedily to repaire to their succour; or if any of the wings then the body of the army were to March speedily to their ayde: Questionlesse this is a singular project, and no reason can contradict it, if we have men sufficient to inguirt the Island round; but that cannot be expected, in regard that his Majestie must of necessitie have a stan∣ding Armie in the Heart of the Kingdome, composed of the Principall Gentry and Yeomandry, to be in readinesse if the Enemie should give a repulse, and over∣throw those Maritime Forces, or if any Domesticke enemie should trecherously draw a head to side wit•• them; this standing Armie will dishearten them, and bee a meanes to corroberate our owne men which otherwise would be much dejected, and happily many of them so base (being overwhelmed with the present disasters) that they would turne to the Enemie and compound their owne safeties, as was well seene at the Landing of William the Conquerour, after he had discomfited the Armie of King Herrald,* 1.615 which was but a handfull of the Forces which might have beene afterwards raysed to have given the enemie a second Battell, or otherwise have defended the Land by delaying the Enemie: but feare had so wonderfully surprised the Natives, that immediately they compounded their owne safeties, which had there beene a powerfull Armie in the heart of the Kingdome, to have kept them in obedience, that they might have strengthned their dejected conceits, upon their hope of victory which might possibly have beene gained by this Armie, the Lords Spirituall and Temperall would never have yeelded themselves with the Citty of London to the mercy of the Conquerour, but this is onely by the way.

Now these Troopes of Dragoones being well exercised and practised as they ought, let any sensible man judge if they shall not prove in time of neede most usefull in regard of their speedy March.

CHAP. CXIX.

The Order of Exercising a Horse Troope in their Motions being drawne in Battalia.

TO pretermit all further circumstances; (presupposing that every Souldier is perfect in his postures) it is now high time to draw out in Battalia; (as before is demonstrated) that they may the better be exercised in Grose, and the more commodiously taught their Moti∣ons which every Souldier (using silence) is to performe according as he shal be commanded, as this following figure doth demonstrate; where note there are ••20. horse drawne in Battalia ready to be exercised and stan∣ding at their open order of sixe foote, being the space of ground allowed betweene horse and horse.

Front. * 1.616

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h

Right Flanke.

Reare. * 1.617

As you were.▪ * 1.618

To the left hand, * 1.619

As you were. * 1.620

Front. H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h

h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H h h h h h H

Reare.

To the left hand a-bout. * 1.621

To the Right hand about as you were.

h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H

Rankes to the Right hand double. * 1.622

Rankes as you were. * 1.623

HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Rankes to the left hand double. * 1.624

Rankes as you were.

hHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhH o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Files to the right hand double. * 1.625

Files to the left hand, as you were.

29 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H ó H H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h

Files to the left hand double. * 1.626

Files as you were, or Rankes to the right hand double.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H •• H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o H o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o h o

Halfe Files to the right hand, double your Front. * 1.627

Halfe Files as you were, * 1.628

HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Halfe files to the left hand, double your Front. * 1.629

hHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhH hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Bringers up to the right hand, double your Front. * 1.630

Bringers up as you were.

HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh hhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Files to the left hand Counter-march. * 1.631

HhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHhHh h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

Files close to the right and left to your close Order. * 1.632

oooooHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo ooooohhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhooooo

Rankes close for∣wards to your close order. * 1.633

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o

To the left hand wheele. * 1.634

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h

* 1.635

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h

CHAP. CXX.

The Fashion of Horse Battels discourst of, and first of the Rhombe, the Wedge, and the Square.

IN regard we shall not have the opportunitie to discourse, and demonstrate every kinde of Battell, that at this time is in use when wee shall come to intreate of the embattelling of the In∣fantry with the Cavalry; therefore I thinke it most conveni∣ent to discourse of some formes of Embattelling the Cavalry which are of greatest use.

And the rather because the Cavalry for the most part are em∣ployed upon peculiar services in the absence of the Infantry. Those that have formerly written of this subject, have not fully exprest their owne conceits. There∣fore to make all things cleere; I shall indeavour to set downe the severall figures of each severall kinde.

The Thessalians were the first inventers of the Rhombe, * 1.636 and conceived it to be an absolute forme; in regard they were ready to turne their faces every way with speede, and not easily to be surprised, in Flanke or in the Reare; because the best men are plac'd in the Fanke, and the commanders in the Angles. (viz.) the Captaine in the Front, and in the right, and left Angles of the Flankes the two ablest Corporalls, and the Livetenant in the reare Angle.

Of these kinde of battells called the Rhombes, there are foure sorts severally di∣stinguished; * 1.637 the first kinde Files and Rankes. The second forme, neither File nor ranke; the third forme Files but ranke not; the fourth ranke, but file not: The first kind of Rhombe that doth both file and ranke, is ordered as followeth (viz.) you are to make the greatest ranke being the middle most of an uneven number, as of a 11. or 13. or 15. or 17. to which you are to joyne other rankes before and behind, every one containing two lesse than the former; as if the greatest ranke consisted of 17. the next rankes on either side are to have but 15. the next on either side of those, but 13 and so every one two lesse, untill at last you come to one, as you may perceive by the next Figure following; the longest ranke consists of 15. the next of 13, &c. and so the whole Rhombe hath 113 horse in Battalia: of these I intend to shew you the order of framing them, although not much used in these late warres: afterwards I shall discourse of sundry formes of Embattelling in a discourse by it selfe.

The Rhombe of Horse.

[illustration]

The Front. * 1.638

Left Flanke

Right Flanke

The Reare.

CHAP. CXXI.

The manner and forme how the second kinde of Rhombe is ordered in Battalia.

THe next kind of Rhombe, which neither Files nor Ranks was by the antient Generalls, thought very proper for service, in regard the turnings and other motions, were to be performed very easily, having nothing to hinder them before, behinde, or in Flancke.

For the ordering of this forme of Battell, you must first place the Leader, then one a•• his right, and an other at his left hand, and in such a distance, that their horses heads reach up to his horses shoulders, as in the formall battell.

The first row you must also make of an uneven number, as 21. the Leader of the Troope standing in the midst, and 19. other being laid to him backwards on either side; so that this ranke containeth two sides of the Rhombe, like to this A.

Then the Reare Commander is placed directly behinde the Leader; and to him are other joyned forwardly on either side, like to this Figure V. and the number of the following rankes; after the first, there are to be two lesse than the former, and therefore nine must be added on either side of the Reare Commander; so that the number of the second ranke hath tenne; this ranke makes two sides parrallell to the two former sides of the Rhombe, as the Figure shewes: the third must be 17. and so forwards to one, the whole Battell hath in it 121. horse with the Officers; the Figure followeth.

[illustration]

Front.

* 1.639

Reare.

CHAP. CXXII.

The Manner and forme of imbattelling the third kinde of Rhombe consisting of Files but not of Rankes.

THe third kinde of Rhombe,* 1.640 which Files but Rankes not, you are to order your Troope after this manner following.

First you must make a File of any Number, the Captaine of the Troope being File-leader, and the Reare Commander the last of the File.

To both the Flankes of this File, you are to lay two other Files either of them one lesse in number than the first, these you must begin to place even with the middest of the distances of the first file on both sides; as suppose 11. in the first File, the next file on either side must have 10. a peece, and the next after them 9. a peece, and still one the lesse in all the rest after plac't Files, and so it shall prove to file but not ranke.

This forme is advantagious and profitable for turning of faces, when neede shall require, * 1.641 from one point of the Rhombe to another: turning to the right hand is called turning to the staffe: turning to the le•••• is called turning to the Raynes, but in these our moderne warres we use to command them to face to the right, or to the left hand, as occasion shall offer, the figure of this discourse followeth the Troope of horse consisting of 121. with the Officers.

[illustration]

The Front.

Reare.

CHAP. CXXIII.

The manner of imbattelling the fourth kinde of Rhombe which Rankes and Files not.

THis last kinde of Rhombe whose property is to Ranke and not to File, is made by a con••rary way to the former.

The presedent Rhombe which shewed to File but not to Ranke, began at the Front point, and Reare point, and pro∣ceeded to the Flankes.

This beginneth at the Flanke points and proceedth to the Front and Reare.

First therefore a Ranke is to be layed of what number you please to the distances of this Ranke you must lay two Rankes more, one on either side, whose number must be one lesse a peece, than the former Ranke, thus continue laying of Rankes towards the Front, and Reare, and in every paire of Rankes diminish one a peece, untill you come to the points, either of which have but one, namely the Captaine and Lievetenant; by this meanes the Rhombe will ranke but not file, the figure followeth.

[illustration]

Front.

* 1.642

Reare.

CHAP. CXXIIII.

The manner of Framing the Battell called the Wedge, or halfe Rhombe, used by the Macedonians.

THe forme of this Battell called the Wedge, plainely appeares in the Rhombe, which both Rankes and Files, for the halfe of that Rhombe is a Wedge.

Wherefore first you must beginne with a Ranke of an uneven number as suppose 15. horse before that Ranke, you must place another Ranke of 13. having two lesse than the former, and so you are to proceede untill you end with one, which is the place of the Captaine; this was the Invention of King Philip of Macedon, who placed his best men be∣fore, that by them the weaker might be held in and inabled to charge.

Elian giveth reasons why the Wedge was in those times accounted better than a Square forme, which we now have in use, in regard it is apt and proper, artificial∣ly to breake the Enemies Square battels, for he Compares a Square Battle to an Axe, for although it be sharper than a Wedge, yet having the edge drawne out in length it cannot possibly, by strength be driven farre into the Wood, but by re∣doubling of strokes.

The Wedge being once entred, insinuateth it selfe, the point being Narrow, and it holdeth what it getteth, untill at last it divides the Square forme in Sunder, al∣though never so tough. Polybius reports lib 4. 278. that the Thessalians being Im∣hatteled in this kinde of forme, they could not be resisted by the Gracians and Per∣sian Squares.

Moreover the Wedge is of greater strength than the Rhombes, because it brin∣geth more hands to fight, for the hinder part of the Rhombe is of no use but to a∣voyde surprises, for it avayleth nothing in charging, whereas all parts of the Wedge are effectuall, viz. the point to enter, and the sides even to the flanke corners, where the reare endeth doth dispart and dissever, and utterly disorder the Enemie, whereby victory is gained.

And questionlesse this forme of a Wedge, were of excellent use in our warres especially when an enemie is charged in Flanke and Reare, or Front and Flanke, then this Battell in forme of a Wedge to come full upon the point of the enemies Battalia, where they shall finde an easie place for entrance, in regard the foote Troopes are constrained to make a double resistance, both to Front and Flanke, so that there will be a space open for entrance; and then the sides of this Wedge bat∣tell will give such a Valley upon the point, that of necessity they cannot be able to withstand it.

The Cornet (in this Wedge forme of imbattelling) is to take his place right be∣fore the Lievetenant in the second Ranke from the Reare, the figure followeth: this Troope consists of 121. Horse.

[illustration]

Front.

The Leivetenant.

CHAP. CXXV.

The reason why we retaine the custome of Ranking five deepe in File.

WEE have learned from Generalls in former ages the framing of Square Battels, in regard they were oppinionated that forme was the easiest to be framed, and best for Motion, besides the ablest men were plac't in Front, and had all the principall Commanders, to lead them on, to give the Enemie a charge, the weapons which the Horsemen used were Speares, * 1.643 of such a wonderfull length to to Match their Enemies Pikes, which as Leo reports Chap. 25. that they were 16.

Cubtis in length, that is 24. foote; and Livy verifies the same that their Pikes were very unwildy in regard of their bignesse and length, and then they for the most part did order their horse Troopes eight deepe in File, as Polybius speaketh plainely; who was Generall of the Horse of the Achaeans; besides Leo in his seventh Chapter writeth after this manner▪ * 1.644 If there be many horse (saith he) (viz.) above twelve thousand, then let them be ordred tenne deepe in File; if but few, then let it be no more than five; * 1.645 further he saith, too much shallownesse maketh a Battalia weake, and ready to be broken; by this we may conjecture that the filing of Troopes five deepe was not a thing inforc't of necessitie, untill such times as they found the in∣convenience of their over-long Speares; so that the Macedonians caused their Speares to be but 15. or 16. foote in length, and then five horse in depth was rather at the most, (then otherwise) to make use of those short weapons to offend the Enemy in their charge.

They further aimed to order their Battells, so that the Battalias might seeme square, (viz.) as deepe in Flanke, as broad in Front, so that thereby, the enemy might be deluded; * 1.646 and therefore sometimes they would order eight horse in Front, and but 4. in Flanke, which seemed as a square, by reason a horse taketh up twice as much space in his length as in breadth; whereupon finding the inconveniences of those kinde of squares, they bethought them of a more perfect square, lesse than which they durst not venture, and more they could not; for want of horse, in regard their pollicie was to discourage the Enemy by making their Troopes shew more than in∣deede they were; wherefore they framed their Troopes of 50. horse, and ordered them tenne in Ranke, and five in File; which forme represents a square, in re∣gard the five horse take up as much ground in their length, as the tenne doe in breadth, and this proportion they held best, for had there beene sixe, seven, or eight horse in a File, * 1.647 they could not have done any good in regard of the shortnesse of their squares, as Leo after confessed.

But our manner of charging the Enemy differs from theirs; for wee are to give fire upon the Enemy by Rankes, and so fall off into the Reare, so that all the Rankes shall come up and give fire by degrees upon the Enemy, whereas their Troopes gave a firme close charge, and wheeled off together; this was the use both of their Ar∣chers and Spearemen.

Now our moderne Captaines, * 1.648 although they have abandoned the use of their Speares, yet they have detained their forme of ordering their Troopes, five deepe in file; and because each horseman hath two Pistolls, therefore they suppose that they may charge and discharge as well as the foote Troopes that are tenne deepe (with one Musquet for their armes) but let the ablest horseman of them all say what he please; he shall finde it another businesse, especially if both sides stand to their tackling, untill all the Rankes have given fire; for the small distance of time, and the ordering of their unruly horses, will make them fall short of their expecta∣tions: but indeede our horse Troopes, seldome stand so long in competition for the victory; but that one side either retreates, or doe worse; for if they should, it should be easily seene that that Troope whose Files were ordered sixe in deepth, would soone weare through the adverse part, whose extent is but five.

Wherefore I could wish that all our Troopes might be so ordered, in regard it is a number so proper and apt, either to be divided, or to be doubled, or to be drawne into any forme of Embattelling, wherefore more than sixe are unprofitable, and lesse than sixe are not so serviceable.

In former ages they were driven to their inconvenience, in regard they were scanted of horse; and so to make their fronts equall with the Enemies; they in pollicie framed their Battalias but of five deepe; whereas their Enemies were com∣pounded of many more, as 6. 8. or 10. many times; but after they had found out their pollicy (which) was only to make the fronts of their Battells equall with theirs, being constrained in regard of their thinnesse to line them with shot, and to have stands of Pikes to rescue them to make them abler to resist their enemies streng Phalange; * 1.649 they likewise ordered their Troopes after the same manner, whereby they delated their Fronts farre witer than before, and so over winged them, whereby many times they gained victory.

Our Kingdome (blessed be God) shall not neede to be driven to that exegint to make such simple shifts, In regard we have or may have more than sufficient to op∣pose the potentest Enemy that shall dare venture, or indeede possibly can conveigh so many Troopes over, but that we shall be, not onely his equall, but exceede him; wherefore I have framed each Troope of 120. horse, and the same to be divided into foure Corporallships (viz.) thirtie in each; each Corporallship to march sixe in brest and sixe in depth, and so I leave it to your best considerations.

CHAP. CXXVI.

How the Chavalry are to order and demeane themselves in proportionable Battells, fit to be joyned with the Infantry with their due order of fighting against the Enemies foote Troopes; Likewise how they are to give or receive a charge of the Enemies Cavalry in grose, as also in single combats and assaults.

AS in ordering of the Infantry; so in disposing of the Cavalry in Batta∣lia, for the well fighting of a pitch'd battell against the Enemy, these Circumstances are to be considered,

First, there are to be drawne out of sundry Troopes of Carabines, a certaine number of horse; which are to be joyned with a propor∣tionable number of foote: these are speedily (without keeping any order or distances) to runne upon the Enemies Ordnance; and either to surprise them, or to hold those of the Enemie that gaurd them in combustion; so that their Ordnance shall be hindred from annoying your Troopes of horse, who are farre more subject and liable to receive harme from the Ordnance (in regard they are mounted high) then the Infantry can possibly be, wherefore the Cavallry many times have beene constrained to retire themselves into some place of advantage, as a Vally, or in the Reare of the foote Troopes to hide and secure themselves from the great shot, un∣till such time as the Armies were drawne neare together; so as they could not dis∣charge for indamaging their owne Troopes.

In the next place, there are certaine horse to be commanded out of divers Troopes of Carabines to assist and guard the forlorne Hopes of the Infantry; and these are to towle out the Enemy to beginne light skirmishes; the better to animate the maine Battell against they shall be ready to charge; by seeing their valours; and many times they have beene a meanes of disordering the Enemies grand Battalias.

The maine battell of the Cavalry is divided into there distinct divisions; (viz.) the Vanguard, the Battell, and the Rearegaurd; these three make one intire Front, and are to be ordered at three foote distance, when they are ready to charge: This principle Battell is to stand in an even front with the Infantry (viz) either upon the right or left wing, or upon both when there is no naturall strength, as Rivers, Quag∣mires, Hedges, or the like, to secure one of the wings, you are to place your Ca∣valry wide off the Empalement of the Flankes of the Battell of the Infantry a hun∣dred paces at the least for feare of anoying your foote Troopes: likewise there must be the space of 25▪ paces of ground in distance left betweene every company, and 50. paces betwixt each Regiment.

The winges of the horse Battell next adjoyning to the Flankes of the foote, are to be of Cuirassiers, in regard they are rather to secure the Flanks of the Infantry by sustaining a charge, then for to advance forwards to give the Enemie a charge; un∣lesse upon some great occasion, * 1.650 the residue of this maine Battell may be compoun∣ded Harquebuziers and Carabines as the Generall shall thinke best.

There must likewise be two other grand battells ordered; the first is to be plac'd a hundred paces before the Front of the maine battell, but not so forwards as the forlorne hopes, by little more than halfe the distance, these are to consist of Harque∣buzires and Carabines, and are to be ordered in competent Battalias; which shall be neither too great nor too small, but so as they may charge in sundry bodies, the better to releeve one the other: betweene each Battallia, there must be certaine Files of Musquetiers, drawne up in an even Front with them, who shall give fire

upon the enemies horse to disorder their Rankes, as they shall approach to charge your Troopes; these shotiupon occasion may retreate, and fall in betwixt the di∣stances of the maine Battell, which are to advance forward to re scue the for∣mer Troopes being over charged.

The third battell, which is called the Battell of Sucker, is to be plac'd a good di∣stance behinde the maine Battell, and these ought to be all (or the greatest part of them) Cuirassiers, and ordered in great Battalias then the Harquebuziers, they are to be marshalled, and disposed into divers Compertments or Divisions; so that the Battalias of the maine battell may retreate betwixt them, or being routed they may shelter themselves behinde them, and reunite themselves againe, and joyne with them in a desperate charge; for this is the last refuge, unlesse you draw out certaine Pikes to relieve them; * 1.651 and unlesse your strength in horse doe much ex∣ceede the Enemies, it will be to your disadvantage, to strive to charge the Enemies foote Troopes (unlesse there should be an unexpected advantage offered) untill such time as you have either routed the Enemies horse, or put them to flight; and then you are to bend your full strength to assault them upon all quarters with your Har∣quebuziers and Carabines first; and then seconded by your Cuirassires; who are to presse in amongst the Enemy, and breake their rankes; but in the meane time they must leave a sleeve of horse upon each flanke of the wings of the foote Troopes to defend them from the Enemies charge, who will adventure to doe it when they see them left naked.

If your Cavalry are by some accident to fight onely against some certaine foote Troopes of the enemies you must make choise of plaine fieldings, * 1.652 as a place most ad∣vantagious for that purpose.

Likewise you must use all celerity and diligence to charge them before they can order themselves, in Battell, and upon these advantages you may venture, although they should be farre more potent than your selfe.

But being drawne into battell, * 1.653 expecting your assault, and your forces being equall in power; then you must command out certaine Troopes of Harquebuziers, or Dragoones, if you have any; and with these you must charge them upon the Front, Flankes and Reares; these are to be seconded by certaine small Battalias of Cui∣rassiers who shall take the opportunity to fall upon such disorders as the Harquebu∣ziers have caused.

If the Enemy have possest themselves in some place of advantage; * 1.654 then the Ca∣valry are not to charge them, although your forces were superiour in strength to them.

If it should so happen that one company of Cuirassirs should be to fight against an∣other, * 1.655 if the enemy doth charge you in full carriere, your safest way is to devide your Troope by halfe rankes, opening a large distance to the right and left hand, so as the Enemy may passe through: then facing your Troope inwards, you are to charge them upon the Flankes; you are to performe the like if you have a Battalia made of two Troopes; and being charged by the Enemy, they are to divide themselves as before, but keepe each Troope whole and entire; or you may cause three or foure files of each of your wings to advance forward on the sudden, and to charge the ene∣mie upon the Flankes; and to equall your Enemies Front, you may cause the halfe Files of your Body to double your Front to the right and left hand by divisions.

Note the Harpuebuziers are to give fire by rankes; * 1.656 the first ranke having given fire, is to wheele off to the left hand (unlesse the ground will not permit it, (but that of necessity you must performe it to the right) making ready and falling into the Reare: the second ranke is to give fire upon the wheeling away of the first, and so the rest successively.

The advantages which the Cavalry may take against the Enemy when hee shall thinke himselfe secure in his quarters, * 1.657 in regard of his Potencie, and the underval∣luing of his adversaries disability may be very great, for many times weake forces have atchieved great victories.

Wherefore there must first be gained true intelligence how the Enemy hath dis∣posed his Troopes; and also certaine knowledge of the situation of the Country, Place, or Village, they are quartered in; and how, and in what places hee hath

plac'd his Guards, and set out his Sentinells. An Enemies Quarters for the most part are ever strongest and best watch kept upon those passages which leades to∣wards a suspected Enemy.

In this case you are to make use of the night, fetching a compasse about by some by-wayes, so that you may charge them in the Reare or Flankes of their Quarters before they be aware of you, where you shall be most sure to finde them most neg∣ligent in those parts.

Every Horsman is to take up behinde him a Musquetire, * 1.658 whose service will be excellent either to place behinde, upon some passage of advantage, to rescue your Troopes if they should be put to a retreate, or to assist the horse in their discharge against the Enemy in his Quarters, as I shall afterwards specifie.

Now let us presuppose that your Troopes are arrived neere the Enemies quar¦ters, * 1.659 every man having the Watch-word given him, and also some distinction, or marke of white, whereby they my be knowne from the Enemy in the darke night, and having laid a sufficient guard of Musquetires to make your retreate safe: the next thing to be considered of, is how you may best hinder the Enemy from uni∣ting their Troopes into a body, wherefore some few Musquetires or Firelocks are to be sent some by-way, where secretly they must get betwixt the Guard and the Sentinells to cut off their retreate; the residue of the Musquetires are to creepe to the Allarme place, and there to place themselves neere the passage where the Enemy is to enter with his Troopes; and having the advantage of some Hedges, Bankes, or pales, for to hide and secure them from the Horse, these shot shall give fire upon the Enemy as they come scattering into the Alarme place.

In the meane time one of your Troypes of Harquebuziers or Carabines shall ad∣vance secretly and without noise towards the Sentinell, and suddenly surprise him by the helpe of the shot that lies behinde him: then speedily they are to fall upon the guard and surprise them, before they shall have time to mount themselves, from thence this Troope is to march forwards into the chiefe streetes of the Village with a certaine number of Musquetiers following them close at the heeles, and there they are to make their stand: the shot shall then Ranke themselves before the Horse; the first ranke upon their knees; the second are somewhat to stoope, the third ranke is to stand upright, and so to give a whole Volley upon the Enemy at once, and then they are to fall off and march downe by the Flankes of the Horse into the Reare of them, and there they are to order themselves as before in a readinesse to give fire upon the enemy that shall seeke to charge them in the Reare; in the meane time the horse are to advance forwards and charge the enemy.

The rest of your Troopes if there be foure or five of them, are to be imployed in foure or five severall places, viz. one Troope is to follow the first Troope to assist them; where if they they finde no resistance they shall possesse the Allarme place, and assist the Musqueteirs that are layed in ambush, likewise there must bee certaine Horse appointed to scoure the streetes continually, whereby the Enemie shall be hindred from gathering together.

Your third Troope is to come Marching fairely unto the Allarme place.

The fourth Troope is to follow softly after, and where they heare any broyles or stirrings, they are to repaire to that place to assault them; or enter into their houses and cut them off, thus suddaine and unexpected aproached, will so pussell the Ene∣mie, that they will seeke to save themselves by flight, through by-pathes and back sides, wherefore you must cause your first Troope to be drawne about the Quarters; to intercept those that shall seeke to save themselves by flight.

If at any time any of your Horse Troopes should meete, the Enemie in their March; if they bee equall in strength, you must resolve to fight, if not you must endeavour to save your men by a faire retreate; wherefore to gaine true intelligence of their Forces; besides your Scoutes you must send out a Corporall with 8. or 10. Souldiers; who must pretend to be of the Enemies Forces if that place doe favour the Enemie, and from them they shall all have true information; and if you be farre from your owne Quarters, and neere to the Enemies when you meete with them, then you must be forc'd to fight, though your Forces should bee inferiour to theirs, but if you be neere to your owne, then you must fairely retreate, leaving a Lievetenant in the Reare; with some of the best mounted Souldiers, your

retreate must be by the same way you went in the day time, but in the night you must take some other way, * 1.660 though further about to your Garrison or Quarter.

If you intend to lay any Ambuscadoes, to defeate the Enemies Forces first you must be certaine of what number the Enemies Forces are of, if he hath fewer Horse than you, then you may imploy all yours, attempting to Toule out all his and route them, or else you may imploy some small number, by which you may at severall times make some good Booty, the Enemie not daring to issue out of his Quarters; but if the Enemie exceede you in horse, * 1.661 it will be dangerous for you to make am∣buscadoes, unlesse it be with some few Horse, for with your small number you may easily retreate, but being a Grosse it might be entertained by part of the Ene∣mies Cavalry presently issuing, and those seconded by more, whereby you should be hardly able to retreate without disorder and losse.

The Ambuscadoes must not by layed much before breake of Day, * 1.662 because other∣wise you cannot discover the aproach of the Enemie, but at hand, and so the am∣buscado shall have no time to come forth and put themselves in order, whereby they may be taken in their owne ambush: the Troopes must be plac'd a good di∣stance one from another, that they may not hinder one another in time of fight, the Sentinells are to be plac't out on every side, and some upon trees, but very closely that they may not be discovered, your ambush must be plast in some covert place upon the side of a Plaine or Champion ground.

In making your Ambuscado with many Troopes of horse, some number of In∣fantry must be layd in ambush, about the midde way to releeve and sustaine the Ca∣valry, * 1.663 in their retreate, if need should be, or otherwise to assist them upon occasion.

Now you are to dispose of your Cavalry in this manner following, suppose you have 1200. horse, consisting of 12. Troopes, three Troopes must bee sent before towards the enemie; giving notice to the Commanders of them, where the am∣bush shall bee, of these three Troopes three must be 50. Cuirassiers, and 50. Har∣quebuziers, the Cuirassiers are to be commanded by their Captaine and Leivete∣nant, but the Harquebuziers are to have their Leivetenant onely.

Of these Harquebuziers, 25. shall advance before, with their Corporall attemp∣ting to take some Booty or Prisoners; In view of these Harquebuziers at the distance of a Cannon shot, there must be 25. Cuirassiers plac'd, under the Command of their Leivetenant, to receive those 25. Harquebuziers when they returne;

The Captaine with the other 25. Cuirassiers, and 25. Harquebuziers is to stay behinde halfe a league off; the Harqueburies are to be plac'd nearest the Enemie, to succour the 50. horse•• which are charged by the Enemies Guards, and then they are all to retreate to the Cuirassiers, these foure small Troops must still retreate, keeping a convenient distance one from another▪ and holding the Enemie in fight, unlesse the Enemie so chargeth them that they are forc'd to flye in disorder.

The other 200. horse which are to consist of 150. Cuirassiers, and 50. Harque∣buzeirs, shall enter the ambuscado about halfe an houre riding off from the other 50. horse, which when they shall see returne and charged, they shall issue out, the 50. Harquebuziers first giving Charge ranke after ranke, then the Cuirassiers, leaving 20. horse in the Reare to make their retreate. The 900 horse are to bee in Ambush about an houres March behinde the sayd 200. horse, and seeing them to returne charged shall suffer them to passe, and the Enemie also, that so they may charge them upon the Reare.

Likewise a certaine number of shot (as suppose 150. Musquetiers and 100. Pikes) must be layd in ambush about a League behinde the 900. horse, * 1.664 on the way by which the 300. horse shall returne Charged: and when the Enemie is come up to them, they are to fall out and give them a Valley to disorder them, upon this the 900. shall Sallie out and Charge the Enemie upon the Reare and Flankes; and then the sayd 300. horse are to face about and sustaine the Charge, which cannot but be to the Enemies Confusion. In great ambushes you must make your number seeme as small as may be, but in small ones you are to make shew of a greater number than you have; wherefore your number being small all your horse must not Sally out of the Ambushcado at once, but some 12. or 15. must remaine in the wood at the furthest part of it, to favour the retreate of the rest, and by their noyse to cause the

Enemie to thinke there are a greater number behinde in the Wood.

If the Enemy should retreate for his better safetie, * 1.665 meeting your Troopes upon your march in the day time; you must first send a Troope of Harquebuziers to charge him on the Reare, (viz.) the Lievetenant shall first assault them with 25. horse, charging the Enemy upon a full trot or gallop; him shall the Captaine follow with the rest of the Troope: these are to be seconded by a Company of Cuirassiers, being most proper to sustaine the Enemy if he resist; but if the wa•• be narrow, the said Cuirassiers shall follow immediatly after the first 25. Harquebuziers; your other Troopes shall second these, observing alwayes one hundred paces distance betwixt every Company.

If a single Troope should meete a Troope of the Enemy of equall number; if the Enemie retreate, send your Leivetenant with 20. horses to charge him in the Reare, * 1.666 following him with fifty to the same effect, closed as firme as may bee, the residue of your Troope must follow at a good distance under a good Corporall, who shall not engage himselfe to fight (though the Enemie turne head) unlesse he see his Officers in great danger, but then he must charge them valiantly, so that his Captaine may reunite his men againe.

Other circumstances belonging to the Cavalry, you shall finde them discourst of either in the discourse of the Marching of the Infantry, or else in the discourse of incamping an Army, I will here conclude with a demonstrative figure, to shew how the Shot should line the horse Troopes, and how you should order your Battalias to succour one the other, where note this represents one wing of the Horse, that is to Flanker the Infantry; * 1.667 and you must further observe so soone as the Enemie hath put the shot to retreate, those Horse Battalias behinde, are to advance up into their places, the shot are but 36. in a Troope, the Harquebuziers 120. and the Cui∣rassiers 200. by this proportion you may make as great Battalias as you please, view the figure onely of the maine battell without the Battell of Succour.

The Horse Troopes being drawne in Battalia, there must be 25. paces distance left betweene every Company, and 50. at the least betweene every Regiment.

[illustration]

The end of the 12. Section.

A DISCOVRSE OF POLITIQVE STRA∣TAGEMS. SECT. XIII.

CHAP. CXXVII.

A perfect demonstration of such Politicke Stratagems as have beene plotted, and practised, both by Ancient and Moderne Commanders.

SEeing that Politicke Stratagems have been the immediate means next under the providence of God, to gaine victo∣ries enervating and weakning an enemy; I have thought it most fit to collect out of the best Authors, the most sub∣tillest and most eminent; as also my owne observations which I have gathered in the time I followed the wars, which may prove of much worth to bee taken notice of, in two respects; first in seeking to evade them, or pre∣vent them; when an enemy shall make use of them or (finding a conveniency; and fit occasion) to make use of them our selves by putting them in practice against our Enemies: And although it bee not in the power of Man, to reade the thoughts and designes of a polictike Enemy; yet when a Commander knowes the nature of all Stratagems, hee may happily ghesse by an Enemies carriage, demeanour, and actions what hee intends: And first because no Generall can ••••rry his designes so in the ayre, but by some privy intelligence, an Enemy is informed of it, and so being fore-warned is fore-armed, it is wisedome for a Generall privately, to give out some speech of a designe in hand, which he intends not to execute, and in the interim to put in action some other pro∣ject, which may be prevalent in regard it is novelties to the enemy; by this many Countries, Cities, and Garrison Townes have beene taken, before the enemy could provide for to defend it, as in the next chapter you shall see.

CHAP. CXXVIII.

How the Prince of Orange tooke in Grolle in Gelderland, by pretending his Army should march before the Towne of Gelders,

THat wise and Politique Generall Prince Maurice knowing the strength of Grolle in regard of the Scituation of it, especially if it were well manned, and victualled; he having laine with his Ar∣my once in former times before i•• and was constrained to raise his Siege; wherefore the second time he practised by policie to gaine that, which formerly was denied to his strength; wherefore hee countenanced his Designe, and fitted his Army, giving it out for another Towne called Gelders, not farr in distance from the other; The Enemy for the better securing of the Towne sent what Forces and Amunition; they could spare out of other Townes to strengthen it, but most especially from this Towne of Grolle, which they thought secure, whereby it was left destitute of any meanes for a long Siege; this opportunity being suddenly taken by the Prince, he drew his Army be∣fore it, and beleaguered it round, so that in a short time it yeelded, which without this advantage would have beene impregnable.

CHAP. CXXIX.

A policie to deferre time when a Towne is beleaguered, that reliefe may be gained, or by it to get from an Enemy.

IN a Towne besieged, it is policie for the Governour to parly upon some agreements, in what kind hee shall surrender up the same, and so make a Truce for certaine dayes; in this kind of practice may be two advan∣tages gained, as namely, first reliefe if it bee expected, which without this plot happily cannot hold out untill it comes; This was practised in Ost-end, the Governour understanding by a Prisoner which was taken, that the Ene∣my did intend to assault his workes generally upon all sides, and in all places the next morne; he thought it wisedome (considering the weaknesse of the Towne) to spend some time in a parley, untill his Succours were arrived, or at least to set those men in order, and provide such necessaries for defence as could bee got, whereupon Hostages being sent upon either side, and Articles being discust upon, but none agreed upon; the releefe did arrive in the Towne, and they were fitted for the assault.

Moreover, these kind of Parleys makes an Enemy confident, that meere distresse drives them unto it; this causeth an enemy to be negligent in all his performances, whereby great advantage may bee taken, either in building or repairing workes, which otherwise could not be done; by this devise Silla that famous Commander being in a straight tooke advantage of the Enemies negligence in time of the Truce, and suddenly beate thorow the Enemy and delivered himselfe, the like did Asdruball being beleaguered in his running Campe by Claudius N••ro, escaped him, which other∣wise must have yeelded upon base tearmes, or have perisht by the Sword.

CHAP. CXXX.

How Zophirus by a politique Stratagem delivered a whole Army into his Generals hands.

ZOphirus one of Darius Captaines mangled his body, and disfigured his face, by cutting off his nose and eares, fled to the Babilonians, complaining of the tyranie of his King, they crediting his words, and knowing his pro∣wesse, committed the charge of the whole Army unto him, as a man to whom such Barbarous usage had made him irreconciliable, and deeming hee would have studied and used all his best indeavours to have beene revenged, but hee taking his best opportunity, delivered his Army into the hands of his Soveraigne with all the Townes, and Forts in his possession.

CH••P. CXXXI.

How Philip Macedon, and divers others by their policie have gained Kingdomes by affording their aydes to distressea Princes.

FOraigne ayd is a surfet most uncurable; for there is no Kingdome but by such a politique advantage hath beene conquered; as appears by the ex∣ample of Philip Macedon assisting the Thebanes in Greece against the Phocians; by taking his advantage brought the Country under his own Command; also the Romanes assisting the Sicilians against the Car∣thagenians possest themselves of the Iland; likewise the Brittaines being ayded by the Saxons, were by them thrust out of all: The same Cup tasted the Irish, they re∣questing the ayd of the English, were by them dispossessed: wherefore there is no confidence to bee put in forraigne assistance; for they will not ingage themselves, nor venter their lives when danger approcheth, as by the example of Francis Sforza assisting the Millanois, he revolted to the Florentines in expectation of higher pre∣ferment: Likewise Gucapo Picinino assisting the King of Naples, left him in his ex∣tremity of Battell; the Switzers did the like to the French. It is a thing most easie for a forreigne ayde (if they be more potent) to keepe possession in a Kingdome, and by drawing in more forces to them, to drive out the Natives; or if they be lesse in power, to side with the Enemy, and so share the Kingdome betwixt them, as the Burgundians did ayding the Romanes in Galacia against the Frankes; and joyning with them overthrew the Romanes: these brittle helpes makes the remedie worse then the disease; so that they are least to be trusted, and last to be tryed.

A politique Nation are ready to assist in three causes: as first when some man in high authoritie upon discontent or desire of revenge openeth a way for them, as Count Iulian did, drawing the Saracens into Spaine to be revenged of Don Roderigo who had ravish'd his daughter.

Secondly, when a weaker faction maketh way for them to overthrow, or at least counterpoise a stronger; as the Burgundians oppressed by the faction of the Orle∣ans, made way for Henry the fift to passe into France: Likewise our English Barons, being likely to have beene vanquish'd by King Iohn, sent for Prince Lewis into En∣gland to assist them.

Thirdly, when a Kingdome is over-burthened by a forraine foe, whom he is nei∣ther able to repell nor resist; he is constrained to make use of a forraine friend; in this ease as one wisely saith, plus a medico est, quam a morbo mali.

CHAP. CXXXII.

A policie to preserve Townes from revolting with a covert-way to banish such men as are held in suspition.

IT was Maxime of State amonst the Romans not to suffer great men in authoritie, whose birth was from great and noble Families, because their revolt might indanger a Country: or if a Generall were a Conqueror in a strange Land; and yet having some few Townes standing in great suspition of revolt, and divers men of note in them not to be trusted, whereby a conquest is unperfect; it is his best policie to command them to beate downe the walles of their Townes, and banish some of their Citizens whom most doubt is to be made of; and this must be so carried that no Towne so commanded might thinke that this charge concernes any other then themselves particularly: in practising whereof, the command must be given to all the Townes at one instant, to the intent they might all immediately obey; and have no respit to consult one with the other; and as for those that are held in suspition for revolting, the fairest way is to give them some commission to negotiate certaine affaires a-far off in such a place that they can worke to means of mischiefe: this will stand in stead of a covert banishment.

CHAP. CXXXIII.

A politique way to prevent an Enemie from stopping the march of part of an Armie.

IF a Generall should be constrained to send part of his Forces upon some speciall and speedy Service, he ought not to diminish the Huttes, not les∣sen the bounds of his Camp; only for his securitie fortifie strongly with∣in the old workes, because those forces left are too weake to maintaine the old: the same fires are likewise to be kept and the same guards through∣out the Campe that was before; by which meanes an Enemy cannot take notice nor advantage either to prevent the passage of those troopes march'd away, or to adven∣ture to assault the Campe: Claudius Nero put this in practice. Likewise if new for∣ces should come to assist an Army, the way to prevent an Enemie from knowing it, is, neither to inlarge the guards nor the workes about the Campe; this policie is to be performed when it is knowne the Enemie hath a purpose to assault your tren∣ches because of the weaknesse of your forces. The keeping of designes secret hath al∣wayes beene most prevalent; this made Metellus say (being with his Army in His∣pania) to one which asked him what he would do the next day, made answer, that if his shirt knew thereof he would burne it.

CHAP. CXXXIV.

A politique way for an Armie that is fallen into danger to escape it, by securing the one halfe by the hazarding the other.

IF an Army bee in distresse; either being beleaguered or coopt up in some place of disadvantage; then the Generall is of two evils to make choyce of the least: wherefore if his troopes bee farre inferiour to the Enemies, his best policie is to divide his troopes, and with one part of them assault the Enemie, who being busie in making resistance, the other part may escape safe: this is onely to be practised when no other Project can helpe, so that iminent ruine is like to ensue unlesse such a course be taken; otherwise, it were better to imitate Haniball, who caused a strange Accident to hap∣pen that did dismay and distract his Enemy; hee being disclosed by Fabius Maxi∣mus, tooke the opportunitie of the night season to tie drie Kisks and Bavins betweene the hornes of many Oxen, which being fired, drove them with such fury that Fabius being astonished at the strangenesse of the same sight, suffered him to passe without opposition.

CHAP. CXXXV.

A Policie whereby Scanderbeg in a Battell against the great Turke over∣threw his troopes of horses.

SCanderbeg in a Battell against the great Turke, being over-matched both with Horse and Foot; caused those few troopes of Horse which he had, to bee lined with certaine Foote, who being charged by the Turke, those Foote with a mighty shout brake out upon the Ene∣mies troopes of Horse with such fury, that they not onely rescued their owne, but also brake and chased the Enemies Cavallry, and contrary to all expectation won the Field.

CHAP. CXXXVI.

A Policie which the Duke De Alva used to fortifie his Army against the Prince of Orange his Horse.

THe Duke of Alva, in the late Flemish Warres against the Prince of Orange, most pollitiquely fortified himselfe, with his Carts, and Carriages chay∣ned together, casting up a small Trench of Earth beyond them, did safe∣guard his Army being all Foot, against the Prince of Orange, who sud∣dainly invaded him with a great power of Horse, whereby he was never able to give him Battell; and in the conclusion, for want of Forrage and Victuals hee was dri∣ven to retire.

CHAP. CXXXVII.

A Policie to prevent rebellion of such in high authority as are discontented, or of a proud and haughty Spirit.

MAny times Treacheries and deceits are practised against Generalls; and happily by their owne disdainefull proud carriages to their inferiours. For prevention thereof, it is best to immitate Lewis the eleventh, King of France; who propounded to himselfe divers wayes to winde out of such troubles▪ and to gaine the love and applause of his people; wherefore he studyed to carry him∣selfe very loving and affable, ready to heare complaints, and to redresse them without delayes: If he feared the fidelity of any one, he would insinuate into him with milde and faire speeches, free to them in gifts according to their de∣grees, alwayes holding them in hopes of preferment and honour, and freely tendring it, as occasion offered: He was loving to men of meane estate, especially where any worth was cressant, if by any mistake he had offered any injury he would in a fair way shew himselfe greeved, and seeke to recover the parties love by large benefits.

CHAP. CXXXVIII.

How a Generall ought to demeane himselfe politiquely, both in giving of Battell, and in refusing it.

IF a Generall understand that his Enemy have new ayde and supply of men a comming unto him, then ought he to seeke by all meanes to give him Battell, before both his powers joyne; or if his Victuals or Pay begin to faile, then a Generall should never refuse Battell if any opportunity be offered.

Likewise, on the contrary, if a Generall expects a supply, or if he understands his Enemies Victuals, or moneys faile, or that sicknesse increaseth a∣mongst them, then it behoveth him in policie to stand strongly upon his guard, and by no meanes joyne Battell, so long as he can conveniently avoyd it; As the French did lately at the Isle of Ree, onely dogging our English at the heeles, and delaying to fight, untill they saw a confusion in the Army by imbarking their men. The like also in the Flemish Warres 1578, betweene the Estates and Do•• John de Austria▪ who un∣derstanding of the comming of Duke Cassimere, with 5000 Horse and 6000 Foot, offered the Army of the States Battell at Rymenant where they lay incamped and ex∣pected Duke Cassimers comming; but Count Bossute then Generall of the States Ar∣mie, being of sufficient strength to have fought with him would not, but gave com∣mand that none of his Troopes should salley forth their Trenches, but onely some Squadrons to guard Passages; so that Don John finding himselfe and his expectations deceived, and that he could not traine them forth to Battell, was driven to march a∣way; and this temperance in the Count Bossute, was no lesse Souldier-like, than the couragious attempt of Don John to seeke Battell, both being done with reason.

CHAP. CXXXIX.

A Politique observation of a Generall, how he should intreat about a Peace.

WHen an Army of one side is driven to a streight, so that conditions of Peace are to be intreated of, a Generall must be curious, and circumspect in making choise of discreet, wise, able men which understand themselves, and the weightie service they are imployed in, lest they should conclude some dishonourable Treaty, or put the Generall in feare of their truth and fide∣litie.

CHAP. CXL.

A Policie to prevent the Assistance of a Forraigne frieud.

LEwis King of France being distasted against the Duke of Normandy and Brittaine, drawes his Army into the Dukes Territories, the Duke understanding his procee∣dings, obtaines assistance from the Duke of Burgundie; the King presently conceived this policie in his head, to indite a Letter as if it had come from the Duke of Nor∣mandy, and sends it by a Herald to the Duke of Bur∣gundy, the Contents thereof were, that whereas the King of France had offered him an Annuall summe of money, to the value of 60000 Franks, which he had accepted, and considering divers circumstances, and desiring not to hazard the event, he had according to the Kings propositions surrendred to him the Dukedome of Normandie, and the assessation of Armes was concluded upon; The Duke of Bur∣gundy being sensible of this, and of the danger that might accrue to himselfe by their falling off, yet hee was jealous that those Letters were counterfeited▪ un∣till certaine other Letters were likewise invented, as sent from other Friends to cer∣tifie him the truth, which did confirme the former: by this devise the King caused the Dukes Army to be disolved; and according to his wished desires obtained a firme League.

CHAP. CXLI.

How to gaine fortunate successe to an Army.

THe best meanes a Generall can use to bring fortunate suc∣cesse to an Army; is to get true and frequent Intelli∣gence from the Enemy; which must be obtained from them, by a trusty and secret Friend there resident, or by some plaine wise Country man that vents victualls to an Army, or by the Drummes that are sent for Prisoners; or by some Prisoners taken: Likewise, some have used to send Ambassadours; and with them in Servants ap∣parell, most expert men in Warre; who having taken occasion to view the strength of the Enemies workes; and of his Forces, have by this meanes taken a sufficient opportunity to overcome them.

CHAP. CXLII.

A Policie used by Mar••i••••, to try the fidelity of the French, which inhabited Lombardy.

MArri••s in the Warres managed against the Cimbrie, made use of a poli∣cie to try the fidelity of the French, which inhabited Lombardy; hee sent them certaine Letters open, and sealed, and in the open hee wrote, that they should not open the Letters sealed untill a certaine time prefixed; But before that time, hee demanded of them to see those Letters againe, wherehee found them opened, by this hee knew their faith was not to bee tru∣sted.

CHAP. CXLIII.

A Policie to compell an Enemy out of a Land without hazarding an Army in Battell with them.

A Kingdome being invaded by an Enemy, if the Townes thereof be of any sufficient strength and ability, to withstand the brunt of Warre, the best way is not for an Army to goe meet them, and give them Battell, but for to enter the Enemies Dominions, ransacking, pillaging, and spoyling it, whereby hee must be con∣strained to returne for to defend the safety of his owne Coun∣trey; this project hath taken many times good effect, for that those Souldiers beginning to fill themselves with bootyes and confidence to overcome, shall soone make the Enemies Souldiers to be afraid, when they supposing themselves Conquerours shall understand to become losers.

CHAP. CXLIIII.

How a Generall should use policie in letting an Enemie to passe without fight.

IT is a thing most dangerous to stay an Enemy, if be have an intent to flee, either by cutting off his passages, or by cooping him up, for every Coward will fight, when they are bereft of all hopes of safety; as by the example of our Blacke Prince in France, who with a handfull of Men overthrew a mighty Army; But a wise Generall should rather make the Enemy a Bridge of gold to passe over, then to indeavour to stay him; Themistocles would not suffer the Grecians to breake downe the Bridge made over the Hellespont by Xerxes lest the Persians should have beene compelled to fight; Charles the sixth of France lost his Army by intercepting Henry the fifth of England in his March to Callice.

CHAP. CXLV.

A Policie to make Souldiers fight in a pitch•• Battell, and to prevent their running away.

CHarles Martill in a wonderfull fight with the Sara••e••s, placed in the Reare of his Army certaine troopes of his Horse, commanding to kill all such as offered to flie, hereby to informe his Souldiers that there was no safetie, but what they purchased by valour; Likewise William Duke of Normandy, after the landing of his men upon our English Confines, caused all his Vessels to be burned, that no releefe might be expected, which bred a resolution in his Souldiers to gaine a Conquest; Aso Caesar did the like at his first ap∣proach against England, that his Souldiers should not expect any safety by flight, but to purchase their freedomes by the dint of the Sword.

CHAP. CXLVI.

A Policie of a Genoys, used to the Negotiator, of Lodwick Sforza to cause him to know the nature of oppression.

LOdwick Sforza having trenched too farre upon the patience of the people of Genoa; His Negotiator that collected his Masses of mo∣ney was by a Genoys invited to dinner, and walking in his Garden, hee shewed the Ambassadour the hearbe Basill, he gently stroking it smelt it very sweet, but squizing it hard as unsavoury a smell; where∣on this Genoys inferred; if our Lord duke Lodwick will gently stroke the hand of his puisance over this City, it will afford him a sweet savour of obedience, but if hee oppresse it, it may chance to prove as unsavoury by rebellion.

CHAP. CXLVII.

A Policie to bee used by a Generall to incourage Souldiers to worke in time of necessitie.

WHen the Capitoll of Rome was last built, the Emperour Vespatian carried the first Basket of earth to the making of the Walls; after him his No∣bilitie did the like; this did wonderfully incourage the people to be more forward in that service, and that made them undergoe the taske without grumbling.

CHAP. CXLVIII.

A Politique way for a Generall to gaine a difficult passage with his Army.

FErand King of Naples understanding that Charles King of France ap∣proached neere his Territories; hee to prevent his approaches; and to make his safest and strongest resistance, drew his Army to a certaine straight, not farre from Naples, having Hills, and unpassable places on each side; the French perceiving their defence was not to bee repelled, divided his Army by night, and sent halfe of them farre about to come by stealth upon the Reare of the Neapolitans, they holding themselves secure in regard the French had intrencht themselves before their Campe; and thus holding them in suspence untill the other part of their Army were arrived at the place hee desired; they suddenly (taking the opportunitie to assault on both sides) routed the Nea∣politans, and in defeating their Army tooke their whole Countrey.

CHAP. CXLIX.

A policie to be used by a Generall, to further the assault made against a Towne.

THe Prince of Orange drawing his Army before Gertrudenberge, they lay intrencht upon land, and strong by Shipping upon the water; by chance taking of a Prisoner belonging to the Enemie, they understood by him that the States and Gouernour of the Towne once aday went privately up the Steeple to view the Hollanders Trenches, if that any advantage might bee gained by Sallyes or otherwise; The Prince immediatly contrivrs with a Gentleman to runne to the Enemy, under a pretence hee had killed a man, and that hee fled for the safety of his life, who by a private signe, playing upon a Pipe, disco∣vered their being upon the Steeple; The Hollanders Ordnance being ready planted upon a Battery, they made a shotte at the Steeple, and beate it quite downe, killing the Governour with the rest, then presently assaulting the Towne, tooke it.

CHAP. CL.

A politique Stratagem used by the Hollanders to take in the Towne of Breda, by cutting off their Guards,

BReda a strong towne in Brabant, was once by the Hollander surprized, by a Stratagem of a Boate laden with Turffe, in whose Keele was im∣barqued very closely divers valiant Gentlemen; the Boate being brought before the Towne according to its usuall wont, and the Boates-man well knowne of the Souldiers, was suffered to come upon the Guard, where hee usually made them sport and bestowed drinke upon them, un∣till hee had made drunke both Corporall and Sentinell, and the rest of the Guard; then seeing his fit time, he conveyes these Gentlemen into the Towne, who killed the Sentinels, and cut off the Guards; and having first obtained the Watchword, they gave a privy signe by casting up a ball of Wilde-fire, whereby certaine forres of the Estates lying in Ambush not farre off, made their speedy approaches, and blow∣ing open the Ports entred the Towne, and tooke possession of the Ordnance, before any allarme was given; Likewise by Carts laded with Corne, and Hay, having Soul∣diers layed in a hollow place the like projects have beene done; For prevention of these things they are gaged with Iron spits made for that purpose, before they are suffered to enter the Ports, fearing lest treachery should be in them.

CHAP. CLI.

A Policy which the Citie of Cassiline used, to make Haniball raise his Siege.

THe City of Cassiline being besieged by Hamball, after they indured a long Siege and hard brunt; they tooke occasion to plow up all their waste grounds within the walls, and to digge for Corne and rootes; Haniball perceiving they were sowing their seedes, was verily per∣swaded, they had sustenance sufficient to last them untill their seedes came to maturity, which made him presently raise his Siege, when indeed they could not have held the Towne one weeke longer for famishing.

CHAP. CLII.

Caesars Policie in letting the Dutch men flee that he might van∣quish them.

CAEsar having coopt up the Dutchmen, that they could not flee, he thought better to open them a way to runne, than to hazard the fight; by which he overthrew them in their disorderly flight.

CHAP. CLIII.

How by a Stratagem the Guard of the Skonse at Zutphen was cut off; and the Skonse taken, and immediately after the Towne.

AT Zutphen in Gelderland, the Enemy had raised a strong Skonse by the River Issell, which they potently managed, in regard it did command the Towne; whereby the States of Holland were not able to besiege the Towne, without that Skonce was first taken: wherefore they procured a dozen English and Flemish yong Fe∣minine faced Gentlemen; who were apparelled in Country Maides clothing, some having Butter, others Poultry, and the rest Egges, which they brought by the Skonce feigning to sell it; the souldiers begun to cheapen their commodities, at length grew to toy with them, and finding them somewhat tractable, they pulled them into the Fort; every Souldier being busie in drinking, and some courting of these supposed Maides, they tooke opportunity with a short skeane which hung by the inside of their Coates, every maid to stab the Souldier that was next her, whereby they cut off the whole guard, then by a private signe certaine troopes of the Estates (which lay close by in ambush to attend the designe) came and maintained the worke; by which meanes in few dayes they got the Towne of Zupthen also.

CHAP. CLIV.

A Policie used by the Romanes to relieve such Townes as had rivers running by or thorow them.

THe Romanes used to relieve their besieged Townes when any River came thorow it, or neere unto it, by putting Corne and Munition in small Barrels, which were so evenly ballanc'd that they might onely swim, and bee kept from sinking; these were conveyed downe the streame in a darke night, so as the Enemy could not discover them; also dryed Nuts they threw downe the streame which the Souldiers (knowing the time of their comming downe) fisht out of the water, and relieved their necessities; when the Enemy hath admired how the Garrison should possibly have beene re∣lieved.

CHAP. CLV.

How the Governour of Bergen-up-zone had like to have rowted Spinola's Army at his first besieging it.

WHen Marquesse Spinola drew his Army before Bergen-up-zone, the Governour invented a Politique Stratagem to have discomfited his Army as they stood in Battalia, before they had intrencht them∣selves; first, he caused all his best Troopes to be in a readinesse to salley out, likewise all his Horse-troopes were to assist them. He also provided all the Bedees and Iades, and all kinde of Horses of no Service, that he could possibly get, and having furnisht them with old Furniture and Pistols and Carbines fashioned of Wood; these were to come softly on the Reare of the Enemy, and the Foot and the other Horse were to charge them in the Front, to the in∣tent the Enemy seeing such a great and unexpected strength of Horse, might be dis∣mayed; which thing indeed had taken effect, had those supposed Harquebusiers come up as they were commanded, but they fetcht so great a compasse about, that they came too late, for the Enemy had beaten backe the other Troopes to the Ports (before they came in view) and had spent all their Ammnnition; for no sooner did the Enemy perceive those false Troopes, but they disorderly retreated into those Trenches they had then made, and had the States souldiers then had pow∣der and shot to have pursued a Charge in their disorder, they had questionlesse row∣ted them.

CHAP. CLVI.

A Policie used by Mennon of Rhodes, to draw his Enemy out of his Trenches to give him Battell.

MEnnon of Rhodes finding no possible meanes to draw his Enemy out of his Trenches (wherein he lay strongly incamp'd) to give him Battell on the Plaines; sent unto his Enemies Campe one of his Houshold servants, under the Colour of a Fugitive, who gave them to understand, that the Souldiers of the said Mennon were in a mutinie, and together by the eares, and for that cause the greatest part of the Army went away at that instant; and to the intent the greater credit might be given to his words, there were sent away certaine Bands whom they saw to depart from the Campe, and so under∣stood there was a great tumult, and being further opportun'd by the said Fugitive to take this advantage, they might easily in the time of this disorder ruine Mennons Campe; to this the Enemy condiscended, and straightwayes fallyed out of their strong Trenches, to assaile those, who (by this Project) overthrew them for their too much credulity.

CHAP. CLVII.

How Marcellus by a Politique Stratagem, cut off Hanibals Forces, which came to assault the Towne of Nola.

ONe Bantius a Commander in the Siege of Cane, being fore wounded by Haniball, and by him also taken Prisoner, he used him very nobly with guifts and faire promises, suffering him to passe quietly to the besieged Towne of Nola, thinking to have made use of him in betraying the Towne to Haniball; but Marcellus being Generall of the Forces in the Towne, perceived by the strange carriage of Bantius, that Haniball had infected him, where∣upon

Marcellus closed with him by faire speeches, with great guifts, and mightie protestations of preferments and honours, whereby he wonne his love, and disco∣vered unto him, that Haniball intended to scale the Walles at such a time, which ac∣cordingly he did; but Marcellus having made ready for resistance, had prepared cer∣taine Troopes in a readinesse to salley out of the Towne to take the advantage of the Enemies disorders, who falling upon them in severall places unexpectedly, van∣quish'd them: Thus by making use of a Traytour, a Victory was obtained.

CHAP. CLVIII.

A Policie which Scipio used, to weaken and dishearten the Army of Asdruball, before he would give him Battell, whereby he gained the Victorie.

SCipio being Encamped in a Plaine against Asdruball, dayly they drew themselves into Battell, yet not attempting to charge eyther the other, wherupon they firmly cōcluded, that at what time soever they should fight, their Battels should be drawn in the same figure, as they before had practised; but Scipio being politique, victualled both his Horse and Men in the Night, and drawing out certaine of his men by peepe of day, to give an Alarme to Asdrubals Campe, to cause him to draw his Army out of the Trenches, and to expect a present fight; Scipio now presently altered his forme of imbattelling, and being drawne out of his Trenches earlier than formerly he was wont, yet he protracted the execution of Bat∣tell, onely using light skirmishes, to keepe them from feeding either man or beast, untill at length he thought they would be ready to faint for lacke of rest and food; about noone he advanced his Wings forward a good pace, leaving his maine Battell a good space behinde, marching leisurely after, also he drew out a Division, which wheeled about and charged Asdrubals Wings in the Flanke, and his owne Wings being in the Front, whereby the Enemy was overcharged; yet Asdrubals Battell durst not stirre to assist, fearing Scipio's Battell, and had they march'd forwards to have charged Scipio's Battell, they had beene inclosed, and so charged on every side: By this Stratagem Scipio got the victorie.

CHAP. CLIX.

A Politique Stratagem which Titus Didus made use of, to prevent his Enemie from Encountring with his fresh Supplies, that were com∣ming to assist him.

TItus Didus having divers Forces marching towards his Campe to strengthen his Army, whereof his Enemy being informed, pre∣pared to encounter them upon the way, and to cut them off; whereupon Titus Didus having certaine Prisoners of the Enemy, he gave out in their presence, that every man should be in a readi∣nesse to give Battell the next morning to the Enemy; and with∣all, tooke an occasion to let the Prisoners goe to their quarters, who declared that Didus had given order for a Battell the next morne, where∣upon the Enemy was afraid to diminish their forces, and durst not goe to encoun∣ter the Souldiers of Titus; by this policie they arrived at his Campe in safetie, which otherwise could not possibly have beene without the losse of most of them.

CHAP. CLX.

A policie of Haniball, to bring the Romans into jealousie of their Generall Fabius Maximus, that thereby he might worke his owne ends.

HAniball having Pillaged and burned all the Fields about Rome, he on∣ly caused to bee reserved safe the fields and goods of Fabius Maxi∣mus, to cause a jealousie to arise, that there was some frienship be∣twixt the Enemy and him, by this meanes Fabius was not be trusted. Also, Metellus to having an Army against Iugurth, all the Ambassadours that Iugurth sent him, were required by Metellus give unto him their Generall prisoner, and after to the very same men hee wrote Letters to the same effect, which wrought them such discredit, that in short time Iugurth had all his Councellours in suspition, and put them to death. The like was practised by the Ro∣mans upon Haniball when he fled to Antiochus, their Orators wrote to him so fre∣quently and familiarly, that Antiochus suspected him, and would not put confidence in his Councells.

CHAP. CLXI.

A Politique Stratagem whereby an Army hath beene disheartened in time of Battell, which hath caused their overthrow.

AT Muscleborough-field there was a policie used, to cause a rumour to bee spread in the Enemyes Battell, that their Generall was slaine, and some part of the Troopes defeated and put to flight; at this the Enemy was so amazed in the middest of their fight, that they gave way, and brake their Rankes. Titus Quintus did practice the like, but this must be acted in that part of the Army where the Generall is not to bee seene.

CHAP. CLXII.

A Politique Stratagem used by Labienus in France, whereby hee vanquished his Enemies Army marching over a River.

LAbienus in France, seeing his Enemy desirous to passe a River to present him Battell, he counterfeited that he feared their pote••••cy, and feigned to March away, yet leaving secret Ambushes, which gave Labienus intelli∣gence, that a good part of the Enemies Army was past over the River; hee suddenly returned, and defeated them before the residue could get over to their rescue.

CHAP. CLXIII.

A Policie whereby an Army may passe over a River in safety, when the Enemy attends the advantage to ruine them.

QVintus Lutatius in his Warres against Cimbry, was close pursued, even to the side of a River, where either hee must passe, or receive Battell, wherefore hee setled his Army downe by the Rivers side and intrencht himselfe, setting up some Tents, and sending abroad for fortage, as though hee meant indeed to stay by it; The Enemy beleeving the same, did in like manner

incampe his Army, and sent out his Souldiers likewise for Provision; Lutatius ma∣king use of the Cimbryes negligence, the night insuing, suddenly passed the River with his Army before the Enemy could dis••odge, and drew his men in order to give them Battell.

CHAP. CLXIIII.

An excellent Policie for a Generall to put off a people that hee is in league withall, and desires his assistance.

THe Athenians and Lacedemonians desired assistance of Gelon the Son of Dinomenes, he being Generall over the Siracusians against Xerxes, who had past the Hellespont with his mighty Army; unto which Gelon consented, and under a colour of his willingnesse levied thirty thousand Souldiers, and two hundred Shippes to doe them service, conditionally that they should make him Generall of one of their Armies, ei∣ther by Sea or Land, which they refused to doe; But afterwards upon better consi∣deration they yeelded to his proposition, and to that purpose sent their Ambassa∣dours, to whom he returned this answer, That May was past, and the Spring wi∣thered.

CHAP. CLXV.

The policie of Vigetius to convey Foot-troopes over a River that is passable, so that the streame shall not offend them.

VIgetius hath a rule in passing a River that is wadeable, if the streame bee violent and swift, to cause certaine Horse-men to crosse the River in two places, leaving a Lane betweene them for the Souldiers to passe; the one ranke of Horse are to breake the strength of the water, and the other Ranke below are to sustaine the Souldiers.

CHAP. CLXVI.

How by a Politique device, the Hollanders obtained a convenient peece of ground from their Enemy, upon which they built the Skonce called Skinkes, which could not bee gained by force of Armes.

TH•• Hollanders having sound a certaine peece of ground very con∣venient, to raise a Fort in it, which might be made impregnable: it being a point of ground lying betweene two mighty Rivers, the Wale and the Leck; they knowing not how to obtaine it, in regard divers of the Enemies strong holds bordered upon it, which would have beaten them off, had they presumed to have entred it; and besides, they were loth the Enemy should take no∣tice that the place was so convenient for that purpose, as they knew it to bee, for it cut off all releefe by water, that all the adjacent Townes were accommodated with, wherefore they plotted with a Countrey fellow named Skincke, to hire that peece of land to feed Colts in it▪ and for to keepe them from straying out hee was to raise a Wall with a great Ditch from one River to another, which was about 400 Rodde▪ this being finisht, the Hollanders came sayling up the River by night with certaine Troopes, which they landed there, and by the strength of that Ditch and Rampart, they beate off the Enemy; (for they had no other passage but thereby) untill they had built the Skonce, which is now called by the name Skinkes Skonce, so samous for the late Siege.

CHAP. CLXVII.

Hanibals politique Observations, in placing his Battels upon advantages.

HAniball against the Romans in the battell of Cannas had gotten the ad∣vantage from the Enemy both of Sunne and wind, and had imbattelled his Army upon the higher ground: these three things are to be princi∣pally considered as coadjutors in a victorious Skirmish: the like did M••••∣rius against the Cimbrians; by which he obtained an honourable Conquest.

CHAP. CLXVIII.

A Policie used by Pyrrhus, whereby he deluded the Lacedemonians, that his designe for the conquest of the Towne of Sparta might take effect.

THe mighty generall Pyrrhus having secretly levied an Army, and had gi∣ven out that his designe was against Antigonus; he having conquered al∣most all the Countrey of Macedon by a fortunate Battell not long before; whereupon they began to suspect their Towne of Sparta: But Pirrhus in policie caused them to understand, that he honoured the Towne so much for the no∣ble discipline and good learning, that he intended to send his two Sonnes thither to be educated, thus deluding them by this colourable way, hee sodainly tooke his op∣portunitie to enter with his Army upon Laconia; where he presently demean'd him∣selfe an open Enemy, conquering at his pleasure.

CHAP. CLXIX.

How Demetrius by a politique Stratagem, overthrew the Army of Ptolomy; which not long before had vanquishd him.

CIlles, Lievtenant Generall to King Ptolomie, was sent with an Army a∣gainst Demetrius Sonne to Antigonus, who not long before was over∣throwne in Battell by Ptolomie: Cilles rather thinking to find Deme∣trius fleeing, then to hazard another Battell, marched very indiscreetly and without all order, as not fearing any to oppose him: Demetrius un∣derstanding the order of his Troopes, drew out certaine of his light armed men, and marchd a whole night to meet him in his Campe, where he found his Troopes lying confusedly and scattering; not having any Guards or resistance placed to secure the Army▪ whereupon he tooke his opportunity to fall into his Campe, where he routed and put to flight Cilles Souldiers; and tooke him likewise prisoner, and overthrew his whole Army.

CHAP. CLXX.

A politique way to weaken an Enemies Armie.

THe ancient Worthies in Policy would oftentimes suffer an Enemy to take certaine of their meanest Townes: to the intent that the Ene∣mie should (by degrees) more and more weaken his Army, by put∣ting into them strong Garrisons: when afterwards (assaulting the much impaired residue of the Army) have by this politique way at the length, made meanes to overcome the adverse Partie.

CHAP. CLXXI.

A politique Stratagem used by Fulvius, whereby he cut off the sallyes of the Cimbrians.

FVlvius used this Policie against the Cimbrians, caused his Horsemen to assault their Campe divers times: the Cimbrians sallying out, repeld them; wherfore he set an ambush behind the Camp of the Cimbrians, and causing their Campe to be againe assaulted by his Horse, they issuing out of their Campe, as formerly they had done to close them; Fulvius his Soldiers lying in ambush got betweene them and home, whereby they entred the Fort and sak'd it.

CHAP. CLXXII.

A Policie whereby Alexander deceived the Illyrians, by counterfeiting the Enemies Colours, did overthrow them.

IF an Army lies neere encamp'd to the Enemies; it is great policie for the Generall to send part of his men with the Enemies Coulours a pillaging, and to burne the Countrey; whereby the Enemy may think they are men come to ayd them, as Alexander did against the Illyrians; and Le••tenus against the Carthagenians; Alexanders Souldiers having counterfeited the Illyrians Colours, and burning his owne Countrey, made them faithfully beleeve that they were certaine of their own Forces, sent to assist them: whereupon divers of the Enemies Souldiers did run to meet them disorderly: Alexanders men taking this opportunity, fell upon the disordred troupes, and overthrew them.

CHAP. CLXXIII.

A Policie used by Tamirus and Tiberius Gracchus, whereby they overthrew their Enemies whole Armie at once, without losse or hazard to themselves.

TAmirus in his warres against Cyrus and Tiberius Gracchus against the Spaniards, faigning themselves to be afeard of the Enemy, having sodainly abandoned their Campes, and left them furnished with store of Wines and good cheere; to the intent their Enemies might take their fills and wallow in their pleasures: then sodainly they have returned with their Armies, and assaulting them have found them like sots not fit to make a resistance, whereby they have beene all destroyed: Some have practised to poyson their wines and Beere, with their victuals, by which their Enemies have dyed like Rats.

CHAP. CLXXIV.

A politique Stratagem used by Eumenes, to cause his Soldiers to follow him upon a dan∣gerous attempt; and how he stopt Antigonus proceedings, and overcame him.

EVmenes, perceiving that his Souldiers were much daunted at the sodaine newes of Antigonus his approach to assault his Campe; and fearing the fidelitie of his Souldiers, he being but newly chosen their Vindex, thought it more safe to make use of some politique way to prevent Antigonus his comming; wherefore he used good and beseeming speeches to his Souldiers, desi∣ring them to prepare immediately to follow him; for his owne part be would un∣dertake to stay Antigenus in his march: whereupon hee hasted with certaine of his Friends to the top of divers hilles making sundry great fires, that were seene into Antigonus his Campe; who thinking that a very great Army was there in a readines, and fearing his designe was discovered, caused him to make a pause, and to bethinke himselfe of his owne safety. Eumenes Souldiers seeing this take good effect, came all flocking unto him, and there strongly fortified themselves; so that Antigonus could not force him from his workes: But Eumenes having laid an ambush of Horse at the foote of the hill, charged Antigonus his Forces in the Reare as they came to assault the Campe, and overthrew them.

CHAP. CLXXV.

A Policie to gaine a Towne whose fidelitie is doubtfull.

POmpey perceiving the Cattenensians were falling off from him, and tha•• if he should offer to stirre, they would stand upon their owne defence; he in policie sent unto them to desire them they would be content to re∣ceive certaine sicke men of his, to which they condescended; but Pom∣pey under the habite of sicke persons, sent most able valiant men, who taking a fit opportunity, let Pompeyes Army into the Towne.

CHAP. CLXXVI.

A Policie used by Alexander Magnus to secure Thracia, (which he had newly conque∣red) from Rebellion.

ALexander Magnus, desiring to assure himselfe of the Countrey of Thra∣cia, in regard he was to make warres in Asia, he thought it best to take with him all the principall men of Thrace, and he set over the common people men of meane birth, and low degree, to governe them untill his returne; so giving those Princes (he took with him) places of great command in his Army, with extraordinary pay, he held them secure and quiet; which had they beene left behinde, they would soone have rebelled: The like course did Philip King of Spaine use to be secured of Eng∣land when he went to Saint Quinti••s.

CHAP. CLXXVII.

A Policie to beguile an Enemie from opposing an Army that would march over a River.

IF an Army be opposed by the Enemy, from passing over a River (without great disadvantage unto him) after a few dayes march by the Rivers side, if the Enemy followes on the other side to hinder them, then the best way is to draw out of every Company certaine Souldiers, who must secretly be conveyed unto the next Wood, di∣recting them, that the next day after the Army is departed, they should come to the River and lay over their Bridges and strongly fortifie it; the Enemy seeing the full number of Troopes and Colours will not mistrust any thing, but will march on to prevent their going over as before they were accustomed, those in ambush seeing the Coast cleere, having finished their workes, the Army hath stolne backe againe, and marched over without danger or resistance.

CHAP. CLXXVIII.

A Politique Stratagem used by the Duke Bernhard of Saxon-Weymar, whereby he surprised the strong Towne of Manheim in the Pallatinate.

DVke Bernhard of Saxon-Weymar by a Stratagem surprized the Towne of Manheim, being the strongest in all the Pallatinate seated upon the River Rhine, where the River Nekar flowes into it, he marches to∣wards the Towne with five hundred men, ordering his men so, that he might reach the Towne the next Morne an houre or two before day; so soone as he approached, sent word to the Governour, that he was a Com∣mander

of a Towne of their side, and named his name accordingly; and that having beene out upon a Partee that night, was by the Enemy beaten in thither for his refuge, and that the Swedes were ready to fall upon the Reare of his Troopes; hee earnestly desired to be let in with all expedition: The Governor giving ••redence to his feigned tale, opened the Ports, and gave him free passage into the Towne, whereby he tooke occasion to cut off the Guards, and slew three hundred of the Garrison, and tooke Maravelli the Governour, and his Lieutenant Prisoners, and injoyed the Towne; which by force could not have beene taken without a long Siege.

CHAP. CLXXIX.

A Politique Stratagem used by Alexander, whereby he forced his Enemy from a Passage, which by strength he could not have ganed.

ALexander in the Warres against Darius was prevented by Bessius, who had gotten the advantage of a streight Passage over a high Rocke, which constrained Alexander to make use of a Stratagem; he having the opportunity of a mighty windy day, stackt upon a heape a huge pile or Wood and brush Fagots, and setting it on fire, the Winde car∣ried the Coles, Flame, and Smoke, so strongly in the face of the Ene∣my, that they were glad to quit the place; which otherwise would have beene im∣possible for his Army to have done, in regard of the disadvantage of the place.

CHAP. CLXXX.

How Scipio by his Justice and chaste carriage towards a faire Lady which he had taken Prisoner, wonne the hearts of his Enemies.

IVstice and Chastitie winnes the heart of an Enemy, more than any policie else that may be devised, as by the example of Scipio in Spaine; where he rendred a young Lady very beautifull to her Fa∣ther and Husband, without offering her any discourtesie; which made him winne more Cities and Townes in Spaine, than former∣ly he could doe with his potent Army. Likewise, Caesar in his Warres in France, caused the Timber and such necessaries to bee payed for, which he used to make the Lists about his Army, whereby he got such a name of Iustice, that the Conquest of that Province was obtained with ease.

CHAP. CLXXXI.

A Politique answer of Alexander the Great unto certaine malicious Enemies, and his wise devise to gaine their love.

ALexander the Great was solicited to take a strict revenge of Ar∣cadian and Nicanor, who had used evill speeches of Philip of Macedon, father in Law to Alexander, and that they conceived them for those affronts, to be highly worthy of death; to whom Alexander most politiquely and wisely answered, that first it was to be considered, whether the fault lay in them that used the abusive language, or in King Philip; Secondly, that it lyes in the power of every man to be well spoken of, if he will indeavour it: which indeed proved so, for after King Philip releeved their necessities, there were none in the Kingdome did him more honour and truer service than they did, in all the time of his Warres.

CHAP. CLXXXII.

A politique course used by Tamberlaine in his warres, whereby hee gained speedy Conquests.

TAmberlaine the Great, in all his Warres, used his Enemies to three Ban∣ners; the first day hee set up a white Flagge, signifying favour and mer∣cy, if they yeelded immediatly; The second day a Red Banner, beto∣kening bloud and losse of lives; The third day a blacke Banner, in to∣ken of the utter subversion of Cities or Townes, burning them to as••es; by this Policy hee made the world tremble, to withstand his first Summons, for hee never granted pardon after the first refusall, whereby hee conquered with small paines, or effu••ion of bloud.

CHAP. CLXXXIII.

A Policie used by King Edward the Fourth to suppresse his Rebels, which otherwise had hazarded the ruine of his Kingdome.

THe Earle of Warwicke by the instigations of the Duke of Clarence, (who was Brother to King Edward the Fourth of England) plotted a Rebel∣lion in the North. The King perceiving the eminent danger that hee was like to hazard, thought it great wisedome to grant his gracious Pardon to bee proclaimed unto all such as would lay downe their Armes and come in, whereupon the Rebells considering the present danger they were in, made the greatest part of them bethinke themselves, that the safest course was, to accept of this gracious offer, and not to runne a double hazard, whereupon they came in, and acknowledged their hainous offences, desiring to have his Maje∣sties favour renewed.

CHAP. CLXXXIIII.

A Politique devise used by William Rufus to get Moneyes.

KIng Williaw Rufus had long wars in France, which had much im∣poverished him, and being brought into a great straite for lacke of Moneys, he devised a Politique way to helpe himselfe by levying twenty thousand Souldiers (being men of good ranke and fashion) to be conducted into Normandy to ayde him against France, who being in their March towards the Coasts side, and ready to bee im∣barqued, it was signified unto them from the King, that as well for their particular safeties, as also for not disfurnishing the Realme of strength, who∣soever would pay ten shillings, towards the levying of Souldiers in Normandy, hee might be excused, and stay at home; the which favour they generally imbraced, and willingly paid every man his stipend, by this devise he gained 10000 pounds.

CHAP. CLXXXV.

A Politique course to keepe a new Conquered people from Innovations and Rebellions.

••Here a Conquest hath newly beene either in a Kingdome, City, or Towne, the best way to prevent the people from inventing Rebellions and Innovations, is to impoverish them, so as they shall have no leisure no•• meanes, to put any mischiefe in practise, for busying themselves in getting their livelyhood.

CHAP. CLXXXVI.

A politique way to stay Mutines in an Army, and to cut off the chiefe Author without running a hazard.

WHen Mutines are a broaching, a Generall must bee wise, and circumspect in applying himselfe to appeale them, and first to sever the Confederates, in dividing them, and breaking their Faction whereby to defeat it; for if the Authors of it bee of any great command, or men of qua∣lity; and that the originall proceeds from discontents, and that they have drawne a strong party to side with them, whereby the Lawes of the Field cannot take place without running a hazard to the whole Army; then the best way is to deale mildly with them, using faire tearmes and promises, willingly condescending to such requests as shall bee by them desired, dealing privately with some particular men▪ and sometimes with many together; and eft-soone filling them with promises and hopes, using pensive, yet vehement words, which may induce them to beleeve, that they proceed not from any dissem∣bling intents; and so by degrees prevaile to cut off the principall heads, and then the rest of the body will soone fall off of it selfe.

CHAP. CLXXXVII.

A Policy used by King William, to Malcolme King of Scotland, who had invaded this Land, thinking to gaine his peace, hee would have yeelded to any Conditions.

KIng William the Second, having weakened his Army, by his great Wars in France, Malcolme King of Scotland perceiving what broyles and Contentions this poore King was hemmed in withall, tooke his opportunity to make use of it, and with his Army invades Eng∣land, (considering the Premisses) he thought to bring King William to what tearmes of Peace he should desire, and that in regard of his great losses, hee would be very moderate in demanding any Articles from the King of Scotland; this Project being brought to the upshot, King William shewed him∣selfe more resolute then ever ••efore in his prosperity, affirming in high tearmes, that hee scorned to yeeld to any difficulties; Whereupon Malcolme conjecturing that such a high confidence could not bee without good grounds; he consented to any Condi∣tion that King William did desire.

CHAP. CLXXXVIII.

Politique Observations in a Confederate Warre.

THat Army which intends to invade an Enemy, the strength where∣of consists of divers Confederates▪ the Service which is to be ex∣pected, must be speedily done, for in a short time such an Army will fall into divers inconveniences; as either a dissipation and dissolvement, or else fall into a confusion, in regard of great difficulties that will arise, and Straites that they must bee exposed unto, especially being farre remote from succour and releefe, or hardly to be releeved; whereas the Enemy being in his owne Land, at hand may have speedy supplyes, both of Men and Amunition; as by the example of Robert Duke of Normandy, eldest Brother to King William, who with divers other Princes of Eu∣rope had surprized Ierusalem, and divers other Cities, yet soone ••ell at oddes, and were dissipated.

CHAP. CLXXXIX.

A policie used by the Governour of Croizon to make his cowardly Soldiers fight.

CRoyzon being besieged by Generall Norrice; the Governour of the Fort seeing his Souldiers faint in the defence thereof: wherfore (to prevent it) all that did play the Cowards, or that did speake of yeelding; hee caused to bee chained to a post set in some breach, with his weapons in his hand to defend himselfe and it. By this device the rest of their fel∣low Souldiers would rather venture their persons honourably, then to be compelled with a greater danger dishonourably.

CHAP. CXC.

A Policie used by Generals to beguile hunger in a straight besieged Towne.

THe People of Lydia were the first that invented Games, as Dice, Cardes, Chesse, and the like, necessity and hunger forcing them unto it; accor∣ding to that of Persius, Artis Magister ingenijque Largitor venter. For being sorely vext with famine in the time of Atis one of the Pro∣genitors of Omphale, they used every second day (by playing at these Games) to beguile their hungry bellies: thus for 22 yeares, they continued playing and eating by turnes.

CHAP. CXC.

A politique Stratagem practised by the Governour of Berghen, against the Prince of Parma's Forces, by which he destroyed divers of them, and preserved the Towne from surprizing.

THe Prince of Parma bringing a mighty Army before Berghen-op∣zome; the Governour made choyce of two English men, (who in former time had beene the Dukes prisoners) to steale to the Dukes Campe, to let him understand that the strength of the Towne was most English, and that for divers discontents they were ready to mutinie; and that (if it pleased him) hee could infect some chiefe Captaines that should command the principall Guards to give way for his entrance into the Towne; and (that the Governour should not mistrust any treachery) they would onely shoot pouder at them in their Ordnance and Musquets without Bullets; and that at such a night hee should not faile of his enterprise; and for the better assurance, one of those English-men was to be left in hostage to be slaine if they did not really effect it: whereupon the Prince gave them large gifts, with great promises of future preferment. The signe being given that the Duke should come with his Army, the English Hostage was bound hand and foot, and (for their better security) was carried in the Front of the Army; that if any treason should be, he might be the first should suffer: so (finding the Ports open, and the Pieces discharged onely with powder) made them come flocking upon the Bridge; but so soone as the formost was entred with the English Gentleman that was their Hostage; the Lord Willoughby let downe the Port-cullisses; and (being ready with the whole strength of the Towne) gave them such a Volley both of great and small Shot, that they slew and drowned many hundreds. This Project caused Parma to raise his Siege from before Berghen.

CHAP. CXCII.

A Politique Observation for a Generall, if he feares the strength of his Enemies Battell, to march from him by night.

OVr famous Generals used this Observation in their Warres: Si pauci neces∣sario cum multitudine pugnare cogantur, consilium est noctis tempore Bellifort••••••••tentare.

CHAP. CXCIII.

A Politique Stratagem whereby the King of Naples regained the possession of a City and Castle formerly lost to the King of France.

FErand King of Naples, having lost his Kingdome to the King of France, he understood the King of France had fought a great Battell with the Venetians and Milla••••ys at Fernon; conjectured with himselfe how by a wile to repossesse himselfe of the Castle in the City of Naples, to which end (having got some few Troopes in armes) march'd towards the Ci∣tie, and sent a Nuntio to the Governour, to let him understand, that their King was slaine, and the Army discomfited, and if they would yeild up the possession of the Castle, they should have good quarter, but if they did withstand this faire pro••••er, they should expect nothing but utter confusion; whereupon they being at a stand, and hearing of a truth that such a Battell was fought but no certaine newes of the event, made them give credit to the King of Naples his report, and fearing the worst, yeelded the City and Castle, which occasioned the losse of the Realme.

CHAP. CXCIV.

A Politike Stratagem used by Nauplius the Father of Palamedes, whereby he destroyed 200 of the Graecians ships, as they came for the Island of Euboea.

IN the Island of Euboea, Nauplius the Father of Palamedes understanding that his sonne was slaine by the hands of Paris, wherefore he conceived such displeasure against the whole Hoste of the Graecians, that hee in∣tended their generall destruction; to this end hee caused fires to bee made upon the top of the most dangerous and unaccessible Rockes in this whole Island, and had removed all the Booyes and Sea-markes in∣to dangerous shelves, the Greekes taking this (according to the custome of the times) to have beene the markes of some safe Haven made thitherwards, where they were miserably cast away, there perishing 200 ships, and many thousand men.

CHAP. CXCV.

An excell••nt policie used by Mahomet Bassa to conceale the death of Solimon one of the Ottoman Emperours from his Souldiers at the Siege of Sigeth in Hungary fearing lest they should mutinie.

SOlimon one of the Ottoman Emperours, dying at the Siege of Sigeth in Hun∣gary, which was cunningly concealed by Mahomet Bassa, the space of twenty dayes, before the Ianizaries knew of it; who when any did inquire for him, he would shew them divers times the Emperour ••itting in his Horse-litter, as being troubled with the Gout, causing his Physitians to go too and fro with their Phisicke as if they had him in cure; but after the Souldiers suspected ill dealing, they began to be mutinous, whereupon he promised they should see him the next day; wherefore they apparelled the Corpes in royall large Robes, and placed it in a Chaire at the end of a long Gallery, and a little Boy cunningly placed behinde

him, to move the Kings hand to his head, as if he should stroake his Beard, (as his manner it seemes was) which signe of life and strength, the souldiers seeing were contented; and so was his death concealed forty one dayes more, untill the Siege was ended and a new Emperour establisht.

CHAP. CXCVI.

A Politique Stratagem used by Simon Sonne of Miltiades being Captaine of the Athe∣nians, whereby he overthrew the Sea and Land-forces of the Persians in one day.

SImon the Sonne of Miltiades Captain Generall of the Athenians, overthrew the Sea and Land-forces of the Persians in one day, he tooke and sunke no fewer than forty ships, and three hundred Gallies, in the Sea fight; which ended, he furnished and mann'd the Persian ships with his owne best soul∣diers attyred in the Persians habilaments, and waving the colours of the Persians; upon their approach the Campe was opened, where every man prepared to welcome their victorious Countrey-men (as they thought.) But the Greekes no sooner entred, but suddenly put them all to the sword, and tooke twenty thousand of them Prisoners.

CHAP. CXCVII.

A Policie of the Duke of Burbon to cause his fleeing Souldiers to stand a charge.

AT the Battell of Agincourt, Lewis of Burbon having suffered a defeat in his left wing, weighing the dishonour, gathered some scattered troops of Horse that stood doubtfull of the event; proclaiming the English had the worst, and if they would shew their valours, he warranted them the victory; the French being then all ready to flee, he procures a Souldier to runne through the Army to crave supply, protesting the English were yeilding, for that King Henry the fifth had offered to yeeld his troops, and to flee for refuge. This device did wonderfully hearten the French to abide the other charge, who would otherwise before have fled.

CHAP. CXCVIII.

A Policie used by King Henry the fifth, being overcharged with Prisoners, if fresh Supplies should have assailed him.

AT the same Battell of Agincourt, after the French were fled, a world of Pri∣soners being taken in the pursuit; in the interim, certaine French fugi∣tives seised upon the Kings Te••ts, an Alarme being made by the Sutlers and those that guarded the Baggage; the King fearing fresh supplies pre∣sently commands every Souldier to kill his Prisoner, that they might make the safer resistance, and not be hindred by them, which in Skirmish might have done them treble damage.

CHAP. CXCIX.

A Stratagem whereby the Town of Fast-castle in Scotland was taken from the English.

IN Edward the sixths dayes, our English Generall having taken in divers Towne in Scotland, this Towne of Fast-castle being one, the Governour thereof com∣mands the neighbouring Hines to bring in their Contribution corne; the Enemy making use of this opportunity, sends divers souldiers habited like the Scottish Pea∣sants, with private Armes about them upon the day appointed, with sackes of Corne upon horse-backe; they being arrived at the Ports alighted, and every man

brought his sacke in upon his shoulder; no sooner were they entred, but they fell up∣on the Guard and cut them off, making them masters of the Ports, untill divers Troops that waited the opportunity, came and succoured them, and gained the Towne.

CHAP. CC.

Anotable Stratagem whereby the Island of Sarke was taken from the French, it being a place of it selfe impregnable.

SIR Walter Raleigh in his History of the World, relateth an excellent Stra∣tagem, which a Gentleman of the Netherlands made use of for the re∣gaining of the Island of Sarke which joynes to Gernesey, from the French, it being a place of it selfe impregnable, having sufficient to sustaine themselves there growing, and being every way inaccessible; This Gentleman anchored in the Road with one ship of small burthen, pretending the death of his Merchant, he besought the French to bury him in hallowed ground, offer∣ing them for a gratuity such things as they had aboord; the French condescended to their requests, upon condition they should come all disarmed; whereupon they brought their Coffin upon land, filled with all kinde of weapons and Ammunition; in the meane time, part of the French went to the ship to view their penniworths, where they were detained; the Coffin being brought into the Church, and the doores shut close, they armed themselves, and fell upon the Guard and slew them; By this device they obtained the Island, which otherwise had beene impossible to have been entred.

CHAP. CCI.

A Politique device used by Iugurth, to helpe his Armie in case it were overthrowne.

IVgurth being invaded by the Romans, deferred the fight in the day of Battell, untill a good part of the day was spent, knowing that if the Enemy did prevaile, yet the night comming on them, they should not be so able to pursue the victory, and that they being in their owne Country, and acquainted with all passages and places of strength, be∣ing protected by the darknesse of the night might the better escape, and make head againe upon the Romans; and contrariwise, if the in∣vaders should be broken, the night would be a meanes to cause their utter confusion, they not knowing how to finde any place of refuge, but must fall into the hands of the Natives. This device stood Jugurth in great stead.

CHAP. CCII.

A Politique Stratagem used by Count Pietro Navarese to beate his Enemies from a Breach, whereby he rowted their Campe.

COunt Pietro Navarese being besieged in a Towne where the Enemy had made a Breach in the Walles, for his safety to repell them he caused cer∣taine Counter-trenches, and secret Mines to be made, wherein he layed divers Firkings of Powder, and other murthering fire-balles; hee upon the assault given retyred himselfe, suffering the Enemy in great number to enter, onely maintaining the inward workes; seeing his opportunity, he gave fire to the Mines, and made a mighty slaughter of the Enemy, sallying out upon them in their disordered routes, put them to flight, and rai••ed their Siege. This was practised al∣so at Mastriche the last Siege but one.

CHAP. CCIII.

A Policie used by the Prince of Orange to drowne the Enemy out of his Trenches, and then to releeve the Towne by Boates.

THe Prince of Orange hath taken the opportunity to cut thorow certaine Bankes, letting in the Sea, which hath forced the Enemy to break up his Siege, and for his safety retyre to such Hills as were neere; and in the meane time he hath releeved the Towne by Boats, with Men and Munition, which otherwise must have yeelded to the Enemies mercy.

CHAP. CCIIII.

A Policie used by the Spaniards against the French, to prevent the power of their Horses against their Foote.

THe Spaniards in a Battell against the French at Lyrignola, finding themselves too weake in Horse-men, thought it wisedome for them to retire themselves for their better safety among the Vines, Groves, and such like uneven ground, whereby they prevented the execution of the Horse, which otherwise would have freedome; by this for the Foote in plaine grounds, where they might have used their beene too hard devise they got the better of the French; Some have made secret Trenches covering them with Hurdles and greene swardy Turfe.

CHAP. CCV.

A Politique Stratagem whereby the Lord Poynings gained a Castle at Samerduboys in France, there being no accesse to it with Ordaance.

THe Lord Poynings at Samerduboys in France, having summoned a Castle strongly Scituated upon a Hill environed with marish ground in such sort, that it was thought impossible for to bring the Cannon to batter it, and therefore the Captaine of the Castle re∣fused to yeeld untill hee saw the Cannon, wherefore the Lord Poynings caused secretly a Cannon to be made of wood artificially and coloured over, placing hurdles on the Marish with divers Horses to draw the Carriages, as though with great difficulty they had drawne a Cānon indeed, then threatning that if he caused him to shoot (according to the Law of Armes) they should all be put to the Sword; whereupon the Captaine abused by this policie, delivered up the Castle by Composition, which otherwise could not have beene gained; ever since no Fort is to yeeld upon Composition, unlesse the Cannon discharges twice or thrice.

CHAP. CCVI.

A Policie used by Monsieur Lautreck in the Warres at Naples, to make his Forraine assistance to fight.

MOnsieur Lautreck in the Warres at Naples, having his Army composed of sundry Nations, thought it wisedome to order every Nation separately into sundry Battalions, placing in the Front of the Battell those Forraine aydes, and in the time of fight hee caused it to be given out, that such a Nation had the Victory, whereby the rest inflamed did most valiantly fight, and by this devise was victorious, which otherwise happily would have left him in the suddes.

CHAP. CCVII.

How Scipio by his policie defeated the Carthaginians of their Designe.

SCipio drew his Army to Tunis, being within the prospect of Carthage, the Carthaginians made out a great Fleete to incounter with Scipio in the Haven; Scipio tooke his Shippes and Hulkes, and fastned them to∣gether with the tackling belonging to them, causing the Maste•• to serve for Rafters to fasten them together; whereupon hee placed his Soul∣diers to maintaine the Bridge: Hee left certaine places open▪ where small 〈◊〉〈◊〉 might swiftly sayle out and in, to fight at pleasure, by this device their enterprise was impeached.

CHAP. CCVIII.

A Politique Stratagem used by Philopoemen against Nabis, whereby hee cut off divers of his Souldiers, and after tooke his Campe, and by a second Stratagem destroyed all his men.

PHilopoemen Generall of the Athenian Army, being incountred with a mighty Army, under the conduct of Nabis, and fearing his owne strength, tooke the advantage of a Forde, where Nabis Forces were to March over, to make their approches against his Campe; Philopoemen layed privily an Ambush neere the water; who taking the advantage of their disordered passage, s••ue many of the Assaylants, and losing no opportunity, hee presently caused one of his Souldiers to runne to Nabis Campe (who lay strongly intrencht) as a Fugitive, and told him that the Athenians had a purpose to get be∣tweene him and Lacedemon, whereby they would hinder his Retreite into the City, and also that he had a sure plot to stirre up the Citizens to rebell, whereby they might regaine their freedome. Nabis beleeving this marched secretly away in the darke, only leaving a few Companies behind to shew themselves upon the Ramp••••s, ma∣king great lights in their quarters, the better to conceale his March; But Philopoemen assaulted the Campe, and chased Nabis into the Woods, where he expected the favour of the night; Philopoemen dreaming they would steale into Lacedemon in the darke, drew certaine of his fresh Souldiers, laying them in Ambuscado upon two of the principall passages that conducted to the City, and causing in his owne Campe store of great lights to be made, whereby they thought all at rest they ventured to creepe home by small Troopes, where most of them were slaine by Philopoemens Souldiers.

CHAP. CCIX.

A politique Stratagem to prevent an Enemy from entring, the Ports being blowne open.

THe Duke of Burgundy comming before Bevis in France, had blowne o∣pen the Ports; Yet being discovered, the Souldiers of the Towne made a valiant resistance, the whilst others above upon the Wall, threw downe many fiery Fagots that burnt downe the Bridge, where∣upon hee speedily retreated.

CHAP. CCX.

A politique Stratagem used by Maximilian King of the Romans, whereby he tooke in the Towne of Arras.

MAximilian King of the Romans, having promised Henry King of England to as∣sist him in the Warres of France, meeting at Bulloigne, a Peace was concluded with the French by King Henry, whereby Maximilian lost his journey, yet thinking to get something for his penny, he came to the speech of a Smith, that had a poore house built upon the Wall of the Towne called Arras, and by gifts and large promises, made him agree to liquor the Souldiers upon the Guard; and as for the Governour, he was no afternoone-man, this project was cleanly performed, and in their drunken security the Towne was surprized.

CHAP. CCXI.

A Policie to prevent mischiefe when two great Princes 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to discourse.

IF great Princes should capitulate upon any Articles of peace, it might prove very dangerous to hazard their Persons, unlesse in wisedome they make choyce of some River betweene them and their two Ar∣mies, where a Bridge is to bee made over with a grated Gate on the midst to keepe them a sunder, and yet may discourse thorow it: also on either side a certaine Company of men to view the Carriages, that no treason be put in action: as the like was performed betweene the King of En∣gland and the King of France; the King of Englands men went through the wic∣ket of the grate to guard the King of France, and the King of Frances men came to guard the King of England, on either side there were locks and boults, and but 20. men a piece to guard them. By this meanes it could not possible be that any mischiefe could ensue.

CHAP. CCXII.

A Policie to conduct troopes of Horse over Bogges, Mores or deepe snowes.

XEnophon in his Ascent of Cyrus, being troubled in his march with won∣derfull deepe Snowes, Mores and Bogges; hee was taught by the Co∣march or guide to binde bagges of Straw about their Horses foot-locks, which would preserve them from danger of sinking: without which necessary and experienced practise, divers of them have beene proved (with farre greater prejudice) to sinke even up to the bellies.

CHAP. CCXIII.

A Policie used by the Citizens of Priennia, by which meanes they deluded their Enemie by a colour of plenty, which caused him to leave his Siege.

THe City of Priennia (being besieged by Aliattes) made use of this Stra∣tagem: when their Towne could not hold out any longer; their victuals being spent they turned out of their Citie divers fat Cattell, as Horses and Mules into the Enemies Campe: the Enemy (perceiving this) sends 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a Spie into the Towne to see whether they were so well provided as they made ••hew of: Bias the Governour (having intelligence of this Spie) caused divers heapes of sand to be piled up together in the Streetes and Market-place; and to be strewed over with Corne; as Wheat, Rie, Pease and other Graine, which made a wonderfull shew of plenty; this Messenger being suffered to have recourse about the City, did take a particular view of all things, and returned into the Campe with this answer, that he saw infinite plenty both of Corne and Victuals which made Ali∣ates presently removed his Siege. Had not this Policy taken effect, the City could not have subsisted a weeke longer.

The like Policy Gracchus caused the Citizens of Cassilinum to use, whereby Ha∣niball was deluded; the Citizens sowing Parsnip-seeds in the fields about the Towne, and defending it from the Enemies spoiling it; made Haniball thinke that there was store of plenty; and that it was no policy for him to stay his Siege untill those Roots were growne; wherefore he presently removed.

CHAP. CCXIV.

A politique Stratagem, whereby young Scipio brought Haniball into a mighty suspition with Antiochus.

YOung Scipio being sent by the Roman Senate to Antiochus, who had (by the instigation of Haniball,) prepared an Army against the Romans; which should have beene conducted by that crafty Enemy Haniball; for prevention he thus practised: hee would often frequent the Company of Haniball, falling into friendly conference, about the Battels betwixt them fought before in Italy and Affrica, feeding and pleasing the humour of Hani∣ball, lest he should leese his company and so faile of his intended purposes, which was to bring Antiochus into a mistrust and iealousie of the fidelitie of Haniball; so that the conduction of the moyetie of this Army might not be granted him; which tooke effect, for his secret comming to Scipio•• lodging; yet so, that some of Antio∣chus friends might take notice of it: also in the day (having conference together) if any approch'd neere, Scipio would suddenly be silent, and winde away from his com∣pany, which actions of his wrought his desires: for Antiochus durst not trust him, fearing there was some plotted treachery betwixt them.

CHAP. CCXV.

Politique devises used by Archelaus Mithridates to cause his Souldiers to fight when they were both unwilling and fearefull.

ARchelaus Mithridates Lievtenant at Pir••a, perceiving his Souldiers had small courage to fight, he so wearied them with continuall la∣bour, that they were glad to desire him to fight that the warres might be ended: the same did Cyrus King of Persia in the warres against Astyages King the Medes, minding to stirre up the valour of his dejected Souldiers fiercely to give Battell to their Enemy, he wearied them all one day with hewing downe of wood, and on the morrow after hee made a plenteous feast for them, demanding in the feast time which day liked them best; they allowing of the pastime of that day present: to whom he replyed, this pleasure must be obtained by the other dayes paines; for except yee first overcome the Medes, yee can never live at freedome or in pleasure; by this they tooke great courage to fight.

After the same manner Epaminondas being ready to give battell to the Lacedemo∣nians; hee (perceiving his Souldiers hearts to faint) frames a short Oration to insti∣gate them to fight, telling them how that the Lacedemonians had determined if they got the victory to slay all their men, to make all their wives and children bond-slaues for ever; and to beat downe the City of Thebes flat to the ground, with these words the Thebans were so grieved and moved, that at the first brunt they overcame their Enemies.

Agesilaus had pitcht not farre from Orchomeno, a City that was in league with him; hee (perceiving that the chiefest part of his Army had their treasure in the Campe) commanded the Townes-men to receive nothing into the Towne belong∣ing to the Army; to the intent his Souldiers might fight the more furiously, know∣ing they should fight both for their lives and goods.

Also Gelon King of Syracuse, entring warre against the Persians, to make his Soul∣diers disdaine and undervalue the Enemy, causeth divers of the poorest and most un∣comliest weake persons of the Enemie to be stript starke naked, and led them before all the divisions of the Army, to perswade them that the Enemy was but silly poore wretches, and scarse worth the fighting withall. All these Projects have taken good effect in the ancient warres.

CHAP. CCXIV.

A Politique Stratagem used by Flavius to bring Gracchus into an ambush, whereby he and his Romans were s••aine.

TItus Gracchus being in the Country of the Lucans, who were then divided, divers Townes being rendred up to Haniball, and certaine abode under the Romans jurisdiction, of the which sort the chiefe Ruler that yeare was one Flavius a Lucan, this Flavius on a suddain turned to Haniball, and sending to Mago to speake with him, he con∣spired to deliver Gracchus the Roman Generall unto him, so as the Lucans might be received into amitie; which being condescended unto, he brought Mago to a great covert of Wood, willing him to hide himselfe with a great compa∣ny of men of Armes, appointing him the time when he would bring the Roman Cap∣taine into his hands: Returning to Gracchus, he gave him to understand, that he had begun a great enterprise, and that he must be the instrument to effect it; which was, that he had moved and perswaded all the Princes of the Lucans that were gone to the amity of Haniball, to returne againe to the obedience of Rome; I did further de∣clare to them (sayes he) the potencie of the Roman power, how it dayly increased, with the imbecility of the Carthagenians, further not to mistrust the Roman gentlenesse, whose nature was ever meeke to those that submitted unto them; with these perswa∣sions I found them all contented to be reconciled, so they may heare you speake and confirme my words, touching their hands in pledge of your faith, and indeed I have undertaken you shall doe it, and I have appointed them a secret place well out of the way from our Campe, for feare of espies, yet not farre from your owne Campe; few words will dispatch this businesse, and by this meanes all the Lucans will come wholly under your jurisdiction. Gracchus nothing mistrusting deceit and treason to lye under those sugred words, tooke a Guard with him (all unarmed) and rode to the place appointed, Flavius was his guide; being arrived, Mago with his armed men invaded them suddainly, Flavius the Traytor turnes to the Carthagenians, who furiously darted their weapons at Gracchus, and slew him and his Romans, not being able to make resistance. This should teach Generals not to be over-credulous, but to walke upon sure grounds, for had Gracchus sent Spies to view the Lucans, in what conditions they presented thewselves in, or had he taken a sufficient guard with him, he might have eschewed this hellish treachery. Latet sub melle venena.

CHAP. CCXVII.

A Policie whereby Haniball had like to have caused the Romans to have fled.

HAniball comming to the succour of Capua which was beleaguered by two Roman Consuls, and being not able to releeve the City, he craftily sent di∣vers of his men forth, that could speake the Latin tongue, into divers parts of the Host of the Romans, which should in the Consuls behalfe de∣clare, that the Roman Campes were taken and spoyled; wherefore hee willed every man to save himselfe by flight to the next Mountaines: Since by longer tarrying the greater would be their losse, this crafty deceit amazed divers of them, and had like to have taken effect, which might have beene the ruine of the Roman Army: Let this teach Souldiers to give no credit to any report in time of Battell; least they be ruined by it.

CHAP. CCXVIII.

A Politique Stratagem used by Marcius Generall of the Romans, to make use of the Carthagenians securitie, whereby he overcame two Campes, and put them to the Sword.

MArcius being made Generall of the Romans, was sensible of the Po∣tency of the three Carthagenian Armies, two of them lying neare Encamped one to the other, and thinking themselves secure in re∣gard of the precedent overthrow they had given to the two Sci∣pio's; Marcius makes a politique use of this, and by a well-delive∣red Oration, perswades his men to take the opportunity of that night to invade the Enemies Campes, his reason telling him, it could not but take good effect; wherefore all things being fitted and prepared, about three a clocke in the morne they set forwards to Asdrubals Campe, the other Campe of the Carthagenians was seven miles beyond, betweene which was a hollow-Valley, and by it a Wood, in this Wood Marcius had plac'd an ambush of Roman Horses, to cut off such as fled from the first Campe to escape to the other; in the interim, hee with his Troopes went to the first Campe, where finding little or no Watch or resistance, they entred their Quarters, where suddenly sounding their Trumpets, and beating their Drummes, and making an infinite shout, some firing the Tents, others slaying all that stood in opposition, others lying in ambush at the Ports of the Campe, to murther those that fled out; thus with suddaine noise, fire, and slaughter, the other were so amased, that they fled to the Ports and were slaine; others got over the Workes to the second Campe, and were taken by the Roman ambushment, so that none could possibly escape to carry newes to the next Campe. This being finisht, the Romans made all possible haste to the second Campe, where they arrived by breake of day, finding that more easie to enter than the first; for some were fetching Wood, others Forrage, some walking, others at victuals, and none ready to make a defence, these they cut off; others arming in the meane time made resistance, but when they saw the fresh blood besmeared upon their swords and shields; their hearts fain∣ted, they then knowing the other Campe was taken, and their Friends slaine. Thus in one night, were two Armies overthrowne, 37000 slaine, and 1800 Pri∣soners taken.

CHAP. CCXIX.

A Politique Stratagem whereby Asdruball in the Warres of Spaine delivered his Army out of a great Strait from Nero, who was ready to have rowted them.

ASdruball in the Warres of Spaine, being in a great Strait so as he could not stirre his Army, but Nero would have taken the advantage to have rowted him; wherefore he thought it pollicy to delude Nero by faire promises: Which was, that if Nero would suffer him and his Army to march forth the Straites, without Battell, hee would leave Spaine without delay, and leave it wholly unto the Romans, this offer was acceptable unto Nero; the next day following was appointed for con∣ference, about the conditions of redelivering the Castles and Fortresses in their pos∣sessions, and what day should be appointed for the Carthagenian Garrisons to depart with their Baggage. Nero thinking himselfe secure, was remisse in guarding the Straites so strictly as before; Asdruball taking the advantage, all the night sent away many of his Host with all his grosse and heavie carriage through the Straites, ever foreseeing that not over-many departed at once, to the intent that the smallnesse of

the number, by making small noyse, might with silence deceive their Enemies; The next day they held their Communications, and Writings were drawne (triviall things) untill night approacht, agreeing to meet the next morne to finish all matters; the same night he conveyed away more of his Baggage; the next meeting was also in vaine, the time being spent in devices of communication; in the night hee sent his Footmen and stuffe out of danger (divers dayes being employed in debating) so that most of his stuffe was conveyed away; Asdrubal began to bee more ridged and stiffe in the agreement, insomuch that hee dis••ented from divers Articles, hee de••∣ming himselfe partly secured. The morrow following there arose a wonderfull mist, so that both Hills and Valleyes were obfuscated, which joyed Asdruball being for his purpose; he sent to Nero, letting him understand that it was a high holy-day, which hee alwayes kept holy, and all the people of the Carthaginians, so that hee durst not negotiate any businesse on it, desiring him to deferre the further Commu∣nication untill the morrow. Nero all this time dreaming of no fraud in this Message condescended unto it; In the meane time Asdruball issued out of the straights with the residue of his Army very silently, and was past danger before the day was cleere; then too late they espyed the Campe voyde, and that they were grossely de∣luded; by this policie hee saved his Army and his honour. What vigilancy and cir∣cumspection should this teach a Generall to eschew the like deceite, for although an Enemies countenance be never so faire, yet his heart is treacherous: Contrarily, how should it animate a Commander to set his wits abroch, when hee is in straights to wind out of them with safety and honour.

CHAP. CCXX.

How Haniball by using of a Politique Stratagem in parting of his Horse-troopes, the one part falling upon the Reare of the Romans, the other into their Campe, gained a victory from Fulvius.

IN the Warres of Spaine, betwixt Haniball and Cn. Fulvius the Proconsull, whose Army lay before Herdonia; Hanibal having in∣telligence useth scelerity, and with his Horsemen, and Light-foot∣men, had made his approaches neere the Towne, before the fame of his comming was knowne; and to put the Romans in more feare, hee appeared in good array of Battell, most suddenly with his Co∣lours displayed; Fulvius prepares to oppose him in like manner, and joyned Battell with him; Hanibal setting his policies abroach, commanded his Horsemen that after a signe or token to them made, whilst the Romans were busie in Battell against the Foot-men of Haniball, and every mans eye was occupied busily, that that they should secretly coast the Field, and a part of them set upon the backe of his Enemies, the other part of them to invade the Enemies Campe and Tents, with a great noyse and slaughter, proclayming that they did not question to vanquish this Fulvius, as they had done one of his name not long before: so soone as the Horse-men assailed the Reare of the Romans (which caused a great feare and slaugh∣ter) Immediately from the Campe was heard a mighty cry and uprore, which so ter∣rified the Romans, that some fled, and many more were slaine; among which the said Fulvius and twelve Tribunes with 13000 Romans, and their Campe and stuffe taken. This teacheth Generalls to make use of sceleritie the wings of Conquests, and likewise it teacheth Souldiers not to be daunted by any Stratagem, nor to take notice of uprores, which will betray their valours, but rather to stand firme to their tackling, and fight manfully for their freedome; for so long as a flocke of sheepe keepe intyre, the Wolfe feares to seize on them, but once severed by flight, every bawling curre will destroy them.

CHAP. CCXXI.

How by the wisedome of Crispinus the Politique Stratagem of Haniball, was preven∣ted, and a like Stratagem returned upon him, by which the Towne of Sa∣lopia was freed, and his owne men slaine.

MArcellus with divers of his Souldiers being slaine by Ha∣nibals Ambushes, hee findes Marcellus Ring with his Signet; by this hee thought to put some exploit in acti∣on; whereupon he causeth divers Letters to bee coun∣terfeited in Marcellus name, and sealed with his Sig∣net; the Contents were, that the night following Mar∣cellus would privily come to the Citie of Salopia, wherefore hee commanded the Captaines and Souldiers to bee in a readinesse against his comming, to know his further pleasure what was to bee done; this Letter po∣sted speedily to the Governour of Salopia. But in the meane time Crispinns mistru∣sting this deceit, sent post to all the Townes adjoyning, that Marcellus was slaine, and Haniball had his Signet, for otherwise this project had taken effect; Whereupon those of Salopia made use of the intelligence, returning the Messenger with a gentle answer; but in the meane time the Salopians provided for his comming upon the night prefixed, keeping an extraordinary strong Watch, they made no question but to pay Haniball with his owne coyne; Not long before breake of day comes Hani∣ball with his Troupes close to the Ports, hee having appointed sixe hundred Romans which were fled to him, and could speake the Language well, to call to the Porter, and to enter the Gates first. The Watch opening the Ports, and drawing up the Portcullis, the said Romans entred as fast as they might, but being entred, the Guard let fall the Port••ullis with a great noyse; The Salopians ••••ue them that were entred with small dificulty; for they entred without feare, bare their Armes hanging up∣on their shoulders, dreaming of no such Banquet; those without the Ports were likewise chased away; Thus was Haniball taken in his owne Trappe. This may in∣forme Commanders in the first place, when they have a fit opportunity to set a pro∣ject afoot, to make use of scelerity; for had Haniball put this immediatly in execu∣tion before Crispinus had given them intelligence it had taken effect. Secondly, they must use all indeavours to prevent intelligence, for had Haniball belayed the passages, hee could not have mist of this Nuntio whereby hee might have beene the more confident, that his Designe would have taken effect. In the next place, a Comman∣der must make use of intelligence, and accordingly to regulate his actions, so that an Enemy may be wounded with his owne weapons. This may be tearmed a gol∣den Stratagem, to extract from an Enemies pollicie his utter confusion.

CHAP. CCXXII.

A Policie whereby Scipio had 300 Romans armed and instructed, without the charge of the Generall.

SCipio having obtained an Army to make warres in Africa, many of the young men of Armes of Sicilia grudged to undertake this journey with him, wherefore to secure himselfe hee spake thus; If there bee any man here unwilling to venture his person in these honourable warres, let him now speake, and I will gladly heare, for I had rather you should now confesse your unwillingnesse, then you should be drawne forth against your wills, and become unprofitable Souldiers unto me, and to the Common-wealth; Whereunto answer was made by some particular Souldiers, that if it might bee in their choyce, they would not venture themselves in those Warres; Scipio replyed, Since you have plain∣ly without dissimulation declared your mindes, I will appoint others in your places,

to whom you shall deliver your Horses; Harnesse, and other necessary instruments of warre; whom you shall take home with you to your houses, and there instruct, teach, and exercise them in the feates of warre untill I send for them; the young Gallants, were glad and joyfull delivering them their Armes. By this device hee trained up 300. willing Souldiers without his charge.

CHAP. CCXXIII.

A politique Stratagem used by the French, whereby they vanquish'd Lucius Post∣humus and all his Army as they marched through a Wood.

LVcius Post-humus having wars with the French, and they being to march through the passage of a wide wood called Littana; the French provided against their comming, cutting all their Timber-trees on both sides of the way; so that being not moved, they would stand firme, but being mo∣ved, they would presently fall all together. Post-humus had 25000. in his Troopes; the French-men had bestowed their Troopes round about the circumference of the wood: and when the Army of the Romans was well entred the wood, they cast downe the furthest part of the trees growing on the borders of the wood, which be∣ing once moved fell one upon another through the wood, having no stay, throw∣ing downe and s••aying the Romans both Foot and Horses as they passed, so that scarsly ten men escaped; for those the trees spared were so amazed at the sudden accident that the French vanquish'd them imediately, and slew their Generall Post-humus.

CHAP. CCXXIV.

The Policie of Cyrus how to gaine valiant and loyall Commanders in his service.

IT is reported of Cyrus by Xenophon how infinitely hee would publikely confesse he loved and honoured meritorious Souldiers;* 1.668 and when hee saw men willingly offer themselves to danger, he prefer'd them to pla∣ces of command and dignity, and honoured them besides with other guifts, whereby it appeared that valiant men were happiest, and cow∣ards accounted as their slaves. By this devise many thrust themselves into eminent dangers; especially if they thought or imagined that Cyrus should have notice thereof: by this meanes he purchast both loyall and valiant commanders daring to present their bodies against most eminent perils and most difficult attempts.

CHAP. CCXXV.

A Policie to stirre up emulation amongst Souldiers, to make them enter the greatest difficulties, and gaine impregnable things.

VBius, a Captaine of the Company of the Pelignes; being commanded upon a difficult peece of Service by Flavius Flaccus the Roman Con∣sull; his men being beaten from the Carthaginian trenches by Hanno; he straight tooke his Banner in his hand, and with force threw it over the ditch into the Campe of the Carthaginians, speaking with a loud voyce, Evill might I fare and my Company if my Enemies shall enjoy my Banner: then by great force he lightly went over the ditch and scaled the walls of the Campe of his Enemy, whom his Company boldly followed, they being in fight with the Carthagenians; another part cryed, Valerius Flaccus what sluggish cowards are wee now growne? shall the Pelignes win the honour of taking the Campe of our Enemies before us Romanes? Whereuppon Titus Pedamius tooke his Colours from his Ensigne, saying, This will I beare into the Field of my Enemies: follow mee brave Souldiers as many as would be loth of the losse thereof: they presently being stir∣red with a valiant emulation, obtained the Campe, slaying sixe thousand, and taking as many Prisoners: this Policy to stirre up emulation was the onely meanes to ob∣taine this impregnable Campe, from whence they had beene formerly repuls'd di∣vers times.

CHAP. CCXXVI.

A policie to be used at the entring of an Enemies Towne to free the Souldiers from being anoyed with stones, or Peeces, from the Battlements of houses, as also to prevent an Enemies fury in pursuing, or retreate in a Fort or Towne.

XEnophon in his first book of the ascent of Cyrus, relates how the Droylans having betaken themselves to their chiefe Fort,* 1.669 to defend themselves against his Potent Army, at last through much difficulty having scaled the Walls, his men were forely wounded from the battlements of the houses; and likewise there being a Citadell strongly made within the Fort, they made a fierce salley out upon him that was irresistable; by accident a house falling on fire up∣on one side of the way, caused those that threw downe stones, and weapons, from the battlements to vanish a∣way. Xenophon perceiving this, caused the house upon the other side to bee fired, which wrought his Souldiers much safety. Those from the Citadell charged his men so furiously, that there was no retreating without a manifest losse and confusion; wherefore he commanded every Souldier as hee was to come up, to present his wea∣pons and shotte against the Enemy, to bring with him a quantity of Seare-wood, and to place it betweene the Enemy and themselves, and then to set fire on it: by this policie he stayed the Enemies pursuite in their Retreite, and busied them in quenching their fires.

CHAP. CCXXVII.

A politique Stratagem, whereby Fabius the Consull tooke the Towne of Arpos, by the helpe of a violent storme of Thunder, wind, and raine.

CLassius Aitinius repairing to young Fabius, about the betraying of Arpos, Fabius being arrived within a mile of the Towne about three a clocke in the morne, hee appointed six hundred active Souldiers to beare Scaling-Ladders, and so first to assay the scaling of the Walls; Which done, then on the inner part to breake open the Gates, and (being Masters of part of the Towne) by the sound of a Horne to give him knowledge; whereby he, with the rest of the Troopes, might approch to their succours; as this was discussing there happened a wonderfull storme, of wind, raine, and thunder, whose vehemencie drove the Sentinells and Watchmen from the Walls into their Guards, where abi∣ding a good season, not dreaming the Enemie would make his approches in such a stormy season, they fell asleepe; in the meane time the Romans making use of these stormes, had quietly scalled the Walls, and were quietly passing the streetes to the Ports, where they broke them open, whose noyse was not heard by the Watch, so violent was the storme; then blowing their Hornes, the Consull made his approches about breake of day, and entred the Towne.

CHAP. CCXXVI.

A politique Stratagem of Scipio, in counterfeiting an intrenchment, which amazed the Carthaginians, and puzzled them to scale them.

SCipio in the Warres of Spaine, being set upon with three Armies, as hee lay upon a great Hill, devised how to make some intrenchment to de∣fend his Campe, which could not be performed, in regard the ground was so stony; neither could hee get Bushes nor wood to make a defence about it, wherefore hee made a show of a defence, laying his packs and packsaddles,

and other grosse carriages one upon another round the Campe, whereby he raised the Walles of his Campe of a good height; the Carthaginians being come, they were astonished at this, and found it very difficult to enter, onely their infinite number gained the conquest from Scipio: This should put all Commanders in minde, of im∣paling their Army, although it be but with a Hedge, or Hurdles, for it is a great safe∣tie; as may be instanced by Captaine Swa••••e, who after St••••ley, and Yorke, had treacherously given up Deventer to the Enemy, his Company having got forth the Towne, was to march over Amers-forth Heath to a Garrison there, and being set upon by a Troope of Horse of the Enemies, with certaine Foot with them, he be∣tooke his Company to a sheep-fold made of Hurdles, whereby hee protected his Company, and beate the Horse with their Foot-men, causing them to retreit.

CHAP. CCXXIX.

A strange Politique Stratagem, whereby Haniball gained a Towne of great consequence, by the helpe of Nico and Philomenes, under the pre∣tence of bringing in a wilde Bore.

NIco and Philomenes being great Hunters, and used to goe out the Citie of Tarrent by night a hunting, they went towards the Army of Haniball, to declare to him their intents, and being brought before him by the Watch, Ha∣niball being sensible of the plot, wisht them to drive back divers Cattell, as if they had gotten them as a prey from the Enemies; this course they often used, so that it was thought marvaile that they so often enterprised such feates, and ever escaped unslaine; the Porter and Mayor of the City they used very kindly, giving unto them part of their prey for their courtesie and paines, being so for∣ward and vigilant to open the Ports for their going out and in; the residue, they be∣stowed upon the Governour for his love and leave; the Porter was so accustomed, that at their first whistle at all times of the night, the Gates were opened unto them, all things being brought to a good passe for the accomplishing of their project. Hani∣bals Army lying within foure dayes journey from the Towne, he feigned himselfe very sicke, and that it was the onely reason he stayed there so long, this was bruited abroad, the night being appointed Haniball made choise of ten thousand Horse and Foot, of the lightest armed, and removed from his Campe in the night, making speed untill he came within fifteene miles of the City of Tarrent, where he secretly abode, charging his men in no wise to breake their array and order, but to be ready to performe what was commanded; wherefore he first set forth to palliate his re∣moving, and to the intent that none of the Country should descrie his Army, he sent fourescore Numidian horsemen to go before him, commanding them to over-run the Country, by which his Army should passe, and those they overtooke to bring back, and if they met with any they should kill them; to the intent they should be taken by the Inhabitants, for Robbers and Theeves, and not men of Warre; the fame of these Rob∣bers, came to the eares of the Governour of Tarrent, who smally regarded it, because he thought Haniball was sick, and his Army so farre a distance from the Town. He inten∣ded the next morne to send forth some men of Armes to drive back those Robbers; the same night removed Haniball his Army to Tarrent, having Philomenes with him for his guide, being arrived neere the Towne it was appointed that Philomenes according to his custome should enter the Towne with a number of armed men; he having awaked the Porter, telling him hee had brought a mighty Bore which hee had slaine; at the first call hee opened the Gates, and two young men of his companions first went in, then entred hee and other his servants, plucking in the great Bore; the Porter being glaring at his greatnesse, Philomenes slue him with his Bore-speare, and incontinent let in thirty other Souldiers armed, who slue the other Watchmen at the same Port, and without noyse let in the rest of the Army, and secretly brought them into the Market-place, where they abode without noyse; in the meane time Haniball with a

sufficient strength arrived at another Port; and first having made a great fire afarre off, which was the signe betwixt him and Nico, who abode with other his accom∣plices ready within the Towne looking for his comming; which so soone as Nico perceived, hee answered him with another fire; notice being taken on both sides, the fire was put out, and Haniball approacht to the Gates; Nico also within the Ci∣tie came to the Ports guard, and slue all the Watch, and opened the Ports, so as Ha∣niball with his Army entred, his Horse were commanded to remaine in Batalia without; hee being arrived in the Market-place with Philomenes, and his other com∣pany; then had hee two thousand French-men, which hee divided into three parts, and sent them to divers parts of the City; the residue he commanded to keepe the most accustomed streetes of the Towne, and to slay the Roman Souldiers; the Alarme being given, they saw there was no way but death or yeelding; wherefore the greatest number fled to a Castle in the Towne, which was of great strength, and upon all advantages they might, Sallyed out into the Towne; Wherefore Haniball had another Project at his fingers ends, he caused his Men to raise a Wall to hemme them in, and dreaming they would issue out of the Castle to hinder the worke, hee placed an ambush in a secret and convenient place, which should cut them off, and disable them from anoying the Towne; And accordingly it hapned, for the worke-folkes gave suddenly back at their approch, which heartened them to go on the further, so as the Ambushment surprized the greatest part of them: but suddenly there came Ships of Warre from Metapontus, and entred the Haven, and relieved the Castle; and kept all provision from the Towne, so as the Towne was like to indure want before their Enemies, hee presently summoned a Councell, it was found there was no way to hinder those Shippes, but by a greater force of Shipping, and that no shipping could enter the mouth of the Haven, because they had fortified against them; whereupon hee devised to hale their Shippes out of a creeke, and by Engines and Wheeles to draw them thorow the spacious streetes, and so convey them into the Ha∣ven; which hee performed, and made gimselfe Master both of Towne and Castle; I have beene the more tedious in relating this Project, because in it there is nothing but is of great consequence to be observed by a Souldier.

CHAP. CCXXX.

The Policie of Xenophon in electing of Hostages.

SEuthes having taken divers Hostages of the Thynes which were old, and unserviceable men, not respected of them; which caused the Thynes not to regard their promise nor Hostages, but layed a Camizado to take Seu∣thes and Xenophon, and to destroy the Army; the Thynes d••••ming those Hostages would have made Seuthes Army secure; Wherefore they tooke opportu∣nity of the night to fall upon their Guards, and to fire their quarters; but being man∣fully repulsed, they besought afterwards to bee taken into favour againe; Sayes Xeno∣phon, I would counsell the Seuthes hereafter in taking Hostages, to take of the prin∣cipallest, and those that were ablest, to doe you most harme, and to leave the old men at home, lest you be gulled in the like kind.

CHAP. CCXXXI.

A Policie used by Xenophon, whereby he deluded his Enemy with his small Army, causing them to thinke his Army to bee of a mighty strength, which made them to leave their Siege, and steale away by night.

THe Arcadians being besieged by the Thracians, Xenophon intending to re∣leeve them; His Army being very weake, hee commanded his Horse∣men to disperse themselves, and to set fire upon all things that were combustible as they went forwards; that by the multiplying of flames, the Enemy might thinke their Army was of great strength. The Foot performed the like upon every Hill that might bee descryed to the Enemies quarters,

so that the whole Countrey seemed on a light fire, and the Army to bee of a wonder∣full extent and Potencie; these fires were in the Evening commanded to be put out, this did so amaze the Thracians, that they verily thought, the lights being out, that Xenophon and his Army, did march towards them, and would suddenly fall upon their quarters; this feare made them leave their Siege, and abandon the place, so they stole away in the night out of their quarters, without the losse of any man to the Grecians.

CHAP. CCXXXII.

A Policie used by the Prince of Orange to delude an Enemie from succouring a Towne.

THe Prince of Orange, when hee intended to invade any Province, or to beleaguer any towne, he would plot his Designe so, as the Enemy should take it in a contrary sense, as once hee intended to take in Zut∣phen in Gelderland, hee drew his men quite contrary before Gertruden∣berge, who so soone as the Enemy was stirring to releeve it, hee reim∣barqued his men, and suddenly intrencht himselfe before Zutphen, where hee found them secure, and unprovided for such an assault, whereby hee gained the Towne; and indeed such Stratagems may easily bee effected, where an Army may bee transported by water; for an Enemy may expect them in one place over night, and happily hee may bee fourty miles another way by next morne, at the place which the Enemy never dreamt of.

CHAP. CCXXXIII.

An Imposture used by Sertorius, whereby he confirmed his Souldiers valour.

SErtorius the Roman Chiefetaine used an Imposture to helpe himselfe, by meanes of a white Hinde to stay his Souldiers from revolting; this Hinde being made tame, and used to be fed by Sertorius in a private place; His Souldiers being weary of the Warres, and ready to compose their peace with their Enemy; Hee wisht them to be content, untill he had drawne the Army in to Battalia, and every man should pray to their Gods, that they would be propitious to them, and miraculously send them his pleasure, how they should demeane them∣selves: Sertorius having written in golden Letters, how the Army should be dispo∣sed, hung it about the Hindes necke, which was secretly conveyed into his Tent, and being put out shee came with the Revelation to Sertorius, which being read, that they should bee Conquerours, &c. confirmed the Souldiers valours, and caused them to be victorious.

CHAP. CCXXXIV.

How a Scottis•• King by an Imposture caused his Souldiers to bee valiant, whereby he obtained a victory.

HEctor Boetius in his Annals of Scotland, makes mention of a certaine Scottish King, having lost a Battell against the Pictes, found his people so discouraged, that they were all out of love with the Warres; the King being much grieved therewith, did suborne certaine persons, who being apparelled with bright shining Scales and Seales skins, and having in their hands Truncheons of rotten shining wood, which is commonly found in the body of old Ashes, which will shine very gloriously in the darke, these did appeare unto the Princes, and chiefe Officers of the Army (being in their dead sleepe) and a∣waking them, did admonish them to fight afresh against the Pictes, and that they should not feare to assaile them, for they were sent from God to tell them that they should undoubtedly obtaine the Victory. This did so confirme the opinions of the Chiefetaines, they having seene an Angell from heaven, that God himselfe would fight for them, and in this imagination they charged the Pictes with such magnani∣mity, as they vanquisht them, and drove them forth of their Countrey.

CHAP. CCXXXV.

A Politique Imposture used by Boniface, whereby he disposest the Pope; and gained the Papacie himselfe.

IT is reported that Boniface the Eight did climbe up unto the Papacie by an Imposture, hee having intonniled his voyce in a long Cane or Trunke in a darke night, putting it thorow a hole of the Wall, into the Chamber of Ce∣lestine, a simple holy man that was invested in the Sea; Boniface fained himselfe that hee was an Angell sent from above, to let him know the pleasure of the Almighty, which was, that the great God of Heaven had things of Importance to execute upon Earth, whereof he had made choyce of Boniface to bee Pope, to put them in exe∣cution; and that Celestine should either presently resigne, or else hee was to fetch his soule ere long; this politique Imposture prevailed.

This Imposture hath beene used in divers Countreyes by the Enemies Complices, to turne the mind of a Generall from his intended purpose: as also to breed feare amongst chiefe Officers, foretelling some sad events should ensue to dishearten an Army, or to make them disloyall.

CHAP. CCXXXVI.

A Politique Imposture whereby wonderfull things have beene atcheived.

HOmer makes mention in his Hymno Mercurii, that by the crawling of a Tortoice, with a candles end fixed with Waxe unto his back, divers have been deluded, thinking it to be the Spirit of some Persons lately buried; this thing having walked divers times in the Church-yard, so that many have taken notice of it; then they were next to agree with a subtill fellow to lye in a Coffin, that should secretly be placed in a Grave, and having a Pipe from it, reaching to the top of the earth, so that hee might draw breath, and be heard speake thorow it: these things being thus perfor∣med (If a Generall have any businesse of consequence, to settle upon his Army, or to resolve it of any doubts, or to establish any lawes) then were the chiefe Officers brought to this place in the darke with common Souldiers, where the Spirit hath spoken to them.

CHAP. CCXXXVII.

A Politique Imposture used by King Minos the Law-maker of Candy, to bring in and esta••lish his Lawes.

KIng Minos the Law-maker of Candy, at such times as hee had a pur∣pose to bring in and establish Lawes in his Realme, fained that Iupi∣ter did daily speake unto him face to face, and that hee was (as Ho∣mer saith) his 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is his Familiar, and one with whom hee had private speciall conference; this gained him such speciall favour with the people, that his name growing thereupon to bee famous; hee gave such a countenance to his Lawes with so high authority, that they were kept and observed longer then were any other amongst the Greekes. Aristo∣tle writeth the same of Licurgus, that hee did helpe himselfe by this device, for the establishing of those Lawes which hee made in his Common-wealth; Numa Pompilius King of the Romans did likewise fayne, that the Nymph Egeria had familiarity and acquaitance with him, and did informe him of those Lawes, which hee prescribed unto the people of Rome, a Nation at that time very unapt to bee in∣structed, and could very hardly by reason of their fiercenesse, and Martiall courage be tamed and brought to civility, hadit not beene by the only meanes and colour of Religion.

CHAP. CCXL.

A Politique Imposture used at the interments of Emperours, to make the people believe they were highly honoured of God; so that their lawes might be the better observed after their deaths.

AT the interment of the Roman Emperours, they used this Imposture; the Corpes of the said Emperours being laid in a Tabernacle framed of wood wherein were three partitions one above the other, in the lower was the wood layd, in the next above the Corps sumptuously apparrelled; and in the uppermost was a live Eagle plac'd, the fire being burning,* 1.670 a window was secretly opened out of which this Ea∣gle soared away in the ayre; this they reported to be the Soule of the deceased Em∣perour fled to Heaven (as Herodian witnesseth) And Iustin Martyr affirmeth that there was alwayes one deputed and ordained by the Successor of the dead Emperor, who should upon his oath averre, that hee had seene the Soule of the Emperour; (which was said to be deified) to issue out from the pile of fire; and to flee directly up into heaven:* 1.671 the same doth Dion write, who saith, that Livia the wife of Au∣gustus did give ten thousand crownes unto Numerus Atticus Pretor, to have an Affi∣david made, that he saw Caesar Augustus mount up into Heaven.

CHAP. CCXLI.

A Politique Imposture able to seduce multitudes by walking upon the water.

CArdan in lib. de varietate rerum, reports how that by subtilty and artifi∣ciall skill men have walked upon the top of waters without sinking, by meanes of Corke and bladders tyed to the soles of their feete:* 1.672 Likewise Lucian writeth what strange Terror he was put in by the sight of those Phillopodes, or corke-footed persons, that walked upon the waves of the Sea: what could not such an Imposture perswade men unto; or disswade them from; the strangenesse of the thing would make men beleeve they were divine.

CHAP. CCXLII.

Illusions, whereby divers learned judicious men have beene deceived, through the faigned voyces of men expert in that qualitie.

THere have beene some men naturally disposed so subtill and ingeni∣ous; that they were able to delude and deceive even the best ad∣vised; their voyce hath beene so subtile and so divers, that they would imitate the voyce of all living creatures; likewise the organs of their voyce and their throats were so fine and small, that being very neere to a man they will call him by his name, or use other dis∣course; yet it will seeme to the party called to bee some strange Angelicall voyce; and that it is farre remote from him: in the French History of Peter de Loir, hee re∣lates a story of a Merchant of Lyons, who was exceeding rich both in Banque, and in other goods and Possessions; and being noted for a notable Vsurer, hee went one day walking into the Countrey; onely accompanied with his servant; and as they were entred into a great Champion Field, the Servant began his illusions, speaking unto him, and telling him that hee was an Angell which came unto him purposely from God, to tell him, that he should give and distribute part of his goods ill gotten unto the poore; and that hee should liberally recompence his Servant that had of a long time served him without any reward or preferment at all received from him:

the Merchant being astonished and abused at the voyce, demanded of his Servant if he heard nothing, repeating unto him the strange voice himselfe had heard; the ser∣vant (counterfeiting a kinde of wonder and astonishment) denyed that he heard any thing; and immediately (with a voice farre more stronger and subtill then the for∣mer) hee repeated the same words againe, and that with such admiration of the Merchant, that he was brought into a full beliefe that it was an Angell from Heaven that spake unto him; insomuch, that being arrived in his lodging, he gave unto his Servant a good and large recompence▪ after the death of the Merchant, this Servant discovered the Imposture.

Likewise Monsieur de la Cazedin having invited divers learned men, (the most excellent spirits then in Paris) to a Banquet in the meane time a merry fellow that was his crafts-Master in these kind of Illusions, was caused to bee there present by the said Monsieur for to provoke mirth at this feast in imitation of that of Xenophon;* 1.673 or of the Emperour Iulian,* 1.674 wherein there was a Silenus that kept company with the Gods, etc. This fellow called one of the company by name; a man well knowne for doctrine and eloquence: this party hearing his name called arose imediately from the Table, supposing some one without the doores had called him; albeit it was no other but that same pleasant companion that was set at Table by him. By these few instances we may learne what good or hurt may bee done to an Army, they (being deluded with these or the like Impostures) may either bee animated to observe any Lawes; or undertake any difficult atchievements; or by the helpe of some trusty Complices in an Enemies Armie that are their crafts-Masters in this Art, how they may dishearten the Army, or divert the Generall from some intended designe, which may be the occasion of their overthrow.

CHAP. CCXLIII.

How Marquesse Spinola at the Siege of Breda (by the helpe of a wittie Peasant) gained intilligence of all the proceedings both in the Prince of Oranges Campe, and in the Towne of Breda, by the discovering of their owne Letters.

MArquesse Spinola made use of a Countrey Peasant who was expert of all Places and passages there about: and being forward to ac∣complish any thing he was commanded, for a reward did under∣take to carry Butter, Tobacco, and Cheese to the besieged Towne, making shew of having narrowly, and with great danger escaped the Enemies Sentinels and Guards: and being arrived hee was to offer his service to the Governour to carry Letters from him to the Prince of Orange, he being there arrived was much welcomed to the hungry Souldiers, in regard of the provision hee brought, and the Governour desirous to know particulars, examined him about Spinola's Campe, about the passage hee found into the Towne, and what was the received opinion abroad of the state of their af∣faires: the fellow (being subtill) related many true things, and feigned as many of his owne head, which begat a great beliefe in them of his honestie and trust; at last being demanded whether he durst carry any Letters by that passage by which he e∣scaped into the Towne; hee shewed himselfe at first fearfull and doubtfull what to answer; suffered them by promises to worke him to that, to which of all things (under pretence of backwardnesse) hee desired to bee perswaded. The Governour therefore trusted him with his Letters to the Prince of Orange, promising him great rewards, if he brought him an answer: Hee promised to doe his best; but in his returne he brought the Letter to Spinola to peruse; Spinola (having perused the Let∣ters) sealed them up againe fairely, and dispatched this subtill fellow away with them to the Prince of Orange, promising him a double reward if hee could bring an answere from the Prince: The Prince of Orange (beleeving that hee might con∣fidently repose his trust in this fellow, who had beene so carefull to bring him the Letters) returned his answere by this Peasant, giving him a large reward: this

craftie fellow brought the Letters to Spinola, and was liberally rewarded by him also for his paines; afterwards the Prince of Orange dying, and his brother Count Hen∣ricke being in his place, Spinola could gaine no newes of his proceedings; where∣fore he bethought him of his nimble-witted Peasant, but he being not so well knowne to this Prince as he was to his Brother, he contrived his acquaintance by this device; he having laine secret in Spinola's Campe many dayes together, hee perswaded his Wife to goe to the Prince of Orange, and complaine of a sicknesse her husband had caught in carrying his Brothers Letters to Breda, through the waters in the Winter season, and she earnestly besought him to pay the remainder of the reward promised her husband; the Prince taking hold of this occasion, being over-joyed in finding out this trusty Messenger, did undertake to pay him what was owing him, with much more, if he would now once againe adventure to carry one of his Letters to the Towne, as he had convayed many of his Brothers heretofore; the woman knowing her lesson, objected the danger of the passage, and the disease of her husband, but in conclusion, she suffered her selfe to be wonne to it, and with a feigned unwillingnesse undertooke to perswade her husband, whereupon she departed to fetch her husband to the Prince, who returned with her counterfeiting a lamenesse, as if his feet had beene frozen by the frost in the Winter, the Prince agreed a price with him, and re∣warded him; delivering his Letters of secret importance to him, to be conveyed to the Governour of Breda; the fellow came directly to Spinola with it, whereby hee understood all their designes: for this Spinola gave him a yeerely pension for ever.

CHAP. CCXXXIV.

A Stratagem whereby the Prince of Orange had like to have gained Antwerpe Castle.

THe Prince of Orange lying neere Breda, which Spinola had be∣sieged, had a designe to take in Antwerpe Castle, upon an onslaught, to which purpose he kept the passages of his Campe very close, and also the Garrisons out of which he was to draw his Souldiers out, that no intelligence might be given to the Enemy, to frustrate his designe; the charge of his Expedition, was given to Brochem Drossard of Bergen-up-zome, who had 1000 foot, and 200 horse, the Souldiers themselves knew nothing whether they were to march, but to contrary places: Command was given that they should take off their Orange∣tawny Scarffes, and put on red, which was the King of Spaines colours, and they were to give out that they were the King of Spaines men, and that they marched to Antwerpe for provision of Victuals: (for indeed it was reported Spinola's men were at that time to goe to Antwerpe for the same purpose) their Waggo••s were also co∣vered with Canvasse; and marked with the Burgundian Crosse as Spinolaes were, these things furthered their project▪ and confirmed the Peasants in their beleefe, that they were their owne men; so that they arrived under the Walles of Antwerpe Castle, be∣ing protected by the extremity of a darke night, they had made themselves a passage to the Bridge, and were ready to beate open the Ports; but by the vigilancie of one Andreas Cea, an old Souldier that stood Sentinell; they were discovered and put to retreit.

A DESCRIPTION OF EN∣GINES, AND WARLIKE INSTRVMENTS. SECT. XIIII.

CHAP. CCXLIII.

The description of such Engines, and Warlike Instruments, as are prevalent in the Warres; with the manner of using them, and how to make them.

IN regard the managing of Warlike affaires cannot bee well performed without the knowledge, and true use of all kind of Instruments that are, or may be invented, it is therefore very necessary to describe the fashion, and operation of such as have beene formerly, and now are at this present day invented, and also invent some that have not formerly beene knowne; by these a Comman∣der in chiefe may defend his Army, and offend his Ene∣my; for by the use of such Stratagemicall Instruments, many times a Victory or Conquest hath beene easily ob∣tained: and upon more certainer tearmes, then to trust only to the Valour and Poten∣cie of an Army. For the Nature of Policie, and Politique Instruments, are to accom∣plish such things, that strength cannot performe; their operation being in a double respect, as the Commander that makes use of them shall order and dispose; so accor∣dingly is their operation (viz.) making all difficulties Easie; and againe contrarily making all things easie difficult: And by this twofold Vertue, the wisedome and In∣genuity of an Enemie is often foyled. I have formerly spoken of the use of all kind of Artillery, as being the principall Engine. Here I will onely speake of the Nature and Condition of the Petard,* 1.675 by the force of which, all substantiall massie bodyes are dissolved and fittered in peeces; this Engine is of the fashion of a Leatherne Bucket, usually made of Brasse, the Verges even, that it may lye patte upon the Port you intend to blow-open. If the Port be accessible, then it is to be hung up by a Ring upon a peece of Iron skrewed into the Port with a Forke, to stay it close, and to keepe it from reversing; the manner of charging it, and the use of it, is more large∣ly discoursed of in the Treatise of Artillerie, Page 113. 114. But if the Port bee in∣accessible, then it must be placed upon an Engine which will conduct it to the Port, as by the next Figure following you may see at C, the fashion of the Petard at the Letter A. the Forke at the Letter B.

[illustration]

* 1.676

CHAP. CCXLIIII.

The use of the Granadoes how they are made, and charged with powder, and how they are to be discharged out of a Morter, or throwne by the hand.

AGrando is one of the necessariest Engines belonging to the Warres, in regard it anoyes and spoyles the Enemie, when no other Wea∣pon nor Engine can; there are two sorts of them, one to shoote in a Morter-peece; the other sort is to bee cast by the hand amongst the Enemies over their Walls and workes. Those that are to bee shotte out of Morter-Peeces are to be cast in Brasse for the princi∣pall Service, or made of Glasse or Earth; and these are to batter downe Walls and Roofes of houses, and to breake amongst the Enemies Horse or Foot-Troopes; there is another sort made of Canvas, and that is used properly to set fire upon Houses and Townes; of these I will discourse in particular, and de∣monstrate them by Figure.

Those of Brasse ought to bee of a foote-Diameter made somewhat long-wayes;* 1.677 in thicknesse an inch, one end thereof is to have a Snowt like a Bottle; and at the o∣ther end a Hole, at the which it is to be charged, and the said hole is to bee skrewed; then there is a strong Skrew-Tappe to be made, to fill the skrew-hole, and that is hollow, wherein is put slow-burning-Powder, made of Cannon-Powder beaten fine, and moystned with the oyle of Peeter mingled with some Charcole; then it is corded over with Cord halfe an inch in distance one from th'other every way acrosse to keepe it from splitting or breaking in the discharging it; the manner how to charge them is shewed in the Discourse of the use of Artillery; This Figure fol∣lowing in the meane time will give you some light for your better understanding.

[illustration]

* 1.678

In this Precedent Figure, you see the parts of the Granado, and how it is to bee charged at A. the Skrew-faucet which is to bee filled with a Composition of slack-burning-Powder is at B. the manner of twilting the Granado is at C. You must like∣wise bee very circumspect, whether the Priming-powder burnes quicke or slow, lest it should fire before it comes at the place assigned; those Granadoes that are made of Glasse or Earth, are to be used after the same manner as the former is, not forget∣ting to anoint them all over with Tallow for feare of flawes and crackes.

Now for those Granadoes which are to be throwne by the hand,* 1.679 the substance they are made of is Brasse three parts, and Tinne one; which being cast in a Mould are made hollow, and about halfe an Inch thicke; the Brasse must bee melted before the Tinne be put in; the fashion is of a Pomgranat: the Concavitie is to bee filled halfe full of fine corne-powder, and the other halfe next the vent, is to be filled with Ser∣pentine-Powder, mingled with Rosin beaten to powder, so that for three parts of Serpentine-powder, you take one of Rosin; then putting into the Snowt or hole of it a little fine Powder, which makes it fire the sooner: being held in the Right-hand ready to cast from you (at the same instant fire being given to it with a Match) it is tost over into the Enemies Workes, where it breakes in divers peeces, destroy∣ing all neere it; the fashion of them you may behold in the next Figure following. There is no way to prevent the force of these, but by extinguishing them with raw Hides, or tumbling them into water to choke the Powder before the Priming-powder bee burnt to the Corne-powder; wherefore divers Souldiers are to bee ap∣pointed with Skoopes, and others with Hides to quench them in the water, or to choake them for want of vent.

There are some Granadoes made without a snowte very round, only a vent-hole whereby it is filled with Powder, as you see at the Figure B, this being filled with fine powder, is to bee put into an Earthen-pot; so farre bigger, that it may hold it, and a quantity of Powder besides; then divers threds of Cotton being folded toge∣ther, and boyled in Salt-Peeter and Brimstone to make it apt to hold fire, the said Pot being covered at the mouth with a skinne close tyed, then crossing the Pot with a peece of Wyer, as you perceive at the figure D, divers peeces of this Match is tyed about it being well lighted; so that when the Pot is throwne and breakes with the fall, the Match fires the Powder, whereby the Granado is also fired; And this is the securest way to throw them: Note if the Granado be of Glasse, then the skrew-tappe that is to goe into the vent-hole to carry the Priming-powder must be of Wood, for the Glasse will breake so soone as the fire toucheth it; View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCXLV.

The use of the Fire-ball, to fire Houses, Bridges or Ports, with the manner of framing them.

THe use of the wild-fire Ball; is to bee shot out of a Morter-piece or Canon, to fire Houses, Ports or Bridges; they are framed after this manner. First, there must be had three or foure pieces of Iron of e∣quall length, sharp-pointed like an Adders tongue; they are to be rivited one into the other just in the middest, so as the one may crosse the other justly; then take Goose-grease or Swines-grease one part, of Tarre halfe a quarter as much, of Pitch two parts, of Aqua-vitae halfe a quarter part, of Lin-seede Oyle one part, of Verdigrease a quarter part, of waxe halfe a quarter part, of Groome a quarter part, of Salt-peeter meale one part; these being mixed together over a slow fire; and in the liquid mixture dippe a good quantity of Tow and linnen raggs; then rub the same well in bruised Powder, the which being rowled hard about the afore-said Irons, and bound about very straight with wyer or pack-threed, not forgetting to bore two holes quite a-crosse the said Composition, which must be filled with good bruised Powder; they are to be put downe into the piece next the Powder, that the priming holes may take fire; and being shot out, wheresoever they sticke they will fire it suddenly: the like balls may be made with∣out Iron to throw with the hand against the Enemy; view the Figures following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCXLVI.

The use of Lanthornes and hollow Plates filled with pibble Stones and Musquet Bul∣lets for the defending of Breaches.

FOr the defending of a Breach and disabling the Enemy from making his forcible entry, it is necessary to have in store and readinesse divers hol∣low round plates, like halfe Bullets, the one is to shut over the other, like a Boxe lid, this is to be filled with pibble Stones or Musquet Bul∣lets, or square peeces of iron, called Dice-shot; this being discharged out of a Murthering peece, will doe much hurt: also, your Lanthornes are made of soft Wood, after the fashion of our ordinary Lanthornes, these beeing filled with stones, and shot out of a Peece, will breake in peeces, and the stones will doe won∣derfull execution against those that shall enter a Breach, a Bridge, or Port; View the Figures following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCXLVII.

How to make a certaine Stone to burne in the Water, or to kindle fire in the greatest storme of Raine, being very usefull in the Warres.

THere is a certaine Stone to be made, which will kindle eyther by laying water on it, or by spitting upon it; it is very usefull in the Warres, in time of tempestuous raine, when Souldiers matches are out, or for the firing of any Houses or Bridges, when other kinde of fires will not burne, the Composition is this. Take unslak'd Lime one part, Tutia Alexandrina unprepared one part, Salt-pee∣ter well refined one part, all these must bee well beaten and fifted, and bound hard together with a peece of new Linnen cloth, then put it into a couple of earthen Cups, such as Goldsmiths use to melt their mettals in; the mouthes of the which must bee joyned together, and fast bound with iron wyre, and dawbed over with Siment that it breathes not out, then dryed a while in the Stone, it must be put into a Furnace where Bricke is burning, or other earthen Vessels, there to remaine untill they bee burnt, then taking it out, it will seeme like to a Bricke stone, and when any water toucheth it, it will burne immediately.

Otherwise, if you please to make a fire-ball to burn in the water, you must take pow∣der bruised ten parts, Peeter in meale two parts, Peeter Roch one part, Sulphure meale three parts, Turpentine one part, Linseed oyle one part, Camphire a quarter part, Arse∣nick a quarter part, Verdi-grease a quarter part, Bole Armoniacke a quarter part, Corns

of Bay salt 1/•••• part, filings of iron ⅕ part, Quick silver 1/•••• part, these things being well blended and mingled together with the hand, in some woodden Vessell. Then taking a peece of Canvasse, and cut out a round peece as big as you please, which be∣ing sowed together and filled with this Receit, then strongly bound with pack-thread, and coted with moulten pitch, making therein but one vent of an inch deep; wherein must be put fine powder (to prime it) bruised very small, this being fired with a match, after it hath burnt awhile ding it into any water, it will rise and burne furiously upon the top; this is very proper to set fire upon the Enemies floates or Galleries that are built upon the water, there shall need no Figure to demonstrate this.

CHAP. CCXLVIII.

Of certaine earthen Bottels filled with a kinde of mixture to be fired, which are thrown amongst the Enemie.

THere are certaine Earthen Bottels to be made of a round fashion, being not halfe burnt are best for this use; they are invented to disorder the Enemies Rankes, or to astonish them, being whirld out of the Souldiers hands amongst the Enemies will soone make them give ground, the device is this; having got as many of these Bottels as shall be thought requisite, these must bee filled halfe full of Serpentine powder, or somewhat more, there is to be mixt with it a quantity of Hogges grease, Oyle of Stone, Brimstone, Saltpee∣ter twice refined, Aqua vitae, Pitch, these being stirred together over a soft fire in some earthen vessell; this composition being put into the Bottell, with fine powder bruised to cause it to fire, suddainly the Bottell is to have a Cord to throw it by; this hath wrought strange effects.

Also there is a kinde of Composition which is besmeared about Ropes ends and Hoopes, which are to be throwne from a Wall upon the Enemy, which will burne and disorder them wonderfully, especially at the scaling of a Wall. The Composi∣tion is this; take Sulphre in meale sixe parts, of Rozin in meale three parts; these being melted in a Pan, over a slow fire, then taking Stone-pitch one part, hard waxe one part,* 1.680 of Towe halfe a quarter part, of Aqua vitae halfe a quarter part, of Camphire ⅛ parts, these being also melted together, there must bee stirred into it Saltpeeter-meale two parts, and when it is taken off the fire, there must be foure parts of bruised powder mixt with it; these being oynted upon Hoopes and Ropes and set on fire, wheresoever they light they cannot be quenched, but will burne the Enemy to death. View the Figures following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCXLIX.

How a frame of Musquets are to be made and ord••red for the defence of a Breach, or for the flanking of a Battalia of Pikes.

THe use of this frame of Musquets is very excellent both in the de∣fence of Breaches, Bridges, Ports, or to be plac'd before the Di∣visions of Pikes, or flanking the Pikes in Battell, whereby the E∣nemie will be wonderfully shaken, and by the helpe of a few men which are to remove them too and fro, and to give fire to the traines, strange exploits may be performed: The manner of it is thus; A Frame is made of Boordes or Planke three Stories high, one story halfe a foot above the other, and a foot or more behinde one the other, the lowermost tyre is to lye about three foot from the ground, the next halfe a foot above that, and so the third: there are certain quilles or small spouts of Brasse to goe from one touch-hole to the other, so that the traine being fired, they shall one discharge after another, beginning first with the uppermost tyre, as the Enemy enters the Breach, then the second, and the lowermost last; there is also a broad plate which shall be plac'd over the Breeches of the Musquets, that no sparkles may fall downe into the Pans of the second, nor the lowermost tyre, each tyre is to hold twelve Musquets a breast, one being plac'd a foot distance from the other; there are certaine Ringles on each side to remove it by: There is one in Germany that hath onely twelve Musquets, which may be discharged eight and forty times, according to the French new invention for Pistols: This was practised at Ostend when Duke Albert made his potent assault, by which he was wonderfully repuls'd. View the Figure.

[illustration]

* 1.681

CHAP. CCL.

An Instrument called a Flaile, used in the defending of a Breach, or scaling of a Wall, or when the Enemy is at handy blowes.

THis instrument is used in the Warres to defend breaches, or when the E∣nemy is entered the streets of a Towne and are at close fight, then these are the onely weapons for dispatch, there being no defence for it; it is made much after the fashion of a Flayle, onely the Swingill is short and very thicke, having divers Iron Pikes in it upon all parts of it, that which way soever it falles it destroyes; divers souldiers are appointed to attend the Enemies assaulting the Breach, some standing at one end of the Breach, the residue at the other, and when the Enemy is come up at push of Pike, so close that the Pikemen can make no use of their Pikes, then these Flayles makes way through their Head-peeces and Armour. View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLI.

The use of the Turne-pike, and how it is framed, and of the excellent defence it makes, both against Horse and Foote upon all straights and passages.

THis Instrument is of great use to bee cast into straites,* 1.682 breaches, passages, or high-wayes; for which way soever it is rowled, there bee sharpe pikes towards the Enemy to hinder his approches; the manner of fra∣ming of it is after this manner; First there is a round Beame of light wood, as Firre or Sallow about twelve Inches in circumference, and ten or twelve foot long; at every halfe-footes length, or under, there must bee holes bored thorow every way a-crosse; then there must bee Staves fitted for those holes of good seasoned Ash, about a yard and a halfe long, somewhat tapering towards each end; the ends of these Staves must bee armed with Iron Pikes cheeked downe a good way, that they may not bee hackt off with their Swords, then being droven into the foresaid holes just halfe way of the Staffe, it will bee defensive which way soever it bee turned; the beame is to be so made, that one may be fastned to the other by hookes at each end, so that if need bee halfe a score of them may bee coupled to∣gether, or otherwise as the breach or passage is in breadth; the Musque••iers may shoot over them, and the Pikes may defend them so, that the Enemy shall not have the advantage to pull them asunder; and so long as they lye, neither Horse nor Foot can passe for them; when they are to be transported by waggon, then the Staves are to be knockt out, that they may lye in closer roome; View the Figure following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLII.

The use of the Pallizadoes to prevent both Horse and Foote, from any sudden assault, and how they are framed.

HIs Excellency the Prince of Orange had alwayes these Instruments carryed in his Army, either by Water, or by Land, for wheresoever hee did in∣campe his Army for any time, especially if the Enemy were quartered neere, he alwayes gave directions to have these Pallizadoes pitcht into the ground round the quarters; and upon all Passages and Bridges the Turne-Pikes were placed with a sufficient Guard to defend them; The manner of framing them is after this fashion, they take Furre-poles about twelve Inches in Circumfe∣rence,

and foure foote and and a halfe, and some five foot long▪ and upwards, these are sharpe at the nether end with a peece of Iron, that they may enter the Gravell or Stones, and some are not; within a handfull of the upper end there is two Iron Pikes of five or sixe inches long driven in side-wayes one crossing the other, then in the middest betwixt both is the third Pike placed right-forwards,* 1.683 these being dri∣ven into the earth about a foote and a halfe, and in distance a foote, or thereabouts asunder, the Pikes will so answer one to the other, that nothing can passe but must receive hurt, when they intend to raise a Parapet of earth, then as they finish the worke, they pull up the Pallizados; There is another kind of Palizado made of pee∣ces of Oake-heart sharpt at one end, the other end is layed into the earth three quar∣ters of a yard deepe neere the top of a Breast-worke, either of Skonce or Redout; View the Figure of the former Palizado.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLIII.

The use of the Calthrop, and of the Spiked Planke to anoy both Horse and Foote.

THe Calthrop is an Instrument very offensive to the Enemies Horse, and by the use of them a few Souldiers may make an able resistance, either in the streetes of a Towne, or upon any passage, or in a Pitcht Battell; the lightnesse of it be∣ing such, that every Souldier may carry two or three of them at his Girdle, and as they advance towards the Enemy, throwing them downe, they will indanger any thing that shall tread upon them; They are framed in this wise; first they take a tough peece of Sallow, and making it round about the bignesse of an Apple, there is Iron pikes driven thorow, which points every way, so that which way soever it falls a pike will be upwards to runne into the feet, either of Horse or Man; there is another fashion made of a peece of Bord as broad as a Trencher, which is driven full of nayles, and lyned with another thin Bord, to keepe the Nayles from slipping backe; these are very good to bee throwne upon passages in the night-time, when a feare of the Enemies approch is at hand.

Also at the Siege of Ost-End the Arch-Duke invented a device to defend himselfe against sudden Sallyes out of the Towne, wherefore hee cansed to bee layed at the neerest Retrenchments long Plankes driven full of long sharpe spikes, the sharpe points lying upwards to runne into their feet that should assayle him; this is good to lay crosse streetes in a Towne in the night-time, when an Enemy hath entred the Ports; View the Figures following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLIV.

The use of the Bome or Baricado to crosse a passage or high-way to prevent the Enemies Horse in their speedy approches.

THis kinde of Instrument is used very frequently about all the frontier Townes in the Netherlands; it is to bee plac'd upon some straight passage in the Road or high-way, a flight-shot from each Port or neerer, to prevent the Enemies sudden assault with his Horse-troopes: the forme and fashion is after this manner. The Beame which crosseth the way is of Oake-hart, and a foot square of Timber at the least; then upon one side of the way is pitch'd downe a strong able Post, the top of it being fitted to enter into a hole of the Beame about the third part of it, from the fore end, then there comes divers Braces downe from the Beame which are mor∣tic'd into a circular piece of Timber, framed purposely to winde about the middest of the standing Post, the Post being there made with a Regall; these Braces stayes up the Beame from sinking downe at the fore end; and it also hinders the raising of it up from the standing Post: upon the other side of the way is another able Post for the end of the Beame to shut against; the said end of the Beame hath a very strong Spring-locke, which at the first pulling too locks into the Post: there is alwayes a Sentinell to garde at this Bome, to open and shut it to Passengers; if there bee any voyd place betwixt the Postes and the hedges, it must bee strongly railed: the Fi∣gure followes, which happily may better informe you.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLV.

Of a second kinde of Bome or Baricado to lay over Rivers to prevent the comming up of Boates, whereby the Enemy may surprize a Towne.

THis second kinde of Bome was invented by the Netherlanders to prevent the Enemies designes, who had many times deceived them by rowing up their boates the Rivers, and unexpectedly have en∣tred their Townes: the manner of framing it is after this fashion. In the narrowest place of the River or Haven they spile both the sides next the bankes with long able spiles, mortissing the top of them into an over-way or beame of sound Timber, onely in the middest of the streame they leave a passage for such vessels or boates to passe, as are requisite: then they take a peece of Timber, or some Mast of a Ship, which being fit∣ted in due length for the place, the one end of this Bome hath a Staple of strong Iron which is joyned by a Ringle to a second Staple that is droven into the inmost Spile; likewise upon the Spile of the other side is a strong Staple, whereunto the fore-nd of the Bome is to bee fastened either by a Mortice plated with Iron, or some Chaine fastened unto it, and this is strongly lockt: upon the top of this Bome, goes a thick barre of Iron from end to end, which hath large strong pikes rivited into it three or foure inches one from the other.

Lastly, the iron plate or Barre is rivited to the Bome, so that it cannot possibly be cut in sunder, neyther can they have their Boates over it by reason of the Pikes; this they may open and shut at pleasure; Many times they use iron chaines, but they are more chargeable and not so good, in regard a Boat will runne over it. View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLVI.

Duke Alberts Invention for the staying of the Hollanders Shippes at Ostend, that his Batteries might the easier discharge upon them.

IN the Siege of Ostend, Duke Albertus had planted divers Block-houses with Ordnance to impeach the Hollanders shipping which releeved the Towne: yet with a quicke tyde and faire Winde, they entred in despight of his Ordnance without any dammage; where∣fore he bethought him to draw a mighty Cable over the Channell where the Shippes did usually passe safely by the favour of the darke night: to divers parts of this Cable, he fastned divers empty Caske, as Pipes and Hogsheads to beare it up straite and even; also, there were certaine Anchors to stay the Pipes and Cable from floating away; hee having prepared his Batteries in readinesse for the same purpose on eyther side of the shore, no sooner were the Shippes stayed, but the Ordnance played upon them to their great detri∣ment, many of them being suncke, and the rest battered.

Some haue caused a Massie chaine to be conveyed over a Heaven, or Channell, also long peeces of Timber linck'd together, hath beene a meanes to hinder shipping, for otherwise it is a difficult thing to offend the passage of shipping, or boates, espe∣cially by night, as was probable at the same Siege; there being as Grimstone recor∣deth, 70 shot made at one Fleet in that Channell, yet not one of them suncke, nor damnified. View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLVII.

The manner of making a Battery to floate upon the water, that the Ordnance may shoot the leveller, invented at Ostend by Duke Albertus.

THis Floate was invented at Ostend, to plant their Ordnance on it, that they might strike the Vessels betweene Wind and water, as they came into the Heaven; the manner of framing it, was on this wise: First, there were divers strong large Pipes or Hogsheads made pur∣posely, upon the which divers Beames or Rafters were strongly fast∣ned, crossing every way to hold the Pipes together; then there were divers Plankes fastned upon the toppe of the Rafters, after the fashion of a floore of a house, round the sides were wooll-packes, fixed to shelter the Enemies shot; this Floate lying thus levell with the water, gave the Ordnance fit opportunity to shoot at a better certainty; upon eyther side of the Heaven was one of these Floates planted, not one right against the other, but a certain distance wide, so that if one mist his shoot, the other should indeavour to hit. The figure of it followes.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLVIII.

The manner of framing the Engine called the Saulciffe, which is to be used against a beleaguered Towne to shelter both Horse and Foote.

THis Instrument was invented at Ost-end, for the safegard both of Horse and Foote; the manner of framing of it was after this manner; They tooke divers Bords or Plankes of Deale-wood, and framed them in man∣ner of a Hogshead or Pipe, but so great that a Horseman might ride be∣hinde it, and not be discovered; the Concavitie of it was filled with Dunge and sand, it was hooped with broad Iron hoopes, it was twenty foot long; there were fiftie or sixtie men to rowel it: this did the Arch-Duke wonderfull service in preser∣ving his Souldiers, both from the Cannon and Musquet, it being alwayes rowled be∣fore those that went to Intrench themselves, or to releeve such Guards as were dan∣gerous, and within shotte of the Walls of the Towne; by this devise they could goe as neere to the Enemies workes as they listed: the Figure follow••••.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLIX.

How to stop up the passage of Vessels, and Boates in a Channell, or to mend a breach in an arme of the Sea.

THe best and presentest way to stop, and damne up a Channell, or a breach, is to fill the Hulke of old cast Ships, Hoighes, and Boates with earth, and so conveying them to the fittest place where the water is narrowest and shallowest, and there to sinke them; Likewise by fil∣ling old sackes full of Earth or Sand, and casting them into the water, will damme up a small Haven, and will hinder the passage of all kind of Vessels from releeving a besieged Towne; and by this the breach of an arme of the Sea may bee stopped, but first it must be well pyled to stay the Vessells and Earth from being washed away; wherefore they must take the opportunity of a low-water to worke in, and have sufficient helpe to lay the foundation sure, for feare of blowing up; Moreover, if you feare the water will decay some weake place of the banke, then there must be a stancke made to shelve off the force of the water; also if there be any Skonees or other Workes that the water beates against the Wall, and decayes it by dashing against it; then for the preventing of it, there must bee Mattes made of Sedge and Bulrushes, which must be staked downe before the Earth, and Hurdles made with Oysiers.

Also for the Landing up of some shallow place, where the water runneth but in Winter time, or in great Stormes, the best way is to set it thicke of Oysiers, which will speedily grow, and keepe up the Sand and Rubbish from washing away, so that in a short time it will be landed up; View the Figure following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLX.

The manner how to make a Bridge with Cord to convey Souldiers over a Moate or River, by meanes whereof they may speedily Scale the Walls of a Towne.

THis kind of Bridge is used upon all surprises of Townes and Forts, which are to be taken in upon the sudden, it being so light, that two or three men may bring it twelve or fiveteene miles in an evening, and place it over any narrow water, so that their Souldiers may march over a∣breast: the manner of framing it, is after this fashion; First, there are two woodden Rowles, made of strong light wood, either of them being twelve foot long; one of these Rowles have at each end a Winch, which may be taken off and on like to a Grindstones; this is to wind and strayten the Ropes that they may lye tyte, at each end, and in the middest of the Rowles are to be holes bored thorow, wherein must be fastned foure strong Ropes, but if there be more Ropes it will be the stron∣ger, at every footes end there may be one, if the Bridge be twelve or ten foot broad, then it is but boring so many holes, and drawing so many Ropes thorow: then you are to take Cord, and knit it with Mashes, like the Mashes of a Flue, so that a mans foot cannot slip thorow; this Cord being knit all the way fast to the Cordes, one end of this Bridge is to be transported, either by one or two that can swimme, or in a Leatherne Boate made for that purpose; the ends of the Rowles are to bee staked downe strongly, either with Iron stakes made for that purpose, or with woodden; Next it is to be straitned out straite with Winches, and made fast, you are to note that over these Ropes and Mashes, there is Canvasse stitched downe to make the Bridge firme, that they may not faulter with their feet in passing over; View the Fi∣gure following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXI.

How to make a firme Bridge both for Horse and Men to march over and to transport their Ordnance, over any River, although as broad as the Thames.

EArle Charolois in the warres of France, termed the Holy League, being to passe over the great River of Seine, he caused divers Casks to be made of very strong bord or Clampall strongly hooped, and of a great bignesse, upon which he fastned Rafters, and Plancherd it over, placing divers strong Anchors to stay the Bridge from the force of the streame: over this Bridge (as Commines reports) marched a hundred thousand men, with all their provision and Ordnance: The States of the Netherlands have a kinde of an open flat Boat which they terme Punts; these they convey by water to any place they intend to march over; but if they march to some remote place, so that they cannot passe by water, then they are trans∣ported upon Carriages, and drawne by Horses, which doth them great service to stow in them Powder, Match, Ammunition, Bread and such like; they are made like to Horse-boatee flat-bottom'd the ends open and rising, so that when they are joyned together, the rising ends meeting it is like an Arch, thorow which the wa∣ter hath passage, foure men may march a brest over them; and they are twenty or thirty foot long a peece; they are fastned together with iron hookes; and their Masts and Tacklings are fixed to the sides of them, to strengthen them; the rising ends of these Punts have ledges nayled halfe a foot distance one from the other, to prevent the feet both of Men and Horse from sliding; they are stayed with Cables and Anchors from falling downe with the streame. These are the surest and best Bridges that ever yet were invented; and very easie to bee conveyed either by land or by water; besides many things belonging to the Warres may bee carryed in them.

The Prince of Orange many times made Bridges with small Vessels, as Hoighs or the like; they were stayed by Anchors; their beake heads pointing against the streame, there were Rafters plac'd from one Vessell to another and plancher'd over. The Figures of these severall Bridgesfollow.

[illustration]

A Bridge laid upon Caske.

[illustration]

The Tressels which the King of Sweden made his Bridge upon to passe over the Lech into Bavaria, the feet of the Tressels had weights upon their Ledges to hold them downe in the water.

[illustration]

There was likewise another Bridge framed at the Siege of Ostend called Pompey's Chariot, it was framed of foure wheeles, and a peece of Timber of a hundred and fiftie foot long lay upon the Wheeles, upon which was framed a slight Bridge, this was to be drawne in a darke night to the Motes side, and so thrust over by the force of men; the manner of framing of it, you may more plainely see by the Figure fol∣lowing, onely observe the Wheeles were fifteene foot in height.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXII.

The use of the Leathren Boate, and how to make it.

THis kinde of Boate was invented for the lightnesse of it, and to bee used to convey Souldiers over Motes and Rivers, whereby some suddaine and unexpected exploit may be done before the Enemy is aware of it: for a Souldier may carry one of these under his Arme twenty miles, without any great trouble: the manner of framing them, is after this manner; there must be the two sides or Bellies of an Oxe hide well tanned, beaten out and made concave; this being cut fashionable to the keele of a Boate, the two sides are to bee sowne strongly together, so that no water may soake through, then taking a couple of strong staves to pend the sides and the ends of the Leather from bending in, when the Souldiers are in it. The Hollanders carry their Skutes and Boates upon carriages, and in them they put their Ammunition and other necessaries, being well covered over with Tilts, or sometimes one Boate covers the other; these Boates they can speedily take off from the carriages, and upon all occasions suddainly make use of them. View the Figures of them.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXIII.

An easie and quicke way to cast water with great Scoopes.

MAny times when Fortifications are a raising, springs will arise and hinder the Workemen from digging; so that men must continu∣ally cast it out, or else their Workes are presently drowned. For the better and easier effecting of it, the Hollanders have invented a speedy way, the manner of doing it is thus; they pitch certaine Poles a crosse; the crosses are to stand in distance asunder, accord∣ing to the quantity of persons that are to worke betweene them; upon the top of these crosses, lyes another Pole over-thwart, unto this Pole are di∣vers Cordes fastned, and to the lower end of the Cord, is the handle of the Scoopes tyed within a foot of the Scoope, this Cord beares the weight both of the Scoope and of the water, the man is onely to guide the Scoope out, pulling it too and fro, these Scoopes may be very great ones; many times they nayle on Steales unto great Trayes, having a peece of Leather fastned over the end of the Tray by the Steale, to keepe the water from flying backwards; by this devise a man may cast more water at ease in one houre, than otherwise they can doe in three; besides, they wet not themselves halfe so much. View the Figure following.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXIV.

How to make a Skrew to winde up water, with the use of it.

THis Engine called the Skrew, was invented by the Hollanders to empty Pondes and Motes, it being a thing very usefull in the Warres, it is framed after this manner; First, there is a Rafter some twenty foot long, and sixteene inches about, this is hewen round, onely a foot and halfe at the upper end it is foure square, whereon a Trundle wheele is to be fixed, and to be turned about by a Cogge wheele, at each end of this Rafter of Wheele-tree is a gudgion of iron as the Wheele-tree of a Mill hath, for the Engine to turne upon; then within three quarters of a foot of the lower end, there is a Regall to be made in this Wheele-tree, which must be made halfe an inch deepe, and so carried in man∣ner of a Skrew, within the foot of a Trundle wheele, at the upper end; next you must take Deale Boordes of eighteene inches long, the one end of them is to be fitted cleverly into the Regall, and joyned so close that no water may get out, it will seem to be after the fashion of a winding Stare-case, this is to be covered over with Deale Boordes, and likewise to be reagold into them, that the ends of the short Boordes may be fastened into them, and hooped over with flat iron Hoopes, so that it will

seene round like a Pype, or a great long Barrell. Next there is a Cogge-wheele to bee made to turne this Engine round; it is formed like a Cogge-wheele of a Horse-mill, only the Cogges are to stand downwards, and it is drawne about with two or three Horses, Plankes being placed for them to goe on; this Engine being placed in the water: the nether Gudgeon running in a peece of Timber placed for that purpose in the water, the Engine lying side-wayes; the upper Gudgeon is likewise placed in a∣nother peece of Timber very tryly, so that the Cogge-wheele may turne about the Engine; at the upper end of the Barrell of this Engine must be placed a Troffe to re∣ceive the water, and convey it away into some ditch; this Engine will screw up water as fast as it runnes out of an Overshot-mill, whereby in a short time an infi∣nite deale of water may be drawne. View the Figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXV.

The Description of an Engine whereby water may be drawne out of any place or depth, or mount any River: water to bee conveyed to any place within three or foure miles distance.

SVppose A. B. C D. to be a deepe Moate, River, Well, or Pond, and EF to be a strong peece of Timber fastened over∣thwart the same a good distance in the water, in this Planke let there bee fastened a peece of Timber, with a strong Wheele in it as G and H. having strong Iron spikes drove athwart the Wheele within the crevice, and strongly rivited on each side, let them be three or foure inches di∣stance from each other: Let there bee likewise made in the said Planke two holes, in which set two hollow Posts that may reach the toppe of the Wheele, or so much higher, as you desire to mount the water; Let them bee made fast that they stirre not; in the bottome of one of these Posts there must be fastened a barrel•• of Brasse, as g. h made very smooth within, and betwixt these two Posts at the toppe, let there be fastened unto them both another peece of strong Timber to hold them fast, lest they start asunder, and in the middest of that make a Mortice, and in it fasten a strong peece of Timber, with a wheele like to the former; the pin thereof ought to be made fast to the Wheele, and have a crooked handle to turne about, that by tur∣ning it, you turne the Wheele also; then provide a strong Iron chaine of length sufficient, having on every third or fourth Linke, a peece of horne that will easily passe thorow the brasse Barrell, and a Leather on each side of it, but somewhat broa∣der then the horne; put this chaine under the lower Wheele in the Well upon both the lower Posts, draw it over the upper Wheele, and linke it fast and straite, then by turning the handle round, the Chaine will also turne, whose Leathers comming up the Brasse Barrells will force up the Waters before them. Or after the same manner you may take two Plankes eighteene or twenty inches broad a-peece, and twenty or thirty foot long, or more; at the lower edges of these Plankes there is a bottome Planke of the same length and thicknesse closely joyned and fastened; also downe the middest is another joyned and fixed, these are to bee nine inches broad, and being thus fra∣med, it makes a square Boxe, as is usually for Clocke-leads to goe downe in, the up∣per side is open like a Troffe; then there are divers square peeces of Bordes fitted justly to goe up and downe the said Concavities; these Bordes have foure flat Irons goes thorow them, to each corner goes one, these are keyed together, so as they may play to and fro; these square peeces being thus chained together, drives up the wa∣ter thorow the hollow of the said Plankes; at the two ends of this Engine is a Wheele as the former hath, only they differ in fashion, for they are made like a Mil∣lers Trundles, the uppermost hath a double Sweake, so that eight or tenne men may turne at it; the nether end of this Engine is placed in the water, the upper end is stayed with Crutchets or other provision; the open side lyes upwards, and in tur∣ning the Wheele, those square bordes comes downe the open side, and runnes up the Boxe, and forceth the water out.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXVI.

The description of an Engine to force water up to a high place very usefull to quench fire amongst buildings in Townes and Garrisons, or Huttes in Campes or Leaguers.

[illustration]

THis Engine hath a brasse Barrell marked a. having two suckers in the bottome of it marked b. also a large Pipe going upon one side of it marked c. with a Sucker nigh unto the top of it; and above all a hollow round Ball d. with a Pipe at the top of it made to skrew another Pipe upon it to direct the water to any place: then fit a Forcer unto the Barrell with a handle fastned unto the top, at the upper end of this Forcer drive a stong screw; and at the lower end a Skrew-nut; at the bottome of the Barrell fasten a Screw, and at the Barre that goeth crosse the top Barrell let there be another skrew-nut: put them all in order, and fasten the whole to a good strong frame marked f. that it may stand steady: when you use it; either you must place it in the water, or in the Channell of the streete; and drive the water up to it with broomes; and by moving the han∣dle too, and fro, it will cast the water up with mighty force to any place you shall direct it: Note, there is no Engine for Water-workes of what sort soever (whe∣ther for service or pleasure) can bee made without the helpe of Suckers, Forcers or Clacks: a Sucker is a Boxe made of Brasse having no bottome; in the midst of which there is a small barre goeth crosse the same, having a hole in the middest of it; this Boxe hath a lid so exactly fitted unto it, that being put unto it, no Ayre nor Water can passe betweene the Crevisses; this Cover hath a little Button on the top, and a seame that goeth into the Boxe, and so thorow the hole of the aforesaid crosse Barre; and afterwards it hath a little Button rivited on it, so that it may with ease clap up and downe, but not be taken, or slip quite out, as this figure in the Margent demonstrates.

[illustration]

A Forcer is a plug of wood exactly turned and leathered a∣bout the end that goeth into the Barrell, is Semi-circularly concave, as this second Figure opposite sheweth.

[illustration]

A Clacke, is a piece of Leather nailed over any hole of a Pumpe, &c. having a peece of Lead to make it lye close, so that no Ayre nor Water may passe thereby, as the third Fi∣gure sheweth.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXVII.

The description of another kinde of Engine to cast up water with violence.

[illustration]

THere must bee prepared a strong Table of Planke three or foure inches thicke; with an Iron Sweepe fastened at the one end thereof to lift up and downe; unto the end of the Sweepe let there be linked a piece of Iron having two Rods of length sufficient; let there bee made a hole quite through the middest of this Table, whose diameter let be above five or sixe inches; then provide two peeces of Brasse in forme of Hattes; but let the brim of the uppermost be but one inch broad; and have divers little holes through it round about: also in the crowne of this must bee placed a large Sucker, and over it a halfe Globe; from top of which must proceed a hollow Trunke, about a yard long, and of a good and wide Bore: then take good liquored Leather two or three times double, and put betweene the bordes and the brims of this, and with divers little Skrewes (put through the holes of the brim) skrew it fast unto the top of the Table. Note, the Table must bee leathered also underneath the compasse of the brim of the lower brasse; also the lower brasse must bee of equall diameter in hollownesse un∣to the other; but it must bee more Spirall towards the end or bottome; and must have either a large Clocke or Sucker fastened in it: also the brim of this must bee lar∣ger then that of the uppermost, and have two holes made about the middest on each side one; bore then two holes in the Table on each side of the brasse, one answera∣ble unto the holes of the brim of the lower brasse; through which holes put the two Rods of the Iron hanged to the Sweepe, and rivet them strongly into the holes of the lower brasse: place this Engine in water, and by moving the Sweepe up and downe, it will with great vigor cast the water on high.

CHAP. CCLXVIII.

How to make water at the foot of a Mountaine, to ascend to the top of it, and so to descend on the other side, for the furnishing of Garrisons.

TO this there must be a Pipe of Leade, which may come from the Foun∣taine A, to the top of the Mountaine B, and so to descend on the other side a little lower than the fountaine as at C, then make a hole in the Pipe at the top of the Mountaine B, and stoppe the end of the Pipe at A, and C, and fill this Pipe at B with water, and close it very carefully at B, that no ayre get in at the hole B, then unstop the end at A, and at C, then will the water runne perpetually up the Hill, and descend on the otherside; this is of great conse∣quence to furnish Villages.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXIX.

How to make a Scaling Ladder of Cords, which may be carried in a Souldiers Pocket, by which a Wall, Castle, or Towne may be scaled.

THis Engine is of excellent use in the Warres, for the speedy surprising of Townes; you must first take two pulleyes A and D, unto that of A there must be fastened a strong Hooke or Crampe of iron as B, and at D let there be fastened a Staffe of a foot and a halfe long as F, then at the pulley A, place a hand of Iron as E, to which tye a Cord of halfe an inch thicke (eyther of silke or pure hempe) then strive to make fast the pulley A, by the helpe of the Crampe-iron B, to the place that you intend to scale, and the staffe F being fastened at the pulley D, put it betweene your legges as if you would sit upon it, then holding the Cord G in your hand, you may guide your selfe to the place required.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXX.

Of Scaling-Ladders framed of Wood, and how they are to be used in the Warres.

THis Instrument for the scaling of a Wall, is to be made of light Wood, and about nine or ten foot long, scaled like a Ladder, the upper end of the sides, have Hookes fastned unto them, to hang somewhat shelving, that the Souldiers may the easier ascend, if the Wall be higher, then there may be two of these Ladders hooked toge∣ther, some are made with joynts to open longer or shorter, as occasion shall be; but for the most part, the Scaling-Ladders are made according to the height of the Walles that are to bee scaled; these are carried by Wagon or by Water, and are to be hung upon the Walles or Ports very secretly, for feare of discovery. View the figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXI.

The use of Gabions and Baskets, for the defence of the Canno∣niers and Musquetiers.

THese kind of Instruments were invented for the securitie both of the Cannoniers,* 1.684 and also of the Musquetiers, the manner of framing them is common to all Basket-makers; the Gabion or great Basket is some foure foot Diameter, and made of course ro••••es of Osiers or water Sallowes, and foure or five foot high: They are to be first placed where they should be used as a Barricado against the great Shot, and then they must be filled with good earth well rammed; there is many times three or foure set one before the other to bury the shot of the Cannon; and likewise one a••••op of another to shel∣ter, both the Men and Artillery. The same small Baskets are likewise made of rods,* 1.685 and two foot, or two foot and a halfe Diameter, and about the same height; these are to be filled with good earth, and to bee placed upon the Partapets and ••rest workes one close by another for the Musquetiers to discharge betweene them, and to shelter them from the Enemies Bullets, these are likewise many times set double; there must be a care no stones be amongst the earth; if Baskets should be wanting, then there must be Sacks filled, as before is shewed. View the Figures.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXII.

The use of Cru-wagons and small Carts, with the fashion of them.

THese Instruments were invented to convey Earth out of Moats, and to carry it upon workes; those Wheele-barrowes that are to be dri∣ven up by the strength of one man, are made very small and light; they are used chiefly in the foundation of a worke, before it growes too steepe for the Horse to clyme up: there are shelving places left for the Wagons to bee drivven up, and Bordes layd to keepe the wheeles from sinking into the eath. The Figure followes.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXIII.

The use of the Powder-pots in a pitcht Battell, to mischiefe and breake the Enemies Rankes, with the Description of the forme of them.

THese Engines are of use to discomfit an Enemy in a pitcht Battell, the manner of framing them, is according to this following Description: there must bee 〈…〉〈…〉 prepared, either of Earth, or of timed Lattin, the Mouths of them are to be foure inches Diameter, and the height of them sixe, on either side of these is a hollow quill formed of Earth or sodred of Lattin, about the bignesse of a Tobacco-pipe; these are to goe from the toppe of these Pottes just to the bottome to convey the the traine of Powder to the Touch-hole at the bottome; Vpon the toppe of this Quill is a round knob to bee plac'd hollow, about the bignesse of the halfe shell of a Walnut; this is to put the end of a Reed, or pipe made of Tinne, to convey the traines of Powder from one Pot to the other. Further, a cer∣taine number of these Pots, are to have upon all foure sides, Pipes, as before is shew∣ed; these are to be placed both at each end of the Stratagem, and in two or three places in the middest, from these the fire is immediatly to be given, that the fire may more speedily be spread to every ranke of these Pots; and indeed if they were all made after this manner to convey fire from all foure parts, it would bee more spee∣dier and better, onely the traines would bee a little the more trouble to lay from one to the other. These Pots are to be set sixe foot asunder every way square, or further as occasion shall offer. These Pots being filled halfe full of Powder, there is a peece of thinne Borde to bee fitted to the diameter of the Pot, and put downe close to the Powder; upon this Borde are Pible-stones to be placed, to fill up the rest of the Pot, and then to bee covered to keepe them in. In the next place there are divers Wimbles to be made of a just bignesse to the Pottes, these are to bore the holes in the earth to place the Pots in; note the holes are to bee bored somewhat aslent, that the stones may flie side-wayes to disorder the Rankes; if it be swardy ground, then only the top of the sward is to be laid to cover the Pots, and the residue of the earth is to be cast quite away towards your owne Troopes to avoide suspition; then there are Regals cut from pot to pot, to lay the Pipes which are to convey the traines of Powder; these are also to be covered as the former: there may be also long traines made, both from the two ends, and also from some other places about the middest, these traines are to bee likewise conveyed in Pipes tenne or twenty rodde towards your owne Bataliaes, and when the Enemy is marcht full upon them, then those ap∣pointed to attend these traynes are to give fire unto them; Note if the earth should bee wet, then the Pots and Pipes that convay the Traines, must bee closed with Pitch or Yallow to prevent the moystning of the Powder. View the Figure fol∣lowing of all the parts of the Stratagem, which happily may cause you better to un∣derstand it.

[illustration]

CCLXXIV.

How to make Torches and Candles to burne in any weather: being a thing most necessary in the warres.

THese kinde of Torches are invented to keepe fire either in windie or raynie weather; they are made of this composition following: Sul∣phur, Salt-peeter, Rosin, Calxvine, quick Peal, Lin-seed Oyle, and common Lamp-oyle: Pitch, Tarre, Camfire, Waxe, Tutia, Arsnicke, Quick-silver and Aqua-vitae: of this composition, may bee Torches, Candles, or Balls of Wild-fire made that will burne in the water without extin∣guishing.

CHAP. CCLXXV.

How to arme Pikes with Wild-fire and Pistols for to with-stand a Breach, and defend it against the Enemie.

THis kind of arming of Pikes at the Speares end with Wild-fire was in∣vented for the defence of a Breach, Port or Bridge; and it hath beene approved that an Enemy hath beene more feared with it then with any other kinde of weapon: the manner of framing these Weapons is after this fashion. First, there must be Powder bruised, eight parts; Peeter in Roch, one part; Peeter in Meale, one part; Sulphur in Meale, two parts; Rosin-Roch, three parts; Turpentine, one part; Lin-seed Oyle, one part; Verdigrease, halfe a part; Bole-Armoniack 1/3 part: these ingredients must bee put in a Bagge made of strong Canvas, which first must be put upon the Pikes end, and the lower end of it being tyed fast to the Pike, and the Bagge filled up with this Composition, the other end thereof must also bee fast tyed to the end of the Speare; the whole Bagge must be soundly woulded with a small Cord: this being done, then there must bee 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in a Pan, Pitch, foure parts; Lin-seed Oyle, one part; Turpentine, one part; Tarre, 1/3 part; Tallow, one part: these being mixt together must be daubed

all over the Canvas a good thicknes: then being cold, two holes must be bored into the Bagge two inches deepe with a sharp square Iron, filling the same with fine brui∣sed Powder; to this may be made fast divers Pistoll-Barrels charged with Bullets: this instrument will performe excellent service in a throng of people. View the figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXVI.

A Device to make a Musquet sh••ot with the same quantity of Powder halfe as farre againe, as her usuall Shot is.

THis Invention the King of Sweden did make tryall of, and it is a thing highly to be prized in the Warres: for many times it happens, that the wings of Shot in a pitch'd Battell are drawn out to skirmish with an E∣nemie before they be within the true distance of the Musquets comman∣ding Shot; or being discharged by the Enemie out of some Fort many times when they are out of distance, whereby much Powder and shot is spent to no purpose; now to remedie this there is an approved device which will cause a Mus∣quet or Canon to shoot halfe as farre againe with the same quantity of Powder: and this is effected by taking of white Case-pepper of the soundest Cornes, and steepe them 24 houres in the strongest Aqua-vitae; then being taken out and dryed in the Sunne, so that they may not danke the Powder; then charging the Peece with the usuall charge of Powder; you must take so many of these pepper Cornes as will co∣ver the circumference of the Bore, and being put downe close with the sticke to the Powder; then putting next to the Pepper the Bullet; this being tryed at any marke, it shall be sensibly found to convey the Bullet with such a violence farre beyond the accustomed shooting, and being charged without this ingredient, the Bullet shall not come little more then halfe the way.

CHAP. CCLXXVII.

Of the Bow-Pike, and how it is best to be used in the Warres.

THis Invention of joyning a Bowe to the Pike, may bee of excellent use in the Warres, to impale the Flankes of an Army, for when the Horse shall charge eyther in Flanke or Reare those Arrowes will gaule them: they are very good to be drawne out to safegard some small troopes of shot, that shall bee sent out to discharge upon the Horse; but for the placing of these in the Front of the maine Batta∣lia's, I hold it not so good, unlesse it be onely the two first rankes; for it will bee very troublesome when the Troopes snall joyne at push of Pike; besides, the Pikes heads will soone out their Bow-strings in sunder, and make them of no validitie: and questionlesse in the time of stormie wet weather, these Bowes would doe great ser∣vice, when the Musquet cannot be discharged for wet; but were it so, that a Pike were made of such an indifferent bignesse towards the But end, that there might be disposed in it three Petronell Barrels, made of a very light substance, as there is a new Invention found out in that kinde; there is a light locke to be plac'd a yard from the But end, this shall at once pulling up, strike fire twice, having a double pan, and that part of the Pike the Petronell is plac'd in, is to be turned round, so that the Touch-holes of these Barrels may turne to the locke one after another, without removing ei∣ther of hand or foot; this would worke some effect against the Enemies Pikes, it going with that force, that it would enter their Corslets; which the force of an Arrow could not performe. View the Figures.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXVIII.

The Description of an Engine, whereby the diversitie of the strength of powder may be truely knowne.

TO know which are the strongest sortes of Gunpowder; according as this Figure demonstrates, you must prepare a Boxe as A B, beeing foure inches high, and two inches wide, having a Lid joyned unto it; the Boxe ought to be made of Iron, Brasse, or Copper, and to be fastened to a good thicke Planke, and to have a Touch-hole at the Bottome as O, and that end of the Boxe where the hinge of the Lid is, there must stand up from the Boxe, a peece of Iron or Brasse, in length answerable unto the Lid of the Boxe, this peece of Iron must have a hole quite through it towards the top, and a Spring as AG, must be skrewed or rivited, so that the one end may cover the said hole; on the top of all this Iron or Brasse that stands up from the Boxe, there must be jointed a peece of Iron (made as you see in the Figure) the hinder-part of

which, is bent downeward and entreth the hole that the Spring covereth; the other part resteth upon the Lid of the Boxe, open this Boxe Lid, and put in a quantity of Powder, then shut the Lid downe, and put fire to the Touch-hole at the Bottome, the Pow∣der being fired, will blow the Bo••e Lid up the not∣ches, more or lesse, according to the strength of the Powder; thus by firing the same quantity of divers kindes, at severall times, you may know which is strongest.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXIX.

Of a Bridge made without Boates or Barrels, Cordage or Timber-worke which trans∣ported 4000 men at once, ouer a great River.

IN the Ascent of Cyrus, the third Booke, pag the 57. the Army being in great distresse invironed on one fide with high Mountaines, and deepe broad Rivers on the otherside, a Rhodian presented himselfe to the Generall, and did undertake to transport 4000 at once, over those Rivers, without Boates or Barrels (whereof indeed they were de∣fective) wherefore he provided all the raw Hides that he could pos∣sibly get, and sowing them up very close, blew them full of Winde, then hee made use of such Cords and Ropes as the Army could affoord, and tyed them together, ha∣ving stones upon them which went downe like Anchors, these being plac'd upon the waters, he threw Rice upon them, and then earth, which kept them from totter∣ing, making them lye stable, every Bouget was able to convey two men; by this meanes the Army was convayed well.

CHAP. CLXXX.

How Caesar made a Bridge upon the River Rhine and carried his Army over into Germanie.

CAesar holding scorne to transport his Army over the River Rhine by Boates into Germany, he bethought himselfe to try what hee could doe to make an artificiall Bridge, which should stand more for his honour, and the terrour of his Enemies; they conceiving it impossible to frame a Bridge over a water so deepe, broad, and swift, wherefore he caused great store of Timber to be brought, and at two foot distance, he placed two Trees of a foot and halfe square, sharpened at the lower end, and cut answerable to the depth of the River; these he let downe into the water with Engines, and drove them in with Commanders; not perpendicularly, after the fashion of a Pile, but G••blewise and bending with the force of the water; opposite unto these, he placed two other Trees, joyned together after the same fashion, being 40 foot distant from the for∣mer by the demension betweene their lower parts in the bottome of the water, and reclining against the recourse of the River; these two paire of Couples thus placed, he joyned together with a Beame of two foot-square, equall to the distance betweene the said Couples, and fastned them at each end on eyther side of the Couples, with

Braces and Pins, whereby the strength of the worke and the nature of the Frame was such, that the greater the violence of the streame was, and the faster it fell upon the Timber, worke, the stronger the Bridge was united together in the couplings and joynts; In like manner he proceeded with Couples and Beames, untill the Worke was brought unto the other side of the River, then he layed straight plankes from Beame to Beame, and covered them with hurdles, and so hee made a floore to the Bridge Moreover, on the Lower side of the Bridge, he drove Supporters, which being fastened to the Timber-worke, did strengthen the Bridge against the force of the water, and at the upper side of the Bridge at a reasonable distance, he placed Piles to hinder the force of Trees or Boates, or what else the Enemy might cast downe to damme up the water, whereby the Bridge might have beene borne downe by the violence of the streame; this worke was begun and finisht in ten dayes.

CHAP. CCLXXXI.

The Description of an Instrument, invented by King Henry the fifth, at the Battell of Agincourt, and since used by the King of Sweden, and by him called a Swines-Pike.

THis Instrument was first invented by King Henry the fifth, at the Battell of Agincourt, and did infinite service there; and now of late dayes was used by that famous Generall, the King of Sweden: the manner of it is thus; First, the Instrument is made of a strong peece of Ash, about foure foot in length; biggest in the middest, and shaved Taper-wise towards each end; upon each end is faste∣ned on an Iron Pike of an indifferent length, with cheekes downe a pretty way the staffe to strengthen it; this instrument every Masquetier carried one of them at his girdle, & when they were upon service, as they advanc'd to give fire upon the Enemie, they stucke down one of these somewhat sloping, to the intent if the Ene∣mies horse should charge them, these Instruments would prevent them; for they could not possibly shift them, but they would pierce their Horses Breasts: by this they were able to maintaine a skirmish, against the potency of the Horse. View the Figures of it.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXXIII.

How a Case of Tinne is to be made, to carry light Matches in, that the Enemy may not discover them.

THe Prince of Orange when he intended to assault a Towne by night, up∣on an On-slaught, he invented an Instrument to carry the light matches in, so that the sparkes of them might not be discovered from the walles by the Enemies Sentinels, the manner of forming them wa•• thus; the•••• was a peece of Tinne or Lattin, made like an elder pipe about a foot long, the hollownesse of it was of sufficient bignesse to hold the match within it; it

had also divers holes on eyther side, like the holes of a Flute, to let in the ayre to keepe the match from extinguishing; the match being drawn in a good way into the Pipe, it cannot be discovered, for the winde can have no power to make the sparkles flye. View the figure.

[illustration]

CHAP. CCLXXXIII.

How the Venetians did order their Powder, after their Arsnall was burnt.

THe Venetians had their Magazine blowne up with Gun-powder, two or three severall times, and for a future pre∣vention they sate in counsell a long time, how they might prevent this danger, which might come either by accident or treachery, but they could in no wise contrive a way to their liking; a poore man in Venice hearing of it, had present∣ly a device in his brains how to order the matter, so that no damage might ensue eyther by fire to consume it, or by any other meanes to decay the strength of the powder; where∣upon being brought before the Estates, he wisht them not to compound the three ingredients (that powder is made of) together, but to lay in one roome the Salt-peeter, in another roome the Brimstone, and in the third the Charcoale, and so to compound it, as they used it, for none of these three being seve∣rall, could easily be fired, and if they were, it could do no great harme before it should be discovered; neither would it waste nor consume in the strength of it; but being made into powder, it would blow all up of a suddaine; he being rewarded for his advice, they made use of his counsell and doe observe it to this present day.

FINIS.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Pax Dei. Col. 3. 13.
• * 1.2

  2. Kings. 19. 37.
• * 1.3

  Ester 1. 1.
• * 1.4

  Chrori••••r Carionis Lib. 2.
• * 1.5

  〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.6

  Centum millia peditum & de••••m millia equitū Car••on. Lib. 2.
• * 1.7

  Sexcenta millia Iustin. Lib▪ 2.
• * 1.8

  Iustin. Lib. 2.
• * 1.9

  Chron. Cario. Lib. 2.
• * 1.10

  Iustin. Lib. ••▪
• * 1.11

  Dan. 11. 2.
• * 1.12

  ••••ren Carionis Lib. 2. Iustin. Lih. 9.
• * 1.13

  Plut. invita Alex∣quando omnes opes suas inter 〈◊〉〈◊〉 distribu∣••ss••t, hic pe••d•••• dicen∣t••, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Rex reli∣quam erit? spes s••la re∣spondit.
• * 1.14

  In omni praelio non ta•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉; et vir•••• ••••∣docta: quam ars & ex∣cr••••tum solent traeslare victorum vegetius Lib. 1.
• * 1.15

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••acilius re••••••••∣tur qu••m expellantur. 〈◊〉〈◊〉.
• * 1.16

  Plut. in vita Alexand.
• * 1.17

  Iustin▪ 400000. Plutarch in vita Alex∣ander, decies centena militum millia.
• * 1.18

  Iosephus Lib. 11.
• * 1.19

  Ant. Iud. cap. 8.
• * 1.20

  Iustin. Lib. 11.
• * 1.21

  Ab hoc enim quis non ••••••it 〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 1.22

  Chron. Carionis.
• * 1.23

  Et sia multitudine victus, gloria tamen om∣nes vicit.
• * 1.24

  Chronicon Carionis.
• * 1.25

  Iustin. Lib. 12.
• * 1.26

  Sibi Regem ••orum pri∣vatum ••••stem dep••s••u.
• * 1.27

  Plut. in vita Alexandri.
• * 1.28

  Luxuriant animi rebus plerum{que} secundis.
• * 1.29

  Iustin. Lib. 12:
• * 1.30

  Quem Imperii faciat haeredem. Respondit dignissimum.
• * 1.31

  Iustin. Lib. 13.
• * 1.32

  Sir Walter Raleigh▪
• * 1.33

  Justin. lib. 13.
• * 1.34

  Sir Walter Raleigh,
• * 1.35

  Ad Antipatrum & Polyperchont•• pro••u••it. Iustin.
• * 1.36

  Infidiae in infidiato re•• verse.
• * 1.37

  Justin. lib. 14.
• * 1.38

  Plut. in vit•• Eumenes.
• * 1.39

  Prius vitam se quam fidem relicturum.
• * 1.40

  Justin lib. 14.
• * 1.41

  Olim interrogatus Age∣sil••us quare Sparta sine muris, ostendens Cives armatus dixit 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.
• * 1.42

  Iustin. Lib. 15.
• * 1.43

  In vita. De•• ••.
• * 1.44

  Dum ••••nis os rodit soci∣um quem diligit odit.
• * 1.45

  Iustin. Lib. 1••.
• * 1.46

  Iustin. Lib. 17.
• * 1.47

  Assiduum inter pacet discordia malum
• * 1.48

  Dan. 2.
• * 1.49

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 fore unde victori••••u••••t. Livy.
• * 1.50

  Faedus inter Romanes & Albanes.
• * 1.51

  Vt cuius populi cives eo ••ertam••ne vic••ssent is alteri populo cum bona paceimperitare••. Livy Dec. prim. Lib. primo.
• * 1.52

  Livy dec. 1. Lib. 2.
• * 1.53

  Alterius uter{que} telo transfixus occubuit Plut. vit. Val. Public.
• * 1.54

  Vno plus Hetruscorum cecidisse in a••••e, vincere bello Romanum. Livy. Dec. 1. Lib. 1.
• * 1.55

  Nec unus in te ••go hos ••nimos gessi, lorgus post me ordo est idem peten∣tium decus, Livy. Dec. 1. Lib. 2.
• * 1.56

  Inquibus totum orbem pecavit Florus.
• * 1.57

  Simili••r victo sit populus qui vicit. Florus.
• * 1.58

  Aquile prodi••e n••lu••∣runt. Flouus.
• * 1.59

  Livy dec. 3. Lib. 2.
• * 1.60

  Cunctando 〈…〉〈…〉.
• * 1.61

  Tandem eum militiae magistrum delegisse Ro∣manos qui bellum rati∣one, non fortuna ger••∣ret.
• * 1.62

  〈…〉〈…〉 credere posse▪ Livy.
• * 1.63

  Entrop••us.
• * 1.64

  Vincere s••••s Hanibal vi∣ctoria uti rescis. Livy
• * 1.65

  Quos nulli m••li vicer••t vis, perdidere nimi•• bona ac voluptates im∣modicae.
• * 1.66

  ipsum ••ludin exitium suum armavit. Flor.
• * 1.67

  Amentes estis si multos in Caesare Marios non videtis cavendum est a puero. Plut. in vit. Caesar.
• * 1.68

  Nec hic ferebat parem necille superiorem. Flor.
• * 1.69

  Exinde a Crassi Juliae{que} morte statim aemulatio erupit. Flor.
• * 1.70

  Veniret & peteret ma∣lorem more. Flor.
• * 1.71

  〈…〉〈…〉 Caesaris.
• * 1.72

  Caesar Lib. 3. bellorun. civilium.
• * 1.73

  Lucius Florus▪
• * 1.74

  Cuius in scuto centum atque quadraginta tela sedere. Florus.
• * 1.75

  Caesar. Lib. 3. bellorum civilium.
• * 1.76

  Aperto Late••••
• * 1.77

  Miles faciom feri. Flor.
• * 1.78

  Artificio magis quam viribus decertandum▪ Hirtius debello Afr.
• * 1.79

  Quid tumiles Tiro tam feroculus es?
• * 1.80

  Non sum tiro Labiene, sed de Legione decima veteramus. Hirtius.
• * 1.81

  ••rjussu Caesaris 〈…〉〈…〉 ••a∣nere ••aepit. Hirtius.
• * 1.82

  Ante Imperium ducis sua sponte sgna cecine∣runt. Flor.
• * 1.83

  Pro uno duos s••are Pompe••os. Flor.
• * 1.84

  San•• & ipse Caesar an∣te actem mestor non ex more, &••.
• * 1.85

  Faedum etiam inter Barbaros. Flor.
• * 1.86

  Plut. in vita Ant••n.
• * 1.87

  Nec illis deerat animus adultionem, sed ducem non habebant. Flor.
• * 1.88

  Plut. in vita Anton.
• * 1.89

  Non bene cum sociis cegna venus{que} manent. Ovid.
• * 1.90

  Caesar sororem videns; pell••is amore esse re∣rectam saep••us accusavi••. Plut. in vit. Anton.
• * 1.91

  Romanum imperium pe∣tit mulier Aegyptia & promisit, Anthon. qua∣si facilior esset Partho Romanus. Florus.
• * 1.92

  Cleopatrae voluntas plus potuit. Plut.
• * 1.93

  Prima dux ••ug•• Regin••. Florus.
• * 1.94

  Ad motis ad venas ser∣pentibus quasi somn•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Flor.
• * 1.95

  Lucius Florus.
• * 1.96

  Non minus in secundis adversa, quam in ad∣ver••s secunda ••••••tan∣da sunt. Just l. 31.
• * 1.97

  Cane ne Clip••um post vulnera sumas.
• * 1.98

  Pacem sub Clipeo para∣te. Salust.
• * 1.99

  Inopinata magis pre∣miunt male. Seneca.
• * 1.100

  Ad priv••am novorum 〈…〉〈…〉. Cae∣sar 〈…〉〈…〉. l. 4. c. 1••
• * 1.101

  1 Ma••ch. 8. 16.
• * 1.102

  Ne ••ut Romanae dit••o∣•• is ••um Judais bellum gerere li••••at, nequ•• pra∣bere hostibus eorum, tri∣t••cum aut n••vis, aut pecuntam. Joseph. An∣••iq. l. 12. c. 18.
• * 1.103

  Stowes Annals in vi∣ta Elizabeth.
• * 1.104

  Lucius Florus l. 4. c. 2.
• * 1.105

  Plurimum adterrem ho∣stium, splendor ••orf••rt, a•• competens armorum aparatus plurimum fa∣cit 〈◊〉〈◊〉 recessitatem. Po∣••lybiis hist. l. 11.
• * 1.106

  Armanon Supellectilem decar••esse. Salust bello Jugurth.
• * 1.107

  Studium illud vestimen∣tis sese ornand•• mulie∣ris esse, id{que} non admo∣dum pudicae, armorum vero sumptum & seri∣um studium bonor••m, virorum qui & se & patrem serv••r•• cupiant, Polyb. l. 11.
• * 1.108

  Guiccardi••e.
• * 1.109

  Quemadmodum homi∣nes sine nervis ambula∣re ne••••••unt, ita nec bel∣lum of ••ua•• progredi si∣ne p••cu••a. Lips. pol. l. 5.
• * 1.110

  Viget. l. ••
• * 1.111

  Guiccardine. 〈…〉〈…〉 pretium nunc est, dat 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ho∣nores, cersus amic••••a••. Ovid.
• * 1.112

  2 King. 16. 8.
• * 1.113

  Imperat aut servit col∣lecta 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Ho∣rat Serm.
• * 1.114

  Dis••iplinam non 〈◊〉〈◊〉 servare 〈…〉〈…〉. Cassi••dor.
• * 1.115

  Salustius in bello Ju∣gurthino.
• * 1.116

  Haec fuit de nobis ejus prima victoria ••lorus.
• * 1.117

  Rex peritus fortius ad∣versus Romanos aurum esse, quam ferrum pacem 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Florus.
• * 1.118

  Salust in bello. Jugurth.
• * 1.119

  Phil. de Com l. 4.
• * 1.120

  Vrbem venalem & ma∣ture perituram, si emp∣torem munerit. Salust. Bello Jugurth.
• * 1.121

  Stowes Annals in vi∣ta Edmund.
• * 1.122

  Atheniensibus Delphios Oraeulorum consolenti∣bus, responsum fuerat, salutem Mu••is ••gn••is tucrentur, id est, Na∣vibus. Justin. l. 2.
• * 1.123

  Stowes Annals in vi∣ta Elizabeth.
• * 1.124

  Priusquam Scythae e∣brietate, quam Bello vincuntur. Just▪ lib. 1.
• * 1.125

  Stowes Annals in vi∣ta Elizabeth.
• * 1.126

  Matth. 15. 14.
• * 1.127

  Stow in regno Haroldi.
• * 1.128

  Publica privatis ante ferenda bonis.
• * 1.129

  Histori•• Natural. l. •• c. ••7.
• * 1.130

  Grimston.
• * 1.131

  Sir Walter Raleigh.
• * 1.132

  Nonagon.
• * 1.133

  Decagon.
• * 1.134

  Vndecagon.
• * 1.135

  Duodecagon.
• * 1.136

  Note the line of defence is 150. paces, and not longer, be∣cause it is taken from the •• part of the Cur∣tin totall, and not from the Angle of the Flanke, as Errard Be••∣lay, Flam Catanes, and John Cales would have it, wherein they much erre, as after∣wards I shall demon∣strate.
• * 1.137

  This kinde of Bul∣worke that takes its defence from any place or part of the Curtin, doth cause the Line of defence pro∣ceeding from th•• flan∣ked Angle to the flanke, to be a Flanke Fichant, as the French termes it▪
• * 1.138

  It borrowes the name from the ••••shion of it.
• * 1.139

  E••ards opinion is o∣therwise, which I shall after in this Booke confute, as erronious.
• * 1.140

  Maro doth not allow any acute Angle to be fortified otherwise then with a halfe Bulworke, or else to be made the Flanked angle of a Bulworke, as appeareth by his dis∣course upon the first Irregular Pentagon.
• * 1.141

  The first imperfection of a Fortresse.
• * 1.142

  The second imperfe∣ction.
• * 1.143

  The third imperfecti∣on.
• * 1.144

  The fourth imperfe∣ction.
• * 1.145

  The fift and last im∣perfection.
• * 1.146

  The remedies to pre∣vent these former im∣perfections.
• * 1.147

  How to helpe them∣selves against the E∣nemies batteries made with Gabions.
• * 1.148

  Answer to an object∣ion.
• * 1.149

  How to remedy the Enemies Battering the Flankes when they have planted their batteries neere the Counter scarpe.
• * 1.150

  A remedy to hinder the Enemy from As∣saulting the Breach after it is made.
• * 1.151

  How to prevent the Mining under the Bulworkes.
• * 1.152

  A remedie to prevent Treason in a Fort.
• * 1.153

  How to prevent sur∣p••••zes that may bee made against a Fort.
• * 1.154

  Remedies to be used in a long Siedge, to prevent the Enemies purposes.
• * 1.155

  The difference in a Siedge betwixt great and small Ordnance, for their service.
• * 1.156

  The French Engi∣neeres opinion of their Fortification.
• * 1.157

  The proportion of a Muskets shot, is 120. paces.
• * 1.158

  Note, a Toise is 6. feet by the Rule, 12. inches to each foot.
• * 1.159

  A Toise is 6. Foot.
• * 1.160

  The opinion of de∣fending the Flankes with Musquets dis∣proved by argument and reason.
• * 1.161

  View the Figure where the manne•• of the Galleries and the Ordnance planting is desiphered.
• * 1.162

  A reason produc'd why the Musquet is not of validity to se∣cure the Workes from the Flankes.
• * 1.163

  The Musquet is not able to beate downe the Enemies Galle∣ries: wherefore they must have Canon shot planted on the Flankes.
• * 1.164

  The fond opinion of the French Engineers.
• * 1.165

  The defence of the Bulworke is to be ta∣ken from the third part of the Curtin.
• * 1.166

  It is most safe to take the defence from the third part of the Cur∣tin.
• * 1.167

  Reasons why the Mote ought not be brimfull.
• * 1.168

  The Worke in the mid∣dest of the Mote is of great defence and safe∣gard, as you may per∣ceive in the precedent Figure.
• * 1.169

  The first thing to bee done in an Assault, is to batter the tops of the Walls.
• * 1.170

  Note this Work with∣in the Mote must not be made so low, that the Counterscarpe may command it; for then it will bee of no force.
• * 1.171

  When to mount the Canons for Battery.
• * 1.172

  How to cast the earth for your safegard.
• * 1.173

  How to preserve the Galleries from shoot∣ing downe.
• * 1.174

  How to prevent an Assault.
• * 1.175

  Werefore Out-works were devised.
• * 1.176

  Passages by water carefully to be forti∣fied.
• * 1.177

  All warlike instru∣ments are to bee in a readinesse to repel the Enemy from the Breach.
• * 1.178

  Divers things consi∣derable in the defend∣ing a Breach.
• * 1.179

  By the ceasing of the Canon, you may know when the Enemy in∣tends to enter the Breach.
• * 1.180

  Divers considerations for a Generall, before he enterprizes any at∣tempt against the E∣nemy.
• * 1.181

  How those should de∣fend themselves in the Fort against the As∣sailants.
• * 1.182

  How the Musqueteers ought to be demeaned at the Enemies first approaches.
• * 1.183

  They use to plant the foot of the inside of the Walles, with Osi∣ers and Willowes, to make Baskets, and mend Breaches.
• * 1.184

  How the Enemy ought to draw his Trenches.
• * 1.185

  What the Defendants ought to doe, the Ene∣my having gained the halfe Moone.
• * 1.186

  How the Assailants may hinder the de∣fence of the Cunette, or Ravelin.
• * 1.187

  How to prevent the breaking of Grana∣does.
• * 1.188

  How the Defendants ought to make their Composition with the Enemy.
• * 1.189

  Note, if there bee 60. men to guard the pas∣sage, the Redout must be 60. feet square on all three sides, allow∣ing, 3. feet for each man to use his armes in, viz. 20. men on 1 side.
• * 1.190

  A Redout made o•• Turffe used by Spino∣la at the Siege of Breda.
• * 1.191

  A Fort made of Turffeused by Spino∣la at the Siege of Breda.
• * 1.192

  The Description of the Redouts.
• * 1.193

  The Description of the Forts.
• * 1.194

  The Description of the rest of the Forts and Redouts.
• * 1.195

  The parts a Master of the Ordnance is to be indued with.
• * 1.196

  Those that wait upon the Ordnance, must lodge neere his owne Peece, day and night, to be in readinesse to execute such com∣mands as shall be deli∣vered to them.
• * 1.197

  The Gunner must be carefull in giving directions for the safe placing and keep∣ing the Munition and Powder.
• * 1.198

  These Tooles ought to be marked with the Gallowes, hee that steales them dyes without mercy.
• * 1.199

  Note, there is but 14 ounces haberde poyze, to each of these Ve∣netian pounds.
• * 1.200

  The description of Ordnance re-inforced
• * 1.201

  Master Norton sayes these kinde of peeces requires the just weight of powder, with the iron cast shot for their due charge.
• * 1.202

  A difference in legiti∣mate Ordnance, in re∣gard of their debility in mettall.
• * 1.203

  The nature of bastard peeces re-inforced & lessened.
• * 1.204

  Ordinary Basiliske or Bastard Double-Cul∣verin.
• * 1.205

  Serpentine or Bastard Culverin.
• * 1.206

  Aspike or Bastard demi-Culverin.
• * 1.207

  Pellican or Bastard quarter-Culverin.
• * 1.208

  Bastard Fawlcon.
• * 1.209

  Bastard Rabinet.
• * 1.210

  Base.
• * 1.211

  The description of the lessened Bastard peeces, their weights▪ and the distances of conveying their shot.
• * 1.212

  To what use the Ca∣non is imployed in service, and of their severall kindes.
• * 1.213

  The particular use of the Culverin in ser∣vice, and of their se∣ve••all kindes.
• * 1.214

  Note, these kinde of Ordnance shoot iron bullets; but if the markes bee soft sub∣stance, then stone bul∣lets will doe as well, and save great charge.
• * 1.215

  The use of the Canon Periors, and of their severall kindes.
• * 1.216

  The fashion and bo••e of outlandish Periors
• * 1.217

  Note, the difference betweene the lower end of the Chase, and the upper end of the Chamber is this; the upper end of the Chā∣ber is called the Or∣loe, or Relish.
• * 1.218

  The Canon Priors before mentioned shoot ••/3. parts of the weight of the Stone∣shot in corne powder, onely abating pro∣portionably 5 pound of powder for every 100. weight of shot:
• * 1.219

  The length of the Canon Perior are a∣bout 8. Calibres of their Bores at the mouth of the Chase; the thicknesse of the Chambers are 2/••. parts in mettal at the touch hole.
• * 1.220

  The length of the Portingall base is a∣bout 〈◊〉〈◊〉 times ••her Calibre, the sling-pace 12.
• * 1.221

  The murtherors port-peeces, and Fowlers, 8 at the most, besides their Chambers, and their Chambers about 3 times the Diameter of the Bore in length, and weighes the 6 or 8 part of the whole Chase.
• * 1.222

  These peeces are like∣wise used in besieged Townes to shoot bla∣zing Fire balls in a darke night into the Enemies▪ Workes to discover what they are a doing ••or it the E∣nemy bee approached to the foot of the wall to undermine it, or to enter a breach when no other ••••ot can hin∣der them, then these will worke good ef∣fect.
• * 1.223

  You may charge these peeces with cartouch∣es.
• * 1.224

  Note the Wadde be∣tweene the Tamkin and the Shott, is to save the Shott from being broken by the Tamkin.
• * 1.225

  The Petardire must bee carefull to avoyd the danger of her re∣verse, by retyting in a side line from it.
• * 1.226

  They are to be cooled with vineger and wa∣ter, or wine lees, or urine and water.
• * 1.227

  Three differences in Fortification of each sort of Ordnance.
• * 1.228

  The difference of Peeces described.
• * 1.229

  How to tertiate peece of Ordnance.
• * 1.230

  How to konow when a Peece is reinforced.
• * 1.231

  Note, every Peece 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Ordnance that is tru∣ly Fortified with met∣tall, ought to contain as much mettall in thicknes round about, so farre as the Cham∣ber where the powder lyeth as the Bullet is in height.
• * 1.232

  How to know when one side o•• the Peece is thicker then the o∣ther.
• * 1.233

  How to know when a Peece of Ordnance is truely bored.
• * 1.234

  How to despart a Peece of Ordnance Arithmetically, he•• bore not lying right.
• * 1.235

  Note, which side of the Peece is thickest of mettall, towards that side the Bullet will faile, because the thinner side is more smart, and the thicker side more dull in hea∣ting.
• * 1.236

  A generall rule to know how farre a Peece that is thickest of mettall on one side will carry wide to any marke assigned.
• * 1.237

  Rules to be observed in laying Ordnance upon their carriages, so that they may shoot truely.
• * 1.238

  Lovis Collado, and A¦lexander Bianco differ about the dimentions of the carriages.
• * 1.239

  The second observa∣tion, is about the wheeles and the parts belonging to them.
• * 1.240

  The third observatiō, is about the trunnions if not plac't in a diag∣onall lyne, with the Axis of the Peece, it will shoot wide.
• * 1.241

  Note, the trunnions ought so to be plac't, as •• parts of the cir∣cumference of the peece may bee seene in that place whereas the trunnions are set, and one right against th' other.
• * 1.242

  If the cariage or trun∣nions ••ares lye high∣er or lower, one then the other; or the car∣riage bee to wide, so that the peece lye not fast, but starts aside in her discharge, causeth errour in the shoot.
• * 1.243

  The fourth observa∣tion, is about the plat∣forme, &c.
• * 1.244

  The fift observation is about the bullet.
• * 1.245

  The sixt observation is the winde, &c.
• * 1.246

  Note, a peece of Or∣dnance will shoot fur∣ther from sea to land, then from land to sea; the thicknesse of the A••re at sea hinders the passage.
• * 1.247

  Note, in spunging your peece, you are to stand on the right side, the spunge being drawne out, you must give it a knock on the out-side of the mouth of the peece to shake off the foulnesse.
• * 1.248

  How to frame Car∣trages of Canvas or paper, which shall hold the due charge of powder for any kinde of peece if they bee made of paper, then the seames are to bee glewed, if cloth, then towed.
• * 1.249

  Some use Formers of Wood, made the just height of the Bore, to winde the paper or cloth about to fashion it.
• * 1.250

  The papers of the Cartrage must be oyl∣ed, and the canvasse must be tallowed over to defend them from wet▪
• * 1.251

  How to charge a peece with a Cartrage.
• * 1.252

  How to give a Canon her true charge.
• * 1.253

  A Ladle containing a true charge for a Ca∣non, described.
• * 1.254

  An exact Rule to make a Ladle by, which shall containe the due charge of any peece of Ordnance.
• * 1.255

  How to charge a peece Gunner••like with a Ladle.
• * 1.256

  How to finde out the ••/5 part of the bullets circumferēce, that the Ladle may truely▪ bee made thereby.
• * 1.257

  An arithmeticall ex∣ample, &c.
• * 1.258

  An observation how to charge a peece of Ordnance truly with∣out ladle, cartrages, or scales, or ballances.
• * 1.259

  Observations about the strength and con∣ditions of Gunpow∣der, and accordingly to order the charge to make a perfect shot.
• * 1.260

  The three sundry e••∣gredients that powder is made of, with the quantities of the com∣position described.
• * 1.261

  How to know when powder is decayed through mutation or corruption, three se∣verall wayes.
• * 1.262

  According to the weight of the shot, the powder must be pro∣portioned, whether it be Iron, Leade, or Stone-shot.
• * 1.263

  The difference in weight betwixt a Bul∣let of Leade, Iron, and Stone, they being all three of one Diame∣ter and Circumfe∣rence.
• * 1.264

  The true quantity of Powder each kinde of Bullet requires for its proportionall charge.
• * 1.265

  Zote, these proporti∣ons have beene obser∣ved to doe best execu∣tion.
• * 1.266

  The length of the Peece is to be conside∣red, before a due pro∣portion of Powder can be allowed for its charge.
• * 1.267

  A difference in firing the Powder in a long, from a shorter Peece.
• * 1.268

  An example, whereby to finde out the true weight of a great Bul∣let, by having the true weight of a small one performed by Arith∣meticall Rules.
• * 1.269

  How to know by A∣rithmeticall Rules the weight of a mar∣ble Bullet by an Iron, they beeing both of one Diameter.
• * 1.270

  By the same Rule to finde out the weight of an Iron Bullet, by a Marble, being both of one Diameter.
• * 1.271

  A Rule to finde out how much one Bullet is higher in Diameter then another.
• * 1.272

  A generall Rule to finde out the circum∣ference by the Dia∣meter.
• * 1.273

  The use of the fol∣lowing Table de∣scribed.
• * 1.274

  Note, to perform this the solid square inches must be found out, by multiplying the mea∣sure of the known in∣ches of the Diameter of the Bullet cubical∣ly, and then againe multiply the Cube by 1••, and divide the last Product by 21, and the number in the quotient, is the solid square inches: The square inch of an iron Bullet, weighes foure ounces, and so of the rest.
• * 1.275

  Mr. Nortons Art of Great Artillery, p. 36.
• * 1.276

  Mr. Nortons observa∣tions, about the true charging a Peece of Ordnance, with the due proportion of powder allowed to Bullets of each kinde of mettall, prescribed.
• * 1.277

  Three things to bee considered in making a true shot.
• * 1.278

  The first is distance to the marke.
• * 1.279

  The second is beyond the distance of point-blancke.
• * 1.280

  The third is under point-blancke.
• * 1.281

  The quadrant descri∣bed with its parts, which is to bee made of Brasse or some hard Wood.
• * 1.282

  The mounting o•• im∣basing of a Peece is performed by putting in o•• drawing out the quines, as reason shall direct.
• * 1.283

  Read Mr▪ Nortons pra∣ctice of Artillery pag. 97▪ 98. and it will shew you by example how to performe these things; but you shall finde errour commit∣ted by the Printer, which must be amen∣ded.
• * 1.284

  The staffe to levell or imbase a Peece of Ordnance described, read pag. 13••. how to imbase a Peece by this staffe.
• * 1.285

  Note you must place your Rule upon the highest part of the mettall at the breech of the Peece, coyning the Peece up or down▪ untill through the fight o•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the rule (be listed to the part or divisiō in your rule that answers that de∣gree you desire) you espie the Corno••ze or highest part of mettall at the Peeces mouth, and the marke, all 3. in a straight Lyne▪
• * 1.286

  Note, the like order is to bee observed in mounting any other Peece of Ordnance by an inch Rule, of what length soever ••••e be.
• * 1.287

  The manner of ••••a∣ming this Staffe is de∣scribed, pag. 129.
• * 1.288

  The best of a Morter-Peeces Randon is be∣tweene 50 and 45 de∣grees of the Quadrant. For what end Morter Peeces were invented▪ and of the things to bee considered in the true levelling of it, for the lesse way shee shootes▪ the higher must her mouth bee raised to some degree above the best of the Randon as is sufficient to reach the marke.
• * 1.289

  How to make a per∣fect Shot in a Morter Peece, proved by ex∣ample.
• * 1.290

  Note the due charge of a Morter Peece is 1/10 part of the weight of the shotte in pow∣der, shooting upon a∣ny Mount above 45 degrees, but with 1/2 parts shooting levell, or downwards.
• * 1.291

  Note your Peece must have the same proportionall charge of powder and shot, that it had at 52 de∣grees.
• * 1.292

  Generall Rules •• for the taking the heights by the right Shadow.
• * 1.293

  Note, in this rule the farthest stationis twice the length of the height of the Alti∣tude, adding the di∣stance from the groūd to your eye.
• * 1.294

  Note, the farthest sta∣tion is three times the length of the Alti∣tude, if you measure from the Base there∣of.
• * 1.295

  Note if the Scale of the Quadrant were divided into 100. or a 1000 divisions, by so much further from the thing to be measured, you may find out the height thereof▪
• * 1.296

  Divers Rules how to take the true distance from the platforme to any marke assigned by the helpe of the Qua∣drant.
• * 1.297

  Note, the higher the Staffe is, the further may you measure any distance by this Rule.
• * 1.298

  Euclid shewes this 33. pro•••••• Booke, and the fourth proposition, 6 Booke.
• * 1.299

  Note, you cannot take any far distance, unles you ascend some Tree or Tu••ret, the length thereof being knowne, must stand instead of your staffe.
• * 1.300

  The Table of the square and Cubique ••oot, is joyned to the Table of the seve∣rall weights of Bul∣lets, page 123.
• * 1.301

  The Demonstration of this proposition is grounded upon the se∣cond and fourth Pro∣position of 6. of Euclid.
• * 1.302

  The Demonstration of this Proposition, is grounded upon the 29 and 33 Proposition of the first of Euclid.
• * 1.303

  Note, the Trench is to bee made 7 foot in height, and 5 foot in bredth.
• * 1.304

  4. things that hinders the effectual working of a Mine.
• * 1.305

  View the third Figure of distances by the Ia∣cobs Staffe in the end of the discourse of Ar∣tillery.
• * 1.306

  The demonstration of this proposition, is grounded upon the 26 of the 1 of Euclid.
• * 1.307

  If the ground bee le∣vell, you are to Mine in, then at every 15 or 20 paces you may by the instrument know how much a∣bove or beneath the Line of levell you have err'd.
• * 1.308

  Foure principles each Souldier should groūd his worth on.
• * 1.309

  The obedient behavi∣our of the Turkes in their warres.
• * 1.310

  Sixe speciall vertues required in a Soul∣dier.
• * 1.311

  An Illustration of Authoritie, by the draughts of Pictures.
• * 1.312

  How Souldiers must be obedient to th••r Officers, bee they of never so low a degree.
• * 1.313

  Plato in lib. 1. de Le∣gib.
• * 1.314

  There may bee use made of the Treason, but the Traytor shall nere be trusted.
• * 1.315

  The duty of a Go∣vernour of a Garrison.
• * 1.316

  The office of the Maior of a Fort.
• * 1.317

  A Corporall is to or∣der his Watch by the burning of a peece of Match so many inches for an houre.
• * 1.318

  The Maior by the Governours comman∣dement is to see every Captaine exercise his company twice a∣weeke at least in the Summer time, and the Squadrons upon the guard in the Wint•••• every night.
• * 1.319

  In every Bulworke ought to be a Corps 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Guard, and over each Port, for the Soul∣diers to guard by night in.
• * 1.320

  The Mayor must see his store-house be fild with Ammunition and Victuals fit to entertaine a long Siege.
• * 1.321

  Note it is not above one or two Compa∣nies of a Regiment that guards in the out∣workes at one time.
• * 1.322

  Vnlesse some trees or bankes may safegard them.
• * 1.323

  Hist. Italy,
• * 1.324

  Comines lib. 1. Pag. 22.
• * 1.325

  Daniel 2. 28.
• * 1.326

  Comines.
• * 1.327

  Deut. 4. 2.
• * 1.328

  Ioshua 1. 7. and 7. 13.
• * 1.329

  Pro. 30. 6.
• * 1.330

  Revel. 22. 18.
• * 1.331

  Numb. 16. 3.
• * 1.332

  The bound him and cut off his eye-lids, and set him in a hol∣low tree upright, filled full of sharpe nayles, there continuing in horrible paine till hee dyed.
• * 1.333

  Numb. 10. 12.
• * 1.334

  Lactantius.
• * 1.335

  Virgil.
• * 1.336

  Tertul.
• * 1.337

  Rom. 13. 1, 2.
• * 1.338

  Proverb. 19. 12▪
• * 1.339

  Titvs 3. 1.
• * 1.340

  Astra regunt homines, Sed regit astra Deus.
• * 1.341

  Jo••••••ille▪ cap. 16.
• * 1.342

  Licurgus▪ his witty an∣swer.
• * 1.343

  De Bello Gallico, lib. 6.
• * 1.344

  1623.
• * 1.345

  Tacitus.
• * 1.346

  Strab. lib. 3. of the Venet.
• * 1.347

  Tacit. lib. 4. cap. 5.
• * 1.348

  Aristot. lib. 4. de anim. cap. 6.
• * 1.349

  The wonderfull loy∣altie and valour of Pro••es••l••us.
• * 1.350

  Heylin.
• * 1.351

  Heylin.
• * 1.352

  Knoll••s.
• * 1.353

  Xiphilinus.
• * 1.354

  Two things require∣able in a valiant Soul∣dier to make him fit to undergoe the grea∣test misery warre can reduce him unto.
• * 1.355

  The definition of griefe and sadnesse.
• * 1.356

  Three kindes of sad∣nesse which blemish the valour of a Soul∣dier.
• * 1.357

  Philip de Comines.
• * 1.358

  Treasury of time.
• * 1.359

  Strabo. lib. 7.
• * 1.360

  Pezelin Sl••id.
• * 1.361

  Heylin.
• * 1.362

  Vpon some occasions Souldiers ought not to misconster the forbea∣ring to joyne Battell, and take it as cowar∣dise.
• * 1.363

  A second reason, why a Generall may refuse Battell with∣out the imputation of a Coward.
• * 1.364

  The third reason why a Generall may refuse Battell without the imputation of a cow∣ard.
• * 1.365

  The first observation of an Army indued with valour.
• * 1.366

  Second observation.
• * 1.367

  Third observation:
• * 1.368

  The fourth simptome of valour in an Army.
• * 1.369

  The fift simptome of valour in an Army.
• * 1.370

  The sixth Simptome.
• * 1.371

  The seventh Simp∣tome.
• * 1.372

  The eight Simptome.
• * 1.373

  How valour may bee begotten and bred.
• * 1.374

  Ioshua 1. vers. 6. 7.
• * 1.375

  A safe argument to prove the lawfulnesse of duells.
• * 1.376

  Numb. 5. 26, 27.
• * 1.377

  The Combat is deni∣ed to a Christian in action, sufferance and right.
• * 1.378

  Miracles only per∣taine to the power of God.
• * 1.379

  Murther may happen by Combats.
• * 1.380

  The act of Combat killeth charity.
• * 1.381

  Naturall equity is for the conservation of mankind and combat is for his destruction.
• * 1.382

  The two maine pre∣cepts of naturall equi∣ty are broken by the act of Combat.
• * 1.383

  King Iames his obser∣vation upon Comb.
• * 1.384

  Pag. 2.
• * 1.385

  Pag. 3.
• * 1.386

  Ibidem.
• * 1.387

  Pag. 4.
• * 1.388

  Pag. 6.
• * 1.389

  Pag. 8.
• * 1.390

  Pag. 9.
• * 1.391

  Pag. 4••.
• * 1.392

  The distinguishing of abuses from whence quarrels arise.
• * 1.393

  Pag. 45.
• * 1.394

  The party offending is to be immediately committed.
• * 1.395

  The Lye, ranckt with the highest Verball wrongs.
• * 1.396

  Pag. 50.
• * 1.397

  pag. 52:
• * 1.398

  pag. 53.
• * 1.399

  pag. 54.
• * 1.400

  pag. 56.
• * 1.401

  pag. 57.
• * 1.402

  Ibidem.
• * 1.403

  pag. 67.
• * 1.404

  pag. 8••
• * 1.405

  pag. 86.
• * 1.406

  pag. 87.
• * 1.407

  〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.408

  pag. 88.
• * 1.409

  pag. 90.
• * 1.410

  pag. 93.
• * 1.411

  pag. 97.
• * 1.412

  pag. 98.
• * 1.413

  pag. 100.
• * 1.414

  Pag. 17▪
• * 1.415

  Pag. 113.
• * 1.416

  Pag. 114.
• * 1.417

  What orders the Go∣vernour gives him in charge, ••he is to let his Captaine understand of it.
• * 1.418

  If the Guard bee at a Port then the Serjant is to guard with his Holbert all the day with the Squadron, and many times all night in times of dan∣ger.
• * 1.419

  Ensigne Epps at the Battell of Flanders, &c.
• * 1.420

  If it bee in the darke, or night season.
• * 1.421

  Note, the Captaine is not to release any pri∣soner that is commit∣ted by any of higher authority, without their consent.
• * 1.422

  Quem 〈◊〉〈◊〉 oderunt quenquis{que} odit perisse experit,
• * 1.423

  Many times the Cap∣taines themselves are sent for to take the Word themselves, and the Orders, if they be of importance.
• * 1.424

  The Serjeant-Major is to draw the Bille••s from the Major Ge∣nerall, and the inferi∣our Officers to tak•• them from him.
• * 1.425

  He is to have a Cata∣logue of the just num∣ber of the Army, to∣gether with the true sortment and division of every weapon, and in his memory he must have the formes of all kind of Battells.
• * 1.426

  Some have held that the Earle Marshall i•• chiefest in the Gene∣ralls absence, and ought to have the principall command of the Armie.
• * 1.427

  In the Discourse of the marching of an Army you shall more fully reade how to dislodge a Campe by night.
• * 1.428

  The especiall Offi∣cers named for the private councell of Warre.
• * 1.429

  The three usuall words of command in time of Service.
• * 1.430

  Note the Musquetiers of the right Flanke are to make the Van.
• * 1.431

  Note that betweene each division in march there ought to be 12 foote distance, viz. 6 foote before the Office••, and 6 foote behind.
• * 1.432

  Note in march the Files must be at order and the Rankes at o∣pen order.
• * 1.433

  Note, in all the Po∣stures of a Musquet, the hand and foot must move at one in∣stant, for the better grace of the posture.
• * 1.434

  Note, the Musquet is rested when this Po∣sture is to be perform∣ed.
• * 1.435

  The Musquet being shouldred, it is to bee poised as I have shew∣ed you in the first Po∣sture here mentioned at Resting your Mus∣quet.
• * 1.436

  Note, after the Mus∣quet is setled on the shoulder, the Rest must hang almost per∣pendicular towards the ground.
• * 1.437

  Note, here they begin to make ready, which they may doe eyther standing or marching.
• * 1.438

  This Posture is as u∣sually done when the Musquet and Rest is joyned together.
• * 1.439

  Note you ought to take the Peece in such an even ballance, that the butt-end rests not against the ground.
• * 1.440

  Note the Souldiers must be placed in their distance for Motion sixe foote both in Ranke and File.
• * 1.441

  When your Souldiers begin any motion, let them; advance their Armes when they come to a stand, and have performed their motion, let them or∣der their Armes.
• * 1.442

  As for the causing your Souldiers to face to the right and left, or to the right and left inward, or to the right angle or left an∣gle, or to the foure Angles, I leave it to the discretion of the Commander, either to doe it, or leave it, and the like for the facing of halfe files.
• * 1.443

  It is nccessary for Souldiers to move 10. or 12. paces upon eve∣ry motion of facing, whether entire or Di∣visionall.
• * 1.444

  Of the several distan∣ces you shall reade be∣fore.
• * 1.445

  The manner of doub∣ling of Files descri∣bed.
• * 1.446

  The manner of doub∣ling of Rankes by the Bringers-up, descri∣bed.
• * 1.447

  The manner of dou∣bling of Files out∣ward and inward de∣scribed.
• * 1.448

  Of doubling Files to the right and left in∣wards.
• * 1.449

  The manner of dou∣bling of Rankes by halfe Files described.
• * 1.450

  The manner of doub∣ling the Reere by the Front halfe-files des∣cribed.
• * 1.451

  The manner of doub∣bling the Reare, by Countermarch descri∣bed.
• * 1.452

  It is at the discretion of the Commander, to face the Companie which way he plea∣seth, eyther for mo∣tion or Reducement.
• * 1.453

  The manner of doub∣bling Flankes by way of Countermarch, des∣cribed.
• * 1.454

  The manner of doub∣ling Halfe-files to the Right intire, to ac∣commodate the doub∣ling of Halfe-rankes described.
• * 1.455

  How the Halfe-ranke of the Right, are to double the left Flank, is described.
• * 1.456

  The halfe files having doubled the Front to the Right intire, cau∣seth them to be 40 in Ranke or Brest, be∣fore they were but 20.
• * 1.457

  The difference be∣tweene intire and di∣visionall doublings, and of doubling halfe files intire, described.
• * 1.458

  The manner of doub∣ling the Front inward intire described.
• * 1.459

  The manner of doub∣ling the Frong with halfe files by division, described.
• * 1.460

  The manner of doub∣ling the Reare with halfe-files by division, described.
• * 1.461

  The manner of doub∣ling the Reare intire, by the Front halfe-files, described.
• * 1.462

  The manner of dou∣bling by half Ranks intire described.
• * 1.463

  The manner of dou∣bling Flanks by division described.
• * 1.464

  The manner of doubling Ranks intire described.
• * 1.465

  The manner of dou∣bling Files intire advancing, described.
• * 1.466

  The manner of Files doubling their depth described.
• * 1.467

  Inversion.
• * 1.468

  This sort of inversion is called filing on sequ••nce.
• * 1.469

  Three kinds of Coūtermarches, viz. the Chorean, Lacedae∣monian, and Macedo∣nian, described by Ae∣l••an in his Tac. pag.•• 125 cap. 28.
• * 1.470

  The distance for Countermarch is 6 foot in Rank & File.
• * 1.471

  Note, when there is a Countermarch com∣manded without any other addition, then it is alwaies intended a Chorean Counter∣march.
• * 1.472

  Of countermarching to lose ground.
• * 1.473

  The Macedonian Countermarch to gain ground.
• * 1.474

  Of countermarching Ranks to maintain ground.
• * 1.475

  Of countermarching Ranks to lose ground.
• * 1.476

  Note that for coun∣termarching Front & Reor into the midst, the Front half-Files are ever to turn off towards the right-hand, & the ••ear half-File to the 〈◊〉〈◊〉; which being truly ••bserved, they 〈…〉〈…〉 even in the midst of the Battell, otherwise not.
• * 1.477

  Of bringing Front and Rear together in the midst of the Bat∣tel & Countermarch.
• * 1.478

  Of countermarching to make a large In∣tervall between the first and last Ranks.
• * 1.479

  Of Countermarch∣ing to take the ground before the Flank.
• * 1.480

  Of Counter-march∣ing to take the ground on the outside of the Flankes, and to di∣rect their aspects in∣wards.
• * 1.481

  Of taking the ground on the outside of the flankes, not altering the aspect.
• * 1.482

  Of enterchanging ground by the Flanks, and bringing the in∣most Files of Pikes to become the outmost Rankes.
• * 1.483

  Of wheeling Angu∣ler.
• * 1.484

  Of wheeling on the Center.
• * 1.485

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 wheeling the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 inwards to the 〈…〉〈…〉
• * 1.486

  Of bringing Flankes into the Front of the Battell.
• * 1.487

  Of wheeling the Reere into the midst of the Battell.
• * 1.488

  Note that if the length of your Battell be double the number of the depth as is shewed in this mo••••r, then this wheeling of Front and Reere into the right or left flanke doth quadruple their forme in depth If the number be equall in length and depth then by this wheeling they will but double. If the number of your length exceeds more then double your depth; by so much the more, will the extention of the depth be beyond qua∣druple.
• * 1.489

  Of wheeling the left flanke into the midst of the Battell.
• * 1.490

  Of Wheeling Front and Reere into the midst of the Battell.
• * 1.491

  Of wheeling the Flankes into the midst of the Battell.
• * 1.492

  The maner and use of firing described.
• * 1.493

  That Generall seekes his owne ruine, if he assailes an Armie up∣on all qua••ters unlesse his power be foure∣times more then his adversaries.
• * 1.494

  Note the Shot are to prime and charge as they troope downe in∣to the Reere to place themselves to the Flankes of the Pikes.
• * 1.495

  The shot are to give fire even with the front of Pikes, when the enemies battell drawes neere.
• * 1.496

  First blowing your cole, set out your left Leg, next opening your Pan, set forth your right Leg, lastly presenting, set forth your left Leg againe. At the Battells joy∣ning, the shot are to give fire even with the halfe Files of Pikes. When the battell re∣treits, then the shot ought neither to ad∣vance nor retreite but every ranke is to give fire upon the same ground he stands on, & so wheele off that the next may doe the like.
• * 1.497

  The severall wayes of firing belonging to the Demie-hearse Battell described.
• * 1.498

  The severall wayes of giving fire by Intro∣duction discribed.
• * 1.499

  The severall wayes of bring, belonging to the Diamond forme of Battell described.
• * 1.500

  The severall wayes of firing belonging to the semicircular forme of Battell described.
• * 1.501

  Of extraduction, the severall uses firings & reducements descri∣bed.
• * 1.502

  A second way of gi∣ving fire by extra∣duction described.
• * 1.503

  The severall wayes of firings belonging to a broad fronted battell described.
• * 1.504

  In giving fire to the Reere; when you blow your Cole you must step forwards with your right foote, opning your Pan, step∣ping forwards with your lest foote; Pre∣sent to the Reere step∣ping forwards with your right foot ••
• * 1.505

  A Second way of gi∣ving fire in the Reere described.
• * 1.506

  The second manner of giving fire to the Flanke described.
• * 1.507

  A third way of giving fire in Flanke de∣scribed.
• * 1.508

  The fourth way of giving fire in Flanke described.
• * 1.509

  The fifth way of fi∣ring in Flanke, and placing the shot in the midst of the battell of Pikes, described.
• * 1.510

  A second way of firing in Front and Reere described.
• * 1.511

  Of firing to both Flankes Marching.
• * 1.512

  Of firing to both Flankes standing.
• * 1.513

  The word of com∣mand and directi∣on that produceth this triple firing is, Halfe Rankes of the left, double your right flanke by di∣vision.
• * 1.514

  In omni praelio non iam multitudo & virtus in∣docta quam ars, & ex∣ercitium; solent prestare victoriam, Veg. lib. 1.
• * 1.515

  Montanis locis & impe∣ditis; quasi nullus equo∣rum usus: ex quo intelli∣gitur magis necessarios ped••tes; qui possunt ubique prodesse, Veg. lib. 2.
• * 1.516

  Vbi bona & composita, millitia, pedes prevalet: apud rudes, aut Barba∣ros contra, Lip. pol. l. 5.
• * 1.517

  Ab equite & pedite, omne Bellicis negotijs proflu••t robur, & sine quibus quamvis egregia fint illa consillia; sunt tamen invalida, Tacit. lib. 1.
• * 1.518

  Neque quisquam ex∣praeciaris pe••sis, usquam pedes incedere sua qui∣••em sponte videbatur. Xeno. Cy. lib 4.
• * 1.519

  In equite apud antiquos omne Rubur: quia ratio ordinandi militiam pe∣destrem illis in••••gnita suit Arist. pol. lib. 4.
• * 1.520

  The Office of the Ge∣nerall of the horse.
• * 1.521

  Quantò quis magis infi∣ciatur vitium suum; tantò magis in ipsum penetrat, & quanto magis intro fugies; tantò magis in caupona e••is; Pl••t prop. vic.
• * 1.522

  Austeri duces, suis fa∣cies, hostibus sunt utiles, Apipan.
• * 1.523

  Corbuloni plsus molis adversus ignaviam mi∣litum quam contrà per∣fidiam hostium erat. Tacit. An. 13.
• * 1.524

  — Gaudet tamen esse timo••i: Tam magno po••••lu, & se net ••allet omari, Lucan. lib. 3. de Civ
• * 1.525

  Amil. tibus, imperator potiùs quam hostis, me∣tui debet, quem admo∣dum homines fine nervis ambulare nequeunt; ita nec bellum usquam pro∣gre••i sine pecunia, Lip. pol lib. 5.
• * 1.526

  Exereitus labore profi∣cit; labore consenescit. Veget.
• * 1.527

  Consuetudine levior labor fit. Livi. lib. 25.
• * 1.528

  〈…〉〈…〉 tantum ad notat•• sed etiam picta habeat: ut non so∣lum 〈◊〉〈◊〉 mentis, ve∣rum aspectu oculorum 〈◊〉〈◊〉 profecturis, 〈…〉〈…〉 i••••doneum, eugat, Veg l▪ 2.
• * 1.529

  Fortuna levis est, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 reposcit quae dedit, Senec. Sent.
• * 1.530

  Non enim in gradibus quibus ad summum per∣ventum est, itur: Saepe inter fortunam maxi∣mam & ultimam nihil interest. Sen de Ben.
• * 1.531

  Nihil tam leve est quod non magnam inter••••••m faciat res Momentum. Liv. l. 25.
• * 1.532

  V•• p••tit accid••st, est soūventes foys ce com∣mencement des grand∣maux. Am. Pleut. Agis.
• * 1.533

  Nocturni terrores Cle∣archt exercitum invase∣runt: At ille precepit, si noctis tumultus 〈◊〉〈◊〉: nemo rectus consur∣geret; hoc preceptum docuit 〈◊〉〈◊〉 contem nere nocturuam terro∣rem, Polyoen Strat▪ lib. 2.
• * 1.534

  Tuum & hostium exercitum, lacorum si∣tum; naturam regi••••is nos••e. Livi. lib. 2••.
• * 1.535

  Miles bee tris 〈◊〉〈◊〉 deb••t: Corpus, ut quam validis••••••••m & perni∣ciss••m••m habeat, a••ma ap••a animum paratum ad Sub••ta imperia. Ce∣terad••is immortalibus & 〈◊〉〈◊〉 curae esse. Livi. l. 44.
• * 1.536

  If any Horse be Iadish and apt to st••••ke his fellowes or strangers that shall come neere him: he is to have a little Bell plast on his Crooper behind; that such as know not his qualities may be aware of his Iadish trickes.
• * 1.537

  Temporl aptari decet, Senec. Med.
• * 1.538

  Vl••eriora Mirari, prae∣sentia sequi, Tac. hist. 4.
• * 1.539

  Consilium nobis resque l••cusque dabunt. Ovid.
• * 1.540

  Consilia nova pro novis rebut, aut ubi priora in prospera. Cip. Ao. lib. 3.
• * 1.541

  Pauc••s vi••os fort••s na∣tura procreat bona institutione plures red∣dit industria. Veg l. 3.
• * 1.542

  Exercitus predator, & ipsa preda hostium. Salust Iug.
• * 1.543

  Eventus preliorum inter initia contra illes fuit, quibus victoria debebatur veg. l. 3.
• * 1.544

  Nam necesse est, ad fu∣gam pa••at•• sint, qui du∣cem suum sentiant de∣sperare. Veg. l. 3.
• * 1.545

  In the Roman coynes the picture of Mars was stamped, with a lavelin in one hand and a scourge in the other: and the portrai∣ture of a cocke by him; intimating his prowesse his command and his vigilancy: Godwin: Rom. antiqui.
• * 1.546

  Quem m•• tuunt oderunt; quem quisque ••dit, periisse expetit.
• * 1.547

  Multa sunt honesta factu, quae sunt turpia visa.
• * 1.548

  Inquibusdam notarum peritia calculandi com∣putandique usus ex••g••∣tur Veg. l. 2.
• * 1.549

  The office of the Quar∣termasters to a Regi∣ment.
• * 1.550

  The office of a Cor∣porall.
• * 1.551

  The office of the Trumpets.
• * 1.552

  The office of the Fiscall.
• * 1.553

  The Office of the Provost Marshall.
• * 1.554

  Is demum vir est, cu••us animum nec prospera statu suo efferant nec adversa infringant Liv. l. 45.
• * 1.555

  Si nihil possis sperare desperes nihil. Senec.
• * 1.556

  Humilis & parcus ani∣mus prosperitatibus ef∣fertur; adversit autem rebus deprimitur, Epicar.
• * 1.557

  The art of Riding horses is most noble, as appeares by Virgil in his Encidor, where he termes King Picus for his excellency and greater praise, a brea∣ker or rider of horses.
• * 1.558

  Likewise the Poets faine that Bellerophon. the son of King Glaucus rode upon a Pegasus when hee slew the Monster Chi••era.
• * 1.559

  You may take notice that a horse is a very sensible creature, and apt to learne and con∣ceive of any words, or active demonstrati∣ons, as appeares by the French mans horse, that he had taught to fetch and carry like a Spa∣nell; at his command he would lie downe, or rise up and kicke, or st••mpe as many sto••••ps as he pleased to com∣mand him with divers other things.
• * 1.560

  Vse of the voyce.
• * 1.561

  There are five things observeable in the use of the rodde or riding wand; first when the horse is fitted to use a wand; secondly, how to take it for skaring; thirdly, how to beare it at all times: fourth∣ly, the use and ends it s••••ves for; lastly, how and when to use it as a helpe correction or cheerishing to your horse.
• * 1.562

  When your horse is managed, you must learne how to handle your sword, Harque∣buz or Pistoll.
• * 1.563

  The Rodde is to be borne in the right hand, with the point right up to your right shoulder when you trot your horse.
• * 1.564

  Note the left hand is onely to be held up so high to rest your Har∣quebuz or Carbine, upon when you dis∣charge, and not other∣wise.
• * 1.565

  Vse of the Caulfe.
• * 1.566

  You must not forget to spurre behinde the gi••ts towards the flanke.
• * 1.567

  Th••se actions of the heeles are performed with out spurres, if the horse will not indure the spurre.
• * 1.568

  The use of the Stirrop.
• * 1.569

  Vse of the Spurre.
• * 1.570

  You may stuffe old bootes with sand, and put spurres on them, fastening them in the saddle, the ••orse run∣ning about with them in the pasture, will make him endure the spurre.
• * 1.571

  Note you are to teach your horse onely in the morning before hee hath provender, not failing to ride him every day once, untill he be perfect, after∣wards twice a weeke will be sufficient.
• * 1.572

  How to ••read out the Ring.
• * 1.573

  Note the same Ring you beg••n with all, the same you must end with, whereby there is two turnes difference of that hand you begin on.
• * 1.574

  At the first riding of the Ring the horse must be exercised in it eight dayes together.
• * 1.575

  The number of 22. Gryson saith, makes five large turnes and a halfe; foure goin•• about, makes but one large turne.
• * 1.576

  Note it is dangerous to shift often your Rings, except necessitie con∣straine you.
• * 1.577

  Note you may have a fellow stand at the place of stop, with a sticke to Rap him on the knees, which will make him tread backe.
• * 1.578

  How to teach a horse to rise before.
• * 1.579

  Of the narrow turnes there are three kinds described.
• * 1.580

  Divers considerations in turnes.
• * 1.581

  Remember alwayes to begin your Ring on your right hand, and likewise on the same hand to end it.
• * 1.582

  How your horse should order his feete at his first turning to either hand.
• * 1.583

  Another fashioned Ring to cause a horse to turne perfectly as well upon one hand as upon another.
• * 1.584

  In this second figure sixe goings about makes but a large turne, the reasons of it are described.
• * 1.585

  The last Ring fully described.
• * 1.586

  An observation how to make a horse turne to what hand you please.
• * 1.587

  How to make a horse turne upon what hand you please.
• * 1.588

  Forget not to helpe him with the sound of your tongue.
• * 1.589

  Three things observa∣bl•• in the word Ma∣nage.
• * 1.590

  A very strong Horse requires the mannage with the whole rest, and a horse of indiffe∣rent strength the halfe, and the weake horse the manage without rest.
• * 1.591

  A great horse must be ridde the shortest Ca∣••eire, and a midling slight horse the lon∣ger although not much.
• * 1.592

  Three things of note in a Carriere, first that the horse gathers roundly, secondly that he runnes swiftly, thirdly that he stops easily.
• * 1.593

  When your Horse can runne the Cariere doe not exercise him in it above once in two moneths at most.
• * 1.594

  An excellent way to 〈…〉〈…〉 to fit him for a single fight with the en••mie.
• * 1.595

  The excellent proper∣ties of a horse, well 〈◊〉〈◊〉, described.
• * 1.596

  The meanes to com∣pell a horse to rayne well described.
• * 1.597

  A devise to make a wresty Horse goe forwards.
• * 1.598

  How to make a shie horse gentle.
• * 1.599

  How to make a horse hardy and bold in the warres.
• * 1.600

  By trotting the Ring you may embolden your Horse.
• * 1.601

  The Dragoones are the fittest to give the on set because they doe their execution at a further distance.
• * 1.602

  The Firelocke is ••••∣rest to give fire, and not so apt to be out of 〈◊〉〈◊〉; besides they will indure Sp••nd 24. houres together with∣out ••urting them.
• * 1.603

  Description of a Ranke.
• * 1.604

  Description of a File.
• * 1.605

  Twen∣tie in length.
• * 1.606

  That the Troope may move orderly, and keepe their distances truely; let the whole Troope move all at an in∣stant, (viz.) when the Front moves, then the Reare to be ready, so shall they bee seldome found to erre.
• * 1.607

  In Marching or Trooping through a Towne, forget not to have your Peeces spand, and holding them in your hand, with their mouthes up∣wards, and the butt end resting upon your thigh.
• * 1.608

  The Figure of the foure Divisions drawne into Battal∣lia.
• * 1.609

  The distinctions of the sounds of Trumpet described.
• * 1.610

  The proportion of powder usually requi∣red for a true charge of any peece, is almost halfe the weight in powder of the bullet.
• * 1.611

  Some will not have a Cuirassiere to give fire untill he hath plac't his Pistoll under his enemies armour.
• * 1.612

  You may place the Pum••ell of your Sword upon your right thigh and directing it with your right hand to the place you intend to hit, viz. the belly or arme pits or his throat.
• * 1.613

  They must be taught to be excellent marks-men, for the manner of handling them, the directions of the Pi∣stoll may serve for in∣struction.
• * 1.614

  Edmunds observation upon C••sars Com.
• * 1.615

  In those Kingdomes that are fortified with strong Garrison Townes, there shall neede no such arm••, for those townes are ready to performe the same Office that this Armie should doe.
• * 1.616

  The forme of their standing in Battalia ready for exercise. To cause them to face to the right hand is performed by commanding.
• * 1.617

  To the right hand, This motion is per∣formed by turning (all at once, and the same time) to the right hand. Thus the Front is where the right Flanke was. To reduce them to their first forme the word of command is
• * 1.618

  This is performed by turning to the left hand, from thence to face them to the left you command,
• * 1.619

  This is performed by turning towards the left, from hence they are to be reduced by commanding;
• * 1.620

  Which they doe by turning to the right. Now to face them to the Reare, though it be most proper to doe it by the right hand, yet for the more ready way you must com∣mand.
• * 1.621

  This is performed by tur∣ning towards the left hand, untill their faces Front to that place which was before the Reare. To reduce them to their first forme the word of Command is,
• * 1.622

  Every other ranke pas∣seth into the rank before them upon the right hand of his leader. To reduce them, the word of Command is
• * 1.623

  Which is best done by causing those rankes which doubled to stand, and those which stood to advance.
• * 1.624

  This motion differs nothing from the former onely where as before they doubled to the right now they double to the left hand of their Lea∣ders. To reduce them, the word of Command is
• * 1.625

  To performe this, the second File passeth into the first, every man be∣hinde his sideman, this must be done throughout the Company at one in∣stant, the o are the places where the Files that re∣moved did stand. They are reduced by commanding.
• * 1.626

  The difference be∣tweene this and the former motion is the difference of hands, so that those Files that before moved are now to stand; view the Figure. They are reduc't by commanding:
• * 1.627

  To performe this the middlemen dou∣ble the first ranke on the right hand; the other two Rankes double the two fol∣owing Rankes, as is manifest in the Fi∣gure. To reduce them the word is,
• * 1.628

  But in regard of the combersomnesse of the horse in tur∣ning, to cause them that double, to stand, and the first division to advance.
• * 1.629

  This motion onely differs from the for∣mer in the hand. The reducing of them is shewed in the former motion.
• * 1.630

  In this motion the last Ranke passeth into the first, and so successively, as the Figure demonstrates it. They are reduced by saying.
• * 1.631

  For the conveni∣ent turning of the horse, it is best to be∣ginne with the left hand. This Figure is after the Corean manner. There are divers o∣ther formes of coun∣termarching which are to be performed as well by Rankes as by Files, as the La∣cedemonian, and Ma∣cedonian; but in re∣gard of brevity they are here omitted.
• * 1.632

  All the Files are to close from the right and left, towards the middle of the body. Note when you in∣tend to wheele, your Files must first be closed and then the Rankes; and when you command them to open againe, the Rankes are first, and then the Files.
• * 1.633

  To performe this all the Rankes move forwards, saving the first, which standeth, the second ranke be∣ing advanc't up to its distance stands, so all the rest. When the horses are to wheele, the Commander must take a reasonable Compasse, for they cannot possibly doe it in such exact man∣ner as the foote, for they must be allow∣ed a farre greater space, in regard of the combersomenes of the horse.
• * 1.634

  To performe this motion, all the body moveth to the left, upon the left file lea∣der as the Center. The wheeling to the left hand is the readiest way, un∣lesse some impe∣diments hinders, wherefore that is first nominated al∣though it bee more proper to begin with the right, the whee∣ling to the right is for brevity omitted. To reduce them wheele to the right hand as you were.
• * 1.635

  There is also whee∣ling to the right or left about, wheeling wings into the front, they are here omited for brevitie. To reduce them in∣to their first order; first the Rankes are to be opened, then the files. In opening the rankes, the best way is to doe it by ope∣ning forwards.
• * 1.636

  It was attributed to Iason.
• * 1.637

  Foure kindes of Rhombes •• described.
• * 1.638

  Euelide defineth a Rhombe to be a square Figure, that hath the sides equall, but the Angles not right, viz. the foure-sides of the square are of one and the same length, but the points which make the Angles, are two of them, stretched out in length and be∣come more sharpe; the other two are more blunt than a Tetra∣gonall square.
• * 1.639

  A Rhombe neither filing, nor ranking.
• * 1.640

  The Thess alonians used this forme of imbattel∣ling their Troopes.
• * 1.641

  The termes used by Commanders in for∣mer ages as P••li. l. 4. 217.
• * 1.642

  A Rhombe ranking but not filing.
• * 1.643

  Leo Chap. 5. Sect. 3. and Cap. 6. Sect. 39.
• * 1.644

  Leo Cap 7. Sect. 81▪ Cap. 14. Sect. 70.
• * 1.645

  Leo Cap, 14. Sect. 108▪ 109.
• * 1.646

  Plutarch in Li••urgo.
• * 1.647

  Leo Cap. 12. Sect. 4••.
• * 1.648

  Their horse Troopes charged the Enemy in Phalang, and not by rankes as we doe, Leo ibidem, reade Bingham upon Ali••ns Tacticks, pag. 106.
• * 1.649

  Caesar against Pompey did the like, and E••a∣••mondas against the Lacedemonians.
• * 1.650

  So••e Generalls have 〈…〉〈…〉 range 〈…〉〈…〉 second 〈…〉〈…〉 by a large 〈…〉〈…〉 ••ront 〈…〉〈…〉, but 〈…〉〈…〉 Flank••; 〈…〉〈…〉 battell to 〈…〉〈…〉 In••an••ry.
• * 1.651

  Not to charge the ene∣mies foote Troopes with your horse, untill you have put their horse to a retreate or routed them, unlesse a great advantage be of∣fred.
• * 1.652

  The convenient time of advantage for the Cavalry to charge foot Troopes.
• * 1.653

  How to charge the Enemies foote, being provided for your as∣sault.
• * 1.654

  Not to charge the ene∣my upon disadvanta∣ges.
• * 1.655

  How to take an ad∣vantage of the Enemy in fight severall wayes.
• * 1.656

  The manner of the Horse Troopes giving fire, and falling off.
• * 1.657

  The great advantage a few Troopes of horse may have against an Enemie in his quar∣ters upon an onslaught.
• * 1.658

  〈◊〉〈◊〉 use of Musque∣•••••••• amongst Horse 〈…〉〈…〉 upon an on∣sl••ught.
• * 1.659

  Some have put their shirts over their armes; or handker∣chief••s in their head-peeces; or glu••d white paper upon their breasts and backes.
• * 1.660

  You must cause the fee∣ting of ••our Horse to be defaced at the place where you left the wa••, if it be dusty, by draw∣ing of Bowes.
• * 1.661

  The order of la••ing of ambuscadoes to surprise the Enemie.
• * 1.662

  You must search all suspected places neere your ambush, least the Enemie should have layed one before you.
• * 1.663

  The Souldiers must not know that any of your Troopes are to follow them, least any of them should be ta∣ken prisoner, should re∣veale the designe.
• * 1.664

  The foote must take heede they be not dis∣covered untill the E∣nemie be come up to them.
• * 1.665

  How to charge an Ene∣mie retreating.
• * 1.666

  It is dangerous to en∣gage a whole Troope at once because if they be once disordered there is no helpe but confusion.
• * 1.667

  Note the Battalias which are plac'd be∣••ind the shot, consist but of 36. horse in each and the shot that line the horse con∣sist of 60. after this proportion a greater number may be orde∣red.
• * 1.668

  Lib. 1. Pag. ••0.
• * 1.669

  Lib. 5. pag. 83. & 85.
• * 1.670

  Lib. 4. Histor. Cae∣sarum.
• * 1.671

  Invita August. sub finem.
• * 1.672

  Lib. 2. ver••r narrat. ubi nihil veri contin.
• * 1.673

  In Sim•• o••io.
• * 1.674

  In Conviv. C••s.
• * 1.675

  The Petard to blow open Ports and Port∣cullisses.
• * 1.676

  Note the end of the Carriage of the Pe∣tard, is to have a Bal∣lance, that it may lye even upō the wheeles, and being put home to the Port, the hindmost end is to bee strongly barricadoed, that it may not reverse.
• * 1.677

  The knob or Snoute is in stead of a handle, to put the Granado in the Morter, the screw-hole is to goe next the Powder for the better firing it.
• * 1.678

  Note some Granadoes are made of Canvasse with divers Pistoll-bar∣rels charged with powder and bullets, and covered over.
• * 1.679

  There are of these kindes made of Earth and Glasse.
• * 1.680

  Note, that▪ Flaxe or Towe Hurds is best to dip into the Com∣position, and to winde about the Hoope or Rope ends.
• * 1.681

  This Frame may bee made onely with the Barrels of Musquets, without stockes to them the manner how to order them any in∣genuous wit will con∣ceive of.
• * 1.682

  The hole must be of a Mortice wimbles Bo••e.
• * 1.683

  Some Palliza∣does have two Pikes right forwards, and two slenting forward on each side.
• * 1.684

  Many times some of these Gabions are sixe foot Diameter.
• * 1.685

  These small Baskets are used to carry up earth to the toppe of a worke upon Souldi∣ers shoulders.